HARVARD ‘UNIVERSITY.

LIBRARY

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

bd

pea. MS = AZ \401-

rey i,
of ipa Gate
"A ee

ros Sait
icant >

My
pin he

rm HS

i ma

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCIETY

OF

EDINBURGH.

FOR THE PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER
BRANCHES OF NATURAL HISTORY.

VOE. XVI.

1904-1906.

| JT EDINBURGH:
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, AND PUBLISHED AT
THEIR ROOMS, 1 INDIA BUILDINGS.

MDCCCCVI,

in

ni)

U4

5 A
MY

d Le Ay SE PY DOM
Vh (LRT ALLE rT LAA ee BvEy US Coal Aa! ve es | ‘
BAAIEPTITE fy LAL i HEN E aN fep ;

PL Ae ek

ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCIETY.

Instituted 1771. Incorporated by Royal Charter 1778.

Council 1905-1906.

PRESIDENT.
WiiiiaAMmM Evans, F.F.A., F.R.S.E.

VICE-PRESIDENTS.

Ee traguarr, M.D. LL Deas.
W. Eacre Criarke, F.L.S., F.R.S.E.
Professor GRAHAM Kerr, M.A., F.R.S.E.

SECRETARY.
O. CHarnock BRADLEY, M.B., D.Sc., F.R.S.E.

ASSISTANT-SECRETARY.
J. H. AsHwortuH, D.Sc.

TREASURER.
W. A. MippLeTon, C.A.

IIBRARIAN.
T. N. Jounston, M.B., C.M., F.R.S.E.

COUNCILLORS.

GrrRaLD R. Leicuton, M.D., F.R.S.E.

Professor J. Cossak Ewart, M.D., F.R.S.

W. S. Brucs, F.R.S.G.S., F.R.S.E.

D. Warterston, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.S.E., F.R.S.E.
F. H. A. MarsHatt, B.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E.
Percy H. Grimsuaw, F.E.S.

Matcorm Lavurig, B.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., F.R.S.E.
Sir T. D. Grpson CARMICHAEL, Bart.

Professor T. Hupson Brarg, B.A., B.Sc., M.I.C.E.
R. C. Mossman, F.R.Met.8., F.R.S.E.

EK. B. Jamtrson, M.B., Ch.B.

iN. Peace; UL: D.,. FS.

A

PMA. eT Ae

hn ry nae Wits iA ns ha ae Peay, ive 9

‘ ce ©, & Cy 7% 4
An AUrh oh Rd) SAU

x a eres

UE A Gt OS itm lana

yA ee YP eh Blip he

ee Bt
PERO Be

{ A At ~~
~ | 6) Tan n
sry : foe 4 ~

PROCEEDINGS - x
oe |

OF THE

Le | . eT eed Ace: |
ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCLETY

PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHES OF
- NATURAL HISTORY. |

SESSION 1904-1905.

No. 1. ROL AVES Seis 5. Paons bo4,

CONTENTS.

Morphological Variations in Vipera berus, Size and Scaling. ¢ By.

GeraLtp Leicuton, -M.D., F.R. S.E.,

On the Tr apezium (os Ma eign tale Maus) oe the Horse. By O, CHARNOCK
BRADLEY, MB 5-3, R. S.E., 2 - ee OF Gs ek

Scotia Collections. —Note on the Gonostyles of tw 0. Anta pectic SUIS
By. Professor dre ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A. [Plate ier é

Note on Limaz tenellus (Miill.), with Hehibiaen of Living Examples from
the “‘ Forth” Area.: By Wittiam Evans, F.R.S.E.,°)~* s

: "EDINBURGH: MS FARLANE & ERSKINE.
7 DECEMBER 1904,

PAGE

19

22

PRC Or Aa i

. Part 1 (1854-56), out of print,
Part 2 (1856-58), owt of prant,
. Part 1 (1858-61), owt of print,
Part 2 (1861-62), out of print,
Part 1 (1862-63), owt of print,
Part 2 (1863-64), out of print,
Part 3 (1864-65), out of print,
Part 4 (1865-66), out of print,

Vol.) Wa

Title

Wile Vad:
Do.

Vol2 VIL,

Volk =X.

iol. ex:

Do.

Vol. XII.

Do.

Viol XT,

Do.

Vol. - XV.

Do.

Vol, XVI.

Part 1 (1874-75), out of print,
Part 2 (1875-76), out of print,
Part 3 (1876-78), out of print,

Part 1 (1878-79),
Part 2 (1879-80),
(1880-81),

and Index of this Vol. ae
with Part 1, Vol. VII.

Part 1 (1881-82),
Part 2 (1882-83),

Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print,

Part 2 (1884-85),
Part 1 (1885-86),
Part 2 (1886-87),
Part 3 (1887-88),
Part 1 (1888-89),
Part 2 (1889-90),
Part 1 (1890-91),
Part 2 (1891-92),
Part 1 (1892-93),
Part 2 (1893-94),
Part 1 (1894-95),
Part 2 (1895-96),
Part 3 (1896-97),
Part 1 (1897-98),
Part 2 (1898-99),
Part 3 (1899-1900),
Part 4 (1900-1901),
Part 1 (1901-1902),
Part 2 (1902-1904),
No. 1 (Pages 1-24),

To the Fellows.

3/6
5/

3/6
7/6
7/6

A/
2/6
7/6
7/6
10/
3/6
4/6
5/
10/
5/
5/
5
12/6
4/6
5/
6)
5/
5/
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
y

The following may also be had of the Librarian:

Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL,

Do. do.

Vol Wail. Pars 1,

“PROCHKEDINGS.”

10) 1716

a } 15/
5/
5/
5/
5/

20/

To the Public.

B/
7/6
5/

10/

10/

5/
3/6
10/
10/
12/6
5/
6/
7
12/6
6/6
6/6

2/
1)

Forms of Application for Fellowshiv may be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee,
Annual Subscription,

10/6
12/6

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCIETY.
SESSION CXXXIV.

I. Morphological Variations in Vipera berus. Size and
Scaling. By GeraLp LeicuTon, M.D., F.R.S.E.

(Received 10th October 1904 ; read 24th October 1904.)

It is an axiom in zoological classification that morpho-
logical characters alone are to be taken into consideration,
and in the classification of serpents the characters utilised
for this purpose are the number and arrangement of the scales
of the body. By this means alone are specific characters
determined. It matters not what colour the reptile may
be, apparently even it is of no consequence if the colour is
constant in the two sexes, even the actual size to which the
reptile grows is thrust on one side as of no importance,
provided only that the scaling arrangements conform to the
type laid down as specific. A more artificial and un-
naturally restricted way of looking at an animal could hardly
be imagined. But nature does not trouble herself much
about specific characters, she leaves that to the morphologists.
The production of hard and fast lines by which species can
be separated, is not the object of natural life, but rather that
animals should vary and develop along those lines which
best enable them to meet the conditions under which they
have to exist. Those which do not thus vary are unhesitat-
ingly crushed out of existence. Hence, of course, such a
hard and fast line as is laid down for species of serpents to
conform to, must be honoured as much in the breach as in

VOL. XVI. A

2 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

the observance, and so we find that in a series of adders
hardly two can be found which are what is called “typical”
in their specific scaling arrangements. And so it comes to
pass that there is a variety of snake in these Isles which does
not grow to the size of the average adder, is of the same
colour in the two sexes, and is very limited in its distribu-
tion, but which, because its scales happen to be arranged in
the way authorities have decided is that of the adder, is
likewise classed as Vipera berus. I refer to the small red
viper. Even in its temper and disposition this snake is
unlike the adder, a fact with which country folks, where the
red viper occurs, are quite familiar with, but which system-
atists consider of no importance, if they are aware of it.
Anyone who has seen specimens of the two reptiles together,
is strongly tempted to think that those who are responsible
for classing them as the same species never had a similar
opportunity. But their scales are similarly arranged; that
is quite sufficient.

During the time I have been working on this subject,
I have obtained several specimens of the small red viper,
which are now in the University Zoology Museum, where
the two reptiles can be compared. In the last five years I
have taken or examined about five hundred British adders,
but I have only seen four of these red vipers, a fact which
in itself is strongly against them being of the same species.
Their very rarity is the difficulty in investigating them ; they
have not been observed with their young, nor have they
been known to pair with the common adder. So, as they
conform to the adder scaling, adders they must be under
present arrangements. What follows will, I think, show
how extremely variable this scaling is, and to what extent
its limits have to be stretched to include all adders within
its range.

G. A. Boulenger, the distinguished ophiologist of the
British Museum, is the only person who has paid much
attention to the variations of the adder in Great Britain.
He has laid down the limits of scaling recorded, in the
following paragraphs, which it is necessary to quote to show
the great variation which obtains.

Morphological Variations in Vipera berus. 3

“(a) The Syncipital Shields—In British specimens they
are nearly always well developed. In one specimen only
(from Hampshire) I find the frontal much reduced and the
parietals broken up into scales, the specimen in this respect
agreeing with V. aspis . . . Any such extreme speci-
mens . . . are worth recording and preserving.

“(d) The number of labial shields, not being always the
same, has to be counted on both sides of the animal. In
35 out of 74 cases I find 8 shields, in 30 cases 9, in 4 cases
10, in 4 cases 7,in 1 case 6. Continental specimens have
much more frequently 9 than 8 shields. V. aspis has from
9 to 11.

“(e) The number of scales round the eye (prae-, sub-, and
post-oculars) varies between 6 and 11 in British specimens,
the two extreme numbers occurring only once in my lists,
8 or 9 being the usual number.

“(5) The Scaling of the Body.—The scales number 21 across
the middle of the body. But there are exceptions. In one
specimen from Petersfield I counted 23 scales, and in another
from Scotland only 19. . . . Such exceptional specimens
should be recorded and preserved.

“(6) The Ventral Shields.—In 37 British specimens I have
counted 137 to 146 ventral shields (exclusive of the anal) in

males, 139 to 154 in females. . . . The limit of variation
on record (sexes not discriminated) is from 124 to 159.
“(7) The Sub-caudal Shields, . . . Thenumber (count-

ing each pair as one, and not reckoning the terminal, conical,
or spine-like shield) is 35 to 40 in males, 28 to 35 in females.
In one male I find as few as 33. The number of sub-caudals
is stated to vary between 25 in males and 48 in females.”
(Quoted from the Zoologist, March 1892.)

The following records of scaling variations in my own
specimens will show how far they agree with and differ from
those hitherto recorded. The actual work of counting these
scales is most laborious and tedious, in fact, it is quite an
hour’s work to count and verify by recounting the scaling
of a single specimen, as the slightest distraction of the
attention is apt to lead one to make a mistake. For greater
convenience of reference, I have arranged my results in

4 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

tabular form, instead of recording each specimen separately,
as of course I did in the notes from which these tables are
compiled. I shall deal with the head shields afterwards.

SCALING VARIATIONS IN Vipera berus.
Explanation of Terms and Signs in the Tables.

“m” means millimetres.

“Labials”” means the upper Labial scales.

“ Gastrosteges ” means the Ventral scales.

“ Urosteges ” means the Sub-caudal scales.

“& a” means “in addition to the ‘anal’ scale.”

“& t” means “in addition to the ‘terminal’ scale.”

“R” means the right side.

“T,” means the left side.

“ Rows” means the number of rows of scales across the
middle of the body.

Note—The measurements given in inches are the some-
what rough measurements noted on arrival of specimen by
tape measure. The measurements in millimetres are the
exact measurement, done with great care by a metric measure.
It is useful to have both given.

Morphological Variations in Vipera berus.

Eien. Total Length. | Tail Length. ae a Sex of Adder.

li 480 m. 70 m. 19 Male.

2 660 m. 70 m. 26 Female.

3 500 m. 70 m. 20 Male.

A) 530 m. 70 m. 21 Male.

5 a 60 m. 194 Male.

6 480 m. 60 m. 19 Male.

t 490 m. 70 m. 194 Male.

8 590 m. 58 m. 234 Female.

9 535 wm. 50 m. 214 Female.
10 505m. * 5O m. 20 Female.
11 495 m. 50 m. 194 Female.
ye 470 m. 65 m. 183 Male.
13 490 m. 70 m. 194 Male.
14 610 m. 65 m. 24 Female.
15 530 m. 70 m. 21 Male.
16 480 m. 65 m. 19 Male.
EZ 630 m. 65 m. 25 Female.
18 610 m. 90 m. 24 Male.
19 650 m. 65 m. 254 Female.
20 610 m. 65 m. 24 Female.
21 530 m. 70cm. ON Male.
22 625 m. 65 m. 243 Female.
23 470 m. 65 m. 184 Male.
24 260 m. 26 m. 102 Female.!
25 440 m. 65 m. 175 Male.?
26 565 m. 60 m. 224 Female.
ya 530 m. 55. mi. 21 Female.
28 620 m. 78 m. 241 Male.
29 590 m. 78 m. 234 Male.
30 610 m. 83 m. 24 Male.
31 648 m. 60 m. 254 Female.
32 (Se|nt to Zoo alivie. )
ae 580 m. 78 m. ae Male.
34 635 m. 60 m. 25 Female.
35 610 m. 65 m. 24 Female.
20.4.) - 635m! 65 m. 25 Female.

Gee me 515 m. 85 m. 204 Male.

38 610 m. 85 m. 24 Male.
39 510 m, 65 m. 20 Female.
40 490 m. 60 m. 193 Female.
4] 395m. | 60 m. 15$ Female.

1 A specimen of the small red viper.
2 A new variety of Melanism production.

1 This specimen was too mutilated to count these.
2 A new colour variation, uniform green.

3 A small red viper.
+ A new variety of Melanism production.

Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.
oe Hom Labials. | Gastrosteges. | Urosteges. Rows. Sex.

1 R.8, 1.8 | 143 & a. | 41 & t. | 21 Male.

2 R.8, 1.8 | 148 & a. | 32 & t. 21 Female.

3 R.8,L.8 | 142 & a. | 38 & t. | 21 Male.

ut R.8, £.9 | 142 & a. | 38 & t. 21 *| Male.

5 R.8,L.9 | 142 & a. | 38 &t. | 21 Male.

6 Boye) 137 & a gee it. 21 Male.

7 R.9, £.7.) 142 & a. | 38 & t. 21 Male.

8 R.8.L.8 | 142 & a. | 28 &t. 21 Female.

2) ia-8, 029), 148°& a. | ol & t. 21 Female.
10 BOF) 151 & a, 32 & 2] Female.
11 R.8, 1.8 | 143 & a. | 31 &t. | 20t017 | Female.
12 EE) | 141 ea. joes t. 21 Male.
13 R.9, L.7 | 142 & a. | 38 &t. 21 Male.
14 9, 1.8 | 152 & a | 32.& t. 21 Female.
15 R.9, 1.9 | 143 & a. | 36 & t. 21 Male.
16 R.8, L.8 | 140 & a. | 33 & t. 19 Male.
17 R.8, 1.8 | 148 & ». | 30 &t. 21 Female.
18 R.7, 1.7 | 143 & a. | 45 & t. 21 Male.?
19 R.9, 1.10; 149 & a. | 32 & t. 21 Female.
20 R85 .8, | Lode ae |) BS dit: Py | Female.
21 R.9, L.8 | 144 & 2a. | 39 & t. 21 Male.
22 R.8, 6.8 | 148 & a. | 32 &t. 21 Female.
23 R.9,L.8 | 145 & a. | 40 & t. 21 Male.
24 R.9,L.9 | 144 & a. | 32 &t. 21 Female.?
25 R.8, 1.8 | 147 & a. | 37 & t. | 18,19,&20 | Male.4
26 R.8, 1.8 | 142 & a. | 32 &t. | 21tol17 | Female.
27 R.8, 1.9 | 144 & a | 38 &t. 21 Female.
28 R.8,L.8 | 144 & a. | 38 &t. 21 Male.
29 R.9, 1.9 | 40& a. | 40 & t. 21 Male.
30 9) Doe as eA) dit 21 Male.
31 R39, 8 | 144 & a, } 32 & t. 21 Female.
32 (Se|nt to Zoo allive.)
ao ij iielO; 1.110) 142 & “a. |, 39 G4. 21 Male.
34 R:9, 0.9), 147 & a. | 32 & t; 2A Female.
35 R.8, L.9 | 144 & a. ! 31 & t. 21 Female.
36 9. TGA oO'®, a. ino at. 21 Female.
37 RS) bai) 144 & a, |) 41 -& 4. 21 Male.
38 8, 1:9 1 144 & a. | 39 & t. 21 Male.
39 R.8, 1.8 | 144 & a. | 32 &t. 21 Female.
40 R.8, 1.9 | 144 & a. | 32 &t. 21 Female.
41 h.8, 6.9 | 140 & a. 32 & &. 21

| Female. |
|

Morphological Variations i Vipera berus. 7

The Syncipital Shields—These in a typical Vipera berus,
in addition to the supraocular shield, include three large
symmetrical shields on the top of the head, namely, the
single frontal shield and the two parietals. In the speci-
mens whose body scaling is tabulated above, the most
important variations in these syncipital shields were the
following :—

In No. 1 each parietal was broken up into three small
shields, which is an approximation to what obtains in Vipera
asprs.

In No. 24 there were two shields articulating with each
parietal which are not usually present, which might be
described as two accessory parietals.

In No. 28 the frontal shield is small, and the parietals are
represented by a number of small scales, like the arrange-
ment in Vipera aspis.

In No. 29 the scales round the eye are 10 in number.

In No. 28 the scales round the eye are 8 in number.

In No. 30 the scales round the eye are 9 in number.

In No. 34 the two parietals are represented by a number
of small shields, these being irregular in shape and size, as
in V, aspis.

In No. 35 a somewhat unusual arrangement, but one
which I have seen before, is present. The frontal is entirely
surrounded by 12 small shields, except posteriorly, where it
is in contact with the parietals. In addition, in front of the
frontal are the usual seven small shields, filling up the space
between that shield and the canthals.

In No. 37 the two supraocular shields are in contact with
the frontal, the usual small scales which intervene being
absent.

These are the most conspicuous variations in the syncipital
shield in the series under notice.

In no specimen was more than one row of scales present
between the eye and the labials.

SUMMARY OF VARIATIONS.

(a) The measurements given above indicate that adult
male adders vary in length from 18 to 24 inches.

8 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

(0) Also that adult females vary in length from 193
inches to 26 inches.

That is to say, that males do not reach the maximum
length shown in females, the difference being generally from
one-half to one inch. I have previously shown this in the
measurements of another series (in “British Serpents”’).
This series here confirms what I there stated, and it is of
importance, because G. A. Boulenger did not find the differ-
ence constant in a series he examined. The small red viper
is omitted in this estimate, as that reptile never grows to
more than 15 inches in either sex.

(c) The upper labial scales in this series vary from 7 to
10 in number, the former figure occurring four times, the
latter twice.

(d@) The gastrosteges or ventral scales in the males in this
series vary from 132 in one case to 147, also in one case.
The former figure, 132, has never been recorded for males
before, so far as I am aware, the lowest being 137.

(e) In the females of the series the gastrosteges vary from
140 in one case to 152, also in one case.

(f) The urosteges, or sub-caudal shields, in the series vary
in males from 32 to 45, the lower and the higher figures
being both beyond the limits of the figures given in G. A.
Boulenger’s article quoted.

(g) In the females of the series, the urosteges vary from
28, the lowest recorded, to 38, the latter figure being 2 more
than mentioned as occurring.

A British adder, therefore, may possess from 6 to 10 labial
scales (Boulenger records one with 6); from 17 to 23 rows
of scales across the body (Boulenger records one with 23);
from 132 to 154 ventral scales, the former figure recorded in
this series, the latter by Boulenger; the sub-caudal shields
from 28 to 45, both here recorded; the scales round the eye
vary between 6 and 11; the parietals may be represented
by the arrangement found in Viera aspis instead of that in
Vipera berus; and other variations may be present which
this research does not deal with.

I have undertaken this laborious counting simply to give
weight to my argument that it is an unsound and unscientific

Morphological Variations in Vipera berus. 9

principle to lay down, that scaling, and scaling only, is to be
taken into consideration in determining the validity of a
species. Of all the characters of adders, their scaling is the
character which is most liable to variation, yet it is regarded
as of specific importance. Size and colour, even when con-
stant and not varying nearly so much as scaling does, are
disregarded as of no importance in settling species validity ;
otherwise it would be at once seen that the small red viper
is no more an adder than it is any other serpent. Its size
and colour are always different from those of V. berus, but
it has the same scaling as is set down characteristic of the
adder. There seems to me no valid reason why it should
not have this same scaling, but it is surely absolutely in-
sufficient to class the reptile as an adder on that account,
seeing the great differences in other characters. The more
one studies scaling, the more one sees how uncertain it is
in a species, how greatly it varies, and what wide limits have
to be set in order that it may include all that occurs in those
snakes which are undoubtedly of the same species.

II. On the Trapeziwm (os multangulum majus) of the Horse.
By O. CHARNOCK BRADLEY, M.B., F.R.S.E.

(Read 24th October 1904.)

The paleontological evidence of the evolution of the horse
is now so considerable, that the constitution of the equine
manus and pes offers few morphological problems apart from
those which are associated with the similar parts of mammals
in general. But before the discovery of fossil remains of its
predecessors, it was not by any means easy to account for
the striking reduction in number and modification in form of
the carpal, tarsal, metacarpal, and metatarsal bones, and the
bones of the digit of the modern horse. So far as can be
discovered from the recorded views of those living before the
middle of the eighteenth century, no suspicion that the horse
was other than a monodactyl animal ever entered into the
minds of morphologists. Buffon and Daubenton were evi-
dently the first to trace any features which could be held as
showing that the horse has more digits than one. Daubenton

VOL. XVI. B

10 Proceedings of the Royal Physical. Socvety.

(1753) sought to bring the horse into line with man by
asserting that the main metacarpal bone is the representative
of the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th human metacarpals; the rudi-
mentary metacarpals of the horse corresponding to the
metacarpals of the thumb and little finger of man.

A century later (1853) Joly and Lavocat expressed a
somewhat similar view. They also considered the horse to
be a pentadactyl animal, in which fusion of some bones has
taken place; but they differed from Daubenton in being of
opinion that the chief metacarpal has been produced by

Frg. /.

fusion of the 3rd and 4th bones only. It is further averred
by them that the third phalanx bears witness to the fusion
of the 3rd and 4th digits. Asis well known, the 3rd phalanx
of the adult horse most frequently possesses a notch of
greater or less depth about the middle of its sharp convex
border. It is difficult to say when this notch was first
observed, but early in the last century it was held to be
produced by shoeing. Joly and Lavocat denied this, the
then generally accepted explanation, and suggested that the
notch was neither more nor less than an indication of the
point of union of two phalanges.

On the Trapezium of the Horse. fos

Arloing (1) also, at one time, was of opinion that the chief
metacarpal bone of the horse consists, in reality, of the 3rd
aud 4th metacarpal bones ; an opinion shared by Chauveau.!

It is evident from the above that the earlier thinkers
inclined to the supposition that the reduction in the number
of metacarpal bones of the horse has been produced by the
union of previously independent structures; a supposition
engendered by the then domination of comparative anatomy
by human anatomy. The application of the “fusion” hypo-
thesis was not confined to the metacarpus, but was extended
to the carpus: Daubenton, for instance, stating that if there
are not eight bones in the horse’s carpus, it is because the
trapezoid is blended with the magnum.

The testimony of the rocks has convinced morphologists
that the reduction in the number of both carpal and meta-
carpal bones is due to the gradual reduction in size, and
final disappearance of elements present in the predecessors
of the horse. Since it is only proposed to devote attention
to the frequency of occurrence of a carpal bone, which there
is no reason to doubt is at present in process of disappearance,
it is quite beyond the province of the present short com-
munication to consider the evidence of fossil remains. It
will suffice to say that there is abundant proof that the
trapezium bone (0s muliangulum majus, os carpale primum)
was present in the carpus of the extinct animals from which
the modern horse has descended. Further, it is a constant
component of the carpus of present-day allied genera of the
horse.

In the horse, as we now know it, the trapezium is not
infrequently entirely absent. That this has been recognised
for a considerable time is shown by an examination of the
older text-books dealing with the anatomy of the horse.
For example, Percivall (2), writing in 1858, states (p. 52)
that “it (the carpus) is composed of seven small bones: in
some instances an eighth has been found.”

Modern writers are naturally more precise in their state-
ments, as may be gathered from the following quotations

1 Both Arloing and Chauveau have changed their opinions, in accordance
with facts unknown at the time of the appearance of their earlier publications.

12 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

taken from representative French, German, and English
anatomists.

Chauveau and Arloing (3) state (p. 133) that “ beaucoup
d’anatomistes ne décrivent que sept os dans le carpe du
Cheval: quatre 4 la rangée supérieure, trois a la rangée
inférieure. Mais il n’est pas rare de voir un os pisiforme
accolé & la face interne du trapézoide, ce qui parte le nombre
des os du carpe 4 huit.” In another place they give rather
more detail. “Le quatriéme ou trapéze, quand il existe, se
présente avec la forme et le volume d’un pois. II est articulé
avec le face postérieure du trapézoide.”

S : S
Se e
; : t
H 4.
Fige

Ellenberger and Baum say: “ Das Os carpale primum (Os
multangulum majus) ist ein zuweilen fehlender, kleiner,
rundlicher, ungefahr erbsengrosser Knochen, welcher fast
ganz vom radialen Seitenband umschlossen wird und meist
eine kleine, mit C,, seltener eine zweite, mit dem medialen
Griffelbein artikulirende Gelenkflache besitzt.”

In a still more recent German publication (Martin, 6) we
read (p. 190) that the “Os carpale primum ist ein kleiner,
etwa erbsengrosser, sehr haufig fehlender Knochen, welcher
im medialen Seitenbande des Fusswurzelgelenkes und am
Carpale, gelagert ist. Fiir letzteren Knochen besitzt er eine
kleine Gelenkflache, zuweilen auch eine solche fiir das
Metacarpale,.”

M‘Fadyean (5), as the representative of British writers,
states: “The bone, which is only exceptionally present, is the
trapezium—the innermost bone of the lower row” (p. 115).
“The trapezium. When present this bone is of small dimen-
sions, and articulated with the back of the trapezoid. It
is rounded in form, and occasionally double the size of a
common pea, though generally it is much smaller” (p. 117).

On the Trapezium of the Horse. 13

From the above extracts it is seen that the trapezium
is held to be inconstant in its occurrence, about the size
of a pea when it is present, and of variable articulation.
Though these general facts are to be gathered from the text-
books, I am not aware that any more precise statements are
to be found in any publication. Seeing that the trapezium
is the bone of the carpus which has been most materially
affected by the process of reduction in number of the digits,
it appeared to the present writer that it would be well to
make some more detailed observations on its frequency of
occurrence, its size, and its articulation. To this end the
carpuses of twenty-nine horses were prepared in such a way
that there was no possibility of the trapezium being over-
looked if present.

It was found difficult to estimate the size of the bones by
the eye; and measurements by means of calipers did not seem
to afford any very precise information, because of the great
diversity in the stature of the animals from which the bones
were obtained. It was concluded that the best means of
denoting the size of the trapezium would be by computing
an index for each bone, taking the trapezoid from the
same carpus as being 100. The bones being irregular in
form, it was decided to abandon the use of calipers, and to
estimate the cubic capacity of each bone instead. This was
done by noting the amount of water displaced. In order to
guard against any error produced by absorption during the
process of estimation, each bone was soaked in water for
some time, then the adhering water was removed from the
surface with a cloth, after which the estimation was made.

After the cubic capacity (size) of the trapezoid and trap-
ezium had been ascertained, an index was computed according
to the following formula :—

Size of trapezium x 100_
Size of trapezoid

The following table, in which the size of the bones is given
in cubic centimetres, contains the results of the examination
of twenty-nine animals. Certain specimens, where only one
carpus could be obtained, are omitted.

14

Co Sa ae

fs
On

bee

oe. Gig Saran ee

re ed |
Coie te at ee

—
>

Dm onoy- Se “bo 9h Pm nh Cl ONO eS So eS Oe
co ea Mie SC SC] on Ss

Note.—In No. 5 the other bones had been lost before the size of the trapezoid had been

SE Ek A So I Smo aa a

Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Size of
Trapezoid.

Tasie I.

Size.

Trapezium.

Articulation.

> of RB OVO |

AR Wey WS CO Siler STG SB GGG
bS 00 ;

'8°3

gee aes wo NS OO He

ST OUND DD CO ON

pt pet
© HS

ra

None.

With C,

With C,

With C,

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium

With C,

With C,
None.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

With C,

| With C,

| With C,

| With C,

| With C,

| With C,

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.
None.
None.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

|e With:C>

No Trapezium.

With C,

With C,

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.
| None.

No Trapezium.

| With C,

|. With CG,

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium,

No Trapezium.

With C,

With C,

With C,

No Trapezium.

No Trapezium.
| None.

estimated. In No. 6 the trapezium was diseased.

and Mc,

and Mc,

and Mc,
and Mc,

and Mc,
and Me,

1°20

On the Trapeziwm of the Horse. 15

If the carpuses are considered in pairs, the table on the
preceding page may be compressed as follows :—

TABLE ITI.
Thee b tee fal ee Sheol, vip
Trapezium. ea idan |-BerKent | Per Cent. :
Absent— . 14 Wi see | 48°27
Present—
1. Both sides, 10 34°48
2, One side only .
(a) Right, 4 13°79
(6) Left, . 1 3°44
Pahoa 15 oy iF 51-72
29 99-99

From this it is seen that a trapezium is present, either on
one or both sides of the body, in 52 per cent. of animals.
This number agrees sufficiently closely with a statement
made by Martin (6), who says that a trapezium occurs in
about half the number of carpuses examined.

If each carpus is taken separately, 2.e., without regard to
the condition on the other side of the body, it is found that
a trapezium is present in 43 per cent. of cases, as here

shown :—
. TABLE ITI.
Trapezium. beet Gaiee & | Per Cent. | Per Cent.
Absent— . Se dig ae 56°89
Present— |
(a) Right, . 14 24°14
(6) Left, ty 18°96
|
pafets | 43°10
58 99°99

16 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

It is noteworthy that the breed of horse has, so far as this
investigation shows, no effect upon the presence or absence
of the trapezium.

The statement that the trapezium is about the size of a
pea, while sufficiently descriptive for ordinary purposes, is
not to be taken as absolutely accurate. The indices given
above range from 1:20 to 16; thus showing a very consider-
able variation in the relative size of the trapezoid and
trapezium. The 22 trapezia which are mentioned above
may be placed in four arbitrary groups, according to their
indices. Fourteen of the 22 are found to be contained in
the group of bones whose indices range from 5 to 9°99.
Four have an index below 5; three come between 10 and
14:99; and only one is so large as to have an index of 15 or
over. The outline drawing (Fig. 1) shows the relative size _
of the trapezium and trapezoid in a carpus in which the
trapezium was slightly larger than the average.

When the absolute size of the trapezium is taken into
account, it is found to vary from 071 cc. to 14 cc.; the
variation not depending entirely upon the stature of the
animal, though it does so in the main. In this connection it
is perhaps worth noting that, where both limbs of the same
animal contain trapezia, the two bones are most frequently
of nearly equal size. The only exception given in Table I.
being carpus No. 1, in which the right trapezium (0:1 ¢.c.) is
much smaller than the left (0°8 c.c.).

In regard to the articulation of the trapezium, the
commonly accepted statement is sufficiently correct. Out
of the 25 bones, 6 were found to be entirely non-articular,
ae, they were completely embedded in ligament. Of the
remaining 19 bones, only 6 articulated with the trapezoid
and the second metacarpal bone. About half (13) of the
trapezia found in the material used for this investigation
had only one articular surface, viz., for the trapezoid. The
articular area on the trapezoid for the trapezium varies in
extent, of course, in conformity with the degree of develop-
ment of the trapezium. In addition, it also differs in its
level. In some cases it is placed so high as to be continu-
ous with the articular surface for the scaphoid. In other

On the Trapezium of the Horse. ae

examples it is at the lowest part of the trapezoid; this latter
position occurring, naturally, in those instances where the
trapezium articulates with the metacarpal bone. Fig. 2
contains outline sketches of different trapezia illustrating
this point.

At first sight the variation in level of the trapezium
appears of no moment. But the fact is of some interest
when taken in conjunction with the circumstance that the
trapezium in some modern allies of the horse (Tapirus
indicus, for example) extends from the scaphoid to the
metacarpus, thus articulating with three bones—scaphoid,
trapezoid, and second metacarpal. It would have been
particularly interesting to find a specimen in which the
trapezium actually articulated with the scaphoid in addition
to the trapezoid. But, though trapezium and_ scaphoid
closely approximated each other in one or two instances,
no definite articulation could be demonstrated. It is not
unreasonable to expect that, if a larger number of animals
be examined, such an articulation may be found,

Bearing in mind that two bones have been described as
occurring in the position of the trapezium, great care was
exercised in order that such a circumstance, if present,
should not be overlooked. In no instance, however, was
more than one small bone found. It seemed possible that
one of the two bones which are mentioned by the older
writers (Percivall, for instance!) might have been a sesamoid
developed in connection with one or other of the two
tendons inserted in the region of the median side of the
carpus. But no such sesamoid bone was found. It was
concluded, therefore, that the occurrence of two small bones
at the inner (median) side of the carpus is rare.

A minor question suggested itself during these observa-
tions. Is it possible that the trapezium has disappeared by
fusion with the trapezoid, rather than by a gradual reduc-
tion in size terminating in extinction? This mode of loss
of identity would bring the trapezium into line with the
os centrale, which, as is now generally accepted, has

1 Percivall (2), p. 54. (Trapezium) ‘‘ Not invariably present: in some
instances two are found.”

VOL. XVi- Cc

18 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctety.

blended with the scaphoid. If this were the case, we might
reasonably expect that the trapezoid would bear some
evidence of the fusion, in the same way that the scaphoid
does (as shown by Leboucq, 7). No such evidence could
be detected. This, in conjunction with the exceedingly
small size of the trapezium in some animals, leads to the
conclusion that the trapezium is following in the steps of
the metacarpal bone, with which it was originally connected.

REFERENCES.

1. Aruorne, S., “ L’Organisation du Pied chez le Cheval,” Ann.
Scr. Nat., 5me Ser., Zoologie, t. 8, 1867, p. 55.
. Percivatt, Wm., “The Anatomy of the Horse.” London,
1858.
3. CHAUVEAU, A., et ARLOING, S., “ Traité d’Anatomie Comparée
des Animaux Domestiques,” 4me edit., Paris, 1890.
4. ELLENBERGER, W., und Baum, H., “ Handbuch der vergleich-
enden Anatomie der Hausthiere,” 10te Aufl., Berlin, 1903.
5. M‘Fapyean, J., ‘Comparative Anatomy of the Domesticated
Animals.” Part I., Osteology and Arthrology. Edinburgh.
6. Martin, P., ‘ Lehrbuch der Anatomie der Haustiere,” Bd. IT.,
Stuttgart, 1904.
7. Lesouceg, H., ‘ Recherches sur la Morphologie du Carpe chez
les Mammiféres,” Arch. de Biologie, t. v., 1884.

bo

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.

Fig. 1. Outline drawing of the inner (medial) side of the horse’s carpus.
Sc. = Secaphoid. Mg. = Magnum. Tzd. = Trapezoid. Tzm.=
Trapezium. M.II. and M.III. =Second and Third Metacarpal
bones.

The trapezium in the carpus from which this drawing was made is
slightly larger than the average.

Fig. 2. Outlines of four trapezoids. 1 is from a carpus in which there was
no trapezium. 2, 3, and 4 illustrate the different levels at which
the articular surface for the trapezium may occur. s=surface for
scaphoid. ¢=surface for trapezium. In 4 the surfaces for
scaphoid and trapezium are continuous.

Both figures were made from photographs of the actual bones,

On the Gonostyles of two Antarctic Suphonophora. 19

III. Scotta Collections—wNote on the Gonostyles of two
Antarctic Siphonophora. By Professor J. ARTHUR
THomson, M.A. [Plate 1.]

(Received 14th November; read 28th November 1904.)

Mr W. 5S. Bruce has been good enough to entrust to me
three interesting and somewhat puzzling specimens collected
by the Scottish Antarctic Expedition off the South Orkneys.
They seem to be the separated gonostyles of some large
Siphonophore colony, and as such they certainly deserve to
be recorded, since we have very little knowledge of Siphono-
phora from the far south. In the report on the “Southern
Cross” collections, Mr E. T. Browne mentions the necto-
calyces of a Diphyid, and a specimen of an Agalmid
(Halistemma), about 6 to 10 inches long; in the Antarctic
Manual, Mr A. E. Shipley refers to an abyssal Discalid,
Disconalia pectyllrs.

Specimen A. was obtained in July 1903 in Scotia Bay,
South Orkneys, on the surface of the water, in a hole which
had been cut in the ice. The depth of water at that place
was 20 to 30 fathoms; the temperature 29° F. Specimen B.
was dredged from among mud and pebbles in December
1903 in Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; the temperature 31° F.
Specimen C. was dredged from 9 to 10 fathoms in May 1903
in Scotia Bay. It is in several respects very different from
A. and B., and I have therefore referred in the title to two
Antarctic Siphonophora. Other specimens, which I have
not seen, were found in summer, floating on the ice-free
surface of the bay. Specimens B. and C. were allowed to
die slowly in sea-water, and were then preserved in formol.
Their general structure is quite clear, but such delicate
organisms require more elaborate treatment if they are to be
used for histological analysis. Nevertheless the sections
that have been made reveal many interesting details.

Specimen A. measures 4 inches in length by 0°7 inch in
maximum diameter. It narrows gradually to one end, where
there is a definite opening at the top of a small conical
elevation (see Fig. L., 0.). The other end is blunt and blind.

20 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

There is a large internal cavity, and the internal surface
is continuously covered with triangular processes (1°6 to 1°8
mm. in length) projecting into the lumen (Fig. IL., 7.P.). The
outer surface is densely covered with elongated, capitate,
“tentacular bodies” (2 to 3 mm. in length, with a diameter of
‘3 to ‘35 mm. in the stalk, and 4 to ‘5 mm. in the head)
(Fig. II., Cn.). The first half-inch of the body shows two
somewhat bare annular zones, which are perhaps in part
artificial. Among the capitate “tentacular bodies” in the
distal half of the specimen, there are numerous spherical or
flask-shaped structures (Fig. II., Gn.) from 1 to 2 mm. in
height. Some of the spherical structures bear tentacular
bodies, sometimes 1 mm. in length (Fig. III.). The natural
colour—a strong orange-red—has disappeared entirely, and
left a yellowish white.

I do not know how a specimen of this kind—which does
not seem to be a viable animal—can be interpreted except
as the separated gonostyle or sexual palpon of a large
Siphonophore colony. But it is remarkable that no other
trace of any Siphonophore was seen in these regions, and
a colony whose gonostyles measure 4 (A.), 6 (B.), and 83 (C.)
inches in length must be a very conspicuous object. In
A. and B. the terminal opening at the narrow end is very
definite, and not in any way torn or jagged; it probably
represents the communication between the gonostyle and
some central cavity of the colony, ¢g., the central siphon.
What I have called “tentacular bodies” are probably stalked
cnidospheres. As to the nature of the spherical or flask-
shaped structures, there can be no doubt that they are
gonophores. There is distinct evidence of a medusoid bud
of complex structure, and with reproductive elements. In
one case a very distinct ovum was seen. It may be suggested
that the triangular internal processes are absorptive in
function.

Specimen B. measures 6 inches in length by 0°8 inch in
diameter at one end and 0:2 inch at the other. Its shape
resembles an elongated club, and the proximal end (cor-
responding to the handle of the club) is almost bare of
stalked cnidospheres. In other respects it agrees with A.

On the Gonostyles of two Antarctic Siphonophora. 21

Specimen C. measures 84 inches in length by 0-4 inch
in diameter, and is slightly narrower at one end. It differs
from A. and B. in the fact that several—as many as seven—
gonophores occur on one stalk, which may also bear several
cnidospheres (Fig. LV.). The stalk bearing the gonophores
and stalked cnidospheres may be 7 mm. in length, with a
basal diameter of 0°7 mm. It seems to me likely that C.
belongs to a different species, but it may be that an unknown
Siphonophore colony has dimorphic sexual palpons. The
fact that the specimens were found floating freely, suggests
that the gonostyles of Siphonophora may sometimes be
set adrift, and may enjoy a brief period of independent
viability.

The specimens have not been particularly studied histo-
logically, but a few points of interest may be noted.

(a) The body-wall shows a wrinkled ectoderm of large
elongated covering cells, among which, on the gonophores
and stalked cnidospheres, there are numerous very distinct
elongated oval stinging-cells or cnidoblasts.

(6) Beneath the ectoderm is a strongly-developed muscular
layer (Fig. II., 1), about 0'1 mm. in thickness, often showing
over a dozen fibrils side by side, and with a curious sugges-
tion of cross-striation. This muscular layer, in thinned
form, is continued up the stalks of the gonophores for some
distance.

(c) Then follows a very definite transparent middle
lamella (Fig. IL., m./.), which is continued below the ectoderm
into the gonophores and stalked cnidospheres, and internally
along the triangular processes. A piece of it, isolated
without breakage, appeared to have a fibrillar structure.
The apparent striation of the muscular layer seems to be
due to an outward extension of processes from the middle
lamella, between which the fibrils are interwoven.

(d) The endoderm consists of very large vacuolated cells.
Some of those next the middle lamella appear to have
muscular roots.

(e) The internal isosceles-triangular processes usually narrow
“Into one layer of cells on each side of an inward continuation
of the middle lamella. In other cases the triangular pro-

22 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

cesses are broader, as if two adjacent filaments had joined
and had enclosed a cavity; in some of these there were two
prolongations from the middle lamella (Fig. II., 7.p'.). Some
of the large clear cells of the triangular processes look as
if they were amceboid. Various inclusions were seen in the |
(endoderm) cells of the triangular filaments, some doubtless
food-particles, others perhaps symbiotic Alge.

(7) In some cases a narrow canal was seen entering the
base of the gonophore. This crosses the body-wall, and
communicates with the central cavity of the gonostyle
between two adjacent triangular filaments (Fig. IL, C.). Thus
the cavity of the gonophore communicates freely with the
cavity of the gonostyle.

If the interpretation given be correct, that these specimens
are the separated gonostyles of a Siphonophore colony, or of two
closely-related Siphonophore colonies, the question of further
classification arises. But this is hardly answerable. I have
not been able to find any description of a gonostyle which
agrees with what I have observed. All that one can venture
to say is that the complete animal is a Siphonophore of
large size, with mouthless gonostyles bearing fixed gono-
phores.

[V. Note on Limax tenellus (Mill), with Exhibition of Living
Hxamples from the “Forth” Area. By WituiAM Evans,

F.R.S.E.
(Read 24th October 1904. )

The three examples of Zimax tenellus now exhibited were,
along with several others, found by me in The Forest,
Clackmannanshire, on 3rd September 1904, and have since
been kept in a box filled with damp moss and pieces of fir
bark. For food, they have been given various kinds of
woodland fungi (Aussula and other Agarics, and Boletus).

This pretty little slug has a rather interesting history.
Though apparently described by Miiller so long ago as 1774,
and certainly by Nilsson in 1822, it remained little known
even on the Continent till within comparatively recent years.

Note on Limax tenellus (Miill.). 23

In Britain it was first recorded by Joshua Alder in 1848, in
his “Catalogue of the Mollusca of Northumberland and
Durham,” a specimen having been received by him from
a wood at Allansford, on the Derwent, in the latter county
(Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, vol. i. p. 125). This record
was repeated by Forbes and Hanley in their “ History of
British Mollusca,” published in 1853, and a figure of the
species given from a coloured drawing, by Alder, of the
Allansford specimen. Jeffreys, in the first volume of his
“ British Conchology,” published in 1862, seemed to doubt
the validity of the species (vol. i. p. 139), but in the
Appendix to his work, published in 1869, he inserted a
description of it, and recorded its occurrence at North
Mavine in Shetland (vol. v. p. 156). In 1878 and 1888
there were records from the south-west of Scotland and
Yorkshire respectively, but not much weight was attached
to these (cf Roebuck’s paper in Annals Scot. Nat. Hist.,
October 1904), and gradually the name of Limaa tenellus
was dropped out of the British list. It was reintroduced,
however, in September 1903, in the part of Mr J. W. Taylor's
splendid “ Monograph of the Land and Freshwater Mollusca
of the British Isles” then issued, but solely on the strength
of the old records. “This little species,” it is there remarked,
“is comparatively seldom observed, owing to the prevailing
ignorance of its habits of life, and it is to be hoped that the
claims of this species to rank as a British species will be
firmly established, now that attention is drawn to these
peculiarities.” Its predilection in Germany for pine-clad
heaths and pine forests in general, where it feeds on Boleti
and other fungi during the autumn, is then commented on.
On reading the above-mentioned account of its habits,
I made a note of the localities in the “Forth” area most
likely to hold the species, and had tried some of them for
it without success, when, on 3rd ult., I received word from
Mr W. D. Roebuck, F.L.S., Leeds, that he had got undoubted
Lama tenellus from Mr Robert Godfrey, of Edinburgh, by
whom they were collected in the pine forest of Rothie-
murchus, Inverness-shire, in the end of August. All credit
is due to Mr Godfrey for his discovery, which has been

24 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

recorded by Mr Roebuck in his paper referred to above.
When Mr Roebuck’s letter reached me, I was about to start
for a natural history ramble in Clackmannanshire, where
some of the woods I had made a note of are situated, and
the afternoon of that day (3rd September) found me at a
particular spot I had in view in the extensive pine woods
known as Clackmannan Forest. Here I soon had the good
fortune to discover what I was in search of. On the under-
side of almost the first rotten branch lifted was a small
yellowish Zimaz, which there could be little doubt was the
long-looked for Z. tenellws. A couple of hours close searching
yielded nine in all. One was on a red-topped fungus,
Russula emetica, but most of them were under chips of wood
and pieces of bark lying on the ground beneath the fir trees.
The largest specimen measured 37 mm. when crawling at
full stretch ; 25 mm. was about their average length. Three
of them have been shown to Mr Roebuck, and he has con-
firmed my identification. They all belong to the waxy-
yellow variety to which Held gave the name cereus, and
which is apparently the type of the species. A piece of
white paper drawn across the body of one was stained pale
gamboge-yellow by the mucus. A colourless slime was
given off by the foot-sole. The only other slugs met with
in the wood were about an equal number of Arion subfuscus,
and one A. minimus.

Limaz tenellus will doubtless be found in the course of
time in other localities within the “Forth” area, but I do
not think it can be common in the district. At any rate,
since finding it in Clackmannan Forest, I have looked for
it without success in a number of likely woods in the
Lothians, Stirling, Fife, and Kinross. In the meantime,
Mr Roebuck has received it from near Aberdeen, near
Dunkeld, and Epping Forest, thus proving it to have a
very wide range in Britain.

Bet... bes
4, PROCEEDINGS

OF TH

Vo

‘ROYAL PHYSI

x

f

£ f TY
Pa
(AL, SOCIETY

PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHES OF
“NATURAL HISTORY.

x SESSION 1904-1905. -

No. 2. WS WoL. avid. * Pacus 25-48,

i CONTENTS.

Scotia Collections. —On ay Tentacles of an Antarctic Sisieaitiate By —
+ JOHN RENNIE, D.Sc., University of Aberdeen. [Plate delice ae Oe ee

Further Additions to the List of Spiders from the Edinburgh. District.
Pies, (Third Supplement.) By Prof. G.-H. CARPENTER, B. Se., , M. rats. ,
é “and. W TLLIAM EVANS, F.R.S.E., : .

LN)
ba |

oe Scotia Cabniest —On. Decalopodia Aha et ae a -Pycnogonid
rediscovered. By T. V, est 2GSON, Biologist to the Wesonat Antarctic
Expedition. [Plates T. anc Iv. 1 | ee se er ek. . 85

_ The Black-backs of the Bags. By WiniTam Byans,. R.S. E, M.B.O. vU,, 42

. ee M* ‘FARLANE. & ERSKINE.
inte. 4 } pate 1905,

PR LC Oe aE “ PROCEEDINGS.”

Vol. is

Vol: sali.

Vol. V.

Wiols vey-1.

Part 1 (1854-56), out uf pene.
Part 2 (1856-58), out of pront,
Part 1 (1858-61), out of print,
Part 2 (1861-62), owt of print,

. Part 1 (1862-63), out of print,

Part 2 (1863-64), out of print,
Part 3 (1864-65), ot of print,
Part 4 (1865-66), out of print,

. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print,

Part 2 (1875-76), out of print,
Part 3 (1876-78), out of print,
Part 1 (1878-79),
Part 2 (1879-80),

(1880-81),

Title and Index of this Vol. fide

Vols Vil

Do.

VoleV LiL

Do;

Moline:

Do.
Do.

Vol. x

Do.

Vol, XI.

Do.
Vols? XA
Do.

Vol. XIII.

Do.
Do.

Vol. XIV.

Do.
Do.
Do.

Wiol aN -

Do.

Vol. XVI.

Do.

Do. do.

with Part 1, Vol. VII.
Part 1 (1881-82),
Part 2 (1882-83),
Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print,
Part 2 (1884-85),
Part 1 (1885-86),
Part 2 (1886-87),
Part 3 (1887-88),
Part 1 (1888-89),
Part 2 (1889-90),
Part 1 (1890-91),
Part 2 (1891-92),
Part 1 (1892-93),
Part 2 (1893-94),
Part 1 (1894-95),
Part 2 (1895-96),
Part 3 (1896-97),
Part 1 (1897-98),
Part 2 (1898-99),
Part 3 (1899-1900),
Part 4 (1900-1901),
Part 1 (1901-1902),
Part 2 (1902-1904),
No. 1 (Pages 1-24),
No, 2 (Pages 25-48),

To the Fellows.

3/6
5/

3/6
7/6
7/6

4/
2/6
7/6
7/6
10/
3/6
4/6

4/6
5/
6/
B/
5/
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
1/
1/6

7/6
10/ } 17/6

10

hs
5/
5/
5/
5/

To the Public.

20/

5/
7/6
5/

10/

10/

5/
3/6
10/
10/
12/6
5/
6/
7/
12/6
6/6
6/6
6/6
15/
6/

The following may also be had of the Librarian:
Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VI.,

Vol. VILL. Part 1,

2/
1/

Forms of Application for Fellowshiv may be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, ' 4
Annual Subscription,

10/6
12/6

eee

On the Tentacles of an Antarctic Siphonophore. 25

V. Scotia Collections—On the Tentacles of an Antarctic
Stiphonophore. By JoHN ReEnwniz, D.Sc., University of
Aberdeen. [Plate II.]

(Received 12th December 1904; read 19th December 1904. )

Amongst some material kindly entrusted to me by Mr
W. S. Bruce for examination, there occurred a number of
long vermiform structures, which, on a preliminary examina-
tion, appeared both from external characters and consistency
suggestive of a Polyzoon of the group Ctenostomata. A
closer investigation, however, has revealed the fact that
these bodies are the separated tentacles of an unknown
Siphonophore. They present one or two features of interest,
which, considering the limited number of forms belonging
to the group which are known from Antarctic regions, I
have thought worth recording.

Professor J. Arthur Thomson has quite recently, from
material of the same collection, described the detached
gonostyles of a Siphonophore. He agrees with me in
thinking that they must be referred to a different type
from that to which these tentacles belong. The localities
and dates of capture are different, the sizes of the two organs
represented are disproportionate, and, in particular, such
histological characters as could be compared, particularly
the cnidoblasts, show distinctive features.

The tentacles were taken in the drifting net (1 to 100
fathoms) on 5th March 1904, in 72° 31’ S. lat., 19° 00’ W.
long. The surface temperature was 29°2 F.

In all there are thirteen parts, nearly every one of which
is obviously incomplete. The longest piece measures 4 feet
3 inches in length, the others range from 2 feet to 3°3 inches.
They are circular in section, are thicker at the attached end
than at the free, to which they taper very gradually (Pl. II.
Fig. 1). The extreme diameter measurements of all the
pieces are 7 mm. and 14 mm. respectively. The surface is
of a pale brown colour, and is covered by very minute,
approximately oval or circular, elevations closely set

1 Proceedings of this Society, 28th November 1904.
VOL. XVI. D

26 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

together (Pl. II. Fig. 2). Over all there is a wrinkled
appearance, with here and there a ring-like constriction
(Pl. Il. Figs. 1 and 2, a). These latter have no definite
distribution upon the tentacles, and appear, together with
the wrinklings, to be incidental to the state of contraction of
the organ. The consistency is gelatinous but firm, and the
tentacles are not readily broken. They bear no tentille or
specialised “ urticating organs.” Since the state of preserva-
tion is not particularly good, they were probably detached
from the parent organism some time before capture. This
is all the more probable, as they appear to be the only parts
of it which were found, and, judging by the great length of
the tentacles, a single colony is likely to be of considerable
size.

Serial sections, both transverse and longitudinal, were
made, and these, though useful in illustrating the general
structure, have not been satisfactory as regards histological
detail. A reference to the figures, however, will show that
one or two points of interest have been made out. Plate II.
Fig. 3 is a transverse section. There is a marked general
resemblance between its appearance and that of a typical
stolon. The epidermis 0, covering the minute elevations
already referred to, consists of masses of small rounded cells.
doubtless in part sensory, intermingled with which are
numerous stinging cells. These are the best preserved of all
the elements; they are of large size, their long axis measur-
ing 25 ». The coiled lasso is particularly well seen (see
Pl. II. Fig. 5). These cells were seen to be grouped in
“batteries” upon the papille. Passing inwards from the
external layer, the ectodermal longitudinal muscle cells form
a series of radially directed bands. These bands are double,
and at their inner ends are widened out so as to form longi-
tudinal canals (c) of some size, and more or less folded. On
the walls facing the cavity of these canals are cells similar to
those of the outer layer (except cnidoblasts). From this it
appears not unlikely that the canals are formed by a folding
of the outer wall, from which they are shut in by the
apposition of the outer parts of the original folds. Plate II.
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section through the region of these

On the Tentacles of an Antarctic Siphonophore. 27

canals. The mesoglea, which is indicated (d) in both
sections, fills most of the space, while centrally there is a
large endodermal canal (e).

The noteworthy features of possible diagnostic value are—

(1) The large size of the tentacles, indicating an organism
of some bulk ;
(2) The absence of tentille and of localised stinging
“organs” (boutons urticants) ;
(3) The specially well-developed ectodermal longitudinal
muscular canals, and a large endodermal canal.

Although these data are barely sufficient for positive
identification, the characters point to the family Apolemine,
of which the genus Apolenva, a Mediterranean form which
reaches a size of 2 to 3 metres, and whose tentacles are
without tentille, appears to be near the form at present
described.

VI. Further Additions to the List of Spiders from the
Edinburgh Mstrict. (Third Supplement.) By Prof.
G. H. CARPENTER, B.Sc., M.R.I.A., and WILLIAM EVANS,

F.R.S.E.
(Read 19th December 1904.)

Our last communication to the Society on this subject
was made in 1899, and is contained in the Proceedings for
that year (Vol. XIV. pp. 168-181). Since then, Evans,
though not working specially at the Spiders, has continued
to some extent his search for additional species and fresh
records in various parts of the district, with the result that
we are now able to add fourteen species,! some of them of
very considerable interest, to our former lists. _Up to the
middle of 1899, the number of species recorded for the
district was 191, from which, however, one has to be de-
ducted as explained farther on, leaving a total of 190 to that
date. The 14 species now recorded brings the number up
to 204; but one of them, namely, Hasarius adansonii, it has

1A probable fifteenth—Drassus sylvestris, Bl.?, imm. $ —is held over till
the doubt can be removed by the capture of an adult specimen.

as Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

to be said, is an “alien” not likely to be found outside
hot-houses and conservatories. If to the above number be
added those species included in our “Upper Forth” list
(Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1897), which are not in the “ Edin-
burgh” lists, and two or three taken by the late James
Hardy in the neighbourhood of Cockburnspath, it will be
found that the recorded Spider-fauna of the “Forth” area
comprises 220 species or thereby. Doubtless, a good many
more still remain to be discovered.

Of the species here recorded, several! are not only
additions to the local list but to the Scottish list as well,
thus greatly extending their known range in Britain; while
some have been met with but a few times anywhere in these
islands. Nor are the present additions by any means
confined to the small, inconspicuous species (what may be
called the micro-araneida), seeing they include such fine
species as Chiracanthium carnifex, Philodromus rufus, Meta
menardt, and Pisaura mirabilis.

In our original paper and first and second supplements,
we recorded Diplocephalus (Plesiocrerus) alpinus (Cb.) from
a number of localities.2 Since then the differences between
this form and the closely allied D. latifrons (Cb.) have been
more fully investigated by Mr Cambridge (cf. Proc. Dorset
Nat. Hist. Field Club, vol. xxiii., 1902, pp. 23-4), and a
re-examination of the specimens we preserved shows that
they belong to the latter form, and not to D. alpinus, which
must therefore be struck off our list. D. latifrons was
included in our 1899 supplement.

As regards species already on the list, fresh localities for
many of the less common ones have been noted. Some of
the more interesting of these records are given in a separate
list at the end of this paper.

We desire again to tender our best thanks to the Rev. O.
P. Cambridge, F.R.S., from whom we have received, as
heretofore, invaluable assistance in the determination of a
number of our specimens.

1 These appear to be Leptyphantes pinicola, Lophomma herbigradum, and
Philodromus rufus.

2 Proc. Roy. Phy. Soc., Vol. XII. pp. 573-4; Vol. XIII. p. 314; Vol.
ALY. p. As7:

Spiders from the Edinburgh Distriet. 29

LIST OF ADDITIONAL SPECIES.
Order ARAN EIDEA.
Prosthesima petiverii (Scop.).
Drassus ater, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel.

Prosthesima subterranea (Koch).

A number of adult ¢s and @s of this velvety black
Drassid were found under stones on the south side of
Blackford Hill, Edinburgh, on 14th July 1900. They were
very quick in their movements and difficult to capture
among the close-set stones and grass. In Scotland, this

species has been recorded from Berwickshire and Castle
Douglas (Cambr., Hntomologist, 1877, p. 158).

Chiracanthium carnifex (Fabr.).
Clubiona erratica, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel.

On 13th July 1901, half a dozen females of this rather
handsome, greenish spider were found, along with their eggs,
in their characteristic white cocoons on heath at Clackmannan
Forest. Though common in the Highlands of Scotland, the
species appears to be rare in this district, and we are glad
to be able to add it to our list.

Leptyphantes pinicola, Sim.

Among some spiders from this district, which we sent to
the Rev. O. P. Cambridge in October 1895, he has recently
identified an adult male of this species, as recorded by him
ina paper “On New and Rare British Spiders,” published in
the Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist. Field Club, vol. xxiv. (1903)
p. 152. The specimen was obtained in the vicinity of
Edinburgh,—either on or close to the Pentland Hills,—in
the autumn of 1895.

Leptyphantes tenebricola (Wid.).

Two specimens, ad. ¢ and @, of the true Linyphia
tenebricola of Wider, were captured in Pomathorn Dean,
Penicuik, Midlothian, on 1st December 1901. They were
submitted to Mr Cambridge (cf. Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist.
Freld Club, vol. xxiii., 1902, p. 20).

50 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Lophomma herbigradum (B1.).
Neriene herbigrada, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel., and Cambr. Spid. Dors.
An adult 2 of L. herbigradum was taken at Bavelaw
Moss, near Balerno, on 16th May 1900. We are indebted
to Mr Cambridge for its identification. This appears to be
the first record for Scotland.

Diplocephalus picinus (B1.).
Walckenaéra picina, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel., and Cambr. Spid. Dors.
On 22nd October 1901, an ad. ¢ and two @s of this
very small spider were found among withered leaves at the
edge of a wood near Gifford, East Lothian. The late Morris
Young took this species near Paisley many years ago—the
only previous Scottish record we know of.

Pocadicnemis pumila (B1.).
Wailckenéera pumila, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel., and Cambr. Spid. Dors.

This has been taken on two occasions, namely,—near
Gorebridge, 8th May 1900, two ad. gs and one 2 among
grass on a sunny bank; and on Bavelaw Moss, 16th May
1900, an ad. ¢ obtained by sweeping heather. Has been
recorded from Berwickshire and Renfrewshire.

Cnephalocotes obscurus (Bl.).
Walckendera obtusa, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel., and Cambr. Spid. Dors.

Anad. ¢ of this rare species was got under a board at
Fairmilehead, near Edinburgh, on 2nd March 1900. It
has been recorded from near Paisley by the late Morris
Young (Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1894, p. 185).

Tapinocyba pallens (Cb.).
Erigone pallens, Cambr. Proc. Zool, Soc. Lond., 1872, p. 753.

Two ad. ¢s of this interesting form were found under
moss at the foot of a fir tree in Roslin Glen, Midlothian,
on 22nd December 1900: identification confirmed by Mr
Cambridge. The species was first taken in the British
Isles by Evans, near Lanark, in December 1899 and October
1900, and it has recently been found in Lancashire

Spiders from the Hdinburgh District. 31

(Cambr., Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist. Field Club, vol. xxi., 1900,
p. 23, and vol. xxiv. p. 159; and Evans, Handb. Nat. Hist.
Clyde, 1901, p. 324).

Meta menardi (Latr.).
Epetra fusca, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel.

On 6th June 1902, two ad. 2s of this large cave-
frequenting species were procured from crevices in the
roof of the underground passage, known as Bruce’s Cave,
beneath Hawthornden House, Midlothian (Evans, Ann. Scot.
Nat. Hist., 1902, p. 186). Elsewhere in Scotland, it has
been found near Berwick, Aberdeen, Trossachs, Loch Ard,
and several places in the Clyde area. It is an interesting
addition to our local list.

Xysticus kochii, Thor.

Aysticus viaticus, Cambr. Spid. Dors.

An ad. $, which Mr Cambridge refers to this form, was
found among some spiders kindly collected for us by
Mr James Baxter in the neighbourhood of Peebles in
August 1899. Has been taken near Aberdeen by Professor
Trail.

Philodromus rufus, Walck.
Philodromus clarkii, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel., and Cambr. Spid. Dors.

An ad. 2 of this rare spider was taken at Morningside,
Edinburgh, on 11th March 1904. [I captured it in my
house: it was running on the sleeve of my coat, but how it
came there I cannot say. Possibly it was brought into
the house on flowers from a shop or garden.—W. E.] There
are only three previous records of the occurrence of the
species in Britain—all in England. Abroad it is known
from France and Spain (Simon), and Hungary (Kulezynski).

Pisaura mirabilis (Clk.).
Dolomedes mirabilis, Bl. Spid. Gt. Brit. and Irel.
Ocyale mirabilis, Cambr. Spid. Dors.
On 13th July 1901, five of the large bell-shaped webs or
cocoon-shelters of this fine spider, containing many young,

32 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

were found on tall heath in a “moss” near Forest Mill,
Clackmannanshire. One brood of young was brought home
and placed in a fern-case, where some of them lived till they
were a fair size. This, one of the largest of British spiders,
is common on heaths in the Highland districts of Scotland,
but it is evidently very local in this neighbourhood, and
we have pleasure in adding it to our list.

[Hasarius adansonii (Sav.).]

A ¢ of this interesting Salticid was obtained from one of
the hot-houses at the Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, in
December 1904. [It was found on an orchid by my son,
W. Edgar Evans——W. E.] In this country this South
European species probably lives only in green-houses, whence
it has frequently been recorded, though only once before from
Scotland, namely from plant-houses at Paisley in 1893
(Morris Young).

APPENDIX.

ADDITIONAL LOCALITIES FOR SPIDERS ALREADY
ON THE EDINBURGH LIST.

By WILLIAM EVANS.

I take this opportunity of placing on record the following
further localities in which I have recently met with some of
the rarer and less known spiders (Araneidea) recorded from
the Edinburgh district in previous papers by Professor
Carpenter and myself. As regards Phalangidea, the only
recent note worth mentioning is that three specimens of
Nemastoma chrysomelas (Herm.) were obtained on the Bonny-
toun Hills, Linglithgowshire, in August 1901. For further
records of Chernetidea in the district, see my notes in Ann.
Scot. Nat. Hist., 1901, pp. 53 and 241, and 1903, pp. 120
and 249. |

Dysdera crocota, C. L. K.—Dunbar, ad. 2 under stone,
May, and ad. ¢ and 2, 23rd June 1900; Bo’ness, in cellar,
ad. ¢, July 1902 (from Mr R. Godfrey). The discovery of.

Spiders from the Edinburgh District. 33

ad. gs places the identification beyond doubt (see remarks
in previous papers).

Drassus cupreus, Bl—Ad. f, Balerno, May 1900. Identi-
fication confirmed by Mr Cambridge. No doubt this is the
common Drassus here.

Prosthesima electa (C. L. K.).—Links at east end of Largo
Bay, 3 gs and 2 2s, 26th May 1900. The spot is about
half a mile east of where the single example was got in
June 1897.

Theridion pallens, B1.—Two ad. ¢s, Clackmannan Forest,
May 1900; two, Castle Campbell, Dollar, July 1901.

Linyphia hortensis, Sund.—Ad. ¢, Craigmillar Quarry
near Edinburgh, 29th May 1901.

Porrhomma microphthalmum (Cb.).—Bavelaw Wood, near
Balerno, ad. $ under bark on decayed fir log, 9th December
1899 (submitted to O. P. C.).

Tmeticus abnormis (Bl.).—Abbey Craig, near Stirling, ad.
2, October 1901.

Tmeticus reprobus (Cb.).—Dalmeny beach, Linlithgowshire,
ad. g and several 2s, 23rd March 1901.

Sintula diluta (Cb..—Ad. $, among leaves in wood,
Port Seton, November 1900; ad. %, and several 92s, in
Moss, Pomathorn Dean, Penicuik, December 1900.

Diplocephalus cristatus (Bl.).—Abbey Craig, ad. gf and
2 , October 1901.

Diplocephalus beckw (Cb.)—Ad. #, in moss, Roslin Glen,
22nd December 1900. Identification verified by Mr Cam-
bridge.

Diplocephalus fuscypes (Bl.)—Two small 2 spiders from
Pomathorn Dean, December 1900, were referred by Mr
Cambridge to his T'meticus neglectus, which he now regards
as the female of D. fuscipes (Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist. Field
Club, vol. xxiv., 1903, pp. 155).

Areoncus humilis (Bl.).—Ad. f and ¢, Hope Terrace,
Edinburgh, August 1899; several ¢s and 9s, Levenhall,
Musselburgh, July 1900.

Minyriolus pusilus (Wid.).—Pomathorn Dean, a score of
ad. gs and $s, among moss, etc, under a fir tree, lst
December 1900.

34 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Walckendera nudipalpis (Westr.).—Ad. ¢ and 9, Swan-
ston, March 1900; ad. ¢, Glencorse Woods, March 1901.

Cornicularia cuspidata (Bl.)—Ad. f$ and @ in moss off
wall, Glencorse, November 1899; ad. ¢, Threipmuir, Feb-
ruary 1903.

Epeira cucurbitina (Clk.).—Ad. 2 off fir, Clackmannan
Forest, July 1903.

Epeira triguttata (Fabr.)=E. agalena, Wlk.—The Forest,
Clackmannan, three, off firs, July 1901; near Gifford, several
2s, June 1904; var. younguw, Cb., 2 off spruce, Tynehead,
August 1901 (named by Mr Cambridge).

Epeira umbratica (Clk.).—Ford, near Dalkeith, an ad. 2
under bark on dead ash, May 1903.

Epevra quadrata (Clk.).—Kelphope, Lammermuirs, several
2s on heather, October 1902.

Tarentula (Trochosa) andrenwwora (W\k.)— North Queens-
ferry, ad. 2, June 1900; bank of stream, near Saltoun,
East Lothian, 2? , August 1902.

Lycosa lugubris, W1k.—North bank of Esk above Polton,
ad. f, 29th May 1902.

Lycosa monticola (C. L. K.)—Ad. $s and 2s common on
links east of Largo, May 1900. Identification confirmed by
Mr Cambridge.

Neon reticulatus (Bl.).—Abbey Craig, near Stirling, a few
specimens, October 1901; Kelphope, Lammermuirs, a good
many, October 1902.

On Decalopoda australis, Lights. 39

VII. Scotia Collections—On Decalopoda australis, Hights—
an old Pyenogonid rediscovered. By T. V. Hopason,
Biologist to the National Antarctic Expedition. [Plates
Tif, and’ 1V-]

(Received 17th January 1905 ; read 23rd January 1905.)

Among the Pycnogonids collected in M‘Murdo Bay by
the “ Discovery” were several individuals having a pair of
ambulatory appendages more than those hitherto allotted
to the group. It was thought that this find was of sufficient
interest to justify its immediate publication to the zoological
world, so a description of this exceptional species was
accordingly sent to the Annals and Magazine of Natural
History for last December. Having heard that Mr W. S.
Bruce, of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, had also
secured a Pycnogonid with five pair of legs, I, somewhat
rashly perhaps, hazarded the suggestion that it might prove
to be the same species,—a wide distribution of South Polar
species is suspected, and to a considerable extent realised.
Soon after the publication of that paper, Mr W. S. Bruce very
kindly handed me his collection of Pycnogonids for descrip-
tion. I received them on 9th December, and at once per-
ceived that his species was a far finer and more interesting
one than that taken by the “ Discovery,” and therefore its
examination was undertaken forthwith. At the same time
a single specimen of a Pentanymphon was found among
a large number of an, as yet, undetermined species of
Nymphon from Station 325 Scotia Bay, South Orkneys.
Notwithstanding certain differences, I am not at present
prepared to regard this individual as specifically distinct
from P. antarcticum. The body is more robust than the
average specimens from M‘Murdo Bay, and the walking legs
shorter. The proportions of the various joints is apparently
the same as in the type species, the tarsus and propos
being, however, sub-equal in length. These two joints vary
in size on the different appendages of the specimen, one of
which is smaller than the rest. The denticulate spines of
the ovigerous legs present some probable differences from

36 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

the type, but are so much worn as to be utterly useless as
a specific character. When examined under a compound
lens, the body appears to be minutely scabrous; but this
is true of the M‘Murdo Bay specimens, though in a less
pronounced and varying degree.

While at the Natural History Museum in London, my
friend Dr W. T. Calman drew my attention to a communi-
cation by James Eights, M.D., to the Boston Journal of
Natural History, vol. i., 1837, concerning a certain Decalopoda
australis. On looking up the paper, I at once recognised
the species as identical with that taken by the Scottish
Expedition. Eights’ description, generic and specific, is
here republished verbatim, and my own, which is taken
from the recently-captured specimens from the South
Orkneys, follows and is at greater length.

“Genus Decalopoda.

“Thorax. Elliptical, composed of five segments, separated
from each other by slightly impressed articulations; anterior
one produced into a head-hke process. Contracted behind,
and having on its superior surface a sub-conic tubercle with
two eyes placed on each side; segments terminated at each
extremity by a tubular joint, to which are attached ten
perfect legs. Rostrum longer than the thorax, tubular,
clavate, arcuated downward, with a triangular aperture at
its apex; inserted into the anterior portion of the head-like
process below. Chelicerw rather longer than the rostrum,
inserted on each side of its base, above, bi-articulate, and
terminated by a forceps composed of a finger and thumb,
much curved, and meeting only a short distance along their
tips, the superior finger alone movable. Palpz setaceous,
ten-jointed, longer than the rostrum, inserted beneath the
chelicere. Lgg-bearing organs attached to a process at the
base of the palpi, ten-jointed, with a terminal incurved
nail. Legs cylindrical, composed of a three-jointed coxa,
one-jointed femur, and a two-jointed tibia and tarsus, the
latter terminated by a simple, slightly curved claw. <Abdo-
men? attached to the posterior segment of the thorax by a

On Decalopoda australis, Hights. 37

movable articulation, small, sub-clavate, and perforated at
its extremity by an anal incision.

“D. australis.

“Entire animal of a bright scarlet; disc of the thorax
convex, beneath slightly so; on the superior surface of the
tubular joints, near the margin, are situated about four very
small rigid spines; basal joint of the chelicerz elongated.
Palpi with the third and fifth joints elongate, the former of
greater length than the latter. gg-bearing organs with
the three first joints small and sub-equal, fourth and sixth
elongate, the remainder nearly equal; the four terminal
joints are prehensile, and have their inner margins dentated,
the teeth arranged in about four longitudinal rows. Legs
long and nearly equal, posterior pair rather smaller; joints
of the coxe short and sub-equal. Thighs about twice the
length of the coxe, furnished with small spines at their
superior extremity. The first joint of the tibia equal in
length to the thigh, the other rather longer. Tarsi as long
as the thigh; the last joint of the tibia and those of the
tarsi, each armed at their extremities beneath, with four
rigid spines. yes very small. Tegwments pergamineous.
Habitat, Sea in the vicinity of the New South Shetland
Islands.”

I have summarised the foregoing characters as follows,
without, it is hoped, losing any of the essential points.
The setaceous character of the palps is the only feature in
which the South Orkney specimens do not agree with those
of the South Shetlands.

Genus Decalopoda, Eights.

Body, including lateral processes, elliptical, smooth, not
always distinctly segmented, with five pair of ambul-
atory appendages; cephalic portion wide, with a
constricted neck.

Proboscis—longer than the body, clavate, bent downwards.

Abdomen—Long, slender, sub-clavate.

Mandrbles—Three-jointed, chelate, well developed.

Palps—Ten-jointed.

38 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Ovigerous legs—Ten-jointed, terminating in a claw, the
last four joints with several rows of non-denticulate
spines.

Decalopoda australis, Eights.

Body with a group of three or four very small, rigid spines
upon the dorsal surface of the lateral processes.

Proboscis—Minute spines irregularly distributed over
dorsal surface.

Mandibles—Base of chelze very short, fingers much curved
and devoid of teeth.

Palps—The third joint is considerably the longest; the
three terminal joints are sub-equal and shorter than
the seventh.

Walking legs smooth, with a few small spines at the
distal extremity of the joints. The second tibia is
the longest joint, the first being only a little shorter,
and the femur a little shorter still.

In comparing the South Orkney specimens with Eights
description, one is struck by the accuracy of that naturalist;
but, according to modern requirements, some small points
have been overlooked.

First with regard to colour, Eights describes his speci-
mens as being bright scarlet, and the body and coxe of the
figure have been so coloured. The South Orkney specimens,
after being in spirit for more than a year, do not show any
trace of such a colour. Some of the specimens are an
extremely light straw colour, without any trace of pigment
except in one or two cases, where a little is irregularly
distributed at the extremity of the proboscis. Other speci-
mens are a rich olive-brown colour, which is considerably
darker on the proboscis, mandibles, and palps. In one
specimen, the extremities of some of the legs are equally
darkly pigmented. The colour notes taken at the time,
and which have been forwarded to me, show that some
of the specimens were bright scarlet as Eights describes
them, others were a very dark red, and in the latter case
the proboscis is almost black. The scarlet colour appears
to be uniformly distributed over the body and limbs, the
proboscis and adjacent parts being darker than the rest.

On Decalopoda australis, Hights. 39

One specimen shows a distinct segmentation, two others
show it very indistinctly, and the remainder not at all.

The cephalon is separated from the rest of the body by
a narrow neck, and in the centre of it is a short and stout
ocular tubercle, with four well-developed eyes.

The proboscis is longer than the body, exclusive of the
abdomen, but not so long as the two together. It is much
swollen just beyond the middle, where it bends downwards
at a considerable angle. The mouth is small.

Along the middle line of the proboscis is a narrow band
of small spines which can hardly be said to have a regular
arrangement. More laterally, there are two or three rows
of spines not always well defined; the inner one comprises
several spines, the outer one may comprise only one or two.
On the whole, these are larger than the spines of the median
band. There may be one or two spines on the ventral
surface just behind the bend.

The mandibles are well developed and _ three-jointed.
They arise from the wide extremity of the cephalon at
the sides of the proboscis. The first joint is long, reaching
almost to the beginning of the median enlargement of that
organ; the second joint is very small, and constitutes the
angle in the direction of the appendage—seen from the side,
its dorsal margin presents a sinuous outline, and its distal
extremity is very deep. The chela is articulated near the
ventral angle, and les close underneath the first joint.
The hand is very small, both fingers are slender and
much curved, like a pair of calipers, the lips overlap.
There is no trace of teeth, nor are there any sete on the
appendage.

The ten-jointed palps rise on the ventral surface of the
body close against the proboscis.1 The first two joints are
very short and wide; the third is considerably the longest
of the series; the fourth is quite small; the fifth is long,
slightly constricted about two-thirds of its length—this and
the sixth are together equal in length to the third; the
seventh is a little longer than the sixth; and the remaining
three are sub-equal in length, each one being more slender

1 It is doubtful if the first is really a joint or a process of the body.

40 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

than the preceding one. In none of the specimens are the
palps setaceous, and this is the discrepancy between Hights’
description and these South Orkney examples.

The ovigerous legs rise from a small outgrowth of the
ventral surface of the body immediately behind the palps,
and nearer to the middle line. The first three joints are
quite small; the fourth is long, and only a little shorter
than the sixth; the fifth is about half the length, and,
as with the fourth, its distal diameter is greater than the
proximal, it is also somewhat curved. The four terminal
joints are sub-equal in length, bent on each other to form
a loop which is so characteristic of the genus Colossendeis.
Each joint is furnished with four rows of non-denticulate
spines, though on the terminal joint these spines are less
regularly arranged, and a fifth row may be distinguished.
The spines vary a good deal in form and size, the larger
ones are trenchant blades, bent rather close against the
surface from which they spring.

Of the three coxe, the first is by a little the shortest
and the middle one is the longest, but these differences are
very small. The first coxze bears both dorsally and ventrally
at its distal extremity a narrow and shallow groove which
runs along the greater part of the joint; this groove is
rendered conspicuous by a deeper colour, and its distal
extremity is marked by a very short, stout spine. The other
coxe have a similarly coloured line laterally, and this is
continued right to the extremity of the limb.

The limbs are quite smooth, and, except a few spinous
setee at the extremity of the joints, do not present any
peculiar features. In point of size the difference is hardly
noticeable without measurement. The fifth leg is the
smallest, the first comes next, and the fourth is inter-
mediate between the third and fifth, The second and
third are sub-equal, and the largest.

The proportion of the various joints is approximately the
same, variation being confined to very narrow limits.

The second tibia is the longest joint of the appendage,
the first being a trifle shorter, the femur a little shorter
still.

On Decalopoda australis, Hights. 41

The tarsus is longer than the propos, but the two together
are shorter than the femur.

On the dorsal extremity of the femur are five minute
spines, one median, and a pair on each side separated from
the median one by a considerable interval. On the first
tibia there are no spines at all, but traces of them exist
in one specimen.

On the second tibia, and the tarsus at the distal extremity,
are two pairs of long spines situated ventro-laterally. <A
pair of spines exists at the extremity at the propos under-
neath the claw.

All these spines are tolerably regular in their occurrence,
but one may be absent or reduced in size, and an additional
one may be present. The median spine on the ventral
surface of the three terminal joints is advantageously
missing, but this turns up in one or two instances.

The generic differences between Pentanymphon and Decalo-
oda are too obvious to need special mention. Pentanymphon,
without the extra pair of legs, could hardly be separated
from Vymphon except by a series of minute characters which
seems to find favour at the present day. Decalopoda, on the
other hand, is distinct from all known genera, but is most
nearly allied to Colossendeis. The well-developed three-
jointed mandibles separate it sharply. The palps, more
particularly the ovigerous legs, together with the ill-defined
segmentation of the body, place it unquestionably in close
relation to that genus.

Fifteen specimens of this interesting species were taken at
Station 325 between May and August 1903, in 9 to 10
fathoms, Scotia Bay, South Orkney Islands.

Eights says: “They are to be found in considerable
numbers in connection with the fuci thrown up by the
waves along the shores of the islands, after being detached
by the motion of the large masses of ice, from the bottom
of the sea.”

He further speaks of having obtained many specimens, all
being furnished with “ ege-bearing organs.”

- My best thanks are due to Mrs L. E. Sexton for the great
VOL, XVI. E

42 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

care and skill she has displayed in the preparation of the
drawings. I am also indebted to the Council of the Marine
Biological Association for accommodation at their Plymouth
Laboratory during the examination of certain of the South
Polar Collections.

REFERENCES.

Eieuts, J., ‘‘ Description of a New Animal belonging to the
Arachnides of Latreille, discovered in the sea along the
shores of the New South Shetland Islands,” Boston Jour.
Nat. Hist., vol. i., 1837, pp. 203-6. 1 Plate.

Hopeson, T. V., “On a new Pycnogonid from the South Polar
Regions,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. xiv.,
1904, pp. 458-462. 1 Plate.

VIII. The Black-backs of the Bass. By WILLIAM Evans,
F.R.S.E., M.B.0.U.

(Read 19th December 1904.)

It has long been known that a small colony of Herring
Gulls (Larus argentatus, Gmel.), and a few Black-backed
Gulls, annually make their nests on the grassy slopes near
the summit of the Bass. But, whereas the ornithologists
who visited the Rock during the first half of last century
seem all to have regarded the Black-backed Gulls they
observed breeding there as Great Black-backs (Larus
marinus, Linn.), only Lesser Black-backs (Larus fuscus,
Linn.) have been found by those who have carefully
examined the birds in recent years. In fact, the breeding
of Z. fuscus on the Bass was proved, as we shall see, some
forty years ago. The question thus raised is, Has there been
a change of species, or were the older naturalists wrong in
their identification? The point is of considerable import-
ance, for, if it could be established beyond doubt that no
mistake was made, it would show that formerly the breeding-
range of the Great Black-back on the east coast of Britain
extended much farther south than it now does. So far
as I know, LZ. marinus has, at the present time, no breeding-

The Black-backs of the Bass. 43

station on our east coast south of the Moray Firth. It is
quite conceivable, of course, that a pair may now and then
take it into their heads to breed in the neighbourhood of
their winter haunts on the shores of south-east Scotland,
but such cases, if they do occur, must be extremely rare.
A few apparently adult, but non-breeding birds, not un-
frequently remain behind throughout the summer months.

The earliest reference I can find to the breeding of any
of the larger gulls on the Bass is contained in Professor
John Walker’s account of the Rock, published along with
his other “ Essays” on Natural History in 1808, but written,
it is supposed, probably not later than 1774. Walker there
states that on the occasion of his visit to the Bass—date not
given—he found two birds which Ray, who was there on
19th August 1661, did not notice, one of them being “Larus
fuscus”—he gives it no English name. At first sight it
might be thought that we have here a record of the Lesser
Black-backed Gull; but it has to be remembered that in
this country the name LZ. fuscus was at that time errone-
-ously applied to the Herring Gull—see the works of
Pennant, Bewick, and Montagu. It is therefore highly
probable that Walker meant the Herring Gull; indeed,
Fleming in his “ Zoology” of the Bass (1847), assumes,
without comment, that this is so.

Disregarding, then, Walker’s observation, the first pub-
lished definite record of Black-backs nesting on the Bass,
seems to be that contained in the following statement made
by Selby in 1833 in his “ British Ornithology” (vol. ii.
p. 508).. We there read that the ‘“ breeding-stations” of the
Great Black-backed Gull “are on the Steep-holmes and
Lunday Islands in the Bristol Channel, Souliskerry in the
Orkneys, the Bass Island in the Firth of Forth, and one or
two other stations upon the Scottish coast.”

The next piece of evidence, in order of publication, is
contained in the very interesting account of a partially
domesticated Great Black-back, communicated by Dr
Patrick Neill of Canonmills, Edinburgh, to Audubon, who
printed it in the third volume (pp. 312-315) of his “Or-
nithological Biography,” issued in 1835. Neill’s account

44 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

of this bird ought to be read in full; it is, however, too
long for reproduction here. The following are the chief
facts narrated:—In the course of the summer of 1818,
Neill had a “big scorie” brought to him “by a Newhaven
fisher-boy, who mentioned that it had been picked up at sea,
about the mouth of the Firth of Forth. The bird was not
then fully fledged: it was quite uninjured: it quickly
learned to feed on potatoes and kitchen refuse, along with
some ducks; and it soon became more familiar than they,
often peeping in at the kitchen window in hopes of getting
a bit of fat meat, which it relished highly.” It used to
follow his servant about the doors, “expanding its wings,
and vociferating for food.’ After two moults it began to
assume “the dark plumage of the back, and the shape and
colour of the bill of the Larus marinus, or Great Black-
backed Gull.” A pair of Lesser Black-backs which he also
then possessed “ had never allowed the newcomer to associate
with them.” Being perfectly tame, the precaution of cutting
its quills to prevent flight was not taken. Accordingly in
the spring of 1822, as might have been anticipated, it dis-
appeared, and its owner gave up all expectation of ever
hearing more of it. To his surprise it returned, however, to
its old haunts in the garden, in the end of October, when it
was secured; but, not seeming to like confinement, it was
soon allowed its liberty again. Though after this more
cautious and shy than formerly, it still continued to frequent
the garden and adjoining mill-pond till the beginning of
March 1823, when its visits ceased, and they “saw no more
of him till late in the autumn of that year.” Year after
year this disappearing and returning of “ Neill’s gull,” as the
village boys called it, went on, and was duly noted till 1835
at least, when Audubon’s volume was published, the latest
extract from Neill’s common-place book being as follows :—
“11th March 1835: The Black-backed Gull was here yester-
day, but has not been seen to-day; nordo I expect to see him
till November.” In closing the account of this bird Neill
remarked: “A few pairs of the Great Black-backed Gull
breed at the Bass Rock yearly, and it seems highly probable
that my specimen had originally been hatched there.”

The Black-backs of the Bass. 45

In 1836 MacGillivray, who had visited the Bass on 13th
May 1831, and again, along with Audubon, on 19th August
1835, published his “ Rapacious Birds,” in which (p. 176)
is given a list of the birds he observed on the island. Three
gulls are included, namely, Larus marinus, L. argentatus,
and, of course, the Kittiwake. In his “ History of British
Birds,” vol. v. (1852), he does not mention having seen
either species of Black-back on the Bass; but he describes
(p. 535) the young of LZ. marinus “when about a week old,”
from “two specimens taken from the Bass Rock, in the end
of June 1824, by Mr De Jersey.” Iam not aware, however,
of any character by which chicks of the two species can be
distinguished with certainty, so that unless the parents
were properly identified, this record is not so convincing as
might at first appear. It is not unworthy of remark that
in the same volume (p. 540) MacGillivray describes two
adult male Lesser Black-backs which “ were shot near North
Berwick (also) in the end of June 1824.” Of course they
may not have been breeding in the neighbourhood.

In 1843 Part IV. of Sir Wm. Jardine’s “ Birds of Great
Britain” (Nat. Lib. Series) was published, and there (p. 300)
we find, under Great Black-backed Gull, the following state-
ment by that well-known ornithologist. “We have our-
selves,’ he writes, “ observed a few pairs breeding on the
Bass Rock in the Firth of Forth, and in one or two similarly
insulated situations.”

My next quotation is from the Rev. R. B. Graham’s
description of the Parish of North Berwick, published in
1845 in vol. ii. of the “New Statistical Account of Scotland.”
The article is dated April 1839, and contains (p. 321) the
following “statement of the birds that breed on the Bass,”
as furnished to the compiler by the keeper of the island :—

“The Solan Goose or Gannet, measuring 6 feet from tip to
tip of the wings; the large black gull, about 5 feet; the
large blue gull, about 4 feet 9 inches; the kittiwake, about
3 feet 7 inches; the common marrot, or guillemot, about
2 feet 8 inches; the puffin or Tommy-norrie, about 2 feet ;
the razor-billed marrot, or common puffin, about 2 feet 4
inches ; the falcon or hawk, the large raven, the eider-duck,

46 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

and the cormorant [shag?]; with innumerable flocks of
smaller birds not peculiar to the Bass.” It is added (p. 322)
that, “The eggs of the sea-fowls that are sold, are those
only of the black and blue gull, at 1s. 6d. a dozen.” If the
measurement given for the “large black gull,” namely, about
5 feet, being 3 inches more than that given for the herring
gull, was taken from a bird obtained on the Bass, it points
undoubtedly to Z. marinus rather than to L. fuscus.

We come now to the volume entitled “The Bass Rock,”
dated December 1847. The article on the Zoology was
contributed by Dr Fleming, but it throws little or no light
on our subject, beyond an indication of the scarcity of the
birds at that time, and the probable cause. This is what
he says:—‘The Black-backed Gull, Larus marinus, 1s
enumerated among the feathered inhabitants of the Bass,
in the Statistical Account to which we have already referred.
We observed one single bird during one of our visits, and
while performing its usual evolutions, uttering its well-
known warning cry to all to beware.” And of the Herring
Gull :—“<This still occurs, but in very limited numbers.”
Referring to the disturbance and persecution to which the
birds breeding on the Bass were then subjected—the fashion
of shooting sea-birds in the breeding season sprang up about
this time—he remarked that “the list . .. in one season,
would not in all probability correspond in every particular
with that of another season, the difference arising from
causes sufficiently obvious.”

At this stage, an entry in Oates’s “Catalogue of Eggs in
the British Museum,” vol. i. (1901), p. 212, naturally falls
to be noticed. It is as follows—Larus marinus :—“1. Bass
Rock, Salvin-Godman Coll.” About two years ago, I asked
Mr Howard Saunders if he could tell me the history of this
specimen, and received from him the following reply :—<I
have been to the British Museum to-day and examined the
ege in question. It certainly looks like an egg of Larus
marinus, and you know that there is a ‘character’ about
the egg of that bird, not quite indisputable, it is true. Still
I should say the odds are strongly in its favour. The entry
in Salvin’s own writing in his carefully kept Catalogue is—

The Black-backs of the Bass. 47

‘L. marinus: an egg I bought in 1853 in Edinburgh, said
to be that of Great Black-backed Gull from the Bass Rock,
where the bird certainly does breed.’” The dimensions of
this egg, as I have since ascertained from the Museum, are—
axis, 3°0 in.; diameter, 2°05 in. A Great Black-back’s it
undoubtedly seems to be, but one feels there is a link
awanting to connect it for certain with the Bass.

I may here state that, in the beginning of 1902, I also
wrote to Prof. Newton, inquiring whether there was any-
thing in Wolley’s notes or collection of eggs relating to
the Black-backs of the Bass, and received from him an
answer in the negative. At same time, he kindly mentioned
that in his own collection are three eggs given to him
in 1846, as Great Black-back’s from the Firth of Forth,
by a schoolfellow who went to spend his holidays at or
near Edinburgh, “and which, from their size,” he adds, “I
believe to be right.” Prof. Newton thinks that, at that
time, a dealer would have no particular object in giving a
wrong locality.

Part of my boyhood was spent in East Lothian, and
between 1860 and 1864 I heard a good deal about the birds
then breeding on the Bass from my father and Dr Charles
Nelson of Pitcox, who visited the Rock together on several
occasions during that period. My own first visit to Canty
Bay, where the lessee of the Rock lives, also occurred then,
but I have no clear recollection of the eggs exposed for sale
there. This much, however, I can say, namely, that I was
brought up in the belief that the Black-backs frequenting
the Bass were the Lesser species, and that two eggs obtained
from there in 1862 as such, were among the treasures of my
first collection. One of them, with the card to which
they were glued, bearing the name, locality, and date
printed on it by myself at the time, is still in existence.
These eggs were too small for Great Black-back’s, and
under the circumstances are not likely to have been
Herring Gull’s.

A. G. More, in his paper “On the Distribution of Birds
in Great Britain during the Nesting-season” (Jbis, 1865),
shows both species of Black-backed Gull as occurring in his

48 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

province XIV., in which Berwickshire and Haddingtonshire
are includued, but he gives no locality or authority.

Dr R. O. Cunningham, in his paper on the Gannet (Jdis,
1866), gives a list of “The principal birds that breed on
the Bass,” and in it the only Black-back mentioned is JZ.
marinus. He states that he visited the Rock in 1862; but
he does not tell us which of the species he names were
observed by himself. Confidence in the list is not increased
by the inclusion of the Common Gull (Z. canus) and the
Cormorant.

We now come to a very important record, namely, that of
E. T. Booth, contained in the Catalogue of Birds in his
Museum at Brighton (1876), and in his “ Rough Notes” on
British Birds. The Catalogue states (p. 173, and Index, p, 7)
that case No. 217 contains a pair of Lesser Black-back Gulls,
with their eggs, obtained on the Bass Rock in June 1867.
When in Brighton a number of years ago (1887), I visited the
Museum and took special note of this interesting case. In
Part V. of “Rough Notes,’ issued in 1883, Booth gives
(under Gannet) “a list of birds that usually breed on the
Bass,” as observed by himself: among them are the Lesser
Black-back, “seldom more than a pair or two,” and the
Herring Gull, ‘scarcely more plentiful than the last ’”—
has found “as many as three nests in one day.” He had
never noticed the Great Black-back nesting there. This
is what he says in his article on that species (Part IX,
1885): “The Bass Rock was formerly stated to be fre-
quented during the nesting-season; but this resort must,
according to my own observations, have been deserted
for nearly five-and-twenty years.” The following extract
from the Catalogue (p. 179) explains the scarcity of the
Gulls :—“ Some years ago, these birds [Herring Gulls] were
plentiful on the Bass, where they nested every season. The
person who hired the Rock, finding that the Jackdaws
which had recently taken up their quarters in the rabbit-
burrows near the summit were very destructive to the
eggs of the sea-fowl, endeavoured to destroy them by laying
down poisoned bread and butter; this, however, was
greedily devoured by the larger species of gulls, who suffered

"at ee

N ae, pas

a 403.0000 201 ¢
;
“ROYAL ‘PHYSICAL ‘ SOOLBIY.
‘
& FOR THE |
PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHES OF
NATURAL HISTORY.
‘SESSION 1904-1905.
No. 3. ee Mion RAE. 8) Paes 49- 9G:
y 3
fe ( 0 N T Ki N T S.
Hee } \ pee PAGE
The Black- backs of the Bass—Continued. By Wonaran Byans, F F.R.S.E.,
M.B.O.U., By actos 3 ; ; Br tosge Sy a en
. On the ' Distribution of jhe Pelagic Ue in Scottish Lakés, By
_ JAMES Murray, id batt, wae ; : (race jy Os : bag
A Possible Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters, ae. Bi
Oxampron, M.B., O.M., ‘ j . : j © ae Ow
“Scotia” Collections : _ Scottish Aatandtie Expedition. —Report \on the
eR arene By. Professor J. ARTHUR THomson, M.A., .° . 76
Notes on the Lower. Carboniferous Fishes of Eastern Fifeshtire. . By, Dr R.
H, Traquarr, E.R.S., F.G.S. [Plate'V.], os Se Ree ane 80
? The Odonata (Dragon ies) of the Forth Area. By WiLirAM EVANS,
“Wes ERS E., i Net vin alte Maren bay ig cy. Te Cait pee we OF
en . Feonvnencits MS ‘FARLANE & ERSKINE.
ta ews ese. ay We ik) KY Si JUNE. 1905. Tree Ce Fy a 4

\'

PRICH OF THE “PROCEEDINGS.

Vol. I, Part 1 (1854-56), owt of print, . ; Sa
Do. Part 2 (1856-58), out of print, . : - 2 Oy \ His
Vol. II, Part 1 (1858-61), out of print, . : .. oF
Do. Part 2 (1861-62), out of print, . . a } ‘a
Vol. IIT, Part 1 (1862-63), out of print, . : - ies
Do. Part 2, (1863-64), out of print, . : : = AAS /
Do. Part 3 (1864-65), out of print, . : |
Do. Part 4 (1865-66), out of print, . : os
To the Fellows. To the Public.
Vol. IV. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print, . 3/6 5/
Do. Part 2 (1875-76), out of print, . 3/6 5/
Do. Part 3 (1876-78), out of print, . 5/ 7/6
Vol. ~ V. Part 1 (1878-79), : ole 5/
Do. Part 2 (1879-80), : iG 10/
Vol. Vit (1880-81), : ee gL 10/
Title and Index of this Vol. issued
with Part 1, Vol. VII. ee
Vol, Wii, Parti1(1881-82), : . A/ 5/
Do. Part 2 (1882-83), ; SECA 3/6
Vol. VIII. Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print, . 7/6 10/
Do. Part 2 (1884-85), ] is 10/
Vol. IX. Part 1 (1885-86), : los 12/6
Do. Part 2 (1886-87), . 3/6 5/
Do. Part 3 (1887-88), . 4/6 6/
Vol. X. Part 1 (1888-89), SOF 7/
Do. Part 2 (1889-90), : « =O) 12/6
Vol. XI. Part 1 (1890-91), : Seb 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1891-92), : ed), 6/6
Vol. XII. Part 1 (1892-93), ; i ey 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1893-94), . 12/6 15/
Vol. XIII. Part 1 (1894-95), : s_ | 476 6/
Do. Part 2 (1895-96), ? : 5 / 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1896-97), ; NL OF 7/6
Vol. XIV. Part 1 (1897-98), ; ey 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1898-99), , shes | 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1899-1900), .. eae 5/
Do. Part 4(1900-1901), ass 5/
Vol. XV. Part 1 (1901-1902), ; . - 3/6 5/
Do. Part 2 (1902-1904), : : 3/6 5/
Vol. XVI. No. 1 (Pages 1-24), : : 1/ 1/3
Do. No. 2 (Pages 25-48), . : 1/6 2/
Do. No. 3 (Pages 49-96), . 2/ 2/6
The following may also be had of the Librarian :
Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL., : Ai)
Do. do. Vol. VEIL. Part.1,. | 22a
Forms of Application for Fellowshiv may be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, : : : 10/6

Annual Subscription, : : : 12/6

YUL 4 an
Ly 1905

The Black-backs of the Bass. 49

in consequence, and since that time there have been but
two or three pairs of either Herring Gulls or Lesser
Black-backs about the Rock.”

In June 1869 I landed on the Bass and found the Gulls
just as Booth has described, that is to say, one or two pairs
of L. fuscus and a few of ZL. argentatus; and I heard the
same account of the result of the poison laid down for the
Jackdaws.

The Scottish Naturalist for 1873 (vol. ii. pp. 54-56)
contains some “Notes on the Birds of the Bass Rock” by
Mr James Lumsden, in which it is implied that the
Herring Gull, the Kittiwake, the Common Gull, the Great
Black-back, and the Lesser Black-back all bred there at that
time; but seeing his list of birds is made up of “those
observed or heard of from authentic sources,” during a
visit to the Rock in August (1872), it may, as far as the
present inquiry is concerned, be dismissed without further
comment.! :

On 30th July 1873 the Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club
visited the Bass, but the account of the excursion (Proceed-
ings, vol. vii. p. 17), instead of telling us what birds were
seen on that occasion, adopts, practically verbatim, the list
given in the Statistical Account of 1845 (to which I have
already referred), and that, too, without acknowledgment.

On 24th May 1883 I spent five or six hours on the Bass,
and paid particular attention to the gulls, with the view of
obtaining identified eggs. There were only two or three
pairs of Lesser Black-backs to be seen, and I succeeded in
watching one of the birds on to its nest. An egg taken
measures 2°7X1°8 in.; another Bass egg is 2°6x1°8 in.
There were a good many (10 to 15) pairs of Herring Gulls
about, and several were watched to their nests also. On
5th June 1884 the numbers were practically unaltered, and
five or six years later they seemed still to be much the
same, at anyrate in the case of the Black-backs, though
the Herring Gulls were liable to some fluctuation. It was

1 A random statement by Col. Drummond-Hay (Scottish Naturalist, 1881,
‘p. 5) that the nearest breeding-stations of the Great Black-backed Gull to
the Tay are the Bass and the Isle of May may also be safely neglected.

VOL. XVI i

50 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

therefore rather a surprise to me when in 1896 Messrs
W. Eagle Clarke and T. G. Laidlaw reported, that on 13th
June they had found between 20 and 30 pairs of Lesser
Black-backs nesting on the Rock, and not more than 6 to 8
pairs of Herring Gulls.' In 1897 the Black-backs were
again present in force; on 12th June I estimated them at
not less than 25 to 30 pairs, and found quite a number of
their nests. The Herring Gull was represented by 2 or 3
pairs only. On 24th June 1899, however, when my next
visit was made, I found the old proportions restored—there
were 15 to 20 pairs of Z. argentatus, but not more than 4
pairs of Z. fuscws could be detected. And so matters stood,
I was told, at the beginning of the nesting season of 1901,
the year the erection of the lighthouse was begun; but
when I was on the island with the Berwickshire Naturalists’
Club on 19th June, very few of the larger gulls remained,
the majority having been scared away by the workmen.
The establishment of a lighthouse on the Bass probably
means its gradual desertion by these gulls, which, nesting
as they do on the grassy top, are now liable to continual
disturbance. There seemed to be very few about the Rock
last summer—from the deck of the steamer I could make
out only 3 or 4 Herring Gulls and a single Lesser Black-
back flying around. [1905, May 27—Landed on the Bass
to-day : found just two pairs of LZ. fuscus nesting, and 15 to
18 pairs of argentatus.—W. E. |

All the evidence I have been able to gather on the
subject having now been given, what conclusions can be
drawn from it? It clearly proves two things, namely—
(1) that the naturalists who visited the Bass during the
first half of last century were unanimous in regarding the
Black-backs that then bred there as belonging to the —
greater species, Larus marinus; and (2) that since about
1860, however, the lesser species, LZ. fuscus, alone has been
ascertained to nest there.

1 The Lesser Black-backed Gull is ineluded among the birds breeding
on the Bass in an article by Mr Eagle Clarke in Pollock’s ‘‘ Dictionary of
the Forth,” 1891, but he had not, he tells me, personally visited the Rock
at that time.

The Black-backs of the Bass. d1

More than this we shall probably never be able to settle.
One can hardly imagine that the earlier ornithologists were
altogether wrong in their identification; yet, unfortunately
it cannot, I think, be said that they have left behind them
any conclusive evidence on the point... At same time, I see
no good reason why a pair or two of Great Black-backs
should not in those days have resorted to the Bass for the
purpose of rearing their young. An odd pair may even have
occasionally done so since, but to my mind this is unlikely.
My experience has led me to form the opinion that the Great
Black-back is a winter visitor to the “Forth,” while the
Lesser Black-back is as essentially a summer visitor.

IX. On-the Distribution of the Pelagic Organisms im
Scottish Lakes. By JAMES MurRRAY.

(Read 23rd January 1905.)

The survey of the Scottish lochs is now so nearly com-
pleted, that it is possible to review the more important
facts in the distribution of the organisms which constitute
the plankton. For districts not visited by the Lake Survey,
information as to the Crustacea is supplied by the numerous
observations of Dr Scott (1 and 2) on the lochs of the
mainland and islands; while Messrs West (4) have done
valuable work on the phytoplankton of the Highlands and
the Outer Hebrides. Mr Scourfield (5) has also studied
the Entomostraca of part of the central Highlands, and has
examined many collections sent by us from other districts.

The plankton of lakes does not at first sight appear to
offer a very promising subject for the study of geographical
distribution, as it is known to be of a nearly uniform
character over vast areas. As stated by Dr C. Wesenberg-
Lund (6) in a paper read before the Royal Society of
Edinburgh on 23rd January 1905, “freshwater plankton
is very homogeneous from Pole to Pole”; “the plankton

1 The somewhat parallel case of the alleged former nesting of the Common
Gull (Z. canus) at St Abb’s will no doubt occur to some. The existence
- for generations of a large colony of Z. fuscus on the Farne Isles may, perhaps,
also be noted.

52 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

of Greenland is similar to that of North Africa.” Some
of the smaller plankton organisms have probably a world-
wide range. In such a limited area as Scotland, it would
not, then, be surprising if there were no important variation
of the plankton over the whole country. This is far from
being the case. The plankton of the extreme north differs
greatly from that of the south; that of the west from that
of the east. Scotland appears to be favourably situated
for the study of fresh-water plankton, as from its geo-
graphical position it forms a meeting place for the northern
and southern zooplankton, the eastern and western phyto-
plankton. All classes of organisms in the plankton do
not exhibit equally this difference of character between
the north and the south, the east and the west; it is
most marked among the Crustacea, especially of the genus
Diaptomus, and in the Desmids.

ROTIFERA.

The pelagic Rotifera of the Scottish lakes form a very
small society. There are only about a dozen common
species, which are distributed over the whole of the main-
land and islands, some of them being the commonest of
all plankton organisms; a few rare species are found in
one or two lochs. There is no indication of the restriction
of any species of Rotifera to definite regions of the country,
except the occurrence in many lochs of North Uist and
Shetland of Plesoma hudsoni, a much larger species than
the common P. truncatum of the mainland. This apparent
limitation, however, may arise merely from insufficient
observations of fresh material.

CRUSTACEA.

Among the Cladocera, the genus Bosmina includes two
species which are dominant in the east and west re-
spectively.

Bosmina obtusirostris, Sars, prevails over the whole of
central, west, and north Scotland, and the islands, being in
extensive districts the only species; it is not wholly absent
in the east, but is rarer there.

Bosmina longirostris (O. F. Muller) is the common species

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes. 53

in the shallow waters of the east and south, but occurs here
and there in the Highlands, as in Loch Ness, where, however,
it is a littoral form. Dr Scott has recorded it from a con-
siderable number of lochs in the north and west, the
Shetland Islands, Uist, and Barra. Mr J. Hewitt has
also recently noted it from a number of lochs in Lewis.
I have not in a single instance found the species in the
plankton of the lochs in those districts. I consider it -
probable that, as Dr Scott in many instances made his
examination from the shore, while we invariably worked
from boats, it will be found that where B. longirostris occurs
it will be a littoral species, while B. obtusirostris, as in
Loch Ness, is the true pelagic form.
_ Daphnia hyalina, Leydig, var. lacustris, varying to var.
galeata, is common over nearly the whole of Scotland. I
think it probable that in parts of the lowlands of the east
and north it is replaced by D. cucullata, Sars, but the dis-
tribution of the latter species has not yet been worked out. ~
The distribution of all the species of Diaptomus is of the
greatest interest. Four species are common in the plankton
of the whole or some part of the country,—these are
D. gracilis, D. lacimatus, D. laticeps, and D. wierzejski ;
there is a single record of another species, D. baccilzfer,
which was found in Loch Earn; JD. castor is found only
in small ponds, and is rare, though widely distributed.
Diaptomus gracilis, G. O. Sars, is found in almost every
loch on the mainland, is very rare in Orkney, and appears
to be absent from the Shetland Islands, Uist, and Barra.
Mr Hewitt tells me that it is frequent in Lewis. It has been
found at a greater altitude than any of the other species,
being the only species in most of the highest lochs surveyed.
Diaptomus laciniatus, Lilljeb., is commoner in Lewis than
elsewhere; is frequent in Sutherland, Ross, and Inverness;
occurs in Loch Shiel, Loch Lomond, and Loch Doon; and
has its eastern limit, so far as known, in som_ small lochs
in the extreme west of Aberdeenshire, where it was found
by Mr R. M. Clark (3). It is more alpine than the two
following species, and in some districts, as in the neighbour-
hood of the Great Glen, for instance, it occupies the hill

54 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

lochs, while D. laticeps takes its place in those at a lower
level. Elsewhere it is found in lochs very little above sea-
level, such ag Loch Lomond and Loch Shiel, but those lochs
are always in mountainous districts, while D. laticeps and
D. wierzejskii are often found in lowland districts.

Diaptomus laticeps, G. O. Sars, is very closely related to
the following species, D. wierzejskii. The most conspicuous
difference between them is found in the process on the
antepenultimate joint of the right antenna of the male,
which is pectinate in D. wierzejskii, plain in D. laticeps.
In certain lochs of Sutherland, various gradations between
the two forms of process have been observed, along with the
typical forms of both species, and I regard D. hircus, Brady,
as such an intermediate form; nevertheless, I have in this
study of distribution kept the two species apart, in deference
to the opinion of Mr Scourfield and other authorities who
consider them to be good species, and because, although the
differences between them may be of little systematic im-
portance, they must have some physiological significance,
since their distribution is widely different, D. wrerzejskw
being a purely northern form, while D. /aticeps has an
extensive range on the west. D. laticeps is the commonest
species of the genus, after D. gracilis, being found in
Shetland, Sutherland, Ross, Perth, and Argyle, common in
the Outer Hebrides and Inverness, and having its eastern
limit in some small lochs of Perthshire, very close to those
Aberdeen lochs in which Mr Clark found D. laciniatus.
The area of distribution of this species in Scotland corre-
sponds approximately with that of D. laciniatus, but in
spite of this general agreement, the two species are almost
completely separated: though they often occupy adjacent
lochs, I know of only a few lochs in which both species
occur together.

D. wierzejskii, Richard, is very abundant in Shetland,
common in the Outer Hebrides, and occurs in a few lochs
in Sutherland, and one loch in Ross. I have recorded it
as occurring in some hill lochs of central Perth, but those
records really refer to D. laticeps, which at that time I
united with D. wierzejskw as a mere form.

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes. 55

Both D. laticeps and D. wierzejskit are undoubtedly much
commoner in the districts in which they occur than the
figures in the accompanying Table would indicate; but in
a great many lochs only immature animals were obtained,
and in that case it is impossible to tell to which species
they belong, though it is known that it must be one of
those two. This is also true of D. laciniatus, though that
is recognisable at an earlier stage than the others.

PHYTOPLANKTON,

Messrs W. and G. 8. West have studied the algz of the
plankton in a large number of the Scottish lochs. Much
of their work is not yet published, and the published papers
do not deal with a sufficiently wide area to enable us to
take a comprehensive view of the distribution of the phyto-
plankton in general; only in the case of the more con-
spicuous of the Desmids of the plankton, where their work
has been supplemented by the observations of the Lake
Survey, are we able to review the distribution over the
whole country. Messrs West have pointed out the extreme
richness of the Desmid-flora of the Scottish plankton, and
have shown that the most conspicuous species in it are
of a distinctly western type, being found in Europe only
in the western portions of the British Isles, Scandinavia,
and in some cases Lapland; while in North America they
are frequent in the eastern parts of the United States and
in Nova Scotia. In the appended Table I have only traced
the distribution of a few of the Desmids of this western
type, as they alone present features of interest.

Micrasterias wallachu, Grun., though not cited by Messrs
West as belonging to the western type, is included, as it
is a rare plant, and its distribution is therefore of interest.
It has been found in seven lochs,—Lochs Burraland and
Littlester, in Shetland; Lochs nan Cuinne, Leum a
Chlamhain, and Ruar, in Sutherland; Lochs Bhaic and
Nan Eun, in Perthshire.

In preparing the accompanying Table to illustrate the
distribution of some Crustacea and Desmids, I have tried

56 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

to show the relative abundance of each species rather more
accurately than can be done by the usual mode of using
variants of common (c¢, cc, ccc) and rare (r, rr, rrr), as is
often done. To this end I have divided Scotland into ten
convenient districts, and taken the loch as a unit. The
figures in the columns, then, under each district, and opposite
each species, indicate the number of lochs in that district
in which that species was found. When exact data are
not available, the following signs are employed :—* indicat-
ing that a species has been noted by Dr Scott, + that it has
been observed by the Lake Survey, although the number of
lochs cannot be given.

DISTRIBUTION OF SOME CRUSTACEA AND DESMIDS IN THE
ScoTTISH LAKES.

DISTRICTS.
2 5 | |
es aes 3 mal oe deel aeell eel ae
\So\23/S3| Bles|BE) S| Psi Seisa
SS (35/28) 2/85 |<2\ 08 25) 58/S8
SPECIES. as|58 52 22/8 \52\/28 34) $8) 88 |Torats.
p25 (25/95/2585 (sk (83 1S | S3\ 28
a2\p2 ga Bm 52|8a|/Ro|\Ze2|g2|80
68/5/88 2 E)33) $/ “8/48 ge
R | 3 |
Ay
| |
Diaptomus gracilis,G.O. Sars, |. 1 | ... | 23 | 40 | 54 | 25 | 34 | 24] 9] 6 216
» laciniatus, Lilljeb., Arie i ate a ae 0 la ig Ne | 37
:, laticeps, G. O. Sars, AS MA a Blew Apel ocd SED ola: ceudl 44
yo dbterzejsicie, uichard. is.) Dae" yaa cae Whine: a) ee on ee 31
Bosmina obtusirostris, Sars, .| 16 | 39 | 35 | 37 | 59 | 22 | 31} 16) 4 | q. 259
, longirostris(O.F.Muller);|; * | ,* Pos lien ze 3 2 del. a 2 | eet 9
Staurastrum ophiura, Lund, . pat ad oa fa Cs a Wen: eee eo || hie 45
,, arctiscon, Lund, AMO] Ol) AK) #34 eehe lh Sl ee 29
», sexangulare, Rabenh., oe ee ee Os mere me eles ec eee 9
5) wrastiense, Nordst., © “s'est a |) a We Poy | Ie) aoe 15
,, anatinum, Cooke& Wills, 6) 7) 7 | tT} tT | 2] ..:] 2. | i 22
;, longispinum, Archer, 10 8 | 4 4 Dig al dee 29
ae ae ae Be pee: 1 he en a earl Maat ua 4 | ae 16
», lunatum, Ralfs, var. 2 | | : |
planctonicum, West., cable See he) et age ; =
ea pscuaopelagicim; West. | 1000 Wee leah at a Gy tee ae
5, jaculiferum, West., . AMMEN oe ely pe pes) ieee mea ee) ae
», curvatum, West., gi! eg mania ay eset a” Zoe) eee a 23
megacanthum, Lund, 1D el eee es ieee TI cee ee 5
Micrasterias FSurcata, Agh., mick 2 6 ] ] Ea eee | 13
», wallichit, Gran., 2 3 | 2 7

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes. 57

The most important fact which emerges from a study
of the distribution of the various species included in the
Table, is that many of them occupy areas which coincide
approximately. Diaptomus laticeps, D. laciniatus, and the
Desmids of the western type, alike extend over the whole
of Scotland north of the Caledonian Canal, and into the
Outer Hebrides; south of the Great Glen they are confined
to the west coast and some of the central counties, being
entirely absent, so far as we know, from all the eastern
counties south of the Moray Firth. All have their eastern
limit in some small lochs about the extreme western corner
of Aberdeenshire. There are some minor differences in the
details of distribution—D. laciniatus is absent from the
Orkneys, Shetland, North Uist, and Barra; it extends a
little farther south than D. laticeps; the western Desmids
extend still a little farther south, to the shores of the
Solway Firth.

Having regard to the distribution of plankton, therefore,
Scotland may be divided into two regions—(1) northern
and western, characterised by several species of Diaptomus
and many species of Desmids; (2) eastern, characterised by
the absence of those species.

The eastern region, it may be noticed, is principally low-
land, the western mainly highland; but the chief distinction
between them is not merely that of alpine and lowland, as
large districts of the north, where the northern Crustacea
and the western Desmids attain their maximum develop-
ment, are lowland in character.

Although the peculiar Desmids and Crustacea are associ-
ated in the same area in Scotland, the Desmids are at the
eastern limit of their range, the Diaptomide at the
western—the species of Diaptomus of the two sides of
the Atlantic being entirely distinct. D. laciniatus extends
into Scandinavia and the extreme north of Russia, and is
also found in the alpine lakes of Switzerland. D. wierzejskw
has been found in many places sufficiently far apart—
Madrid, Saxony, the Kola Peninsula. JD. laticeps is found
in Scandinavia.

The peculiar association of species belonging to so many

VOL. XVI. G

58 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

different regions, which we find in the plankton of the west
and north of Scotland, offers a problem in distribution, the
solution of which may be difficult. The conditions which
combine to produce this remarkable admixture of forms
are no doubt sufficiently complex, and I shall here only
touch upon some suggestions that have been put forward
in explanation of some of the facts.

Dr Lund (6), in discussing the abundance of Desmids
in the Scottish plankton, suggests that they are in great
part directly derived from the surrounding bogs by being
washed out into rivers, and so carried into the lochs, that
some of them may have become adapted to a pelagic life,
and modified in accordance with it, and that the peaty
water of the Scottish lochs, being favourable to Desmid
life, may account for their greater abundance in Scotland
than elsewhere. These are no doubt explanations of some
of the facts; peat-bogs are the headquarters of the Desmids,
and a large number of the Desmids which we find in the
plankton can be recognised as having come from that source ;
but we have a very large number of truly pelagic species,
some of which are rare in the bogs but common in the
plankton; and we have also the numerous species unknown
in Europe, except in this narrow littoral strip of Britain
and Scandinavia. There must surely be somewhere else
in Europe extensive sphagnum swamps, and lakes deriving
peaty water from them, but it is only here that the rich
Desmid-flora is found. The species of Desmids so abundant
in our plankton are not even in the peat-bogs of the rest of
Europe. Some of our clearest and least peaty lochs, Loch
Morar for instance, are very rich in Desmids; and some
very peaty lochs are poor, Loch Ness for instance.

Another theory is that the lochs which are richest in
Desmids are only found in the older geological formations,
but this does not accord with the facts, as I find that such
lochs occur in all the formations from the Lewisian to the
Tertiary at least; and it will, I think, be found that some
of these lochs lie entirely in glacial deposits.

Sir John Murray points out that when the area occupied
by the rich western flora of Desmids is plotted out on a map,

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes. 59

it corresponds very closely with the area of greatest rain-
fall. A connection between this fact and the abundance of
Desmids might be supposed in two ways: granting that
peaty-water is favourable to Desmids, we may suppose that
the heavier rainfall washes out more peaty matter from the
bogs and carries it into the lochs; or that it prevents the
accumulation of other substances in solution which would
be deleterious to Desmids.

Considering the fact that the Desmids of the western type
have a distribution entirely littoral, occupying only those
countries bordering the North Atlantic on both sides, I
think it highly probable that the conditions determining
their limits will be found to be mainly climatic, and that
the proximity of the ocean is one of these, whether by its
effect on the mean temperature of the adjacent fresh-water
lochs, or by affecting the rainfall.

If the western Desmids have had their origin in North
America, and have reached our shores from that source, it is
difficult to account for their failure to spread farther over
Europe, unless there is some climatic check upon their
advance.

A prominent feature of the Scottish plankton is the Arctic
character of its Crustacea. Dr Lund cites the following
species as belonging to the Arctic association of plankton
Crustacea :—Holopediwm gibberum, Bythotrephes longimanus,
Daptomus lacumatus, Daphnia hyalina, and Bosmina ob-
tusirostris. All of those except the Daphnia and Bosmina are
summer species, and die off in winter. They form about one-
half of the total number of species of Crustacea in the Scottish
plankton, which is very poor in Entomostraca; in quantity
they greatly preponderate during the summer. The other com-
mon Crustacea in the plankton are Diaptomus gracilis, Cyclops
strenuus, Leptodora kindtw, and Polyphemus pediculus.

Diaphanosoma brachyurum is characteristic of our smaller
lakes, rarely occurring in the open water of the larger ones.
Leptodora, Polyphemus, and Diaphanosoma are also summer
forms. Diaptomus laticeps and D. wierzejsku, though not
included by Dr Lund in the Arctic association, must also,
I think, be considered as purely northern species.

60 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

Apart from the species of the genus Diaptomus, the dis-
tribution of which is indicated in the preceding Table, the
Arctic Crustacea, which are so abundant in the Scottish
plankton in summer, are not confined to the western or
northern portions of the country, but range over the whole
length and breadth of Scotland.

Although we are here considering only the Scottish
plankton, another fact of interest in connection with the
geographical distribution of the Arctic species of Crustacea
will appear if we extend our view over the whole of Great
Britain, as we are enabled to do by Mr Scourfield’s tables
of distribution, given in his Synopsis (5).

The whole of Great Britain is characterised by a succes-
sive dropping out of the Arctic species of Crustacea as we
proceed from north to south. First, Diaptomus wierzejskir
ceases in the extreme north, then D. laciniatus in Ayrshire,
D. laticeps (if we include with it D. hircus) in Wales. The
rest of the Arctic species of Crustacea, which are common
over the whole of Scotland, extend also into the north of
England, Wales, and in some cases the midlands; but, with
the one exception of Daphnia hyalina, they are all absent
from the south and east of England. The south and east
of England forms, therefore, a well-marked region, dis-
tinguished, first of all, by the absence of all the Arctic
Entomostraca except Daphma hyalina.” The demarcation
of this region from the rest of England is emphasised by
other peculiarities. Many species of Crustacea of a more
southern type have the same limitations as those of the
Arctic type just referred to, that is to say, they are of
general occurrence in Scotland, the north of England, usually
Wales and the midlands, but they are absent or are rare in
the south and east. In addition to those negative characters
marking off this region from the rest of Great Britain,
positive characters are found in the presence in this area of
three or four species of Entomostraca, which are absent
from the north of England and from Scotland, and of several
others which are common in the south but rare in the north.

The features distinguishing this region of England from
the rest of Great Britain will be most graphically exhibited

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes. 61

in the Table which follows. In this Table, in addition to the
truly pelagic species, whether Arctic or southern, I have
included a number of Cladocera, less pelagic, or confined to
shallow waters, in order to show that the same limits of
distribution affect a considerable number of species. From
the Table, it will appear that there are eight species common
in the north and quite absent from the south, five which
are common in the north and rare in the south, four which
are absent from the north and present in the south, and
two which are rare in the north and common in the south.

DISTRIBUTION OF SOME CRUSTACEA IN SCOTLAND, NorTH ENGLAND,
AND SOUTH AND East ENGLAND,

SPECIES. |

Bosmnina obtusirostris, ._ . | Com. in N. Eng. and Scot. | Absent in S. and E. Eng.
Bythotrephes longimanus, .
Holopedium gibberum, .
Diaptomus laticeps, .
EGON Sevufera,*. 3
Daphnia galeata (typical),
Alonopsis elongata, . - 93 x a: -
Streblocerus serricaudatus, Ph
Leptodora kindttt, . . . a
Ceriodaphnia quadrangula, -
Alona rustica, ies Es — Fe Hs ee
Chydorus barbatus, . . . | im :
Leptorhynchus falcatus, | . " ‘x -
Simocephalus exspinosus, . Absentin N. Eng. and Scot. | Present in S. or E. Eng.
ra serrulatus,
Leydigia acanthocercoides, .
Ceriodaphnia pulchella, _ , i
e megalops, .| Rarein N, Eng. and Scot. | Common
Bosmina longirostris,

3) 9 33 33
i) 39 99 39

99 be P i) 9
9 i) 99 ADS fe
99 29 ” 29

29 39 99

93 39 99

99 29 93 3)

9 3” 29 93

23 9 29 33

|

LITERATURE REFERRED TO.

1. Scott, T., Invertebrate Fauna of the Inland Waters of
Scotland, Parts I. to 1X. Annual Reports of the Fishery
Loard for Scotland, 1890 to 1899.

2. Scott, T., and Dutuiz, R., The Inland Waters of the
Shetland Islands, Parts I. to IV. Annual Reports of the
Fishery Board for Scotland, 1895 to 1898.

3. Scott, T., Freshwater Entomostraca of Aberdeenshire, Ann.
Scot. Nat. Hist., 1899, p. 216; 1901, p. 157; 1902, p. 21.

62 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

4, West, W. and G. S., Scottish Freshwater Plankton, Jour.
Linn. Soc.—Bot., vol. xxxv. p. 519, 1903.

5. SCOURFIELD, D. J., Synopsis of British Freshwater Ento-
mostraca, Jour. Queckett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. viii.
pp. 431 and 531; vol. ix. p. 29, 1903-4.

6. WeseNBeRG-LUND, C., Comparative Study of Danish and
Scottish Lakes, Proc. Roy. Soc. Hdin., vol. xxv. p. 401,
1905.

X. A Possible Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters.
By Cecit B. Crampton, M.B., C.M.

(Received 10th March; read 27th March 1905.)

In a former paper to the Society, I suggested that plants
and animals have diverged in their evolution, owing to a
difference in their anabolism in relation to the stability or
instability of its products, and that this stability increases
in plants until it destroys the vitality of the cell, while in
animals the instability increases until katabolism gets the
upper hand of anabolism, with resulting death (1). This
does not refer to somatic death, or death of the organism
as a whole, but rather to death of the individual cells, which
takes place throughout the life of the animal or plant, and
only indirectly leads to somatic death, through a want of
mutual co-operation in the different tissues. One ideal form
of anabolism is growth without differentiation, and which
there is no reason to think would not continue indefinitely
if no specialisation took place. Nearest this ideal type is
that in which parts or cells retain their powers of giving
rise to a new individual, and this must differ for the scale of
specialisation arrived at by each form. A gradual divergence
from this type is seen in those cells which retain some
powers of regeneration, through those in which cell division
is still found, to the extreme cases in which all powers of
this kind have been lost, and which, at the same time,
usually show the greatest degree of specialisation.

As a result of fertilisation in higher plants, a meristem

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 63

is formed, which continues to branch and grow apically or
interstitially during the life of the plant, its cells giving rise
by growth and division to all the specialised tissues. Their
marked capability of regeneration shows that these meristem
cells retain, in greater degree than the specialised cells, the
power of reconstructing the whole plant. This power is also
found, in certain cases, in cells which have undergone some
degree of specialisation, and then seems to depend in part on
a sufficient number of cells being associated together. The
whole of these cells, which retain this power, must be looked
upon as a germinal area, the germinal powers of which fade
with imposed specialisation; and there seems to be no hard
and fast line between the cells which constitute this area,
in its narrowest sense, such as has been called the track of
the germ cells, and others which have undergone some small
amount of specialisation.

There is now reason to believe, from the studies of
botanists, that, in the formation of spores by tetrads, a
halving of the number of chromosomes occurs in the nuclei
of the dividing cells, and that this reduced condition accom-
panies the life cycle of the plant until a union of gametes
once more restores the original number. During that part of
the life cycle in which this reduced condition of the chromatic
substance obtains, there is a very wide power of regeneration
in all cells, even though, as in the higher mosses, some
degree of specialisation is attained. The whole plant in this
part of the life cycle must constitute a part of this germinal
area, even though special gametes are set aside to perpetuate
the species. By union of the gametes, a doubling of the
chromosomes in the nucleus is brought about, and, at the
same time, what has been usually termed a double ancestry,
and this is retained until the halving process is again gone
through in spore formation.

In the Metazoa, from fertilisation of the egg, a generation
is formed which in many ways resembles the meristem
growth of plants. In the lower forms, long-continued
asexual growth and budding is common, sterilised tissues,
formed by, and accompanying other cells, which can re-
construct the animal in its entirety. In some cases a new

64 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

generation takes its origin from one or more cells, as an
outgrowth on or in the original creature, while in others,
from time to time, a series of destructive and reconstructive
processes, termed metamorphosis, occurs, causing great
changes in the morphology and physiology of the animal.
In these outgrowths, gametes, in time, are formed, and
have been found, in some instances, to have wandered
into the new growth from the older type. An inclusion
of the germinal material also takes place in these forms
where the destructive and reconstructive metamorphosis
obtains.

In comparing animals with plants, there should occur
a time in the life cycle of the former, when the homologues
of spores are formed, these giving rise, after a number of
divisions, to the conjugating gametes. There is, at present,
no definite point which can be fixed upon as homologous in
this respect, and authorities seem to differ as to the stage in
which reduction takes place. It is noteworthy that when,
in animals, a generation which bears gametes occurs as an
outgrowth on a former generation, although the other cells
of the body are capable, in some degree, of regeneration, no
buds are thrown off which can exist independently. It
would seem then that, in these cases, a certain degree of
sterilisation is imposed on this generation from its very
beginning, and that the cells in it which produce the gametes
have found their way into it by migration from the parent
form. Dr Beard, in his embryological researches, has come
to the conclusion that the cells which go to form the gametes
in the mammal, wander into the embryo from the tropho-
blast, and in the fish from the yolk-sac and blastoderm, and
these he looks upon as an older generation, upon which the
embryo has come to lead, for a time, a parasitic existence (2).
There seems good reason for having faith in this origin of
the germ cells in the higher animals, as it seems the most
easily understandable method of explaining how continuity
of germ cells can take place. From what is known of the
power of regeneration, it at first seems unnecessary to con-
sider that all the cells of the embryo must be destined for
sterilisation. So long as division of the cells continues, a

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 65

remnant of the germinal power persists, and this must be
very considerable in those cases where there is regeneration
of a whole limb. A point in favour of the view of a migra-
tion of the primary germ cells to their position in the
embryo, is the very localised position of the reproductive
organs, and it is difficult to understand, on a theory of the
origin of germ cells from the embryo, how they could retain
their primitive character and always come to lie in the same
position, unless they constituted a kind of meristem, from
which all the other tissues are budded off.

Every cell, in the Metazoon or the Metaphyte, must be
considered as a separate organism, which is kept along the
right lines of development partly by association with its
fellows. The development and specialisation of the com-
pound individual would depend on the resultant of the
individual tendency of each cell to develop along lines
inherited from its forerunners, and the help or restriction
imposed upon it by the other cells of the group in relation
to the total environment. There will thus be, as in “the
struggle of parts” suggested by Roux, an adaptation of the
different parts to one another, through a struggle for exist-
ence in their mutual adjustment to their surroundings. A
change in one cell will affect the neighbouring cells, and cells
at a distance, by transmission of stimuli and by means of
alteration in the nutrition and the production of chemical
bodies. The development will be governed partly by the
symbiosis, which will be the more complex according to the
complexity of the creature. In this connection should be
remembered the effect of symbiosis on specific development
in lichens, as also the effect of external conditions on plant
rudiments and developing embryos. But there is also the
common reservoir of sap, lymph, or blood, which is the chief
environment of the cell community. From it the cells
receive their nourishment, and into it they pass their pro-
ducts of metabolism, and alteration in it is known to be
a source of much change amongst them. All the cells of the
group are derived from one initial cell, and their degree of
_ specialisation depends on the amount of divergence in their
metabolism from that of their mother. They all carry the

VOL. XVI. H

66 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

game stamp of heredity, and the different parts they play in
the life of the group must depend, on the one hand, on the
kind of metabolism they are forced to undergo by their
environment, the effect of the rest of the body upon them,
and, on the other hand, on the tendency of all the cells
derived from the initial cell to develop along certain lines
marked out by heredity.

Each cell, by specialisation, gives preference to a certain
function, or set of functions, which were dormant in the
mother-cell, but only capable of perfect action by gradual
obliteration of the many other functions originally present
in a dormant condition. The functions are thus limited in
number by specialisation, but those that are left are rendered
more capable. Arrest of specialisation, through the form of
nutrition or otherwise, may leave the cell with many func-
tions lying in a dormant condition, capable of specialisation
if necessity calls for it, when the environment of the body
will force the cell to take up the position required of it.
On the other hand, should the cell be not too far advanced
in specialisation, and therefore have retained the greater
part of the functions of the individual in a dormant state,
it may, through change in the nutrition, or by being com-
pounded with other cells which help to supply its deficiencies,
be forced to begin a new development on its own account,
thus reconstructing the whole individual again. The capa-
bility of regeneration of the whole individual, as in regenera-
tion of parts, would, in fact, seem to depend, in some cases,
on a sufficient number of cells being left in mutual co-
operation.

The following remarks from “The Cell in Development
and Inheritance” (3) may here be quoted :—“ It is but a step
from this to the very interesting suggestion of Driesch, that
the nucleus is a storehouse of ferments which pass out into
the cytoplasm, and there set up specific activities. Under
the influence of these ferments, the cytoplasmic organisation
is determined at every step of development, and new condi-
tions are established for the ensuing change. This view
is put forward only tentatively as a ‘fiction’ or working
hypothesis; but it is certainly full of suggestion. Could we

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 67

establish the fact that the number of ferments, or formative
substances in the nucleus, diminishes with the progress of
differentiation, we should have a comparatively simple and
intelligible explanation of the specification of nuclei and the
limitation of development.” Applying this hypothesis to
the foregoing remarks in this paper, heredity would depend
on the property of the nucleus to give rise to enzymes in
certain directions or of a certain character, under appropriate
stimulus. The effect of the cells upon one another, in de-
velopment, would be to impose upon the nucleus of the cell
a tendency to set free enzymes that adjusted the cell to
meet the necessities of the community. Natural selection,
by elimination of individuals, and the internal adjustment
by the struggle for existence amongst the organisms of the
community, would bring about the necessary co-operation
in development, or symbiotic characters. There would be
a constant elimination of those cells which did not work
for the good of the community. The tendency of these
enzymes, in the specialisation of plant tissues, would be
to the formation of tissues of greater stability, while the
reverse would be the case in the specialisation in the tissues
of animals. Regeneration would be due to the effect of
stimulus on the nuclei of cells not too far advanced in
specialisation, which, by means of the regulation of the cells
upon one another, would bring about the restoration of the
missing part.

It is known to be through enzymes, in many cases, that
the food is brought into the condition capable of assimilation
by the tissue cells; and it is likely enough that it is through
enzymes, or some related chemical bodies, that this material
is built up into the very living matter of the cell itself.
Animals and plants of enormous dimensions arise, by the
process of nutrition, from microscopic beginnings; and what
is the stimulus that transforms all this food into living
material? The strictly specific modes of operation of the
enzymes that have been studied in animals and plants must
be remembered, and not only the great variety of purposes
to which they are applied, but the extraordinary relation
occurring between the amount of the enzyme and the

68 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

amount of the material it can convert. According to Pfeffer
in his “ Physiology of Plants” (4), their production is regu-
lated in connection with the stage of development arrived
at, as well as by stimulus from external agency, and “the
production and excretion of enzymes exhibit a regulatory
connection with one another, as is indeed the case with
every metabolic function.”

In the union of gametes a further complication is induced,
a doubling of the qualities in the germ cell. All the cells,
from this onward, have the double qualities imposed upon
them. For each correlated property or function, formerly
present in the gamete, a couple to it is presented, which may
be like it from identical inheritance, or may differ from
it more or less in degree. The experiments in breeding by
Mendel, Ewart, Bateson, and others, have shown that these
couples may segregate, or separate again, when gametes are
once more produced, and it is inferred that this is brought
about by a halving of the qualities in sporogenesis or gameto-
genesis. The halves of these couples are termed allelomorphs
by the authorities on these experiments, and in this case the
allelomorphs are said to have segregated (5). In other cases,
however, it is noted that segregation may be incomplete or
absent, and it is considered that there may be, in some cases,
a breaking up of the allelomorphs, followed by recombina-
tion. Again, when the allelomorphs are unlike one another,
it is found that one may show itself in the animal or plant
in undiminished intensity, or even exceed it, or, on the other
hand, may be intermediate in character, or some character
may present itself which is unlike either. In the first case
the character is said to be “dominant,” while the one that
does not show itself is said to be “recessive.” The work of
Bateson (6), coupled with these experiments, has demonstrated
that variation is usually, or perhaps always, more or less dis-
continuous in origin. They have also produced strong
evidence for what was first insisted upon by Weismann,
viz, that variation arises in the germ cells, and is not
imported into them from the somatic cells of the body.
It also gives rise to the question as to what produces
dominance of certain characters over others. It is the

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 69

opinion of some of these authorities on breeding, that domin-
ance is usually with the phylogenetically older character.
Should the dominance be shown to have some connection
with the adaptation of the individual to its surroundings,
it should be brought about by some form of natural selection.
Although the theory that the properties of the germ cells
are directly derived from those of the soma, has been under-
mined by the theory of the continuity of the germ cells, a
possibility of some direct or indirect mode of transmission of
the properties acquired by the body in reacting to its sur-
roundings, has, to some scientists, ever been a necessity.
Darwin was strongly of this opinion, and put forward his
theory of pangenesis as a possible method of explaining how
it could be brought about. Then Weismann’s theory of the
germ plasm arose, which completely negatived all inherit-
ance of adaptive qualities; and this led to much division
of opinion between those who did and those who did not
consider this method of transmission a necessity of organic
development.

Since then the work of embryologists, and the experi-
ments of breeders, have gradually strengthened, if not con-
clusively proved, a continuity of the germ cells, and yet the
faith in some method of inheritance of adaptive qualities,
either direct or indirect, has not abated, and indeed may
be said to have gained ground. The following passages,
taken from an abstract of a paper by Dr Beard, may here be
quoted (7).

In this abstract he gives what he calls his “ Understudy
Theory of Heredity,” set up by the author as one result
of the discovery of a morphological continuity of germ cells.
After some observations, he remarks: “ For various reasons
every egg or sperm must be regarded as containing one
complete set of all the characters or qualities necessary to
form an individual of the species. At fertilisation two sets
of these are somewhat loosely joined together. In the de-
veloping embryo only one complete set of characters is made
use of, and, while the other corresponding qualities remain
more or less dormant in its cells, that set or pack actually
employed may be made up of any characters taken from

70 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

either of the two packs, but so as to make up one complete
pack. Turning then to the germ cells, each of these possesses
the duplicated set, and later on, at the so-called ‘reduction,’
i¢., at the final division of the oogonia into oocytes, and of
the spermatogonia into spermatocytes, prior to the formation
of conjugating cells or gametes, the twofold set becomes
diminished to one pack only by the elimination of one com-
plete pack. The true meaning of the reduction of chromo-
somes is the elimination of one set of characters or qualities,
such that if among those of the original sets there be any
unsuitable ones these are rejected. The union of two sets
of characters at conjugation is in animals retained by the
germ cells, until the period of reduction, by the embryonic
cell, until the commencement of its development, when it
becomes latent, and in plants during the whole life period
of the flowering plant. The two sets cannot be identical at
the start. As living entities, they must be influenced by the
total environment, nutrition, climate, disease, toxins, ete.
To all these influences they will react. The effect of all
the factors will be a different one on the differently
constituted characters. Some it will favour, and these will
flourish and increase in import; others will be unfavourably
influenced or neglected, and these will diminish. At the
reduction there will be a settling up, and if the environment
have not been a constant one, some of the characters will
have become better than other corresponding ones, a new
pack will be chosen, and the less favourable characters will
be rejected. This elimination of characters may, on occasion,
become an elimination of complete individualities, or, what is
the same thing, as a casting out of ‘ancestors.’ Moreover,
because the two sets have been conjoined under the influences
of the environment, and have reacted to this, the process
becomes a self-adjusting mechanism, the up and down
oscillations of the characters of the two sets endeavouring
to follow and compensate the changes in the environment,
and the result must be genetic variation. ‘This process may
be defined as germinal election and elarouna Hien in adaptation
to the environment.” -

Dr Beard therefore postulates a “germinal election,” and

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 71

looks upon it as acting in accordance with the environment.
He does not put forward any mechanism that would account
for the suppression of certain characters and the retention of
others, but evidently considers the soma in adaptation to its
surroundings as indirectly affecting the germ cells, and in
some way producing survival of like qualities in them.
Experiments have shown that the serum of blood of certain
animals has a specific chemical reaction in relation to the
blood of other animals (8),—the injection of the blood of
one animal into that of another, giving to the serum of the
latter new properties antagonistic to the blood cells of the
former. The immunity produced by infection in zymotic
diseases, and the whole system of antitoxin treatment, seem
to have bearings in the same direction, viz., the formation of
enzymes, or some chemical bodies, which are antagonistic
in their relation to one another. Related to this question
is the effect of commencing maturation of the germ cells in
producing secondary sexual characters, and the effect of
the thyroid gland upon the rest of the body. Castration
prevents the development of secondary sexual characters,
and removal of the thyroid gland has very marked effects.
In the latter case, that some enzyme or chemical body is the
active agent, seems to be shown by the results of administer-
ing the gland in the form of an extract for medicinal
purposes. Other glands of the body, such as the adrenal,
seem to have similar relations to the chemistry of the body,
and it seems probable, indeed, that all tissues form some
characteristic chemical bodies as a part of their metabolism,
which have further relations to the other tissues. In the
theory of pangenesis brought forward by Darwin to explain
the method of accumulation of acquired characters in the
germ cells, there has always been the difficulty of the orien-
tation of qualities brought from different parts of the body in
forming a morphological basis for heredity, and research has
further shown a greater and greater difficulty in accepting any
direct transmission of characters from the soma to the germ
cells. ‘That positive characters can be directly passed from
the soma to the germ cell seems therefore out of court, but,
on the other hand, there is no possible reason that negative

72 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

characteristics should not be stamped by the body upon the
germ cells by elimination. Darwin’s theory of Natural
Selection as applied to the evolution of species, which has
been shown to be so potent a cause in all forms of evolution,
is in reality but a stamping of a negative facies upon a
species, any positive variation, on the theory of the con-
tinuity of the germ cells, being evolved in the germ cell
itself. This theory of elimination, which has proved so
effective in accounting for the evolution of species and for
evolution in general, might well be applied to the results of
adaptation upon the body and their reflection upon the germ
cells. . If we have two sets of qualities derived from the two
parents, and if, as modern research indicates, these qualities
are apposed in sexual transmission, there is a_ possible
mechanism by which only those properties in the germ
cell shall be transmitted, which are the couples of those
properties in the body which have been successful in adapta-
tion to their surroundings. These latter must, in the dual
personality, either destroy or render latent the corresponding
properties derived from the other parental gamete. It might
be, that the one is rendered latent, and the other dominates
the metabolism of the cell, and as to which becomes dominant
would depend largely on the external environment in the
delicate adjustment of the organism to its surroundings.

It may be that there is a perpetual struggle throughout life
for dominance in the metabolism of the cell, and that a
change in the environment might throw the balanee of the
dominance to one side or the other. It is evident that
activity in metabolism would be entirely related to the
dominant half, and it may be that it is the products of this
activity, in the form of enzymes or some like chemical bodies,
which render latent the other half, and perhaps in time
cause its obliteration. We have, in the evidence of antagon-
istic secretions of the tissues, something which may help
us in understanding how this dominance might be attained.
If cells have the power of secreting material which is detri-
mental to other cells antagonistic to their kind of metabolism,
or which favours the growth of those of lke metabolism,
it is not improbable that that half of the cell which is

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 73

dominant, in accordance with reaction to the environment,
may suppress the other parental characteristics. Such
emanations, acquired by protective habit, though mingling
together in the fluids of the body, may keep their specific
character and react upon the germ cells. There would
have to be a peculiar emanation for each correlated property
coupled by amphimixis. During life each individual that
reacted to the surroundings would, in each characteristic,
become more like one parent, or more unlike both, or would
in fact have its individuality more stamped upon it. This
individuality would gradually stamp itself upon the germ
cells, which might therefore vary in hereditary qualities at
different periods in the life of the individual. Heredity
would follow slowly upon change in the individual under
changed conditions of existence. Should the properties
derived from the two parents be not active in metabolism
in relation to the adaptation of the body to its surroundings; —
or, in other words, should these properties exist as a part of
heredity, and having no present relation to adaptation, no
emanation would take place tending to select these properties,
and separation of the qualities would take place, according
to Mendel’s law, in the formation of the gametes. This
indirect adjustment of the germ cells to the successful
properties of the body in adaptation, would take place in
that part of the life cycle which is chiefly reacted upon
in adaptation to the surroundings. This would be more
noticeable in the sporophytic generation of the higher
plants and in the gamete-bearing generation of the higher
animals, physiological election taking place during that
period. The effect of this would be that the gametic
halves, instead of remaining in passive relation awaiting a
possible separation by reduction, would be stirred to
nearer union by the chemical stimuli, and the effect of
reduction would be a mere halving of a new compound
consisting of the successful properties in relation to adapta-
tion.

Since writing the above, my attention has been drawn by
a review in Nature, for January 1905, to Dr H. M. Vernon’s
book on Variation in Animals and Plants, from which I

VOL. XVI. I

74 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

quote the following passages :—“ Through what agency is the
environment enabled to act on the germ plasm? To me the
only conceivable one is a chemical influence, through pro-
ducts of metabolism and specific internal secretions. We
have seen in a previous chapter that the products of
metabolism of an organism may exert a retarding influence
on its own growth, and in some cases a stimulating effect
on the growth of other organisms. Physiological research
of the last few years has shown that most of the organs and
tissues of the body have specific internal secretions, which,
passing into the general circulation, may exert an influence
of vital importance on the general metabolism of the organism.
Thus extirpation of the thyroid gland produces symptoms
which in many animals end fatally, but which may be
diminished or suppressed by feeding on the gland substance,
or injection of extracts of it. Extirpation of the suprarenal
glands results in much more speedy death, and here again
the injection of extracts may delay the fatal issue.”

Dr Vernon gives several other examples, and then goes on
to say :—“ Does it not seem distinctly probable, therefore,
that every tissue in the body to some extent affects every
other tissue? Each may have its own specific products of
metabolism, and perhaps specific internal secretions, which,
passing into the general circulation, may in turn stimulate
or depress, or otherwise affect, every other tissue in the body.
Whenever a change in the environment acts upon the
organism, therefore, it to some extent affects the normal
excretions and secretions of some or all of the various tissues,
and these react not only on the tissues themselves, but also
to a lesser degree upon the determinants representing them
in the germ plasm.”

This “ specific secretion hypothesis,” as 1t is termed by Dr
Vernon, has a striking resemblance to the hypothesis put
forward in this paper. It differs, however, in his basing his
hypothesis on Weismann’s determinants. He also gives
no recognition to the suppression of one set of the dual
characters in the tissue cells, which is necessarily the founda-
tion of the hypothesis here put forward. In conclusion, I
may say that if the hypothesis of Driesch, that the nucleus

Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters. 79

is a storehouse of ferments which set up activities in the
cytoplasm, were shown to be the right one, we should have,
not only an explanation of the specification of nuclei and
limitation of development as quoted above, but a possible
explanation of how the beautiful adjustments, which animals
and plants undergo in relation to their surroundings, could
be indirectly handed on in inheritance, and this without
entailing the destruction of individuals to the extent that
is required by the ordinary interpretation of natural selec-
tion. That natural selection has far-reaching powers in all
these adjustments has to be admitted without doubt, and
the hypothesis advanced in this paper is but a carrying of
natural selection into the tissue cells as individuals, which
work in a kind of symbiosis in their complex relations to
one another. If this be true, there is no reason to doubt
that, by the doubling of inheritance in the union of gametes,
the war of elimination may be carried into the far recesses
of the cell, and that “a germinal election and elimination
in adaptation to the environment” (9) may be a source of
variation in the germ cells.

REFERENCES.

1. Crampton, Cecit B., “Anabolism and Specialisation,” Proc.
Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., March 1904.

2. Bearp, J., “ Morphological Continuity of Germ Cells.”

3. Witson, “The Cell in Development and _ Inheritance,”
p-. 323.

4. Prerrer, Ewart, “ Physiology of Plants,’ English transla-
tion, vol. i. pp. 375, 501.

5. Bateson, “ President’s Address to British Association, 1904.”
6. Bareson, “ Materials for the Study of Variation.”

7. Bearp, J., “ Heredity and the Cause of Variation.”

8. Metcunixorr, “ Nature of Man,” p. 49.

9. Bearp, J., ‘“ Heredity and the Cause of Variation.”

76 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

XI. “ Scotia” Collections: Scottish Antarctic Expedition.—Re-
port on the Antipatharvans. By Professor J. ARTHUR
THoMSON, M.A.

(Read 27th March 1905.)

Mr W. 5S. Bruce, leader of the Scottish Antarctic Expedi-
tion, sent to me for examination and report a collection of
twelve specimens of Antipatharians, made in the course of
the “Scotia” voyage.

The collection, though small, may be of interest in regard to
the geographical distribution of this primitive and extremely
divergent order of Zoantharians. As the Antipatharians, or
Antipathidea, form what must be called, relatively speaking,
a small order, it is not surprising to find that the “Scotia”
collection included in its twelve specimens only three species.
It is more remarkable that these all belong to the genus
Lathypathes, established by the late Mr George Brook in
his “Challenger” Report. The specimens were preserved in
formol, but this seems a quite unsuitable fixative for such
forms, as far as histological details are concerned. Sections
were made of the best of the specimens, but they were
unsatisfactory. Where there are no calcareous structures to
deal with, Bles’s fluid might perhaps be tried in the future.

Order ANTIPATHARIA, or ANTIPATHIDEA,
Family ANTIPATHID.
Sub-Family ScHIZOPATHINA, Brook.

Genus Lathypathes, Brook.
1. Bathypathes patula, var. plenispina, Brook.

I entrusted five specimens, which I thought might be new,
to Mr John Anderson, a student in the Advanced Course
of Zoology in the University of Aberdeen, who gave mea
detailed description of them, and made sections and pre-
parations. But his conclusion, which I have carefully
verified, was that all the specimens belonged to Bathypathes
patula, var. plenispina, of which the “ Challenger” Collection
had one specimen. There is therefore no need to print

Report on the Antipatharians. ry

Mr Anderson’s description, though a few of his data may
be of service.

Three of the five specimens were attached to small stones.
All were gracefully curved pinnate colonies, with the
branches nearly, but not quite, opposite, and not quite in
one plane. The lower branches make an acute angle with
those of the opposite side, but this angle increases with the
following branches till the two at the very top make a very
large obtuse angle with one another.

In four of the specimens the total length of the stem
was found to be 18°5, 17, 16°5, and 16°5 cm. Three of the
four had ten branches on each side, while the longest
specimen had twelve branches on one side and thirteen on
the other. The branches occur in pairs with such strict
uniformity that one might suspect the loss of a branch.
But there is no hint of this.

The branches on one specimen were measured, and the
lengths in centimetres from the base upward are given in
the following Table :—

Right Side. Left Side.
Branch. Length in cm. Length in cm.
1 2-4 2°D
2 Broken off. 2-5
3 5:2 35
4 6°8 4:7
5) 76 9'5
6 76 6:0
7 8°5 6:5
8 (5 6°D |
9 5:6 6:3
10

4°7 4:0

Thus, on one side, branch 7 is longest, on the other
branches 7 and 8 are of equal length. The lower and higher
branches are shorter than the more central, and the grada-
tion of the graceful colony is on the whole regular.

“Isolated” zodids occur both on the main stem and on
the branches; they are disposed on only one side of the
branches, at fairly regular intervals; their bases are con-
nected by ccenenchymatous outgrowths. They correspond

78 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

to the Bathypathes-type, and from Brook’s point of view
they illustrate dimorphism occurring in trios—two elongated
“ gonozodids ” with a globular “gastrozodid ” between them.

The axis of the stem and branches is dark brown in
colour when looked at with the naked eye. ‘The spines,
broad at the base, and tapering to a point, arise at right
angles to the axis, and four longitudinal rows are visible
from one aspect. The movement of the gas and liquid
within the axis showed that it was hollow, as cross sections
confirmed.

The specimens agree well with the description which
Brook gave of Bathypathes patula, var. plenispina, e.g., as to
the acute angle between the lower branches and the four
rows of spines visible from one aspect. But it may be noted
that the “Challenger” specimen was only 12 centimetres
in length, and had only three pairs of branches. The type
specimen of BL. patula had, however, 9-11 branches.

The jar containing the specimens is labelled ‘‘Cod Bank,”
1st December 1903.

2. Bathypathes alternata, Brook.

A fine and well-preserved specimen, measuring 24 cm.
in height by 18 cm. in breadth across the lowest branches,
seems referable to Bathypathes alternata, of which the
“ Challenger” Expedition also obtained but a single example.
Of the total height, 10 cm. go to the sterile part and 14
cm. to the pinnate frond.

The specimen agrees in general with Brook’s description,
but it is bigger and stronger, the branches are far more
numerous (20 on one side, 21 on the other), and the axial
spines are more regular. The “Challenger” specimen was
only 18°5 cm. in height, and had 12 branches on one side,
13 on the other. It was said to be more slender than
B. patula and with smaller zodids, but the reverse is the
case with Bruce’s specimen of BL. alternata, which is probably
older and more vigorous than the colony obtained by the
“ Challenger.”

There is no locality marked for this specimen.

Report on the Antipatharians. 79

3. Bathypathes bifida, un. sp.

Six interesting specimens of what seems to be a quite new
form were trawled on the 18th March 1904, in lat. 71° 22’S.,
long. 16° 34’ W. Each is firmly attached to a small stone,
and all the six specimens are practically the same in size
and form. A slender basal piece rises vertically from the
stone to a height of 15 mm., and then bifurcates into two
long branches which extend in opposite directions, at first
almost at right angles, and gradually curving slightly up-
wards to a length of about 16 cm. There is no hint of
any continuation of the short main stem or of any breakage ;
there is a slight re-entrant angle at the origin of the two
branches.

The axis is almost hair-like, 1 mm. in diameter at the
very base, 0°2 mm. in the branches. It appears black at a
distance, but is reddish brown under low power. It bears
four rows of low conical, yellowish or brownish, spines,
which have broad bases and blunt tips. The spines measure
0:1 to 0:05 mm. in height, and are separated along any one
line by intervals varying from 0:2 to 0°3 mm. It is most
unfortunate that all the six specimens are almost quite bare
of zodids. Three or four are left, isolated from one another,
and agree with the Bathypathes type. The most remarkable
feature is the length of the lateral tentacles—up to 3 mm.
Brook described four species of Bathypathes, and L. 8S.
Schultze has described a fifth from the “ Valdivia” expedi-
tion. Our new form is quite distinct from any of these.

Brook regarded Bathypathes and its allies as dimorphic.
He thought that the zodids occurred 4n trios—two gonozodids +
with a gastrozodid between them. From the little we have
seen, we incline to the view expressed by Dr G. C. Bourne
that there is but one kind of zodid, which appears to be
divided into three parts—two reproductive and one gastral,
each with two tentacles.

-

80 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

XII. Notes on the Lower Carboniferous Fishes of Hastern
Fifeshire. By Dr R. H. Traquair, F.RS., F.GS.
[Plate V.]

(Read 16th January 1901; appeared without figures in the Geological
Magazine for March 1901, pp. 110-114.)

Not much has as yet been done in the way of cataloguing
the fossil fishes of the Lower Carboniferous rocks of Eastern
Fifeshire. A few species and localities were noted by the
late Rev. Thomas Brown in 1860,! and by Mr Kirkby in
1880,2 and the late Mr Robert Walker published a paper
in 1872,3 in which he described what he supposed to be
a new species of Amblypterus (A. anconoechmodus) from the
oil-shale works at Pitcorthie, near Anstruther. In this
paper Mr Walker drew attention to the abundance and
variety of fish-remains in the oil-shale and ironstone worked
at that locality, promising to describe them in detail after-
wards—a promise which he was never able to fulfil. After
his death in 1881, his important collection of fish-remains
from this and other localities in East Fife was acquired by
the Edinburgh Museum, and largely forms the basis of the
present list. I myself have also done some collecting in this
region; and a good many years ago the Museum acquired
a number of specimens collected by Mr W. T. Kinnear
at Ardross, some of which are of great interest.

The district in question is comprised in Sheets 41 and
49 of the Geological Survey Map of Scotland. All the
species here noted are from Lower Carboniferous rocks, the
horizons represented being the Upper part (oil-shale group)
and the Lower part of the Carboniferous Limestone Series.
Here I may note that in 18904 I included the Teleostomi

1 ¢* Notes on the Mountain Limestone and Lower Carboniferous Rocks of
the Fifeshire Coast, from Burntisland to St Andrews,” Trans. Roy. Soc.
Edin., vol. xxii. (1860) pp 385-404.

2 *©On the Zones of Marine Fossils in the Calciferous Sandstones of Fife,”
Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxvi. (1880) pp. 559-590.

3 ‘On a New Species of Amblypterus and other Fossil Fish-remains from
Pitcorthy, Fife,” Trans. Geol. Soc. Edin., vol. ii., part i., pp. 119-124.
With Plate.

4<¢Tist of the Fossil Ganoidei and Dipnoi of Fife and the Lothians,”
Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xvii, (1890) pp. 385-400.

Lower Carboniferous Fishes of Eastern Fifeshire. 81

and Dipnoi of the region in a list of the fishes of these orders
occurring in Fife and the Lothians, published by the Royal
Society of Edinburgh. The present list, however, includes
the Elasmobranchs as well, and also a few additional species
now described as new.

Hm OO be

14,

15.
16.
ys
18.

19.
20.
21.

CALCIFEROUS SANDSTONE SERIES.

ELASMOBRANCHII.

. Pleuracanthus horridulus, Traq. Pitcorthie

. Diplodus parvulus, Trag. Pitcorthie.

. Cladodus unicuspidatus, Traq., n.sp. Near Rock and Spindle.
. Callopristodus pectinatus (Ag.). Rocks east of St Andrews ;

Pitcorthie.

. Oracanthus armigerus, Traq. Teeth at Ardross.
. Gyracanthus sp. Rocks east of St Andrews; Pittenweem.

Not sufficiently well preserved for specific determination.

. Sphenacanthus serrulatus, Ag. Pitcorthie.
. Sphenacanthus Fifensis, Traq., u.sp. Rocks east of St

Andrews.

. Euphyacanthus semistriatus, Tragq. Ardross.
. Tristyciius arcuatus, Ag. Pitcorthie.

. Tristychius minor, Portlock. Pitcorthie.

. Cynopodius crenulatus, Traq. Pitcorthie.

. Acanthodes sulcatus, Ag. Ardross.

TELEOSTOMI.
CROSSOPTERYGII.

Rhizodus Hibberti (Ag.). Rocks on shore east of St Andrews ;
Pitcorthie.

Rhizodus ornatus, Trag. Pitcorthie; Pittenweem.

Strepsodus striatulus, Traq. Pittenweem.
Strepsodus minor, Traq. Pitcorthie.
Celacanthopsis curta, Traq., n.g. and s.p.

ACTINOPTERYGII.

Elonichthys Robisoni (Hibbert). Pitcorthie.
Elonichthys striatus (Ag.). Pitcorthie.
Elonichthys pectinatus, Traq. Ardross.

VORC XVI. K

82 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

29. Rhadinichthys ornatisimus (Ag.). Kiness Burn, near St
Andrews.
23. Rhadinichthys carinatus (Ag.).. Pitcorthie; Corn Ceres,
near Kilrenny.
4. Rhadinichthys brevis, Trag. Pitcorthie.
5. Nematoptychius Greenockr (Ag.). Pitcorthie.
6. Gonatodus punctatus (Ag.). Pitcorthie. This is the Ambly-
pterus anconoechmodus of R. Walker.
27. Eurynotus crenatus, Ag. Pittenweem; Pitcorthie ; Corn
Ceres ; Kenly Mouth, east of St Andrews.

DINO

28. Ctenodus interruptus, Barkas. Pittenweem.

CARBONIFEROUS LIMESTONE SERIES.

ELASMOBRANCHII.

1. Petalodus acuminatus, Ag. Ladedda, near St Andrews.
. Oracanthus armigerus, Traq. Largoward.

bse

3. Sphenacanthus serrulatus, Ag. Denhead Ironstone, Den-
head, near St Andrews.
4, Acanthodes sp. Denhead. .

TELEOSTOMI.
CROSSOPTERYGII.

. Rhizodus Hibberti (Ag.). Denhead.

. Rhizodus ornatus, Traq. Denhead.

. Megalichthys sp. Denhead.

. Elonichthys Robisoni (Hibbert). Denhead.
. Elonichthys pectinatus, Traq. Denhead.

S&S) vo) © Al ep Ci

to

. Eurynotus crenatus, Ag. Denhead.

The above list contains all the species, thirty in number,
which are contained in the Natural History Department
of the Edinburgh Museum, or in my own collection. Mr
Kirkby, however, records Ctenacanthus sp. from near the
Rock and Spindle, and Pecilodus obliquus, Ag., from a marine
limestone of Calciferous Sandstone age on the coast near
Randerston Castle.

Lower Carboniferous Fishes of Eastern Fifeshire. 83

NOTES ON SPECIES.

Diplodus.—I have found small Diplodus-teeth in shales on
the shore at Pittenweem, but which can hardly be safely
identified with any known form, or considered as new.

Cladodus wnicuspidatus, n.sp. (Plate V. Figs. 1 and 2).—
Base flat below; depth from back to front about two-thirds
the width from side to side; contour more convex in front
than behind. A single slender-pointed cusp arises from the
middle of the front of the base, and is erect, straight when
seen from the front (Fig. 1), sigmoidally curved when viewed
laterally (Fig. 2), covered with delicate-raised ridges which
increase in number downwards by intercalation. No trace
of lateral cusps. Height of cusp of most perfect specimen
7 inch, width of base laterally about the same.

Under the term Monocladodus, Professor Claypole! has
separated from Cladodus, Agassiz, two species from the
Cleveland shale, on account of the apparent want of lateral
cusps. Allied to Cladodus, and also possessing only one
cusp, are Lambdodus and Hybocladodus of St John and
Worthen.? The present teeth, however, agree so closely
with Cladodus in all respects, save the want of lateral cusps,
and the comparatively short lateral extent of the base, that
I prefer leaving them with that genus for the present.

A cluster of these teeth was found by myself many years
ago in a septarian nodule on the shore near the Rock and
Spindle, east of St Andrews. Owing to the hardness of the
matrix, it was impossible to work out the superficial con-
figuration of the teeth, except in two instances, where they
happened to be covered by white carbonate of lime.

Sphenacanthus Frfensis, n.sp. (Plate V. Fig. 3).—Length
of the largest specimen, 5? inches; greatest antero-posterior
diameter, ? inch; implanted portion reaching up to 12 inch
in front and 2? inches behind; form straight and tapering;
posterior area slightly concave, its margin showing traces
of abraded denticles; anterior margin of exserted portion
formed by a sharp median ridge; sides ornamented by

1 American Geologist, vol. xi. (1898) p. 329.
2 Geol. Survey of Illinois, vol. vi.

84 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

straight ribs or rounded ridges, which increase in number
proximally by bifurcation, and are not nodose.

This spine, of which there are several specimens in the
Walker Collection, Edinburgh Museum, differs from Spf.
serrulatus, Ag., by the multiplication of the lateral nbs by
bifurcation instead of intercalation. The want of nodosity
of these ribs is of no consequence, as the greatest difference
occurs in this respect in different individuals of Sph. serrulatus,
and also of the closely allied Coal-Measure form, Sph. hybodovdes
(Egerton). In a hard calcareous sandstone from the coast,
east of St Andrews.

Celacanthopsis curta, n.g. and sp. (Plate V. Fig. 4).—
Of this interesting fish only one specimen has been obtained,
and that one is unfortunately deficient at the caudal ex-
tremity. What remains measures 2 inches in length, and
in this the length of the head is contained three times, being
also equal to the greatest depth. The head bones are crushed
and scarcely decipherable. Vertebral axis notochordal;
abdominal region extending for 4 inch behind shoulder-
girdle; no ribs are seen, but there is distinct evidence of
the ossified air-bladder characteristic of the Ccelacanthide.
Neural arches united with the neural spines, which are very
long, very slender, and closely placed; hemal arches and
spines similar in condition and configuration. On the dorsal
aspect, and just above the termination of the abdominal
cavity, a set of slender interspinous bones commences, these
being short at first but rapidly increasing in length, until
they are as long as the neural spines, and then the fish
suddenly breaks up about 2 inches from the tip of the snout.
Attached to the distal extremities of these interspinous
bones are fin-rays, very short anteriorly, and still short at
the point of truncation of the specimen. It is probable that
similar elements existed on the hzemal aspect of the skeleton,
but have been lost. Paired fins not preserved, except a few
imperfect rays where the ventrals ought to be. Indications
of the presence of scales feeble.

Strikingly new as this little fish is sseigitiGallys a word
or two must be said as to its family and generic relationship.
The ossified air-bladder, and the configuration of its neural

Lower Carboniferous Fishes of Eastern Fifeshire. 8)

and heemal arches and spines, at once indicate that its family
position is in the Ccelacanthidee, but its differences from any
known genus of this family are very strongly marked. We
have, firstly, the abbreviated form of the fish, which is
certainly not entirely due to post-mortem shortening up, as
the skeletal parts in front of the place where the specimen
is truncated lie nearly quite undisturbed ; secondly, the great
proportional length of the neural and hzemal spines; thirdly,
the apparent absence of the two separate dorsal fins with
their compound supporting “ axonosts,” characteristic of the
Ceelacanthide. These may have been lost in the present
specimen, but the tips of the neural spines come so close
up to the dorsal margin that there would not have been
room for the last-named elements of the form prevalent in
the genera of this family. Fourthly, the median fin, which
we see beginning just opposite the posterior termination
of the abdominal cavity, corresponds, in its relation to its
supporting elements, to the caudal of Celacanthus, but is
immensely farther forward in its commencement. It is
unfortunate that, owing to the truncation of the fish shortly
after the commencement of this fin, we cannot see the
extremity of the tail, but enough is shown in the specimen
to prove its novelty, both specific and generic. The acquisi-
tion of more perfect specimens is, however, urgently to be
desired, as it is clear that, if the dorsal fins with their
compound axonosts are really wanting in this form, a change
must be made in the received definition of the Ccelacanthide,
as well as of the Actinistian group of the Crossopterygii.—
(From Ardross, collected by Mr W. Tait Kinnear, and now
in the Edinburgh Museum.)

Eucentrurus paradoxus, n.g.and sp. (Plate V. Figs. 5, 6, 7).
—This extraordinary little organism measures 22 inches in
length, of which 4 inch may be allotted to the head, 2 inch
to the body, and 14 inch to the tail. The head is a mass
of calcareous matter, in which something suggestive of a
broad curved mandible can be seen, but admits of no further
description. The body, 3 inch broad in front, is composed
of a greyish film, which, when examined by a strong lens,
is seen to consist entirely of minute, slender, slightly-curved

86 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

and sharply-pointed spinelets. The tail is tapering in form,
consisting of amorphous-looking calcareous matter, but on
each side (assuming that the creature is crushed vertically)
is a conspicuous row of double spinelets (Figs. 6 and 7)
arranged exactly opposite each other. From a common
base arise two spinelets, which are placed close together,
and nearly parallel to each other; one of them, the anterior,
being only half the length of the posterior one, which just
behind the body may attain a length of jth inch, though
towards the end of the tail they become smaller; both
spinelets are slender, slightly curved, round in transverse
section, smooth externally, sharply pointed, and traversed
internally by a ceutral tubular pulp cavity. No trace either
of internal skeleton, or of limbs, or fins of any sort, can be
seen.

This strange organism is another of the problems of
Paleozoic ichthyology, as it is scarcely possible to indicate
its systematic position with any degree of certainty. The
nature of its dermal armature would incline us to the belief
that it is a Selachian, though all other evidence to that
effect is wanting.—(From Ardross, collected by Mr W. T.
Kinnear, and now in the Edinburgh Museum.)

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Cladodus wnicuspidatus, Traquair, seen from the front; twice natural
size. Calciferous Sandstone Series, Rock and Spindle, near St
Andrews.

Fig. 2. Another specimen of the same tooth, and belonging to the same
mouth, seen from the side.

Fig. 3. Sphenacanthus Fifensis, Traquair; natural size. Calciferous Sand-
stone Series, shore east of St Andrews.

Fig. 4. Celacanthopsis curta, Traquair; natural size. From the shore at
Ardross.

Fig. 5. EHucentrurus paradoxus, Traquair; natural size. From the shore at
Ardross.

Figs. 6 and 7. Lateral spinelets of the tail region of Hucentrurus paradoxus ;
magnified nine times linear.

The Odonata of the Korth Area. 87

XIII. Zhe Odonata (Dragon-flies) of the Forth Area. By
WILLIAM EVANS, F.R.S.E.
(Read 27th March 1905.)

The present paper is another of the series on the fauna
of the Edinburgh, or “Forth” area, which I have during
the past sixteen years been submitting to the Society. The
croup now dealt with is a small one, and, I am sorry to say,
poorly represented in the district. Nevertheless, it is an
exceedingly interesting group, comprising as it does some
of the finest insects to be found in this country, while all
its members are sufficiently striking to attract attention.
The Odonata, although usually included in that very varied
assemblage of insects known as the Linnean order Neurop-
tera, are so marked off by distinctive characters that they
stand quite alone, and will doubtless, in time, be generally
eranted full ordinal rank. The publication in 1900 of Mr
W. J. Lucas’s beautifully illustrated volume on the British
Dragon-flies (7) has given a fresh impetus to the investigation
of their distribution.

There are very few published records of Odonata for this
area, and these are mostly old and of comparatively little
value. The celebrated Belgian authority on the group,
Baron Edm. de Selys Longchamps, visited Scotland in
1845, and evidently examined specimens in the collections,
among others, of Dr Greville and James Wilson of Edin- -
burgh, but in his “Revision” (5) and “Revue” (6) he
seldom indicates any more precise locality than “Scotland ”
(of. Note by K. J. Morton in Ent. Mo. Mag., 1900, p. 108).
Specimens, as we know, were not so carefully labelled with
locality and date then as they are now, but De Selys’
statements would seem to indicate the former existence in
Scotland of species now apparently absent. In giving my
own lists of localities in considerable detail, I have in view
the interest the information may have to future workers.
It is easy to see that restriction—and consequent decrease—
rather than expansion of range is likely to be the fate of
_ some of the species as time goes on.

Of the forty or so British Odonata, scarcely one-half

88 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

occur in Scotland, and of these I have met with only eleven
in the Forth area. It is possible that one or two others—
Leucorhinia dubia, and Aischna cceerulea, for instance—may
yet be discovered among the hills and glens at the head
of the valley. As regards the past, we may feel sure that
when ponds, peat-mosses, marshes, and meadows were more
numerous, so were dragon-flies.

In this district I have heard the name “ Fleein’ Edder ”
applied to the larger species. Sibbald, “Historia Animalium
in Scotia,’ 1684, says, “Ex non favicantibus apud nos—
Perla, the Adder’s boult or Dragon-fly.”

I am greatly indebted to my iriend Mr K. J. Morton for
examining a number of my specimens, and for otherwise
imparting to me much information concerning dragon-flies
in general.

A list of the works cited is given at the end of the paper.
The order of the species and the nomenclature are the same
as in Lucas’s book (7).

ODONATA.
Family LIBELLULID.
Sympetrum striolatum (Charp.).

While not uncommon in the western division of Scotland,
where I have obtained it several times, this is a rare dragon-
‘fly in the eastern section. A specimen in my collection
was taken in the Callander district in the early “seventies”;
and no doubt the species still occurs in that, the western,
portion of “Forth”: it has not, however, come under my
notice there in recent years. In the neighbourhood of Edin-
burgh I have only once met with S. striolatwm, namely, on
27th July 1901, when a single example was discovered
basking in the sunshine on a sandy spot by the side of
a dry ditch on Luffness Links. It must, I think, have been
a wanderer from a distance. About a fortnight before, my
wife saw a bright red dragon-fly, the size of this species,
settle for a moment on the top of a tramway car at Brunts-
field, a busy part of Edinburgh. Possibly some immigrants
had reached us from the east.

The Odonata of the Forth Area. 89

De Selys, in 1845, saw this species from Scotland in
Dr Greville’s collection, but gives (5) no further indication
of locality.

Sympetrum scoticum (Don.).

Libellula scotica, Donovan, Nat. Hist. Brit. Ins., xv. (1811), pp. 39, 40.
Coloured plate.

Around Edinburgh this interesting species is now com-
paratively rare, but in the bogs and marshes of Upper
Forth it is still at least locally common. Doubtless it was
formerly plentiful in Lower Forth also, when more “ mosses ”
existed. Donovan (2, loc. cit.) thus wrote of it in 1811: “We
have been recently favoured with specimens of this species
of Libellula by W. E. Leach, Esq., from whom it received
the trivial name of Scotica, in reference to the country in
which it appears only to have been hitherto discovered.
This gentleman informs us it is common in the bogs of
Scotland: he first observed it near Loch Awe, in Argyle-
shire, and afterwards in the bog of Bannockburn, in which
latter place it occurs in great abundance.” I have seen
specimens which were collected on the Bathgate moors by
Durham Weir about 1840, and have two I took in the
Macbiehill district in 1872. It is a late summer or autumn
species, and De Selys (6) suggests that it may occasionally
hibernate.

Localities in which I have recently obtained S. scotecum
are—

Bavelaw Moss, near Balerno, Midlothian, 7th Aug. 1895, § ; Currie Moor,
Pentlands, 11th Sept. 1900, ? (from C. Campbell); Balla, Lomonds, Aug.
1895, one; Ochils, west of Glenfarg, common in small marsh, Sept. 1899;
between Strathmiglo and Glenfarg, 28th Sept. 1899, one; reservoir, two
miles north of Aberdour, Fife, 4th Aug. 1900, 9; marsh, Clackmannan
Forest, 13th July 1901, two gs recently emerged; Loch Ard, Aberfoyle,

? newly emerged, 31st July 1900, common in Aug.; Strathyre and Bal-
quhidder, Sept. 1902, a few.

Libellula quadrimaculata, Linn.

There is some evidence that this handsome insect was
formerly widely distributed around Edinburgh. Now it is

rarely seen here. It is still, however, fairly common locally
VOL. XVI. L

90 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

in the Upper Forth district. Duncan, writing in 1840
(3, p. 291), says: “In the neighbourhood of Edinburgh it
occurs at Duddingston Loch, among the Pentland Hills, and
elsewhere.” The only occasion on which I have certainly
seen LZ. quadrimaculata anywhere near Edinburgh was on
8th June 1895, when I had the pleasure of watching three
flying about a curling-pond, surrounded by trees, near Drum-
shoreland, Linlithgowshire. In the summer of 1897, a
dragon-fly which, from the description given me, was
probably also of this species, was seen at the clay-pits,
Portobello.

In Upper Forth, where, as already stated, it is still locally
not uncommon, I met with a few examples near Aberfoyle
in July 1900—on the 31st, one, a 2, was captured in a
boggy hollow on the hills behind the village.

Migratory swarms of LZ. quadrimaculata have frequently
been recorded on the Continent, at Heligoland, and even on
the south east coast of England (cf. articles by J. W. Tutt in
Ent. Record for 1899, pp. 153, 181, and 213); but the only
immigration on this side of the Tweed of which I havea
note is thus referred to in a paragraph from a newspaper
of 29th June 1900:—“A few days ago, a flight of insects
was observed to alight upon the Magdalen field, at Berwick,
after coming from the direction of the sea. Some specimens
were captured, and they have been identified as ‘ Libellula
quadrimaculata’ (Dragon-flies).” Gatke in his fascinating
book, “Heligoland as an Ornithological Observatory” (p. 89),
states that countless swarms suddenly make their appear-
ance on that island before thunderstorms.

Family ASCHNIDA.
Cordulegaster annulatus (Latr.).

2? Libellula vulgatissima, Stewart’s List of Edinburgh Insects (1), 1809.
2? Aischna forcipata, List of Dollar Insects (4), 1841, New Stat. Acc.,
vill. p. 89.
I have never, for certain, seen this grand insect in the
district around Edinburgh, and if it occurs at all now it must

The Odonata of the Forth Area. ot

be very rare. But likely enough it did occur formerly.
Lucas (7), quoting De Selys (6), gives as a locality “near
Edinburgh,”+ and I cannot think what the names quoted
above can refer to if not to this species. Gomphus vulga-
tissumus (L.) may have occurred here then, but I hardly
think so.

De Selys (5) in 1846 recorded C. annulatus from Loch
Katrine, in the upper portion of “Forth,” and it is still
locally common there. In July 1900 (27th and 30th) I
captured two on boggy ground behind Aberfoyle; and in
1901 a large 2 was secured at Loch Ard on 4th June,
and several of both sexes at Brig o’ Turk in July. In
August last a pair were taken at the Trossachs by Mrs
Morton. It makes its appearance two or three weeks in
advance of the next.

€

fischna juncea (Linn.).

? Libellula grandis, Stewart’s List of Edinburgh Insects, 1809.
? dishna varia, List of Dollar Insects, 1841, New. Stat. Acc., viii. p. 89.

Of the larger dragon-flies, this is decidedly the most
common in the area, and is the only one which still has
many habitats in the district around Edinburgh. Although
naturally somewhat local, it is widely distributed throughout
“Forth,” and while never rare, is more plentiful in some
seasons than in others. In 1904, for instance, it was com-
moner than I have seen it for a good many years past.
When a boy, I knew this fine insect well, in all its stages,
in and around the ponds in the grounds of Penicuik House;
and specimens then captured are still in my collection. I
have always admired its powerful flight, as it hawked for
flies round the margin of some sedge-girt loch or pool, along
the bank of a river or a hill-burn, or by the edge of a fir-
wood near the moors. It appears rather later in the season
than the previous species, August and September being the

1 De Selys’ words in the ‘‘ Revue” (6) are: ‘‘Commune en Ecosse prés
d’Edimbourg et aux environs des grands lacs.” In the ‘‘ Revision” (5), four
years earlier, they are: ‘‘Scotland. Local. Loch Lomond, Loch Katrine.—
Mus. Dr Greville, Blyth, etc.”

92 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

best months for it; but I have frequently seen it on the
wing in July, and have occasionally observed it still on the |
prowl at the approach of evening.

I have little doubt the names quoted above from the old
lists refer to this species. The name jwncea does not appear
in the lists. It is of course possible that grandis did occur
at one time. In the Royal Scottish Museum there is an old
specimen of 4. juncea from Greville’s collection, labelled
“ Bathgate.”

Localities in which I have taken or otherwise noted
4G, juncea are as follows :—

Penicuik Ponds, 1866, etc.; Habbie’s Howe, Carlops; Macbiehill; Pent-
land Hills (Glencorse, Fairliehope, Aug. 1904, and Nether Habbie’s Howe,
gand¢, 7th Sept. 1904); Tyne below Haddington, Aug. 1900; Presmennan
Loch, Aug. 1894; near Dunbar (D. Bruce); marl-pit, Davidson’s Mains, July
1900, one; Currie Moor, Sept. 1900; Malleny Dam, Balerno, Aug. 1893,
Aug. 1901, etc.; Bavelaw Moss and Wood, Aug. 1875, Sept. 1893, Aug. 1895,
Aug. 1904, several, and other occasions; near Kirknewton, 7th July 1900
and 8th Aug. 1904 (still on wing 6.30 p.m.); Cobbinshaw Moss, 21st Sept.
1904, two; Armadale, one, 27th July 1900 (A. Miller); old quarry, near
Bo'ness, July 1901; Dalmeny, July 1901, 6 (Campbell); marsh on North
Queensferry hills, Aug. 1900, three; Thornton, Aug. 1893; near Falkland,
Aug. 1895; near Dollar, July 1901; near Callander; Brig o’ Turk, 30th July
1901; Balquhidder, Aug. 1902, several.

Family AGRIONIDA.
Calopteryx virgo (Linn.).

Libellula virgo, Stewart’s List of Edinburgh Insects, 1809.
Calepteryx virgo, List of Dollar Insects, 1841, New Stat. Acc., viii. p. 89.

This beautiful insect seems now restricted to a few localities
in the upper or highland section of the area, but there is
evidence that formerly its range, as might be supposed, was
very much wider. According to Stewart (/oc. cit.) it occurred
in the neighbourhood of Edinburgh a century ago, and it is
included in a list of insects occurring in the parish of Dollar
(4, loc. cit.) written in 1841. I have a specimen which was
brought to me from the Trossachs many years ago, and in
1894 I was assured that it was still to be found at Loch
Vennacher. The only place where i have myself met with

The Odonata of the Forth Area. 93

this blue-winged “ Demoiselle” is in the vicinity of Aber-
foyle, where I saw a male in June 1896, but failed to secure
it before it flitted across the river. In June 1901 a few
specimens were obtained on the banks of a sluggish stream
in the same neighbourhood. [Again 30th June 1905.]

Mr Morton has pointed out to me that my Scotch speci-
mens of C. virgo g¢, belong to the northern form, which is
paler at the bases and tips of the wings than southern
examples.

Lestes sponsa (Hansem.).

I have a specimen of this small dragon-fly taken in
the early “seventies” in the Callander district, but unfor-
tunately I have no note of the exact locality, and I have
failed to find the species again during recent visits to Upper
Forth. It is widely distributed in the north and west of
Scotland (I have it from several localities), and it is common,
according to Mr King (Lucas’s “ British Dragon-flies”), no
farther away than Dalmally, so I have no doubt it is still
present in some of the many suitable spots towards the
western limits of “Forth.” It appears about the beginning
of July (in 1893 I took two at Aviemore in June), and
continues on the wing till September.

L. sponsa, from “Scotland,” was noted by De Selys in
Greville’s collection in 1845, but no more definite locality
is given.

Pyrrhosoma nymphula (Sulz.).
Agrion minium, Selys (5), Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., 1846, p. 226.

This is the small red dragon-fly that one not unfrequently
sees about the margins of peat-pools, ponds, and ditches, and
on the adjoining moors and meadows. With a decided
preference for moorland districts, it is widely distributed
throughout the area, and is still locally common. De Selys
(loc. cit.) in 1845 noted it in Greville’s collection from “ Scot-
land”—likely enough from this district, for there can be
no doubt the insect was formerly more plentiful in the
vicinity of Edinburgh than it is now. I remember when

94 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

it occurred in the marshes, now nearly all destroyed, on
the Braid Hills.
My localities and dates for it are—

Braid Marshes, 1873; near Penicuik; Loganlea, Pentlands, 9, 27th May
1895; Bavelaw Moss, June 1895, and 29th and 30th May 1900, fairly common ;
15th May, 6, 27th May and 8rd July 1901, common; June 1904, a good
many; meadow near Kirknewton, 7th and 10th July 1900, several; New-
park, June 1895; Drumshoreland, June 1895 and July 1904, a few; near
Torphichen, 15th June 1895; pond near Cullalo, Fife, June 1900; Duchray,
near Aberfoyle, 27th May 1896; Trossachs Road, Aberfoyle, June, several,
and 6, 27th July 1900.

Ischnura elegans (Lind.).

This, the smallest species we find here, is very widely
distributed, and common locally. Unlike the last, it avoids
the moorlands, preferring sedgy and weedy ponds, dams, and
deep ditches to peat-pools. I have taken it in the following
localities :—

Luffness Marshes, Aberlady, June 1890, July to 9th Aug. 1898, and 16th
June 1900, a good many; Duddingston Loch, at the curling-pond, 26th July
1900, and 4th July 1902, abundant; marl-pit, Davidson’s Mains, July 1900,
a few; Malleny Dam, Balerno, July 1901; canal, near Ratho, Aug. 1903;
Drumshoreland curling-pond, June 1895, July 1900, and July 1901, common ;
Kilconquhar Links, June 1897; Otterston Loch, July 1901; Culross, July
1900; mill-pond, Bridge of Allan, 28th June 1901, common; Loch Ard,
July 1900, common.

Agrion puella (Linn.).
A, puella, Evans, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1900, p. 125, and Ent. Mo.
Mag., 1900, p. 88.

While common in the greater part of England, the true
Agrion puella appears to be a rare insect in Scotland. The
only occasion on which I have taken it was on 22nd June
1896, when I found a few flitting about an old clay-pit
at Bush, near Roslin, county of Edinburgh, as recorded in
1900 (loc. cit.). The name puella appears in Stewart’s Edin-
burgh List (1), but the record is of doubtful application,
for several forms—including the next—were then covered
by that name. De Selys (5) seems, however, in 1845 to
have identified both puella and cyathigerum from “Scotland ”
in Greville’s collection.

The distribution of these small blue-bodied species in
Scotland is much in need of investigation.

The Odonata of the Forth Area. 95

Enallagma cyathigerum (Charp.).

? Libellula puella (whole or part), Stewart’s List of Edinburgh Insects,
1809.

The elegant little blue-bodied dragon-flies one so often
meets with are the males of this species. It is much our
commonest dragon-fly, occurring more or less freely in
suitable localities—meadows, marshes, banks of streams,
ponds, etc.—throughout the area. There is no need to give
all the localities in which I have identified it: the following
will suffice to show how generally distributed it is.

Braid Hills marshes, formerly common (1873, etc.), still present in 1900;
Duddingston Loch, abundant, 1878, July 1889, 1890, 1892, etc.; Penicuik,
1866, etc.; near Borthwick Castle, 6th July 1895; Ormiston, 5th July 1895;
Presmennan ; Luffness, June 1890; Tyne below Haddington, July 1900;
marl-pit, Davidson’s Mains, 19th July 1900, ete., common; Canal bank,
Kingsknowe, 4th Aug. 1902, a few; near Balerno, 3rd July 1901, etc.; New-
park, July 1901; Drumshoreland, 8th June 1895, 4th July 1901, common;
near Torphichen, 15th June 1895; near Be’ness, June 1900 (R. Godfrey);
Otterston Loch, 10th July 1901, gs and ¢s, abundant, many just emerging;
Burntisland Waterworks, 5th July 1900, common; Thornton; Kilconquhar;
Falkland, 14th Aug. 1895; near Culross, July 1900, common; Bridge of
Allan, 28th June 1901; Aberfoyle and Loch Ard, 27th July 1900, abundant;
Trossachs; Loch Lubnaig.

All of the above-mentioned species, with the exception,
perhaps, of Agrion puella, have a very wide range in Britain
—south of England to north of Scotland; and they are also
extensively distributed on the Continent.

Other five species of Odonata are certainly known to occur
in Scotland at the present time, namely :—

Leucorhinia dubia (Lind.)—West and north.

Somatochlora metallica (Lind.)—Inverness-shire.

Somatochlora arctica (Zett.)—Highlands.

Aischna cerulea (Strom.)—Highlands.

Agrion hastulatum, Charp.— Aviemore, Inverness-shire
(E. M. M., 1900 and 1903).

The following have also been recorded on good authority
(cf. Mr Morton’s note already referred to on page 87) :—

Orthetrum ceerulescens (Fab.)—“Scotland” (De Selys);
Kirkcudbrightshire (Buchanan White).

96 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Aischna grandis (L.)—“ Scotland” (De Selys); Kirkeud-
brightshire (Buchanan White).

Agrion pulchellum, Lind—De Selys (5), apparently in
one of the west coast localities which he visited.

A number of other species are alleged to have been taken
in Scotland, but the records are old and vague or otherwise
open to doubt.

REFERENCES.

1. Stewart, C., List of Insects found in Neighbourhood of
Edinburgh, 1809 (Memoirs Wernerian Nat. Hist. Soc.,
vol. i. (1811), pp. 566-577).

2. Donovan, E., Nat. Hist. Brit. Insects, vol. xv., 1811.

3. Duncan, J., Entomology, vol. i, 1840 (Wat. Lib., vol.
SOKA, ).

4. Insects found in Parish of Dollar, 1841 (New Stat.
Acc., vol. viii., Claékmannanshire, pp. 88, 89).

5. De Setys, Revision of the British Libellulide (Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., 1846, pp. 217-227).

6. Revue des Odonates ou Libellules d’Europe, 1850.

7. Lucas, W. J., British Dragon-flies (Odonata), 1900.

Note.—The distribution given in Hagen’s “Synopsis of the
British Dragon-flies” (#nt. Ann., 1857) is merely a repetition of
that given by De Selys.

:

aAs\ :
PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Lights

ROYAL PHYSICAL, SOLE

FOR THE

? PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHES OF
NATURAL HISTORY.

SESSION 1905-1906.

No. 4 > Von. XVI. Paces 97-190.

iC ONTENTS.
A Catalogue of Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea found in the
Basin of the River Forth and its Estuary. By Tuomas Scort,

LL.D., F.L.S., Mem. Soc. Zool. de France, ete. [With Map.
- Plate VI.], peur i. See 3 ON. ; : we te 27

PAGE

- ~ EDINBURGH: M‘FARLANE & ERSKINE.

or | 4... .Maren 1906.

PRICE

. Part 1 (1854-56),

Vols” ve

Do.
Do.

Vol. Ve

Do.
Vols evil:

OR Re

Part 2 (1856-58),

. Part 1 (1858-61),

Part 2 (1861-62),

. Part 1 (1862-63),

Part 2 (1863-64),
Part 3 (1864-65),
Part 4 (1865-66),

Part 1 (1874-75),
Part 2 (1875-76),
Part 3 (1876-78),
Part 1 (1878-79),
Part 2 (1879-80),
(1880-81),

out of print,
out of print,
out of print,
out of print,
out of print,
out of pront,
out of print,
out of print,

out of print,
out of print,
out of print,

Title and Index of this Vol. isswed
with Part 1, Vol. VII.

Weolls WAIN
Do.

Vol. VIII.

Do.

Vol® ~ Lx.

Vol. 2.

Mole XI.

Do.

Do.

Vol. XIII.

Do.
Do.
Vol. XIV.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Vol.
Do.

Vol. XVI.

Do.
Do.
Do.

XII.

Dave

Part 1 (1881-82),
Part 2 (1882-83),
Part 1 (1883-84),
Part 2 (1884-85),
Part 1 (1885-86),
Part 2 (1886-87),
Part 3 (1887-88),
Part 1 (1888-89),
Part 2 (1889-90),
Part 1 (1890-91),
Part 2 (1891-92),
Part 1 (1892-93),
Part 2 (1893-94),
Part 1 (1894-95),
Part 2 (1895-96),
Part 3 (1896-97),
Part 1 (1897-98),
Part 2 (1898-99),

out of print,

Part 3 (1899-1900),
Part 4 (1900-1901),
Part 1 (1901-1902),

Part 2

(1902-1904),

No. 1 (Pages 1-24),

No, 2 (Pages 25-48),
No. 3 (Pages 49-96),
No. 4 (Pages 97-190),

To the Fellows.

3/6
3/6
5/

3/6
7/6
7/6

4}
2/6
7/6
7/6
10/
3/6
4/6

5/
6/
5
5/
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
iy)
1/6
2/
2/6

“PROCEEDINGS

To the Public.
5/
5/
7/6
5/

The following may also be had of the Librarian:

Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL.,

Do. do.

Forms of Application for Fellowshiv may be had from the Secretary.

Vol. VIII. Part 1,

Entrance Fee,
Annual Subscription,

2/

10/6
12/6

Pe ee ee es

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 97

XIV. A Catalogue of Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea
found in the Basin of the River Forth and its Estuary.
By Tuomas Scott, LL.D., F.LS., Mem. Soc. Zool. de
France, etc. [With Map. Plate VI.]

(Read 27th March 1905.)

PART I.—MALACOSTRACA, CLADOCERA, AnD
BRANCHIURA.

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

(1) On the Drainage Area of the Forth.

The river Forth, from its source on the side of Ben
Lomond to where it terminates in the estuary near
Kincardine-on-Forth, measures about 644 miles, and as the
length of the estuary is about 48 miles, the total length,
from the source of the river to the seaward limits of the
estuary, is slightly over 112 miles. Leslie and Herdman
describe the Forth estuary as extending to the Vale of
Stirling, or about 8 miles farther west than the limit
stated here.

The drainage area of the river, including its tributaries, is
almost 628 square miles, while that of the estuary is about
1133 square miles, or about 1760 square miles altogether.

The average depth of the estuary scarcely exceeds 15
fathoms. There are one or two places where it reaches
to about 40 fathoms, but these are very limited. A con-
siderable portion of the estuary towards its seaward limits
ranges from 15 to 30 fathoms in depth; but nowhere is
there such deep water as in the Firth of Clyde.

The largest fresh-water lochs within the area are—Loch
Katrine, Loch Vennachar, Loch Voil, Loch Lubnaig, and
Loch Leven (Kinross). There are a number of smaller
lakes, such as Loch Achray, Loch Ard, Lake of Menteith,
and others, a few of which, though not yet examined, are

‘The measurements, etc., given here are obtained chiefly from Part II.
of the Twelfth Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland (1894),
which contains a map of the catchment-basins of all the Scottish rivers,
with explanatory notes, giving the lengths of the various rivers, the areas
of each river-basin, and other useful information derived from official sources.

VOL. XVI. } M

98 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

not expected to add much to what is already known con-
cerning the fresh-water Crustacea of the district. For a
description of the physical geography of the estuary, see the
Introduction to Parnell’s Fishes of the Firth of Forth, and
to Leslie and Herdman’s Invertebrate Fauna of the Estuary.

(2) On the History of the Crustacean Fauna of the Forth.

CONTRIBUTIONS BY Sirk ROBERT SIBBALD AND
PROFESSOR JAMESON.

Though Sir Robert Sibbald in 1710, and _ Professor
Jameson in 1809, published lists of Forth - Invertebrata
which are of much interest, the number of Crustacea re-
corded by them is small, and consists for the most part
of the larger species.

CONTRIBUTIONS BY HARRY GOODSIR.

The interesting field opened up by the researches of Harry
Goodsir, and the success that attended his labours, might
have directed some attention to the micro-crustacean fauna
of the Firth of Forth, but the so-called “stalk-eyed” forms
still continued to be the chief object of study. Even Pro-
fessor Bell, in his work on the British Stalk-eyed Crustacea,
could add little to what Goodsir had published on the
Schizopoda and Cumacea, but simply transcribed that author’s
descriptions and drawings.

CONTRIBUTIONS BY DR JAMES M‘BAIN.

The lists of the flora and fauna of the Firth of Forth
prepared by Dr James M‘Bain, R.N., and which form part
of the Appendix to the Rev. Walter Wood’s Hast Neuk
of Fife—a local but valuable work on the history and
antiquities of that part of Fifeshire, published in 1862—
marks an important stage in our knowledge of the natural
history of the estuary, and, as the author remarks, the lists
contained in that work are “more perfect than any which
had hitherto been published.”

In the list of Crustacea given on pages 375 and 376 of that
work, thirty-two species are recorded, the names of which
are as follow :—

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 99

Stenorhynchus phalangium, now Macropodia rostrata (cf. Stebbing,

Inachus Dorsettensis.
Hyas araneus.

» coarctatus.
Hurynome aspera.
Cancer pagurus.
Carcinus menas.
Portunus variegatus.

Bs depurator.
» marmoreus.
A pusillus.
Pinnotheres pisum.
Atelecyclus heterodon,
Corystes cassivelaunus.
Inthodes maia.
Pandalus annulicornis,

Pagurus Bernhardus.

+ ulidianus,
a Forbesi,
% Hyndmanni,
es levis,
Porcellana platycheles.
a longicornis.
Galathea squamifera.
5, strigosa.
nexd.

99

Munida Rondeletii,
Homarus vulgarus,
Nephrops norvegicus.
Crangon vulgarus.
Hippolyte varians.
Mysis chameleon,

History of Crustacea, p. 105).

now A. septemdentatus.

» LP. Montagur.
» Lupagurus Bernhardus.
young of Hupagurus Bernhardus.
now (?) Hupagurus (or Spiropagurus)
sculptimanus.
Anapagurus Hyndmannt.
in levis.

99

3?

» WM. bamffia.

» Astacus gammarus.

Macromysis flexcuosus.

}r}

Dr M‘Bain, when compiling his list, appears to have over-
looked the discoveries of Harry Goodsir, published in 1843 ;
for, with the exception of the Mysis chameleon, all the species
recorded belong to the Decapoda. A second omission briefly
-noticed here, but which is more fully referred to in the
sequel, is that of Calocaris Macandree, Bell. This curious

100 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvrety.

species was obtained by Captain M‘Andrew in the stomach
of a haddock captured by him in the Firth of Forth in 1851.1
But the list, notwithstanding these omissions, is of consider-
able value, as giving a fairly accurate summary of what at
that time was known concerning the Crustacea of the Forth
estuary.

CONTRIBUTION BY LESLIE AND HERDMAN.

The next important contribution to the literature of the
Forth Crustacea is contained in Leslie and Herdman’s
Invertebrate Fauna of the Firth of Forth, published in
1881.2 The authors have not only given the results of a
large amount of original research, but they have incorporated,
along with their own discoveries, the species recorded by
previous observers, so that this work presents the most
complete account of the Invertebrata of the estuary published
up to that date. The list of Crustacea contained in it,
though limited to the two sub-classes Cirripedia and Mala-
costraca, is considerably extended, and would doubtless have
been much larger had the time at the disposal of the authors
permitted them to take up the Entomostraca as well; but
the animals belonging to this sub-class are, for the most
part, microscopic, and on that account, and also because of
their great numbers and variety, require a considerable
amount of time and patience for their successful study.

Ninety-seven species of Crustacea are recorded in Leslie
and Herdman’s Catalogue, and they are arranged in the
following order :—

Cirripedia, 12 species.

Amphipoda, DOP ye

Isopoda, . 10S

Cumacea (Sympoda), . ees

Stomapoda ne : NE

Decapoda, 44 (i,
Total, . ' ; 97

1 Cf. Hist. of Brit. Crust., by Adam White (British Museum), published

1857, p. 99.
2 Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc., vol. vi. pp. 68-95, 201-231, and 268-315.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 101

Among the Cirripedia mentioned, one species—Lalanus
tintinabulum—is, as stated by the authors, “an inhabitant
of the warmer seas, and its occurrence in the Forth is an
accidental circumstance.”

Among the Amphipoda, Caprella lobata, O. F. Miiller, is
now regarded as synonymous with Caprella linearis (Linn.).

Among the Isopoda, Arcturus (or Astacilla) gracilis,
’ Goodsir, is considered by G. O. Sars to be the young of
A. longicormis (Sow.).

Among the Cumacea, Cuma Edwardsi, Goodsir, has been
shown to be synonymous with C. scorproides (Montagu).

Among the Schizopoda, Cynthia Flemingi, Goodsir, is con-
sidered by Canon A. M. Norman to be probably identical with
Leptomysis lingvura, G. O. Sars, and Themisto brevisprnosa,
Goodsir, to be probably the male of Mysis (Macromysis)
flecuosus (Miill.).?

Themisto longispinosa, Goodsir, Canon Norman is unable
to identify—the description being insufficient.

These and similar changes in arrangement and nomen-
clature are, however, incidental to the more accurate know-
ledge we now possess concerning the animals themselves,
as well as concerning the discoveries and writings of the
earlier authors, but notwithstanding these changes, the
work referred to is still indispensable to those who wish
to become acquainted with the natural history of the Forth
estuary.

CONTRIBUTION BY DR J. R. HENDERSON.

A further contribution to the natural history of the estuary
was made by Dr J. R. Henderson, in a paper read before the
Royal Physical Society of Edinburgh in December 1884,
entitled, “ Recent Additions to the Invertebrate Fauna of the
Firth of Forth.” The number of species previously recorded
was considerably increased, and as Dr Henderson's attention
had been devoted chiefly to the Crustacea, the largest number
of the additions occurred in this group. They are as
follows :—

1 Cf. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Sept. 1892, pp. 245 and 251, footnote.

102 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

AMPHIPODA—13 Species, viz.:—

Hyale Nilssoni (Rathke).

Stenothoé pollexrana (Bate), now Metopa norvegica (Lillj.).
Ampelisca cequicornis, Bruzel

Iphimedia obesa, Rathke.

Pherusa bicuspis! (Kroyer), now ? Paramphithoé bicuspis (Kroyer).
», fucrcola, Leach, », [Apherusa Juriniw (M. Edw,).
Callhopiusbidentatus, Norman, now Paramphithoé bicuspis (Kroyer).

Aora gracilis, Bate.

Noenia tuberculosa, Bate, » Podoceropsis Sophie, Boeck.
» excavata, Bate, - a eacavata (Bate).
Corophium tenuicorne, Norman, ,, Corophium affine, Bruzel.
Hyperia oblivia, Kroyer, ,, Parathemisto oblivia (Kroyer).
Proto ventricosa, Mull., » Phtisica marina, Slabber.

IsopopA—3 Species.

Tanais vittatus, Rathke, now Tanais Cavolini, M. Edw.
Jeera albifrons, Leach.
Idotea linearis (Penn.).

CUMACEA (SYMPODA)—1 Species.

Diastylis levis, Norman (previously recorded in Leslie and Herd-
man’s Invertebrate Fauna as Alauna rostrata, Goodsir),
now Diastylis rostratus (Goodsir).”

SCHIZOPODA— 2 Species.

Nyctiphanes norvegica (M. Sars).
Podopsis Slabbert (V. Ben.), now Macropsis Slabberv.

DECAPODA—2 Species.

Hwppolyte pusiola, Kroyer.
Eupagurus pubescens (Kroyer).

1 Pherusa bicuspis is Bate’s name, not Kroyer’s; and though Pherusa
bicuspis, Bate, was at one time considered to be synonymous with Kroyer’s
Anvphithoé bicuspis (now Paranphithoé bicuspis (Kroyer)), it turns out, on
the contrary, to be equivalent to Apherusa bispinosa (Bate).

? It is but right to state that though G. O. Sars regards D. levis as identical
with D. rostratus, Norman does not agree with that opinion (see note under
that species).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 103

It will be observed from the above list that twenty species,
exclusive of the Diastylis, were at this time added to the
Crustacean fauna of the estuary. Two undescribed species
belonging to the Amphipoda were also found by Dr
Henderson in 1884, but were not recorded till 1894; ere
that time, however, they had been described by Professor
G.O.Sars. They are entered in the present Catalogue under
the names of Sthenometopa robusta (G. O. Sars) and Param-
phithoé monocupis, G. O. Sars.

CONTRIBUTIONS BY THE PRESENT WRITER IN THE REPORTS
OF THE FISHERY BOARD FOR SCOTLAND, ETC.

Although various groups of the Crustacea were receiving
more attention than formerly, it was not till. 1888 that a list
of the Forth Entomostraca was published. In that year I
contributed a small paper to the Szzth Annual Report of the
Fishery Board for Scotland, entitled, “A Revised List of the
Crustacea of the Firth of Forth,” in which I gave the results
of some researches extending over the autumn and winter
of 1887, and these included a list of marine Entomostraca.
For several years thereafter, my leisure time was devoted
chiefly to the study of the Crustacea, and especially of the
Entomostraca of the Forth estuary. The work assigned to
me by the Fishery Board for Scotland afforded me oppor-
tunities for this study such as are seldom enjoyed by the
student, and I desire to express my great obligation to the
Fishery Board for the many favourable opportunities I have
enjoyed for prosecuting the study both of the marine and of
the fresh-water Crustacea of Scotland. The results of my
researches, under the title of “Additions to the Fauna of the
Firth of Forth,’ were published year by year in the Board’s
Annual Reports. The last of these papers (No. 8) was
published in 1896, in Part III. of the Fourteenth Report.
But though no papers have been published since 1896 dealing
exclusively with Forth Crustacea, records of new or rare
forms from the Forth have appeared occasionally in subse-
quent Reports, along with the descriptions of species from
other parts of Scotland. Papers on the land and fresh-water

104 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Crustacea of the district were also contributed by me to the
Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society for 1890-94.

Some months ago I decided to collect all the scattered
records of Forth Crustacea published by myself in the
Annual Reports of the Fishery Board for Scotland and
elsewhere, and, adding those published by other writers,
or that have been supplied to me by friends interested in
the natural history of the district, to prepare a catalogue
of the land, fresh-water, and marine Crustacea known to
occur within the limits of the basin of the river Forth and
of its estuary, in the hope that it might be useful to other
students, as former catalogues have been to myself.

CONTRIBUTIONS BY ProFEssor G. S. BrRapy, Rev. A. M.
NORMAN, AND DAviID ROBERTSON.

In the preparation of this Catalogue, I have been indebted
to a paper by Professor G. 8. Brady and David Robertson on
the “Ostracoda and Foraminifera of Tidal Rivers,’ and to
the excellent monograph of “The Marine and Fresh-Water
Ostracoda of the North Atlantic and North-Western Europe ”
by Brady and Norman, for a considerable number of Forth
records of species belonging to that group.

CONTRIBUTION BY Dr AND MIss SPRAGUE.

An excellent paper on the Fresh-Water Crustacea of Mid-
Lothian, by Dr and Miss Sprague, published in the 7rans-
actions of the Edinburgh Field Naturalists and Microscopical
Society in 1901, has alsu been very helpful to me.

CoNTRIBUTIONS BY WILLIAM Evans, F.R.S.E., AND
Mrs JANET CARPHIN.

Mr Wilham Evans, F.R.S.E., Edinburgh, has added one or
two interesting species, notably the rare terrestrial Isopod,
Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggi, to the Crustacean fauna of the
Edinburgh district, and has also furnished me with a number

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 105

of additional localities for species already recorded; while
Mrs Janet Carphin, in the course of her searches for land and
fresh-water Mollusca in the district around Edinburgh, has
been successful in capturing in the Union Canal the curious
Argulus foliaceus'—a Crustacean which is the only living
representative in Scotland of the Branchiura, a suborder of
the Branchiopoda..

One of the many discoveries made by my friend the
late Mr James Bennie, of the Geological Survey, was
the occurrence, near Edinburgh, of numerous remains of
Lepidurus (Apus) borealis belonging to the Phyllopoda,
which is also a suborder of the Branchiopoda. This dis-
covery is the more interesting, as no living representative of
that suborder is now known to occur in the British Islands.

With the assistance of the works referred to, and of friends
interested in the natural history of the district, the compila-
tion of this Catalogue has been more a pleasure than a task.
It may also be stated that several valuable monographs of
special groups of Crustacea published during recent years,
have been of much service to me in the systematic arrange-
ment of the species, and though reference to these will be
found throughout the Catalogue, a few of the more important
of them may be mentioned here, viz.:—

The Crustacea of Norway, by Professor G. O. Sars of
Christiania. Four volumes of this great work have already
been published, viz—vVol. I., the Amphipoda; Vol. II., the
Isopoda; Vol. III., the Cumacea; and Vol. IV., the Copepoda-
Calanoida. Vol. V., the Copepoda-Harpacticoida, is at present
in course of publication.

Résultats des Campagnes Scientifiques accomplies sur son
Yacht par Albert [° Prince Souverarn de Monaco— Fascicule
xvl., Amphipodes provenant des Campagnes de Ul Hirondelle
by Edouard Chevreux.

Contribution a Vétude des Hpicarides: les Bopyride, by
M. Jules Bonnier.

Les Copépodes du Boulonnaise, by Dr Eugene Canu.

1 Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., October 1895, p. 255.

106 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctrety.

Deutschlands freilebende WStisswasser-Copepoden, by Prof.
Otto Schmeil.

Die Asterocheriden des Golfes von Neapel, by Dr W.
Giesbrecht, of Naples.

The Choniostomatide: A Group of Minute Parasitee Cope-
poda, by Dr H. J. Hansen.

Cladocera-Suecie: A Monograph of the Cladocera of
Sweden, by Prof. W. Lilljeborg.

Deutschlands Stisswasser-Ostracoden, by Dr G. W. Miller.

Cypriden und Darwinuliden der Schweiz, by Dr A. Kauf-
mann.

The work by the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, F.R.S., entitled
A History of Crustacea, has been very helpful to me in the
general systematic arrangement of the species, and especially
of the Malacostraca.

My son, Mr Andrew Scott, A.L.S., has given me valuable
assistance with the identification of the Entomostracan
species; and I also am greatly indebted to my friend
Mr F. G. Pearcey, for rich collections of micro-Crustacea
from the Forth estuary and elsewhere.

The Map which accompanies this part of the Catalogue
shows approximately the limits of the basin of the river
and its estuary. It also shows approximately the positions
of the ten Experimental Stations laid down by the Fishery
Board for Scotland in the Firth of Forth, since many of the
species recorded here were obtained at one or other of these
“Stations.” The Stations are marked in Roman numerals:
pin oth. LV., ete:

In arranging the species, I have followed the classification
in Stebbing’s Natural History of Crustacea (page 49), in
which the Podophthalma have the first place, while the
Cirripedia come last.

The following is the order in which the species in this
part (Part I.) of the Catalogue are arranged.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 107

Parr I.
Sub-Class IL.—MALACOSTRACA.

Order 1. PopoPHTHALMA, or STALKED-EYED CRUSTACEA.

Suborder Brachyura, number of species, 19

5 Macrura, . : 5 3 os Bs)

- Schizopoda, a -s 26
Total number of species belonging to the Podophthalma, 78

Order 2. EDRIOPHTHALMA, or SESSILE-EYED CRUSTACEA.

Suborder Sympoda (Cumacea), number of species, 21

Ms Isopoda,_ . : is - 42

i Amphipoda, : : oe 145
Total number of species belonging to the Edriophthalma, 208

Sub-Class II.—ENTOMOSTRACA,

Order 3. BRANCHIOPODA.

Suborder Cladocera, : number of species, 54
ss Branchiura, ’ ; o s 1
Total number of species belonging to the Branchiopoda, 55
i, ms recorded in this Part, 341

Part II. will contain a catalogue of species belonging to
the Order Osrracopa, of which there are about 132 species,
S wa Coprrepopa, of which there are about 300
the Sub-Class CrrripepiA, of which there are about 13
and adding to these the number given above, viz., 341

The total number of species for the Forth at
present known is about : 786

In compiling this first part, should any species have been
overlooked, or should any additional species occur before
Part II. is published, they will be noticed in an Appendix
to that part.

108 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

Sub-Class I. MALACOSTRACA.
Order 1. PODOPHTHALMA.
Suborder Brachyura.!
Family CANCRID 4.
Genus (1) Cancer, Linné, 1767.

1. Cancer pagurus, Linné.
1767. Cancer pagurus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. i. p. 1044.
Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, from inshore to moderately deep
water. Specimens have occasionally been captured in the
trawl-net of the Fishery steamer “Garland,” at all the
experimental stations from above Queensferry to the mouth
of the estuary.

Family PORTUNID.
Genus (2) Carcinus, Leach, 1813.

2. Carcinus menas (Linné).
1767. Cancer menas, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. i, p. 1048.
Habitat.—Common everywhere between tide-marks, especi-
ally where the shore is rough and provides suitable shelter ;
also occasionally found in moderately deep water.

Genus (3) Portunus, Fabricius, 1798.

3. Portunus puber (Linné).
1767. Cancer puber, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. i. p. 1046.
Habitat—Taken at the mouth of the estuary on deep-sea
lines (Leslie and Herdman). This appears to be, so far, the
only published record of this species for the Firth of Forth.

4. Portunus depwrator (Linne).
1767. Cancer depurator, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. 1. p. 1048.
Habitat.—Common throughout the estuary, and frequently
associated with P. holsatus.

1 Tn the nomenclature of this suborder, Bell’s British Stalk-eyed Crustacea,
1853, has been generally followed.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 109

5. Portunus holsatus, Fabricius.
1798. Portunus holsatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst., Suppl., p. 336.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Dr Leach, as P. lividus). Com-
monly met with on the oyster-banks (Henderson).! Firth
of Forth (White, 1857). One of the more common of the
Forth Brachyure, but is not mentioned in Wood’s List.

6. Portunus marmoreus, Leach.
1814. Portunus marmoreus, Leach, Malacol. Brit., pl. viii.
Habitat.—At Portobello and Musselburgh, found occasion-
ally on the beach (Howden; L. & H.). Obtained amongst
trawl refuse west of May Island (Mihi).

7. Portunus pusillus, Leach.
1814. Portunus pusillus, Leach, op. cit., pl. ix. figs. 5-8.

Habitat.—Off Prestonpans (Howden). Firth of Forth,
common (Norman; cf. White, Brit. Crust., 1857, p. 52).
Leslie and Herdman say they have frequently dredged this
species near Inchkeith (dnvert. Fauna, p. 51). I have
occasionally observed P. pusil/us amongst the trawl retuse
when at work in Largo Bay.

Genus (4) Portumnus, Leach, 1814.

8. Portumnus latipes (Pennant).

1777. Cancer latipes, Pennant, Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 5, pl. i. fig. 4.
1853. Portumnus variegatus, Bell, op. cit., p. 865.

Habitat.—At Prestonpans and Port Seton (Howden).
Shores of the Firth of Forth (White, Brit. Crust., p. 43).
Portobello (Leslie and Herdman). Sandy shore near Gullane
(Andrew Scott). Aberlady, 1890 (W. Evans).

Family CORYSTID &.
Genus (5) Corystes, Latreille, 1802.

9. Corystes Cassivelawnus (Pennant).
1777. Cancer Cassivelawnus, Pennant, Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 6, pl. vii.

Habitat.—Off Inchkeith (M‘Bain). Newhaven (C. W.

1“ Decapod and Schizopod Crustacea of the Clyde,” Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc.
Glasgow (1886), p. 10.

110 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Peach). Near the Bass Rock (Metzger). Firth of Forth
(Edin. Mus.). Aberlady and Kirkcaldy Bays (Leslie and
Herdman). Aberlady and Portobello (W. Evans). I have
occasionally observed this species among the trawl refuse
when at work with the Fishery cruiser “Garland.”

Genus (6) Atelecyclus, Leach, 1813.

10. Atelecyclus septemdentatus (Montagu).

1815. Cancer (Hippa) septemdentatus, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc.,
vol. xigsplo a. fig. 1.
1853. Atelecyclus heterodon, Bell, op. cit., p. 153.

Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, rare (Goodsir). Firth of Forth
(Edin. Mus.). Beach at Portobello (M‘Bain). Found in the
stomach of a cod-fish (Dr J. A. Smith} and Leslie and
Herdman). I have obtained A. septemdentatus on one or
two occasions.

Family PINNOTHERID &. |
Genus (7) Pinnotheres, Latreille, 1802.

11. Pinnotheres piswm (Linne).
1767. Cancer pisum, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. i., part 2, p. 1039.
Habitat.—Taken off Longniddry and elsewhere (Leslie and
Herdman). I have occasionally obtained living specimens
—male and female—in the shells of large horse-mussels
(Mytilus modiolus). Two females from JZ. modiolus, Preston-
pans, Feb. 1905 (W. Evans).

Family MACHID&.
Genus (8) Macropodia, Leach, 1814.
12. Macropodia rostrata (Linné).

1767. Cancer rostratus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. 11. p. 1014.
1853. Stenorynchus Phalangiwm, Bell, op. cit., p. 13.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, at Prestonpans (Hdin. Mus.).
Both Howden, and Leslie and Herdman record this species,

1 Of. Proc. Roy. Phy. Soc. Edin., vol. ili. p. 214.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. V1

and describe it as generally distributed where the bottom
consists of mud and sand. I have frequently obtained it
in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith, and off Musselburgh.
North Berwick, 1895 (W. Evans).

Genus (9) Inachus, Fabricius, 1798.
13. Inachus dorsettensis (Pennant).
1777. Cancer dorsettensis, Penn., Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 12, pl. x. fio, 1

Habitat.—Howden records obtaining this species on fisher-
men’s deep-sea lines, but no locality is given.

14. Lnachus leptochirus, Leach.
1815. Inachus leptochirus, Leach, Malac. Brit., pl. xxii., B.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Rev. G. Gordon; cf. White’s
Popular Hist. Brit. Crust. (1857), p. 19).

Family MAIIDA,
Genus (10) Hyas, Leach, 1813.
15. Hyas araneus (Linné).
1746. Cancer araneus, Linn., Fauna Suecica, p. 2030.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, common in the littoral and
laminarian zones.

16. Hyas coarctatus, Leach.
1815. Hyas coarctatus, Leach, Trans. Linn, Soc., vol. xi. p. 329.

Habitat.—Moderately common in the Firth of Forth,
especially in the deeper water.

Family PARTHENOPID 4.
Genus (11) Eurynome, Leach, 1814.
17. Hurynome aspera (Pennant).
1777. Cancer asper, Penn., Brit, Zool., vol. iv. p. 13, pl. x. fig. 3.
Hatntat.—Taken off Prestonpans and Port Seton (Howden).

112 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family LEUCOSIID4.
Genus (12) Ebalia, Leach, 1817.
18. Hbalia tuberosa (Pennant).

1777. Cancer tuberosa, Penn., Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 19, pl. ix.
fig. a-f.
1858. Hbalia Pennantii, Bell, op. cit., p. 141.

Habitat—Dredged off the west side of May Island, on
moderately hard ground, scarce (Mihi).

19. Hbalia Cranchi, Leach.
1815. Ebalia Cranchi, Leach, Zool. Miscellany, vol. i. p. 20.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Dredged twice in
25 fathoms about 24 miles off Dunbar (F. M. Balfour; cf.
Leslie and Herdman, Appendix, p. 106).

Suborder Macrura.
Family LITHODID.
Genus (1) Lithodes, Latreille, 1806.

1. Lithodes maia (Linné).
1767. Cancer maia, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1046.

Habitat—Firth of Forth (Howden). Dr Neil obtained
young specimens in the stomach of a cod-fish. Leslie and
Herdman state that Zzthodes is not uncommon near the
mouth of the estuary. It has been taken, though sparingly,
with the “ Garland’s” trawl-net off the east and west sides
of May Island.

Family PAGURID&.
Genus (2) Eupagurus, Brandt, 1851.

2. Hupagurus bernhardus (Linné).

1767. Cancer bernhardus, Linn., Syst. Nat.,ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1049,
1853. Pagurus bernhardus, Bell, op. cit., p. 171.

Habitat—Common in the Firth of Forth. The form
recorded by Howden under the name of P. ulidianus, is
regarded as a small or young &. bernhardus.1

| History of Crustacea, by Rev. T, R. R, Stebbing (1893), p. 161,

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. bs:

3. Hupagurus cuanensis (W. Thompson).

1843. Pagurus cuanensis, W. Thomp., Brit. Assoc. Report (1843),
p- 267.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, occupying the shell of a Turre-
tella (F. M. Balfour). This species is apparently rare in the
Forth estuary.

4, Eupagurus pubescens (Kroyer).

1838. Pagurus pubescens, Kroyer, Consp. Crust. Gronl., Naturh.
Midsslcar; Sern i.,.01. p. 251e
1853. 5 Thompsoni, Bell, op. cit., p. 372.
Habitat—Taken west of May Island in 20 fathoms
(Henderson). East of Inchkeith, 9 to 10 fathoms; appar-
ently rare.

[5. Hupagurus sculptumanus (Lucas).

1843. Pagurus sculptimanus, Lucas, Explo. Scient. de 1 Algerie,
I. Crust.; p. 32, pl. 115 fig. 6.
1853. is Forbesii, Bell, op. cit., p. 186.

Habitat—Dr Howden has recorded Pagurus (Spiropagurus)
Forbesiz from the Forth estuary ; but Stebbing, in his History
of Crustacea, p. 161, regards this as synonymous with
ELupagurus sculptimanus, Lucas, the occurrence of which in
the Forth is somewhat doubtful."]

Genus (3) Anapagurus, Henderson, 1886.

6. Anapagurus Hyndmanm (Thompson).

1843. Pagurus Hyndmanni, Thomp., Brit. Assoc. Report (1843),
p. 267.

1886. Anapagurus Hyndmanni, Henderson, Decap. and Schiz.
Crust. of the Clyde, p. 27.

Habitat—Off Musselburgh and Prestonpans (Howden).

I have occasionally obtained this species amongst the trawl
refuse of the Fishery steamer “Garland.”

11It is probable that a critical study of the smaller hermit crabs of the
- Forth estuary might show that some that are regarded as forms of common
species may turn out to be distinct.

VOL. XVI. N

114 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

7. Anapagurus levis (Thompson).

1843. Pagurus levis, Thomp., Brit. Assoc. Report (1843), p. 267.
1886. Anapagurus levis, Henderson, op. cit., p. 28.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Howden). This species is of
more frequent occurrence than the last; I have taken it both
with the dredge and amongst trawl refuse, in different parts
of the estuary.

Family PORCELLANIDAE.
Genus (4) Porcellana, Lamarck, 1801.

8. Porcellana longicornis (Linné).
1767. Cancer longicornis, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xil., vol. ii. p. 1040.
Habitat.—Moderately common, and generally distributed.

9. Porcellana platycheles (Pennant).
1777. Cancer platycheles, Penn., Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 9, pl. iv. fig. 2.
Habitat—Taken at Crail and Fifeness at low-water
(Howden). At Elie, and near North Berwick (Leslie and
Herdman).

Family GALATHEIDA.
Genus (5) Galathea, Fabricius, 1793.
10. Galathea squamifera, Leach.
1815. Galathea squamifera, Leach, Edin. Encyel., vol. vii. p. 398.
Habitat—Firth ot Forth, moderately common (cf. Leslie

and Herdman). In rock pools at North Berwick, January
1896 (W. Evans).

11. Galathea nexa, Embleton.
1834. Galathea nexa, Embl., Trans. Berw. Nat. Club, vol. i. p. 69.
Habitat.—Off Port Seton (Howden).

12. Galathea dispersa, Spence Bate.
1859. Galathea dispersa, Bate, Proc. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), vol. iii. p. 3.
Habitat—Common “on the so-called oyster - banks”
(Henderson).’

1 Cf. ‘‘Decapod and Schizopod Crustacea of the Clyde,” Trans. Nat. Hist.
Soc. Glasgow (1886), p. 10.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 115

13. Galathea intermedia, Lilljeborg.

1851. Galathea intermedia, Lillj., Ofvers Vet.-Akad. Forhand1., p. 21.
1857. ws Andrewsii Kinah., Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Dublin,
MOL, I P.H8, ple xvi. fig. §,

Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Dr Anderson),.!

14. Galathea strigosa (Linné).
1767. Cancer strigosa, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1052.
Habitat.—Off the Bass Rock (Howden). Taken near
Dunbar (Robert Gray). I have obtained one or two speci-
mens of this species while at work on the Fishery steamer
“Garland,” but it did not appear to be very common in the
estuary. North Berwick 1895, one specimen (W. Evans).

Genus (6) Munida, Leach, 1820.
15. Mumda bamffia (Pennant).

1777. Astacus Bamfius, Pennant, Brit. Zool., vol. iv. p. 17, pl. xiii.
fig. 25.
1853. Munida Rondelettii, Bell, op. cit., p. 208.
Habitat—Not uncommon at Dunbar (Robert Gray). Mr
‘Evans informs me that in January 1896, Mrs Rickards,
North Berwick, showed him several specimens which had

been obtained there.

Family THAUMASTOCHELIDA.
Genus (7) Calocaris, Bell, 1853.

16. Calocaris Macandree, Bell.
1858. Calocaris Macandree, Bell, op. cit., p. 233.

Habitat—Adam White, in his Popular History of British
Crustacea (1857), p. 99, states that Calocaris was “found by
Mr M‘Andrew in Loch Fyne and the Mull of Galloway; and
subsequently, when dredging in the Firth of Forth in 1851,
he got a quantity of haddocks, the stomach and intestines
of one of which were filled with it.”

Calocaris does not appear to have again been observed in
_the Forth estuary till 1901, when it was obtained by Mr

1Cf. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. i. p. 415.

116 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

F. G. Pearcey, while engaged with some special work on
board the Fishery steamer “Garland.” On this occasion
it was obtained by him among the refuse of the trawl-net,
and in the stomachs of a Long Rough Dab and one or two
Witch Soles. White’s record of the occurrence of Calocaris
in the Forth seems to have been overlooked by subsequent
writers on the Crustacea of the estuary.

Family NEPHROPID42.
Genus (8) Nephrops, Leach, 1819.
17. Nephrops norvegicus (Linné).
1767. Cancer norvegicus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. i. p. 1053.

Habitat.—Common, especially in the seaward part of the
estuary. Two fine specimens at water's edge, Gullane Point,
2nd May 1890; one cast up during storm at SSA a
October 1898 (Ww. Evans).

Genus (9) Astacus, Leach, 1814.
18. Astacus gammarus (Linné).

1761. Cancer Gammarus, Linn. Faun. Suec., 2nd ed., p. 20338.
1853. Homarus vulgaris, Bell, op. cit., p. 249,

Habitat.— Frequent in Firth of Forth. Lobsters in con-
siderable numbers are captured by fishermen where the
coast-line is rocky, and especially about the eee limits
of the estuary.

Tribe CARIDEA.
Family CRANGONIDA.
Genus (10) Crangon, Fabricius, 1798.
19. Crangon vulgaris, Fabricius.
1798. Crangon vulgaris, Fabr., Ent. Syst., Suppl., p. 410.

Habitat—Common in the littoral zone where the shore
is sandy; taken occasionally with the dredge in moderately
deep water.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 17

20. Crangon Allmani, Kinahan.

1857. Crangon Allmanni, Kinahan, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Dublin,
vol, iv. p. 80.

Habitat.—Moderately common in the deeper parts of the
estuary; it is also obtained occasionally in shallow water
inshore. In 1862 Kinahan instituted a new genus (Steiro-
crangon) for this species, but subsequent authors do not
consider the characters on which the new genus is founded
as sufficient to separate it from Crangon.

21. Crangon nanus, Kroyer.

1842. Crangon nanus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. (ser. i. ), vol. iv. p. 231.
1853. » Obispinosa, Bell, op. cit., p. 268.

Habitat,—Taken near the Bass Rock (Metzger, German
Exploring Expedition, 1872). I have obtained it in mid-
channel east of May Island, off Prestonpans, off the west
side of Inchkeith, and in Largo Bay.

22. Crangon trisprnosus, Hailstone.

1835. Pontophilus trispinosus, Hailstone, Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. viii.
p. 261, fig. 25.
1853. Crangon trispinosus, Bell, op. cit., p. 265.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, not common (Mihi).

23. Crangon neglectus (G. O. Sars).

1882. Cheraphilus neglectus, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vidensk. Forhandl.,
p: 45, pl. 1. igs

Habitat—Dredged in Largo Bay, 1890, rare (cf. Ninth
HB. epos pl. wi, p. 309):

24. Crangon fasciatus, Risso.

1816. Crangon fasciatus, Risso, Hist. Nat. Crust. de Nice, p. 82,
pl. iii. fig. 5.

Habitat.—Off Musselburgh, September 1891, rare (ef.
Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1902, p. 228).

Family NIKIDA.
Genus (11) Nika, Risso, 1816.
25. Nika edulis, Risso.
1816. Nika edulis, Risso, Crust. de Nice, p. 85, pl. ili. fig. 3.
Habitat—Taken at the mouth of the estuary by tow-net,
rare.

118 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family HIPPOLYTIDA.
Genus (12) Hippolyte, Leach, 1813.

26. Hippolyte varvans, Leach.
1813. Hippolyte varians, Leach, Edin. Encyel., vol. vii. p. 482.
Habitat—In shore pools (Howden). Frequent in tidal
pools west from Granton. Off the west side of May Island.
H. fascigera, Gosse, which is now considered to be only a
form of H. varians, has been taken at Cramond Island at the
edge of low-tide.

Genus (13) Spirontocaris, Spence Bate, 1888.

27. Spirontocaris spinus (Sowerby).

1805. Cancer spinus, Sowerby, Brit. Miscellany, p. 47, pl. xxiii.
1858. Hippolyte spinus, Bell, op. cit., p. 284.

Habitat.—Common in the littoral and laminarian zones
(Leslie and Herdman). I have occasionally obtained speci-
mens in different parts of the estuary. S. securifrons
(Norman), which differs chiefly in having the dorsal aspect
of the abdomen even instead of the third segment terminat-
ing in a strong posterior dorsal tooth, is also occasionally
obtained, but is regarded as a variety of the other.

28. Sprrontocaris pusiolus (Kroyer).

1842. Hippolyte pusiola, Kroyer, Monogr. Fremst. of Hippol. Nord.
Arter, Vid. Sel. naturvid. og mathem. Afh., ix Deel., p.319,
tab. iil. figs. 69-73.

Habitat—Newhaven, from the fishermen’s lines (Hender-
son). I have dredged S. pusiolus west of Queensferry, in
the neighbourhood of Inchkeith, off Musselburgh, and off
St Monans. This is probably the species referred to by
Dr Howden as being common off Crail.?

29. Sprrontocaris Cranchii (Leach).
1815. Hippolyte Cranchii, Leach, Malacol. Brit., p. 38, figs. 17-21.
Habitat.—Rocks off Broxmouth, near Dunbar (F. M.
Balfour; in Leslie and Herdman’s, Jnvert. Fauna of Firth of
Forth, p. 106).
1 Cf. A. White, Hist. of Brit. Crust., p. 122.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 119

30. Spirontocaris Gaimardi (M.-Edwards).

1837. Hippolyte Gaimardi, M.-Edw., Hist. Nat. des Crust., vol. ii.
p. 378.
1853. ve pandaliformis, Bell, op. cit., p. 294.

Habitat— Above Queensferry, and at one or two other
parts of the estuary; not common.

Family PANDALIDA.
Genus (14) Pandalus, Leach, 1814.

31. Pandalus Montagui, Leach.

1815. Pandalus Montagui, Leach, Malacol. Brit., pl. xl.
1853. be annalicornis, Bell, op. cit., p. 297.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, common, and generally dis-
tributed.

Genus (15) Pandalina, Calman, 1899.

32. Pandalina brevirostris (Rathke),

1837. Pandalus brevirostris, Rathke, Mem. présenté a l’Acad, de
Petersb., t. iii.
1853. Hippolyte Thompsoni, Bell, op. cit., p. 290.

Hlabitat.—Firth of Forth (¥. M. Balfour). I have obtained
this species off the west side of Inchkeith, off Musselburgh,
between Fidra and the Bass Rock, and in mid-channel. west
of May Island, but always sparingly.

Family PALAZAMONIDA |
Genus (16) Leander, Desmarest, 1849.

33. Leander squilla (Linné).
1767. Cancer squilla, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. 11. p. 1051.
1853. Palemon squilla, Bell, op. cit., p. 305.

- Habitat—In rock pools near the mouth of the estuary,
frequent (Leslie and Herdman). In rock pools, North
Berwick, rather common, August 1897 (W. Evans).

Suborder Schizopoda.

For this group I have followed the arrangement and
- nomenclature of the Rev. Canon Norman’s “ Revision of the
British Species of Schizopoda,” published in Ann. and Mag.

120 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Nat. Hist., Ser. 6, vol. ix. pp. 454-464, and Ser. 6, vol. x.
pp. 143- 166, and 241-263, 1892.

Family EUPHAUSIID&.
Genus (1) Nyctiphanus, G. O. Sars, 1883.
1. Nyctiphanus norvegica (M. Sars).

1856. Thysanopoda norvegica, M. Sars, Forhandl. Scand. Naturf.
Méde i Chr., p. 169.

Hatbitat.—Firth of Forth, young specimens not uncommon
(Henderson).! Nyctiphanes was usually scarce in our tow-
net collections, but it appears to be scarcer some years than
others.

Genus (2) Rhoda, G. Sim, 1872.
2. Rhoda Raschi (M. Sars).

1863. Thysanopoda Raschi, M. Sars, op. cit., p. 7.

1872. Rhoda Jardineana, G. Sim, Scottish Naturalist, vol. i. p. 187,
pl. iv. fig. a.

1883. Boreophausia Raschi, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl.,
No.7, p, a4

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, moderately frequent, and gener-
ally distributed.

3. Rhoda inernus (Kroyer).

1849. Thysanopoda inermis, Kroyer, Voyage in Scand., Crust.,
pl. vil. fig. 2, a-t.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, captured in 1892 and 1894.

Genus (3) Thysanoessa, F. Brandt, 1851.
4. Thysanoessa neglecta (Kroyer).

1849. Thysanopoda neglecta, Kroyer, op. cit., pl. vii. fig. 3, a-d.
1872. Thysanoessa aberdonensis, G. Sim, Scottish Naturalist, vol. i.
p- 188, pl. v. figs. 1-8.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, frequent.

5. Thysanoessa longicaudata (Kroyer).
1849. Thysanopoda longicaudata, Kroyer, op. cit., pl. viii. fig. 1,
a-f.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, off St Monans, 1891; a few

1 ** Decapod and Schizopod Crustacea of the Clyde,” Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc.
Glasgow (1886), p. 38.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 121

specimens were obtained mixed up with 7. neglecta.
T. longicaudata is very similar in general appearance to
the more common 7’. neglecta, and therefore it may have
occasionally been overlooked.

Genus (4) Nematoscelis, G. O. Sars, 1883.

6. Nematoscelis megalops, G. O. Sars.

1872. Thysanoessa borealis, Norman, M.S8., in Sim, Stalk-eyed
Crust. N.E. Coast of Scotland; Scottish Naturalist, vol. i.
p. 188.
1883. Nematoscelis megalops, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl.,
p. 27.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1892 [see Norman in Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist. (June 1892), p. 464]. Off St Monans, one
specimen, 28th May 1904.

Family MYSIDA.
Genus (5) Siriella, Dana, 1850.
7. Sircella norvegica, G. O. Sars.

1869. Siriella norvegica, G. O. Sars, Underségelser over Christiania-
fjorden, Dybvandsfauna, p. 40.

Hahitat—Firth of Forth, near May Island, 1889, rare.

8. Suriella jaltensis (Czerniavsky).

1868. Striella jaltensis, Czern., Materialia ad Zoographiam Ponticam
comparatam, p. 66, pl. iv. figs. 12 and 13.

Habhitat.—Taken at Joppa, September 1887, and sub-
sequently at various other places, but always sparingly.
The latest record I have is for Station V., where one or two
specimens were captured on 24th April 1901.

9. Sircella armata (M.-Edwards).

1837. Cynthia armata, M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crust., vol. ii.
p. 436.

Habitat.—Taken off St Monans in February 1889, and at
Station III. in March 1892. It also occurred sparingly in
the same gathering with S. jaltensis from Station V. collected
in April 1901. This Sirzel/a has been observed in the Forth
estuary more frequently than any of the other members of
the genus.

122 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (6) Gastrosaccus, Norman, 1869.

10. Gastrosaccus spinifer (Goes).
1863. Mysis spinifer, Goés, Ofvers K. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. xx.
p. 14.
1872. Acanthocoris Livingstoniana, G. Sim, Scottish Naturalist,
vol: a ypeleor ls iva te, B, 1-7.
Habitat.—Obtained frequently in surface tow-net gather-
ings collected off Bo’ness in 1887-88, and subsequently at
various places throughout the estuary.

Genus (7) Heteromysis, S. I. Smith, 1873.

11. Heteromysis formosa, 8. 1. Smith.

1873. Heteromysis formosa, Smith, U.S.A., Fish and Fisheries
Comm. Rept., 1871-72, p. 553.

Habitat.—One or two specimens were captured off the east
side of Inchkeith in October 1888. Taken also at Station I.
in August 1894, and at Station IV. on 27th February 1895.

Genus (8) Erythrops, G. O. Sars, 1870.

12. Hrythrops erythrophthalmus (Goés).

1863. Mysis erythrophthalmus, Goés, Crust. Decap. Marina
Suecice, p. 18.

1870. Erythrops Goésii, G. O. Sars, Carcin. Bidrag til Norges Fauna,
I. Monogr. Mysider, p. 24, pl. i.

Habitat.—Frequent in all parts of the estuary between
Inchkeith and May Island, especially during the winter and
spring.

13. Hrythrops elegans, G. O. Sars.

1863. Nematopus elegans, G. O. Sars, Beret. om en i Somm. 1862
foret. zool. Reise i Chr. oy Throndhjems Stifter, p. 42.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1901, taken very sparingly on
one or twa occasions.

14. Hrythrops serratus, G. O. Sars.

1870. Erythrops serratus, G. O. Sars, Monogr. Mysider (I.), p. 27,
pl. ii. figs, 1-12;
Habitat.—Obtained in 1889 in the neighbourhood of the
Bass Rock, rare.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 123

Genus (9) Mysidopsis, G. O. Sars, 1864.
15. Mysidopsis didelphys (Norman).
1863. Mysis didelphys, Norman, Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club,
vol. 5, p. 270, pl. xii. figs. 9-11,
1872. Mysidopsis didelphys, G. O. Sars, Monogr. Mysider (II.),
p. 20, pl. vii.
Habitat.—Taken in the Firth of Forth in November 1888,
and subsequently on various occasions, and in different
parts of the estuary, but always sparingly.

16. Mysidopsis gibbosa, G. O. Sars.
1864. Mysidopsis gibbosa, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise 1863, i Christiania
Stifter, p. 28.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, frequent. It has been taken in
Granton Harbour, as well as at several of the Experimental
Stations (cf. Sixteenth F. B. Rept., pt. ui. p. 209, 1898).

17. Mysidopsis angusta, G. O. Sars.

1864. Mysidopsis angusta, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise 1863, i Chr.
Stifter, p. 30.

Habitat.—Captured very sparingly at Stations IL, IIL,
and V., not more than one or two specimens being obtained
in any single gathering.

Genus (10) Leptomysis, G. O. Sars, 1869.

18. Leptomysis gracilis, G. O. Sars.

1864. Mysis gracilis, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise 1863, i Chr. Stifter,
p- 23.

1869. Leptomysis gracilis, idem, Underségelser over Christiania-
fjordens, Dybvandsfauna, p. 29.

Habitat.—Captured off the east side of Inchkeith, off
St Monans, and in the vicinity of Fidra, in October and
November 1888, and subsequently at nearly all the Ex-
perimental Stations.

19. Leptomysis lingvura, G. O. Sars.
21842. Cynthia Flemingii, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol.
EEX Phyo, pl. i. fig. V1.
1866. Leptomysis lingvura, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise 1865, i Chr.
Stifter, p. 21.

Habitat.—Obtained in a tow-net gathering collected off

124 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Joppa in September 1887; off the east side of Inchkeith in
March 1892, and also in other parts of the estuary, but
always very sparingly.

Genus (11) Hemimysis, G. O. Sars, 1869.

20. Hemimysis Lamorne (Couch).
1856. Mysis Lamorne, Couch, The Zoologist, p. 5286.
Habitat.—Collected off Bo’ness in November 1887; Lathe
Bay, December 1888; and afterwards at nearly all the
Experimental Stations. This species, when living, is readily
observed by its brilliant red colour.

Genus (12) Macropsis, G. O. Sars, 1876.

21. Macropsis Slabberi (Van Beneden).

1860. Podopsis Slabberi, Van Ben., Rech. sur la faune litt. de
Belgique, Crust., p. 18, pl. vi.

1876. Macropsis Slabberi, G. O. Sars, Middelhavets Mysider, p. 28,
pls. xi.-xill.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth below Grangemouth, 1884, and
subsequently near Granton Quarry, Inchmickery, and Inch-
keith (Henderson). Common off Bo'ness and off Musselburgh,
but becoming gradually scarcer seaward, and rarely taken at
the mouth of the estuary.

Genus (13) Macromysis, White, 1847."

22. Macromysis flecuosus (O. F. Miiller).
1788. Cancer flecuosus, Miill., Zoologia Danica,—Discript. et Hist.,
vol. ii. p. 34, pl. Ixiv. figs. 1-9.
1853. Macromysis chameleon, Bell, Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 336.
Habitat—Common, especially inshore, off Musselburgh
and in the upper parts of the estuary. (See Norman, op. ciz.,
for a list of synonyms.)

23. Macromysis inermis (Rathke).
1843. Mysis inermis, Rathke, Beitr. zur Fauna Norw., p. 20.
Habitat—Off Bo’ness in November 1887, and in February

1 Cf, Stebbing on the name of the genus in A History of Crustacea, p. 267
(1893).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 125

1895. I have also observed it at Stations V., VIII., and IX.,
though somewhat sparingly.

Genus (14) Schistomysis, Norman, 1892.
24. Schistomysis spiritus, Norman.
1860. Mysis spiritus, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3),
vol. vi. p. 431, pl. viii. fig. 1.
Habitat.—Off Bo’ness in November 1887, and subsequently
at nearly all the Experimental Stations. Moderately frequent.

25. Schistomysis ornata (G. O. Sars).
1864. Mysis ornata, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise 1863, i Chr. Stifter,
p: tc:
Habitat—Off Bo'ness in November 1887, with the others
recorded above, and at nearly all the Experimental Stations.

Genus (15) Neomysis, Czerniavsky, 1882.
26. Neomysis vulgaris (J. V. Thompson).

1828. Mysis vulgaris, J. V. Thompson, Zoolog. Researches, vol. i.
p. 30.

Habitat.—Moderately common in some parts of the
estuary, as west of Queensferry and off Musselburgh. I
have also captured it in Granton Harbour. In shoals at
the mouth of Belhaven Burn, September 1905 (Evans).

Order 2, EDRIOPHTHALMA.
Suborder Sy mpoda.!

In the preparation of this part of the Catalogue, I have
adhered more or less closely to the arrangement and nomen-
clature of Sars Crustacea of Norway, vol. ui., published 1899-
1900. See also a paper by myself in the Annals of Scottish
Natural History for October 1900.

1 See remarks on this group by Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, in his account

of the Crustacea brought by Dr Welley from the South Seas, published by
the Cambridge University Press, December 1900.

126 = Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family BODOTRIIDA.
Genus (1) Bodotria, Goodsir, 1843.

1. Bodotria arenosa, Goodsir.

1843. Bodotria arenosa, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxiv.
p. 120, pl. iii. (See also Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc., vol. ii. p. 10.)

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1841-42 (Goodsir).

2. Bodotria scorpioides (Montagu).

1808. Cancer scorpioides, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. ix. p. 70,
pl. ‘Vi-saieiy oe
1843. Cuma Edwardsii, Goodsir, op. cit., p. 128, pl. ii. figs. 1-13.

Habditat—Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Largo Bay (Leslie
and Herdman). Dredged off Musselburgh and a few other
places.

3. Bodotria pulchella (G. O. Sars).

1879. Cuma pulchella, G. O. Sars, Middlehavets Invertebratfauna
(II. Cumaceer), p. 24, pl. vi.

Habitat.—Off St Monans, Largo Bay, and in the neigh-
bourhood of Fidra; moderately common.

Genus (2) Cumopsis, G. O. Sars, 1879.

4. Cumopsis Edwards (Spence Bate).
1856. Cuma Edwardsii, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),

vol. xvii. p. 457, pl. xiv.
1860. Bodotria Goodsiri, Van Beneden, Rech. sur la faune litt. de
Belgique (Crust.), p. 76, pl. xiii.

Habitat—Taken at Joppa, in pools between tide-marks,
in 1888. Captured with bottom tow-net at Station IIL. in
September 1891, and subsequently in various other parts
of the estuary.

Genus (3) Iphinoé, Spence Bate, 1856.

5. Iphinoé trispinosa (Goodsir).
1843. Cuma trispinosa, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxiv.
p 126, pl. i.
1856. Venilia gracilis, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), vol. xvii.
p. 460, plxvi mee 3)).

Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Bass Rock, 24

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 127

fathoms (Metzger). This species is not rare in the Forth
estuary, especially inshore, where the bottom consists of

muddy sand.

Family VAUNTHOMPSONIIDA.
Genus (4) Vaunthompsonia, Spence Bate, 1858.

6. Vaunthompsonia cristata, Bate.
1858. Vaunthompsonia cristata, Bate, Nat. Hist. Review, vol. v.
p. 208.

Habitat.— Off the west side of May Island on 11th March
1896. This appears to be a rare species in the Forth
estuary.

Family LAMPROPID A.
Genus (5) Lamprops, G. O. Sars, 1862.

7. Lamprops fasciata, G. O. Sars.
1862. Lamprops fasciata, G. O. Sars, Zool. Reise i S6mmeren, 1862,
p. 44.

Habitat—Near Joppa, trequent between tide-marks; also
taken in Granton Harbour. It is not uncommon in shallow
inshore water, where the bottom is muddy sand.

Family LEUCONIDZ.
Genus (6) Leucon, Kroyer, 1846.
8. Leucon nasicus, Kroyer.

1841. Cuma nasica, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskrift, 1 R., B. iii. p. 524,
pl. vi. figs. 31-33.

Habitat.—More or less frequent all over the estuary; its
distribution appears to be somewhat irregular, due in part,
perhaps, to seasonal variation. My latest record of the
species is for Station V., where it was captured on 26th
April 1901.

Genus (7) Eudorella, Spence Bate, 1867.

9. Hudorella emarginata (Kroyer).
1846. Leucon emarginatus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidssk. Ny R., B. i.
pp. 181 and 209, pl. ii. fig. 3, a-h.

Habitat—Taken in deep water near the seaward limits
of the estuary; not common.

128 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

10. Hudorelia truncatula, Spence Bate.

1856. Hudora truncatula, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol, xvi. p. 457, pl. xiv. fig. 3.
1900. Hudorella truncatula, G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. Xxxvil, pl. xxix.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, sparingly distributed; my latest
record is for Station III., where it was collected on 23rd
May 1901. Immature specimens are not uncommon, but
adults of either sex are rare.

Genus (8) Hudorellopsis, G. O. Sars, 1882.

11. Hudorellopsis deformis (Kroyer).
1846. Leucon deformis, Kroyer, op. cit., p. 194, pl. ii. fig. 4.
Habitat—Taken off St Monans and in Aberlady Bay,
1890; not common. This species, though somewhat rare,
is widely distributed.

Family DIASTYLID4&.
Genus (9) Diastylis, Say, 1818.

12. Diastylis Rathker (Kroyer).

1841. Cuma Rathkei, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidssk., vol. ui. p. 518,
pls. v. and vi. figs. 17-30.

Habitat.—Not very rare in the Firth of Forth. A con-
siderable number of specimens were captured by the dredge
off the west side of Inchkeith in 1888: both females and
adult males were present in this gathering. Prof. G. O. Sars
mentions (Crustacea of Norway, p. 108) that the drawings
of the male on plate 1xxii. of his fine work on this group were
prepared from a Forth specimen. Adam White, in his
Popular History of British Crustacea, considered the Alauna
rostrata of Goodsir to be synonymous with D. Rathker
(Kréyer),—an opinion which is also shared by Canon Norman.

13. Diastylis rugosa, G. O. Sars.
1864. Diastylis rugosa, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl. (1864),
p. 41.
Habitat—Generally distributed, but not common. It has
been taken in Largo Bay, off St Monans, off North Berwick,
and in the deep water west of May Island.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 129

14, Diastylis lucifera (Kroyer).
1841. Cuma lucifera, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., 1 R., B. iii. p. 527.
Habitat.—It has been taken very sparingly off the west
side of Inchkeith, and at Stations V. and VII.; not common.

15. Diastylis rostratus (Goodsir).

1843. Alauna rostrata, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxiv.
p. 130, pl. iv. figs. 1-10. (See also Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe.,
vol. itp. £0:)

1869. Diastylis levis, Norman,’ Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868), p. 27.

1900. AS rostratus, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, p. 51,

pl. 39.

Hlabitat.—Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Off Fidra, in 12
fathoms (Henderson). I have obtained Diastylis levis,
Norman, at Experimental Stations III., V., VI., and VIL,
but always very sparingly.

16. Diastylis spinosa, Norman.
1869. Diastylis spinosa, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1868, p. 271.
Halitat.—Off North Berwick, in 10 to 15 fathoms;
captured in March 1891, but not identified till 1900.
The species was described from specimens taken by Norman
in Shetland in 1863. It was subsequently discovered in the
Moray Firth by Thomas Edward of Banff, and in the Firth
of Clyde by Dr Robertson of Millport, Cumbrae.

Family PSEUDOCUMIDA.,.
Genus (10) Pseudocuma, G. O. Sars, 1864.

17. Pseudocuma cercaria (Van Beneden).
1861. Leucon cercaria, Van Beneden, Rech. sur la Faune litt. de

Belgique (Crust.), p. 85, pl. iv.
Habitat.—Common, and generally distributed in the Firth.

18. Pseudocuma similis, G. O. Sars.

1900. Pseudocuma similis, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. iii.
De hoe pl lie

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, apparently rare, but it resembles

1 Canon Norman considers that the Alawna rostrata of Goodsir is not the
same as his Diastylis levis, but is rather synonymous with Krdoyer’s
D. Rathkei as stated above. If that is so, D. levis will have to be restored
for this species.

VOL. XVI. O

150 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

the common Pseudocuma cercaria so closely that it is easily
overlooked. The specimens I have were dredged at Station V.,
on 24th April 1901.

Genus (11) Petalosarsia, Stebbing, 1893.

19. Petalosarsia declivis (G. O. Sars).

1864. Petalopus declivis, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid. Selsk. Forhandl.
(1864), p. 72.

Habitat—Dredged in Largo Bay in March 1891; in the
neighbourhood of May Island on 14th April 1893, and very
sparingly in other parts of the estuary.

Family NANNASTACIDSE.
Genus (12) Cumella, G. O. Sars, 1864.
20. Cumella pygmea, G. O. Sars.
1864. Cumella pygmea, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid. Selsk. Forhandl.
(1864), p. 74.
1869. =f agilis, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868), p. 272.
Habitat—Taken at Station VI. (off St Monans), in May
and again in July 1901; rare. This is a minute species,
and easily missed; it may therefore be more frequent in the
Forth estuary than at present it appears to be.

Family CAMPYLASPID4.
Genus (13) Campylaspis, G. O. Sars, 1864.

21. Campylaspis rubscunda (Lilljeborg).
1855. Cuma rubicunda, Lillj., Ofvers af Vet.-Akad, Forhandl., p. 121.
Habitat.—Taken in the neighbourhood of the Bass Rock
in 1889, and at Station V. on 30th August 1894, It has
also been taken off the east side of May Island, but always
very sparingly. This appears to be a deep-water species,

and is usually found on a muddy bottom.

Suborder Isopoda.

The work I have followed in the arrangement and nomen-
clature of the Isopoda is Prof. G. O. Sars’ Crustacea of Norway,
vol. ii. (1896-1899).

\

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. KS.

;

The Rev. Canon Norman’s papers on “British Land
Isopoda” and “ British Isopoda Chelifera” [in Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (7), vol. iii. (January and April 1899)] have been
useful to me in the preparation of this section of the
Catalogue, and to shorten the synonymy the reader is
referred to these works; also to a paper by myself in the
Annals of Scottish Natural History for October 1898.

CHELIFERA.
Family TANAID &.
Genus (1) Tanais, M.-Edwards, 1828.
1. Tanais Cavolinu, H. Milne-Edwards.

1828. Tanais Cavolinii, M.-Edw. in Préces d’Entom., by Audouin,
and M.-Edw., vol. i., pl. xxix. fig. 1.

1842. vs tomentosus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., R. 1, vol. iy.
(1842-43), p. 167.

Habitat.—Taken at May Island and Dunbar, about half
tide, living chiefly among mussels (Henderson).

Genus (2) Paratanais, Dana, 1852.

2. Paratanais Bater, G. O. Sars.

1866. Paratanais forcipatus, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crust., vol. ii. p, 138.

Habitat.—Ott North Berwick, December 1892; dredged
off North Craig, near Inchkeith, in 10 to 12 fathoms on
4th July 1901, apparently rare.

Genus (3) Typhlotanais, G. O. Sars, 1880.

3. Typhlotanars brevicorms, Lilljeborg.
1865. Tanais brevicornis, Lillj., Bidrag ti] Kiinned. Sver. och Norr.
Crust. af Isopod. und.-ord. och Tanaidernes fam., p. 15.

Hatitat.—Firth of Forth, 1894; rare. This specimen,
though collected in 1894, has only recently been identified.

Genus (4) Leptognathia, G. O. Sars, 1880.
4, Leptognathia brevimana (Lilljeborg).

1865. Tanais brevimana, Lillj., op. ett., p. 22.

Habitat.—Taken in 1891 and 1892. Station VII., in 17

132 . Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

fathoms, 9th July 1901. This, like the species already
recorded, was obtained in the deeper parts of the estuary.

5. Leptognathia breviremes (Lilljeborg).
1865. Tanais breviremis, Lillj., op. cit., p. 21.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1891 and 1892; moderately rare.

6. Leptognathia Lilljeborgia, Stebbing.
1891. Leptognathia Lilljeborgia, Stebbing, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist. (6), vol. viii. p. 328, pl. 16.
Habitat—Largo Bay, and off Musselburgh, in 1891. Off
North Berwick in December 1892. Off Aberdour, November

1895; apparently rare.

7. Leptognathia longiremis (Lilljeborg), var.

1865. Tanais longiremis, Lilljeb., op. cit., p. 19.
1901. Leptognathia longiremis, var., T. Scott, Nineteenth F. B.
Rept., pt. ii. p. 269, pl. xviii. figs. 30-38.

Halitat.—Off North Berwick, December 1892 and January
1894. Off Musselburgh, 30th May 1891, and in the neigh-
bourhood of the Bass Rock on 9th July 1901. This form,
as shown by the drawings in the fishery Board Report
referred to, differs from the typical L. longiremis by the
apparent absence of the lateral denticles on the terminal
seement of the metasome, and, moreover, the antennules in
the female are sometimes composed of jive instead of four
jownts. Perhaps variety varia might be a suitable name for
this form.!

Genus (5) Tanaopsis, G. O. Sars, 1896.

8. Tanaopsis laticaudata, G. O. Sars.
1881. Leptognathia laticaudata, G. O. Sars, Archiv f. Math. og
Naturvid., p. 43.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1891. Dredged at Station ITI.
on 23rd May, and at Station VII., in 17 fathoms, on 9th
July 1901.

1 As there are no specimens in my collection of the Leptognathia rigida,
Spence Bate, mentioned in my Notes on some Scottish Marine Isopods, 1 am
unable to verify the record, and prefer, therefore, to excluue it from the
present Catalogue.

OO

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 13:

FLABELLIFERA.
Family GNATHIID 4.
Genus (6) Gnathia, Leach, 1814.

9. Gnathia mamillaris (Montagu).

1804. Oniscus maxillaris, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. vil. p. 65,
pl. vi. fig. 2.
1814. Gnathia termitoides, Leach, Edin. Encyclop., vol. vii. p. 402.
1818. Anceus maxillaris, Lamarck, Animaux Sans Vertebres, vol. v.
p. 168.
Habitat—Near Inchkeith, 1888, and subsequently in
various parts of the estuary; the female being more frequently

met with than the male.

Family CIROLANID4Z.
Genus (7) Eurydice, Leach, 1815.

10. Hurydice pulchra, Leach.

1815. Hwrydice pulchra, Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. xi. p. 370.
1867. a #3 Bate and Westwood, Brit. Sess.-eyed Crust, ,
vol. ii. p. 310.

Habitat—Taken off Preston Island, west of Queensferry,
28th November 1887; and at Station III., November 1890.
I have not met with this species very frequently in the
Forth estuary.

' Family LIMNORID4.
Genus (8) Limnoria, Leach, 1814.

11. Lamnoria lignorum (Rathke).

1799. Cymothoa lignorum, Rathke, Skrifter af Naturh. Selsk.,
py 100; plies. 14°
1814. Limnoria terebrans, Leach, Edin. Encycl., vol. vii. (Crust. )
p. 433.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, at Ele (Leslie and Herdman).
Common, burrowing in old wood of piers, wharves, etc.,
exposed between tide-marks on both sides of the estuary.

134 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family SPH ZROMID&,
Genus (9) Spheroma, Latreille, 1802.

12. Spheroma rugicauda, Leach.
1814. Spheroma rugicauda, Leach, Edin. Encycl., vol. vii. p. 405.
fabitat—In brackish pools at Aberlady ; common.

Genus (10) Nesa, Leach, 1818.

13. Neesa bidentata (Adams).
1798. Oniscus bidentatus, Adams, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. v. p. 8,
pl. ii. figs. 3 and 4.

Habitat.—Found alive amongst barnacles and weed scraped
from a ship’s hull at Granton Harbour in 1888 (cf. Ann.
Scot. Nat. Hist. (April 1899), p. 116).

VALVIFERA.
Family ILDOTHELD &.
Genus (11) Idothea, Fabricius, 1798.
14. Ldothea baltica (Pallas).

1774. Oniscus balticus, Pallas, Spicil Zool., fase. ix. p. 66, pl. iv.
fig. 6, A-D.
1825. Idotea tricuspidata, Desmarest, Consid. sur Crust., p. 289.

Habitat.—¥Firth of Forth, in shallow water at various
places (Leslhe and Herdman). Moderately common upon
Laminaria and other sea-weeds in shallow water on both
sides of the estuary.

15. Ldothea pelagica, Leach.

1815. Idothea pelagica, Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. xi. p. 365.
1868. is “ Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. ii. p. 384,

Habitat.—“ Common on the Bell Rock in the Firth of
Forth” (Bate and Westwood, op. cit., p. 385). “ Bell Rock”
is doubtless, I think, a misprint for Bass Rock, for it is
described as being “in the Firth of Forth,” whereas the Bell
Rock is 13 or 14 miles north by east of Fife Ness, the
extreme limit of the Forth estuary on the north side.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 135

16. Idothea emarginata (Fabricius).
1794. Cymothoa emarginata, Fabr., Entomon. Syst., vol. il. p. 508.
Habitat.—Aberlady Bay, 1888. Station J., 23rd May 1891.
Occasionally obtained with J. baliica amongst Laminaria at
various places within the estuary.

17. Idothea linearis (Linné).
1767. Oniscus linearis, Linn., Syst. Nat., vol. 1. p. 1060.
1868. Idotea linearis, Bate ond Westw., op. cit., vol. i. p. 388.
Habitat—Occasionally at Newhaven (Henderson). Off
Crail, 1888. Station X. (west of Queensferry), 31st August
1894, and 26th April 1901. Station IV., 22nd April 1901.
Several of the specimens are adorned with longitudinal light
and dark lines (cf. form JZ. sexlineata, Kroyer).

Family ARCTURID &}
Genus (12) Astacilla, Cordiner, 1790.

18. Astactlla longicorims (Sowerby).
1806. Oniseus longicornis, Sow., British Miscellany, Taf. 19 ”
1841. Leachia gracilis, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxi.
p. 310, pl. vi. fig. 4 (3).
1868. Arcturus longicornis, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile eyed
Crust., vol. ii. p. 365.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Off Dysart, T. W.
Simmons (cf. Bate and Westwood, op. ci., vol. 1. p. 369).
Moderately frequent in the estuary, and generally distributed.
G. O. Sars considers the A. gracilis of Goodsir to be the male
of A. longicorms.

19. Astacilla intermedia (Goodsir).

1841. Leachia intermedia, Goodsir, op. cit., p. 309, pl. vi. fig. 1.
1868. Arcturus intermedius, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crust., p 371.

Habitat.—Taken off Anstruther (Goodsir). This is the

1 As Astacilla, Cordiner, was instituted in 1795, and Arcturus, Latrille,
in 1804, the family name should perhaps be AsTAcILLID#, from the older
genus.

2 James Sowerby, ‘British Miscellany; or, Col ured Figures of New, Rare,
or Little-Known Animal Subjects, many not before ascertained to be Natives
of the British Isles.”” London, 1806, 8vo.

156 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Astacilla afinis, G. O. Sars (Crustacea of Norway, vol. 11.
p. 90).

Genus (13) Arcturella, G. O. Sars, 1897.

20. Arcturella dilatata, G. O. Sars.

1882. Astacilla dilatata, G. O. Sars, Overs. af Norges Crust., vol. i.
p. 63, pl. i. fig. 3.

Halitat— Dredged off St Monans, 22nd May 1901; only
a single male specimen was obtained.

ASELLOTA.

Family ASELLID/.
Genus (14) Asellus, G. St Hillaire, 1764.

21. Asellus aquaticus (Linné).

1761. Oniscus aquaticus, Linn., Fauna Suecica, 2nd ed., p. 500.
1868, <Asellus aquaticus, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. ii. p. 348.

Habitat—Pond at Redbraes, near Edinburgh, “in remark-
able profusion” (Sir J. Dalyell). Very common in Union
Canal, near Gilmore Place, Edinburgh (1889-90); Dudding-
ston Loch (1897). Marchfield Pond, very common (Dr and
Miss Sprague, July 1900). Braid Burn; Peffer Burn, near
Aberlady, etc. (W. Evans). Upper Elf Loch, Braid Hills,
common in 1905 (W. Evans).

Family JANIRIDZ.
Genus (15) Janira, Leach, 1815
22. Janiva maculosa, Leach.
1813. Janira maculosa, Leach, Edin. Encycl., vol. vii. p. 484.
Habitat.— Firth of Forth, off Boness, 1887. Taken at
Station IX. in April 1870, and subsequently at other
stations, but always very sparingly.

Genus (16) Jera, Leach, 1813.

23. Jera marina (O. Fabricius).
1780. Oniscus marinus, Fabr., Fauna Gronlandica, p. 252.
1813. Jera albifrons, Leach, Edin. Encycl., vol. vii. p. 484.

Habitat.—Common at May Island and Granton Quarry

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. Lai

under stones, near high-water mark (Henderson). Dredged
off Inchkeith; taken between tide-marks at Joppa and
other places; frequent. South Queensferry (Evans). Sars
is somewhat doubtful whether the form figured by Bate
and Westwood under the name of Jwra Nordmannt, Rathke,

is the true Rathkian species, or more probably the male of
Jeera marina.

Family MUNNIDA.
Genus (17) Munna, Boeck, 1839.
24. Munna Kroyeri, Goodsir.
1842. Munna Kréyeri, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxiii.
p. 365, pl. vi. fig. 6.
Halitat—Firth ot Forth (Goodsir). Off the west side of

Inchkeith (1887). Dredged at Station III1., and at the north-
west end of Inchkeith, in May 1901; not very common.

Genus (18) Paramunna, G. O. Sars, 1866.

25. Paramunna bilobata, G. O. Sars.

1866. Paramunna bilobata, G. O. Sars, Beretning om en i Somm.,
1865, foretag. Zool. Reise ved Kyst. af Christiania og

Christiansands Stift., p. 31.
Habiiat.—Fith of Forth, 1894. Moderately rare in
dredged material from Stations VI. and III., and from the

north-west end of Inchkeith, collected by F. G. Pearcey in
May 1901.

Genus (19) Pleurogonium, G. O. Sars, 1871.1

26. Plewrogonium rubscundum, G. O. Sars.

1863. Pleuracantha rubicunda, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vidensk. Selsk.
Forhandl., p. 16.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1894 and 1895; rare.

1 The Rev. Canon Norman, in a paper entitled ‘‘A Month on the
Trondhbjem Fiord” (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xiii. p. 281),
remarks, ‘‘The genus Leptaspidia, Bate and Westwood, is, I think, un-
questionably a synonym of Plewrogoniwm.” Moreover, it seems to we that
Bate and Westwood’s text-figure of Leptospidia resembles Plewrogonium
inerme more closely than any other species of the genus.

138 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

27. Pleurogonium merme, G. O. Sars.

1882. Plewrogonium inerme, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges Crust.,
vol. i. p. 67, pl. il. fig. 5.

1891. Leptaspidia brevipes, T. Scott, Ninth F. B. Rept., pt. ii. p. 308.
Habitat.—Taken off Musselburgh, April 1891.

28, Plewrogonium spinosissimum, G. O. Sars.

1866. Plewracantha spinosissima, G. O. Sars, Beretning om en i

Somm., 1865, foretag. Zool. Reise ved Kyst. af Christiania
og Christiansands Stift., p. 30.

Habitat.——Taken at the north-west end of Inchkeith, 23rd
May 1901; rare.

Genus (20) Eurycope, G. O. Sars, 1863.
29. (?) Hurycope mutica, G. O. Sars.

1863. Ewrycope mutica, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vid. Selsk.-Forhandl.
(1863), p. 6.

Habitat—Firth of Forth, near the Bass Rock, in 20
fathoms, 28th June 1904; two specimens that appear to

belong to this species—one of them an ovigerous female—
were obtained.

ONISCOIDA.

“This tribe comprises the air-breathing or terrestrial

Isopoda” (G. O. Sars).

Family LIGIIpD4s&.
Genus (21) Ligia, Fabricius, 1798.
30. Ligia oceanica (Linné).
1767. Oniscus oceanicus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1061.
Habitat—Cramond, 1888 (Mihi). Aberlady, November
1891; North Berwick, August 1897; and shore at Dalmeny,

March 1901 (W. Evans). Also at Granton and other places,
under stones on the shore.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 139

Family TRICHONISCIDA.
Genus (22) Trichoniscus, Brandt, 1833.
31. Trichoniscus pusillus, Brandt.

1833. Trichoniscus pusillus, Brandt, Conspect. Monogr. Crust. Onis-
codorum, p. 12, pl. iv. fig. 9.
1891. Philougria riparia, T. Scott., Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin.,
vol, xi."p. 76:
Halitat—Under stones at St Margaret’s Hope, Cramond
Island, Arthur's Seat, Largo, and other places; moderately

frequent. Generally distributed (W. Evans).

32. Trichoniscus roseus (C. L. Koch).

1838. Jtea rosea, Koch, Deutschlands Crustaceen, p. 22, fig. 16.
1887. Philougria rosea, T. Scott, Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasg.,
yok 1. (N:S:)-p--373:

Habitat—Under stones at South Queensferry, 23rd March
1901 (W. Evans, in Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., April 1901); in
garden, Morningside, September 1905 (Evans). Salisbury
Crags, Edinburgh, July 1887; and Cramond Island, 18th
April 1888.1 These last two records were overlooked in the
preparation of my paper on “The Land and Fresh-Water
Crustacea of the District around Edinburgh,” part 1., published
in Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Hdin., vol. xi. p. 73 et seq.

Family ONISCID 4.
Genus (25) Oniscus, Linné, 1761.

33. Oniscus asellus, Linné.

1761. Oniscus asellus, Linn., Fauna Suecica, vol. iv. p. 183, No.
2058; and Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1061.

Halitat—Common everywhere, usually hiding under
stones, old wood, etc. O. fossor, Bate and Westw., is now
regarded as a form of O. asellus.

1 Qn the occasion of this visit to Cramond Island in April 1888, a friend
and I crossed over to it about 1 a.m.—just before the track was covered by
the rising tide—and we remained on the island till the tide ebbed and began
to flow again. The interval from the time that daylight made things visible
till we recrossed to the mainland, was spent in searching for natural history
- objects, and especially for the smaller Crustacea, and with fairly satisfactory
results.

140 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Genus (24) Philoscia, Latreille, 1804.

34. Philoscia muscorum (Scopolli).
1763. Oniscus muscorum, Scopoli, Entomologia Carniolica, p. 415.

Habitat.— Under stones, among dead leaves, etc; common,
and generally distributed.

Genus (25) Platyarthrus, Brandt, 1833.

35. Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggi, Brandt.

1833. Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggi, Brandt, Consp. Monogr. Crust.
Onisc., p. 12, pl. iv. fig. 10.

1900. “ - W. Evans, Ann. Scot. Nat.
Hist. (July 1900), p. 186.

Habitat.—Near Inverkeithing, Fifeshire, “in nests of the
common ashy-black ant, Formica fusca” (W. Evans, Edin-
burgh). The only other Scottish record for this curious
species is that by Thomas Edward, of Banff, in the list of
Crustacea in Smiles’ L2fe of Edward.

Genus (26) Porcellio, Latreille, 1804.
36. Porcellio scaber, Latreille.

1804. Porcellio scaber, Latr., Hist. Nat. Génerale et particuliere des
Crust. et des Insectes, vol. vii. p. 45.

Habitat —Under stones, old wood, etc., everywhere.

37. Porcellio pictus, Brandt.
1830. Porcellio pictus, Brandt and Ratzeburg, Medicin. zoologie,
vol. il. p. 78, pl. xii. fig. 5.
1891. ne “A T. Scott, Proc: Roy. Phys. Soe aim:
vol. xi. p. 78.
Habitat. —At the foot of a wall near Seatield, Leith, April
1888; apparently rare. Taken under a stone near Dunbar
in 1904 (W. Evans),

Genus (27) Cylisticus, Sclinitzler, 1853.
38. Cylosticus convexus (De Geer).

1778. Oniscus convexus, De Geer, Mem. pour Servir a l/hist. des
Ins., vol. vii. p. 563, pl. xxxv. fig. 11.

1891. Porcellio armadilloides, T. Scott, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc.
Edin., vol. xi. p. 79.

Habitat.—Under stones at the foot of Salisbury Crags,

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 141

14th April 1888, and subsequently; not common. Foot of
Salisbury Crags (W. Evans).

Family ARMADILLIDIIDA.
Genus (28) Armadillidium, Brandt, 1830.

39. Armadillidium vulgare (Latreille).
1804. Armadillo vulgaris, Latr., Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insectes, vol. vil.

p. 48.
1891. ee Me T. Scott, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin.,
vols xi. ps 79.

Halitat—Under stones at Salisbury Crags. Salisbury
Crags, Blackford Hill, Pettycur, St David’s (Fife), ete.
(W. Evans).

EPICARIDA.
The Epicarida are but poorly represented in this “ Catalogue

of Forth Crustacea,” and further careful research should add
considerably to this group.

Family BOPYRID 4.
Genus (29) Athelges, Hesse, 1861.

40. Athelges paguri (Rathke).

1843. Phryxus paguri, Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Nat. Curios.,
vol. xx. p. 57, pl. i. figs. 13-15; pl. ii. figs. 11 and 12.

Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, parasiticon Hupagurus bernhardus
(Dr J. Anderson).

Genus (30) Phryxus, Rathke, 1845.

41. Phryzus abdominalis (Kroyer).

1840. Bopyrus abdominalis, Kroyer, Nat. Tidsskr., vol. iii. p. 102,
pls. i. and ii.

Habitat—Firth of Forth, off St Abb’s Head, 40 fathoms
(Metzger). Station III., parasitic on Pandalus Montagu,
Leach, 9th May 1901.

142 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family CRYPTONISCID/.
Genus (31) Cryptothir, Dana, 1852.

42. Cryptothir balani, Spence Bate.
1860. Liriope balani, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1860), p. 225.
1869. Cryptothiria balani, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crust)s) voli Sen 2Gi:
Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, parasitic on Aalanus balanoides
(inside the shell). This is one of the interesting additions
to the fauna of the Firth of Forth by H. D. 8. Goodsir.
I obtained a single specimen of this curious parasite at East
Tarbert, Loch Fyne, on the same kind of barnacle.

Suborder Amphipoda.

The classification (and arrangement) generally followed is
that of G. O. Sars’ Crustacea of Norway, vol. i. (Amphipoda),
1890-95. See also papers on “ British Amphipoda,”’ by Rev.
A. M. Norman, in Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. for January,
February, April, and July 1900.

HYPERIIDEA.
Family HYPERIID &.
Genus (1) Hyperia, Latreille, 1825.
1. Hyperia galba (Montagu).

1815. Cancer gammarus galba, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. x1.
p. 4, pl. it fig. 2.
Habitat.—Frequent and generally distributed ; often found
associated with Aurelia cyanea and other large Meduse.

Genus (2) Hyperoche, Bovalius, 1887.

2. Hyperoche tauriformis (Bate and Westwood).
1868. Hyperia tauriformis, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crustacea, vol. 11. p. 519.
1890. Hyperoche Kriyeri, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p- 9; pl. ‘iv.
Habitat —Generally, though sparingly, distributed through-
out the estuary.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 143

Genus (3) Parathemisto, Boeck, 1870.
3. Parathemisto oblivia (Kroyer),

1838. Hyperia oblivia, Kroyer, Greenlands Amphipoder, p. 70
pl. iv. fig. 19. j

flalitat—Generally distributed, usually more or less
frequent, and at times abundant, especially in the seaward
part of the estuary, and particularly in winter and spring.

Genus (4) Euthemisto, Bovalius, 1887.

4, Huthemisto compressa (Grés).

1865. Themisto compressa, Goés, Ofvers k Vet.-Akad. Forhandl.,
p- 533, pl. xl. fig. 34.

Halntat.—Taken sparingly off the west side of May Island
in February 1892 and November 1893; and at Station VII.
_ (off North Berwick) in November 1892. These were prob-
ably stragglers from the great shoal of Huthemisto reported
off the Yorkshire coast in February 1892.)

GAMMARIDEA.
Family ORCHESTIID 4.
Genus (5) Talitrus, Latreille, 1802.

5. Talitrus locusta (Pallas).
1772. Oniscus locusta, Pallas, Spicilegia Zoologica, fasc. 9, pl. iv. fig. 7.
Habitat.—‘ Very abundant about high-tide mark among
stones, seaweed, etc.” (L. and H.). I have taken 7. locusta

near Dunbar. At high-water mark sandy beaches, Gullane
and North Berwick (Evans).

Genus (6) Orchestia, Leach, 1814.
6. Orchestia littorea (Montagu).

1804. Cancer gammarus littoreus, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. ix.
p- 96, pl. iv. fig. 4.

Habitat—Common on the shore west from Granton
amongst decaying seaweed at about high-tide mark. Taken
also on the shore near Dunbar. Aberdour avd Prestonpans
(Evans).

' Cf. T. H. Nelson in Naturalist for May 1892,

144 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (7) Hyale, Rathke, 1837.

7. Hyale Nilssoni (Rathke).
1843. Amphitoe Nilssoni, Rathke, Acta Akad. Leopold, vol. xx. p. 264.
Habitat.—“ Granton Quarry, common; May Island, near
high-water” (Henderson). West of Queensferry, rare.

[8. Hyale (Nicea) Lubbockiana (Spence Bate).

This species is recorded among my notes of Amphipoda
dredged off St Monans in 1889, but no specimens are in my
collection, and I am unable to verify the record. ]

Family LYSIANASSID4&.
Genus (8) Acidostoma, Lilljeborg, 1865.

9. Acidostoma obesum (Spence Bate).
1862. Anonyx obesus, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Museum,
p:-74,, pl. xia 4.
Habitat—Dredged between Fidra and the Bass Rock in
1893, and on 9th July 1901; it has also been dredged off
St Monans, but always very sparingly.

Genus (9) Socarnes, Boeck, 1870.

10. Socarnes Vahli (Kroyer).

1838. Lysianssa vahlii, Kroyer, Gronlands Amfipoder, p. 5.
1896. Socarnes Vahli, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept., part iii.
p. 158.

Hatbitat.—Firth of Forth; very rare.

Genus (10) Calisoma, A. Costa.

11. Calisoma Hopet, A. Costa.
1851. Calisoma Hopei, A. Costa, Hope Cat. Crost. Ital., p. 44,
’ and plate, fig. 2.
1863. 5S crenata, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol, i. p. 120.
Halitat.—Moderately common in the Firth of Forth; it
occurs sometimes in abundance inside the dead tests of
Amphidotus and Spatangus, feeding on the decaying animal
matter; also on dead fishes.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 145

Genus (11) Hippomedon, Boeck, 1870.

12. Hippomedon denticulatus (Spence Bate).

1862. Anonyx denticulatus, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Mus.,
p: 75, pl xu. fig. 4.

Habitat—Taken in the vicinity of May Island in 1888,
and subsequently in various parts of the estuary between
May Island and Inchkeith, but seldom more than a few
specimens taken in any single gathering.

Genus (12) Orchomene, Boeck, 1870.

13. Orchomene humilis (A. Costa).

1857. Lysianassa humilis, A. Costa, Mem. del Accad. del Sc. de
Napoli, vol. i. p. 187, pl. i. fig. 6.

1863. Anonyx Edwardst, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. i. p. 94.

1890. Orchomene Batei, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p: 6, pl. xxii.

Hatitat.—In the neighbourhood of the Bass Rock; rare.

Genus (13) Tryphosa, Boeck, 1870.

14. Tryphosa nana (Kroyer).

1846. Anonyx nanus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., 2 R., Bd. ii. p. 30.
1891. Orchomenella ciliata, G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. 69, pl. xxv. fig. 2.

. Habitat.—Taken near Joppa in 1888; subsequently in
other parts of the estuary, but always sparingly.

Genus (14) Tryphosella, J. Bonnier, 1893.

15. Tryphosella Sarsi, Bonnier,

1891. Tryphosa nana, G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. 76, pl. xxvil. fig. 1.
1893. Tryphosella Sarsi, Bonnier, Bull. Sci. France et Belgique,
vol. xxiv. p. 170 (footnote).

Hatitat.—Firth of Forth; not common.

16. Tryphosella Horingi (Boeck).
1870. Tryphosa Héringti, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arct., p. 38.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1896; off the east side of Inch-
ee in 5 fathoms, 23rd May 1901; not common.
VOL. XVI. P

146 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

17. Tryphosella nanoides (Lilljeborg).

1865. Anonyx nanoides, Lillj., On the Lysianassa magellanica, ete.,
p. 25, pl. iii. figs. 32-34.

1891. Tryphosa nanoides, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. 1.
p: 79, pl. xvas. 72;

1893. Tryphosella nanoides, Bonnier, op. cit., vol. xxiv. p. 171
(footnote).

Hatitat.—Off St Monans, captured with a tow-net at a
depth of about 13 fathoms, in November 1904. In this
species, the palm of the first gnathopods does not slope away
from the base of the claw (dactylus), but forms nearly a right
angle with the sides of the propodos.

Genus (15) Tryphosites, G. O. Sars, 1891.

18. Tryphosites longupes (Spence Bate).

1863. Anonyx longipes and ampula, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-
eyed Crust., vol. i. pp. 113, 116.

Habitat.—Off St Monans, several specimens, 1889; and
subsequently, but sparingly, in other parts of the estuary.

Genus (16) Anonyx, Kroyer, 1838.
19. Anonyx nugax (Phipps).
1774. Cancer nugax, Phipps, Voyage towards the North Pole, p. 192,
pl. xii. fig. 2.
1893. Anonyx nugax, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 212,
pl. v. figs. 18-21.

Habitat—Near May Island, February 1889. North end
“of Inchkeith, 23rd January 1896; rare.

Genus (17) Hoplonyx, G. O. Sars, 1891.

20. Hoplonyx leucophthalma, G. O. Sars.

1891. Hoplonyx leucophthalma, G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. 97, pl. xxxiv.
fig. 1.

Hatbitat.—This somewhat critical species was taken off
St Monans with a tow-net, close to the bottom, in November
1904. In this species the eyes are of a light cream colour or
almost white; the dactylus of the first gnathopods has also
a row of very minute spines extending along its dorsal aspect

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 147

a little below the upper margin, which appears to be a
character peculiar to this species.

Genus (18) Lepidepecreum, Spence Bate, 1868.

21. Lepidepecreum longicorne (Bate).
1861. Anonyzx longicornis, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. i. p. 91( ¢ ).
Habitat —Off St Monans; off the north end of Inchkeith,

January 1896; and off the east side of the same island, May
1901.

Family PONTOPOREILID&.
Genus (19) Bathyporeia, Lindstrom, 1855.

22. Bathyporeia Guilliamsomana (Bate).

1856. Thersites Guilliamsoniana, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1856),
p. 59; and Ann. Nat. Hist. (2), vol. xix. (1857) p. 146.
1891. Bathyporeia norvegica, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. i.
p. 128, pl. xliii.
Hatbitat.—Firth of Forth; taken sparingly in various parts
of the estuary.

23. Bathyporera pelagica, Spence Bate.

1862. Bathyporeia pelagica, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Museum,
p 174, pl. xxxi4 figne:

Habitat.—Firth of Forth; taken occasionally with the
other species of the genus.

24. Bathyporera Robertson, Spence Bate.
1892. Bathyporeia Robertsoni, Bate, op. cit., p. 173, pl. xxxi. fig. 5.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, frequent near low-water on the
sandy shore east of Burntisland; obtained by passing the
wet sand through a wire-sieve.

Genus (20) Haustorius, Statius Miller, 1775.

25. Haustorius arenarius (Slabber).

1769. Oniscus arenarius, Slabber, Naturkund. Verlustig., etc., p. 92,
pl. 11, figs. 3, 4.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, sandy shore east of Burntisland,
near low-water ; not common.

148 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvrety.

Genus (21) Urothoé, Dana, 1852.

26. Urothoé marinus, Spence Bate.

1862. Urothoé marinus, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
Volsi5p, aioa:

Habitat—Firth of Forth; not very common.

27. Urothoé brevicornis, Spence Bate.
1862. Urothoé brevicornis, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. 1. p. 198.
Habitat.— Largo Bay; not common.

Family PHOXOCEPHALID4.
Genus (22) Phoxocephalus, Stebbing, 1888.

28. Phoxocephalus Holbélli (Kroyer).
1842. Phoxus Holbélli, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., 1 R. p. 157.
Habitat.—Taken off the west side of May Island in 1888.
Taken in Largo Bay in 1892 and 1894, and at Station III.
on 23rd May 1901.

29. Phoxocephalus Fulton, T. Scott.
1890. Phoxocephalus Fultoni, T. Scott, Eighth F. b. Rept., pt. i.
p-. 327, pl. xi. figs. x.-xil.; pl. xill, figs. xiil.-xix,

Habitat.—Off St Monans; not rare.

Genus (23) Harpinia, Boeck, 1870.

30. Harpinia neglecta, G. O. Sars.

1891. Harpinia neglecta, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. 1.
pe £538, pl. li. ecg:

Habitat—Generally though sparingly distributed. First
recorded for the Firth of Forth in 1888. This is the
Phoxus plumosus of Bate and Westwood’s British Sessile-eyed
Crustacea, but not of Kroyer.

31. Harpinia crenulata, Boeck.
1870. Harpinia crenulata, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arctica,
p. 56.
Habitat._—_Near Inchkeith, and other parts of the estuary ;
not common. Station III., in 5 fathoms, 23rd May 1901.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 149

Family AMPELISCID4.
Genus (24) Ampelisca, Kroyer, 1842.

32. Ampelisca typica (Spence Bate).
1857. Tetromatus typicus, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol. xix. p. 139.
1863. Ampelisca Gaimardi, Bate and Westw., Sessile-eyed Crust.,
Vols ts p. 127.

Habitat.—Between Fidra and the Bass Rock; not common.

33. Ampelisca tenwicornis, Lilljeborg.
1855. Ampelisca tenuicornis, Lillj., Ofvers af Vet.-Akad. Forhandl.,
p. 128.
Habitat.—Near the Bass Rock, 24 fathoms; off St Abb’s
Head, 40 fathoms (Metzger). Off Prestonpans, 1888, not
common; off the North Craig, 4th July 1901.

34. Ampelisca assumilis, Boeck.

1870. Ampelisca assimilis, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et
arctica, p. 144.

Habitat.—Taken near May Island, 1893. Off St Monans,
in 13 fathoms, and at Station IIL, in 7 fathoms, May 1901.
Several specimens of Ampelisca, including A. assimilis, were
obtained in the stomachs of Long Rough Dabs captured in
the Forth estuary in May 1901.

35. Amypelisca brevicornis (A. Costa).

1853. Arancops brevicornis, Costa, Rend. Acc. Napoli, p. 171.
1855. Ampelisca levigata, Lillj., Ofvers K. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl.,
1855, p. 123.

Habitat.—Largo Bay and one or two other places, 1898.
Taken also at Station III., in 7 fathoms, on 23rd May 1901.

36. Ampelisca macrocephala, Lilljeborg.
1852. Ampelisca macrocephala, Lillj., op. cit. (1852), p. 7.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 24 fathoms (Metzger). I have
obtained this species in the stomachs of Long Rough Dabs
and Whitings captured in the Firth of Forth in May 1901,
as well as in tow-net gatherings collected about the same
time.

150 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

37. Ampelisca spinipes, Boeck.

1870. Ampelisca spinipes, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et arctica,
p. 148.

Habitat.—Taken near May Island, not common, 1893. At
Station III, in 5 fathoms, 23rd May 1901. Also in the
stomachs of Long Rough Dabs and small Whitings captured
in the estuary in May 1901.

38. Ampelisca equicornis, Bruzelius.

1859. Ampelisca equicornis, Bruz., K. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. iii.
p. 82, pl. iv. fig. 15.

Habitat—West of May Island, 20 fathoms (Henderson).
This appears to be the only record of A. equicornis for the
Forth estuary.

Genus (25) Byblis, Boeck, 1870.
39. Byblis Garmardi (Kroyer).

1848. Ampelisca Gaimardi, Kroyer, Gaimard’s Voyaces en Scand.,
pl: xxi igs a:
Habitat—Taken off St Abb’s Head, 40 fathoms (Metzger,
1875). Near May Island, 1890 (Mihi).

Genus (26) Haploops, Lilljeborg, 1855.

40. Haploops tubicola, Lilljeborg.

1855. Haploops tubicola, Lillj., Ofvers K. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl.
(1855), p. 134.

Habitat—Taken near the Bass Rock, 1892, and in other
parts of the estuary. Dredged in 5 fathoms at Station IIL,
23rd May 1901; found also in the stomachs of Long Rough
Dabs (Drepanopsetta platessoides) captured in the Forth
during the same month.

Family AMPHILOCHID &.
Genus (27) Amphilochus, Spence Bate, 1862.

41. Amphilochus manudens, Spence Bate.

1862. Amphilochus manudens, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,
p. 107, pl. xvii. fig. 6.

Habitat.—Taken in South Bay in 1888, not common.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 151

Dredged at Station III., and also at the north-west end of
Inchkeith, on 23rd May 1901.

42. Amphilochus tenuimanus, Boeck.

1870. Amphilochus tenuimanus, Boeck, Crust. Amphip, borealia et
arctica, p. 51,

Habitat.—Taken in the stomach of a small Whiting
captured in the estuary in April, and in the stomach of a
Long Rough Dab captured in May 1901; obtained also in a
small gathering of dredged material at Station IX., collected
5th June 1903.

Genus (28) Amphilochoides, G. O. Sars.

43. Amphilochoides serratipes (Norman).

1869. Probolium serratipes, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868),
p. 273.

1892. Amphilochoides odontonyx, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norw.,

vole pa 221 pl lxxv, fig) 2)

1893. 4 * T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept.,

pt. ili. p. 215, pl. v. figs. 41, 42.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, near Fidra Island; rare.

44, Amphilochoides odontonyx (Boeck).

1870. Amphilochus odontonyx, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arct.,
p- 51.

1896. Amphilochoides odontonyx, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. lii. p. 159, pl. iv. figs. 4-6.

Habitat.—At various places in the Firth of Forth, but
always very sparingly. This species was described by
Professor G. O. Sars under the name of Amphilochoides
pusillus, but was afterwards identified as the true A. odontonyx
of Boeck; see footnote below.

1 Atp. 159 of Part IIL. of the Fourteenth Annual Report of the Fishery Board
for Scotland (1896), in my remarks on Amphilochoides intermedius, I state
incidentally that the typical 4. odontonyx, G. O. Sars (A. serratipes, Norman),
had not hitherto been observed in the Firth of Forth; this was a mistake,
due to my forgetting that that species had been recorded in Part III. of the
Eleventh Annual Report, with drawings showing two of the most characteristic
parts of the animal. Further, as pointed out by Professor G. O. Sars (op. cit.,
p- 690), the form mentioned here is not the A. odontonyx of Boeck, but a
different species, for which Sars proposed to substitute the name 4, Boecki,
being unaware that Norman had already described it,

152 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

45. Amphilochoides intermedius, T. Scott.

1896. Amphilochoides intermedius, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. il. p. 159, pl. iv. figs. 1-3.

Habitat.—Taken in various parts of the estuary, but
usually very sparingly. The latest records I possess of the
occurrence of A. wtermedius in the Forth are for Station III.,
where it was obtained on the 23rd and 25th of May 1901.

Genus (29) Gitana, Boeck, 1870.

46. Gitana Sarsi, Boeck.
1870. Gitana Sarsi, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et arctica, p. 52.

Habitat.—Taken very sparingly in various parts of the
estuary. My most recent record of this species is for
Station III., where it was dredged on 23rd and 25th May
1901.

AT. Gitana abyssicola, G. O. Sars.

1892. Gitana abyssicola, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p- 229, pl xxvin. ties 2.

Habitat.—Dredged at Station VI. (off St Monans), 25th
May 1901. One of the characters which serves to distinguish
this small species from G. Sarsi is that the second pair of
coxal plates are rather narrow, and they exhibit only two
small serrations on the obtusely-pointed tips of these plates,
instead of three, as in G. Sarsv.

Family STENOTHOIDA.
Genus (30) Stenothoe, Dana, 1852.
48. Stenothoe marina (Spence Bate).
1862. Montagua marina, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 56;
pl. viii. fig. 5.
Habitat.—Various parts in the Firth of Forth from Inch-
keith to May Island, but not very common, 1889. Station

V., 24th April, and off the north-west end of Inchkeith,
23rd May 1901.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 153

49. Stenothoe monoculoides (Montagu).

1804. Cancer (Gammarus) monoculoides, Mont., Trans. Linn, Soc.,
vol, xi. p. 4, pl. ii. fig. 3.
Hatitat.—Not very common; the specimens in my
collection were taken in Granton Harbour with a surface
tow-net.

Family METOopPIDA, T. R, R. Stebbing, 1899.1
Genus (31) Metopa, Boeck, 1870.
50. Metopa Alderi (Spence Bate).
1862. Montagua Alderi, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Byit. Mus., p. 57,
pl. viii. fig. 6.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1889; and taken subsequently at
nearly all the Experimental Stations within the limits of the

estuary. It has been also observed in the stomachs of
Whitings captured in 1901.

51. Metopa borealis, G. O. Sars.
1882. Metopa borealis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt Norges Crust., i. p. 91,
pl. iv. fig. 4.

Hatbitat.—Dredged in South Bay, off Musselburgh, in 1888.

52. Metopa rubrovittata, G. O. Sars.
1882. Metopa rubrovittata, G. O. Sars, Oversigt Norges Crust., i.
p- 90, pl. iv. figs. 2, 2a.
Hatitat.—Obtained in a bottom tow-net gathering collected
at Station Il. on 30th August 1894.

53. Metopa pusilla, G. O. Sars.

1892. Metopa pusilla, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i. p. 206,
plxe. foal:

Halitat.—Firth of Forth, at the following places in 1901,
viz..—At Stations III. and VII. in April, at Station III. in
May, and off North Craig in July; but not more than one
or two specimens were obtained in any single gathering.”

1 Cf. ‘‘ Revision of Amphipoda,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. for March,
April, and September 1899.

2 Cf. Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 478 (1902).

154 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

D4, Metopa Bruzelit (Goes).

1865. Montagua Bruzelit, Goes, Crust. Amphip. maris Spitzberg.,
Ofv. K. svenska Vet.-Akad. forhandl. (1865), p. 522,
pl. xxxviii. fig. 10.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1896; not common.

55. Metopa propingua, G. O. Sars. |
1892. Metopa propingua, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p. 264, pl. xciii. fig. 1.

Habitat.— Dredged off Crail in 1892; rare.

56. Metopa norvegica (Lilljeborg).
1851. Leucothoé norvegica, Lillj., Bidr. til Norra Rysslands og Nor.

Fauna (1848); K. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl. (1851), vol. ii.
p. 335, pl. xx. fig. 4.

1855. Montagua pollexiana, Spence Bate, Brit. Assoc. Report (1855),
Pp. di.

Habitat.—Newhaven (Henderson). Off the west side of
Inchkeith, 1888. Dredged at the west end of Station III. in
May, and off the North Craig in July, 1901. I find this

species generally though sparingly distributed throughout
the estuary.

Genus (32) Sthenometopa, Norman.!

57. Sthenometopa robusta (G. O. Sars).
1893. Metopa robusta, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i. p. 274,
pl. xevi. fig. 1.
5h T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(6), vol. xiii. p. 184 (Feb. 1894).
Halitat.—Dredged at the west end of Station III. in May,
and off the North Craig in July, 1901. The Rev. Canon
Norman remarks (op. cit., p. 45) that Dr J. R. Henderson
obtained this species in the Firth of Forth in 1884, but that
T. and A. Scott were the first to record it as British.”

18041 3

Genus (33) Metopelia, G. O. Sars, 1892.

58, Metopella nasuta (Boeck).

1870. Metopa nasuta, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et arctica,
p. 64.

Habitat——Taken in moderately deep water west of May

1 Cf. Norman, Natwral History of HE. Finmark (pt. 2); Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist., Dec. 1902, p. 481.

2 It would thus appear that when Henderson found his specimens the
species was still undescribed. Sars did not describe it till 1893.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 155

Island, in 1892. The generic name Metopella was proposed
by G. O. Sars in his remarks on a closely allied species,
M. longimana, Boeck.'

Family CRESSIDA, Stebbing, 1899.

Genus (34) Cressa, Boeck, 1870.

59. Cressa dubia (Spence Bate).

1862. Danaia dubia, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 59, pl. x.
hee

1870. Cressa Schiddter, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et arctica,
p. 65.

Habitat —Taken at Station V.in February 1892. Dredged
at Station III. on 23rd May 1901; apparently not very
common.

Family LEUCOTHOIDA.

Genus (35) Leucothoé, Leach, 1814.

60. Leucothoé Lilljeborgu, Boeck.

1860. Leucothoé Lilljeborgi, Boeck, Forhandl. Skand. Natur. 8de
Méde, p. 653.

Halitat.—Obtained in the neighbourhood of the Bass Rock,
rare (1894). Dredged off the north-west end of Inchkeith
on 23rd May 1901. Found also in the stomach of a Sharp-
tailed Lumpenus, Lumpenus lampretiformis, captured in the
estuary during the same month.

Family GipICERIDAZ.

Genus (36) Monoculodes, Stimpson, 1853.

61. Monoculodes carinatus, Spence Bate.
1862. Monoculodes carinatus, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,
p. 104, pl. xvii. fig. 2.
Habitat.—Dredged in Largo Bay, off St Monans, and near
Fidra Island; not common.

1 Cf. Crustacea of Norway, vol. i. p. 274.

156 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (37) Perioculodes, G. O. Sars, 1892.
62. Perioculodes longimanus (Bate and Westwood).

1869. Monoculodes longimanus, B. and W., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crustacea, p. 507.

Halitat.—Dredged off Bo’ness, 1888; Largo Bay, 1890,
frequent. Station V., 24th April, and in the neighbourhood
of the Bass Rock in 20 fathoms, 28th June 1901. Also
found in the stomachs of small Whiting captured in the
estuary in May 1901.

Genus (38) Pontocrates, Boeck, 1870.

63. Pontocrates arenarius (Spence Bate).
1858. Kréyera arenaria, Bate, Trans. Tyneside Field Club, vol. iv.,
pt. 1; (1858) p. 15; ply ue eee
1862. A - Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol, 1 ps 173.
Habitat.—Shore east of Burntisland, frequent, burrowing
in the wet sand, near low-water, 1889. Dredged in shallow

water, off Musselburgh, in May 1901.

64. Pontocrates altamarinus (Bate and Westwood).
1862. Kréyera altamarina, B. and W., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crustacea,
VOLT ONY G3
1895. Pontocrates altamarinus, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norw., vol. i.
p- 695 (Suppl.), pl. vii. fig. 2.
Halitat.—Dredged off Bo’ness ; not common.

Genus (39) Synchelidium, G. O. Sars, 1892.

65. Synchelidium brevicarpum (Bate and Westwood).

1868. Kréyera brevicarpa, B. and W., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crustacea,
vol. ii. (Appendix), p. 508.

Habitat—Dredged in Largo Bay in 1889; at Station VI.
(off St Monans) in April 1901; and at other places and
dates; not common. :

Genus (40) Halimedon, Boeck, 1870.

66. Halimedon parvimanus (Bate and Westwood).

1863. dicerus parvimanus, B. and W., op. cit., vol. i. p. 161.
1870. Halimedon Miilleri, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arct., p. 89.

Halitat.— Dredged at Station V. in February 1892, and

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 157

subsequently in other parts of the estuary. It was again
dredged at Station V. in April 1901, and was also found in
the stomachs of Sharp-tailed ZLuwmpenus captured in the
neighbourhood of that station in May of the same year.

Family PLEUSTIDA.
Genus (41) Paramphithoé, Bruzelius, 1859.

67. Paramphithoé bicuspis (Kroyer).
1838. Amphithoé bicuspis, Kroyer, Gronlands Amphipoder, p. 45,
plietien 1
Habitat.—Newhaven, from fishermen’s lines (Henderson).
Dredged off the east side of Inchkeith on 23rd May 1901.
The species appears to be generally though sparingly dis-
tributed throughout the seaward part of the estuary.

68. Paramphithoé monocuspis, G. O. Sars.

1892. Paramphithoé monocuspis, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. i. p. 351,
pl. exxii. fig. 2.

Halitat.—Firth of Forth (Henderson, 1884; ef. Twelfth
F. b. Rept., pt. 11. p. 264, 1894). Dredged off the east side
of Inchkeith, and at the north-west end of the island, in
May 1901.

69. Paramphathoe assimilis, G. O. Sars.
1882. Paramphithoé assimilis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges Crust.,
VOL p., 99. pL. v. fig, 1
Halitat.— Dredged between Inchkeith and May Island,
found adhering to zoophytes brought up in the dredge, 1894.
Dredged at Station VI. (off St Monans), 22nd May 1901;

Tare.

Genus (42) Sympleustes, Stebbing, 1899.!

70. Sympleustes latipes (M. Sars).
1858. Amphithoé latipes, M. Sars, Forhandl. Vid. Selsk. Chr.
(1858), p. 139.
1890. Amphithopsis latipes, T. Scott, Eighth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 328.
1893. Parapleustes latipes, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p. 360, pl. exxvii.

Habitat—Several specimens, prettily coloured, were

i'Cf. Stebbing, ‘‘ Revision of Amphipoda,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
Sept. 1899, p. 209.

158 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

obtained adhering to a tuft of Antennularia antennina
dredged off the east side of Inchkeith in August 1889, and
at Station V. in September 1890.

Family EPIMERID &.
Genus (43) Epimeria, A. Costa, 1851.
71. Epimeria cornigera (Fabricius).
1779. Gammarus corniger, Fabr., Reise nach Norwegen, p. 83.

1863. Acanthonotus Owenii, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
‘Crust., vol. i. p. 232.

Habitat.— Dredged at Station III. in 1890, and off the
North Craig on 4th July 1901; not common.

Family [PHIMEDIDAZ.
Genus (44) Iphimedia, Rathke, 1843.

72. Iphimedia obesa, Rathke.

1843. Iphimedia obesa, Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Leopold., t. xx.
p. 85. ;

Habitat.—Newhaven, many specimens, dredged to the east
of Inchkeith (Henderson). Granton Harbour, 1888; Station
V., January 1892. Generally distributed throughout the
estuary, but usually not very common.

73. Iphimedia minuta, G. O. Sars.

1882. Iphimedia minuta, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges Crust.,
vol. i. p. 100, pl. v. fig. 2.

Habitat—Dredged at the north end of Inchkeith and
other parts of the estuary; not common. Dredged at
Station III. on 23rd May 1901.

Family SYRRHOIDAZ.
Genus (45) Argissa, Boeck, 1870.
74. Argussa hamatupes (Norman).

1869. Syrrhoé hamatipes, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868), p. 279.
1870. Argissa typica, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arctic., p. 45.

Habitat.—Taken at various places during the autumn and

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea.

159

winter of 1892. Taken at Station V. in April,

and at
Station VI. in May, 1901.

Family LAPHYSTIIDA!,

Genus (46) Laphystius, Kroyer, 1842.
75. Laphystius sturionis, Kroyer.
1842. Laphystius sturionis, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., 1 R., Bd. iv.
p- 157.

1855. Darwinia compressa, Spence Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1855),
p- 58.

Habitat.—FParasitic on various fishes; a considerable

number of specimens have at different times been observed

adhering to Angler-fishes, Lophius piscatorius, Linn., captured
in the estuary.

Family CALLIOPIID4.

Genus (47) Apherusa, A. O. Walker, 1891.
76. Apherusa hispinosa (Spence Bate).
1857. Dexamine bispinosa, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol. xx. p. 142.

1863. Atylus bispinosus, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.
vol. i. p. 250.

1893. Apherusa bispinosa, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p. 439, pl. cli. fig. 1.
Habitat—South Bay, 1888, and subsequently in other

parts of the estuary. Taken in 20 fathoms in the neighbour-
hood of the Bass Rock, 28th June 1904.

77. Apherusa cirrus (Bate).
1862. Pherusa cirrus, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 148,
pl. xxvii. fig. 6.

1870. Halirages borealis, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. borealia et arctica,
ps: EYG.

1893. Apherusa borealis,
pl. elv. fig. 2)
Habitat.— Generally distributed in the Forth; recent
records include Station V., where it was taken on 24th
April 1901, and near the Bass Rock on 28th June 1904.

G.. O.. Sarsgl open. vel. 1..p: 441;

160 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

78. Apherusa Jurini (M.-Edwards).

1830. Amphithoé Jurinii, M.-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. xx.
pene |

1862. ? Pherusa fucicola, Leach (Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Museum,
p. 145, pl. xxvii. fig. 10, not fig. 9).

1893. Apherusa Jurinii, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. i. p. 445, pl. elvii.
fig. 1.

Habitat? Newhaven, on fishermen’s lines (Henderson,
1884, as Pherusa fucicola). Several specimens were dredged
in the estuary in 1887 (Mihi). I am doubtful if Henderson’s
record really refers to A. Jurini, but do not know what else

to refer it to.

Genus (48) Calliopius, Lilljeborg, 1865.

79. Calliopius Rathkei (Zaddach).
1844. Amphithoé Rathkei, Zaddach, Synops. Crust. Pruss. Prodrom.,

p20:
1862. Calliope grandoculus, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,

p- 149, pl. xxviii. fig. 4.
Habitat—Firth of Forth, near Dunbar, at the mouth of
the estuary, 1894. This is probably only a smaller form of
the next species.

80. Callioprus leviusculus (Kroyer).
1838. Amphithoé leviusculus, Kroyer, Gronlands Amphipoder, p. 6.
1863. Calliope leviscula, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. ,
Vol. 7. p. 200!
Habitat —Not uncommon in various parts of the estuary
from above (ueensferry to North Berwick, especially inshore

amongst Alge.

Family ATYLID &.
Genus (49) Paratylus, G. O. Sars, 1893.

81. Paratylus Swammerdami (M.-Edwards).

1830. Amphithoé Swammerdami, M.-Edw., Ann. des Sci. Nat. (1),
vol. xx. p. 378.
1863. Atylus Swammerdami, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. 1.
p. 247.
Halitat.—Firth of Forth; moderately common and
generally distributed.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 161

82. Paratylus faleatus (Metzger).

1871. Atylus falcatus, Metzger,
ostfriesischen Kuste, Beitr. II. p. 9.

Halitat.—Firth of Forth, 1896; several specimens in my

Wirbelosen Meeresthiere der

collection.
83. Paratylus wneinatus, G. O. Sars.
1882. Atylus uncinatus, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges Crust.,

p. 102.
Habitat. —Off Aberlady, 12th December 1892, and again

in the spring of 1893. This form does not appear to be
very rare, but it may be easily passed over as a more
common species.

84. Paratylus vedlomensis (Bate and Westwood).

1863. Dexamine Vedlomensis, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed

Crust., vol. i. p. 242.
Habitat.—Taken sparingly in several localities between
Inchkeith and May Island. Dredged off St Monans, 22nd

May 1901.

Family DEXAMINIDAZ.
Genus (50) Dexamine, Leach, 1814.
85. Dexamine spinosa (Montagu).
1813. Cancer gammarus spinosus, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. xi.

De oy pe i, fe. 1.
1863. Dexamine spinosa, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. i. p. 237.

Habitat.—Obtained at low-water at Prestonpans (Cunning-

ham ; Leslie and Herdman). Off Musselburgh, 1888. This

appears to be a rare species in the Forth estuary.
86. Dexamine Thea, Boeck.
1870. Dexamine Thea, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arct., p. 107.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1896; scarce.

Genus (51) Triteta, Boeck, 1876.

87. Triteta gibbosa (Spence Bate).
1862. Atylus gibbosus, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 137,

pl. xxvi. fig. 3.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1896; not common.

VOL. XVI.

162 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (52) Guernea, Chevreux, 1887.

88. Guernea coalita (Norman).

1868. Helleria coalita, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. ii. p. 418, pl. xxii. fig. 8; pl. xxiii. figs: 6.

1887. Guernea coalita, Chevreux, Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, vol. xii.
p. 16 (separate copy).

Habitat.—Dredged off St Monans, 12 to 14 fathoms,
1889-90. In a gathering of dredged material from the same
place, collected on 22nd May 1901; not uncommon,

Family MELPHIDIPPIDA.,
Genus (55) Melphidippella, G. O. Sars, 1893.

89. Melphidippella macera (Norman).
1869. Atylus macer, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report (1868), p. 280.
Habitat.—Taken with bottom tow-net at Station V., 16th
April 1892. At the same Station on 24th April, and at
Station VI. on 22nd May 1901; not common.

Family GAMMARIDA.
Genus (54) Amathilla, Spence Bate, 1863.

90. Amathilla homari (J. C. Fabricius).

1798. Gammarus homari, Fabr., Entom. Syst. Suppl., p. 418.
1863. Amathilla Sabini, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. i. p. 361.

Habitat—Dredged near May Island, 1889. Also at
Station IV., 23rd December 1892, and Station VII., 23rd
February 1894; rare in the adult stage.

Genus (55) Gammarus, Fabricius, 1776.

91. Gammarus marinus, Leach.

1815. Gammarus marinus, Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. xi. p. 359.
1863. = i: Bate and Westw., op. ctt., vol. i. p. 370.

Habitat.—Taken near Culross, west of Queensferry, 1892.
Between tide-marks, Dalmeny shore, November 1904 (Evans).
Generally but sparingly distributed throughout the estuary.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 163

92. Gammarus Duebeni, Lilljeborg.
1851. Gammarus Duebeni, Lillj., Ofvers af K. Svenska Vet.-Acad.
Forhandl., p. 22.
Habitat.—Taken in the brackish water lagoon at the mouth
of the Cocklemill Burn, near Largo, 1896; also in brackish
water pools on May Island, 13th June 1893.

93. Gammarus locusta (Linné).

1767. Cancer locusta, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1055.
1863. Gammarus locusta, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
Es ivol 1; pane:

Habitat.—Common, especially in the littoral zone.

94. Gammarus pulex (De Geer).

1752. Squilla ponce, De Geer, Mem. pour Servir a l’Hist. des
Insects, vol. vii. p. 525, pl. 33.
1777. Astacus pulex, Pennant, British Zoology, vol. iv. p. 17.
Habitat—Common in shallow fresh-water lakes, slow
streams, ditches, etc., throughout the district.

Genus (56) Melita, Leach.
195. Melita obtusata (Montagu).

1804. Cancer gammarus obtusatus, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. ix.
p: 5, pl. i: fig. 7.
1863. Melita obtusata, Bate and Westw., vol. i. p. 407.

Habitat.—Moderately frequent throughout the estuary.

96. Melita dentata (Kroyer).

1842. Gammarus dentatus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. 1 R., vol. iv.
p. 159.

1862. Megamera dentata, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 225,
pl. xxxix. fig. 4.

Habitat—Taken in moderately deep water (28 fathoms)
at the mouth of the estuary in January 1890; rare. Only
two specimens, one partly dissected, are in my collection.

+ Two specimens of Melita gladiosa, Bate, were in 1888 recorded by me

from Largo Bay (cf. Sizth F. B. Rept., part iii. p. 247), but they were
probably merely well-developed males of J. obtusata.

164 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (57) Mera, Leach, 1813.

97. Mera Othonis (M.-Edwards).
1830. Gammarus Othonis, M.-Edw., Ann. des Sci. Nat., vol. xx.
p. 373, pl. x. fig. 11(¢@).
1863. Megamera Othonis, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. i. p. 405 ( @ ).
1863. ne (2) longimana, idem, ibidem, p. 403 ( ¢).
Habitat.—Dredged in South Bay in 1888, and off the east

side of Inchkeith in 1891; rare.

98. Mera Loveni (Bruzelius).
-1869. Gammarus Loveni, Bruz., Skand. Amphip. Gamm., p. 59,
fig. 9.
1868. Mera Loveni, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), ene at
p. 4i6 pl xxi, fies. 1h i.
188027 55 », idem, zbidem (6), vol. iv. p. 127 (Aug. 1889).

Habitat—A single specimen of this large species was
dredged a short distance west of Inchkeith on 11th Novem-
ber 1887. Another specimen was obtained in the stomach
of a Lemon Sole (Pleuronectes imicrocephalus) captured at
Station IX. on 5th August 1890, and a third in the stomach
of a Witch Sole (Pleuronectes cynoglossus) captured at
Station V. on 28th June 1901.

199. Mera tenuwimana (Bate).
1862. Gammarus tenuimanus, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,
p. 214, pl. xxxvili. fig. 2
1868. Mera Batei, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), vol. ii.
p- 416, pl. xxii. figs. 1-3 (¢?).
1869. Megamera multidentata, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. ii.
p. 515 (6).
Habitat—F¥irth of Forth, captured in 1895; rare. (Cf.

Fourteenth F. B. Rept., pt. 11. p. 160, 1896.)

Genus (58) Megaluropus, Norman, 1889.

100. Megaluropus agilis, Norman.
1889. Megaluropus agilis, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6),
vol. iii. p. 446, pl. xviii. figs. 1-10 (June 1889); op. cit.,
vol. iv. p. 122, pl. x. figs. 15-17 (Aug. 1889).
Habitat—Taken in Largo Bay, 1888-90; frequent.
Dredged off Musselburgh in May 1891, and at Stations V.

and VI. in April 1901.

1See A. O. Walker’s remarks on this and other species, dnn. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. for June 1895 (Ser. 6, vol. xv. pp. 464-476).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 165

Genus (59) Cheirocratus, Norman, 1865.

101. Cheirocratus Sundewalli (Rathke),.

1843. Gammarus Sundewalli, Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Leopold,
vol, xx. p. 65, pl. ili. fig. 2.

Habitat.—Taken at Station II., 14th November 1888;
and subsequently, but sparingly, at other parts of the
estuary. Dredged off the east side and at the north-west
end of Inchkeith in May 1901; also found in the stomach
of a Long Rough Dab (Platessoides limandoides) captured in
the Forth during the same month.

102. Chetrocrates intermedius, G. O. Sars.
1894. Chetrocrates intermedius, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. 1. p. 527,
‘ pl. elxxxvi. fig. 1.
1896. J - T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 160, pl. iv. fig. 7.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, taken in 1889 and 1893 (but not
recorded till 1896); rare.

103. Chetrocrates assimilis (Lilljeborg).

1851. Gammarus assimilis, Lillj., Ofvers af K. Svenska Vet.-Acad.
Forhandl. (1851), p. 28.

1865. Cheirocrates mantis, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durham, vol. i. p. 13, pl. vii. figs. 14, 15.

Habitat.—Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith in
February 1894; at the north end of the same island on
23rd January 1896; and at Station III. on 23rd May 1901;
moderately rare.

Family LILLJEBORGIID4.
Genus (60) Lilljeborgia, Spence Bate, 1862.

104. Lilljeborgia Kinahani (Spence Bate).

1862. Phedra Kinahani, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 119,
pl. xxi. fig. 1.

Habitat—Dredged at Station VI. and Station III., and
also at the north-west end of Inchkeith, in May 1901, but
only a few specimens were obtained altogether.

166 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Family AORID &.
Genus (61) Microdeutopus, A. Costa, 1853.

105. Microdeutopus anomalus (Rathke).

1843. Gammarus anomalus, Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Leopold,
vol. xx. p63, plewa. fig. 7:

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, 1893; rare.

Genus (62) Aora, Kroyer, 1844.

106. Aora gracilis, Spence Bate.

1855. Lonchomerus gracilis, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1855), p. 58.
1862. Aora gracilis, idem, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 160,
pl. xxixemig7;

Habitat—Newhaven; many specimens. Both sexes taken
off Fidra (Henderson, 1884). I have dredged it off Elie, and
one or two other places, but usually in small numbers.

Genus (63) Lembos, Spence Bate, 1856.1

107. Lembos Webstert, Spence Bate.

1857. Lembos Websteri, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), vol. xix.
p. 142.

Habitat —Dredged at Station V., 24th April 1901; rare.

108. Lembos longipes (Lilljeborg).
1852. Gammarus longipes, Lillj., Ofvers af K. Svenska Vet.-Acad.
Forhandl. (1852), p. 10.

Habitat— Dredged off St Monans, 19th June 1893 and
22nd May 1901; rare.

Family PHOTIDA.
Genus (64) Protomedeia, Kroyer, 1842.
109. Protomedera fasciata, Kroyer.
1842. Protomedeia fasciata, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., vol. iv. p. 154.
Habitat.—Captured near May Island, October 1894.

1 Cf. Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, ‘‘ Notes on Amphipoda, Old and New,” in
Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. tor September 1895.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 167

Found in the stomachs of Gurnards (7'rigla gurnardus), as
well as in the stomachs of sharp-tailed Luwmpenus, small
Whitings, and Long Rough Dabs, captured in the estuary
in April and May 1901.

Genus (65) Leptocheirus, Zaddach, 1844.

1110. Leptocheirus hirsutumanus (Spence Bate).

1862. Protomedeia hirsutimanus, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,
p: 168," pl. “xxx: fig. 6.

1894, Leptocheirus pilosus, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. i. p. 556,
pl. exevii. (not Z. pilosus, Zaddach).

Habitat.—Dredged off Elie Ness in 17 fathoms in 1888.
Dredged off Inchkeith in 1890, and again in 1894; and at
Station III. and Station VI. in May 1901. In this species
the accessory appendage of the superior antenne is composed
of about six joints.

111. Leptocheirus pilosus, Zaddach.

1844. Leptocheirus pilosus, Zadd., Synopsis Crustaceorum Prussi-
corum Prodr., p. 8.

21869. Protomedeia pectinata, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868),
p- 283. s

1895. Leptocheirus pilosus, A. O. Walker, Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc.,
vol. ix. p. 310.

Hatitat.— Dredged in the Firth of Forth in 1895 and
1894. Over a dozen specimens of this species were obtained
in some material dredged off St Monans on 22nd May 1901.
In this species the accessory appendage of the superior
antenne is two-jointed. A female specimen, with ova,
measured a little over three millimetres.

Genus (66) Gammaropsis, Lilljeborg, 1854.
112. Gammaropsis maculata (Johnston).

1828. Gammarus maculatus, Johnston, Contrib. to Brit. Fauna,
Zool. Jour., vol. ili. p. 176.
1894. Gammaropsis erythrophthalma, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of
Norway, vol. i. p. 558, pl. exeviil.
1900. - maculata, Chevreux, Albert Ie Prince de
Monaco, Camp. Scient. (Amphipoda), p. 92.

Halntat.— Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith in 1888.

1Cf. A. O. Walker, ‘‘ Revis. of the Amphip. of the L. M. B. C. District,”
Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc., vol. ix. p. 310 (1895),

168 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Taken at Station V.in December 1890; and subsequently,
but always sparingly, in various other parts of the estuary.

113. Gammaropsis nana, G. O. Sars.

1894. Gammaropsis nana, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. i. p. 561,
pl. cxeix: ies,

Habitat.—Taken at one or two places in the estuary in
1890. Dredged at Station IV. in April, and at Station III.
in May, 1901.

Genus (67) Megamphopus, Norman, 1869.

114. Megamphopus cornutus, Norman.

1869. Megamphopus cornutus, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868),
p. 282.

Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, 1896; dredged at Station III. in
May 1901.

Genus (68) Microprotopus, Norman, 1866.

115. Microprotopus maculatus, Norman.

1866. Alicroprotopus maculatus, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1866),
p- 208.

Habitat.—Dredged in Largo Bay in 1891, and subsequently
in other parts of the estuary, but not very common.

Genus (69) Photis, Kroyer, 1842.
116. Photis longicaudatus (Bate and Westwood).
1863. LHiscladus longicaudatus, B. and W., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. i. p. 412.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, dredged off St Monans in 1892;
also west of Queensferry in April, and at Stations III, and
VI. in May, 1901. |

Genus (70) Podoceropsis, Boeck, 1860.
117. Podoceropsis Sophie, Boeck.
1860. Podoceropsis Sophie, Boeck, Forh. Ved. de Skand. Naturf.
8 de Mode, p. 666.

1862. Nenia tuberculosa, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 271,
pl. xlvi. fig. 2.

Habitat.—*‘ Dredged to the east of Inch Mickery, also

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 169

south-west of Inchkeith ” (Henderson, 1884). This species
I have not met with in the Firth of Forth.

118. Podoceropsis excavata (Spence Bate).

1862. Nenia excavata, Bate, op. cit., p. 272, pl. xlvi. fig. 4 (¢).
1862. » rimapalma, idem, ibidem, p. 272, pl. xlvi. fig. 3 (4).

Habitat.—< With the last in both localities” (Henderson).
Dredged in Largo Bay, Kirkcaldy Bay, at Station III., and
elsewhere ; generally though sparingly distributed.

Family AMPHITHOIDAZ.
Genus (71) Amphithoé, Leach, 1813.
119. Amphithoé rubricata (Montagu).

1804. Cancer (Gammarus) rubricatus, Mont., Trans. Linn, Soc.,
Volixsp. 99. pla vee, 1.
1856. Amphithoé littorina, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1855), p. 59.

Habitat.—Dredged off Musselburgh and off the west side
of May Island in 1887-88. Subsequently in other parts of
the estuary, especially in shallow water amongst Alge.

Genus (72) Pleonexes, Spence Bate, 1857.

120. Pleonexes gammaroides, Spence Bate.

1857. Pleonexes gammaroides, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol, xix. p.147 (6):
1857. Sunamphithoé hamulus, idem, ibidem, p. 148 (2).

Habitat.—Obtained off Pittenweem amongst trawl refuse,
and between tide-marks near Portobello, 1887-88.

Family ISCHYROCERIDZ.
Genus (73) Ischyrocerus, Kroyer, 1838.

121. Ischyrocerus minutus, Lilljeborg.

1850. Ischyrocerus minutus, Lillj., Kgl. Svenska Vet.-Acad. Handl.
(1850), p. 335.

Habitat.—Taken in various parts of the estuary. The
specimens in my collection were obtained in 1892.

170 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

'Genus (74) Jassa, Leach, 1815.
122. Jassa falcata (Montagu).

1804. Cancer (Gammarus) falcatus, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. 1x.

p.. 100; ply. igs: 1) 2:
Habitat_—Dredged off Musselburgh in 1888 and 1891; and
subsequently, though sparingly, in other parts of the estuary.

123. Jassa pusilla (G. O. Sars).

1894. Podocerus pusillus, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. i.
p- 596, pl. cexiii. fig. 1.

Habitat.—-Firth of Forth, 1887, and also in 1889, when the
specimens in my collection were obtained. More recently
it has been dredged at Station III., and at the north-west
end of Inchkeith on 23rd May 1901.

2124. Jassa Herdmani (A»O. Walker).

1893. Podocerus Herdmani, A. O. Walker, Sixth Rept. L. M. B. C.,
p. 37, fig. 13.

1894. a odontonyz, G. O. Sars, op. cit., vol. i. p. 597,
pl. cexiii. fig. 2.

Habitat.—Off St Monans, 19th June 1893. This form,
which I have observed on several occasions, resembles in
some respects the Jassa pusilla (G. O. Sars); and, as
A. O. Walker suggests, may be only a form of it. (It is
probable that the species of /assa mentioned above may
have to be removed to another genus.)

125. Jassa pelagica, Leach.
1814. Jassa pelagica, Leach, Edin. Encyclop., vol. vii. p. 433.

1848. Podocerus capillatus, Rathke, Nova Acta Cesar. Leop. Carol.
Nat. Cur, vol. xc p. 89, pl. iv. fie. 6.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, off Musselburgh, in April 1891,
and very sparingly on one or two other occasions.

1Cf. Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, ‘‘On the true Podocerus, and some New
Genera of Amphipoda,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), vol. iii p. 237 et seq.
(March 1899). Of. also Chevreux, ‘‘ Result. Camp. Scient. Albert Ie Prince
de Monaco,” Amphipoda, Addenda, p. 165 (1900).

2Cf. Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, op. cit., p. 240.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 171

Genus (75) Erichthonius, M.- Edwards, 1830.
126. Hrichthonius abditus (Templeton).

1836. Cerapus abditus, Templ., Trans. Ent. Soc., vol. i. p. 188,
pl. xx. fig. 5.

1862. Dercothoé punctata, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 260,
pl. xliv. fig. 10.
Habitat.—South Bay, 1888; Kirkcaldy Bay, 27th March
1891; Station IIL, 25th May 1901.

127. Hrichthonius deforms, M.-Edwards.

1830. Hrichthonius deformis, M.-Edw., Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. xx.
p- 382.

1863. Cerapus deformis, Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.,
VOlst.paa5/:

Habitat.— Dredged near the Bass Rock (Metzger). Dredged

in South Bay in 1887. Obtained in the stomachs of small

Whitings and Butter-fishes captured in the estuary in May
1901.

128. Hrichthonwus Huntert (Spence Bate).

1862. Cerapus Hunteri, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus., p. 264,
pl. xiv. fig. 3.

1896. Hrichthonius Hunteri, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. i. p.. Low, pl. iv. fis. 8.

Habitat.—F¥irth of Forth, generally though sparingly dis-
tributed. The specimens in my collection were obtained in
1887 and 1894. Specimens of #. Huntert were dredged at
Station VII. in April, and at Station III. in May, 1901.

Family COROPHIID&.
Genus (76) Cerapus, Say, 1817.
129. Cerapus crassicornis (Spence Bate).

1855, Siphonoecetes crassicornis, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1855),
p-. 59.
. Sy Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crust., vol. i. p. 496.
Habitat—Firth of Forth; a single specimen (still in my
collection) was obtained in a bottom tow-net gathering on
30th May 1892. This specimen, in its tube of hardened

1863.

172 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

mud, with which it was able to move freely about, had a
close resemblance to a small insect larva.

Genus (77) Siphonoécetes, Kroyer.

130. Siphonoécetes Whiter (Gosse).

1853. Cerapus Whitei, Gosse, Naturalist’s Rambles on Devonshire
Coast, p. 282, pl. xxii. figs. 12-14.

1870. Siphonoécetes Colletti, Boeck, Crust. Amphip. bor. et arct.,
p- 258.

Habitat— Frequent in material dredged in Largo Bay in
1890, and occasionally in other parts of the estuary.

Genus (78) Corophium, Latreille, 1807.

131. Corophiwm grossipes (Linné).

1767. Cancer grosstpes, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p 1050.

1775. Gammarus longicornis, Fabr., System. Entom., vol. ii. p. 515.

1863. Corophium longicorne, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. i.
p- 493.

Habitat Dunbar (Robertson). “ Very abundant on the
mud flat at Morrison’s Haven” (Cunningham).! Brackish
water pools at Aberlady in 1895.

132. Corophiwm crassicorne, Bruzelius.

1859. Corophiwm crassicorne, Bruz., Skand. Amphip. Gamm., p. 15,
pl. 1. fis. 2:

Habitat.—Taken off Musselburgh in 1888. Aberdour Bay,
November 1893. (Cf. also Fourteenth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p: Jot, 1896.)

133. Corophivwm Bonelli, M.-Edwards.
1830. Corophium Bonelli, M.-Edw., Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. xx. p. 385.
Habitat—Taken near Dunbar in 1894. Dredged at
Station III. in May 1901.

134. Corophiwm affine, Bruzelius.

1859. Corophium affine, Bruz., op. cit., p. 16.
1869. PP tenwicorne, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1868),
p- 286.

Habitat—A single specimen dredged off Fidra, October
1 Of Invertebrate Fauna, by Leslie and Herdman, pp. 44-106 (1881).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 173

1884 (Henderson). Dredged off Inchkeith; in Kirkcaldy
Bay, and other places, but seldom more than one or two
specimens in any single gathering.

Genus (79) Unciola, Say, 1818.

135. Unciola planipes, Norman.

1865. Unciola planipes, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb, and
Durham, vol. i. p. 14, pl. vii. figs. 9-13.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, dredged 22nd November 1889,
and on one or two subsequent occasions; rare.

Family DULICHIID 4.
Genus (80) Dulichia, Kroyer, 1845.
136. Dulichia porrecta, Spence Bate.

1862. Dulichia porrecta, Bate, Catal. Amphip. Brit. Mus.,° p. 348.
pl. liv. fig. 9.

Halitat.— Taken off Musselburgh in April 1891. Dredged
at Station III, and at the north-west end of Inchkeith, on
23rd May 1901. It was also obtained in the stomachs of
small Whitings captured in the Forth during the same
month.

137. Dulichia monacantha, Metzger.

1873. Dulichia monacantha, Metz., Nordseef. der Pommerania,
Crust., p. 226, pl. vi. fig. 6.

1898. “a oy T. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist.
(Jan. 1898), p. 55.

Habitat.—Dredged at Station V. on 24th April, and on
the 29th at Station VII, 1901. It was also obtained in the
stomachs of a few of the fishes captured in Forth in April
and May 1901, and which were sent for examination to the
laboratory at Bay of Nigg, Aberdeen.

138. Dulichia falcata, Spence Bate.

1857. Dulichia falcata, Bate, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. xx.
p. 526.

Habitat_—Taken with surface tow-net in Granton Harbour,
26th November 1887. Dredged near Inchkeith on 11th
April 1892; and at Station V. on 24th April 1901. Obtained
also in the stomachs of fishes.

174 Proceedings of the Royal Physicai Society.

‘CAPRELLIDEA.
Family CAPRELLIDA.
Genus (81) Phtisica, Slabber, 1749.

139. Phtisica marina, Slabber.

1749. Phtisica marina, Slabber, Natuurkundige verslustigingen,
ete. Pale:
1814. Proto pedata, Leach, Edin. Encyclop., vol. vii. p. 433.

Habitat—Newhaven, on fishermen’s lines, not uncommon
(Henderson). Dredged in South Bay in 1888; and sub-
sequently at other parts of the estuary; and also obtained in
the stomachs of small fishes captured in the Forth.

Genus (82) Protella, Dana, 1852.
140. Protella phasma (Montagu).

1804. Cancer phasma, Mont., Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. vii. p. 66,
pl. vi. fig. 3. ‘

1868. Protella phasma, Bate and Westw., Sessile-eyed Crust.,
vol. ii. p. 45.

Habitat —Firth of Forth (Goodsir). Dredged in South
Bay in 1888, and again in 1892; and at Station III. on 23rd
May 1901.

Genus (83) Pariambus, Stebbing, 1888.

141. Pariambus typicus (Kroyer).
1844. Podalirius typicus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. 2 R., 1 B.
p. 283.
1868. Caprella typica, Bate and Westw., op. cit., vol. ii. p. 75.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, frequent on the common starfish
Asterias rubens, with which it appears to be associated.

Genus (84) Caprella, Lamarck, 1818.

142. Caprella linearis (Linné).

1767. Cancer linearis, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1056.
1842. Caprella levis, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour., vol. xxxiii.
p- 189, pl. iii. fig. 4.

Habitat.—* Plentiful in the laminarian zone ” (Henderson).

Land, Fresh. Water, and Marine Crustacea. 175

South Bay, frequent, 1888. Dredged at Station III. on
23rd May 1901. *

143. Caprella acanthifera, Leach.
1814. Caprella acanthifera, Leach, Edin. Encyclop., vol. vii. p. 404.
Habitat.—Firth of Forth, taken by the Rev. J. Gordon
(cf. Bate and Westwood, rit. Sessile-eyed Crust., vol. ii. p. 67).
A single specimen in my collection has on the label, “ Firth
of Forth, 1888,” but I don’t remember what part of the
estuary it was taken in.

144, Caprella tuberculata, Guerin.
1829. Caprella tuberculata, Guerin, Iconograph. Crust., pl. xxviii.
Heat.
1842, Us e Goodsir, op. cit., vol. xxxiii. p. 188,
pl. ili. fig. 6.
se bs Bate and Westw., Brit. Sessile-eyed
Crust., vol. ii. p. 68.
Hlabitat.—Firth of Forth (Goodsir; specimen in Brit.
Mus. Coll. Cf. Bate and Westw., op. cit., p. 70).

1869.

145. Caprelia equilibra, Say.

1818. Caprella equilibra, Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia,
vol. i. p. 391.

1899. 7 < T. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist. (April
1899), p. 116.

Habitat.—A considerable number of specimens were
obtained amongst Algze and barnacles scraped from a ship’s
bottom at Granton Harbour; most of the specimens were
either females or immature, but a few adult males were
found, by means of which the species to which they belonged
was satisfactorily identified.

Sub-Class I]. ENTOMOSTRACA
Order 3. BRANCHIOPODA.
Suborder Cladocera.

The arrangement followed for this suborder is that of
Professor Lilljeborg’s monograph, Cladocera-Sueciv, published

176 Proceedings of the Royal Physicai Society.

in 1900 (700 pp., and 87 plates). See also the Rev. T. R. R.
Stebbing, F.R.S., on “Lynceus and the Lynceide,” in The

Zoologist, March 1902, pp. 101-106.

Suborder Cladocera.
Division CALYPTOMERA, G. O. Sars.
Tribe CrENopopa, G. O. Sars, 1865.

Family S1p1ID4@, Baird, 1850.

Genus (1) Sida, Strauss, 1820.

1. Sida erystallina (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Daphne crystallina, Miller, Zool. Dan. Prod., p. 200,

No. 2405.
11820. Sida crystallina, Strauss, Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat., vol. vi.

p. 157.
Habitat.—Raith Lake, Kirkcaldy, Fifeshire, common,
1890; Loch Leven, Kinross; Loch Vennachar and Loch
Katrine, Perthshire.

Genus (2) Diaphanosoma, Fischer, 1890.

2. Diaphanosoma brachyurum (Liéven).

1848. Sida brachyura, Liéven, Neueste Schrift. d. Naturf. Gesell-
schaft in Danzig, 4: ten Bds. 2:tes Heft. p. 20, pl. iv.

figs. 3-9.
Habitat.—Loch Leven, 1890; Raith Lake, 1890, common ;
Loch Katrine, Loch Achray, Loch Vennachar; Marfield
Loch, Midlothian, September 1901 (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (3) Latona, Strauss, 1820.

3. Latona setifera (O. F. Miller).
1785. Daphnia setifera, Mill., Entomostraca, p. 98, pl. xiv. figs. 5-7.

Habitat—Loch Lubnaig, 29th September 1894.

1 Fos other synonyms see Professor Lilljebore’s work mentioned above.
oO

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 137

Family HOLOPEDIDAZ.
Genus (4) Holopedium, Zaddach, 1855.

4. Holopedium gibberum, Zaddach.

1855. Holopedium gibberum, Zaddach, Wiegmann, Archiv. fur
Naturges., Bd. 21, p. 159, pl. viii. fig. 9.
Habitat.—Loch Achray, Loch Voil. Common in Loch
Achray in September 1897 and June 1898, but entirely
absent during the intervening winter months.

Tribe ANOomMopPOoDA, G. O. Sars.
Family DAPHNIADA, Strauss.
Genus (5) Daphnia, O. F. Miiller, 1785.

The study of the various forms comprised in the genus
Daphnia is extremely interesting, but very perplexing. The
variations, especially in form, and also to some extent in
structural details, are so great that the student of sanguine
temperament could easily describe a dozen species where the
severely critical could only make out two or three. As I
cannot lay claim to a very expert knowledge of the relation-
ships of this difficult genus, it is necessary for me to rely, to
some extent, on the discrimination of writers more familiar
with it.

5. Daphnia pulex (De Geer).
1778. Monoculus pulex, De Geer, Mem. pour. servir a l’hist. nat. des
Insectes, T. vii. p. 442, pl. 27, figs. 1-8.
Habitat.—Generally distributed, and occurring sometimes
in considerable abundance. Very plentiful in an artificial
pond in the vicinity of Edinburgh in July 1898.1 The
variety hamata (Brady) has been taken by Dr and Miss
Sprague in Granton Quarry, near Edinburgh, and I have
found it, as well as the variety obtusata, in the “ marl-pit ”
near Davidson’s Mains, Midlothian. This species possesses
a comb-like fringe of minute hairs at the base of the post-
abdominal claw.

1 Seventeenth Fishery Board Report, part iii. (1899) p. 199.
VOLS XVI. R

178 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

6. Daphnia longispina, O. F. Miiller.

1785. Daphnia longispina, O. F. Miller, Entomostraca, p. 88, tab.
12, figs. 8-10.

1850. Daphnia pulex, var. longispina, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 91,
pl. vii. figs. 3, 4.

Habitat—Duddingston Loch (?). A form very common in
Duddingston Loch appears to belong to this species. The
same form is also common in Loch Leven, and in several
other small lakes and ponds. JD. longispina differs from the
last in the post-abdominal claw being without a pectinate
fringe of small hairs at the base. The shell is also usually
furnished with a moderately long and slender posterior spine.
There appear to be several varieties of D. longispina. A variety
with a curious sloping head (var. nasuta, G. O. Sars) was found
in Loch Doon in Ayrshire. Immature individuals are some-
times furnished with a “vertex tooth” (cf. var. hamata).

7. Daphnia hyalina, Leydig, var. pellucida, P. KE. Miller.

Habitat.—Duddingston Loch (G. 8. Brady). This may turn
out to be only another form of D. longispina, O. F. Miiller.

8. Daphnia lacustris, G. O. Sars.

1862. Daphnia lacustris, G. O. Sars, Om de i Omegnen af Christiania
forekommen de Cladocerer, Forhandl.
Vidensk. Selsk. Christ. (1861), p. 19.

i T. Scott, Seventeenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
pp. 192-194, pl. vii. figs. 29-33, 34 and 34a.
Habitat.—Loch Leven (G. 8. Brady). Probably frequent.
Hurley Cove, Penicuik, 31st December 1900, common (Dr and
Miss Sprague). This species possesses when young, and some-
times also in the adult stage, a “ vertex tooth,’ which may be
single or double. JD. lacustris is, by some writers, considered
to be a variety of the last species (D. hyalina), to which it
bears a close resemblance.

1899/45.

9. Daphnia galeata, G. O. Sars.

1863. Daphnia galeata, G. O. Sars, Om en i Somm. 1862 fortagen
Zool. Reise i Christ. og Throndh. stifter, p. 21.

1899. Daphnia galeata, T. Scott, Seventeenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 193, pl. vii. figs. 22, 53, see also fig. 16:

Haltitat.—Loch Katrine, Loch Achray, and Loch Vennachar.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 179

Granton Quarry, lst September 1900 (Dr and Miss Sprague).
I find this species exceedingly variable, especially in the
form of the head, which in the more typical specimens is
strongly crested, but passing by minute gradations to others
that have no crest at all, but having the head evenly rounded.
I am inclined to agree with those who regard this Daphnia
and the two immediately preceding as forms of one and the
same species, to which Daphnia jardiniu, Baird, must also be
ascribed. In that case, Baird’s name, being the older, would
take precedence of the others.

Genus (6) Scapholeberis, Schoedler, 1858.

10. Scapholeberis mucronata (O. F. Miiller).

1785. Daphne mucronata, O. F. Miller, Entomostraca, p. 94, pl. xiii.
figs. 6, 7.

Habitat—Raith Lake, Kirkcaldy, frequent, 1890; Ravel-
ston Cottage Quarry, Midlothian, July 1900 (Dr and Miss
Sprague).

Genus (7) Simosa, Norman, 1903.
(Syn.—Simocephalus, Schoedler, 1858, preoccupied.)

11. Sumosa vetula (O. F. Muller).

1776. Daphne vetula, O. F. Miller, Zool. Dan. Prod., p. 199,
No. 2399.

1858. Simocephalus vetulus, E. Schoedler, Jahresber. tiber die Louisen-
stadtische Realschule, p. 18.

Habitat——Duddingston Loch; Loch Leven; Lochgelly and
Kilconquhar Lochs, Fifeshire; Loch Coulter, Stirlingshire,
etc.; frequent and generally distributed.

Genus (8) Ceriodaphnia, Dana, 1853.

12. Ceriodaphnia reticulata (Jurine).
1820. Monoculus reticulatus, Jurine, Nat. Hist. des Monoc., p. 139,
taf. 14, figs. 3, 4.
Habitat.—Raith Lake, Kirkcaldy, frequent, 1890. Upper
- Elf Loch, Edinburgh, 1896 and 1897. In the same loch in
September 1900 by Dr and Miss Sprague.

180 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

13. Ceriodaphma quadrangula (O. F. Miller).

1785. Daphnia quadranguia, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 90,
tab. 13, fig. 4.

Habitat—Duddingston Loch, September 1897 and 1898.
Taken in the same loch in June 1901 by Dr and Miss
Sprague.

14. Certodaphia afinis, Lilljeborg.
1900. Ceriodaphnia affinis, Lillj., Cladocera-Sueciz, p. 202, tab. 28,

figs. 19-28.
1901. 5 scitula, Herrick? (Sprague), Trans. Edin. Field
Nat. and)Micros. Soc., vol. iv. pt. iii. p. 258.
1902. i affinis, Sprague, op. cit., pt. iv. pl. xxxA. figs.
1-4.

Habitat High Pond, Penicuik, 7th September 1901 (Dr
and Miss Sprague).

This rare species is one of the additions made to the
Entomostracan fauna of the inland waters of Scotland by
Dr and Miss Beatrice Sprague.

15. Ceriodaphmia laticaudata, P. EH. Miiller.

1867. Ceriodaphnia laticaudata, P. E. Miller, Danmarks Cladocera,
p. 130, pla. fig. 9:

Habitat—Duddingston Loch, September 1897, frequent;
not observed in 1898.

Family BOSMINADAZ.
Genus (9) Bosmina, Baird, 1850.

16. Bosmina longirostris (O. F. Miller).

1776. Lynceus longirostris, O. F. Miller, Zool. Dan. Prod., No. 2394.
1846. Bosmina longirostris, Baird, Ann.and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. xvii.
p. 412.

Habitat—Common and generally distributed in small
lakes and ponds throughout the lowland parts of the district.

17. Bosmina longispina, Leydig.
1860. Bosmina longispina, Leydig, Naturgesch. d. Daphniden,

p- 207, pl. villi. fig. 62.
Habitat.—Loch Katrine, Loch Achray, Loch Leven, etc. ;

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 181

not rare in the larger lakes, where both species are sometimes
found living together. They are both variable species, and a
number of varieties have been described.

Family LYNCODAPHNIDA, G. O. Sars.
Genus (10) Ilyocryptus, G. O. Sars, 1861.
18. Llyocryptus sordidus (Liévin).

1848. Acanthocercus sordidus, Liévin, Die Branchiopoden d. Danziger
Gegend; Neueste Schrift. d. Naturf. Gesell. in Danzig,
4:ten Bds. 2: tes Heft. p. 34, pl. vili. figs. 7-12.

Habitat.—Lochend Loch, Edinburgh, Loch Leven; Lin-
lithgow Loch, and Loch Achray; not uncommon. Upper
Elf Loch, Edinburgh (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (11) Macrothrix, Baird.

19. Macrothria laticornis (Jurine).

1820. Monoculus laticornis, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 151,
pl. xv. figs. 6, 7.

1901. Macrothrix laticornis, Dr and Miss Sprague, Trans. Edin. Field
Nat. and Micros. Soc., vol. iv. p. 258, pl. xxx. figs. 13-15.

Habitat.—Pond in Queen’s Park, Edinburgh, i6th June
1900; rare (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (12) Lathonura, Lilljeborg, 1853.
20. Lathonura rectirostris, O. F. Miller.

1785. Daphnia rectirostris, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, etc.,
p- 92, pl. xii. figs. 1-3.

Habitat.—Loch Achray, Trossachs, November 1897; rare.

Genus (13) Drepanothrix, G. O. Sars, 1861.

21. Drepanothria dentata (H. A. Kurén).

1861. Acantholeberis dentata, Eurén, Ofvers af K. Wet.-Akad. Forh.
(1861), No. 8, p. 118, pl. iii. fig. 2.

Habitat.—Loch Lubnaig, Loch Katrine, and Loch Achray.

182 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (14) Acantholeberis, Lilljeborg, 1853.
22. Acantholeberis curvirostris (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Daphne curvirostris, O. F. Miiller, Zool. Dan. Prod., p. 200,
No. 2403.

Habitat—Marfield Loch, Midlothian, 21st September
1901; rare (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Family CoyDoRID4, T. R. BR. Stebbing, 1902.
Genus (15) Eurycercus, Baird, 1845.
23. Eurycercus lamellatus (O. F. Muller).

1785. Lynceus lameliatus, O. F. Miller, Entomostraca, p. 73, pl. ix.
figs. 4-6.

Halitat—Common and generally distributed throughout
the district.

Genus (16) Camptocercus, Baird, 1843.
24. Camptocercus rectirostris, Schoedler.
1862. Camptocercus rectirostris, Schoedler, idem, Die Lynceiden u.

Polyphemiden der Umgegend v. Berlin, Ichresb. t. d.
Dorothunstiid Realschule, p. 25, pl. i. fig. 48.

Habitat.—Loch Achray, November 1897; rare. The form
described in Baird’s classical work on british Hntomostraca
is probably this species. Typical specimens of C. macrurus

(O. F. Miiller) have been observed in none of the Scottish
lakes or ponds examined by me.

Genus (17) Acroperus, Baird, 1843.
25. Acroperus harpae, Baird.
1835. Lynceus harpae, Baird, Trans. Berw. Nat. Club, vol. i.
p: 100; pl. aig. 17
1850. Acroperus harpae, idem, Brit. Entom., p. 129, pl. xvi. fig. 5.

Halitat—Generally distributed and moderately common
throughout the district.

Genus (18) Alonopsis, G. O. Sars, 1862.
26. Alonopsis elongata, G. O. Sars.

1862. Alonopsis elongata, G. O. Sars, Forh. i Vidensk. Selsk. i
Christiania, 1861 (Aftr.), p. 53.

Halbitat.—Moderately common in several of the larger

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 183

lakes throughout the district. I have no record of it from
the loch at Duddingston or from any locality in the vicinity
of Edinburgh except Marfield Loch, where it was obtained
by Dr and Miss Sprague, and in the Union Canal by myself.

Genus (19) Alona, Baird, 1843.
27. Alona quadrangularis (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Lynceus quadrangularis, O. F. Miller, Zool. Dan. Prodr.,
p- 199, No. 2393.

1895. Alona costata, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 189, pl. v. figs. 2 and 12.

Habitat—Loch Achray, Loch Leven, Duddingston Loch,

etc. This species appears to be generally distributed and
moderately frequent throughout the district.

28. Alona affinis, Leydig.

1860. Alona affinis, Leydig, Naturgesch. d. Daphniden, p. 223,
pl. ix. figs. 68, 69.
SIG: thy, quadrangularis, 'T. Scott, loc. cit., p. 1895, pl. v.
figsz 2 hielo 5. and: 2b:
Habitat.— Distribution somewhat similar to that of A.
quadranqgularts.

29. Alona tenwicaudis, G. O. Sars.

1862. Alona tenwicaudis, G. O. Sars, loc. cit., p. 37.

Habitat.— Camilla Loch, Fifeshire, 1894, not uncommon ;
Duddingston Loch, frequent, Ist September 1897, but when
this loch was visited three months later the species was not
so common. No specimens were observed on 2nd March,
but it was again of frequent occurrence in a shore-gathering
collected on 15th June 1898. Drand Miss Sprague found
A. tenwicaudis rare in Duddingston Loch on 18th August
1900.

30. Alona costata, G. O. Sars.
1862. Alona costata, G. O. Sars, loc. cit., p. 38.
Habitat—Upper Elf Loch, and ditch near Harelaw Dam,

184 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

in the vicinity of Edinburgh; Lochgelly Loch; not
uncommon.

31. Alona guttata, G. O. Sars.

1862. Alona guttata, G. O. Sars, loc. cit., p. 39.
HE GG | a5. as T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 190,
pl. v. figs. 6 and 16.
Habitat.—Camilla Loch, Loch Leven, Loch Achray, and
Upper Elf Loch. Duddingston Loch (Dr and Miss Sprague).

32. Alona intermedia, G. O. Sars.

1862. Alona intermedia, G. O. Sars, loc. cit., p. 38.
11895. ,, neglecta, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p-. 189, pl. v. figs. 4 and 18.

Habitat—Loch Katrine and Loch Achray. This species,
which does not appear to be very rare, was described in 1895
from specimens found in some Shetland lochs. It has not
yet been recorded from England or Ireland.

33. Alona rustica, T. Scott.
1895. Alona rustica, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p. 189, pl. v. figs. 5 and 17.
Habitat.—Loch Achray. This appears to be a widely
distributed though somewhat local species. It was first

observed in samples of Entomostraca sent to me from
Shetland by Robert Duthie, Fishery Officer.

34. Alona rostrata (Koch).

1841. Lynceus rostratus, Koch, Deutschlands Crustacean, Heft. 36,
pl. 12.

1901-1902. Alonella rostrata, Dr and Miss Sprague, Trans. Edin.
Field Nat. and Micros. Soc., vol. iv. pp. 259 and 321.

Habitat.—Cobbinshaw Reservoir, 13th August 1900; rare
(Dr and Miss Sprague).

1The Alona intermedia recorded from Shetland in the Thirteenth F. B.
Report is not Sars’ species of that name, but the Alona rectangula of G. O. Sars.
I have no record for this species from the Forth basin, but as it is not rare,
especially in ponds and marshy places near the sea, it may yet be found in
the district.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 185

Genus (20) Rhynchotalona, Norman, 1903.

(Syn.—Leptorhynchus, Herrick, and Harporhynchus, G. O.
Sars, both of which names are preoccupied. )

30. Rhynchotalona falcata (G. O. Sars).

1861. Alona falcata, G. O. Sars, Forhand]. i Vidensk, i Christiania,
1861 (Aftr.), p. 20.

Habitat.—Loch Katrine and Loch Achray; not common.

Genus (21) Ledigia, Kurz.
06. Ledigia quadrangularis (Leydig).

1860. Lynceus quadrangularis, Leydig, Naturges. der Daphnid.,
p. 221, pl. vii. fig. 59.

1891. Ledigia quadrangularis, T. Scott, Ninth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 292, pl. vi. figs. 5, 5a and b.

Habitat.—Lochgelly Loch, Fifeshire. It may be of
interest to recall the fact that the record of this species in
the Fishery Board’s Report mentioned above was the first for
Britain.

Genus (22) Graptoleberis, G. O. Sars, 1862.
37. Graptoleberis testudinarius (Fischer).

1851. Lynceus testudinarius, Fischer, Mem, des Sar étrangers,
St Petersburg, vol. vi. p. 191, pl. ix. fig. 12.

Habitat—Lochend Loch, 1894; Upper Elf Loch, Braid
Hills, 1896 and 1897, where it was also obtained in August
1901 by Dr and Miss Sprague.

Genus (23) Alonella, G. O. Sars, 1862.
38. Alonella excisa (Fischer).

1854. Lynceus excisus, Fischer, Bull. Soc. Impér.. d. Nat. d.
Moscow (1854), p. 428, pl. iii. figs. 11-14.

_ Habitat—Loch Leven, frequent. Loch Katrine, Loch
Achray, Loch Vennachar, and Loch Lubnaig. Marfield Loch,

186 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

9th April 1901 (Dr and Miss Sprague). As Alonella excisa
(Fischer) and A. exigua (Lilljeborg) are retained by Lilljeborg
as distinct species, and as the Scottish specimens I have
examined belong to Fischer’s LZ. excisus, that name is used
here (see remarks in Seventeenth F. B. Rept., pt. 1. p. 201).

39. Alonella nana (Baird).

1843. Acroperus nanus, Baird, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. ii.
p. 92; pl. iio. 3.

Habitat.—Upper Elf Loch, Raith Lake, Loch Leven,
Loch Katrine, Loch Achray. Marfield Loch (Dr and Miss
Sprague).

Genus (24) Peratacantha, Baird, 1843.
40. Peratacantha truncata, O. F. Miiller.

1785. Lynceus truncatus, Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 75, pl. xi.
figs. 4-8.

Habitat.—Lochgelly Loch, Loch Katrine, Loch Achray,
Loch Vennachar, and Loch Lubnaig. High Pond, Penicuik,
7th September 1901; rare (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (25) Pleuroxus, Baird, 1843.

41. Pleuroxus levis, G. O. Sars.

1861. Plewroxus levis, G. O. Sars, Forh. i Vid. Selsk. i Christiania,
1861 (Aftr.), p. 22.

Habitat.—Camilla Loch, Fifeshire ; not common.

42. Plewroxus trigonellus (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Lynceus trigonellus, Mill., Entomostraca, p. 74, pl. x. figs. 5, 6.
Habitat—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Raith Lake,
Loch Katrine, Loch Achray. Marfield Loch (Dr and Miss
Sprague).

43. Pleuroxus uncinatus, Baird.

1850. Pleuroxus wneinatus, Baird, Brit. Entomostraca, p. 135,
pl. xvii. fig. 4.

Habitat.—Raith Lake and Loch Leven.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 187

Genus (26) Chydorus, Leach, 1816.

44, Chydorus globosus, Baird.
1850. Chydorus globosus, Baird, Brit. Entomostraca, p. 127, pl. xvi.
fig, 7.
Habitat—Loch Achray. Dr and Miss Sprague collected
this fine species in an old quarry in Dalmeny grounds, close
to the river Almond, on 6th September 1901.

45. Chydorus ovalis, Kurz.

1874. Chydorus ovalis, Kurz, Dodekas neuer Cladoc., p. 73, pl. iii.
fig. 11.

Habitat—A few specimens of a Chydorus, which agree
with the description of C. ovalis given by Professor Lilljeborg
in his important work on the Swedish Cladocera, were
obtained in Linlithgow Loch in October 1896 and in Loch
Leven in June 1898.

46. Chydorus latus, G. O. Sars.
1862. Chydorus latus, G. O. Sars, Vid. Selsk. 1 Christiania Forh.,
1861 (Aftr:), p. 41.
Hlabitat.—Loch Achray, frequent in March 1898, but this

was the only time it was observed during my four visits to
this loch.

47. Chydorus barbatus (G. 8S. Brady).
1868. Lynceus barbatus, Brady, Intellectual Observer, 1868.

Halbitat.—This Chydorus appears to be moderately frequent
in some of the lochs and ponds within the district under
consideration, as Loch Leven, Loch Lubnaig, Loch Katrine,
Loch Achray, etc. As remarked by Mr Scourfield, “the
ventral shell margin is in this species densely fringed with
long plumose setze, hence the name C. barbatus.”

48. Chydorus sphericus (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Lynceus sphericus, O. F. Miller, Entomostraca, p. 71,
No. 2932.
Habitat—Common and generally distributed. C. celatus,
Schoedler, is, according to Professor Lilljeborg, a variety of
C’. sphericus.

188 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (27) Monospilus, G. O. Sars, 1861.

49, Monospilus dispar, G. O. Sars.

1861. Monospilus dispar, G. O. Sars, Vid. Selsk. i Christiania
Forhandl., 1861, p. 23.

1891. an tenuirostris (Fischer), T. Scott, Ninth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ill. pp. 272 and 295, pl. v. fig. 1.

Habitat.—Loch Leven, 1890; Loch Achray, November
1897; rare.

Division GYMNOMERA.
Tribe OnycHopopa, G. O. Sars.
Family POLYPHEMID&.
Genus (28) Polyphemus, O. F. Miiller, 1776.
50. Polyphemus pediculus, Linne.

1761. Monoculus pediculus, Linn., Fauna Suecica, p. 498, No. 2048.

Habitat—Loch Leven, 1890; Loch Lubnaig, 1894; Loch
Vennachar, Raith Lake.

Genus (29) Bythotrephes, Leydig, 1860.
51. Bythotrephes longimanus, Leydig.

1860. Bythotrephes longimanus, Leydig, Naturges. der Daphniden,
p. 244, pl. x. figs. 73-75.

Habitat—Loch Leven, 1890; Loch Vennachar (1895),
Loch Katrine, and Loch Achray. Not uncommon in the
larger lochs.

Genus (30) Podon, Lilljeborg, 1853.
(The members of this genus and the next are marine.)

52. Podon Leuckartt, G. O. Sars.

1862. Pleopis leuckarti, G. O. Sars, Forhandl. i Vidensk. Selsk. i
Christiania, 1861, p. 45.

1902. i. - T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p. 476, pl. xxv. figs. 23 and 24,

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, occasionally frequent, especially

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 189

in the seaward part of the estuary. The Podon polyphemoides
recorded in Part III. of the Minth Annual Report of the
Fishery Board for Scotland, p. 308 (1891), is probably this
species, as no Forth specimens of P. polyphemoides are now
in my collection.

Genus (31) Evadne, S. Loven, 1836.

53. EHvadne Nordmanni, Loven.

1836. Hvadne nordmanni, Loven, K. Wetensk.-Akad. Handl., 1835,
p- 1, pls. i. and ii. figs. 1-16.

Habitat.—Firth of Forth, usually moderately common.

Tribe Haptopopa, G. O. Sars.
Family LEPTODORIDA, Lilljeborg.
Genus (32) Leptodora, Lilljeborg, 1861.
54. Leptodora Kindti (Focke).

1844. Polyphemus kindtii, Focke, Sonntagshlatt. der Weser-Zeitung,
No. 34, p. 6.

1861. Leptodora hyalina, Lillj., Ofversigt af K. Vet.-Akad, Forhandl.,
1860, No. 5, p. 265, taf. vii. figs. 1-22.

Habitat—Loch Leven, June 1890, frequent in the open
water; common on 3rd September 1897, but no specimens
were obtained in December of the same year, nor in the
months of March and June of 1898. A few specimens were
captured in September 1897 in Loch Katrine, but none in
November; in 1898 none were taken in March, while in
June, though none were observed at the upper end of the
loch, the species was moderately frequent at the lower end.
The only other lake within the limits of the district from
which I have notes of Leptodora is Loch Achray; it was
found sparingly here on 10th September 1897, but no
specimens were observed when the loch was visited in
November ; neither were any specimens observed when the
loch was examined on the 17th of March and the 28th of
June 1898.

190 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

In Professor Lilljeborg’s work on the Cladocera of Sweden,
38 genera are described; 32 of them are represented in the
preceding list. The 6 not represented are as follows :—

1. Limnosida, G. O. Sars. 4. Bunops, Kk. A. Birge.
2. Moina, W. Baird. 5. Streblocerus, G. O. Sars.
3. Ophryoxus, G. O. Sars. 6. Anchistropus, G. O. Sars.

Three of these—Ophryoxus gracilis, G. O. Sars, Streblocerus
serricaudatus (Fischer), and Anchistropus emarginatus, G. O.
Sars, have been obtained in Scotland. The first was dis-
covered by Mr D. J. Scourfield in Loch Ness, and in a back-
water of the Caledonian Canal at Coiltry Lock. The second
I found in the Dhu Lochan—a small loch close to Loch
Lomond, and about two miles south of Rowardennan. The
third was taken by the late Dr Robertson, of Millport, in
1863, in the Paisley Canal (since filled up), and has occurred
more recently in Ireland, and at one or two places in England.

Moina—all three species—has been recorded from England,
but not from Scotland, and there does not appear to be any
British record for the other two. But though the genera are
so well represented, our list comes far short in the matter
of species. Lilljeborg describes about 100 species from
Sweden, besides numerous varieties, whereas our record
amounts only to 54. It is thus apparent that further research
is necessary, and will doubtless be rewarded.

Suborder Branchiura.
Family ARGULIDA, Leach, 1819.
Genus (1) ‘Argulus, O. F. Miiller, 1781.

1. Argulus folraceus (Linn.).

1785. Monoculus foliaceus, Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. x., p. 634, No. 2.
1850, Argulus foliaceus, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 255, pl. xxxi.
hesah, 2:

Habitat.—Found attached to a specimen of the Three-
spined Stickleback (Gasterosteus aculeatus), and also free
amonest Anacharis in the Union Canal, near Edinburgh,
by Mrs Janet Carphin, on 26th August 1895.'

1 Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., No. 16, October 1895, p. 255. -

Pi
ine a

445 |
PROCEEDINGS

OF THE ;

he . OR THE

PROMOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHES OF
NATURAL HISTORY.

SESSION 1905-1906.

No. 5. 1 Vou XVI. PAGES. 191-230.

CONTENTS.

The Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes, and its Bearing pyon
_ Vertebrate Morphology. By J. GrRauAm Kerr, . : ‘ . Ode

PAGE

The Baelloid Rotifera of the Forth Areas. By JAmMes Murray. — [Plate

Es SES SP OR Mee eS * Sten a a ear eM

The Higher Crustacea of the Scottish Carboniferous Rocks Spe
By B. N. Peacu, Esq., Tg Bey “ERP See ; : : : . .230

fa ak

EDINBURGH: M* FARLANE ‘& ERSKINE.
Marcu 1906.

PRICE S00 7 Hie SP ROCHE DUNG

Vol. I, Part 1 (1854-56), owt of print, . i 2) alate
: 1h 17/6
Do. Part 2 (1856-58), out of print, . : =» LOY
Vol. II. Part 1 (1858-61), out of print, . : . oy
. mio x 15
Do. Part 2 (1861-62), owt of print, . aoe }
Vol. III. Part 1 (1862-63), out of print, . : a)
Do. Part 2 (1863-64), owt of print, . mer | | 20)
Do. Part 3 (1864-65), out of print, . : <a \ )
Do. Part 4 (1865-66), out of print, 5/ |

To the Fellows. To the Public.

Vol. IV. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print,

Do. Part 2 (1875-76), out of print, . 3/6 5/

Do. Part 3 (1876-78), owt of print, . 5/ 7/6
Vol. VV. Part 1 (1878-79), Je eae 5/

Do. Part 2 (1879-80), : : 7/6 10/
Vole. ve (1880-81), oe AO 10/

Title and Index of this Vol. issued
with Part 1, Vol. VII.

Vol. VII. Part 1 (1881-82), ; Sana 5/
Do. Part 2 (1882-83), . 2/6 3/6
Vol. VIII. Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print, . 7/6 10/
Do. Part 2 (1884-85), : -.. 6 10/
Vol. IX. Part 1 (1885-86), : = 1), 12/6
Do. Part 2 (1886-87), : ONG |
Do. Part 3 (1887-88), : . 4/6 6/
Vol, X; Part, 1 (1888-89), 5/ 7/
Do. Part 2 (1889-90), 10/ 12/6
Vol. XI. Part 1 (1890-91), 5/ 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1891-92), 5/ 6/6
Vol. XII. Part 1 (1892-93), 5/ 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1893-94), 12/6 15/
Vol. XIII. Part 1 (1894-95), 4/6 6/
Do. Part 2 (1895-96), 5/ 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1896-97), 6/ 7/6
Vol. XIV. Part 1 (1897-98), 5/ 6/6
Do, Part 2 (1898-99), : : 5/ 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1899-1900), : ; 3/6 5/
Do. Part 4 (1900-1901), ; 3/6 5/
Vol. XV. Part 1 (1901-1902), [oie 5/
Do. Part 2 (1902-1904), We) 3) 5 5/
Vol. XVI. No. 1 (Pages 1-24), ; 1/ 1/3
Do. No. 2 (Pages 25-48), . ; 1/6 2/
Do. No. 3 (Pages 49-96), . é 2/ 2/6
Do. No. 4 (Pages 97-190), . j 2/6 3/6
Do. No. 5 (Pages-191-230), . : 2] 2/6
The following may also be had of the Librarian:
Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL., ; |
Do. do. Voll VL. Part 1 * ier nei)
Forms of Application for Fellowshin mau be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, , ; : 10/6

Annual Subscription, : ; : 12/6

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 191

XV. The Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes, and tts
Bearing upon Vertebrate Morphology. By J. GRAHAM
KERR. 4

(Read 27th February 1905.)
INTRODUCTION.

The worker who takes up seriously the study of Vertebrate
Morphology cannot, as it seems to me, avoid being much
impressed by certain limitations to which one important
side of his subject—the embryological side—is subjected.
These limitations are due to the fact that the foundations
of the science of embryology have been laid, not on the
comparison with one another of the developmental pheno-
mena shown by the more lowly organised vertebrates, but
on the features of development as they occur in a few easily
accessible and easily investigated forms—the chick, the
rabbit, the selachian, and, to a much less extent, the
frog. The first three of these—and they have played by
far the greater part in building up the science of embryology
—are all of them forms in which there is present, or appears
to have been present in the ancestral forms, an enormous
mass of food-yolk, which cannot have been without a
marked distorting influence on the course of development.

Considerations of this kind led the author some years
ago to devote himself to a study of the development of
certain of the lower forms of vertebrates ; and, in the present
communication, it is proposed to draw the attention of the
Society to some of the embryological features of these forms,
which may be regarded as having a bearing upon the general
morphology of the Vertebrata.

The work has been carried out upon the Dipnoans, Lepido-
suren and Protopterus, with Ceratodus and various Uvrodeles
for comparison, and more recently on the Crossopterygian
ganoid Poliypterus.1

1 Owing to the lamented death of my friend Budgett. A detailed account
of the development of Polypterus will be found in the forthcoming Budgett
Memorial Volume.

VOL. XVI. S

192 Proceedings of' the Royal Physical Society.

GASTRULATION, -

The process of gastrulation in the forms under considera-
tion is of interest, as affording links between the types of
gastrulation familiar in other Anamnia. In Polypterus the
process, so far as is possible to judge from the meagre
material available, shows characters which, while resembling
those found in Amphibians, have not advanced quite so far
along the path of specialisation from the primitive mode
of gastrulation found at the present time in Amphioxus
alone amongst vertebrates. In Lepidosirén, on the other
hand, the mode of gastrulation, while again resembling the
process as met with in the Amphibia, shows a decided
advance towards the type of gastrulation found in the
Elasmobranch.

POLYPTERUS.

The earliest stage known in the process of invagination is
one where a sharply-marked groove extends about half-way
round the equator of the egg. In a later stage, the groove
forms a complete circle about 50 degrees from the lower
pole. The diminution in radius of curvature, and the still
circular form of the curve, probably indicate that the line
of invagination has been advancing downwards towards the
lower pole at an equal rate at all parts of its extent. The
specially characteristic feature at this stage is the enormous
unpigmented yolk-plug, sharply marked off by the deep
and wide groove from the remaining pigmented part of the
egg surface. In this stage we see a transitional condition
between that found in Amphiouvus, where the line of invagi-
nation forms a complete closed curve while still nearly
equatorial in position, and that characteristic of the
Amphibian, where it is completed only at a much later
stage, when it has advanced much farther over the egg
surface, and had its radius of curvature greatly reduced.
“In these modifications of the gastrulation process we prob-
ably have to do with a postponement of the process caused
directly by the increased quantity of yolk. In Amphiozus,

Embryology of certain of the Lower Lishes. 193
the main part (A) of the gastrulation process consists of the
tucking in of the hypoblastic part of the blastula wall; it is
only in its latest stages (B) that it consists in an onward move-
ment of the blastopore lip. In Polypterws and Amphibians,
owing to the enormous thickening of the hypoblast due
to its storage of yolk, the process A is rendered mechanically
impossible until in the latest stage of gastrulation, when the
blastopore lip has already been carried almost completely
over the mass of yolk. In the stage in Polypterus of which
I have been speaking, we see in the deep groove round the
huge yolk-plug the attempt on the part of the egg to carry
out the gastrulation process in the ancestral way.

LEPIDOSIREN.

The method of gastrulation is shown in my previous
papers. The process begins with the appearance of a
shallow latitudinal groove running round about one-third of
the circumference of the egg at its latitude. This groove
gradually shortens up, its terminal parts flattening out. It
is only in its central portion that the groove deepens and
gives rise to the archenteron of the gastrula. In Polypterus
we have seen that the invagination groove still becomes a
closed curve at an early stage in gastrulation, and in the
Amphibian usually only at a much later stage. In Lepidosiren
the curve never becomes closed at all, its terminal parts
disappearing. Finally, in the Elasmobranch, the only part
of the invagination curve which ever appears is the central
part, which gives rise to the archenteron.

PRIMITIVE ARRANGEMENT OF THE CELL LAYERS.

There do not appear to exist in the data of vertebrate
embryology, as known to us at present, any distinct traces
of the descent of this phylum from any other phylum of
triploblastic Metazoa, though there are various morphological
considerations which make it seem probable that vertebrates,

1 Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., vol. 192, B; and Quart. Jour. Micros. Sei.,
vol, 45.

194 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

annelids, arthropods, and molluscs are offshoots of a common
triploblastic stem. On the other hand, there are various
points in the ontogeny of various vertebrates which, so far,
seem explicable only on the hypothesis of a coelenterate-like
ancestor, possessing some of the main features of existing
Actinozoa. Most important amongst these are the apparent
traces of a once present slit-like protostoma or primitive
mouth, forming a continuation of the blastopore forwards
along the mid line of the medullary plate. Associated with
this is the fact that in various vertebrates the blastopore
persists as the definitive anus, and that in some, ¢.g., Lepido-
siren, the primitive nerve rudiment is continued posteriorly
behind the anus. The only working hypothesis which fits
in with these facts is that we are dealing with the vestiges
of a condition of things resembling what we find in the
modern Actinian, with its slit-like mouth dilated at either
end into an inhalent and an exhalent opening, and sur-
rounded by a specially condensed part of the general nerve
plexus.

I have shown elsewhere! how, in my opinion, the method
of mesoderm formation in the higher vertebrates can be con-
nected up by a series of links with the method of formation
in Amphioxus, where the mesoderm arises in the form of
archenteric or coelenteric diverticula, which are, of course,
directly comparable with those of the Actinian.

Considerable confusion of thought has been introduced
into vertebrate morphology by the loose way in which the
word “outgrowth” is used; the optic rudiment is frequently
described as an “outgrowth” from the thalamencephalon, the
mesodermal rudiments as “outgrowths” from the gut-wall.
As a matter of fact, it would be more accurate to describe
these structures as being formed rather by being tucked off
from the neighbouring parts of the brain or gut-wall. This
is important in connection with the question of the exist-
ence from the beginning of the nervous connection between
central nervous rudiment and myotome, for we see that the
nervous bridge in the earliest stage at which I was able to
determine its existence in Lepidosiren, connects two points

1 Quart. Jour. Micros. Sci., vol. 45, p. 34.

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 195

which are primitively in close proximity. The motor nerve
trunks, in fact, are merely the much, enlarged portions of
an originally diffuse nervous network which connect up
two once adjoining regions of the original epithelial wall—
continuous from ectoderm through protostoma to endoderm
—which have become specialised to form central nervous and
muscular systems.

EXTERNAL GILLS.

A set of organs which have proved to be of much interest
in the development of those forms with which I have con-
cerned myself are the external or dermal gills.

The importance of these structures has been, in my
opinion, by no means properly appreciated by morphologists.
This is not surprising when we consider that among the more
accessible vertebrates they occur in only one group—that of
the Amphibia. The researches of recent years have shown
that they are also highly conspicuous features in the develop-
ment of both existing Crossopterygians and of two out of
the three surviving Dipnoans; and a study of their develop-
ment in the three groups in which they occur leads me to
believe that they are by no means to be lightly dismissed as
mere recent adaptations to a larval existence, evolved in-
dependently in the three groups, but that, on the contrary, we
have in them truly homologous structures, and consequently
structures of great antiquity in the evolution of the verte-
brate phylum.

Typically, an external gill forms a conspicuous projection—
carrying lateral branches, often arranged in a pinnate manner
—from the side of the body in the region of the visceral arches.
The lateral branches have a rich development of superficial
capillaries, whose blood supply is carried by a conspicuous
afferent and an efferent vessel running along the interior of
the organ. The external gill is provided with voluntary
muscles. By means of these muscles the external gills can
be twitched actively at the will of the animal, so as to renew
the water which bathes their surface.

' Each external gill originally forms a projection from a
visceral arch, in the broad sense, 7.¢., from the mass of tissue

196 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

lying between two visceral clefts, and in existing vertebrates
the distribution of external gills is as follows :—

Visceral Arch.

| | |
Crossopterygii x | | |
|
| |
Dipnoi | x x x ae
| Urodela | “nei Miestico |. wX/\ |. eX geelaae
| | Vestigial.? |

ONTOGENETIC DEVELOPMENT.

In ontogeny the development of the external gills follows
the same lines in all three groups—Crossopterygul, Dipnoi,
and Urodela. The external gill makes its first appearance
as a rounded elevation of the surface of the body, consisting
of mesoderm covered by ectoderm, and situated between the
positions where two visceral clefts will appear later. The
external gill rudiment appears long before the clefts are
perforated. The hypoblastic walls of the gill outgrowths
of the pharyngeal wall are sharply distinguishable . from
the ectoderm by their cells being packed with large yolk
granules. There can be no possibility of hypoblast entering
in any way into the formation of the external gills, which
are purely dermal outgrowths covered with ectoderm.

The external gill rudiment comes to project more and more
freely above the general surface, and presently it develops
its characteristic relation to the vascular system, as described
long ago by Boas. The main aortic arch passes right out
into the external gill, looping back at-its tip. The aortic

1 Of. Driiner, Zool. Jahrb. Anat., Bd. 19, s, 434,

Hmbryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 197

arch in its early stages is, in fact, the vessel of the external
gill, This relation of aortic arch to external gill constitutes,
to my mind, a weighty piece of morphological evidence of
the archaic nature of these organs. |

PHYLOGENETIC DEVELOPMENT,

Palaeontology so far has afforded next to no evidence
regarding external gills in the more ancient vertebrates.
This is not surprising when we bear in mind (1) that until
their morphological importance is appreciated, palaeonto-
logists are not likely to direct any special attention to the
search for traces of them, and (2) that external gills, com-
posed almost or quite entirely of soft tissue, would not be
likely to leave any conspicuous traces behind them.

In this connection it is of interest to note, however, that
there is already some evidence to indicate that external
gills have in at least certain cases possessed a supporting
skeleton, eg., in Dolichosoma, Fritsch! found remains of an
extensive skeleton projecting from the branchial region, and
which can only be explained on the supposition that it
served as a support for large external gills. Along with
this evidence of palaeontology, we have the fact discovered
by Budgett,? that in the young larval Polypterus there
is a segmented rod of cartilage projecting from the hyoid
arch, and serving to support the base of the external gill. |

EVOLUTION OF ORGANS OF RESPIRATION.

It is one of the fundamental characters of living
substance, that it needs to carry on respiratory exchanges
with the surrounding medium. The process of life is to a
certain extent a process of slow combustion, and, like any
other combustion, it needs a supply of oxygen to enable it to
goon. As in other forms of combustion, carbon dioxide is
produced, a substance unfavourable to the combustion
process, and which actually stops that process if it is
allowed to accumulate. In any piece of living substance
then, these respiratory exchanges take place between it and
the fluid medium in contact with it—for lhving protoplasm

1 Fauna Gaskohl., Bd. Il. s. 114.
2 Trans, Zool. Soc. Lond., vol. xvi. p. 32 .

198 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

must always be in contact with fluid. In the lower forms
of animal life the habitat is aquatic, and the medium with
which the respiratory exchange takes place is the water.
The more complex animals, on the other hand, are charac-
terised by increase in bulk, so that their inner portions are
far away from the outer medium. In these we find that
watery fluid is formed in the interior of the creature, filling
chinks or more or less regular cavities. It is with this
internal fluid—this internal medium, as it has been aptly
termed—that respiratory change now takes place. There
will obviously be a tendency for the internal medium soon
to be robbed of all its available oxygen, and to become
loaded with carbon dioxide, so as to be useless for respiration.
To avoid this, we find (1) that a mechanism arises by which
the internal fluid is pumped along so as to circulate through
its series of chinks, in other words, a blood vascular system
arises; and (2) in one or more regions a highly vascular
surface is formed, which comes into intimate relation with the
external medium, the respiratory organ in the ordinary sense.
There is now a definite blood vascular system, and one, or
more than one, definite organ of respiration.

It is clear that the actual process of respiration is of a
double nature. There is, firstly, what we may call tissue
respiration, consisting of the respiratory exchanges between
the living substance of the tissues and the blood; and
secondly, the respiratory exchanges, that take place between
the blood and the external medium. It is with the latter
of these two that what we ordinarily understand by respir-
atory organs have to do, and it is my purpose in this section
to trace what we may consider the most probable course of
the evolution of such organs amongst the Vertebrata.

It may be assumed, to commence with, that the primitive
potential respiratory organs in vertebrates, or any other of
the more complicated Metazoa, are two in number—(1) the
skin, and (2) that part of the original outer surface which
has been tucked into the interior of the body to form the
alimentary canal. In each we have a more or less richly
vascular surface, which is brought into intimate relations
with the external medium as a whole, or with isolated

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. ree

portions of it taken into the gut. From these two primitive
breathing organs are developed the specialised breathing
organs which are so characteristic of the subgroups of the
Vertebrata.

The general surface of the skin is the great original organ
of respiration. In groups where it still carries on this
function, we find very usually that the function becomes
accentuated locally. Special portions of the skin become
specially vascular, and then they tend to increase in area
so as to increase the respiratory surface. In this way we
find involutions of skin into interior of body, as, eg., in
trachez of insects, or we find projections developed from
the surface forming dermal gills, ¢.g., molluscs, chetopods.

In the lower vertebrate, probably in correlation with
increase in thickness, and more especially with the develop-
ment of a placoid dermal skeleton, the skin generally seems
to have lost its great respiratory significance, but there exist
in some of the most primitive vertebrates structures which
appear to represent ancient dermal gills. These structures
are the external gills mentioned already as occurring in the
young of Crossopterygians, Dipnoans, and Amphibians.

The more usual view that these external gills are second-
arily developed structures of no phylogenetic importance
seems to be negatived—(1) by their very early appearance in
ontogeny ; (2) by the importance of their blood supply—the
main aortic arch passing into them; (3) and by the remark-
able constancy of their position in relation to the upper
end of the visceral arch.

There is one obvious and strong argument against the
archaic nature of the external gills, and that is the fact
of their absence in certain of the admittedly primitive groups,
e.g., the Elasmobranchii. There are two considerations which
seem to me to diminish the weight of this objection. We
know that external gills are remarkably liable to injury
through disease or enemies. Apart from this being known
from observation, it is implied in the remarkable powers of
regeneration shown by these organs. They would therefore
tend to disappear in evolution if their function were taken
on by other organs.

200 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Further, as I have pointed out elsewhere) many of the
groups without external gills are those which possess a yolk-
sac with highly vascular surface, which must itself act as
a highly efficient respiratory organ, in addition to its nutritive
function. It is quite to be expected in such a case that
external gills, with their purely respiratory function, should
disappear.

We see, then, that there is nothing improbable in the
disappearance of external gills. On the other hand, it .
appears to me most ‘unlikely that they should have developed
independently in the three groups in which they occur.
They show a remarkable similarity—not a superficial re-
semblance, but a deep-seated resemblance—in their funda-
mental characters. They are situated in the same relation to
their visceral arches: the aortic arch passes out into them in
exactly the same way.

ENTERIC ORGANS OF RESPIRATION.

In a few cases, the general enteric lining plays an important
part in respiration, ¢g., in some of the loaches this is the
case. The gut lining is very highly vascular, and the living
fish is seen at intervals to swallow bubbles of air; if not
allowed to do this, the fish dies. Again, in the Siluroid
Callichthys, water is taken in periodically to the posterior
part of the intestine, which acts as an organ of respiration.

It is, however, normally in the region of the pharynx that
we find respiratory activity specially concentrated. We find
in this region the series of gill-clefts with their respiratory
walls, their surface increased by the development of the
highly vascular lamella. We are still in complete obscurity
regarding the phylogeny of the gill-clefts. In ontogeny
they arise as a series of pockets or pouches of the
pharyngeal wall, which secondarily fuse at their tips with
the ectoderm, and open to the exterior. Now the great
question to be answered regarding their phylogeny, and one
to which we cannot as yet find any certain answer, is, Were
the gill-clefts in their early functional stages pouches or clefts?

1 Proc, Camb. Phil, Soc., vol. ¥. ~. 233.

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 201

If the former, we should probably conclude that their function
was from the beginning a simple respiratory one ; they would
be looked on simply as local enlargements and outgrowths
of the primitively respiratory gut surface, which finally
developed an opening to the exterior, connected with the
causing a more perfect flow of water over the respiratory
surface. If, on the other hand, they first acquired their
directly respiratory surface as clefts, then we must assume
that in their first beginnings they had some other function.
Now, I think it is not impossible that such a significance
may be found in connection with the external gills. For the
functioning of the external gills, it is essential that the water
over their surface should undergo frequent renewal. _ It seems
perfectly possible that the clefts should have developed in
relation to this need; supplies of fresh water being pumped
through them over the external gills. Were this view shown
to be correct, we should regard the direct respiratory activity
of the walls of the clefts as secondarily acquired—most prob-
ably by the spreading inwards of respiratory ectodermal
epithelium along the walls of the clefts. What looks very
like such a spreading inwards of ectoderm to form the
respiratory lining of the gill-cleft, may be seen in the
ontogeny of various water-breathing vertebrates.

Then finally, in connection with the pharynx, we have
the swim-bladder and lungs. In development, each of
these arises as an outgrowth of the pharyngeal wall: in the
case of the lungs, a medioventral outgrowth; in the case of
the swim-bladder, of a Teleost, mediodorsal. The question of
the homology of the swim-bladder and lungs has been much
discussed. The knowledge which we now possess appears
to render quite untenable the position of those who dispute
the homology of the two organs in at least certain groups.
In the case of Crossopterygians and Dipnoans, the swim-
bladder arises exactly as do typical lungs, and in the adult
condition the blood supply is identical. In this case it
would seem impossible to doubt the homology. Wieders-
heim recently found in Lepidosiren a mediodorsal groove
on the pharyngeal wall, which he interpreted as a last
vestige of a true dorsal swim-bladder: the fact, however,

202 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

that this groove appears only late in development is against
its morphological significance.

The problem is more difficult as regards the swim-bladder
of Actinopterygians. This is throughout dorsal in relation
to gut: its blood supply is derived from the dorsal aorta. It
is, however, important to notice that in a considerable number
of Teleosts—e.g., Hrythrinus—and other Characinids, the open-
ing of the swim-bladder is lateral, and that in many Teleosts
the first rudiment is not exactly median. These are indica-
tions of transitional conditions, and suggest that a wandering
round the gut has taken place. Important evidence bearing
on this question is afforded by the manner in which the
organ is supplied with blood. In the typical lung, and also
in the “swim-bladder” in Dipnoans and Crossopterygians,
the blood is supplied by means of a pulmonary artery on
each side, arising from the sixth aortic arch. In the case of
the typical Actinopterygian, on the other hand, the blood
supply of the swim-bladder is derived from branches of the
coeliac artery and branches of the dorsal aorta situated
posterior to this, an apparently fundamentally different
arrangement. Now, as we know that the swim-bladder
arises as a small localised rudiment from the pharyngeal
wall, and grows back secondarily, any blood supply derived
from farther back branches of the dorsal aorta, and
particularly any blood supply whose vessels arise over
a considerable antero-posterior extent of the dorsal aorta,
must be looked on as secondary. That this is so, and that
the blood supply of the swim-bladder was primitively the
same as that of the typical lung, is indicated further by the
fact that. in at least one Actinopterygian, Amza, such a blood
supply is still retained.

Upon the whole, the view that seems most tenable regarding
the phylogeny of lung and swim-bladder is this :—

1. It arose as a median ventral diverticulum.

We must conclude this from its always arising in this posi-
tion in ontogeny, except in the specialised Actinopterygians.

2. Its ventral position renders it probable that the
structure functioned at first as a lung rather than as a
hydrostatic organ, and this is supported by the fact that in

Limbryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 203

the lowest fishes where it exists (Crossopterygians, Dipnoans)
it does act as a lung.

3. With the adoption of a deep-water habitat, the lung
began to function mainly as a hydrostatic organ, and,
associated with this, its connection with the pharynx
migrated to the mid-dorsal line. An important clue to how
this migration may have taken place is given by the Dipnoi.
In them the glottis is ventral, but the pneumatic duct
passes up round the right side of the pharynx, the lung
being situated dorsally. This dorsal position of a lung which
has not yet lost its original undivided character is rendered
practically necessary by the aquatic existence in which the
lung, besides its primary respiratory function, necessarily
exerts a secondary hydrostatic function. When once the
lung itself had become dorsal in position, it would seem
only natural that the glottis should then gradually migrate
dorsad so as to make the communication between lung and
pharynx as direct and uncomplicated as possible.

THE ORIGIN OF THE LIMBS OF VERTEBRATES.

Before leaving the subject of external gills, a few words
may be said in regard to their possible connection with the
origin of the limbs of vertebrates. I may say that with
more extensive knowledge of the development of external
gills and of limbs, I see no reason to give up or to modify
my opinion that the only feasible working hypothesis of the
origin of limbs is that which derives them from external gills.
The guiding principle in all speculations as to the origin of
new organs must be that a pre-existing organ, with a different
dominant function, must be found, out of which, by modifica-
tion in structure and function, the new organ may have been
evolved. In the case of the limb, the pre-existing organ
must have possessed two qualifications—(1) it must have
projected beyond the general surface, and (2) it must have
been movable by means of voluntary muscles. The only
paired organs of the more lowly organised vertebrates which
fulfil these conditions, and are not limbs, are the external gills.

It has been suggested that a forerunner of the paired limbs
once existed as a lateral fold running along each side of the

204 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

body. The embryological basis upon which this view rested
has long ago been shown to be unreliable, the traces of such
a fold in ontogeny being now known to be absent in the less
highly specialised Elasmobranchs, though present in such
forms as Torpedo. Certain morphologists attach great
weight to the evidence of the paired fins in Cladoselache, but
it is only necessary to look at the remarkably highly
specialised tail of this creature to see that its motor
arrangements were of a highly efficient kind, and to feel
the gravest doubts as to any interpretation of its paired fins
which makes them out to be of a primitive, less specialised,
and therefore comparatively slightly efficient character. If,
in addition, one turns to the structure of the paired fins
in Cladodus Neilsoni, described by Traquair (as intermediate
between the biserial archipterygium of Pleuracanthids and
the condition found in sharks), it is difficult to avoid the
belief that we have still much to learn as to the structure
of the paired fins in Cladoselache.

On the whole it must, 1t seems to me, be admitted that, in
the present state of our knowledge, the former existence in
vertebrates of a lateral fin-fold is absolutely hypothetical,
and we must therefore incline towards the other view, which
derives the limb from a forerunner whose existence is
rendered probable on independent morphological grounds.

I may recapitulate here, in a few words, the view which I
hold as to the derivation of the paired fins:—

1. There were present in primitive vertebrates a series of
paired external or dermal gills. These existed on each of
the visceral arches, as is rendered probable by their vestigial
occurrence on arches I-VI. in existing vertebrates. The
same evidence which renders it probable that the series of
branchial clefts once was more extensive than it is in exist-
ing forms points to the probability of the series of external
gills once also having extended back beyond arch VI.

2. These external gills, while primarily respiratory, were
highly muscular, and therefore potentially motor organs.

3. Two pairs of these organs lost their respiratory and
developed their supporting (as in “balancer” of Urodeles—
the external gill of arch I.) and motor functions, and became

Lmbryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 205

rod-like “stylopterygia,” used for clambering about amongst
the vegetation in the primitive shallow-water habitat.

4. As the struggle for existence became more intense in
the shallow marginal zone, certain forms spread into deep
water, and their stylopterygia became paddle-like archi-
pterygia, while others took to a more terrestrial existence ;
and in them the stylopterygium becoming flattened at the
tip, and taking on an S-shaped curve, became developed
into a cheiropterygium.

It will be seen that the view implies the acceptance of the
belief that the biserial archipterygium is really the primitive
type of existing jin. That this is so is rendered probable
by the fact of the predominance of this type of fin in the
earlier periods of the history of the main groups of fishes,
and, further, by the anatomical structure of the fin, which is
clearly less highly differentiated as an organ of swimming
than the other forms of paired fin. It will be noted further,
that the view involves the acceptance of Gegenbaur’s view
that the limb girdle has been evolved from a branchial
arch.

DEVELOPMENT OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.

In regard to the central nervous system, there appear to
emerge from the facts of development, as shown by the
forms under consideration, two points of cardinal importance.
The first of these relates to the general topography of the
brain region. In Polypterus, and in Lepidosiren and
Protopterus, the brain shows at an early stage a division into
two regions, the posterior one of which will give rise to the
hind brain region of the adult, the other to the whole of the
brain lying anterior to this.

In none of these cases do we find the division into three
primitive brain vesicles—the familiar fore, mid, and hind
brain. And when we look into the matter we find that the
view that this division is a primitive one rests upon the
developmental phenomena as seen in the bird, and selachian,
and mammal. Apart from the relatively high systematic
position of two out of the three groups mentioned, which
would in itself suggest caution in basing general ideas upon

206 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctety.

the phenomena observed in them—we have a further dis-
turbing factor in the differential growth seen in the brain
region. This is correlated with two facts—(1) that associated
with the high complexity of the adult brain, there occurs
precocious increase in the size of the brain, and (2) that
owing to the enormous mass of yolk, the ventral side of
the embryo is kept back in its increase in length, while the
dorsal side, going on with its development, causes the axis
of the brain to become greatly curved.

Personally, I am inclined to conclude that the correct view
as to the primitive division of the vertebrate brain is that
which divides it into two (rhombencephalon and cerebrum),
a view now accepted by many anatomists on the grounds of
adult structure.

The second point is in regard to the morphology of the
fore-brain region. The evidence of all three of the forms
under consideration agrees in supporting the old view—
supported in these days especially by Studnicka—that the
hemisphere region is primitively paired, and absolutely
against the more generally accepted view that the hemi-
spheres are to be looked on as the terminal region of the
brain, as a “telencephalon ” in the sense of His.

From the evidence of the more primitive vertebrates,
where the brain region is not distorted by the presence of
the yolk-sac hindering the growth in length of the ventral
side, it must, I think, be believed that the hemispheres are
to be regarded simply as localised developments of the
lateral walls of the primitive fore-brain, developments of a
similar kind to those which are developod in connection
with the special sense of sight, and form the optic “out-
growths.”

Motor NERVES.

In my description of the development of the motor nerves,’
the chief point brought out is that in Lepidosiren it is
possible to demonstrate the fact that the motor nerve which
passes from the central nervous system to the peripheral
muscles can be traced back to an extremely early stage of

1 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xli. p. 119.

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 207

development, when it is found in the form of a soft proto-
plasmic bridge connecting spinal cord and myotome, the
latter structures being still in contact with one another.
As development proceeds, the myotome becomes pushed out-
wards by the development of mesenchyme, and the nerve-
trunk becomes correspondingly lengthened. As the myotome
increases in size, the peripheral end of the nerve becomes
expanded, and this expansion breaks up into conically
arranged branches. Later on the myotome breaks up into
various muscles, which become pushed about into their adult
positions, each one dragging with it its bit of the original
nerve-trunk to form its nerve in the adult state. The nerve-
trunk is, as I have shown, originally naked; its sheath is
derived from mesenchymatous elements, which apply them-
selves to it. This spreads itself out along the nerve, and
forms the continuous protoplasmic sheath. The conducting
elements of the nerve, the primitive fibrils, gradually appear
in the originally simple granular protoplasm of the nerve-
trunk.

The special interest of these phenomena of nerve develop-
ment lies in their bearing on the general problem. It will
be seen that they render quite unnecessary the remarkable
view, which is still taught by many in authority, that nerve-
trunks grow out towards the periphery. Evidence to sup-
port this view is, of course, plentiful enough: it may be
found in almost every slide of sections. It would have been
easy to furnish numerous accurate figures of sections show-
ing freely ending nerves; while it needed much laborious
searching through long series of sections of carefully fixed
and prepared embryos before it was possible to get together
a set of specimens like those which I have figured, showing
the whole course of the nerve-trunk. It requires very little
consideration to realise .that one must frequently find what
seem to be free ending nerves, not because they really are so,
but because the nerve passes out of the plane of section.
It is often very difficult indeed to pick up such nerves in the
neighbouring sections of the series. There is also the further
possibility that the delicate and inconspicuous nerve-trunk
may not be towards its peripheral end still naked, and the

VOL. XVI. T

208 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

abrupt end of its sheath produce the impression that it is
the end of the whole nerve.

On the other hand, there is no conceivable source of error
which could produce the appearance shown in my figures,
with their continuous nerve-trunk stretching right from
spinal-cord to myotome, and showing peripherally absolute
protoplasmic continuity between nerve-trunk and myoblast.

NERVE FIBRILS.

The development of the primitive nerve fibrille affords a
problem of surpassing interest. The view which I take of
the general problem is this. I take it that in the simplest
mass of living matter there is a constant playing backwards
and forwards of vital impulses. It is by this that the bit of
living matter exhibits individuality. The nucleus of say a
protozoon sends out impulses regulating, ¢g., its secretory
activity ; similarly it receives impulses coming from the outer
surface which play a part in starting the efferent impulses.
So also impulses pass hither and thither through the
cytoplasm. The instant the microgamete penetrates the
surface of the Echinid egg, the vitelline membrane is seen
to spread out over the surface all round: the membrane is ~
everywhere formed in response to the stimulus which
spreads through the egg substance from the point of
entrance. |

Similarly in the metazoon there are in all probability
impulses constantly passing hither and thither through the
living substance so long as life lasts. But in the metazoon,
composed of large numbers of cells, modified some as
muscular, some as secretory, some as sensory, and all in
more or less fixed topographical relations to one another,
there would naturally be more or less definite tracks along
which special and frequently recurring impulses would flow,
—for example, between a definite centre and a definite
peripheral end organ. In the primitive nerve fibrille I
believe we have these tracks—visible because the protoplasm
along them is modified in correlation with its active physio-
logical condition. If this physiological activity ceases, the
fibril will soon revert back to its original simple proto-

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 209

plasmic condition; if activity is again set up, the fibril will
soon again form in response. The impulse can, of course,
pass through the simple, undifferentiated protoplasm, but it
can only do so with difficulty and in a relatively imperfect
fashion. For the transmission of intense impulses, probably
the completely developed nerve track or primitive nerve
fibril is an absolute necessity.

On this view, what takes place when a nerve is cut
and regenerates is as follows:—The passage ceasing in the
peripheral part, the neurofibrille revert to their simple
protoplasmic condition. Feeble impulses will still pass
however, even in the simple protoplasm. There may be
simple stray impulses affecting the peripheral portion, in
which case this may show a certain amount of regeneration.
Or if the end organ remains active with more or less of the
nerve undegenerated, faint attempts at the normal stimuli
will be able to pass across the degenerated bridge of
protoplasm between such peripheral part of the nerve and
the central stump. This will cause a re-formation of
primitive fibrils, which, being a mere expression of impulse
tracks, must necessarily form in continuity with the central
and peripheral parts of the track, in other words, the newly-
formed part of the fibril will be in absolute continuity with
the undegenerated part.

Such a view of the origin of nerve fibrils is not without
interest from the psychological point of view, for we see how
if it be true new association paths may be readily laid down
in the brain, impulses passing at first with difficulty through
the undifferentiated cell substance, but their repetition
causing the tracks to be marked out as definite nerve fibrils
by which the transmission of impulse would be far more
perfectly carried out, but these paths tending in time, if not
used, to lapse back into the original protoplasmic condition.

GENETIC AFFINITIES OF LOWER GNATHOSTOMATA.

In working through sections of embryos of the various
groups of vertebrates, one is impressed by the remarkable
‘resemblances which appear on every hand between the
Dipnoi and the Amphibia urodela. This resemblance is one

210 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

affecting not merely the general features of development,
but extending to histological detail in a way that makes it
quite impossible to put it down to mere convergence.

The really important morphological differences between
the two groups are very few. The most striking, perhaps, is
the pentadactyle character of the limb in the urodele. This
difference becomes of less importance on the view of evolution
of the limb which I hold—involving the: independent
development of cheiropterygium and ichthyopterygium from
a stylopterygial form. Inthe Dipnoi the limb has evolved a
less distance from the stylopterygium than in any of the
other groups. In Ceratodus it is a typical archipterygium;
in Protopterus and in Lepidosiren it shows less or more
complete reversion to the stylopterygial condition. In other
words, the Dipnoans are nearer the form which possessed
the type of limb ancestral to both cheiropterygium and
icthyopterygium than is any other group.

Another important difference, that of the character of the
intestine, is also shown by embryology to be less fundamental
than it seems, for it appears that in the short gut with spiral
valve we have a type produced by the fusion together of
the turns of an elongated spirally coiled gut. From the occur-
rence of the spiral valve in Elasmobranchs, Crossopterygians,
Ganoid Actinopterygians, and Dipnoans, it is fairly clear
that at one period it must have been characteristic of the
ancient Gnathostomata generally. In the Pentadactyle verte-
brates we see a reversion to the still earlier condition where
the turns of the gut had not yet become fused. .

In the earlier stages of my work upon Lepidosiren, I was
much interested by the paper which Dollo! had just pro-
duced upon the phylogeny of the group, and special search
was made for any features which might support his plausible
arguments. Dollo’s main thesis is that the present-day type
of Dipnoan, with its diphycercal tail and continuous median
fin, is really a degenerate descendant of forms with a hetero-
cercal tail and discontinuous median fins. Such questions,
dealing with the possibly degenerate character of forms
which are apparently primitive, are, in my opinion, of much

1 Bull. Soc. Belg. Géol. Paléont., T. ix.

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 211

less importance than they appear to be at first sight; for
we must believe that in degenerative evolution the char-
acters which disappear most easily are those which have
been most recently acquired, and those which tend to persist
longest are those which are most ancient and most deeply
engrained into the constitution of the creature. Degenera-
tion will therefore tend to be a process of reversion, and
it is hardly profitable to inquire whether the apparently
primitive features of, say, such forms as Cyclostomes or
Cephalochordata are there because they have been retained
throughout, or because they have been reverted to after
passing through a more highly specialised condition.

It is, however, of interest to inquire whether there are
really strong grounds for believing that the _ protocercal
Dipnoans of to-day have ever had heterocercal ancestors.
In considering any such phylogenetic question, it is essential
to consider it from the three points of view of comparative
anatomy, embryology, and palaeontology,’ or at least as

1 The worker in comparative anatomy or embryology is accustomed to bear
constantly in mind the danger of mistaking features which are adaptations,
or correlated with adaptive features, for features which are archaic and of
phylogenetic importance. In palaeontological work, the risk is perhaps
greater of accepting results without due criticism, of imagining that allied
forms found in successive formations necessarily form an ancestral series.
The expert palaeontologist will doubtless be one of the first to admit how
extraordinarily imperfect our knowledge really is of the fauna of any geological
age except the present, and how unreliable are such phylogenetic series,
unless supported by comparative anatomy or embryology, or preferably by
both. The special risks of error in embryological research are keenly realised,
particularly by embryologists, who consequently endeavour to take every pre-
caution against falling intothem. Onetypeof errortowhich embryology appears
not to be liable, is that which has to do with the order in which evolutionary
stages occur. If an organism or an organ recapitulates certain phylogenetic
stages, say A, B, C, D, they are found to occur in their true phylogenetic order.
In palaeontology, however, so imperfect is our knowledge of the geological
record, that it may easily happen that in a series of successive deposits
we find the same stages in the order D, C, B, A. This may be due either
to mere chance, all four stages being equally abundant during each period
under consideration, or, on the other hand, it may have been that the group
reached its maximum in the earlier period, and evolved into highly specialised
forms, intimately adapted to the environmental conditions of the time, which
died out as these conditions changed, sooner or later, according as they were
more or less specialised.

212 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

many of these as are available, in order to reach a reliable
conclusion.

Comparative Anatomy teaches us that of the two types
of tail, diphycercal and heterocercal, the former is un-
questionably the more archaic. As a piece of mechanism,
it is very much simpler and less perfect. In its muscular
and skeletal arrangements it shows far less divergence from
the ordinary arrangements seen in the regions lying anterior
to it, and of which it must be looked on merely as a modifica-
tion. Further, it is the type of tail which is alone found
amongst the Cephalochordata and the Cyclostomata.

Embryology tails to afford a shred of evidence for the
former existence of a heterocercal tail. The tail is typically
protocercal throughout ontogenetic development.

Palaeontology—or rather such knowledge of palaeontology
as we happen to possess at the present time—affords the
evidence upon which the view is based, which sees in the
diphycercal tail and continuous median fin of present-day
Dipnoans, characters which are not primitive, but developed
secondarily, the ancestral forms having possessed hetero-
cereal tails and divided-up median fins. The evidence upon
which this view, so opposed to morphological probabilities,
is based, consists of the fact that amongst palaeozoic Dipnoi
many forms are known with the last-mentioned set of char-
acters, while none are known with the first mentioned; and
further, upon the fact that it is possible to select out from
such known palaeozoic forms a series, the members of which,
from successive geological formations, show a series of steps
from the heterocercal type, with segmented median fin,
towards, though not reaching, the diphycercal type, with
continuous median fin. Of these two pieces of evidence, I
personally, for the reasons already given—particularly on
account of the necessarily extraordinarily incomplete state
of our knowledge of extinct faunas—should attach
little weight to the last mentioned. The weight of the
first also is lessened fatally, so it seems to me, by the
following considerations. The palaeozoic times, from which
the evidence has been obtained, were times when fishes allied
to what we should to-day call Dipnoans, and Crossoptery-

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 213

gians and Elasmobranchs flourished exceedingly. The
waters were thickly peopled with these vertebrates, which
sought refuge by developing a purely aquatic habitat—as
others of their contemporaries doubtless did by adopting
purely terrestrial habits—from the intense struggle for
existence in the shallow marginal zone, where, amidst a
more favourable environment, the early forms of life prob-
ably arose. In any case, apart from such speculations, the
waters certainly had a crowded population of such purely
aquatic fishes. But this being so, we must believe that such
fishes were intimately adapted to their aquatic mode of life.
Now, I have no hesitation in asserting that any one who has
spent any considerable time in the study of living specimens
of the various types of fishes, will admit that the type such
as is seen in the Dipnoan of to-day, as well as in various
Teleosts—the type with diphycercal tail and undivided
median fin—although well enough adapted to what may be
called a bentheic existence, to wriggling about amidst aquatic
vegetation, is hopelessly unadapted to an active nectonic or
free-swimming existence, and quite unfit to compete with
the active type with heterocercal tail and highly specialised
segmented median fins. This being so, it would excite no
surprise that remains of the protocercal type should be rare
or absent in deposits where the nectonic type of fish is
abundant ; nor could the rarity or absence of such remains
be allowed any weight whatever as evidence that the proto-
cercal type did not exist at the time the deposits were laid
down.

Taking an all-round view of the evidence at present avail-
able, it is difficult to see how it is in any way sufficient to
serve as foundation for such a view as that of Dollo, that
the ancestors of the present-day Dipnoans were at any time
of the specialised nectonic type.

CELLULAR CONSTITUTION OF THE VERTEBRATE Bopy.

One of the Dipnoans which I have dealt with—LZepido-
swren—is characterised by the large size of its cell elements,
and on this account, taken along with the comparatively
lowly organised character of the creature, one is impelled to

214 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

look whether or not data afforded by it are such as to affect
in any way our notions of the general constitution of the
vertebrate body.

In recent years, owing in great part to the efforts of
Sedgwick, our ideas on the “cell theory” have become
somewhat modified. Sedgwick emphasised the fact that the
study of vertebrate embryos shows that the cells forming
the body are, as a rule, not isolated, but joined together by
bridges of protoplasm. The study of such a form as Lepido-
siren, with its enormous cell elements, brings out very clearly
the truth of Sedgwick’s statements as regards, eg., the
mesenchymatous network. We still have a cell theory. We
still look upon a vertebrate as consisting of vast numbers of
cells. It is not, however, to be looked on as an aggregation
of cells in the literal sense, but rather as a mass of living
matter subdivided into cells. It does not grow because its
cells multiply, but rather its cells become more numerous
because it increases in size. The division of a developing
metazoon into cells is to be looked on as a necessary conse-
quence of the increase in volume of its living matter, very
much as Sachs long ago taught was the case with the grow-
ing point of one of the Metaphyta.

I was greatly struck by observing in the ectoderm of young
Lepidosirens beautiful tailed cells, recalling exactly the tailed
cells familiar to us in the neuroepithelial and myoepithelial
cells of the Coelenterata. So far as I can judge, these tail-
like processes pass into a kind of plexus lying beneath the
ectoderm, and more or less mixed up with the basement
membrane. Processes from the underlying mesenchyme cells
also pass up into the plexus. I am inclined to the belief that
subsequent research will show that the subepidermic plexus
is of high importance in the development of nerves such as,
e.g., the lateral nerve, which appear to arise by a process of
splitting off from the lower surface of the ectoderm. Tailed
epithelial cells, such as I have mentioned, are not found in
the ectoderm only. They are beautifully seen in Lepidosiren
in the developing myotome. Here, as I have shown else-
where, the muscle cell exists for a time as a typical tailed
epithelial cell, within the protoplasm of whose body the

Embryology of certain of the Lower Fishes. 215

contractile fibrillze are developed, while the tail-like process
is prolonged into the motor nerve fibres.

The facts which I have mentioned appear to indicate that
as regards the Vertebrata the germ layer theory should be
stated in some such fashion as this. The vertebrate body
consists fundamentally of the two cell-layers—ectoderm and
endoderm—each consisting primarily of an epithelial layer
of tailed cells. Parts of the primitive endoderm become
nipped off to form coelomic lining, including in this, of course,
the myocoelic wall, which becomes partially converted into
muscle, while individual cells of both primary layers migrate
into the cavity between them, and give rise to the mesen-
chyme and its derivatives. In the nipped off parts of primi-
tive endoderm which line the enterocoelic outgrowths, we
may see, with Sedgwick, Gardiner, and others, persisting
representatives of the coelenteric pouches of the Scyphozoan
Coelenterate and in the immigration of mesenchyme cells a
continuation of the similar process so beautifully seen in the
immigration of the skeletogenous cells of the Alcyonaria.

XVI. The Ldelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. By
JAMES Murray. [Plate VII.|

(Read 27th November 1905.)

_ This list of Bdelloid Rotifers from the Forth Area is based
entirely on the work of Mr Wm. Evans, who sent to me, in
the course of the present year (1905), numerous samples of
moss, specially selected for this purpose, gathered on hill-top
and in peat-bog, on trees, walls, and rocks, by roadsides and
in streams. A few samples of Lemna and other pond weeds,
also some seaweed, were likewise sent. This moss, etc., was
found to be very rich in microscopic life. A short list of
Tardigrada obtained from it has already been published
(Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1905, p. 160). Bdelloids were much
more numerous; indeed, among the moss-dwellers no order
is so prominent as the Bdelloida. Though they live in
other situations, such as the mud of ponds and lakes, and
as ecto-parasites on other animals, it is in moss, using the
VOL. XVI, U

216 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctety.

term in the wider sense to include also the hepatics, that
they are most at home. Where we have moss we have
bdelloids, and usually in great numbers. Rarely does a
handful of moss, properly treated, fail to yield at least a
dozen ‘species. It must not be supposed, however, that all
kinds of moss are equally productive. The pleurocarpous
section is very much better than the acrocarpous. Sphagnum,
as arule, is populous, but Zhuidiwm, Fontinalis, and certain
Hypna, among the true mosses, and Frullania among the
hepatics, usually give more variety. And as regards season,
autumn, winter, and spring are better than summer.

The method of obtaining the bdelloids which I have found
most successful is a very simple one. The moss is washed
vigorously in a vessel of water; then the water is strained
through a coarse silk net, and finally passed through a silk
net fine enough to retain all the rotifers. The coarse net,
for which I find a No. 6 bolting cloth suitable, retains all
moss stems, leaves, and the larger debris, but allows all but
the largest rotifers, such as Stephanoceros, to pass through.
In practice it is found most convenient to place the coarse
net inside the fine one, and to use them as the vessel in
which the moss is washed. When the coarse net is removed
the rotifers pass through into the fine one, and can then be
bottled and examined at leisure. They should be examined
as soon as possible, as many species invariably die within
twenty-four hours when kept in bottles, although others will
live for a long time.

It is not definitely known whether any bdelloids, except
Discopus, have their ordinary habitat in the sea. Gosse
found Philodina microps in salt-water, but it has not been
again found. At Lochinver I found two species, which I
was unable to name, in the washings of seaweeds, and again
at Aberdeen a single example. These may have been casu-
ally introduced, or they may be, like some rotifers of the
other orders (2.¢., Furcularia reinhardtr), able to live in-
differently in salt or fresh water.

On the 17th of November 1905, Mr Evans obtained some
fine moss-like seaweed at Morrison’s Haven, on the south
side of the Firth of Forth. On washing it I found one

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 217

known species (Philodina flaviceps, Bryce, MS.) in abund-
ance, and two others which I could not name.

The list of species here recorded numbers 53.

Other five species previously discovered by Mr Bryce, but
not yet named, were also found.

Messrs Scott arid Lindsay, in their list of Rotifera from the
Upper Elf Loch (14), enumerate 11 bdelloids, 4 of which
were not found in any of Mr Evans’s collections. Adding
those, we have a total of 62 species, the largest local list of
Bdelloid Rotifers I know of.

The four species given in Scott and Lindsay’s list which
have not been found in any of Mr Evans’s collections are—

Rotifer actinurus, Khr.

R. hapticus, Gosse.
Philodina megalotrocha, Khyr.
Callidina bidens, Gosse.

Rotifer hapticus I regard as identical with &. macroceros,
Gosse, which, however, is not otherwise recorded for the
Forth area. Callidina bidens is so insufficiently described
that I find it impossible to guess what animal was identified
as this species. As Mr Evans also collected in the Elf Loch,
the same animal is probably included in this. list under
another name.

Several common species do not occur in either of the lists,
although they must surely be found in the district sooner
or later. Such are Rotifer macroceros, R. neptunius, Adineta
tuberculosa. A number of others, though less common, are
also quite likely to occur.

The list of literature contains only the works referred to
in the text. When species have been discovered subsequent
to the completion of Hudson and Gosse’s Monograph (5)
(1889), the work in which the original description occurs
is cited. The works of Zelinka (19, 20), Janson (6), and
Jennings (7) are valuable for the extensive bibliography
which they contain. The works are referred to in the text
by their numbers (enclosed in brackets) in the list on
page 228.

218 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

LIST VOF- SPECIES:

Family MICRODINADA.

Microdina paradoxa, Murray (12).

The family and species were originally discovered in the
higher part of the Forth Valley, at the outflow of Loch
Vennachar. Mr Evans found it, in wet moss at Torduff, in
the Pentlands, March 1905.

Family PHILODINADA.

In anticipation of Mr Bryce’s revised classification of this
family, I have included all the species in the three old-
established genera, Philodina, Callidina, Rotifer. In order
to avoid the anomaly of placing species, the close relationship
of which is not denied, in different genera, merely because
one possesses eyes while the other does not, I have pro-
visionally redefined these genera in accordance with our
present conception of the affinities of the species.

Genus Philodina.

Animals having four toes, and the corona consisting mainly
of a pair of wheel-like ciliated discs. The only other animal
known, in the order Bdelloida, having four toes, is Mierodina,
which is separated by the absence of discs, etc.

A. Eyes present ; oviparous.
P. roseola, Eby.
On Potamogeton, Malleny Dam, near Balerno, February.

P. citrina, Ehy.

On Potamogeton, Malleny Dam; Upper Elf Loch, Braid
Hills, November; on Lemna, from Duntarvie Pond, near
Winchburgh, December.

P. erythrophthalma, Ehy.
Duddingston Loch, March ; Nether Habbie’s Howe, Pent-
land Hills, March.

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 219

P. rugosa, Bryce (4).
Among Sphagnum, Bavelaw Moss, near Balerno, February.

P. flaviceps (Bryce, MS.).

This species, which will be described by Mr Bryce at an
early date, was first discovered in the Forth Valley. Mr
Bryce found it in some Lemanea sent to him from Loch
Vennachar, on the occasion when MWicrodina was discovered.
It is now known to be extremely common, especially in pure
streams and lake margins in Scotland, but, so far as I am
aware, has not been reported elsewhere.

In moss from stream, Torduff; Lothian Burn, March ;
Nether Habbie’s Howe; Upper Elf ‘Pond; Dundas Castle,
June; Winchburgh and Aberfoyle, December; abundant on
seaweed, Morrison’s Haven, November.

P. nemoralis, Bryce (4).
Roslin Glen, March; Duddingston Loch; Torduff; Lothian
Burn; Ochils, behind Dollar, June.

P. brevipes, Murray (11).

The type of this somewhat variable species has only been
observed in the district at the Upper Elf Loch, Braid Hills,
but a curious variety was found at Midcalder, which I include
provisionally under P. brevipes, though in some respects it is
intermediate between that and P. citrina. (Plate VII. Fig.
La toe.)

The general form is that of P. brevipes, which is a much
less massive animal than P. citrina, and the upper lip is
exactly similar. It differsin having a distinctly four-jointed
foot, and in lacking the very long sete on the rostrum.
Resembling P. citrina in the four-jointed foot, the pointed
egg, and the spurs, it differs in the form of the upper lip, less
massive trunk, lack of yellow colour, ete.

From both species it differs in some important particulars.
The eyes are very minute dots. Both species have large
eyes, P. citrina very large. The trunk is covered by a
coating of dirt, as is normally the case with Callidina
(Rotifer) longirostris and some other species. This in-
dicates that there is a viscous secretion on the skin, and

220 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

in fact the mucus-pores can be seen as a close stippling,
as in P. macrostyla. I have never seen any sign of
viscosity about either P. brevipes or P. citrina. The
occurrence of a single individual with a dirt-coated trunk
could not be considered of much importance, but in this
instance the animal was abundant, and every one was
alike “sordid,” although other bdelloids in the same water
were clean.

As the peculiarity was correlated with much smaller eyes
than in either of the species with which it could be compared,
the differences may be regarded as of some importance.
Considering that it has some points of close resemblance
to each of those species, and that it thus occupies the un-
enviable intermediate position, I do not feel justified in
bestowing even a varietal name upon it, till it has been more
fully investigated.

Type.—Upper Elf Loch, November.

Var—In moss, Kirknewton, near Midcalder, 28th March
1905 (Evans).

P. acuticornis, Murray (11).

Bavelaw Moss, February; near Penicuik, March; near
Winchburgh, December.

B. Hyes absent, oviparous.

P. laticeps, Murray (12).

A parasite on insect larve living in streams. The examples
found were not on insects, but had no doubt been washed
off their hosts.

Nether Habbie’s Howe, March.

P. plena (Bryce), (3).
Nether Habbie’s Howe, March; Fullarton, November.

P. vorax (Janson), (6), (8).

Thornton, Fife, April 1905. This is, so far as I can
ascertain, the first notice of the species in Scotland. Mr
Bryce has before found it several times in England.

P. brycea (Weber), (17).
Two principal varieties are distinguished. The commoner

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 221

has only a single series of dorsal spines, crossing the central
segments. The other has an additional shorter row farther
back.

Both occurred together in wet moss from Torduff; the first
at Gullane Links, November, very abundant; also at Winch-
burgh in December, and on the Ochils in June.

P, alpiwm, Khr. (8).

On Elodea from ditch at Winchburgh, December.

A very common animal all over Scotland. Its occurrence
only on one occasion in the course of a year’s work in the
Forth area is therefore somewhat surprising.

C. Vivuparous; eyes present or absent.

The only two species belonging to this section of the
genus, which have been found in the district, normally
possess eye-spots. Blind forms of both are occasionally
found, and a third species, not yet found in the area
(P. spinosa), is normally blind.

P. macrostyla, Khr.

Generally distributed and very common.

Duddingston ; Nether Habbie’s Howe; East Cairn Hill,
Pentlands, September; Loch Leven, April; Winchburgh, etc.
Var. tuberculata in the same localities, and also from Aber-
foyle, December.

P. aculeata, Ehr. ?

It is somewhat doubtful if the spiny Philodina, so common
in Scotland, is Ehrenberg’s species. That is figured as having
about tweuty-seven spines, but the greatest number which I
have seen is twelve. If it is the same it is extremely
variable, and has puzzled authors accordingly, almost every
naturalist who has noticed it giving a different account of
it. In my experience, the spines have always been in pairs,
and vary from four to twelve in number. Mr Bryce has
seen a form with only two knobs, but he is disposed to regard
this as belonging to P. macrostyla.

222 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

In the Forth area few of the forms have yet been seen—
one example found near Penicuik had ten spines, all directed
backward ; another had eight spines. |

Genus Callidina.

Animals with three toes, or a perforate disc formed by
a union of the toes, oviparous, eyes present or absent. The
very few viviparous species formerly included in this genus
have been transferred to Rotefer or Philodina, with which
their real affinities lay. :

Animals belonging truly to Callidina have been found
exceptionally to contain living young. I believe, however,
that in those instances what has happened is that the egg
has hatched within the parent, and that the mode of repro-
duction is really invariable in each species. I believe,
further, that the mode of reproduction is generic—related
animals have the same mode. The exceptions are so few
as to prove the rule.

As in Philodina, several natural groups can be recognised.

A. Food moulded into pellets.

This is by far the largest and most important natural
group found within the order. It is possibly of more than
generic value, as is suggested by the occurrence within its
limits of every condition in relation to eye-spots found in the
whole order, viz., eyes in rostrum, eyes on brain, and no eyes.

C. hexodonta (Bergendal), (1), (11).
Otterston, near Aberdour, March; Bavelaw Moss; top of
East Cairn Hill, Pentlands, September.

C. repert (Milne), (10).
A parasite or commensal on Sphagnum, Bevel Moss,
February.

C’. elegans, Ehr. (6).
Blair Drummond, near Doune, April.

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 223

C. lata, Bryce (2).

Common and general. Lothian Burn; Leadburn, March ;
Bavelaw Moss; East Cairn Hill; Loch Leven, April; Ochils,
June; Markinch, May; Bridge of Allan, December; ete.

C pulchra, Murray (12).

Roslin Glen, Leadburn, Nether Habbie’s Howe; Hopetoun
Woods, very abundant, December; Wemyss Woods, near
Thornton, December.

C. aspera, Bryce (2).
Kirknewton, near Midcalder, March; Boltonmoor, near
Gifford, April; Hopetoun and Thornton, December.

C. augusticollis, Murray (12).

Near Midcalder, a single empty case, March; Ochils,
June; Hopetoun Woods; Thornton; numerous in Sphagnum
from Aberfoyle, December.

C. annulata, Murray (12).
Nether Habbie’s Howe.

O. leetgebu, Zel. (19).

Several characters, notably the loop of the gullet, lead me
to suppose that the species, which Zelinka does not figure,
belongs to this section rather than to the symbiotic group.

Leadburn ; Wemyss Woods, near Thornton.

Callidina microcephala, un. sp. (Plate VIL. Fig. 2, a to e).

Specific Characters—Trunk very broad, longitudinally
plicate, neck of inoderate length, tapering to very small head ;
corona very narrow, angled (in dorsal view, see Fig. 2, 5);
rostrum very broad; teeth 7; antenna very short; foot short,
of three joints; spurs small, divergent, meeting at base,
convex on outer border, sigmoid on inner; toes, three ; food
moulded into pellets.

Length, when feeding, 312; width of trunk, 96y; of
corona, 29; pellets about 9» in diameter.

The skin is hyaline, stippled; the longitudinal folds few,

VOL. XVI. x

224 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

broad, deeper at the sides. The head and neck are very
narrow, relatively to the trunk, and when partially drawn
in look disproportionately small.

in comparing this bdelloid with the earlier descriptions of
allied species, our greatest difficulty arises from the in-
sufficiency of these descriptions.

From all species having less than six teeth, it is sufficiently
separated by that character alone. Most of those having six
or more teeth (eg., C. russeola, C. magna, C. scarlatina, C.
annulata, C. crenata) possess other good distinctive char-
acters. There are only three species known to me which
the new form resembles closely enough to call for detailed
comparison. Those are C. elegans, Ehr, C. constricta, Duj.,
and C. leitgebu. C. elegans, which has usually more numer-
ous teeth, has also a much larger corona, and larger, longer-
pointed spurs. C. leitgebi, according to Janson, may have
as many as seven teeth. I identify as this species an animal
common among mosses from trees, which has a longer and
narrower neck, a very small narrow rostrum, and softer,
less distinctly plicate trunk. There remains only C. constricta.
The most important characters given by Janson (6, p. 56),
the very small corona, the number of teeth, and the small
spurs, fit our animal very well. Not having seen C. constricta,
a carefully measured drawing from the living animal was
sent to Mr Bryce, who knows that species. He was good
enough to send me examples of C. constricta, and to point out
an important difference. In C. constricta the corona is as
broad as the collar, or very nearly so, in C. microcephala it
is very decidedly less. The discs of C. constricta have not
the angled appearance of those of C. mzcrocephala.

Among moss from the foot of a wall at Polton, near Roslin,
2nd March 1905 (Evans). It has since been seen among
ground moss from Fort Augustus.

C. constrecta, Du}.
Since writing the above, C. consiricta has been found in

moss from Hopetoun Woods, December.

C. crenata, Murray (12).
In moss from wall at Dalkeith, April.

bo
or

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 2

C. tridens, Milne (9).
On Lemna, in pond, near Winchburgh, December.

B. Toes bearing a number of cup-like suckers, or united
to form a broad dise.

C. symbrotica, Zel. (19).

Usually symbiotic with various hepaties, but also very
frequently symbiotic with Sphagnum.

Rosebery, in moss off tree, February; Leadburn; East
Cairn Hill, September, very abundant in Sphagnum; Thornton
Moss and Aberfoyle.

C. russeola, Zel. (20).
Among Leucodon, Rosebery; near Gifford, April; Gullane
Links, November.

C.. searlatina, Ehr. (6).
Rosebery, Midlothian ; Boltonmoor, near Gifford.

C’. tetraodon, Khr. (6), (5).
Nether Habbie’s Howe; Fullarton; Boltonmoor; Hope-
toun; Wharry Glen, Bridge of Allan.

C. incrassata, Murray (12).

Top of East Cairn Hill, in Sphagnum, September. The
second station known for the species, the other being at Fort
Augustus.

C. magna, Plate (13).

This species has a large central process on each disc
similar to that of P. /aticeps (12).

Gullane Links, November.

C. Toes three, distinct; food not moulded into pellets.

C. plicata, Bryce (2).

The commonest bdelloid in Scotland, and extremely vari-
able. The characteristic processes on the anal segment may
be reduced or entirely absent, or they may be produced into

226 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

long tails suggestive of those of the swallow-tailed butterfly,
and which may equal the foot in length.

Very generally distributed.

The type at Duddingston, Upper Elf Loch, Torduff,
Bavelaw Moss, East Cairn Hill, Fullarton, Hopetoun,
Aberdour, Markinch, Loch Leven, Ochils, Bridge of Allan,
Aberfoyle, etc. The swallow-tailed variety at Nether
Habbie’s Howe and Boltonmoor.

C. ehrenbergt, Janson (6).
Hopetoun Woods, December.

C. habita, Bryce (3).

Very common and general.

Duddingston Loch, Lothian Burn, and Nether Habbie’s
Howe, March; Lochgelly and Doune, April; Upper Elf Loch,
November; Winchburgh and Hopetoun, December; ete.

C. quadricornifera, Milne (9).

Almost as common as C. plicata.

Duddingston, Upper Elf Loch, Dalkeith, Lothian Burn, -
Leadburn, Bavelaw Moss, Winchburgh, Otterston, Lochgelly,
Ochils, Aberfoyle.

C’. papillosa, Thompson (15).

Common and general.

Duddingston, Upper Elf Loch, Lothian Burn, Fullarton,
Midcalder, near Aberdour, Lochgelly, Loch Leven, Gifford,
Gullane Links, Winchburgh, Doune, Bridge of Allan, Aber-
foyle.

C. multispinosa, Thompson (15).
Midcalder, Gifford, Hopetoun, Lochgelly, Wemyss Woods.

C’. aculeata, Milne (9).
Gullane Links, in moss, November.

Genus Lotifer.

A more compact genus than either of the others. All
viviparous; toes, three. The eyeless species do not form a

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 227

natural section. &. longirostvis is related to R. tardus,
ht. socralts to h. macrurus.

fi. vulgaris, Schrank.
Near Roslin, March; Upper Elf Loch, November; Winch-
burgh ; Bridge of Allan, December.

Rh. macrurus, Schrank.
In Sphagnum, Bavelaw Moss, February; Aberfoyle,
December.

£. tardus, Ehr.
Duddingston, Nether Habbie’s Howe, Doune.

fk. longirostris (Janson), (6).

I think there can be no doubt as to the close affinity of
this species with &. tardus. Beyond the lack of eyes, and
the presence of the series of processes on the neck of this
species, they are almost identical.

Duddingston, Fullarton, Hopetoun, Aberdour, Loch Leven,
Bridge of Allan, Doune.

fh. cutronus, Ehr. (6), (18).

This species appears to have been generally overlooked.
I find it quite common in ponds in various parts of Scotland.

Lochgelly, Upper Elf Loch, Winchburgh.

hh. trisecatus, Weber (16). 2
On Hlodea from ditch, near Winchburgh, December.

fi. socialis (Kell.), (8).

I find this to be the commonest of the species parasitic on
Asellus in Scotland.

Ditch near Winchburgh, on Asellus, December.

Genus Adineta.

Adineta vaga, Davis. |
Roslin, Duddingston, Bavelaw Moss, Nether Habbie’s
Howe, Thornton, Ochils near Dollar.

228 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

A. gracilis, Janson (6).
Near Lothian Burn, Bavelaw Moss, Hopetoun, Markinch,
Ochils, Doune.

A. barbata, Janson (6).
Bavelaw Moss, Roslin, Fullarton, Hopetoun, Aberdour,
Markinch, Aberfoyle.

A, oculata, Milne (9).
Among Lemna, Upper Elf Pond, Braid Hills, November. ~

LITERATURE.

1. BercenpaL, D., Rotatorien-fauna Groénlands, Kongl. Fysio-
grafiska Sdllskapets Handlingar, Ny Foljd, 1891-92,
Bd. iii.

2. Brycr, D., Macrotrachelous Callidine, Jour. Queckett Mier.
Club, ser. 2, vol. v., 1892, p. 15.

3. Bryce, D., Macrotrachelous Callidine, Jowr. Queckett Mier.
Club, ser. 2, vol. v., 1894, p. 436.

4. Bryce, D., Two New Species of Philodina, Jowr. Queckett
Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. viii., 1903, p. 523.

5. Hupson anp Gosse, Zhe Rotifera, London, 1886. Supple-
ment, 1889.

6. Janson, O., Die Rotatorien-Familie der Philodinceen, Marburg,
1893.

7. Jennines, H. S., Rotatoria of the United States, Bull. U.S.
Fish Comm., 1899, p. 67.

8. Keuuicott, D. 8., Rotifera of Shiawassee River, Proc. Amer.
Soc. Micr., 1888.

9. MitnE, W., Defectiveness of the Eye-spot as a means of
Generic Distinction in the Philodinza, Proc. Phil. Soc.
Glasgow, vol. xvil., 1886.

10. Mitne, W., Rotifer as Parasite or Tube-Dweller, Proc. Phil.
Soc. Glasgow, vol. xx., 1889.

11. Murray, J., Some Scottish Rotifers, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist.,
19025 p. 1162.

12. Murray, J., New Family and 12 New Species of Rotifers,
Trans, Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xli., 1905, p. 367.

13.

14.

15.

The Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area. 229

Puate, L., Rotatorienfauna des bottnischen Meerbusens,
Zertsch. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xlix., 1889.

Scorr anD Linpsay, Rotifera from the Upper Elf Loch,
Trans. Edin. Field Nat. and Micr. Soc., vol. ii1., 1898,
p. 382.

THompson, P. G., Moss-haunting Rotifera, Science Gossip,
1892, p. 56.

. Weser, E. F., Rotateurs des environs du Geneve, Archiv.

Biologie, T. viii., 1888, p. 24.

. Weber, E. F., Faune Rotatorienne du bassin du Léman,

fev. Suisse de Zool., 1898, p. 306.

. WestERN, G., Philodina Macrostyla and Rotifer citrinus,

Jour. Queckett Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. iv., 1890, p. 87.
ZELINKA, C., Studien tiber Raderthiere, 1, Zevtsch. f. wiss.
Zool., Bd. xliv., 1886, p. 396.

. ZELINKA, C., Studien wher Raderthiere, Zertsch. f. wiss.

Zool., Ba. liii., 1891.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Fic. 1. Philodina brevipes, variety.

a. Dorsal view, showing the ‘‘ sordid” trunk, small eyes, and
pointed egg.

b. Jaw.

c. Spurs.

Fic. 2. Callidina microcephala, n. sp.

- Dorsal view.

. Head, on larger scale,
. Jaw.

. Rostrum.

. Spurs.

GS fh, ey ES)

bo
wo
=)

Proceedings of the Royal Physical Sucrety.

XVIL. The Higher Crustacea of the Scottish
Carboniferous Rocks.

On Monday, 23rd October 1905, B. N. Peach, Esq., LL.D.,
F.R.S., delivered an Address on the above subject, of which
the following is an abstract :—

The Scottish Carboniferous rocks yield abundant remains
of the higher Crustacea. Some of them belong to forms like
the recent Nebalia, the unspecialised structure of which shows
that it lies at the base of the genealogical tree of the higher
Crustacea. Most of the forms, however, belong to the
more advanced order of the Schizopoda, generally known
as the Opossum-Shrimps, three of the families being well
represented. Other forms, intermediate between these and
the modern squillas, sand-hoppers, and wood-lice, are also
comparatively numerous. None of the highest Crustacea,
such as shrimps, prawns, crayfish, lobsters, and crabs, have
been met with, nor have they been recorded from Carboni-
ferous strata in any part of the globe. It is, therefore, only
natural to infer that they had not come into existence in
Carboniferous times, but that they were subsequently
evolved from the Euphausiide, a family of Opossum-
Shrimps well represented in the Carboniferous rocks. The
nature of the deposit in which the above occurs, as well
as that of their associated fossils, shows that they lived
along the ancient shores. Their modern immediate con-
geners, on the contrary, inhabit the open ocean, either
swimming near its surface or crawling at the bottom of its
abysses, where they had evidently been driven by the
severe struggle for existence which goes on inshore. One
very anomalous creature, Amnaspides, the only surviving
genus of a family common enough in Carboniferous time,
turned up a few years ago in a fresh-water pool on Mount
Wellington, in Tasmania, and added another old-world
form to the Archaic fauna and flora which is known to
exist on that island and in Australia.

39 eh cy NE Wee MES

| hv. (oh ‘ ?
PROCEEDINGS Pie

Brite he v4 or THE is 7 a ae ot oat i ys
PP a ee ae | if My ® EE Cts oy Pana 20

ihe,

, PHYS Ae CrETY

Caen
ry a Re,
= papas”
Sires oe / yr
PU Sha Satin y “yao. oN M8 “o s ts Dag V
‘ ae ny ’ at \ ok wy Jos * ee
Pe eatb ees. ice Ge BOR, THR Rg re
a yaa, 5 * * re 4 : '- ery. os
a xn 7 ats > thy nt - ; ‘ ! ee U's
a «, ~~ « a
“i 1

Rises ERE Tn a. sad $e 5 ole

“NATURAL 1 HISTORY. i © if Fe

_ SESS 10N 1905- 1906, Me aie ae
BTN a ag ‘ee ; Ge >
ae :
“CONTENTS. es oat ane
is. he ¢ 12055 ; ' : > . Se
PAGE
ze from the: « Seotia’” “Collection! By Pre Cal a
UR «Taos M. ‘he 5: and Mr J. D. ‘FIppEs, M. Ay Fes A, “y 231
certain . Blood jtubabiting Protozoa. By Murrey, ‘Ropepsson, Z
negie Research Scholar in in the University, of. ‘Glasgow. - [Plates : NS ra

IL. and. Dee Pitgtes th), Rene. odie

ge a © VaR con eert A A | he
on F ssils from the Falkland Halande- iraedate gine by the pt eee
ne fa he al Expedition i in epee Me Be Ty Neem: dt CS
[Plate XJ. SE, See eGR eS aN Ac hye 288 oe ok
on the Geology of Gouah sib By ae ca eee iPier, vos ie oA
5 M. B., , Geologist tot » the Seottish National. Antarctic Expedition, © 258 ug
ioe Petrology of Gough Island. By R. : Chita ML ee Se, Geos
tae Be ee LER tah, RECs A

SKIN E, PEPE ee i

eg Shy Oh ee
ee * 7 we x E be. P
7) mR +. ee
ee Pe . Ps
7S a ae”
ney ahs
4, . :
on” = . 7 ge
- en a Te a
: el Ae
eS ee
- i - a ws =
1 we VW a.

PRL OF Vine

. Part 1 (1854-56),
Part 2 (1856-58), out of prant,
. Part 1 (1858-61), out of print,
(1861-62), owt of print,
. Part 1 (1862-63), out of print,
Part 2 (1863-64), owt of print,
Part 3 (1864-65), out of print,
Part 4 (1865-66), out of print,

Vol! VL

Pant 2

. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print,

Part 2 (1875-76), out of print,
Part 3 (1876-78), out ae

. Part 1 (1878-79),

Part 2 (1879-80),
(1880-81),

Title and Index of this Vol. eaedl

Volk VIE

Do.

Volwvili:

Vol, Xti.

Do.

Viol XT

Do.
Do.

Vol. XIV.

Do.
Do.
Do.

Vol: XV.

Do.

Vol. XVI.

Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.

with Part 1, Vol. VII.
Part 1 (1881-82),
Part 2 (1882-83),

Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print,

Part 2 (1884-85),

. Part 1 (1885-86),

Part 2 (1886-87),
Part 3 (1887-88),

. Part 1 (1888-89),

Part 2 (1889-90),

. Part 1 (1890-91),

Part 2 (1891-92),

Part 1 (1892-93),

Part 2 (1893-94),

Part 1 (1894-95),

Part 2 (1895-96),

Part 3 (1896-97),

Part 1 (1897-98),

Part 2 (1898-99),

Part 3 (1899-1900),
Part 4 (1900-1901),
Part 1 (1901-1902),
Part 2 (1902-1904),

No. 1 (Pages 1-24),

No. 2 (Pages 25-48),
No. 3 (Pages 49-96),
No, 4 (Pages 97-190),
No. 5 (Pages 191-230), .
No. 6 (Pages 231-266), .

out of print,

To the Fellows.

3/6
3/6
5/

3/6
7/6
7/6

4/
2/6
7/6
7/6
10/
3/6
4/6
5/
10/
5/
5/
B/
12/6
4/6
5/
6/
5/
5/
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
1/
1/6
2/
2/6
2/
2/

« PROCEEDINGS.”

7/6
I ang

10/ is
5/
a/R
5/
5/
Be
To the Public.

20/

B/
7/6
5/

10/

10/

5
3/6
10/
10/
12/6
5/
6/
7/
12/6
6/6
6/6
6/6
15/
6/
6/6
7/6
6/6
6/6
5/
5/
5/
5/
1/3
2/
2/6
3/6
2/6
2/6

The following may also be had of the Librarian:

Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VI.,

Do. do.

Vol. VIII. Part 1,

2/
1/

Forms of Application for Fellowship may be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, A ;

Annual Subscription,

10/6
12/6

A Rare Sponge from the “ Scotia” Collection. 231

XVIII. Note on a Rare Sponge from the “ Scotia” Collection.
By Professor J. ARTHUR THomson, M.A., and Mr J. D.
Fippgs, M.A.

(Read 18th December 1905.)

In the collection of Alcyonarians made by Mr W. 8. Bruce
on the “Scotia” Expedition, there was an interesting and
rare sponge, which is deserving of record. It was dredged
from deep water between Gough Island and Cape Town.
The specimen consists of two separate parts of a straight
upright axis, giving off numerous irregular branches, most of
which are short. The axis is 26 centimetres in length, rigid
in its thicker lower part, becoming slightly flexible as it
tapers upwards. One of the branches is long, and bifurcates
at a distance of 7 cms. from the stem, being: continued in
two slender divisions (one with a secondary twig). for about
4 cms.

The siliceous spicules composing the stem show at once
that it is the core of a Monaxonial sponge, from which,
unfortunately, almost every trace of the soft tissue has been
weathered or rubbed off. On two or three areas there was a
thin coating of soft, white, friable material, which revealed
nothing. The texture of the stem is tough and stringy; the
surface is rough, with minute monticular eminences, which
give it a somewhat file-like appearance.

Closer examination shows that the axis is composed of
densely-packed style-like spicules, imbedded in a spongin
framework, and a transverse section shows that the spicules
have an annular arrangement like the lines of growth in a
tree-trunk. The branches are formed by bundles of spicules,
which diverge from those of the main stem.

The majority of the spicules are needle-like, with a
rounded and a pointed end, growth evidently occurring
towards the point. In more technical language, they are
monactine monaxons, growth proceeding along the axis in
one direction only, and they are rounded or strongylote at
one end. In a word, they are “styles.” They have a great
tendency to split along the axis when boiled in caustic

VOL. XVI. ¥

232 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

potash, so that many of the separated spicules appeared
bifid. That this was artificial was evident from an examina-
tion of a thin longitudinal slice, which showed no split
spicules. There was no trace of minute flesh-spicules or
microscleres.

The nature of the skeleton—spongin-fibres, with imbedded
styles forming a firm axis—points to the family Axinellide.
In this family the genus Axinella, O. Schmidt, is character-
ised by having a firm-branched axis, composed of a spongin-
network, with included siliceous styles. To this genus,
therefore, we refer the “Scotia” specimen, but although the
species is probably new, it is impossible to determine this
with certainty, as only the axial skeleton is preserved.

XIX. Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. By MURIEL
RoBERTSON, Carnegie Research Scholar in the University
of Glasgow. [Plates VIII. and IX ]

(Read 26th March 1906.)

During the last six months I have had the opportunity of
examining a number of different heemosporidial forms. These
notes embody some of the points of interest that have
appeared during the course of the work.

I am glad to have this opportunity of acknowledging how
much I owe to the guidance and encouragement of Professor
Graham Kerr, under whose supervision the work was
conducted.

The forms dealt with in this communication are—(1)
Trypanosoma brucei; (2) Trypanosoma pythonis, D.sp., an
endocorpuscular form from the blood of an African python;
(3) a Trypanosome found in the blood of Pleuronectes platessa
and Plewronectes flesus; (4) a Heemogregarine, also found in
the blood of the two last-mentioned hosts; (5) 7. raw
(Laveran and Mesnil); and (6) a Hemogregarine found in
the erythrocytes of Raia microcellata.

1. Trypanosoma brucei.

Prowazek, in his work upon 7'rypanosoma brucet, gives an
account of the more important processes in the life-history

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 233

of this parasite in the blood of the vertebrate host. I have
been able to corroborate a number of the results arrived at
by the above-mentioned observer. My material, however,
showed certain points of interest which are worthy of
description.

The infection with which I was working was one of long
standing. Two out of the three cases which came under my
observation were very severe, an enormous number of para-
sites being present in the blood. The host was in each case
a guinea-pig.

Division. This process agrees essentially with that
described by Prowazek (Studien tiber Stugetiertrypanosomen,
Arb. aus dem kaiserh. Gesund., Bd. xxii. Heft 2), but
there appears to be a certain amount of variation in
detail. Prowazek describes a division of eight chromosomes
in the somatic nucleus, which become grouped finally at
either end of the dividing karyosome, without forming an
equatorial plate. The division of the nucleus is preceded
by the division of the blepharoplast. Division, as I observed
it, agrees broadly with this description, but both the karyo-
some and the chromatin show some points of difference.
Thus the karyosome, which is on the whole a larger and
more prominent structure than is indicated by Prowazek’s
figures, shows a very strong tendency to precocious division.
Quite a common nuclear condition is shown in Fig. 1, where
the karyosome is already divided, and where the chromatic
network has broken up into separate chromosomes, which lie
arranged in a comparatively regular oval. More often the
chromatin becomes closely grouped in irregular masses round
each karyosome (Figs. 1, 2).

Forms strongly suggesting autosynthesis of the nucleus
were not infrequently met with (Fig. 4); this process involves
one or more, usually two, divisions of the karyosome. Of the
four karyosomes thus produced, two apparently fuse together,
while the other two degenerate.

Parthenogenesis was not observed, although the nucleus
was not infrequently found with a divided karyosome, and
the chromatin arranged in four or more bars running across
at right angles to the main axis of the nucleus. This,

234 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

according to Prowazek, is the early stage of parthenogenesis,
but further stages were not met with, and the cross bar
arrangement of chromatin has probably, as will be seen later,
another explanation. The process very probably occurs, but
must be very obscure. From Prowazek’s account these ap-
pearances are much clearer in 7rypanosoma lewisit. Trypano-
soma brucei, by itself, does not give sufficient evidence to
enable one to form a definite conclusion as to the nature
of this phenomenon.

The feature of greatest interest in this material is the
presence of a well-marked line, which passes from the
blepharoplast anteriorly to the tip of the body, taking the
flagellum-bearing extremity as the anterior end of the
creature (Figs. 5-10). This line is not a chromatic structure,
though it may on occasions apparently carry chromatin. It
stains a deep violet-blue, with the modification of the
Romanowski method which I used; it stains also deeply
with gentian-violet and methyl-green; moreover, safranin,
and Heidenhain’s iron hematoxylin, which were in every
other respect perfectly useless stains, showed this line in
several specimens. The course of the central line is often
marked at the posterior end by a rather irregular and
indefinite violet-blue granule, more especially where there
is a vacuole in front of the blepharoplast; in these cases the
sranule and terminal portion of the line lie immediately in
front of the vacuole (Figs. 5, 6, 8). Anteriorly, there is
another granule which is much smaller and very inconstant ;
in favourable specimens a small vacuole may be seen just
posterior to the granule (Fig. 8). The central line is present
with greater or less distinctness in a very large number of
individuals. In many cases it is connected with the karyo-
some; this is particularly clear in individuals where the
karyosome is divided into two. A very common condition
for trypanosomes in this material is to be seen in Figs. 5, 6.
Here there is no sign of division in either blepharoplast or
plasma, but the karyosome, which is often very large, is
divided into two parts, which lie one at each end of the
nucleus. The central line in these cases runs uninterruptedly
from the blepharoplast, or vacuole, right through both the

Notes on certain blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 235

karyosomes and through the strand which at this stage
joims them. Some specimens suggest that the red strand
between the two daughter karyosomes has disappeared, and
left the blue staining central line. The remaining chromatin
at this stage may be arranged in various ways (Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8).
It may either be scattered over an irregular fine reticulum
(z.e., the chromatic part of the nucleus is still in the resting
condition), or may form separate, more or less rod-shaped
chromosomes. It may form cross bars running from one
side of the nucleus to the other, or bars attached to the
central line, and passing from it to the periphery, or the
chromatin may already be arranged in the irregularly shaped
caps at either end round the karyosomes.

A later stage of this process shows the two karyosomes
completely separated: the line is now interrupted in the
middle, and passes from the blepharoplast to one karyosome,
and from the other, 2.¢., the anterior karyosome, to the tip of
the body (Figs. 1, 2). At division of the plasma the line
apparently divides, but the process is obscure. This much,
however, is certain, that specimens are found in a late stage
of division when blepharoplast, nucleus, and membrane are
already divided (or sometimes a little earlier), which show two
central lines passing forwards, one in each daughter individual.

In many specimens that part of the line which lies
anterior to the nucleus bears a number of thickenings, stain-
ing from violet to reddish-violet or even red; sometimes
bars can be seen to pass out from these either on one side or
on both (Figs. 9, 7, 8, 5).

These appearances were for a time incomprehensible, until
a number of forms were met with which offered an explana-
tion. Trypanosomes were found (Figs. 11, 6, 3) which showed
a spiral band of chromatin-staining substance (giving a clear
red reaction with the modified Romanowski) in the pre-
nuclear part of the animal. When this band is present the
central line is often only to be seen in the post-nuclear part,
but specimens are found which show both the spiral band
and the line. The line and the band are really two separate
structures, although they seem to have a certain amount of
connection with one another. The spiral is continued some-

236 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

times right into’ the nucleus proper, in which the chromatin
may show traces of a spiral arrangement (Fig. 11). Nuclei,
with chromatin forming a quite definite spiral band, are also
found in individuals which do not show the band in the
pre-nuclear part of the body (Fig. 12). Cross bars (Fig. 7) are
often found instead of the spiral band; these strongly suggest
that they have been formed by the nipping across of the
spiral. The bars (Figs. 5, 8, 9) now apparently become con-
nected with the central line, and presently it is found that
the red staining reaction begins to be lost—the time at which
this happens seems to vary. They are soon reduced to little
concentrations along the central line, with faint bars going
out at right angles; the bars may then disappear, leaving
only the violet-blue thickenings. The spiral band, though
not by any means rare, is still not a very frequent appear-
ance, and the same may be said of the red staining cross
bars, but the two last stages are quite commonly seen; the
central line, as I have before mentioned, occurs in a very
large proportion of individuals. I am unable to suggest
what is the functional importance of the spiral band. Appear-
ances such as those just described are usually quite absent
from the post-nuclear part, but indistinct thickenings of the
central line and stray red staining bars are occasionally seen:
these are, however, rare exceptions, and may be regarded
possibly as vestigial in character.

The band, in my opinion, is to be interpreted as the
remnant of a primitive spiral running the whole length of
the animal, and representing the chromatic part of the
primitive nuclear apparatus, the central line representing the
primitive karyosome. The nucleus, as now found in the
majority of the trypanosomes, would be, on this view, a con-
centration of the central portion of the primary elongated
apparatus. This view is the more probable, as the primitive
condition of a spiral breaking up into cross bars is not
infrequently found in the somatic nucleus of the trypano-
somes I examined (Figs. 10,12). It is an interesting ques-
tion as to whether there may not be a possible phylogenetic
connection between this primitive spiral and the spireme
of much higher forms.

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 237

Mr W.S. Perrin has lately published (Archiv fiir Protis-
tenkunde, Bd. vii. Heft 1, 1906) an account of a primitive
trypanosome, 7’rypanosoma balbiani, where he has described
a spiral band of chromatin which contains a thread-like
karyosome. The stage illustrated in Perrin’s fig. 10 shows
a spiral of chromatin and a separate longitudinal thread, the
karyosome. In the ordinary condition of Trypanosoma
balbianw, the karyosome is not so clearly differentiated. The
stage shown in fig. 10 of Perrin’s paper resembles the state
of affairs in the 7’rypanosoma brucei with the spiral and the
line, though in this last-named form there is, of course, the
well-developed blepharoplast, and usually the central somatic
nucleus. It is interesting to note that these forms replace
one of the hypothetical figures in the series of diagrams
which Perrin published in the above-mentioned paper to
illustrate the connection between Z'rypanosoma balbianw and
Trypanosoma noctuce.

I have no suggestion to offer as to how these forms
appeared in my material; they were evidently absent from
the infections studied by Prowazek, as he makes no mention
of them, and they are far too striking to have escaped the
notice of this observer had they been present. Possibly
these specimens may be reversions to a more primitive
condition, due to the fact that the trypanosome has been
propagated by artificial transference from host to host for
a considerable time without passing any period in the
alimentary tract of Glossina, which is the natural method of
infection. The forms I have here described may perhaps be
a reversion to the one host type from which the ordinary ©
trypanosome developed.

2. Trypanosoma pythonis, n.sp.

This hemosporidian is parasitic in the blood of an African
python from the Gambia. I have, through the courtesy of
Dr Logan Taylor, had the opportunity of looking through
some films made from the blood of an infected animal, and
I am indebted to him for the permission to publish the
results.

The parasite in question is a fairly large organism,

238 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

measuring 12 p» to 15 por 16 p; it is slightly pointed at one
end, and there is a tendency to curl up at this end, but the
condition found here does not approach the bent-up double-
shanked appearance of Hemogregarines. The protoplasm is
finely alveolar, and no conspicuous granules, food particles,
or pigment are present: vacuoles are also absent. As in
many parasites, there is no obvious differentiation into ecto-
plasm and endoplasm. Quite the most conspicuous feature

Fig. 3.
Text-Figs. 1, 2, and 3.— Trypanosoma pythonis,
Fig. 1. The blepharoplast is in close proximity to the nucleus.
Fig. 2. The blepharoplast is connected with the nucleus by a fibril.
Fig. 3. Multiple infection of a single erythrocyte.

of the organism is the nucleus, which is large for a protozoon
of this size. At first sight it strongly suggests the complex
reticulate character of a metazoan nucleus, more especially as
it is often rather elongated. In favourable specimens, how-
ever, it appears to be of that type so often found in blood
parasites. In fact, it closely resembles the nucleus described
by Schaudinn in Z'rypanosoma noctue, that is to say, it is
composed of a hollow sphere, showing eight masses of
chromatin, while within this sphere is the karyosome, which
is also certainly at times a hollow structure, showing a number

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 239

of thickenings. I have on several occasions made out eight
of these, but the different masses of chromatin are only rarely
clearly defined in the karyosome. The whole nucleus is
bounded at this stage by that—for the Protozoa at least—
rather doubtful organ the nuclear membrane. Next to be de-
scribed is the centrosome, or as itmay here, I think, be called, the
blepharoplast. This appears as a small but still well-defined
granule, and is to be seen in the vast majority, though not in
all, of the parasites—indeed, it is a very constant feature.
The position of the blepharoplast in relation to the nucleus
varies in an interesting and suggestive way. Thus, in what
I take to be one of the earlier stages, it is lying closely
apposed to the large nucleus (Text-Fig. 1). Ina later stage the
blepharoplast is more remote, but is bound to the big nucleus by
aquite definitethread (Text-Fig. 2): thisthreadseems ultimately
to disappear. The centrosome body is not an altogether simple
granule. When once it has left the near neighbourhood of
the large nucleus, it becomes clear that rays pass from it
into the cytoplasm. The centrosome or blepharoplast seems
capable of increasing slightly in size and of dividing, the
products showing a strong tendency to remain connected
together by a staining fibril. This process of division may
be repeated, and somewhat complex appearances are found ;
but owing to the limitations of the material, | am not ina
position to give a definite interpretation of the facts observed.
The blepharoplast is undoubtedly a product of the large
nucleus, but I cannot definitely say that it arises from it by
heteropolar mitosis. The evidence, however, is in favour of
this supposition, in which case the thread joining the blepharo-
plast to the large nucleus would correspond to the spindle
formed by the central granule, which, according to
Schaudinn’s description, lies within the karyosome. So far
as I can see at present, the small nucleus or blepharoplast
does divide by mitosis, but the details are very obscure.
The phenomena just described strongly recall Schaudinn’s
account of the development of the flagellar apparatus in
Trypanosoma noctue. This account is now too well known
to require recapitulation here.

It is true that I have not yet found any actual flagellate

240 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soevety.

forms. This, however, is not surprising, as their absence
may be explained in a number of ways. The material, to
begin with, is very limited, and composed, so far as I am
aware, only of peripheral blood; the flagellate forms may
possibly be found in the deep-seated organs, such as the liver
or the spleen, or may only finally be developed in another host.

In the light of Schaudinn’s researches into the life-history of
Trypanosoma noctuc, and particularly in view of the presence
of a well-marked blepharoplast, it is pretty clear that the
parasite in question is really the intracorpuscular stage of a
trypanosome, and I propose to call it provisionally 7'rypano-
soma pythonis.

This description is naturally of an incomplete nature, as
blood taken on a single occasion from an infected animal
rarely gives a sufficient number of different stages to form
anything like a complete series of the changes undergone by
the parasite during its sojourn in the blood. This criticism
is more particularly applicable to the parasite here discussed,
which very probably completes its life-cycle in another host.

The two next forms to be considered were found in the
blood of specimens of Plearonectes platessa and Plewronectes
jlesus, which were in the tanks of the Millport Biological
Station in January 1906.

The first of these is a typical trypanosome, with blepharo-
plast, flagellum, and undulating membrane. The second is a
Hemogregarine inhabiting the red blood-corpuscles, a point of
interest being that they were found associated in the same host.

3. Trypanosoma from blood of P. flesus and P. platessa.

The trypanosome? is a large creature, measuring from 50 » to

1 Since this paper was read, I have found that M. Lebailly has, in a short
note contributed to the C. R. Ac. Sci. Paris, T. 189, 1904, drawn attention
to parasites in the blood of Plewronectes flesus and P. platessa, and has named
them respectively Trypanosoma flesi, T'. platesse, Hemogregarina flesi, and
H. platesse. While both the Trypanosome and Hemogregarine described by
M. Lebailly appear to correspond with those found by myself, there seems to
me to be only one species of Trypanosome and one species of Hemogregarine.
That is to say, the Trypanosome I found in Pleuronectes platessa appeared to
me to be identical with the one present in the specimens of Plewronectes flesus
which I examined, and similarly with the Hemogregarine.

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 241

60 » in length (Text-Fig.4). It has a narrow, undulating mem-
brane, produced at one end into a flagellum. The movement of
this creature is particularly beautiful ; it sometimes proceeds
forwards with a graceful eel-like motion, at other times roll-
ing itself up into a wheel and whirling round in a circle.

Text-Fig. 4.—Trypanosoma from Pleuronectes.

I would like here to emphasise the uncertainty of a nega-
tive diagnosis in the case of the blood flagellates of fishes ;
the flagellates are usually so scarce in positive cases that it
is impossible to conclude that they are absent merely because
a careful search has failed to reveal their presence. Thus in
one case where two live specimens were observed, no speci-
mens at all were found in the prepared films. The most
severe of the three infections showed only four or five speci-
mens in a 2 by 1 inch dry film. The endocorpuscular forms
are usually present in greater numbers, and a negative result
is apparently more trustworthy.

I am not yet in a position to describe the details of the
nuclear apparatus of this creature, on account of technical
difficulties in staining. There is, however, a large nucleus
lying at the centre of the creature, or slightly anterior to it,
and there is a complicated blepharoplast present which takes
on a brilliant red colour when stained with polychrome
methylene blue or with Giemsa. This blepharoplast varies
in position, but is always near the vacuole, which lies a little
in front of the slightly truncated posterior end of the animal ;
the blepharoplast may form a single compact body, or may
be composed of several separate elements. A number of
well-marked striations are to be seen passing longitudinally

242 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

along the body; these striations are very conspicuous 1m
individuals stained with polychrome methylene blue or
thionin, but are less clear in Giemsa preparations. Division
and further stages of the life-history have not as yet been
observed.

I hope in a future publication to describe in fuller detail
both this and the following forms.

4. Hemogregarine from blood of P. flesus and
P. platessa.

This parasite is a small creature, measuring 7 » to
12 » in length. There is a large nucleus, of much the
same type as that described for the form in the python,
only the karyosome is a more compact body, and does
not appear ring-shaped in the ordinary resting stage: it is
a more variable organ, and the appearance it presents in
the different specimens suggests that it is an important
element in the nuclear apparatus (Fig. 14). The number of
chromosomes is not quite easy to make out, but there appear
to be eight. The nuclear membrane is not at all a constant
structure. It is present in some stages, but very frequently
the chromatin lies arranged in definite little masses without
the faintest sign of a surrounding membrane (Fig. 16). A
very constant feature in this form is the presence of an
eosinophile body, lying towards the slightly more pointed
end of the creature. This body was at first taken to be
a vacuole, as it is absolutely unstained by methylene blue.
In all Giemsa preparations it stains a clear rose-pink, and
appears to correspond to a similar body found by Dr Rogers
in the Herpetomonas; which causes the disease known as
kala-azar. A centrosome is not present as a constant struc-
ture in the majority of specimens, but a well-marked granule,
whose appearance and staining reaction strongly suggest a
centrosome, is to be seen in a number of cases (Figs. 13, 14).
This granule appears to divide, and in certain cases marked

1The author uses the word Hepatomonas, but no doubt intends Herpe-
tomonas.

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 243

radiations can be seen to pass out from. it. I am not yet
clear as to the origin of this structure (Figs. 17, 21). As to
its position—it usually lies in close contact with the eosino-
phile body. This is an interesting point of resemblance to
the already cited Herpetomonas of kala-azar, where the
blepharoplast and eosinophile body are in the same close
topographical relation to one another. Occasionally the
centrosome lies behind the eosinophile body near to the
nucleus. In one case it appeared to be inside the eosinophile
body (Fig. 21). The size and appearance of the parasite
shows considerable variation. The usual form (Figs. 13, 14,
16, 17) is rather slim, with very finely alveolar protoplasm,
and few, if any granules, but forms are to be met with which
are of markedly larger dimensions, both broader and longer,
and with a more granular protoplasm. The alveolar structure
of the protoplasm is often exquisitely clear in these latter
forms (Figs. 18 to 22). The nucleus of this form is very
large, and has a more scattered irregular appearance: the
eosinophile body is occasionally missing. This is very
possibly a macrogamete. Forms intermediate as to size are
found between these and the ordinary individual. I take
them to be probably young female forms; they are dis-
tinguished by the abnormal size of the nucleus, which may
occupy two-thirds of the whole animal. The characteristic
configuration of the chromatin is not to be made out in these
specimens, the whole nucleus having a deeply staining,
almost reticulate appearance. Large forms with two nuclei
are found, and of these, two types, as far as I can see at
present, are to be distinguished: (1) those where (Fig. 22)
the two nuclei show the ordinary number of chromosomes;
and (2) those which show (Fig. 23) only four chromatin
masses. This last suggests a reduction division, but I have
not got sufficient information to make a definite statement,
more especially as this is a point which requires very careful
investigation in forms such as the one at present under
discussion.

The details of division are still very obscure, owing to lack
of material, but there appears to be, as in many trypanosomes
(and other Protozoa, ¢.g., Huglena and Coccidiwm schubergi), a

244 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

division of the chromosomes, or, in less specialised cases, of
the chromatin, without the formation of an equatorial plate
(Fig. 15). |

There is, it appears to me, strong presumptive evidence
that this form has a flagellate stage, very probably in some
invertebrate host. The features which suggest this are the
eosinophile body and the centrosome, and the absence appar-
ently of schizogonous stages, which form so conspicuous a
feature in Heemogregarines and Halteridia proper.

The occurrence of the parasites here mentioned is as
follows:—Out of ten plaice (four of which were large,
freshly caught specimens) four were infected with the
endocorpuscular form; two of these infected animals
showed the large trypanosome. Out of eight flounders
examined, one showed infection with the endocorpuscular
form and one with the trypanosome. Unfortunately the
films made from this last specimen were very badly fixed,
and I cannot make certain as to the presence of the endo-
corpuscular parasite.

I do not wish, at the present time, to assert that the
endocorpuscular form has anything to do with the trypano-
some; the discrepancy in size is an @ prio7t argument against
the probability of such a relation. It may very possibly be
a case of double infection. However, it is interesting to
find the two forms in the same host.

5, Trypanosoma rai.

MM. Laveran and Mesnil (Zrypanosomes et Trypano-
somiases. Paris, 1904) described a trypanosome which they
had observed in the blood of various rays. Three specimens
of Raia microcellata which I examined in the end of March
1906 at the Millport Marine Station were found to be infected
with a trypanosome, which agrees with that described by the
above observers, with the exception of two points, namely,
the length of the body behind the blepharoplast and the
construction of the nucleus. In the individuals which I
observed, the part behind the blepharoplast is regularly much
longer than in MM. Laveran and Mesnil’s figure. The

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 245

divergence between the two forms as regards the nucleus is,
however, a more serious point of difference. (Text-Fig. 5.)

,

Text-Fig. 5.—Trypanosama raic.

The nucleus lies towards the flagellar end of the animal.
It consists of a large central karyosome, staining blue mottled
with red (Laveran’s modification of Romanowski’s stain) :
this body is surrounded by a clear space, staining pink,
which is traversed by numerous fine red rays extending to
the limit of the nucleus. I think this nucleus is to be inter-
preted as consisting of a large plastin karyosome carrying little
chromatin, and of a fine regular reticulum (2¢, the rays).
This nucleus is exceedingly constant, which is a feature
rare in trypanosomes, where the most bewildering differ-
ences in nuclear appearance are the rule rather than the
exception.

In spite of the discrepancy between the above account of
the nucleus and that indicated by Laveran and Mesnil, I do
not think it very probable that I am here dealing with a
distinct species,

246 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

6. Hemogregarine from blood of Raia microcellata.

A Halteridium-like parasite was also found in the red
blood-corpuscles of Rata microcellata. This parasite appears
to correspond with Hamogregarina delagei, described by MM.
Laveran and Mesnil as parasitic in the erythrocytes of Raza
punctata and R. mosaica (C. RB. Ac. Sct. Paris, T. 135, 1902).

The parasite was, on the whole, rare and difficult to see.
It is found lying at the ends or sides of the erythrocytes. The
creature is about 10 » to 16 » in length, and is usually
shaped like a rather thin sausage, though fusiform individuals
are also met with. There is no obvious blepharoplast.
Vacuoles are occasionally present, as also granules, which
stain almost black with methylene blue: in Giemsa prepara-
tions the latter do not show up anything like so clearly.

The nucleus, which is large in size, is either somewhat
reticulate in character or shows an irregular arrangement of
chromatin round what appears to be a karyosome. At times
the boundary of the nucleus is sharp and membrane-like,
at others the collection of chromatin granules shows an
irregular external boundary.

Division or schizogonous stages have not been met with.

I do not at present see any connection between this form
and the trypanosome cycle. It is, however, interesting and
possibly significant to note that in all the three cases
observed the Trypanosome was accompanied by the Halter-
idium. This recalls the similar juxtaposition of parasites
found in the plaice and flounder.

In conclusion, I may call attention to two points in the
above description on which I desire to lay stress: firstly, the
occurrence of a typical blepharoplast within the endocorpus-
cular parasite of the python—indicating that it has a free
trypanosome stage; and secondly, the occurrence of a spiral
arrangement of chromatin in 7. brucei—recalling the condi-
tion found in 7. balbianiz, and confirming the near relation-
ship of 7. balbianii to the typical trypanosomes, and so
indirectly supporting the view that the genera 7'rypanosoma
and Spirocheta are closely allied forms.

Notes on certain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa. 247

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.

All the figures are from preparations stained with modifications of the
Romanowski method, with the exception of Fig. 14, which is stained with
polychrome methylene blue. The figures are all Camera lucida drawings,
made under the two millimetre apochromatic oil immersion lens, by Zeiss,
and the eighteen compensating eye-piece. The drawing was made at the
level of the table.

Figs. 1 to 12 represent 7’rypanosoma brucei.

Fig. 1. The karyosome is divided into two parts: the chromatin is repre-

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Pig.

Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

Om © bp

sented by rods arranged in an oval.

. Division stage showing central line.

. Spiral in pre-nuclear part, and central line in post-nuclear part.

. Autosynthesis (?) of the nucleus.

. Central line passing through the nucleus; it shows thickening in

pre-nuclear part. The karyosome has divided.

. Central line and spiral in pre-nuclear part.
. Chromatin arranged in cross bars; central line present.
: Chromatin of the nucleus arranged in cross bars. This shows the

vacuole and granule at the anterior extremity of the central
line.

. The central line shows thickenings and cross bars in pre-nuclear

part.

. Nucleus, with chromatin in bars.
. The pre-nuclear spiral band is continued into the nucleus.
. Spiral arrangement of the chromatin in the nucleus.

Figs. 13 to 23 represent the endocorpuscular parasite found in

13.
14,
15.
16.
“le

18.

19,
20.

21.

22.

23.

Pleuronectes platessa and Plewronectes Jlesus.

This shows the eosinophile body and the centrosome: the arrange-
ment of the chromatin in this specimen is obscure.

Specimen stained with polychrome methylene blue, eosinophile
body unstained, centrosome present: nucleus shows the karyo-
some and eight somewhat irregularly-shaped chromosomes.

Karyosome elongated: the chromosomes appear to be dividing.

Eight chromosomes, karyosome: the nuclear membrane is absent.

This shows the centrosome with radiations passing from it; it is
lying in the protoplasm, and not adjacent to the eosinophile body.

Large granular form, with compact nucleus; the separate chromo-
somes are not clearly defined.

Smaller form, with large nucleus; probably intermediate stage.

Division of nucleus: nucleus nearest eosinophile body shows eight
chromosomes.

Much the same stage as Fig. 18, but here centrosome apparently
inside the eosinophile body.

Form with a large and less compact nucleus; the protoplasm
shows the eosinophile body and a vacuole.

Division of nucleus suggesting reduction of chromatin: there are
apparently only four chromosomes in each nucleus.

VOL. XVI. Z

248 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvrety.

XX. Notes on Fossils from the Falkland Islands brought home
by the Scottish National Antarctic Hapedition vn 1904-
By E. T. Newron, F.R.S. [Plate X.]

(Read 26th February 1906.)

Mr W. S. Bruce, the leader of the Scottish National
Antarctic Expedition, has sent me for examination several
blocks and smaller specimens of a buff-coloured sandstone
containing numerous casts of fossils, which were obtained
from Port Louis South, in the Falkland Islands. These
fossils were presented to Mr W.S. Bruce by the Governor
of the Islands, Mr (now Sir) Wm. Grey-Wilson, when the
Expedition visited that place in 1904. |

The largest of these specimens is a block of buff-coloured
micaceous sandstone, measuring about 20 inches in length by
about 18 inches in width and 9 or 10 inches thick: one surface
of this is covered by many casts of Brachiopod shells, most
of which are referable to the genus Spirifera. Numerous
smaller examples of a similar rock exhibit casts of other
Brachiopods and Crinoid stems. The matrix of all the
specimens is so similar that, without opposing evidence, they
may be regarded as from one horizon.

On two previous occasions fossils have been brought to
this country from the Falkland Islands, namely, by Charles
Darwin on the return of the “ Beagle” in the year 1844, and
by the “Challenger” when she returned from her expedition
in the year 1876.

The earliest account of the geology of the Falkland Islands
was by Charles Darwin about sixty years ago,! and on 25th
March 1846 he read a paper on the subject before the
Geological Society?; and this was followed by descriptions
and figures of the fossils by John Morris and Daniel Sharpe’.
The fossils illustrating these papers were deposited in the
Museum of Practical Geology, and many years afterwards

1 Voyage of the Beagle, 1844.
2 Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., vol. ii. p. 267.
3 Ibid., vol. ii. p. 274, pls. x., xi.

Notes on Fossils from the Falkland Islands. 249

were transferred to the British Museum, Cromwell Road,
South Kensington, where, by the courtesy of the officers, I
have had the opportunity of examining them.

Although satisfied as to the Paleozoic age of these fossils,
Morris and Sharpe would not refer them to any definite
formation. They say: “Thus we cannot attempt to place
the beds in the Falkland Islands, which have supplied these
specimens, on the level of any particular portion of the
European scale of formations, but must be contented with
saying that they belong to a part of the Palseozoic series of
which the position is still undetermined.”

It is interesting to find that a few years after the publica-
tion of Darwin’s discovery, Andrew Geddes Bain! read a
paper (1852) before the Geological Society “On the Geology
of South Africa,” which was followed by descriptions of
Paleozoic fossils by Daniel Sharpe and J. W. Salter,? among
them being many Brachiopods, which were referred to
species previously described from the Falkland Islands.
These Brachiopods, together with the Trilobites and other
fossils accompanying them, were referred without doubt to
the Devonian period.

The Falkland Islands were visited by H.M.S. “Challenger”
during her memorable voyage, and Sir Wyville Thomson,? in
his book, says that while they were at Port Stanley Mr
Moseley went across to Port Sussex to examine a supposed
deposit of coal, and “brought back a fine lot of fossils from
the sandstone, the beds and their contents having very much
the appearance of the ferruginous sandstones of May Hill or
Girvan. The species of Orthis, Atrypa, and Spirifer are
different; and as there are no graptolites in the schists, it is
probable that the whole series belongs to a somewhat later
period—possibly the base of the Devonians.”

The fossils from the Falkland Islands brought home by
the “Challenger” were submitted to Mr R. Etheridge, jun.,
and an account of them is given in the narrative of the cruise.‘

1 Trans. Geol. Soc., vol. vii., 1856, p. 175.

* Loe. cit., p. 208.

5 The Atlantic, vol. ii. p. 208, 1877.

4 Narrative of the Cruise of the Challenger, 1885, vol. i. part ii. p. 892.

250 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Mr Etheridge says the individuals of the genus Spirifera
were few in number, while Orthis, Chonetes, and Atrypa were
abundant. This is the reverse of what we find among the
specimens brought home by Mr Bruce, where the Spircfere
are the most abundant fossils.

Mr Etheridge recognised definitely three of the species
described by Morris and Sharpe, namely, Orthis Sulwana,
Atrypa palmata, and Spirifera antaretica; but there were
four other forms which he referred with doubt to Chonetes
Jalklandica (?), Orthis tenuis (?), O. concinna (?) and Spirifera
Orbignit (?).

These fossils, as we have seen, were thought by Sir
Wyville Thomson to indicate a horizon near the base of the
Devonian.

The “Challenger” fossils were obtained from Port Louis,
and were for the most part in a fine liver-coloured, mica-
ceous sandstone; but there were also pieces of buff-coloured
sandstone, apparently quite a different deposit, containing
fragments of Trilobites.

A further account of the Brachiopoda from the Bokkeveld
beds, South Africa, was published by Mr F. R. C. Reed in
1893.1 In this paper twenty-eight forms are recognised
and described, some six or seven being identical with
species recorded by Morris and Sharpe from the Falkland
Islands. Mr Reed thinks these Bokkeveld Brachiopods show
an undoubted Devonian facies, but he hesitates to assign
them to any particular part of that formation.

Quite recently Mr Ivor Thomas? has described a series of
fossils from strata regarded as of Devonian age, which were
collected by Professor Bodenbender at Cordoba, Argentina.
Among the forty-one forms described by Mr Ivor Thomas
there are six Brachiopods which he refers to species described
by Morris and Sharpe as Falkland Island fossils; two of
these, and perhaps the most distinctive, Spirifera antarctica
and Leptocelia flabellites, being among the fossils which form
the subject of the present communication. |

1 Annals of the South African Museum, vol. iv. p. 165.
2 “Neue Beitrige zur Kenntnis der devonischen Fauna Argentiniens,”
Zeitsch. d. Deutsch. Geol. Gesells., Band 57, 1905, p. 238.

Notes on Fossils from the Falkland Islands. 251

List oF BRACHIOPODA, Erc., FROM FALKLAND ISLANDS.

= Ga oS i
a :
se | Ea =
ht
ao 30 | B Bis oi
o o” Qos ao ros|
eS aS os ‘S a O i)
3 o ao oe
Bs nS apB ore gi
Om | 2 re) 2 5
obo | aa og | & ©
FALKLAND ISLAND FossiLs, ere ey) HD S 8 a.
described by Morris and Sharpe, 1846. Be ne ae ae Be a
Bas a8 os One °
iota oO 2 fe ifey ba 3
ie Paige He SS =
3 oO oa Zz A Be joa)
a2 <Q Ss) Su ke
ci a as | 2
—= a a o
“4 Sb re ap
Les lhe 5.2 we) ‘ee
& B S) 5 4
BS) a n
Chonetes falklandica, 2 i x x
Orthis Sulivani, x % 5 ve 2
oor.) LORUIS, : 2 ioe x
», concinna, : : ‘ ‘ 2 2 x
Atrypa palmata [now Leptocelia
flabellites], : : : ; x x x x oe
Spirifera Hawkinsi, . : : ae wie she = be
3 antarctica, . ; ; : x x es x x
re Orbignii, . : : : 2 3 x he nee
Orbicula sp. [now Orbiculoidea Baint], He 4 x -: x
Avicula sp., : : . : he Le ee whe 42
Crinoid stems, . : F ; ; a 5 283 hr x
Tribolite fragments, . : : . x wn att a x
From South Africa,
described by Sharpe in 1852.

Cryptonella (Terebratula) Baini, ; hes x x | ine Xe

An account of the fossils brought home by Mr Bruce will
now be given; and as they are in the form of hollow casts,
the descriptions are from impressions taken in wax, which
thus reproduce the forms of the original shells.

The matrix of these fossils. corresponds with the descrip-
tion “yellowish, sometimes micaceous, sandstone” given by
Darwin of the rocks in which most of his fossils were found;
in both cases, also, the fossils are in the condition of casts,
and the species appear to be identical. It seems probable,
therefore, that both series of fossils are from the same bed.
On the other hand, the “ Challenger” specimens, although so
similar as regards species, are said to be in a liver-coloured
sandstone, and are therefore from a different bed, but prob-

252 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

ably not far removed from the sandstone which yielded the
other two series.

The specimens brought home by Mr Bruce, as well as
those previously recorded from the Falkland Islands, are so
similar to the Brachiopods obtained from the Bokkeveld
beds of South Africa, that there can be little doubt as to
their being from beds of approximately the same age; and
Mr Reed’s statement that the Bokkeveld fossils exhibit a
Devonian facies is therefore strong confirmation of the
opinion expressed by the earlier writers as to the Devonian
age of these Falkland Island fossils.

1. Spirifera antarctica, M. and 8. (Pl. X. Figs. 1-10).

By far the greater number of the fossils brought home by
Mr Bruce are referable to the genus Spirvfera, and most of
them, as I think, to the species S. antarctica. At first sight
there seems to be a considerable difference in the forms, some
of the valves being much coarser than others; but when
examined more closely it will be found that the dorsal valves
have eight or nine ribs on each side of the median fold, and
the ventral valves nine or ten ribs on each side. The width
of the ribs varies somewhat in different specimens, and the
lines of growth are sometimes very strongly marked and
irregular; besides this, the ventral or grooved valves have
the ribs more or less angular, while in the dorsal or ridged
valve the ribs are more rounded. The hinge-area is wide,
concave, and marked by distinct longitudinal lines. The
deltidial opening seems to have occupied about half the
height of the area, which is marked on each side of the open-
ing by a distinct groove forming an inverted A (Fig. 5).

Among these Spirifers I do not find so much variation in
the number of the ribs as is figured and described by Morris
and Sharpe. The largest specimen (Fig. 3) is a ventral valve,
it is about 80 mm. wide and about 35 mm. high; while the
smallest specimen, which seems to belong to the same species,
is a dorsal valve, 16 mm. wide and 10 mm. high. The best
preserved example (Fig. 10) is a dorsal valve, 53 mm. wide
and 19 mm. high; the greatest width of the convex median

Notes on Fossils from the Falkland Islands. 253

fold is 9mm. There are eight rounded ribs on each side of
the fold, the outer ones being rather smaller than the inner
ones. These ribs are wider than the grooves between them.
The whole surface of the valve is marked by distinct thread-
like lines of growth, which, at irregular intervals, are more
strongly developed. The extremities of the hinge-line are
not so clearly seen in this specimen as in some others; but
it is evident that they were never so sharp in the dorsal as
in the ventral valve.

Having examined the type specimens now in the British
Museum, which were figured and described by Morris and
Sharpe, I have no hesitation in referring the specimens above
described to their Spirifera antarctica, It is true that in
their description this species is said to have twenty to
twenty-four ribs; but the specimens do not bear this out.
The example with the most numerous ribs is the one figured
on their plate xi. fig. 2a, and on this I can only count nine
ribs on one side of the median ridge, and then towards the
angle of the shell there is a space devoid of ribs, as in Mr
Bruce’s specimens.

I am strongly of opinion that the specimens called Spiri-
fera Orbignw by Morris and Sharpe are only younger examples
of S. antarctica. Mr R. Etheridge, jun., could only certainly
recognise the one species of Spirifera, S. antarctica, among
the fossils which the “Challenger” brought from the Falk-
land Islands.

Daniel Sharpe, in his description of the South African
fossils in 1856, retained the two species Spirifera antarctica
and S. Orbignit; but Mr F. R. C. Reed, in 1893} thought
that the South African forms should all be referred to
S. Orbignit, and that the true S. antarcticus of the Falkland
Islands was not present among the South African specimens.
Mr Reed says: “ After a careful examination of the original
specimens of S. antareticus and S. Orbignii from Cape Colony
described and figured by Sharpe in 1856, I am convinced
that they all belong to one species (with perhaps the excep-
tion of the one figured, op. cit., pl. xxvi. fig. 6).” Mr Reed
shows further that, except for the greater number of ribs

* Annals of the South African Museum, vol. iv. p. 165.

254 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

(20-24) in the Falkland Island 8. antarcticus, there is very
little difference between this species and 8. Orbignii. But
seeing (as I have stated above) that the type specimen of
S. antareticus has only eighteen ribs, or at most twenty
ribs, the chief if not the only grounds for retaining the two
names fails. Under these circumstances it is the name
S. antaretica which must be used, as was pointed out by
Mr Reed, who also called attention to Professor Kayser’s}
opinion, that S. antarctica and S. Orbignit are one and the
same species. Mr Ivor Thomas? has likewise united these
two forms under the one name.

2. Leptocelia flabellites (Conrad), (Pl. X. Figs. 11-14).

The Brachiopod shell figured and described by Morris and
Sharpe from the Falkland Islands as a new species under
the name of Atrypa palmata, is represented in Mr Bruce’s
collection by several examples similar to those figured by
Morris and Sharpe (loc. cit., pl. x. fig. 3), as well as the
broader forms from South Africa figured by the last-named
author (doc. cit., pl. xxvi. figs. 8, 9). Besides these, there are
a few examples of a smaller shell resembling the broad form
in shape, but with only three or four ribs on each side of the
median fold, which, I think, must be referred to the same
species.

The Atrypa palmata, M. and S%., is now regarded as
specifically identical with that called Atrypa flabellites
by Conrad,? and is referred to the genus Leptocelia.

L. flabellites was abundantly represented in the “Chal-
lenger” collection, and has been recognised in South Africa.
Mr F. R. C. Reed has given a full description and synonymy
of this species in his account of the Brachiopoda from the
Bokkeveld beds, and has alluded to the occurrence of the
same species on the continent of South America, in Devonian
rocks in Bolivia, Argentina, and Brazil. Mr Ivor Thomas
includes this among his Argentina forms.

1 Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Gesells., vol. xlix., 1897, p. 297, t. ix. figs. 1-4.
2 ‘Loc.ct., 1905; p. 261.
3 Fifth Ann. Rep. N.Y. Geol. Surv., p. 55, 1841.

Or

Notes on Fossils from the Falkland Islands. 25

3. Chonetes falklandica, M. and S.

Numerous impressions of Chonetes are to be seen upon the
slabs of stone, but none of them in a very perfect state of
preservation; and in no instance have hinge-spines been
detected. Some of the specimens may be referred to C. falk-
landica without much doubt; but others, which are larger,
may perhaps belong to another species.

Chonetes falklandica has been found in South Africa, but
Mr F. R. C. Reed questions the identification of specimens
so named from Argentina; and Mr Ivor Thomas is unable to
identify it among his fossils from that country.

4, Orthotetes.

There are a few impressions of Orthis-like Brachiopod
valves which resemble some of the forms figured by Morris
and Sharpe. Three of these represent valves externally
concave, and marked by numerous radiating lines; and they
seem most nearly to resemble 0. Sulivant, but cannot be
definitely determined.

5. Cryptonella Baini, Sharpe (Pl. X. Figs. 15, 16).

This Brachiopod, under the name of TZerebratula Baini,
was first described by Sharpe from South Africa, and has
been further described by Mr F. R. C. Reed from the same
country, but it seems not to have been hitherto recognised
among fossils from the Falkland Islands. There are among
Mr Bruce’s specimens two casts representing the exteriors of
two shells, long and broad forms, like those represented by
Sharpe’s two figures, plate xxvi. figs. 11 and 12, and
these I refer to the same species. The internal structure is
not seen; but feeling sure that they are the same species as
that described by the above-named authors, I follow Mr Reed
in placing it in the genus Cryptonella.

6. Orbiculoidea Barni, M. and S.

Several pieces of this Brachiopod have been detected
VOL. XVI. 2A

256 Proceedings of the Loyal Physical Society.

among Mr Bruce’s specimens, but all of them are mere
fragments.

7. Crinoidal Stems.

Some of the rock’ fragments contain many pieces of
Crinoidal stems, and are doubtless such as were alluded to
by Morris and Sharpe in their early description. These
stems are peculiar and characteristic, the ossicles being
marked by fine rings of fimbriated fringes. Similar stems
occur in the Bokkeveld beds, and are figured by Sharpe on
his plate xxv. fig. 24.

8. Trilobites.

There are two fragments of Trilobite pleurc, characterised
by exceedingly coarse pitting, but their generic position
remains doubtful.

Slab of Rock from near Hope Point, West Falkland,
containing numerous vmpressions of Crinoid Stenis.

Besides the fossils from Port Louis South, Mr Bruce sent
me another specimen from near Hope Point, West Falkland,
which was presented by Mr W. Felton. This is a quadrate
slab of hard, sandy rock, containing very many impressions
of Crinoid stems, the fossils themselves having been entirely
dissolved, and leaving only their casts. The slab is about
15 inches long and wide, and about 14 inch thick. The
Crinoid stems had been broken into small pieces before being
fossilised, the largest pieces being not more than 2 inches
long, with a diameter of perhaps one-third of an inch. The
number of ossicles in the longest pieces being eight or nine,
the length of each ossicle is rather less than its diameter.
The exterior of the stem is cylindrical in most cases, but
some of the impressions show numerous pittings, which may
represent ornamentation, but are more probably the bases of
cirri. The casts of the ends of the ossicles show very

Notes on Fossiis from the Falkland Islands. 257

indistinct radial markings, and in no case is the central tube
well seen. The geological age of this slab cannot be inferred
from the fossils, for Crinoid stems similar to these might
occur in beds of almost any age.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

The original specimens are from Port Louis South, Falkland
Islands, and being in the condition of casts only, impressions
in wax have been made, from which photographs have been
taken, and these reproduced by collotype process.

All the figures are natural size.

Spirifera antarctica, Morris and Sharpe.

1. Dorsal valve, hollow cast of exterior, coarse form.
2 mE exterior of coarse form.
,, 938 Ventral valve, large specimen.
S e narrow sulcus.
5. Hinge-area of large specimen.
6. Associated examples of dorsal and ventral valves, and a large
hinge-area.
Ventral valve, interior and hinge-area.
bs exterior.
33 >
Dorsal valve of very perfect specimen, showing external
ornamentation.

Leptocelia flabellites, Conrad.

Fig. 11. Rounded form, flattened valve and hinge-area.

jie ti We 7, inflated valve.
>», 13. Wide form.
9) Me. BG

Cryptonella Baini, Sharpe.

Fig. 15. Long oval form.
», 16. Broad form.

258 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

XXI. A Note on the Geology of Gough Isiand. By J. H.
Harvey Prriz, BSc., M.B., Geologist to the Scottish
National Antarctic Expedition.

(Read 26th March 1906.)

Gough Island lies in the South Atlantic in about £0° 20'S.,
9° 56’ W., some 1500 miles W. by 8. of the Cape of Good
Hope, which is the nearest land except the Island of Tristan
da Cunha, distant about 280 miles N. by W. The island has
a height of over 4000 feet, and is about 8 miles long by
4 broad.

It is one of the peaks of the mid-Atlantic rise, a ridge
which is covered by water less than 2000 fathoms deep, and
from which rise above water St Paul’s Rocks, Ascension, .
and Tristan da Cunha. No soundings have been taken
between this latter island and Gough Island, but the rise is
now known to extend southwards as far as the parallel of
55° §., and possibly Bouvet Island is situated on a spur
extending somewhat to the eastward.

The island was visited on the voyage homeward of the
“Scotia” from the Antarctic seas to Cape Town in April
1904, and three days were spent in its vicinity, but only on
one of these was landing possible. Even then the time
ashore was limited to several hours, so that nothing like a
complete survey of the island was possible; in fact, the
exploration ashore was restricted to the seaward end of a
narrow glen, and the difficulty of landing made it necessary
to limit the collection of rocks to a small number of hand
specimens, all of which were obtained within an area of some
few hundred yards.

The island, as seen from the sea, is very precipitous, and
in most places rises in sheer cliffs some 200 feet high, in-
creasing to nearer 1000 feet at the northern end of the
island. At the south-west end isa more or less level plateau
at an elevation of about 300 feet, but everywhere else the
island appears to consist of steep ridges separated by narrow
glens. In general appearance it reminds one rather of

A Note on the Geology of Gough Island. 259

Madeira, with its bold jagged outlines and steep slopes
deeply trenched by ravines, but its high, sheer cliffs are
more like those of St Helena, only differing in being much
more clothed with vegetation. The steep slope of the land
appears to be even greater under water, for at a distance of
2 miles from the coast (to the 8.-I.) a depth of 1522 fathoms
was obtained.

These cliffs bear witness to the rapidity with which the
coast-line is being eaten back by the waves, at a rate seem-
ingly much greater than that of the sub-srial denudation,
for most of the stream valleys have their courses sharply
truncated by the sea-cliffs, the streams ending in cascades
which pour out from the hanging valleys and tumble down the
precipices into the sea, forming very prominent features of the
landscape. Only very few of the streams—notably that one at
the mouth of which a landing was effected—have a deeper,
mature course, by which the water reaches the sea without
any terminal waterfall. These have excavated valleys which
apparently penetrate to the very heart of the island, and
should afford fairly easy access to the interior.

The highest part of the island appears to be of the nature
of a ridge, cut into two slightly separated summits. Nothing
indicative of a crater was observed. On the contrary,
through a telescope conspicuous horizontal terracing was
visible very near the summit. If these terraces are due to
successive sheets of lava, as seems probable, one must be
prepared to admit a former considerably greater extension
of the island. It may possibly even have been in continuity
with Tristan da Cunha: the fact that the latter has almost
certainly been continuous at one time with Nightingale
Island (one of its outhers), although now separated by water
over 1000 fathoms deep, makes this hypothesis at least
worthy of mention.

Some of the shore cliffs also show, though less distinctly,
a succession of lava flows, and in some of the beds a trans-
verse columnar structure is visible, but neither of these
features was seen in the rocks near the landing-place.

‘The stream at the mouth of which we landed might be
well compared with a typical small Highland burn,—there

VOL. XVI. 2B

260 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

were even the familiar pot-holes worn out in its bed,—and
to judge by the number and size of the boulders, in time of
spate it must be of considerable volume.

It forks some distance inland and from the ridge between
the two tributaries, but some way below the summit of the
island, there rises up a large rounded column of rock, which
has been named by some of the sealers, who have from time
to time lived on the island, “The Apostle.” This appeared,
from a distance, to be the stump of the plug of a volcanic
vent, but without closer inspection it was impossible to be
sure of its nature. It may be either a “Tower of Pelée” or
one of those phonolite bosses so common in the volcanic
islands of the South Atlantic, ¢.g., “Lot” and “ Lot’s Wife”
at St Helena, the “ Peak” of Fernando Noronha, and the
“Nine-pin Rock” on South Trinidad. Its appearance was
not at all unlike the pictures of the latter.

Dykes do not form very prominent scenic features, so far
as was seen, save in one of the hanging valleys near the
north-east corner of the island, where large detached wall-
like pieces stand out prominently on both sides of the valley.
Smaller vertical dykes can, however, be traced up the face
of the cliffs in various places.

Around a considerable part of the island there is a rough
bouldery beach at the foot of the cliffs, with here and
there small screes resting on it. Numerous sea-caves occur
on the south and east coasts at a height of 10 to 15 feet
above sea-level, and the ground on which stand the ruined
huts at the landing-place is a small raised beach of coarse
pebbles, through which the stream has cut a bed. There has
evidently been, therefore, a slight alteration of sea-level in
favour of the land, and it is interesting to note that in the
South Orkneys there has also been a recent elevation of
about the same extent.

The first thing that attracted one’s attention on landing
was the lower part of the cliff on the left bank of the stream,
where a bright yellow semicircular patch of rock, some 30 to
40 feet in radius, formed a prominent contrast to the darker
rock surrounding it. This was found to be a fine grained
tuff or peperino, containing abundant black crystals of augite

A Note on the Geoiogy of Gough Island. 261

(No. 3). It was evidently water-laid, containing small
rounded lapilii and scoriz arranged along horizontal lines
of stratification.

Specimens of the lava which had overflown this tuff were
taken from various points (Nos. 2, 4, 7, and (7) 6). In their
naked eye appearances these varied considerably, but I was
unable to make out any definite succession of flow. All
appeared, however, to be lavas, not intrusive sheets.

Another fragmental rock of very localised occurrence was
found on the right bank of the stream, between two dykes,
each about 2 feet thick, and running parallel to the shore,
6 to 8 feet apart. This was of a bright red colour, contain-
ing numerous crystals of felspar, and was seen only in the
narrow outcrop on the bank of the stream between the two
dykes. It was friable, and gave one the impression of being
a volcanic ash (No. 10) which had accumulated in the hollow
between the dykes subsequent to their formation. Its
strictly limited occurrence between the dykes made one
wonder whether it was not a decomposition product due to
their influence, but there were no signs of it along the lines
of contact with the dykes on either side. It may, however,
have been the slaggy surface of one of the lava flows through
which the dyke ran.

On the rising slope on the right bank of the stream there
was a coarse agglomerate composed of boulders firmly
cemented together by scoriz, so as to form a compact mass
as hard as the solid lava. Many of the boulders were rather
rounded, and I am inclined to think it had been formed

under water, although I could not fully satisfy myself on

this point. Some of the rocks in this agglomerate had a
very white weathered crust (No. 8), and were at first mis-
taken for a quartzite, but on exposing a fresh surface they
were found to be volcanic in nature. As numerous white
patches of rock had been noted from the ship at various
parts of the coast, it is possible that this agglomerate has a
fairly wide distribution throughout the island.

In addition to the double dyke already mentioned, a large
dyke, about 6 feet wide, cropped out on the shore to the
north of the peperino (No. 9). This dyke ran at about right

262 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

angles to the coast-line. Between it and the peperino there
was a small knob of rock, seemingly also intrusive, which
contained many large augite crystals; in fact, these formed
by far the larger part of the rock mass.

Besides these rocks found in situ, some specimens were
taken from boulders in the stream as giving some indication
of the rocks occurring farther inland. The samples were
picked from rocks evidently different from those seen i situ.
A grey, almost homogeneous rock (No. 14) was particularly
common. Others were red and brown trachyte-like rocks,
and a sample of grey compact tuff was also obtained. All
were volcanic with the exception of one small piece of lime-
stone, picked up at the mouth of the stream. Had this been
found in situ, its occurrence would be a very strong argument
in favour of the former existence of a great land area between
South Africa and South America. But as there is the double
possibility of its having been carried there by an iceberg or
by some of the sealers who have visited the island, no positive
conclusions can be drawn from it. Mr Schwarz has already
stated! pretty strongly, on the evidence of a piece of gneiss
picked up on Tristan da Cunha, the petrographical evidence
in favour of a “ Flabellites Land,” occupying the greater part
of what is now the basin of the South Atlantic.

1 Schwarz, ‘‘ Rocks of Tristan d’Acuuha,” 7'rans. South African Phil. Soc.,
1905, vol. xvi. part i. See also Rudmose-Brown, ‘‘ Diego Alvarez or Gough
Island,” Scot. Geog. Mag., 1905, p. 430. L. V. Pirsson, ‘* Notes on some
Volcanic Rocks from Gough’s Island,” Am. Jour. of Science, 1893, p. 380.

Notes on the Petrology of Gough Island. 263

XXII. Notes on the Petrology of Gough Island.
By R. Camppe.t, M.A., B.Sc.

(Read 26th March 1906. )

The material collected by Dr Pirie includes volcanic rocks,
tuffs, and a boulder of limestone. The volcanic rocks, which
are all remarkably fresh, comprise several varieties of

trachyte, trachy-dolerite, and basalt.

I. TRACHYTES.

Trachytes are represented by two types. One of these is
a rock which varies in colour from very pale brown to
reddish brown (G. 5, 12, 19)."| Small phenocrysts of felspar,
biotite, and green augite are embedded in a compact, fels-
pathic ground-mass. Examined microscopically, the felspar
phenocrysts, which occur in tabular sections, often showing
a marginal zone of inclusions with a narrow band of later
felspar substance, appear to be typical sanidines. Some of
them, however, exhibit the characteristic fine striation of
anorthoclase. They enclose fairly large idiomorphic crystals
of biotite and augite. Next in abundance to the felspar
comes biotite, showing the usual evidences of magmatic
resorption. The augite occurs rather sparingly, and is pale
green in thin section. The ground-mass is holocrystalline,
and consists mainly of alkali felspar. Augite occurs spar-
ingly in a second generation. Zircen, apatite, and magnetite
are also present. The structure is typically trachytic.

The specimens examined were obtained in situ.

The second type (G. 14) is of a pale grey colour, compact
in texture, and non-porphyritic. In thin section the rock is
seen to be holocrystalline, consisting of lath-shaped crystals
of orthoclase, with scattered, irregular granules and ophitic
patches of bright green, dichroic, soda-augite, and particles
of magnetite. Small zircons and apatite needles also occur.

* Specimens of the various rocks may be seen in the Geological Museum,
University of Edinburgh.

264 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

Parallel arrangement of the felspar laths gives the rock in
parts a well-marked fluidal structure. |

The specimens sliced were stream boulders. A rock of
similar appearance, forming a flow or series of flows which
overlie the brown trachytes, is probably the source of these
boulders. The agglomerate mentioned above is composed
largely of angular fragments of a pale grey rock, which is
identical in microscopic character with that just described
(G8):

II. Basatts (including TRACHY-DOLERITES).

Specimens were obtained from four lava flows and from
two dykes.

(G. 2.) Microscopically this is a rock of ashy grey colour,
with scattered phenocrysts of felspar, augite, and olivine.
In thin section the phenocrysts are seen to be plagioclase
felspar, green augite, and olivine. From the extinction
angles in sections cut at right angles to the albite lamelle
the felspar is seen to be basic labradorite. The olivine is
very fresh. None of the phenocrysts are abundant. The
bulk of the rock consists of a fine grained ground-mass,
which is largely felspathic. Laths of oligoclase, pale green
augite (prismatic in habit, and often occurring in cross twins),
minute needles of apatite, along with particles of iron ore,
are embedded in poecilitic fashion in a felspathic base. The
felspathic base has a refractive index well under that of
Canada balsam, and is probably orthoclase.

(G. 6.) In this specimen the porphyritic constituents are
much more abundant and the ground-mass is much lighter
in colour. The phenocrysts of plagioclase frequently occur
in clusters, and have a glassy appearance in hand specimens.
Examined microscopically they exhibit albite, pericline, and
Carlsbad twinning, and well-marked zonary banding. Since
this banding disappears simultaneously with the albite
lamelle, it is probably due to ultra-microscopic twinning.
The inclusions consist of large plates of magnetite, small
rounded olivines, and needles of apatite. Many of the
crystals show also a marginal zone of inclusions of magnetite,
augite, etc., which have been enclosed by a later growth of

Notes on the Petrology of Gough Island. 265

the felspar substance. As in G. 2, the plagioclase is a basic
labradorite. Olivine is abundant in rounded, often much
corroded, phenocrysts. These show a marginal decomposi-
tion zone of brown limonite. An aggregation of olivine,
apatite, and magnetite in one part of the slide is rather
suggestive of an “olivine nodule.” Augite phenocrysts, pale
green in section, occur sparingly.

The ground-mass is andesitic in habit. It consists largely
of a network of interwoven laths of oligoclase, through which
are scattered small augites, magnetite, and many thin needles
of apatite. The felspathic base, which is so abundant in
G. 2, here plays a very subordinate part in the composition
of the rock.

(G. 4.) Macroscopically this is a grey, slaggy, vesicular
lava, with phenocrysts of olivine and felspar. Examined
microscopically it is seen to be exceedingly rich in olivine.
The felspar phenocrysts are again basic labradorite. The
ground-mass consists mainly of laths of labradorite, with
green augite, apatite, and magnetite in relatively small
proportions.

(G. 7.) In hand specimen this rock shows large pheno-
erysts of felspar, augite, and olivine in a pale grey ground-
mass. It weathers to a brown crust. The felspar pheno-
erysts are labradorite, and usually occur in groups. Most
of the crystals are surrounded by a narrow zone of more
acid plagioclase. Microscopic examination reveals the pre-
sence of numerous idiomorphic prisms of a rhombic pyroxene,
which shows the characteristic pleochroism of hypersthene.
The rock is also rich in olivine. Along with these are pheno-
crysts of a pale green monoclinic pyroxene.

The ground-mass resembles that of G. 4, but contains a
fair amount of the felspathic base which is so abundant in
G. 2.

The most interesting feature in this rock is the occurrence
together of hypersthene and olivine.

(G. 11.) This a dark grey rock, mottled all over with
small phenocrysts of felspar. Microscopic examination
reveals the presence of scattered phenocrysts of olivine and
brown augite. One of the latter encloses ophitically a large

266 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

lath-shaped plagioclase. The felspar phenocrysts are basic
labradorite. The rock is very porous, and the nature of the
ground-mass is rather obscured by products of decomposition.
It consists mainly of laths of labradorite, prismatic crystals
of brown augite, and magnetite.

The specimens were taken from two narrow dykes, cutting
the brown trachyte and parallel to the coast-line.

(G. 9.) The specimen is from the margin of a dyke run-
ning at right angles to the coast-line. It shows a beautiful
chilled edge. In thin section it is seen to be a very fine
erained basaltic rock, with small phenocrysts of basic
labradorite in a ground-mass which is made up chiefly of
microlites of augite and plagioclase, with a considerable
amount of residual glass. One section shows a large pheno-
cryst of brown hornblende.

Some of the lavas, which we have termed basalts, appear
to be types intermediate in character between trachytes and
normal basalts. While their exact systematic position
cannot be stated with certainty until chemical analyses
have been made, the mineral composition seems to indicate
that they belong to the trachy-dolerites of Abich (inter-
mediate rocks rich in potassium). Similar transition types
occur in the Azores, Teneriffe, and Ascension,! and also in
the Tristan d’Acunha group.2 Thus it would appear that
the trachy-dolerites are a constant feature in that line of
volcanic islands which sweeps across the South Atlantic.

Tuffs—The tuffs are greyish to brown in colour, with
rounded lapilli of volcanic rocks and broken crystals of
augite and felspar. In thin section they are seen to consist
mainly of fragments of glass.

Limestone.—Specimen from a boulder. Microscopic ex-
amination shows that this rock consists of irregular grains
of granitic quartz, flakes of muscovite, and much fragmentary
organic material, conspicuous among which are spines and
plates of echinoderms: these various constituents are
embedded in a calcareous cementing material. The rock is
undoubtedly of terrigenous origin.

1 Jour. of Geol., v. p. 362.
2 Trans. South African Phil. Soc., xvi.

, f * -
- ’ ,
eS oe ae 49) 7: % . ’
"ae s AS ian? I
: -
we by F ay ae ; 4 whe t
: erg 4) 4 ) maha Get € ati 4 oan ds .* ahha

ALGAL s i ads be Li aoe < ts
GS: ea) oe,
Ute ol) & pty fe an ae iyi cae)
aeanyd Bene DY! OA ae

aly aed aeok ; whe Breathe

Poy (AR UA RN Alera

Ra oe he

6 o.5 O ERAS SANG Ba ) = shah aa a
Se eRe ] ‘ : .' e *

OCEBDI

0 pte say me K
y

a 7 + ¥ » 4:

“
~
ede
A
Pi -

ve

ay ae? f - / vh's),'s ‘oe wee : : pt : ‘ ‘a
ahh? : thane pas nok THE > 4 = Ter | MIT ei r oye f - as
2) Sa ‘ «4 L « Py
wa ee maa) F ~ SN oe “ =¥ . > 2
it his ; Ns tatiaet ‘ Lak ye fe etd
. . 4 . *
4 ; } : r+ «

y e \ 3 fot " y
NATUR f AG STORY, KDR shoe ‘“ < vi ee
oe 20 Dine Ge ane te a ie :
1%: oe (G8-1801) 1 TAY: SER ay eraaen
4 on 2 AGS fA8L) RE be a3 ts tose ea Eg as .
F c\ , RSS ad Pages 88 a : ae
2 DES C9 sad eee PY ;: “ ms
es * ; Robs go > eee
*
1 aS
‘
. “ a "
: age Be
4 ° aa (Fy
* mF
’ *
paRer d oe
ee
Mi A

peed i Weep <0 eames ae &
or Bresh- Water, ie seine! Giese found in’ fhe? Mites ‘ fr:
of tie: River Forth : and its Estuary. By) Tuomas Scorr, eee.
F.LS., Mem. i “Boe,” ‘Zool. He France, | ete. ’ Part, SV Cy Y26R eae

Pau he! Bae » ¥ cy ‘ Pes Of Gf ck BG f,
OL ees ty ! C Bie ‘ is
Re ; i

a bu, , ati

Oy j-

Hive ee ek

ae ait re y — : M Le 4
4 : ee re . a red £ ‘ : ee { “
“4 a - Paha J }
Wi a ee si oe gy i “¥)
bs i wr We ty? we 4
3 Py ‘a Cag ar eters fos tae hoy OF Sea ag? &

PRICE OF THE

. Part 1 (1854- 56), out of print,
Part 2 (1856-58), out of print,
. Part 1 (1858-61), out of print,
Part 2 (1861-62), out of print,
. Part 1 (1862-63), owt of print,
Part 2 (1863-64), owt of print,
Part 3 (1864-65), out of print,
Part 4 (1865-66), out of print,

Vol.) Vi.

. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print,

Part 2 (1875-76), out of print,
Part 3 (1876-78), out pe

Part 1 (1876-79),

Part 2 (1879-80),
(1880-81),

Title and Index of this Vol. fests

Vol: Vif.

Do.

VolwyiT.

Vol xT)

Do.

Vol. Ait.

Do.

Vol, XU,

Do.
Do.

Vol. XIV.

Vol; GV:

Do.

Vol. XVI;

Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.

with Part 1, Vol. VII.
Part 1 (1881-82),
Part 2 (1882-83),

Part 1 (1883-84), out of print,

Part 2 (1884-85),

. Part 1 (1885-86),

Part 2 (1886-87),
Part 3 (1887-88),

. Part 1 (1888-89),

Part 2 (1889-90),

Part 1 (1890-91),

Part 2 (1891-92),

Part 1 (1892-93),

Part 2 (1893-94),

Part 1 (1894-95),

Part 2 (1895-96),

Part 3 (1896-97),

Part 1 (1897-98),

Part 2 (1898-99),

Part 3 (1899-1900),
Part 4 (1900-1901),
Part 1 (1901-1902),
Part 2 (1902-1904),

No. 1 (Pages 1-24),

No. 2 (Pages 25-48),
No. 3 (Pages 49-96),
No. 4 (Pages 97-190),
No. 5 (Pages 191-230), .
No. 6 (Pages 231-266), .
No. 7 (Pages 267-386), .

To the Fellows.

3/6
5/
3/6
7/6
7/6

4/
2/6
7/6
7/6
10/
3/6
4/6
5/
10/
5/
5/
5
12/6
4/6
5/
6/
5/
5/
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
1/
1/6
2/
2/6
2/
2/
3/

The following may also be had of the Librarian:

Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL.,

Do. do.

Vol, Vidh Partha’

“PROCEEDINGS.”

a \ 17/6
10

a
5/
5/
5/
5/

20/

To the Public.

5/

7/6

5/
10/
10/

5/
3/6
10/
10/
12/6
5/
6/
7/
12/6
6/6
6/6
6/6
15/
6/
6/6
7/6
6/6
6/6
5/
5/
5/
5/
1/3
2/
2/6
3/6
2/6
2/6
4/

2/
1/

Forms of Application for Fellowship may be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, f
Annual Subscription,

10/6
12/6

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 267

XXII. A Catalogue of Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine
Crustacea found in the Basin of the River Forth and
us Estuary. By Tuomas Scott, LL.D., F.LS., Mem.
Soc. Zool. de France, etc.

(Read 26th March 1906.)

PART IT.—THE OSTRACODA, COPEPODA, AND
CIRRIPEDIA.

(Part I., published in the Proceedings, Vol. XVI. pp.
97-190, contained the MALAcOoSsTRACA, CLADOCERA,
and BRANCHIURA.)

Order OSTRACODA.

The work that has been mainly followed in the arrange-
ment and nomenclature of the Ostracoda is that by Professor
G. S. Brady and the Rev. Canon A. M. Norman, entitled
“A Monograph of the Marine and Fresh-Water Ostracoda
of the North Atlantic and North-Western Europe.” The
work was published in two separate portions in the scientific
Transactions of the Royal Dublin Society. The first portion,
which formed Part II. of Vol. IV. (Series 2), appeared in
1889, and the second, which formed Part II. of Vol. V. of
the same series, in 1896.

In this work the Ostracoda are divided into four sections,
viz.—(1st) the Podocopa, which comprises all the fresh-
water and most of the marine species; (2nd) the Myodocopa,
which is represented in this Catalogue by only two species,
Asterope Marie and Philomedes interpuncta; (3rd) the
Cladocopa, which is represented by Polycope orbicularis and
Polycopsis compressa; and (4th) the Platycopa—a section
not represented in this Catalogue.

As this work has been, with few exceptions, followed
throughout, I have not considered it necessary to mention
it under every species, and where it is mentioned it is
referred to as the Monograph (or /. ¢.), Part I. or Part IT., ©
as the case may be.

Various other works have been consulted, two of which

VOL. XVI. 2C

268 . Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

may be mentioned here, viz., one by Dr G. W. Miiller on |
“The Fresh-Water Ostracoda of Germany,” and the other
by Dr A. Kaufmann on “The Fresh-Water Ostraceda of
Switzerland.”

Section I. PoDOcoPA.

Family CYPRIDID 42.

Genus (1) Cypria, Zenker, 1854.
1. Cypria exculpta (S. Fischer).

1855. Cypris exculpta, Fischer, Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Ostra-
coden, Abhdlg. der math.-phys. Klasse der k. bayr. Akad.
d. Wiss., Bd. vii. p. 652, taf. xix. figs. 36-38.

This species, though widely distributed, is not very
common in the district under consideration. It has been
obtained in Loch Leven,! Lochgelly Loch, Lochs Lurg and
Dow, Kinross; Loch Achray, Perthshire; and Goldenhoof

Dam, near Howietoun, Stirlingshire. Loch Ard, July 1906
(W. Evans).

2. Cypria ophthalmica (Jurine).

1820. Monoculus ophthalmicus, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 178,
tak xix. dies: 16,17;

This is one of the most common and widely distributed
species of our fresh-water Ostracoda.

Genus (2) Cyclocypris, G. S. Brady and A. M. Norman, 1889.

3. Cyclocypris globosa (G. O. Sars).
1863. Cypris globosa, G. O. Sars, Om en i Somm., 1862, foretagen
Zool. Reise i Christianias og Trondhjems Stifter, p. 27.
Has been obtained in a pond near Musselburgh in August
1894; Loch Leven, Loch Fitty, Black Loch, Loch Dow, Loch
Katrine, Loch Achray, Loch Vennachar, and Loch Coulter.
Teith at Callander (Evans).

1 Tt will be understood that the Loch Leven mentioned in this Catalogue is
Loch Leven, Kinross,

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 269

4, Cyclocypris serena (Koch).
1838. Cypris serena, Koch, Deutschlands Crustaceen, Heft xxi. p. 22.
1896. Cyclocypris serena, B. and N., 7. c., Part II. (Appendix) p. 718.
A common and widely distributed species. It has been
found in Loch a Chroin, at an altitude of 2500 feet, by Mr
Evans.

5. Cyclocypris levis (O. F. Miiller).

1896. Cyclocypris levis, Brady and Norman, /.c., Part II. (Appendix)
p. (18s

This, which is not such a common species as the last, has
an elliptical instead of an ovate form when looked at from
above. It has been observed in Duddingston Loch, Loch-
gelly Loch, pools on Luffness Links, etc.

Dr G. W. Miiller appears to think that the species referred
by G.S. Brady and Norman to Cyclocypris serena, Koch, is
the true C. levis of O. F. Miiller, and that their C. levis
is probably identical with a form described by Croneberg
under the name of Cyclocypris pygmea.'

Genus (3) Cypris, O. F. Miiller, 1785.

6. Cypris fuscata, Jurine.

1820. Cypris fuscata, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles de Geneva, p. 174,
pl xis, hes, 1-16;

Hab.—Duddingston Loch; Upper Elf Loch, Braid Hills;
Linlithgow Loch; Loch Leven. Roslin Curling Pond, March
1906 (W. Evans).

7. Cypris incongruens, Ramdohr.

1806. Cypris incongruens, Ramdohr, Mag. der Gesells. naturf.
Freunde in Berlin, Bd. ii. p. 86, taf. iii. figs. 1-12 et seq.

Hab.—Abundant in pools in the brickfield at Portobello in
the autumn of 1888. In pools on May Island in September
1890. Common in pools on the side of the Union Canal at

1 Scottia Browniana (Jones), which up till 1887, when living specimens
were obtained near Rothesay, was only known as a fossil, was collected in a
post-Tertiary deposit at Elie, Fifeshire, by the late James Bennie of the
Geological Survey (cf. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. x. pp. 339-341,
1890-91). This form, which is placed between Cyclocypris and Cypris, has
not yet been found Jiving on the east side of Scotland.

270 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

Kingsknowe in May 1888. Pond at House-o’-Hill Farm,
Midlothian, common, July 1900 (Dr and Miss Sprague).

8. Cypris virens, Jurine.

1820. Cypris virens, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 174, taf. xvii.
figs. 15, 16.

Hab—Duddingston Loch; pools on Luffness Links; pools
at Slateford; Kilconquhar Loch; Loch Leven. Marchfield
Pond, July 1900, very common (Dr and Miss Sprague).
Roslin Curling Pond, March 1906 (Evans).

9. Cypris affinis, Fischer.
1851. Cypris affinis, Fischer, Ueber das genus Cypris, p. 32, pl. x.

fies. 9-11.

1889. ,, reticulata, Brady and Norman, J. ¢., Part I. p. 76,
plevint. ties; 1:2); pl. xi. figs. =r.

1900 ,, 4Gfinis, Kaufmann, Cypriden u. Darwinuliden der

Schweiz, Revue Suisse de Zool., T. 8, p. 272, taf. xv.
figs. 17-20 et seq.

Hab.—Camilla Loch, Fifeshire, and Duddingston Loch.
This species does not appear to be very common. (I have
recorded C. affinis from Linlithgow Loch, but the dissections
show that the specimens belong to C. fuscata.)

10. Cypris obliqua, G. 8. Brady.
1868. Cypris obliqua, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 364,
pl. xxiii. figs. 33-38.
Hab.—tLurg Loch (near L. Glow), Kinross-shire; Loch-
gelly Loch and Loch Achray. Craigleith Quarry, near Edin-
burgh, February 1901, one specimen (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (4) Eurycypris, G. -W. Miiller, 1898.

11. Hurycypris pubera (O. F. Miller).

1785. Cypris pubera, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 56, taf. v.
figs. 1-5.

1900. Hurycypris pubera, G. W. Miiller, Deutschl. Siissw.-Ostrac.,
p. 54, taf. xiii. figs. 1-11.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch (Baird, Norman, and myself);
Kilconquhar Loch; Kinghorn Loch (common); Lochgelly

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. Pf b

Loch. Townhill Loch, Dunfermline (D. Robertson). Otter-
ston Loch, Fife, October 1905 (W. Evans).

Genus (5) Cyprinotus, G. S. Brady, 1886.

12. Cyprinotus prasina (Fischer).
1889. Cypris prasina, Brady and Norman, Monograph, Part I. p. 78.
1896. Cyprinotus prasina, id., Part II. (Appendix) p. 772.
Hab.—Pools in an old brickfield at Seafield, near Dunbar,
August 1890; in pools at the mouth of the Peffer Burn, near
Aberlady, August 1893. Cyprinotus prasinus was obtained
by the late James Bennie, of the Geological Survey, in
material excavated from the bed of the Old “Nor Loch,’
Edinburgh (cf. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. x. p. 139,
1889).

Genus (6) Herpetocypris, G.S. Brady and A. M. Norman, 1896.
Erpetocypris, idem, 1889,

13. Herpetocypris reptans (Baird).
1835. Candona reptans, Baird, Trans. Berw. Nat. Club, vol. 1. p. 99,
Plante hel E:
Hab—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Linlithgow Loch,
Loch Lubnaig, pools on Gullane Links, and various other
places throughout the district. Loch Ard (Evans).

14. Herpetocypris strigata (O. F. Miller).
1785. Cypris strigata, O. F. Miller, Entomostraca, p. 54, pl. iv.
figs. 4-6.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Black Loch near
L. Glow; pools at Kingsknowe near Edinburgh, May 1888;
Loch Coulter; and about Howietoun, Stirlingshire, 1889.

15. Herpetocypris tumefacta, G.S. Brady and D. Robertson.
1870. Cypris tumefacta, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),

vol. vi. p. 18, pl. iv. figs. 4-16.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, pools on Luffness
Links, Loch Achray, Loch Vennachar, Loch Coulter, and
pools near Howietoun, etc. Ben Ledi, at 2500 feet (Evans).

272 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (7) Ilyodromus, G. O. Sars, 1894.

16. L/yodromus olivacea (G. 8. Brady and A. M. Norman).
1889. Hrpetocypris olivacea, B. and N., l. c., Part I. p. 89, pl. viii.
figs. 3, 4.
1896. Ilyodromus olivacea, 1. c., Part II. (Appendix) p. 724.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Kinghorn Loch, Black Loch
near L. Glow.

17. Llyodromus Robertson, G. S. Brady and A. M. Norman.
1889. Erpetocypris Robertsoni, B. and N., J. ¢c., Part I. p. 88 (with
two text figures).
1896. Zlyodromus Robertsoni, l. c., Part II. (Appendix) p. 724.
Hab.—tUninlithgow Loch; Black Loch near L. Glow,
14th September 1889.

Genus (8) Cypridopsis, G. S. Brady, 1867.
18. Cypridopsis villosa (Jurine).
1820. Monoculus villosus, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 178, pl. xix.
figs. 14, 15.
1868. Cypridopsis villosa, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 377,
pl. xiv. tes, 11-15; pl. xxxvi. fig. 9.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, and in various
other lochs and ponds throughout the district

19. Cypridopsis aculeata (Lilljeborg).
1858. Cypris aculeata, Lillj., De Crust. ex Ord. trib., p. 117,
tak. xa Ties. 5 16:
1868. Cypridopsis aculeata, Brady, l. c., p. 376, pl. xxiv. figs. 16-20;
ple xxvii fig20.
Hab.— Pools in an old brickfield at Seafield, near Dunbar ;
Gullane, near Aberlady, August 1893. Cramond Island,
July 1901 (Dr and Miss Sprague).

Genus (9) Pionocypris, G. S. Brady and A. M. Norman, 1896.
20. Pronocypris vidua (O. F. Muller).
1785. Cypris vidua, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, p 55, taf. iv.
figs. 7-9.
1889. Cypridopsis vidua, B. and N., J. c., Part I. p. 89.
1896. Pionocypris vidua, id., ibid., Part II. (Appendix) p. 726.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Loch Coulter, Loch

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 273:

Achray; Loch Rusky (Evans); and generally throughout the
district, especially in the smaller bodies of water.

Objection is taken to the separation of this species from
the genus Cypridopsis, to which it was ascribed by Dr G. 8.
Brady in 1867, but, as pointed out by Brady and Norman in
the Appendix to their valuable Monograph, pp. 725 and 726,
its removal became necessary when it was found to differ
materially in the principal character on which the genus
was founded, viz., the caudal rami. These were described
as “being quite rudimentary, consisting of two slender
setiform processes springing from a common base.” Careful
examination has shown that while @. villosa, C. aculeata, and
one or two others agree so far with this definition, the
caudal rami in C. vidua consists of four setiform processes,
and also that the basal part of each pair of processes differs
to some extent. Dr Kaufmann does not appear to attach
much value to this difference, and therefore replaces C. vidua
under Cypridopsis, but he at the same time removes ¢he
others to a new genus—Cypridopsella—the chief distinguishing
character of which is that while the first has five the other
has only two hairs on the branchial plate of the first
maxilla! Though C. wdua was made the type of the
genus Cypridopsis by Dr Brady, it was doubtless because
he considered its furca to be similar to that of the two
species associated with it, and as these two species agree
with the definition of Cypridopsis, I think they ought to be
retained in that genus, and C. vidwa removed, as has been
done by Brady and Norman.

Genus (10) Potamocypris, G. S. Brady, 1870.
21. Potamocypris fulva, G. 8. Brady.
1868. Bairdia fulva, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 474,
pl Sxvii. 1s. 2s :
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Raith Lake, Loch
Gelly, and several other places. Ben Ledi, at 2500 feet
(Evans).
1 Cypridopsis—Branchial platte des Kiefer fusses mit fiinf Borsten.
Furka verkiimmert mit geisselformiger Borste.

Cypridopsella—Branchial platte des Kiefer fusses mit zwei Borsten.
Furke verkiimmert mit geisselformiger Borste.

274 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (11) Aglaia, G. S. Brady.

22. Aglaia complanata, G. 8S. Brady and D. Robertson.

1869. Aglaia complanata, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. iii. p. 66, pl. xx. figs. 4, 5.

Hab.—Forth at Bo'ness (David Robertson). The late
Dr Robertson, who obtained this rare form among some
material collected by himself at Bo'ness, informed me
in lit. of its occurrence there, but I have not met with it
myself.

Genus (12) Notodromas, Lilljeborg, 1853.

23. Notodromas monacha (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Cypris monacha, Miller, Entomostraca, p. 60, taf. v. figs. 6-8.

Hab.—Pools on Luffness Links; in a pond near Mussel-
burgh ; Lochgelly Loch and Camilla Loch, Fifeshire. Burnt-
island Reservoir and Loch Rusky, 1906 (Evans).

Genus (13) Cyprois, Zenker, 1854.

24. Cyprois marginata (H. EK. Straus).

1821. Cypris marginata, Straus, Mémoire sur les Cypris, Mém. du
Mus., vol. vii. p. 59, pl. 1. figs. 20-22.

1889. Cyprois flava, B. and N., J. c., Part I. p. 97, pl. viii. figs.
18519): ple xt. igs. 13-21, 28.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch (A. M. Norman). In 1889 I
found this species in moderate abundance at the upper end
of the Loch—not in the Loch itself, but in little pools on
the marshy ground behind the fringe of tall reeds. I
observed it again in September 1898 on the same marshy
ground, but not so plentiful as in 1889. I do not remember
ever having found it in the loch itself. This species was
collected by the late Mr James Bennie, of the Geological
Survey, in a post-Tertiary fresh-water deposit at Kirkland
of leven, Wifeshire . (cf. Proc. Aoy.,.Phys. Socsewaleee
pp. 335-337, 1890-91).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 27d

Genus (14) Candona, Baird, 1845.
25. Candona candida (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Cypris candida, Miller, Entomostraca, p. 62, taf. vi. figs. 7-9.

Hab.—This appears to be a moderately common species
throughout the whole district.

26. Candona neglecta, G. O. Sars.

1887. Candona neglecta, G. O. Sars, Mittelh. Invert.—fauna IV.,
Ostrac. Mediterranea, p. 279, taf. xv. figs. 5-7;
taf. xix. figs. 1-21.

1889. 5 conaida@ (Part), B: and N., v. ¢:, Part I. p: 99; pl. x:
figs. 20, 21.

Hab.—I find this species generally distributed but not
very plentiful, and the males appear to be more frequent
and larger than the females. The following are some of the
places where it has been obtained :—Duddingston Loch ( $ );
Loch Leven ( f); Linlithgow Loch (¢); Cocklemill Burn,

near Largo ( ¢ and ¢); Lochgelly Loch ( f); Camilla Loch
(fg and ?2); Kinghorn Loch ( f).

27. Candona lactea, Baird.

1850. Candona lactea, Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. (1850), p. 255,
pl. xviii. figs. 25-27.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Camilla Loch,
Linhthgow Loch, Loch Coulter, and other places within the
area.

28. Candona compressa (S. Fischer).

1851. Cypris compressa, Fischer, Abhandl. tiber das genus Cypris,
Mém. des Sav. étrang. des Sci. de St. Pétersh., t. 7, p. 144,
taf. i. figs. 7-12; taf. ili. figs. 1-5.
1889. Candona pubescens, B. and N., J. ¢c., Part I. p. 101, pl. xii.
figs. 32-37.
1900. Rs compressa, Kaufmann, Cyprid. u. Darwinul., p. 371,
taf. xxvii. figs. 4-6 et seq.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch (Brady and Norman), Lochgelly
Loch, Loch Leven, and several other places within the
district.

276 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

29. Candona stagnalis, G. O. Sars.

1890. Candona stagnalis, G. O. Sars, Christ. Videns-Selsk. Forhandl.,
p- 69.

1891. - ambigua, T. Scott, Ninth Rept. F. B. 8., pt. ii.
p. 2/ ij ple av.tig. 7 a-c.

Hab.—Locheelly Loch and Loch Fitty, Fifeshire; not
common.

30. Candona rostrata, Brady and Norman.

1889. Candona rostrata, B. and N., 7. c., Part I. p. 101, pl. ix.
figs. 11, 12, 120, 6; pl. xii. figs. 22-31.

Hab —Duddingston Loch, Lurg Loch, Raith Lake, pond
at Howietoun; not common. The larva of the tapeworm,
Tenia gracilis, has been found encysted in a specimen of
this species collected in Duddingston Loch.

31. Candona fabeformis (Fischer).

1851. Cypris fabeformis, Fischer, Uber das genus Cypris, p. 146,
pl. ili. figs. 6-16.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch; marl- pit, near Davidson’s
Mains, Edinburgh; pools on Luffness Links; Loch Fitty,
and other places in Fifeshire; Linlithgow Loch; and in a
pool near Howietoun.

32. Candona acuminata (Fischer).

1851. Cypris acwminata, Fischer, Uber das genus Cypris, p. 148,
taf. iv. figs. 12-16.

Hab.—Ditch beside Harelaw Dam, Balerno; Threipmuir
Reservoir; Loch Fitty; ponds at Howietoun; and Loch
Coulter.

The specimens recorded here agree closely with the female
of Candona caudata, figured by Kaufmann in Cypriden u.
Darwinuliden der Schweiz, p. 365, taf. xxiv. figs. 16-20;
taf. xxvi. figs. 17-23,

1 Proc, Roy. Phys. Soc., vol. x. p. 314 (with text-figure), 1890-91.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 207

33. Candona hyalina, G. 8. Brady and D. Robertson.

1870. Candona hyalina, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. vi. p. 18, pl. ix. figs. 5-8; pl. v.
figs. 4-11.
1889. < Es B. and N., 7. c., Part I. p, 247, with text-
. figures 1-5.

Hab.—Threipmuir Reservoir, near Balerno (jf); Loch
Fitty and Loch Gelly, Fifeshire; Loch Dow, Kinross-shire
(2); Loch Katrine. The shell is much compressed, and
of a white colour in living specimens. The dorsal edge is
obtusely angular.

Genus (15) Candonopsis, Vavra, 1891.

34, Candonopsis Kingsleit (Brady and Robertson).

1870. Candona Kingsleii, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. vi. p. 17, pl. ix. figs. 9-12.

1891. Candonopsis kingsleiit, Vavra, Mon. der Ostrac. Bohmens,
p. 54, fig. 16.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, pools on Luffness Links, Loch
Leven, Camilla Loch, Loch Coulter, Loch Katrine, and others.
This is a well-marked and widely distributed species. The
shell in living specimens is white and much compressed.

Genus (16) Paracandona, Hartwig, 1899.

30. Paracandona euplectella (Robertson).

1880. Candona euplectella, Robertson, Fresh and Brackish-Water
- Ostrac. of Clydesdale, p. 23. (See also Proc. Nat. ‘Hist.
Soc. Glasgow, vol. iv. pt. i., 1880, p. 77.)
1900. Paracandona euplectella, G. W. Miiller, Deutsch]. Siissw.-
Ostrac., p. 37, taf. ix. figs. 1-9, 14.

Hab.—Loch Dow, near Loch Glow, Kinross-shire, 14th
September 1889. This is still the only record I have of
P. euplectella from the district under consideration. It is
the most beautiful of the species belonging to the British
Candone. The shell is cylindrical and very tumid, and its
structure is suggestive of the glass-sponge Huplectella, as
implied by the specific name.

278 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (17) Ilyocypris, Brady and Norman, 1889.

36. Llyocypris gibba (Ramdohr).
1808. Cypris gibba, Ramdohr, Mag. der Gesells. naturf. Freunde in
Berlin, ii. p. 91, taf: i. figs. 13-17.

Hab.—Union Canal, near Edinburgh, 4th September 1889.
I obtained a number of specimens here—the only place
where I have observed it within the district. The shell of
this species is ornamented with prominent tubercles.

31. Llyocypris bistrigata (Jurine). .
1820. Monoculus bistrigatus, Jurine, Hist. Nat. des Monocles,
D: lait gol exixe digs) 12513.
1838. Cypris biplicata, Koch, Deutschlands Crustaceen, H. 21 (161),
fig. Xvi.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, etc. This species
is generally distributed throughout the district. I have
occasionally observed specimens distinctly larger than some
of the others, but could find no other difference sufficient to
permit of their separation even as a variety.

Genus (18) Pontocypris, G. O. Sars, 1865.

38. Pontocypris mytiloides (Norman).
1862. Cythere mytiloides, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3),
vol. ix. p. 50, pl. ili. figs. 1-3.
Hab.—Off Aberlady, off Musselburgh, and various other
parts of the Forth estuary. Living specimens are usually
moderately dark in colour.

39. Pontocypris acupunctata, G. S. Brady.
1866. Pontocypris acupunctata, Brady, Brit. Assoc. Report (1866),
p. 209.
1868. ne 5 Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrae:,
p. 386, pl. xxiv. figs. 53-56.
Hab.—Off St Monans and one or two other places in the
estuary, 1890; rare. Living specimens are brownish in

colour, and the surface is minutely punctate.

40. Pontocypris trigonella, G. O, Sars.
1865. Pontocypris trigonella, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges mar.
Ostrac., p. 16.

Hab.—Largo Bay and other parts of the estuary, but
not very common.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 279

Genus (19) Argillecia, G. O. Sars, 1865.

41. Argillacia cylindrica, G. O. Sars.
1865. Argillwcia cylindrica, G. O. Sars, 1. ¢., p. 18.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Robertson). Off St
Monans, rare.

Family BAIRDIID &,
Genus (20) Bairdia, M‘Coy (? 1849).
42. Bairdia inflata (Norman).

1862. Cythere inflata, Norman, Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist. (8),
vol. ix. p. 49, pl. iii. figs. 6-8.

1868. Bairdia inflata, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 388,
pl. xxvii. figs. 9-17; pl.-xxxvili. fig. 5.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans, 1889; rare. The specimens

were of a brownish colour, and tumid, as indicated by the
name.

Family DARWINULIDA.,
Genus (21) Darwinula, Brady and Robertson, 1885.

43. Darwinula Stevenson, Brady and Robertson.

1870. Polycheles Stevensoni, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.

(4), vol. vi. p. 25, pl. vii. figs. 1-7; pl. ii. figs. 4-14.
Hab.— Loch Lubnaig, Perthshire, rare; obtained near the
east shore by hand-net on 29th September 1894. This
somewhat rare species was obtained by the late James
Bennie in a lacustrine deposit in the Meadows, Edinburgh.
(Cf. “The Ancient Lakes of Edinburgh,” by James Bennie

and T. Scott, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. x. p. 131.)

Family CYTHERIDA,
Genus (22) Cythere, O. F. Miiller, 1785.
A4, Cythere lutea, O. F. Miiller.

1785. Cythere lutea, Miller, Entomostraca, p. 65, taf. vii. figs. 3, 4.

Hab.—F orth estuary, especially inshore—a common British
species.

280 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

45. Cythere pellucida, Baird.
1850. Cythere pellucida, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 173, pl. xxi. fig. 7.

Hab.—Cramond Island, taken with hand-net at low water
in 1889, and subsequently in other parts of the estuary,
chiefly in brackish water.

46. Cythere confusa, Brady and Norman.
1865. Cythere pellucida, G. O. Sars (not Baird), Oversigt af Norges
mar. Ostrac., p. 31
1889. > confusa, B. and N., 7. c., Pt. J. po Vos
figs. 16-18,

Hab.—tLargo Bay, off Musselburgh, and other places;
moderately frequent.

47. Cythere porcelianea, G. 8. Brady.

1889. Cythere porcellanea, B. and N., 7. c., Pt. I. p. 127, pl. xiv.
figs. 22-24,

Hab.—South Bay, off Musselburgh, and other places, but
for the most part in shallow water that is slightly brackish.

A8. Cythere tenera, G. 8. Brady.
1868. Cythere tencra, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 599,
pl. xxviii. figs. 29-32.
Hab.—South Bay, and deep water west of May Island;
not common.

49. Cythere semipunctata, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Cythere (?) semipunctata, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 411,
pl. xxix. figs. 33-37.

Hab.—Aberlady Bay and Largo Bay; not common.

50. Cythere crispata, G. S. Brady.

1889. Cythere. crispata, B. and N., ti. ¢., Pt. I. p. 181, pl. xv.
Hes. 1.2:

Hab.—Off the west side of Inchkeith; scarce.

51. Cythere gibbosa, Brady and Robertson.
1869. Cythere gibbosa, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol, ili. p. 368, pl. xxi. figs. 1-3.
Hab.—Brackish pools at the mouth of the Cocklemill
Burn, Largo Bay, 1890.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 281

52. Cythere semiovata, 'T. Scott.

1890. Cythere semiovata, T. Scott, Eighth Rept. F. B. §., pt. iii.
p. 321, pl. xii. figs. 1, 2.

HBO G54 | 43 a4 B. and N., J. ¢c., Pt. II. (Appendix) p. 732,
pl. Ixiii. figs. 14, 15.

Hab.— Off St Monans, frequent. I had at first some doubt
concerning the validity of this species, but having as yet seen
no described form with which it could agree, either as adult
or young, it is retained in this Catalogue. In the original
description of the species, “anterior” end should read
“posterior” end, and vice versa.

53. Cythere albomaculata, Baird.

1850. Cythere albomaculata, Baird, Brit. Entomostraca, p. 169,
pl? xx. figr 7.

Hab.—-Off Bo'ness and throughout the estuary, but
apparently not very plentiful.

54, Cythere Robertson, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Cythere Robertsoni, Brady, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol, ii. p. 38, pl. iv. figs. 5, 8-10.

Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith, as well
as in other parts of the estuary, but not very common.

55. Cythere convexa, Baird.

1850. Cythere convexa, Baird, Brit. Entomostraca, p. 174, pl. xxi.
fig. 3.
Hab.—Firth of Forth; distribution similar to that of
C. Robertson, but it appears to be even scarcer. I have
observed it only sparingly.

56. Cythere lumicola, A. M. Norman.

1865. Cythere limicola, Norman, Nat. and Mag. Hist. Trans.
Northumb. and Durham, vol. i. p. 20, pl. vi.
Hab.—South Bay, and in deep water west of May Island
(1888). I find this to be a moderately rare species in the
Firth of Forth.

282 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

57. Oythere cuneiformis, G. S. Brady.

1868. Cythere cwneiformis, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 404,
pl. xxxi. figs. 47-54.

Hab.—Aberlady Bay in 3 fathoms, bottom muddy sand ;
rare. |

58. Cythere navicula (A. M. Norman).

1869. Cytherura navicula, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1868,
p. 292.

Hab.—Off St Monans; not common.

59. Cythere villosa, G. O. Sars.

1865. Cythere villosa, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Nae marine
Ostracoder, p. 42.

Hab.—South Bay, off Inchkeith, and at various other
places; frequent.

60. Cythere pulchella, G. S. Brady.
1868. Cythere pulchella, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 404.
Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Norman). Off St
Monans; not common. Without careful examination this
species might be mistaken for the more common C. villosa.

61. Cythere quadridentata, Baird.

1850. Oythere quadridentata, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 173, pl. xxi.
fig. 2.

Hab.—Off the west side of Inchkeith (1888), and sub-
sequently, but very sparingly, in other parts of the estuary.

62. Cythere emaciata, G. S. Brady.
1867. Cythere emaciata, Brady, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1866, p. 210.
Hab.—Firth of Forth, taken from the stomach of a Sharp-
tailed Lumpenus, L. lampretiformis, captured at Station ITT.
(east of Inchkeith), 13th July 1901. This is the only record
I have of C. emaciata for the Forth estuary.

63. Cythere tuberculata, G. O. Sars.

1865. Cytheris tuberculata, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 37.

Hab.—South Bay; deep water west of May Island and
other parts of the estuary; frequent.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 283

64. Cythere concinna, Rupert Jones.
1856, Cythere concinna, Jones, Tert. Entom., p. 29, pl. iv. fig. 7a-/.

Hab.—South Bay, Largo Bay, west of May Island; not
very common. Firth of Forth (Brady and Norman).

65. Cythere finmarchica (G. O. Sars).

1865. Cythereis finmarchica, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 41.

Hab.—Off St Monans, frequent (1890).

66. Cythere angulata (G. O. Sars).
1865. Cythereis angulata, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., p. 40.

Hab.—F¥irth of Forth (Brady and Norman). Dredged in
deep water west of May Island, not common; and sub-
sequently in one or two other parts of the estuary.

67. Cythere dunelmensis (Norman).

1865. Cythereis dunelmensis, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durh., vol. i. p. 22, pl. vii. figs. 1-4.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Norman). Dredged in
deep water west of May Island, 1888.

68. Cythere antiquata (Baird).
1857. Cytherets antiquata, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 176, pl. xx. fig. 2.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Norman). Dredged near
Inchkeith and in South Bay; not common.

69. Cythere Whiter (Baird).
1850. Cythereis Whitei, Baird, 1. ¢., p. 175, pl. xx. figs. 3, 3a.

Hab.—Largo Bay ; not common.

70. Cythere Jonesti (Baird).
1850. Cytherets Jonesit, Baird, 7. ¢., p. 175, pl. xx. fig. 1.
ffab.—South Bay, deep water west of May Island, and

other places in the estuary ; not common.
VOL, XVI. 2D

284 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (23) Limnicythere, G. S. Brady, 1867.
71. Limnicythere inopinata (Baird).
1850. Cythere inopinata, Baird, l. ¢., p. 172, pl. xxi. figs. 1, 1 a-e.
Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, Linlithgow Loch,
Kilconquhar Loch, Lochgelly Loch, and other places. It is
a small species that lives amongst the mud, and is easily
missed. |

72. Limmicythere Sancti-Patricu, G. 8. Brady and D.
Robertson.
1869. Limnicythere Sancti-Patricit, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4), vol. iii. p. 17, pl. xviii. figs. 8-11; pl xx
Hab.—Loch Leven, moderately frequent. This is the
only loch within the district where this species has been
observed.

Genus (24) Cytheridea, Bosquet, 1852.

73. Cytheridea elongata, Brady.

1868. Cytheridea elongata, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 421,
pl. xxviii. figs. 13-16; pl. xl. fig. 6.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (G. 8. Brady). Off the west side
of Inchkeith, and a few other parts of the estuary; not
common.

74. Cytheridea papiilosa, Bosquet.

1862. Cytheridea papillosa, Bosq., Entom. fossil des terrains de la
France, p. 42, pl. ii. fig. 5 a-d.

Hab.—South Bay, off North Berwick, and some other
places ; not common.

75. Cytheridea punctillata, Brady.
1865. Cytheridea punctillata, Brady, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3),
vol. xvi. p. 189, pl. ix. figs. 9-11.

Hab.—Aberlady Bay, Largo Bay, and other places.

76. Cytheridea torosa (Jones).
1850. Candona torosa, Jones, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), vol. vi.

p. 27, pl. iii. fig. 6.
Hab—Granton Harbour (D. Robertson); brackish-water

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 285

pools on the shore at Aberlady; pools in an old brickfield
at Seafield, near Dunbar; mouth of the Cocklemill Burn,
Largo Bay.

77. Cytheridea lacustris (G. O. Sars).

1862. Cythere lacustris, G. O. Sars, Zoolgisk Reise i. Sommeren,
U8625"p. (30)

Hab.— Union Canal, near Edinburgh (D. Robertson); Loch
Leven, moderately frequent.

Genus (25) Eucythere, G. S. Brady, 1868.

78. Hucythere declivis (Norman).

1864. Cythere declivis, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durh- voli, p. 1G ol v. figs. 9-12.

Hab.—Off the west side of Inchkeith and various other
places ; frequent.

Genus (26) Krithe, G. S. Brady, Crosskey, and
Robertson, 1874.

79. Krithe bartonensis (T. R. Jones).
1856. Cytherideis bartonensis, Jones, Mon. Ter. Entom., p. 50,
pl. v. figs. 2a, b; 3a, 6.

Hab.—Near the mouth of the Forth estuary; moderately
common.

Genus (27) Loxoconcha, G. O. Sars, 1862.

80. Loxoconcha impressa (Baird).
1850. Cythere impressa, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 173, pl. xxi. fig. 9.

Hab.—Aberlady Bay, Largo Bay, and other parts of the
estuary ; frequent.

81. Loxoconcha guttata (Norman).

1864. Cythere guttata, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durh., vol. i. p. 19, pl. vi. figs. 9-12.

Hab—F¥irth of Forth (Brady and Norman), South Bay
and off North Berwick ; frequent.

286 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctety.

82. Loxoconcha viridis (O. F. Miller).
1785. Cythere viridis, Miller, Entomostraca, p. 64, taf. vii. figs. 1, 2.

Hab.—Granton Harbour (D. Robertson); Largo Bay,
rather rare.

83. Loxoconcha multifora (Norman).

1864. Cythere multifora, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durh., vol. i. p. 18, pl. vi. figs. 13-16.

Hab.—Granton Harbour (D. Robertson). This is the only
record for the Forth known to me. The species is, however,
widely distributed, and is likely to occur in other parts of
the estuary.

84. Loxoconcha pusilla, Brady and Robertson.
1870. Loxoconcha pusilla, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol, vi. p. 23, pl. viii. figs. 1-3.
Hab—tTaken in the vicinity of Cramond Island where the
water is somewhat brackish; apparently rare. Firth of
Forth (Brady and Norman).

85. Loxoconcha tamarindus (T. R. Jones).

1856. Cytherideis tamarindus, Jones, Tert. Entom., p. 49, pl. iii.
figs. 4a, 40.

Hab.—Near Inchkeith, South Bay, and off North Berwick ;
frequent.

86. Loxoconcha fragilis, G. O. Sars.

1865. Loxoconcha fragilis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 65.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Norman). This appears
to be a rare species in the estuary. I have not myself
observed it.

Genus (28) Xestoleberis, G. O. Sars, 1865.

87. Xestoleberis aurantia (Baird).

1835. Cythere aurantia, Baird, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. ii. p. 143,
pl. v. fig. 26.

ffab.—Off St Monans, Aberlady Bay, Largo Bay, etc., but
not very plentiful.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 287

88. Xestoleberis depressa, G. O. Sars.

1865. Xestoleberis depressa, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 68.

Hab.—Off the west side of Inchkeith; rather rare.

Genus (29) Cytherura, G. O. Sars, 1865.

89. Cytherura gibba (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Cythere gibba, Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 66, pl. vii. figs. 7, 8.
1889. Cytherura gibba, B. and N., /. c., Part I., p. 190, pl. xviii.
figs. 18-16; pl. xxii. figs. 6-12; pl. xxiii. fig. 8.
Hab.—Granton Harbour (D. Robertson), Largo Bay, and
off Aberlady.

90. Cytherura cornuta, G. S. Brady.

1838. Cytherura cornuta, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 445,
pl. xxxil. figs. 12-15.

Hab—Near Fidra Island; off Musselburgh, and Burnt-
island.

91. Cytherura sella, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytherura sella, G. O. Sars, d. ¢., p. 73.

Hab.—Largo Bay, South Bay, and other parts of the
estuary ; moderately frequent.

92. Cytherura acuticostata, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytheruya acuticostata, G. O. Sars, 1. ¢., p. 76.

Hab.—Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith. This is
said to be one of the commonest species belonging to the
Cytherure,

93. Cytherura bodotria, T. Scott.

1890. Cytherura bodotria, T. Scott, Eighth Rept. F. B. S., part iil.
p. 232, pl. xii. figs. 6, 7.

1896. Bs ms Band) NG ds cy Part Lie (Appendix)
p. 736, pl. xiv. figs. 16, 17.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rare. This species has also
been obtained in the Firth of Clyde.

_ The authors of the Monograph referred to above are inclined

to think that this form “must be regarded as the young of

288 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Cytherura acuticostata,’ and in support of this view they
state that though they do not have very young examples of
that species to compare it with, a very fine series of the
young of the C. cornuta shows that “the beak occupies a
much larger proportion of shell, and is thus more promin-
ently conspicuous ” in the young of the Cytherwre, and “ that
the lateral projections are also more acute than in the adult.” !
These remarks are supported by an indifferent outline side-
view of young forms of C. cornuta and C. nigrescens, but
I think for the purpose of comparison a dorsal view should
also have been given. I am, however, not extremely anxious
whether the “species” stands or not, and therefore will not
discuss its merits here. There are one or two points, however,
that may be referred to—(1st) If a careful comparison of
the original figures of C. bodotria be made with those of
C’. acuticostata given on plate xxxil. (figs. 12-15) of Dr Brady’s
excellent “ Monograph of recent British Ostracoda,” published
in the Transactions of the Innnean Society, 1868, it will be
seen that C. bodotria is proportionally more elongated and
more depressed, and that, when seen from above, the lateral
angles are remarkably prominent and not like the species
it is said to be the young of; but (2nd), and Jeaving these
differences meanwhile out of account, and taking for granted
that Cytherura bodotria is the young of Cytherura acuticostata,
then from what happens with other species one might expect
these young to be smaller than the adult, but they are
not so. The length of the specimen of C. bodotria represented
by our drawings in Part III. of the Lighth Annual Report of
the Fishery Board for Scotland was *5 mm., and the size of
C’. acuticostata as given in the Monograph already referred to
at page 446, and which J suppose represents the adult size,
is the -4,th of an inch, so that this supposed young form is
as big as the one full grown.

But I had even a better and larger specimen of C. bodotria
than the one figured, though it was similar in form and
sculpture, and it would have been figured instead, but it was

1] have two smaller (younger) specimens of C. bodotria, and these have
the lateral projections less developed than in the one figured, though other-
wise similar to it.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 289

unfortunately accidentally crushed by the object-glass of the
microscope having been lowered down onit. I have examined
a considerable number of C. acuticostata and allied forms,
but have failed to observe any with which C. bodotria could
be incorporated.

94. Cytherura striata, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytherura striata, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., p. 74.

Hab.—Off Musselburgh, Largo Bay, and other parts of the
estuary; moderately frequent.

95. Cytherura angulata, G. 8S. Brady.
1868. Cytherura angulata, Brady, Monograph recent British Ostra-
coda, p. 440, pl. xxxii. figs. 22-25.
Hfab.—Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith and other
parts of the estuary, but not very plentiful.

96. Cytherura undata, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytherura undata, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., p. 75.

Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh, and off the west side ot
Inchkeith and other places. It appears to be generally dis-
tributed, but being very small (about the ,4;th of an inch in
length) it is easily overlooked.

97. Cytherura producta, G. S. Brady.
1868. Cytherura producta, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 443,
pls xxxil. figs: 60, 61.
1890. a mucronata, T. Scott, Highth Rept. F. B. S.,
pt. iii. p. 323, pl. xii. figs. 3-5 (? juv.).
Hab.—Dredged in Largo Bay and off St Monans, but not
very common.

98. Cytherura nigrescens (Baird).
1850. Cythere nigrescens, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 171, pl. xx1.
figs. 4, 4a.
_Hab.—South Bay, off Musselburgh, common. It has also
been observed in other parts of the estuary.

290 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Soctety.

99. Cytherura simplex, Brady and Norman.
1889. Cytherura simplex, B. and N., U. c., Pt. I. p. 200, pl. xviii.
figs. 1, 2.
Hab.—Off St Monans, frequent, in 12 to 15 fathoms,
bottom partly clean sand and partly gravel.

100. Cytherura similis, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytherura similis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 72.
Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh and in Largo Bay; not
very common.

101. Cytherura clathrata, G. O. Sars.
1865. Cytherura clathrata, G. O. Sars, U. ¢., p. 77.
Hab.—Bo’ness, Firth of Forth (Brady and Robertson).
Dredged off Bo'ness, off the west side of Inchkeith, and other
parts of the Forth ; not common.

102. Cytherura cellulosa, A. M. Norman.

1865. Cytherura cellulosa, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durh., vol. i. p. 22, pl. v. figs. 17-20; pl. vi. fig. 17.

Hab.—South Bay, and in other parts of the estuary, but
apparently not common; but as it only measures ;4 of an
inch (about ‘36 mm.) it may have frequently been overlooked.

Genus (30) Cytheropteron, G. O. Sars, 1865.

103. Cytheropteron latissimum (Norman).
1865. Cythere latissima, Norman, J. c., vol. i. p. 19, pl. vi. figs. 5-8.

Hlab.—Dredged in South Bay, and in deep water west of
May Island; frequent.

104. Cytheropteron nodosum, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Cytheropteron nodosum, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 448,
pl. xxxiv. figs. 31-34.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Robertson). South Bay,
off Musselburgh ; not unfrequent.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 291

105. Cytheropteron punctatum, G. S. Brady.
1868. Cytheropteron punctatwm, Brady, J. c., p. 449, pl. xxxiv.
figs. 45-48.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rather rare.

106. Cytheropteron angulatum, Brady and Robertson.

1872. Cytheropteron angulatum, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4), vol. ix. p. 62, pl. ii. figs. 7, 8.

Hab.—Uargo Bay and off Aberlady; rare.

107. Cytheropteron depressum, Brady and Norman.
1889. Cytheropteron depressum, B. and N.,l. c., Pt. I. p. 218, pl. xx.
figs. 22, 23.

Hab.—Largo Bay and off Aberlady ; not common.

108. Cytheropteron humile, Brady and Norman.

1889. Cytheropteron humile, B. and N., 7. ¢c., Pt. Il. p. 220, pl. xx.
figs. 4-7.

Hab.—Dredged off Limekilns and in Largo Bay. This
small species, which measures only 33 mm., has also been
found fairly plentiful in the Clyde in the crevices of partly
decayed pieces of wood brought up in the dredge, and usually
associated with an interesting species of Copepoda, Harrietella
semulans, T. Scott.

Genus (31) Bythocythere, G. O. Sars, 1865.
109. Bythocythere turgida, G. O. Sars.
1865. Bythocythere turgida, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., p. 84.

Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh and other places; not
common. This moderately large species has sometimes been
obtained in the stomachs of small fishes.

110. Bythocythere constricta, G. O. Sars.
1865. Buthocythere constricta, G. O. Sars, J. c. p. 85

_Hab.—Largo Bay and off Aberlady; frequent. This is
a moderately common species in the Forth.

292 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

111. Bythocythere simplex (Norman).

1865. Cythere simplex, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durh., vol. i. p. xvii, pl. v. figs. 1-4.

Hab.—South Bay, in deep water west of May Island, and
other places, but not very common. This is a fine large
species, conspicuous from its white colour; it forms part of
the food of young Gadoids, Rocklings, Lumpenus, Long
Rough Dabs, and other fishes. _

112. Bythocythere recta, G. S. Brady.
1868. Cytheropteron rectum, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 476.
Hab.—Largo Bay; rare.

Genus (32) Pseudocythere, G. O. Sars, 1865.

113. Pseudocythere caudata, G. O. Sars.

1865. Pseudocythere caudata, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges
marine Ostracoder, p. 88.

Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Robertson). Off St
Monans; frequent.

Genus (33) Sclerochilus, G. O. Sars, 1865.

114. Sclerochilus contortus (Norman).

1862. Cythere contorta, Norman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3),
voleix op. 48, pl. a1. hs. 15.

Hab.—South Bay, and in deep water west of May Island ;
frequent.

Genus (34) Cytherideis, T. R. Jones, 1856.

115. Cytherideis subulata, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Cytherideis subulata, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac., p. 454,
pl. xxxv. figs. 43-46.

Hab.—Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith and other
parts in the estuary; not very common.

Genus (35) Cytherois, W. Miiller, 1884.

116. Cytherois Fischert (G. O. Sars).
1865. Paradoxostoma Fischeri, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., p. 96.
Hab.—Off Aberlady and St Monans; frequent.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 293

Genus (36) Paradoxostoma, Fischer, 1851.

117. Paradoxostoma variabile (Baird).
1835. Cythere variabilis, Baird, 'Trans. Berw. Nat. Club, vol. i
P 9e, Dl. ii. tis, 7 a; 0.
Hab.—Largo Bay, and generally throughout the estuary,
especially in the littoral and laminarian zones.

118. Paradoxostoma ensiforme, G. S. Brady.

1868. Paradoxostoma ensiforme, Brady, Mon. rec. Brit. Ostrac.,
p. 460, pl. xxxv. figs. 8-11.

Hab.—Dredged off the west side of Inchkeith; off
Musselburgh and elsewhere.

119. Paradoxostoma abbreviatum, G. O. Sars.

1865. Paradoxostoma abbreviatum, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges
marine Ostracoder, p. 94.

Hab.—Off Musselburgh; not very common. Easily
distinguished from its being remarkably short in comparison
to the height; there is also a perceptible difference in the
contour of the shell when seen from the side.

120. Paradoxostoma obliquum, G. O. Sars.
1865. Paradoxostoma obliquum, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., p. 97.
Hab.—Off Fidra, Musselburgh, and Burntisland; moder-
ately rare. This species is more tumid as viewed from
above when compared with most of the other British species.

121. Paradoxostoma pulchellum, G. O. Sars.
1865. Paradoxostoma pulchellum, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., p. 95.
Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh; moderately rare.

122. Paradoxostoma hibernicum, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Paradoxostoma hibernicum, Brady, l. ¢c., p. 460, pl. xxxv.
TE CRM aR MO) Gepcllam ite 7/6

Hab.—Largo Bay ; rather rare.

123. Paradoxostoma arcuatum, G. 8. Brady.

1868. Paradoxostoma arcuatum, Brady, l. ¢., p. 461, pl. xxxv.
fig. 37.

_Hab.—Granton (Brady and Robertson), Off St Monans,
Largo Bay, and vicinity of Inchkeith; rare.

294 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

124. Paradoxostoma orcadense,G. 8. Brady and D. Robertson.

1872. Paradoxostoma orcadense, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4), vol. ix. p. 58, pl. i. figs. 5-7.

Hab.—Off St Monans; rare.

125. Paradoxostoma Hodgei, G. 8. Brady.

1870. Paradoxostoma Hodgei, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durh., vol. iii. p. 371, pl. xii. figs. 12, 13.

Hab.—Off St Monans, frequent; also near Fidra.

126. Paradoxostoma flecuosum, G. S. Brady.

1868. Bythocythere (2) flecuosa, Brady, Brit. Assoc. Report (1866),
ps 2ule
1889. Paradoxostoma flexuosum, B. and N., J. ¢., Part I. p. 286,
plexed. sigs. 1142.
Hab.—Firth of Forth (Brady and Robertson). Off Bo’ness,

South Bay, and other parts of the estuary; frequent.

127. Paradoxostoma affine, T. Scott.
1890. Paradoxstoma affine, T. Scott, Highth Rept. F. B. S., pt. ii.
p. 325, pl. xii. figs. 8, 9.
1896. 5 » B. and N., 7. ¢., Part Ta@Appemins
p. 739, pl. ba. figs. 1051
Hab.—Off St Monans; not common. The species which this
form most closely resembles is the Paradoxostoma arcuatum
of G. S. Brady, but it is not so narrow posteriorly, and its
ereatest breadth is nearer the posterior extremity. It has also
been taken by Canon Norman near Inveraray, Loch Fyne.

Genus (37) Macherina, Brady and Norman, 1889.

128. Macherina tenwissima (Norman).

1869. Bythocythere tenwissima, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1868,
p. 294.

Hab.—Dredged in deep water west of May Island; not
common. Also observed in the stomach of a Five-bearded
Rockling captured in the Forth on 13th May 1901. This
species is remarkably compressed, and though moderately
high in the middle, both ends taper gradually to a narrow
point, imparting to the shell a very slender appearance.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 295

Section IJ. Myopocopa.
Family ASTEROPID&, Brady and Norman.
Genus (38) Asterope, Philippi, 1840.
129. Asterope marie (Baird).
1850. Cypridina maric, Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., pt. xviii.
p. 257, pl. xvii. figs. 5-7.

1896. Asterope marie, B. and N., U. c., Part II. p. 630, pl. 1.
figs. 1-6 et seq.

Hab.—Dredged near the Bass Rock; not common.

Family CYPRINIDA, Baird, 1850.
Genus (39) Philomedes, Lilljeborg, 1853.

130. Philomedes interpuncta (Baird).
1850. Cypridina interpuncta, Baird, l. c., p. 257, pl. xvii. figs. 8-10.

Hab.—South Bay, off west side of Inchkeith, and other
parts of the estuary; sometimes taken with the tow-net, and
often with the dredge.

Section III. Chapocopa, G. O. Sars, 1865.
Family POLYCOPIDA.
Genus (40) Polycope, G. O. Sars, 1868.

131. Polycope orbicularis, G. O. Sars.

1865. Polycope orbicularis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, p. 122.

Hab.—Dredged near Fidra, Firth of Forth; rare.

Genus (41) Polycopsis, G. W. Miiller, 1894.

132. Polycopsis compressa, (Brady and Robertson).
1869. Polycope compressa, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. iii. p. 20,.pl. xxi. figs. 5-11.

Hab— Off St Monans; frequent.

It will be observed that the Ostracoda enumerated -here
amount to 132 species, and belong to 41 genera. There are

296 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

some others which, judging from their distribution, may also
occur within the Forth area, though hitherto they have
escaped notice. JI have already mentioned that Scottia
Lrowniana has been observed in a lacustrine deposit at
Elie, Fifeshire, and as it appears to be very local in its
distribution, it may yet be found living somewhere within
the district. Cypridopsis Newtoni is another that may be
expected to occur in some of the inland waters, and there are
also a few marine forms that are likely to be met with.

About 170 species have, I think, been recorded from Scot-
land (including the Orkney and Shetland Islands), and if
those which have hitherto been only observed in the neigh-
bourhood of Shetland be excepted, it will be found that fully
84 per cent. of the Scottish species are represented within
the Forth area.

Order COPEPODA.

The Copepoda comprise a much larger number of species
than any of the other Crustacean orders. The species
enumerated here amount to 306, and include both free-
swimming and parasitic forms.

Various methods have been adopted for the scientific
arrangement of these organisms. In that used by Professor
G. O. Sars in his great work on the Crustacea of Norway, now
in course of publication, and which for the sake of uniformity
I propose to follow generally, the Copepoda are separated
into seven divisions, viz.:—1st, the Calanoida, most of which
are free-living and pelagic; 2nd, the Harpacticoida, which
for the most part are free-living but demersal; 3rd, the
Cyclopoida, some of which are free-living fresh-water species,
while others are “ semi-parasites,” and live as commensals or
messmates with various other organisms; 4th, the Noto-
delphyoida, which, for the most part, are “semi-parasites,”
associated with various Ascidians; 5th, the Monstrilloida,
a small but curious group, which appear to live a partly
parasitic and partly free life; 6th, the Caligoida, chiefly
parasitic on fishes, but some of which possess a certain
freedom of movement; and 7th, the Lerneoida, fish para-

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 297

sites, which, in the adult stage, are more or less permanently
fixed on some part of the fish.

This arrangement does not differ greatly from that of
Professor G. S. Brady’s excellent Monograph of the Free and
Sem-Parasitic Copepoda of the British Islands, except that
the Cyclopide and Notodelphydz are in that work placed
between the Calanoids and Harpacticoids.

The species recorded in the sequel are distributed among
the seven divisions as follows :—

Ist. The Calanoida, represented by 30 species.

2nd. The Harpacticoida, __,, en 0) i,
ord. The Cyclopoida, i ERS) %
Ath. The Notodelphyoida, ,, eee rd
5th. The Monstrilloida, ¥ eee ‘
6th. The Caligoida, ff a 7 a

7th. The Lerneoida, ig el |

Total number, 306

Division CALANOIDA.

In the arrangement and nomenclature of the species under
this division, Professor G. O. Sars’ work—An Account of the
Crustacea of Norway, vol. iv., Copepoda Calanoida—is gener-
ally followed. See also Professor G.S. Brady’s Monograph
of the Free and Senu-Parasitic Copepoda of the British
Islands, vol. 1.

Family CALANID &.
Genus (1) Calanus, Leach, 1816.

1. Calanus septentrionalis (Goodsir).

1843. Cetochilus septentrionalis, Goodsir, Edin. New Phil. Jour.,
vol. xxxv. p. 339, pl. vi. figs. 1-11.

1863. Calanus helgolandicus, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p: Lflt ph xxvii figs, 2:9:

Hlab.— Common in the Firth. Previously recorded as C.
jinmarchicus (Gunn.), but, as indicated by G. O. Sars, that
species is slightly larger, and differs in some structural
details, and its distribution appears for the most part to

298 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

be confined to the arctic or subarctic seas. There seems to
be little doubt that Cetochilus septentrionalts is identical with
Calanus helgolandicus, Claus, and having priority in publica-
tion, it should have preference over C. helgolandicus.

Family PARACALANIDA, G. O. Sars, 1902.
Genus (2) Paracalanus, Boeck, 1864.

2. Paracalanus parvus (Claus).
1863. Calanus parvus, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 173,
pl. xxvi. figs. 10-14; pl. xxvii. figs. 1-4.
ffab.— Occasionally taken with the tow-net near the sea-
ward limits of the Forth estuary, sometimes in moderate
abundance, but usually it is a rather scarce species.

Family PSEUDOCALANIDA.
Genus (3) Pseudocalanus, Boeck, 1872.

3. Pseudocalanus elongatus, Boeck.

1864. Clausia elongata, Boeck, Forhandl. Videnskabs-Selskabet,
Christiania (1864), p. 9.

Hab.—Common throughout the estuary. Boeck described
this species as Clausia elongata, but as that generic name had
been previously used by Claparede for a genus of parasitic
Copepods, he withdrew it and substituted the name Psewdo-
calanus.

Family AU TIDEIDA.
Genus (4) Bradyidius, Giesbrecht, 1897.

4. Bradyidius armatus (G. 8. Brady).

1878. Pseudocalanus armatus, G. S. Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep.,
vol. i. p. 46, pl. iv. figs. 1-11.
1897. Bradyidius armatus, Giesbrecht, Zool. Anzeiger, No. 586.
1898. ue » -. Scott, Sixteenth F.B. Rept., pi, ne
p. 264, pl. xii. figs. 1-19.
1902. Undinopsis Bradyi, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. iv.
Do 2> GIS) KaK:. 5 UX,

Hab.—Otf St Monans and a few other places near the

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 299

seaward limits of the estuary. I have given several
synonyms for this species, as there appears to be some
doubt about the name that should be used for it.

Family STEPHID&®.
Genus (5) Stephos, T. Scott, 1892.

5. Stephos minor, T. Scott.
1892. Stephos minor, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 245,
pl. vil. figs. 1-13.
Hab.—Off St Monans and other parts of the estuary ; not
common. Dredged in 7 fathoms off the east side of Inch-
keith, 23rd May 1901.

6. Stephos Scotti, G. O. Sars.

1897. Stephos gyrans, T. Scott (not S. gyrans, Giesb.), Fitteenth
eB; Rept., pt. iu. p: 146; pl. i. figs: 2-957 pk) un.

hess 17°18.
1902. », Scotti, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. iv. p. 63,
pl. xliii.
1903. M », L.Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 110,
pl. i. figs. 1-4.

Hab.—Obtained in a gathering collected in 1892, but not
examined till 1902; also in a gathering from an old quarry
near Granton to which the sea has access, collected in 1894 ;
rather rare.

Family PSEUDOCYCLOPIID&.
Genus (6) Pseudocyclopia, T. Scott, 1892.

7. Pseudocyclopia crassicornis, T. Scott.
1892. Pseudocyclopia crassicornis, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 246, pl. vil. figs. 15-29.

Hab.—Off St Monans, 1891; off the east side of Inch-
keith in May 1901, and at a few other places; not common.

8. Pseudocyclopia minor, T. Scott.
1892. Pseudocyclopia minor, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 247, pl. viii. figs. 1-10.
Hab.—Off St Monans, 1891; not common. This is a
smaller, and apparently a rarer species than the last.
VOL. XVL 25

300 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

9. Pseudocyclopia caudata, T. Scott.

1894. Pseudocyclopia caudata, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p. 236, pl. v. figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Off St Monans in 1893; off the east side of Inch-
keith, in about 5 fathoms, in May 1901.

10. Pseudocyclopia Giesbrechti, Wolfenden.

1902. Pseudocyclopia Griesbrechti, Wolfenden, Jour. M. B. A. Ply-
mouth, January 1902, p. 370, pl. iv.

Hab.—West of Queensferry; rare. A single male was
dredged to the west of Queensferry, 17th November 1893, but
was only recently identified. A female (the one he describes
and figures) was taken by Dr Wolfenden with a surface tow-
net off the island of Bressay, Shetland, in March 1900.

Family CENTROPAGIDA.
Genus (7) Centropages, Kroyer, 1848.

11. Centropages typicus, Kroyer.

1848. Centropages typicus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. (N.S.), vol. i1.
p. 588, pl. vi. figs. 22-26.

Hab.—Not uncommon in the seaward portion of the
estuary, especially during summer; but it appears to become
rarer in the winter months.

12. Centropages hamatus (Lilljeborg).

' 1853. Ichtyophorba hamata, Lillj., De Crust. ex ord. tribus in Scania
occurrentibus, p. 185, pl. xxi.; pl. xxvi. figs. 9-12.

Hab.—This species, which is rather more common than the
last, has a seasonal distribution somewhat similar to it.

Family DIAPTOMIDA.
Genus (8) Diaptomus, Westwood, 1836.

13. Diaptomus castor (Jurine).
1820. AMonoculus castor, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 50, pl. iv.
figs. 1-6 et seq.
Hab.—In an old quarry on the Braid Hills, Edinburgh, in
April 1888: this quarry is now included within the public

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 301

park. Roslin Curling Pond (ff and 2), 3rd March 1906
(Evans).

14. Diaptomus gracilis, G. O. Sars.

1862. Diaptomus gracilis, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af de indenlandske
Ferskvandscopepoder, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forh., 1862, p. 9.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Loch Leven, and in most of
the fresh-water lochs within the area; common. Loch a
Chroin, 2500 feet, September 1906 (W. Evans).

15. Diaptomus hircus, G. 8. Brady.

1891. Diaptomus hircus, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durham, vol. ii. p. 35, pl. x. figs. 2-4.

Hab.—Loch Katrine, Trossachs, 16th March1898; ratherrare.

16. Diaptomus Wrerzejski, J. Richard.

1888. Diapiomus Wierzejskii, Richard, Bull. Soc. Zool. de France,
vol. xiii. p. 53.

1891. ns serricornis, Lillj., Brady, Ul. ¢., p. 36, pl. ix.
figs. 3-10.

Hab.—Loch Achray, Trossachs, 27th November 1897.
Though this is the only loch within the area of the Forth
basin in which I have obtained Diaptomus Wierzejskit, it
is a widely distributed species in the north of Scotland,
Shetland, and the Outer Hebrides.

Family TEMORIDAZ.
Genus (9) Temora, Baird, 1830.
17. Temora longicormis (O. F. Miller).

1792. Cyclops longicornis, Miller, Entomostraca Danie et Norvigie,
Patl5,

Hab.—Common, and generally distributed throughout the
estuary.

Genus (10) Eurytemora, Giesbrecht, 1881.
18. Eurytemora velox (Lilljeborg).

1853. Temora velox, Lillj., De Crust. ord. tribus in Scania occur-
rentibus, p. 177, pl. xx. figs. 2-9 (¢@ ).

Hab.—In the estuary near South Queensferry.

302 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

19. Hurytemora affinis (Poppe).

1881. Temora affinis, Poppe, Abhandl. d. Naturh. ver. Bremen,
Vol; ‘Vil. p.bd,4ple aa:

1891. Hurytemora affinis, G.S. Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.,
Durh., and Newcastle-upon-Tyne, vol. ix. p. 42, pl. xiii.
figs. 6-9.

Hab.—Taken in the vicinity of Culross, and between
Kineardine-on-Forth and Alloa, in July 1891 and February
1892; moderately common.

Family MeTrRIDIIDA
Genus (11) Metridia, Boeck, 1864.

20. Metridia lucens, Boeck.

1864. Metridia lueens, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forh., p. 238.
1878. $5 armata, G. S. Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 42,
pl. 1. figs. 1-12.

Hab.—Obtained sparingly near the mouth of the estuary,
and from there west to near Inchkeith.

Family PSEUDOCYCLOPID4.
Genus (12) Pseudocyclops, Brady, 1872.

21. Pseudocyclops crassiremis, G. 8. Brady.

1872. Pseudocyclops crassiremis, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durham, vol. iv. p. 431, pl. xvii. figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Off St Monans, 1893; rare.

22. Pseudocyclops obtusatus, G. 8. Brady and D. Robertson.

1873. Pseudocyclops obtusatus, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4), vol. xii. p. 128, pl. viii. figs. 4-7.

Hab.—Taken sparingly with the dredge off St Monans.

Also off the north-west end of Inchkeith, in about 5 fathoms,
on 23rd May 1901.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 303

Family CANDACIID &.
Genus (13) Candacia, Dana, 1846.

23. Candacia armata, Boeck.

1872. Candace armata, Boeck, Nye Slegter og Arter Saltvands-
Copepoder, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forh., p. 39.
1878. - pectinata, Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 49, pl. viii.
figs,14, 15; pl. x: figs. 1-12.
1902. Candacia armata, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., vol. iv. p 135, pl. xci.
Hab.—Occasionally captured with the tow-net between
Inchkeith and May Island. This species appears to be more
frequent in winter and spring than during the summer months.

Family PONTELLIDA.
Genus (14) Anomalocera, Templeton, 1837.

24. Anomalocera Patersont, Templeton.

1837. Anomalocera Patersoni, Templ., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond.,
vol. ii. p. 35, pl. v. figs. 1-3.

Hab.—This species is, at times, moderately frequent in the
Forth estuary, especially during summer and autumn.

Genus (15) Labidocera, Lubbock, 1853.

25. Labidocera Wollastont, Lubbock.

1857. Pontella Wollastoni, Lubbock, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist., (2), yok xs p.)406; pls. x:, x.

Hab.— Ott the east side of Inchkeith; collected 8th June
1891, but not examined till 1899.

Family PARAPONTELLID4.
Genus (16) Parapontella, G. S. Brady, 1878.

26. Parapontella brevicornis (Lubbock).
1857. Pontellina brevicornis, Lubbock, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (2), vol. xx. p. 407, pl. xi. figs. 4-8.
Hab.—This species has been observed above Queensferry,
off, Musselburgh, in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith, off the
Wemyss, and in the neighbourhood of Dunbar.

304 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

Family ACARTIID4.
Genus (17) Acartia, Dana, 1846.

27. Acartia longiremis (Lilljeborg).

1853. Dias longiremis, Lillj., De Crust. ex ord. tribus in Scania
occurrentibus, p. 181, pl. xxiv.

Hab.—Generally distributed throughout the estuary; not
usually uncommon, but at some seasons it appears to be
more numerous than at others.

28. Acartia Claust, Giesbrecht.

1889. Acartia Clausi, Giesb., Atti Accad. Lincei Rend. Roma (4),
vol, v. sem. 2, p. 25.

Hab.—The distribution and frequency of this species is
somewhat similar to the last. |

29. Acartia bifilosa, Giesbrecht.

1881. Dias bifilosus, Giesb., Zool. Anzeiger, vol. iv. p. 257.
182) ae “ Giesb., Die frei-leb. Copep. der Kieler Fohrde,
p- 147, pl. ili. figs. 4, 22, 23 et seg.

Hab.—Taken in the vicinity of Culross, near the head of
the estuary, in 1891.

30. Acartia discaudata, Giesbrecht.

1882. Dias discaudatus, Giesb., Die frei-leb. Copep. der Kieler
Fohrde, p. 148, pl. iii. figs. 4, 22, 23 e¢ seq.

Hab.—Collected with a tow-net between Portobello and
Cockenzie in 1890, and on several subsequent occasions,
chiefly in the same part of the estuary. The female of this
species is readily distinguished by the character of the furcal
joints, which are of the form of broad flattened plates fringed
with stout and not very long sete.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 305

Division HARPACTICOIDA.

I have decided to omit the separating of the Harpacticoida
into families, because Professor G. O. Sars, in his work now
in course of publication, is creating an entirely new arrange-
ment of these Copepoda. The reader is therefore referred to
vol. v. of The Crustacea of Norway, part of which is already
published, for the systematic distribution of this group.

Genus (18) Misophria, Boeck, 1864.

dl. Misophria pallida, Boeck.

1864. Misophria pallida, Boeck, Chr. Vidensk.-Selskab. Forhandl.,
p. 248.

1904. sh bi Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. v. p. 6,
pls. i, ii

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans, west of Queensferry, and
other parts of the estuary, but not very common.

Genus (19) Longipedia, Claus, 1863.

32. Longipedia Scotti, G. O. Sars.

1893. Longipedia coronata, T. and A. Scott (not L. coronata, Claus),
Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., vol. ii. pt. ii. p. 91,
pl. ii. figs. 4-6.

1904. a Scotti, G. O. Sars, /. ¢., vol. v. p. 11, pl. v. fig. 1.

Hab.—Moderately common throughout the estuary.

33. Longipedia minor, T. and A. Scott.

1893. Longipedia coronata, var. minor, T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot.
Nat. Hist., vol. ii. p. 93.

1893. Bs 95 - we L. S Scott, “Eleventh. F.. B:
Rept... pt; im. p. 200,
pl. ii. figs. 14-20.

1904. sf minor, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢c., vol. v. p. 12, pl. v. fig. 2.

_ Hab.—Not uncommon in various parts of the estuary, as
off Musselburgh, Largo Bay, ete.

306 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (20) Canuella, T. and A. Scott, 1893.

34, Canuella perpleca, T. and A. Scott.
1893. Canuella perplexa, T. and A. Scott, 7. ¢., p. 92, pl. ii. figs. 1-3.

1893. - f T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. ili.
p. 201, pl. i. figs. 21-35.
1904. op i. G. O, Sars, Z. ¢., vol. v. p. 17, pls; vie

Hab.—Frequent in material dredged off Musselburgh,
Largo Bay, Aberdour Bay, and other places.

Genus (21) Neobradya, T. Scott, 1892.

35. Neobradya pectinifer, T. Scott.

1892. Neobradya pectinifer, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iti.
p. 249, pl. xiii. figs. 19-32.

Hab.—Dredged off the north end of Inchkeith in Novem-
ber 1889, and also off St Monans in 1891. This species
appears to have a fairly wide distribution, as it has been
found in the Clyde by myself, and off the Isle of Man by the
late I. C. Thompson of Liverpool.

Genus (22) Zosime, Boeck, 1872.

36. Zosume typrca, Boeck.

1872. Zosime typica, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl. (1872 , p. 46.
18805 5. » G. §. Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vel: i.
p. 15, pl. xxxix. figs. 1-12.

Hab.—Taken off Musselburgh ; frequent.

Genus (23) Ectinosoma, Boeck, 1864.

37. Hetinosoma Sarsi, Boeck.
1872. Hetinosoma Sarsi, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl. (1872),

p. 45.

1880. aH spinipes, G. S. Brady, Z. c., vol. ii. p. 9, pl. xxxvi.
figs. 1-10.

1904. 5 Sarsi, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. v. p. 30,
pl. xvi.

Hab.— Moderately common throughout the estuary.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 307

38. Ectinosoma melaniceps, Boeck.

1864. Ectinosoma melaniceps, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl.
(1864), p. 30.
Be G.. 8. Brady, 7. -e., volo us 11, pl al
figs. 17-20.
Hab.—Moderately common, especially among weeds in
shallow inshore water.

1880. fs

39. Ectinosoma propinqguum, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Ketinosoma propinquum, T. and A. Scott, Trans. Linn. Soc.
Zool. (S. 2), vol. vi. p. 428, pl. xxxvi. figs. 19, 27, 46 et seq.

Hab.—Taken off Musselburgh, not very common; but as
it is somewhat similar to Z. Sarsz in size and general appear-
ance, it is easily overlooked.

40. Hetinosoma Herdmani, T. and A. Scott.
1896. Ectinosoma Herdmani. T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 482,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 16, 44 e¢ seq.
Hab.—Moderately common in material dredged in Aber-
dour Bay and off Musselburgh ; taken also sparingly off St
Monans.

41. Ectinosoma Normani, V. and A. Scott.
1896. Ectinosoma Normani, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 435,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 21, 29, 39 e¢ seq.
1904. 95 ee G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. 35, pl. xix. fig. 2.
Hab.— Dredged sparingly off Burntisland.

42. Ectinosoma curticorne, Boeck.

1872. Ectinosoma curticorne, Boeck, Chr. Vid -Selsk. Forhandl.
(1872), p. 45.
as Eerands Ay iSeoth; op: cit.) p. 430);
pl. xxxvi. figs. 22, 30, 34 et seg.
Hab.—Taken off Burntisland and Musselburgh, and a few
other inland parts of the estuary.

1896. ay

43. Hetinosoma erythrops, G. 5. Brady.

1880. Hctinosoma erythrops, Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. il.
ps 12, pl. xxxvi. figs. 11-17.

1896. es a i ands AS Scott; op. cit:,\ p.. 431,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 24, 31, 36 et seq.

Hab.— Off St Monans; moderately rare.

308 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

44. Ectinosoma gothiceps, Giesbrecht.

1882. Ecetinosoma gothiceps, Giesb., Die frei-leb. Copep. d. Kieler
Fohrde, p. 106, pl. i. figs. 3, 12 e¢ seq.

1896. 3 pygmeum, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 433,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 15, 41 ef seq.

Hab.—Off St Monans ; not common.

45. Ectinosoma armiferum, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Eetinosoma armiferum, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 4384,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 20, 43 et seq.

Hab.—Obtained off the west side of May Island in
moderately deep water ; rare.

46. Ectinosoma tenurpes, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Ectinosoma tenuipes, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 436,
pl. xxxvi. figs. 25, 32, 35 et seq.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rare.

47. Ectinosoma longicorne, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Ectinosoma longicorne, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 4389, pl. xxxvi.
figs. 23, 58 et seq.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans ; rare.

48. Ectinosoma tenuireme, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Hctinosoma tenuireme, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 4389,
pl. xxxvi. fig. 33 et seq.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans ; rare.

49. Hetinosoma gracile, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Ectinosoma gracile, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 429, pl. xxxvi.
figs. 18, 37 et seq.

1904, Bis » G. O. Sars, Crust..of Norway. vole
Pp: 59, ply xi eee

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans ; not very common.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 309

Genus (24) Microsetella, Brady and Robertson, 1873.
50. Microsetella norvegica (Boeck).

1864. Setella norvegica, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl. (1864),
p. 281.

1878. Microsetella atlantica, Brady and Robertson, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (4), vol. xii. p. 130, pl. ix. figs. 11-16.
1904. Microsetella norvegica, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., vol. v. p 44, pl. xxiv.
Hab.—Taken near Inchkeith, with the surface tow-net, in
November 1890, and subsequently in various parts of the
estuary, sometimes in considerable numbers.

Genus (25) Pseudobradya, G. O. Sars, 1904.
51. Pseudobradya minor (T. and A. Scott).

1896. Bradya minor, T. and A. Scott, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. (S. 2),
vol. vi. p. 425, pl. xxxv. figs. 5, 9, 18, 21 et seq.
1904. Pseudobradya minor, G. O. Sars, 7. c., vol. v. p. 41, pl. xxii.
fig. 2.
Hlab.—Taken off St Monans and near Musselburgh, but
apparently not very common.

52. Pseudobradya elegans (T. and A. Scott).

1896. Bradya elegans, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., vol. v. p. 422,
pl. xxxv. figs. 4, 10, 15 e seq.

Hab.—Taken sparingly in Largo Bay and off Musselburgh.

53. Pseudobradya hirsuta (T. and A. Scott).
1896. Bradya hirsuta, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 423, pl. xxxv.
figs. 2, 8, 17 et seq.
Hab.—Taken in Largo Bay in 1891, and afterwards in
other parts of the estuary, but always very sparingly.

54. Pseudobradya similis (T. and A. Scott).

1896. Bradya similis, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 424, pl. xxxv.
figs. 3, 7, 16, 27 ef seq.
1904. Pseudobradya similis, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. v.
p-. 42, pl. xxiii. fig. 2.
_Hab.—The distribution of this species is similar to the
last, but it is asmaller species, being little more than half the

310 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socwvety.

size. It resembles that species in having the furcal joints
comparatively long and spreading.

55. Pseudobradya fusca (T. and A. Scott).

1896. Bradya fusca, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 424, pl. xxxv. figs.
6, 12, 18, 20 e seq.

Hab.—Taken very sparingly in Largo Bay. This is a
moderately stout species, but the abdominal part of the body
tapers more gradually towards the furcal joints than does
some of the others. |

Genus (26) Bradya, Boeck, 1872.
56. Bradya typica, Boeck.
1872. Bradya typica, Boeck, Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl. (1872), p. 47.
1904. mn at G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., vol. v. p. 46, place

Hab.—Obtained off the west side of May Island, and in
some other parts of the estuary; not very rare.

Genus (27) Harpacticus, M.-Edwards, 1838.
57. Harpacticus chelifer (O. F. Miiller).
1785. Cyclops chelifer, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca. p. 114, pl. xix.
figs. 1-3.

1904. Harpacticus chelifer, G. O. Sars, 2. c., p. 49, pls. xxvii.,
XXVlll.

Hab.—This species appears to be moderately common
throughout the estuary, especially in the littoral and lamin-
arian zones.

58. Harpacticus uniremis, Kroyer.
1838-40. Harpacticus wniremis, Kroyer, in Gaimard’s Voy. en Scand.,
pl. xii. fig. 1 a-p.
1904. Ss vis G.:O.., Sars, 2 ¢.;) vol; aan amet
pli aaxince
Hab.—Taken in the vicinity of Dunbar on 26th April
1894, but not previously recorded.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 311

09. Harpacticus flecus, Brady and Robertson.
1873. Harpacticus flexus, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),

vol, xii. p. 184, pl. ix. figs. 17-21.
1904. is sy 0 (Gow QO. Sara, (06,00 Yap. Od, Pla kext ne

Hab.—Obtained off St Monans, in Largo Bay, and off
Musselburgh, but not very common.

60. Harpacticus obscurus, T. Scott.

1895. Harpacticus obscurus, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept , pt. iii.
p- 170, pl. iv. figs. 4-12.

Hab.—Taken sparingly in an old quarry at Granton, open
to the sea. This species has a superficial resemblance to the

last, but is smaller, and the posterior foot-jaws (second
maxillipedes) are different.

Genus (28) Tigriopus, Norman, 1868.
61. Tigriopus fulvus (Fischer).

1860. Harpacticus fulvus, Fischer, Abhandl. d. Konig. Bayer.

Akad., vol. viii. p. 656, pl. i. figs. 30-33; pl. ii. figs. 34-39.
1904. Tigriopus fulvus, G. O. Sars, J. c., vol. v. p. 54, pls. xxxi.,
5,0:9.00

Hab.—Moderately common in pools about high-water
mark on Cramond Island.

Genus (29) Zaus, Goodsir, 1845.
62. Zaus spinatus, Goodsir.

1845. Zaus spinatus, Goodsir, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. xvi.
p. 826, pl. xi. figs. 1-8.
a ,, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p 153, pl. Ixvi.
figs. 1-9.
°e + GeO) Sars; ic, voleiv: p., 57 jgple xxx
Hab.—Frequent in dredged material collected off Mussel-
burgh, in Largo Bay, and various other places.

1880.

1904.

63. Zaus Goodsiri, G.S. Brady.
1880. Zaus Goodsiri, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 156, pl. Ixvi.
figs. 10-13.
oe ” GLO) Sakser c VOlyV. p.i09, pl. XXXV.
Hab.—Frequent in dredged material collected off St
Monans, and also occasionally off the east side of Inchkeith.

1904.

312 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (30) Alteutha, Baird, 1845.
64. Alteutha interrupta (Goodsir).
1845. Sterope interrupta, Goodsir, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol.
Xvi. p. 326, pl. xi. fig: 10.
1863. Altewtha bopyroides, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p.
143, pl. xxii. figs. 10-17.
1904, an interrupta, G. O. Sars, U. c., vol. v. p. 62, pls. xxxvi.
and xxxvil.
Hab.—Frequent in tow-net gatherings collected amongst
Laminaria, and also in inshore dredgings.

Genus (31) Eupelte, Claus.
65. Hupelte purpurocincta (Norman).

1868. Alteutha purpurocinctum, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept., p.
298,

1880. Peltidium depressum, Brady (not Baird), Monograph, vol. ii.

p. 160, pl. xxii. figs. 1-5.
1904. Alteutha depressa, G. O. Sars, Ul. ¢., vol. v. p. 64, pl. xxxviii.
Hab.—Taken off Musselburgh, off the north end of Inch-

keith, and at other parts of the estuary, but not very
common.

Genus (32) Tegastes, Norman, 1903.
66. Tegastes falcata, Norman.
1869. Amymone falcata, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1868, p. 296.
1880. “ spherica, Brady (not Claus), Brit. Copep., vol. ii.
p. 28, pl. xlix. figs. 1-11.
1904. Tegastes falcatus, G. O. Sars, l. ¢., vol. v. p. 69, pl. xli.
Hab—Found sparingly throughout the estuary. This
curious species was first recorded for the Forth in Part III.
of the Siath Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland
(1888). The A. spherica of Claus (A. nigrans, T. and A.
Scott) has not yet been observed in the Forth.

Genus (33) Porcellidium, Claus, 1860.
57. Porcellidium jimbriatum, Claus
1863. Porcellidium jfimbriatum, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p. 140, pl. xxii. fig. 1.

a . G. O. Sars, @. c., vol. v. po 76, ple:
<liva lye

Hab.—Obtained in Largo Bay on seaweed brought up

1904.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. re ea.

with the dredge. This species frequents the fronds of
Laminaria and other seaweeds, to which it can adhere very
firmly; and from its colour and very flattened form it is,
though not uncommon, easily missed unless the weed be
carefully examined.

Genus (34) Aspidiscus, Norman, 1868.

68. Aspidiscus littoralis, G. O. Sars.

1880. Scutellidium fasciatum, G. S. Brady (not Norman), Mono-
graph, vol. ii. p. 178, pl. Ixviii. fig. 11; pl. lxix. figs.
1-9,
1904. Aspidiscus littoralis, G. O. Sars, 7. ¢., vol. v. p. 79, pls. xlvi.,
xlvii.
Hab.—This species was obtained very sparingly in a shore
gathering near the mouth of the estuary.

Genus (35) Tisbe, Lilljeborg, 1853.
69. Tisbe furcata (Baird).
1837. Cyclops furcatus, Baird, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. i. p. 330,
pl. ix. figs. 26-28.
1850. Canthocamptus furcatus, idem, Brit. Entomostraca, p. 210,
pl. xxv. figs. 1 and 2; pl. xxx. figs. 1-6.
1863. Tisbe furcata, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 116,
pl. xv. figs. 1-10.
1880. Jdya furcata, G. S. Brady, Z, ¢., vol. ii. p. 172, pl. Ixvii. figs.
1-11.
Hab.—Various parts of the estuary. Common, especially
within the littoral and laminarian zones.

70. Zusbe gracilis (T. Scott).

1895. Idya gracilis, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 171,
pl. iv. figs. 13-21.

Hab.—In an old quarry at Granton, open to the sea; rare.
Collected by hand-net near low-water.

Genus (36) Thalestris, Claus, 1863.

71. Thalestris longimana, Claus.

1863. Thalestris longimana, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p- 130, pl. xviii. figs. 1-11,

- Hab—In rock pools near high-water on Cramond Island;

314 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith; at Station VII. and
other parts of the estuary; usually not very plentiful.

Genus (37) Parathalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905.

72. Parathalestris Claust (Norman).

1869. Thalestris Clausi, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report for 1868, p.
297.
1888. “ $3 G. S. Brady, Monograph vol. ii. p. 128,
pl. Ixii. figs. 1-12.
Hab.—tLargo Bay, washed from seaweed brought up by
the dredge, frequent; dredged also in shallow water off
Musselburgh.

73. Parathalestris harpactoides (Claus).

1863. Thalestris harpactoides, Claus, 1. c., p. 133, pl. xix. figs. 2-12.
1905. Parathalestris harpacticoides, G. O.. Sars, Crust. of Norway,
vol. v. p. 112, pl. Ixvii.
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891, but only a few
specimens were observed.

Genus (38) Phyllothalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905.

74. Phyllothalestris nvysis (Claus).

1863. Thalestris mysis, Claus, 7. ¢., p. 1380, pl. xviii. figs. 12-16.
1880. 2 » ) GS. Brady, %. ¢, vol. i. p. P20 algae
figs. 1-13.
Hab.—Firth ot Forth, 1894,—a fine species, very sparingly
but widely distributed.

Genus (39) Halithalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905.
75. Halithalestris Cront (Kroyer).

1849. Harpacticus Croni, Kroyer, in Gaimard’s Voyages en Scand.,
Zool., pl. xliii fig. 3 a-n.

1880. Thalestris serrulatus, G. S. Brady, /. ¢., vol. ii. p. 133, pl. lix.
figs. 2-11.

Hab.—East of Inchkeith, several taken with surface tow-
net in 1889; and in surface tow-net in June 1891 at Station
1X. This appears to be a truly pelagic species, and widely
distributed, but which only occasionally enters the Forth

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. oLe

estuary. As the colour of these Copepods is bright red they
are easily noticed, but the colour quickly disappears when
they are preserved in alcohol.

Genus (40) Rhynchothalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905.

76. Khynchothalestris rufocincta (Norman).
1880. Thalestris rufocincta, Norman (MS. name), in G. S. Brady,
1. c., vol. ii, p. 125, pl. lvii. figs. 1-9.

1905. Rhynchothalestris rufocincta, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway,
vol. v. p. 120, pls. Ixxiii., Ixxiv.

Hab.—In pools between tide-marks about Joppa and
Granton, 1887, frequent, and subsequently in various other

parts of the estuary, but more common in the littoral zone
than in deep water.

77. Rhynchothalestris helgolandica (Claus).

1863. Thalestris helgolandica, Claus, 7. ¢., p. 131, pl. xvii. figs.
12-21,
a 2 Gs'S.: Brady,: 2: ¢.,, vol: a1. p, 123) pl
Ixi. figs. 9-14.
1905. Rhynchothalestris helgolandica, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway,
Wol. Va parl2k, pl: lxxy:

1880.

Hab.—Washed from some seaweed obtained while dredg-
ing in Largo Bay in April 1891. Also obtained in dredged
material collected off the north-east end of Inchkeith in
May 1901.

Genus (41) Microthalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905.

78. Microthalestris forficula (Claus).

1863. Thalestris forficula, Claus, 7. ¢., p. 131, pl. xvii. figs. 7-12.
1894. 5 Jorficuloides, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xii. p. 142, pl. ix. figs. 4-9.
1905. Microthalestris forficula, G. O. Sars, . c., vol. v. p. 123, pl.
Ixxvi.

Hab.—In pools near low-water between Leith and Porto-
bello, not very common. The part of the shore where the
specimens were chiefly obtained was opposite Seafield, where
there is a good deal of mud.

VOL. XVI. 2 F

316 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (42) Amenophia, Boeck, 1864.

79. Amenophia peltata, Boeck.

1864. Amenophia peltata, Boeck, Oversigt af Norges Copepoder,
Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl., p. 45.
1880. Thalestris peltata, G. S. Brady, 7. ¢., vol. il. p. 138, pl. liii.
figs. 11-19.
1895. rf cos T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(6), vol. xiv. p. 35, pl. xv. figs. 11-15;
pl. xvi. figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh; notcommon. The species
differs from the typical Thalestris in the body being very
depressed and in the structure of some of the appendages,
as shown by the drawings in the works referred to.

Genus (43) Westwoodia, Dana, 1855.

80. Westwoodia nobilis (Baird).

1845. Arpacticus nobilis, Baird, Trans. Berw. Nat. Club, vol. ii.
p. 155.
1880. Westwoodia nobilis, Brady, Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 141,
pl. lxiil. figs. 1-13.
Hab.—Taken at Cramond Island in rock-pools between
tide-marks, and in dredged material collected off Musselburgh
in 3 to 4 fathoms; not common.

Genus (44) Pseudothalestris,' Brady, 1883.

81. Pseudothalestris Andrewi (T. Scott).

1894. Pseudowestwoodia Andrewi, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept.,
pt. i. p. 257, pl.ix. figs! 21-29.

Hab.—Dredged off Burntisland in 3 to 4 fathoms water ;
frequent.

This group of Copepods have so close a general resemblance
to Westwoodia, Dana, that I ascribed the first species to a
new genus, Psewudowestwoodia, which recognised that resem-
blance, but afterwards I discovered that they were identical

1 The genus Pseudothalestris is closely related to Westwoodia, Dana, but as
it contains a group of species which differ distinctly in the structure of the
first pair of thoracic feet, I prefer to retain it as a separate genus.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 317

with the genus Pseudothalestvis, Brady, described by that
author in his “ Report on the Challenger Copepoda.” !

82. Pseudothalestris pygmea (T. and A. Scott).

1895. Pseudothalestris pygmea, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xv. p. 55, pl. vi. figs. 8-16 (January
1895).

Hab.—Dredged sparingly in the neighbourhood of Dunbar.

83. 2Pseudothalestris major (T. and A. Scott).

(2) 1863. Westwoodia minuta, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p- 118, taf. xxi. figs. 10-14.
1895. Pseudowestwoodia major, T. and A. Scott, loc. cit., p- 56,
pl. vi. figs. 17-26.
Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of Granton, and near
Dunbar.

Genus (45) Dactylopusia, Norman, 1903.3

84. Dactylopusia tisboides (Claus).

1863. Dactylopus tisboides, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p. 127, pl. xvi. figs. 24-28.

Hab.—Shore-pools at Cramond Island; dredged off Mussel-
burgh and other parts of the estuary; frequent in the littoral
and laminarian zones.

85. Dactylopusia neglecta, G. O. Sars.

1889. Dactylopus tisboides, G. S. Brady (brackish-water var.), 7. ¢.,
vol. ii. p. 198, pl. liv. figs. 14-16.

1905. Dactylopusia neglecta, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. v.
pi h27, pl bexvinis te. 2.

Hab.—Tiis brackish-water form was observed in the
lagoon at the mouth of the Cocklemill Burn (east end of
Largo Bay).

1Cf. paper by T. and A. Scott in Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xv.
p- 463 (June 1895).

*See remarks on this species and al-o on the genus in Part III. of the
Twenty-fourth Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, at page 277
(1906).

3 The name Dactylopus, Claus, being preoccupied by Gill for a genus of
fishes, was by Canon Norman changed to Dactylopusia.

318 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

86. Dactylopusia vulgaris, G. O. Sars.
1863. Dactylopus Strémi, Claus, l. ¢., p. 126, pl. xvi. figs. 1-6.

Hab.—Forth, west of Queensferry, washed from lumps of
hardened mud; not very common. According to G. O. Sars,
this is not the Canthocamptus Strom, Baird, as Claus supposed
it to be.

87. Dactylopusia littoralis (T. Scott).

1908. Dactylopus littoralis, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 124, pl. iii. figs. 2-8. |
Hab.—Obtained in pools between tide-marks at Mussel-
burgh in 1894, but not recorded till 1903. This seems to be
a rare species.

88. Dactylopusia finmarchica, T. Scott.

1903. Dactylopus longirostris, Claus, var. jinmarchicus, T. Scott,
Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), vol. xi. (Jan.
1903), p. 21, plu. figs. 4-s2)—

1903. i mixtus, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
(pub. 20th July 1903), p. 126, pl. iii. figs. 9-16.

Hab.—This Dactylopusia was first described from specimens
obtained in East Finmark, within the Arctic Circle, in a
collection made by Canon Norman in the summer of 1890.
The species was also observed in a gathering collected in
1894 in the old quarry at Granton, where several other
interesting Copepoda have been captured. This gathering was
not thoroughly examined till 1903, when the Dactylopusia
was by an oversight redescribed as a “new species,” under
the name of D. mixtus.

89. Dactylopusia debilis (Giesbrecht).

1882. Dactylopus debilis, Giesb., Frei-leb. Copep. d. Kieler Fohrde,
p. 122, pl. i. figs. 7, 19 e seq.

19038. oe », JI. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. tii.
p. 128, pl. v. figs. 20-31.

Hab.—tThis species occurred very sparingly in a gathering
dredged off Musselburgh in 4 to 5 fathoms.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 319

90. Dactylopusia brevicornis (Claus).
1868. Dactylopus brevicornis, Claus, Die Copepoden-fauna ‘von
Nizza, p. 29, pl. iui. figs. 20-25.
1906. Dactylopusia brevicornis, 'T. Scott, Twenty-fourth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iil. p. 276, pl. xiv. figs. 10-18. F
Hab.— Dredged in Largo Bay and in the old quarry at
Granton ; not common.

Genus (46) Dactylopodella, G. O. Sars, 1905.

91. Dactylopodella flava (Claus).
1866. Dactylopus flavus, Claus, J. c., p. 28, pl. iii. figs. 13-16.

Hab.—Taken very sparingly with the dredge in Largo
Bay and at Station ITI.

Genus (47) Idomene, Philippi, 1843.

92. [domene forficata, Philippi.

1843. Idomene forficata, Philippi, Archiv. f. Naturgesch., 1843,
p. 65, taf. iii. fig. 4.
1880. Dactylopus flavus, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 116, pl. lvi.
figs. 1-11(6).
Hab—tI have occasionally dredged this species in the
Forth estuary, but it was usually passed over as the male of

Dactylopodella flava.

Genus (48) Idomenella, T. Scott, nov. gen., 1896.

This genus has a general resemblance to Jdomene, Philippi.

The antennules (anterior antenne) short, six- or seveb-
jointed.

Posterior antenne tolerably well developed, and composed
of two joints.

Mandibles, with masticatory edge, moderately broad, and
armed with several stout but irregular teeth. Mandible-
palp well developed, and furnished with two uniarticulate
branches of moderate size, the outer one wanting the strong
spines that appear to be characteristic of species belonging
to Ldomene.

320 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Maxillee similar in structure to those of the genus mentioned.

The first and second mexipeds a are also similar to those
of the same species.

The first pair of thoracic feet resemble those of Jdomene,
but the first joint of the inner branch is not nearly so robust,
and the terminal sete of the end joint are not so strongly
clawed.

The second, third, and fourth pairs in the female are
similar to those of Jdomene, but the second pair in the male
has the inner branch armed with a strong claw-like spine.

The fifth pair comparatively small, lamelliform, and the
primary and secondary joints are sub-equal, and only moder-
ately developed (cf. Zwelfth Annual Report Fishery Board
for Scotland, pt. iil. p. 255, pl. Ix. fig. 19, ete.).

Furcal joints short. One ovisac.

The differences that separate this genus from Jdomene are
comparatively small; but in the following two species, which
I have ascribed to it, the armature of the mandible-pulp, and
the structure of the inner branch of the first pair of thoracic
feet, preclude them from a place in Philippi’s genus.

93. Idomenella rostrata, T. Scott.

1893. Daciylopus rostratus, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 205, pl. iii. figs. 7-20.

Hab.—TYhe specimens from which this species was described
were obtained by carefully washing shells inhabited by the
common hermit crab, Hupagurus, Bernhardus, which were
dredged off the west side of Inchkeith.

94. Idomenella coronata, T. Scott.

1894, Dactylopus coronatus, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 255, pl. ix. figs. 12-20.

Hab.— Dredged near the Bass Rock and also in Largo Bay;
not common. It has also been obtained very sparingly off
Musselburgh, and at the north end of Inchkeith.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. onal

Genus (49) Amphiascus, G. O. Sars, 1905.
95. Amphiascus minutus (Claus).

1863. Dactylopus minutus, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,
p. 126, taf. xvi. figs. 14, 15.
Be Brady, 7. c., vol. ii. p. 119, pl. Ixvii.
figs. 12-14.
Hab—In dredged material from Largo Bay,—the only
place within the estuary where this species has been
noticed.

1880. *

96. Amphiascus Catharine, T. Scott.1
1906. Amphiascus Catharine, T. Scott, Twenty-fourth F. b. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 275, pl. xiv. figs. 10-18.
Hab.—Collected by hand-net in an old quarry at Granton,
open to the tide, where many interesting forms have been
obtained.

97. Amphiascus tenutremis (Brady and Robertson).
1876. Dactylopus tenwiremis, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Report for
HS7bsps 197.
1880. a * Brady, .¢., vol. i. p.) 115; . ple iva:
figs. 12-18.
Hab.—Dredged in Largo Bay, where it occurred very
sparingly.

98. Amphiascus similis (Claus).
1866. Dactylopus similis, Claus, Die Copepoden-fauna von Nizza,
p. 25, taf. ii. figs. 29, 30.
1880. s ie Brady. .¢:,. Vol. Ain. ps 110; ple ly:
figs. 14-16.
Hab.—Dredged west—off Queensterry, 17th November
1893; not common.

99. Amphiascus imus (G. 8. Brady).

1872. Canthocamptus imus, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durham, vol. iv. p. 436, pl. xix. figs. 1-5.

1880. Stenhelia ima, idem, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 35, pl. xiii.
figs. 1-14.

Hab.—Collected near Cramond and North Berwick in
1887, and near Inchkeith in 1901, but apparently not very
common.

1 Named in compliment to a friend of the author.

322 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (50) Stenhelia, Boeck, 1864.
100. Stenhelia hispida, G. S. Brady. |

1880. Stenhelia hispida, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 32, pl. xlii.
figs. 1-14,
fab.—This Copepod was observed sparingly in some
material dredged off St Monans in 1893, and off North
Berwick in July 1901.

101. Stenhelia hirsuta, I. C. Thompson.

18938. Stenhelia hirsuta, I. C. Thompson, Revised Rept. on the
Copepoda of L—pool Bay, p. 20, pl. xxxi.-
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1893, and in the neigh-
bourhood of Inchkeith in 1901. The female of this species
carries two ovisacs instead of one, and thus differs from some
of the other forms grouped under this genus.

102. Stenhelia dispar, T. and A. Scott.
1894. Stenhelia dispar, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(6), vol. xii. p. 141, pl. viil. figs. 8-12.
Hab.— Dredged in the neighbourhood of the Bass Rock in
1893; apparently rare.

103. Stenhelia dentoculata, I. C. Thompson.

1893. Stenhelia denticulata, I. C. Thompson, J. ¢., p. 20, pl. xxx.
figs. 1-11.

Hab.—This very distinct species was dredged off St
Monans in 1893, and it has also been obtained near Inch-
keith, but appears to be somewhat rare in the estuary.

104. Stenhelia refleca, T. Scott. .
1895, Stenhelia refleaa, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt: iii.
p. (66.qpl: it. figs. 1-9:

Hab.—This species was obtained in pools between tide-
marks on the shore north-east of Dunbar in 1894. Only a
few specimens were observed. It resembles Amphiascus
imus in some respects, but differs in the structure of the
anterior antenne and of the first and fifth pairs of thoracic
feet, as pointed out in the description.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 320

105. Stenhelia blanchardi, T. and A. Scott.

1895. Stenhelia Blanchardi, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xvi. p. 358, pl. xv. figs. 1-10.

Hab.—This tolerably distinct form was dredged off St
Monans in 1896. The species was described from specimens
obtained in some material dredged off Arisaig, Argyleshire,
in 1892. Although this form appears to be widely distri-
buted, it does not seem to be very common.

106. Stenhelia pygmea, A. M. Norman and T. Scott.

1905. Stenhelia pygmea, N. and S., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xv. p. 284.

1906. - i idem, Crust. of Devon and Cornwall,
p. 142, pl. x: figs: 1-33 pl x fess 1, 2
et seq.

Hab.—Station I1., Forth, dredged 26th December 1894.
This species, which is very small, appears to be widely dis-
tributed, as the type specimens were collected by the Rev.
Canon Norman near Eddystone Lighthouse.

107. Stenhelria confusa, T. Scott.

1902. Stenhelia confusa, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 458, pl. xxii. figs. 17-265.

Hab.—Dredged at Station IIL, 7th June 1901. Appar-
ently rare.

Genus (51) Ameira, Boeck, 1864.

108. Ametra longipes, Boeck.

1864. Ameira longipes, Boeck, Oversigt af Norges Copepoder,
Chr. Vid.-Selsk. Forhandl., p. 55.

LEGO hes Hs Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 37, pl. liii.
figs. 1-10.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans and in other parts of the
estuary, but not very common.

109. Ameira longicaudata, T. Scott.

1892. Ameira longiceudata, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p) 250; pls ix: figs. 1-18:

' Hab.—Taken in various parts of the estuary. First noticed

324 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

in material dredged off St Monans in 1891. This species
appears to be moderately frequent in the Firth.

110. Ametwra exilis, T. and A. Scott.

1894. Ameira exilis, T. and A. Scott, Aun. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(6), vol. xii. p. 139, pl. viii. figs. 18-20;
pl. ix. figs. 1-3.
1894. Me ~ T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iti. p. 242,
plix. fig. 30; pl. x. tes; loi:
Hab.—This moderately large and distinct species was
taken in shore-pools, near low-water, at Seafield, Leith; it
was subsequently obtained at Musselburgh and near Dunbar,
and in a somewhat similar situation.

111. Ametra longiremis, T. Scott.

1894. Ameira longiremis, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p- 241, pl. v. figs. 29-32; pl. vi. figs. 1-5.

Hub—This Ameira was taken very sparingly off St
Monans in 1893, and this is the only record ot it that I have
for the Forth estuary, but it has since been obtained in the
Clyde in Kilbrannan Sound.

112. Ameira exigua, T. Scott.
1894. Ameira exigua, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 243, pl. vi. figs. 15-23.

Hab.—Off St Monans, not very common. ‘This species,
like the last, has also been obtained in the Clyde.

113. Ametra tenuwiremis, T. Scott.

1902. Ameira tenuiremis, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 459, pl. xxiv. figs. 1-9.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rather rare.

114. Ameira propinqua, T. Scott.

1902. Ameira propinqua, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 460, pl. xxii. figs.
36-42; pl. xxiii. fig. 1; pl. xxiv. figs. 10-18.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rare.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. O20

115. Ameira pusilla, T. Scott.
1903. Ameira pusilla, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. iil.
p. 114, pl. v. figs. 1-10.
Hab.—This, which appears to be the smallest member of
the genus, was taken sparingly, in shallow water, off Mussel-
burgh; it has not, so far, been noticed anywhere else.

116. Amewra ambiqua, T. Scott.
1903. Ameira ambiqua, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 114, pl. v. figs. 11-19.

Hab.—Takeu off Musselburgh, in shallow water; appar-
ently rare.

117. Ameira elegans, T. Scott.
1905. Ameira elegans, T. Scott, Twenty-third F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 144, pl. x. figs. 18, 19; pl. xi. figs. 1-9.
Hab.— Collected with hand-net in pools on the shore near
low-water, north-west from Dunbar, and also in a shore
vathering collected the same year near Musselburgh.

Genus (52) Robertsonia, G. S. Brady, 1880.
118. Lobertsonia tenuis (G. S. Brady and Robertson).

1876. Hctinosoma tenue, Brady and Robertson, British Assoc. Rept.
for 1875, p. 196.

1880. Robertsonia tenuis, Brady, Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 25, pl. xl.
figs. 1-14.

Hab.—tThis species, which was first noticed in material
dredged off North Berwick in 1887, appears to be sparingly
distributed throughout the estuary.

Genus (53) Heteropsyllus, T. Scott, 1894.

119. Heteropsyllus curticaudatus, T Scott.
1894. Heteropsyllus curticaudatus, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ii. p. 252, pl. viii. figs. 27-34; pl. ix. fig. 1.
Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh and uear Aberdour ;
frequent. This species, though extensively distributed,
having been observed in the Firth of Clyde and on the south

5326 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

coast of England, is readily passed over from its resemblance
to more widely-known forms.

Genus (54) Delavalia, G. S. Brady, 1868.

120. Delavalia palustris, G. 8S. Brady.

1868. Delavalia palustris, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durham, vol. iii. p. 134, pl. v.

figs. 10-15.
1880. a Pe idem, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 48, pl. 1.

figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Taken in the neighbourhood of Culross, west of
Queensferry, where the water is brackish, and also in brackish-
water pools at the mouth of the Peffer Burn, Aberlady Bay,

1895.

121. Delavalia robusta, Brady and Robertson.

1875. Delavalia robusta, B. and B., Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1875), p.
196.
1880. ae ss Brady, @ ¢., vol. ii. p. 46, ply diies
15-21.
Hab.—In pools at the mouth of the Cocklemill Burn at

the east end of Largo Bay, 16th August 1890; rare.

122. Delavalia refleca, Brady and Robertson.
1875. Delavalia reflexa, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. (1875), p.
196.
1880. = <4 Brady, J. ¢.,. vol. ii, p. 45, plas:
1-14.
Hab.—Dredged off Burntisland in November 1893;

moderately rare.

Genus (55) Beatricella,! T. Scott, 1905.

123. Beatricella mimica, T. Scott.
1897. Delavalia mimica, T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 150; pl. i. figs. 1-9:
1905. Beatricella mimica, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vo]. xvi. p. 568.

Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of Granton-and off

1 This genus has been named in compliment to Miss Beatrice Sprague,
daughter of Dr T. B. Sprague, Edinburgh, whose names are so frequently
referred to in this Catalogue as successful students of Scottish fresh-water
Crustacea,

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. yal |

Musselburgh; not very rare. Dredged also off the north-
west end of Inchkeith.

124. Beatricella emula, T. Scott.

1893. Delavalia cemula, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 204, pl. iv. figs. 36-47.

1905. Beatricella emula, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol, xvi. p. 569 (footnote).

Hab.—Dredged in Largo Bay, and subsequently in one or
two other places.

Genus (56) Tachidius, Lilljeborg, 1853.
125. Tachidius discipes, Giesbrecht.

1853. Tachidius brevicornis, Lilljeborg (non Cyclops brevicornis,
O. F. Miller, 1776), De Crust. ex
ordinibus tribus, Clad. Ostrac.

Copep., p. 196.
1880. i. us Brady (non C. brevicornis, Miiller),
Monograph, vol. ii. p. 20, pl.
XXXVIl.
1881. BS discipes, Giesb., Die frei-leb. Copep. der Kieler
Fohrde, p. 108, pl. ii. fig. 4; pl. iv. figs. 25, 28

et seq.

Hab.—Brackish-water pools at the mouth of the Cockle-
mill Burn at the east end of Largo Bay, 1890. This is a
moderately common species in places such as that referred to.

126. Vachidius littoralis, Poppe.

1885. Tachidius littoralis, Poppe, Die frei-leb. Copep. des Jade-
busens, Abhandl. d. nat. Ver. zu
Bremen, vol. xi. p. 167, pl. vii. figs.
10-20.
1891. ad crassicornis, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 250, pl. viii. figs. 14-27.

Hab.—Dredged near Culross, west of Queensferry, 1892;
not very rare. This, like 7. discipes, is a brackish-water
species, and appears to be generally distributed where the
conditions are favourable.

328 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (57) Pontopolites, T. Scott, 1894.

127. Pontopolites typicus, T. Scott.

1894. Pontopolites typicus, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p- 251, pl. viii. figs. 9-17.

Hab.—This species was described from specimens dredged
off Musselburgh in 1893, and was at that time regarded as
rare; subsequently, however, it was found to be moderately
frequent in gatherings collected in shallow inshore waters.
Like Tachidius discipes, this species has the fifth pair of
thoracic feet composed each of a single lamelliform joint,
but it differs very markedly in the structure of the other
thoracic legs, so much so that it is with some hesitation I
have placed it under this family.

Genus (58) Canthocamptus, Westwood, 1856.

128. Canthocamptus minutus (Miller).
1785. Cyclops minutus, O. F. Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 101, pl. xvii.
figs. 1-7.
1820. Monoculus staphylinus, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles, p. 74,
pl. vii. figs. 1-19.
1880. Canthocamptus minutus, G. S. Brady, Monograph, vol. ii.
p- 48, pl. xliv. figs. 1-17.
Hab.—Moderately common, and generally distributed in

lochs, ponds, ete., throughout the district.

129. Canthocamptus horridus, 8. Fischer.
1860. Canthocamptus horridus, Fischer, Akad. d. Wissensch., 8ten
Bd. 3te Abth., p. 760, pl. ii. figs. 57-59, 59a.
1880. Canthocamptus northumbricus, Brady, 7. ¢., vol. ii. p. 57, pl.
xlv. figs. 1-14.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, 1892; Lochgelly Loch, Fife-
shire, 19th August 1896. “ Vicinity of Edinburgh” (Dr and
Miss Sprague). ‘This species does not appear to be very
common in Scotland.

130. Canthocamptus gracilis, G. O. Sars.
1863. Canthocamptus gracilis, G. O. Sars, Vidensk. i Christiania
Forhandl., 1862 (Aftr.), p. 22.

1897. “3 inornatus, T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 328, pl. ix. figs. 1-12.
1902. me gracilis, Lillj., Synopsis Spec. hucusque in

aquis dulce. Suec. observ. Fam. Harpactic.,
p. 26, pl. i. figs. 8-13.
Hab.—Linlithgow Loch, Upper Elf Loch (near Edinburgh)

s
,

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 329

Loch Achray (Trossachs); not very rare. It appears to be
more frequent in small lakes or ponds than in large bodies

of water.

131. Canthocamptus lucidulus, Rehberg.
1863. Canthocamptus minutus, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copep., p.
122, pl. xii. figs. 1-3 (name preoccupied by
O. F. Miller).

1880. ae — Jucidulus, Rehberg, Beitrag. z. Kenntn., p.
551.
1895. Ep minutus, T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat.

Hist. (Oct. 1895), p. 236, pl. iv. figs. 14-20.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, Upper Elf Loch, Loch Leven,
Loch Katrine, and others; Humbie Reservoir, near Winch-
burgh (Evans); moderately frequent, and generally distri-
buted.

132. Canthocamptus hirticorns, 1. Scott.

1895. Canthocamptus hirticornis, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept.,

pt. iil. p. 251, pl. ix. figs. 13-26.
1902. i megalops, Lillj., 7. ¢., p. 30, pl. il. figs. 14-19.
1908. a hirticornis, I. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hisi(7); vol. xin p..18s:

Hab.—In brackish-water pools at the mouth of the
Cocklemill Burn at the east end of Largo Bay. This species
is sometimes not uncommon where the conditions are

favourable.

133. Canthocamptus palustris, G. 8. Brady.

1880. Canthocamptus palustris, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii p. 53,
pl. xxxix. figs. 13-23.

1895 ne - var. elongatus, T. and A. Scott, Ann.
and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xv.
p- 459, pl. xvi. figs. 7-17.

Hab.—In pools on May Island, 1889.

134. Canthocamptus parvus, T. and A. Scott.

1896. Canthocamptus parvus, T. and A. Scott, 7. ¢. (6), vol. xviii.
p. 6, pl. ii. figs. 14-22. .

_ Hab.—Between tide-marks at Aberlady, and dredged in
shallow water off Musselburgh ; not common.

330 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

135. Canthocamptus inconspicuus, T. Scott.

1900. Canthocamptus inconspicuus, T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B.
Rept., pt. ili. p. 390, pl. xiv. figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Off Musselburgh, 1894; rare. This species was
described from specimens found in the Moray Firth.

136. Canthocamptus Schmeili, Mrazek.

1893. Canthocamptus Schmeili, Mrazek, Zool. Jahrb. Sieb. Bd., p.
116, pl. vii. figs. 107-117.

1895. i ee T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat.
Hist. (Oct. 1895), p. 234, pl. iv.
figs. 1-13.

Hab.—Loch Leven, Kinross ; moderately frequent.

137. Canthocamptus crassus, G. O. Sars.

1863. Canthocamptus crassus, G. O. Sars, Chr. Vidensk.-Selsk.
Forhandl., 1862 (Aftr.), p. 23.

1880. Attheyella spinosa, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 58, pl.
xlili. figs. 15-18; pl. xlvi. figs. 13-18.

Hab.—Frequent in lochs and ponds throughout the district.

Genus (59) Attheyella, G. S. Brady, 1880.
138. Alttheyella pygmea (G. O. Sars).

1863. Canthocamptus pygmeus, G. O. Sars, op. cit., p. 21.

1880. <Attheyella cryptorum, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 60,
pl. li. figs. 1-18.

by T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p-. 225, pl. vi. figs. 21-31.

[soo |

Hab.—Moderately common, and generally distributed
throughout the district.

139. Attheyella Zschokket (Schmeil).

1893. Canthocamptus Zschokkei, Schmeil, Copep. des Rhatikon-
Geberges, p. 31, pl. iil.

1893. Attheyella propinqua, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 227, pl. vii. figs. 1-11.

Hab.—Loch Leven, Duddingston Loch, Upper Elf Loch;
not very rare, but easily overlooked. Ben Ledi, at about
2500 feet (Evans).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 331

140. Attheyella Duthier, T. and A. Scott.

1895. Attheyella Duthiei, T. and A. Scott, Aun. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xviii. p. 4, pl. ii. figs, 1-13.

1902. Canthocamptus Duthici, Lillj., Synops. sp. huc usque in aquis
dulcibusSueciae observ. Fam. Harpact., p. 41, pl. iii. figs.5-10.

Hab.—Loch Leven is the only locality within the district
where this species has been observed; it was obtained in
gatherings collected by hand-net in 1890, 1897, and 1898.

141. Attheyella cusprdata (Schmeil).

1898. Canthocamptus cuspidatus, Schmeil, op. cit., p. 36, pl. iv.
1897. 5 a T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 323, pl. ix. figs. 21, 22.
Hab—Loch Vennachar, Perthshire; not common. In
spring at 2500 feet on Ben Ledi, September 1906 (W. Evans).

Genus (60) Nitocra, Boeck, 1864.

142. Nitocra tau, Giesbrecht.

1882. Nitocra tau, Giesb., Die frei-leben. Copep. der Kieler Foehrde,
pritjeplea ties. 9,132 pl: ii. fie. 13; pl. tv. figs. 2, 21, 29
et seq.

Hab.—In pools overflowed by the tide at the mouth of the
Cocklemill Burn at the east end of Largo Bay; not common.

Genus (61) Moraria, T. and A. Scott, 1893.

143. Moraria brevipes (G. O. Sars).

1863. Canthocamptus brevipes, G. O. Sars, Vidensk. i Christiania
Forhandl., 1862 (Aftr.), p. 64.
1893. Moraria Anderson-Smithi, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol. vi. p. 213, pl. viii.
Hab.—Loch Vennachar, Loch Leven, Duddingston Loch,
and the Upper Elf Loch are some of the places where this

species has been obtained.

144, Moraria Mrazeki, T. Scott.
1893. Ophiocamptus brevipes, Mrazek (not Canthocamptus brevipes,
G. O. Sars), Zool. Jahrb. 7ter Bd., p. 116, pl. v. fig. 66;
pl. vi. figs. 67-70.
1903. Moraria Mrazeki, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xi. p. 194.

- Hab.—WLoch Lubnaig, Loch Achray, Loch Vennachar.
VOL. XVI. 2G

332 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Genus (62) Maraenobiotus, Mrazek, 1893.
145. Maraenobiotus Vejdovskyi, Mrazek.

1893. Maraenobiotus Vejdovskyt, Mrazek, op. cit., p. 108, pl. iv. figs.
17-32; pl. v. figs. 33-37.
_ 1896. oe “ T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xvili. p. 3,
pl. i. figs. 18-21; pl. ii. fig. 23.
Hab.—The only locality within the district where I have
found this species is Loch Vennachar.

Genus (63) Mesochra, Boeck, 1864.
146. Mesochra Lilljeborgi, Boeck.

1864. Mesochra Lilljeborgi, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copepoder,
pap.

1873. Paratachidius gracilis, Brady and Robertson, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (4), vol. xii. p. 131, pl. viii. figs. 8-16.

1880. Mesochra Lilljeborgi, Brady, Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 62, pl.
xli. figs. 15-21; pl. xlvii. figs, 16-21.

Hab—Frequent in rock-pools near high-water, Cramond
Island (1888); in pools at the mouth of the Cocklemill
Burn, Largo Bay, 1890; and subsequently in other parts of
the estuary. |

147. Mesochra spinicaudata, T. and A. Scott.

1895. Mesochra spinicaudata, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xv. p. 52, pl. v. figs. 12-25.

Hab.—Shore at Musselburgh, in pools near low-water;
frequent.

148. Mesochra MacIntoshi, 'T. and A. Scott.
1895. Mesochra Mac-Intoshi, T. and A. Scott, U.c., p. 53, pl. vi.
figs. 1-7.
Hab.—Shore at Musselburgh, in pools near low-water, not

uncommon, 1894; and also in a gathering dredged off St
Monans in July 1901.

149. Mesochra propinqua, T. Scott.

1896. Mesochra propinqua, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iil.
p- 162, pl. iii. figs. 11-22.
Hab—In pools between tide-marks at Aberlady Bay,
collected by hand-net.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. roca ea)

Genus (64) Danielssenia, Boeck, 1872.

150. Danielssenia typica, Boeck.

1872. Danielssenia typica, Boeck, Nye Slegter og arter af Saltvands
Copepoder, Vid. Selsk. Forhandl., p. 55.

1876. Zosime spinulosa, Brady and Robertson, British Assoc. Rept.
for 1875, p. 196.

1880. Jonesiella spinulosa, G. 8. Brady, 7. c., vol. ii. p. 41, pl. xlviii.
figs 14-17; pl. xlix. figs. 14, 15.

Hab.—Largo Bay, 1890, and afterwards in other parts of
the estuary, but nowhere very plentiful. The food in the
stomachs of a sample of small plaice, Pleuronectes platessa,
measuring off and on about 2 inches in length, sent from
Annan on the Solway in 1900, consisted entirely of this
species.

Genus (65) Thompsonula, T. Scott, 1905.

151. Thompsonula hyene (1. C. Thompson).

1889. Jonesiella hyene, I. C. Thompson, Proc. Biol. Soc. L—pool,
vol. viii. p. 193, pl. 1x. figs. 1-10.
1893. 5 Ee T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 202, pl. iii. figs. 1-6.
1905. Thompsonula hyene, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvi. p. 570.

Hab.—Dredged near the island of Fidra in February

1893, and later off Musselburgh; not common. The species
appears to be widely distributed, but not very plentiful.

Genus (66) Laophonte, Philippi, 1840.

152. Laophonte lamellifera (Claus). .

1863. Cleta lamellifera, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 123,
pl. xv. figs, 21-25.

1880. Laophonte lamellifera, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 83,
pl. Ixxv. figs. 15-23.

Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh ; collected by hand-net in
rock-pools between tide-marks at Cramond Island; and
dredged at various other parts of the estuary; frequent.

334 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

153. Laophonte curticauda, Boeck.

1864. Laophonte curticauda, Boeck, Oversigt af Norges Copepoder,
p. 65.

a Brady, Z.¢., vol. ii. p. 80, pl. lxxiii.
figs. 15-18; pl. lxxvi. figs. 1-9.

Hab.—Rock-pool on the shore, Cramond Island; dredged —
off North Berwick and in other parts of the estuary.

1880: “3,

154. Laophonte longicaudata, Boeck.

1864. Laophonte longicaudata, Boeck, Oversigt af Norges Copepoder,
p- 55.

1880, sa “B Brady, 2. ¢., vol. il. p. 82; pl txaxtve
figs. 12-15; pl. Ixxvi. figs. 10-15.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1889; scarce.

155, Laophonte longiremis, T. Scott.

1905. Laophonte longiremis, T, Scott, Twenty-third F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 145, pl. xi. figs. 10-20.

Hab.—In an old quarry at Granton which is open to the
sea, collected 25th August 1894. Apparently rare.

156. Laophonte thoracica, Boeck.

1864. Laophonte thoracica, Boeck, Oversigt af Norges Copepoder,
p. 54.

1880. “A - Brady, 7. ¢., vol. 11. p. 26, yp) imager
figs. 1-8.

Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith; off

Musselburgh and other parts of the estuary; not very
common.

157. Laophonte similis, Claus.

1866. Laophonte similis, Claus, Copepoden-Fauna von Nizza, p. 238,
pl. v. figs. 18, 14.
1880. - * Brady, l.c., vol. ii. p. 78, pl. lxxv. figs. 1-14.

Hab.—In rock-pools between tide-marks at Cramond
Island and in one or two other places, but not common.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. a0

158. Laophonte horrida (Norman).

1876. Cleta horrida, Norman, Rept. of the ‘‘ Valorous” Exped.,
Proc. Roy. Soc, London, 1876, p. 206.

1880. Laophonte horrida, Brady, J. ¢., vol. ii. p. 74, pl. xxiv.
figs. 1-12.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans, and at Station V., to the
west of May Island; notcommon. Dredged at the west end
of Station VI., 22nd May 1901.

159. Laophonte denticornis, T. Scott.
1890. Laophonte serrata, T. Scott (not Claus), Eighth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 318.
1894. 3 denticornis, idem, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 246, pl. vii. figs. 13-23.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans, 1889 ; dredged off Mussel-
burgh, 30th May 1891; and at Station III. (near the west
end, in 5 fathoms), 23rd May 1901.

160. Laophonte inopinata, T. Scott.

1892. Laophonte inopinata, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p. 256, pl. xi. figs. 1-12.

Hab.—Off the west side of May Island. Several specimens
were washed from a large “root” of sea-weed brought up in
the trawl-net of the fishery cruiser “ Garland” while at work
in the neighbourhood of May Island in 1891; males and
females carrying ovisacs were obtained. L. wnopinata appears
to be a rare species in the Forth.

161. Laophonte intermedia, T. Scott.

1895. Laophonte intermedia, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iil. p. 168, pl. ili. figs. 10-20.

Hab.—Shore at Musselburgh, in pools near low-water ;
dredged off the same place in 3 to 4 fathoms. Obtained also
near Granton in an old quarry open to the sea. This is a
distinct and easily recognised species.

162. Laophonte littorale, T. and A. Scott.

1898. Laophonte littorale, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xii. p. 238, pl. xi. figs. 7-14.

_ Hab.—In brackish pools at the mouth of the Peffer Burn,
near Aberlady.

306 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

163, Laophonte gracilis, T. Scott.
1903. Laophonte gracilis, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 118, pl. vi. figs. 6-12.
Hab,—Collected by hand-net near Granton, in an old
quarry open to the sea.

164. Laophonte depressa, T. Scott.
1894. Laophonte depressa, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 245, pl. vi. figs. 24-31; pl. vil. figs. 1-3.
Hab.—Off St Monans and Musselburgh; very sparingly in
dredged material from both places.

165. Laophonte hispida (Brady and Robertson).

1873. Asellopsis hispida, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol. xii. p. 187, pl. ix. figs. 6-10.
1880. Laophonte hispida, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 85,
pl. lxxan. figs. 4-11.
Hab.—Largo Bay, frequent; dredged also off Musselburgh
and at various other parts of the estuary.

Genus (67) Harrietella,! T. Scott, 1906.

166. Harrietella simulans, T. Scott.

1894. Laophonte simulans, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 248, pl. vii. figs. 24-32; pl. viil. fig. 1.

1906. Harrietella simulans, IT. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvii. p. 464, pl. xi. figs. 9, 10.

Hlab.—Off West Wemyss and other places. The first
specimens were obtained inside the valves of a dead Cyprina,
among trawl refuse; but specimens were found afterwards
to be moderately frequent in the crevices of partly decayed
pieces of wood brought up in the dredge or trawl-net.

Genus (68) Laophontodes, T. Scott, 1894.

167. Laophontodes typicus, T. Scott.
1894. Laophontodes typicus, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ii.
p. 249, pl. viii. figs. 2-8.
Hab.—Dredged at the north end of Inchkeith. This

1 This genus has been named in complement to Miss Harriet Richardson,
M.A., D.Phil., Washington, U.S.A., author of 4 Monograph on the Isopods of
North America.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. Fb Wi

species, which is very small—scarcely ;!, of an inch in
length—but quite distinct, is apparently very rare in the
Firth of Forth. I have only met with it in the neighbour-
hood of Inchkeith; it seems, however, to have a fairly
extensive distribution. Frequent in a gathering of small
Crustacea from an old quarry at Granton collected in 1894.

Genus (69) Normanella, G. S. Brady, 1880.

168. Normanella dubia (Brady and Robertson).

1875. Laophonte dubia, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Report for 1874,
p. 196.
1880. Normanella dubia, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 87, pl.
Ixxviili. figs. 12-22.
Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh ; not very rare, but easily
overlooked.

169. Normanella attenuata, A. Scott.

1896. Normanella attenuata, A. Scott, Lancashire Sea-Fish Lab.
Report for 1895... pay 4/, opi. ty
figs. 8-20.
1902, A pe T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 464, pl. xxiii. figs. 2-4.
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans, in about 10 fathoms; rare.
This species was described from specimens dredged off
Spanish Head, Isle of Man, in 1895.

Genus (70) Cletodes, Brady, 1872.
170. Cletodes limicola, G. S. Brady.

1872. Cletodes limicola, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb, and
Durham, vol. iv. p. 438, pl. xxi. figs.
10-17.

HESO.) 3, idem, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 90, pl.
lxxix. figs. 1-12.

Hab—Dredged off North Berwick, off Musselburgh, and
off the east side of Inchkeith, but not very common.

It seems to be sparingly distributed throughout the
estuary.

3098 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

171. Cletodes propinqua, Brady and Robertson.

1876. Cletodes propinqua, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Report for 1875,
p. 196.
1880. nF Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 94, pl.
Ixxvii. figs. 9-17.
Hab.—In pools between tide-marks at Newhaven and
Cramond Island; also dredged off Musselburgh; not very

common.

172. Cletodes Sarsi, T. Scott.
1905. Cletodes Sarst, T. Scott, Twenty-third F. B, Rept., pt. iii.
p. 146, pl. xii. figs. 1-9.
Hab.—Firth of Forth, 1901; rare. This species was one
of several in a bottle containing specimens from various parts
of the estuary collected during 1901.

173. Cletodes curvirostris, T. Scott.

1894. Cletodes curvirostris, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 250, pl. viii. figs. 18-26.

Hab.—Dredged in Largo Bay; dredged off the east side of
Inchkeith, and a few other places; not very rare. In this
species the rostrum is distinctly, though not strongly, re-
curved.

174. Cletodes irrasa, T. and A. Scott.

1894. Cletodes irrasa, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6),
vol. xii. p. 141, pl. viii. figs. 8-12.

Hab. —Dredged in 1893 in the neighbourhood of the Bass
Rock. It seems to be a rare species, as I have observed it
on only one or two occasions since; but it has also been
taken in the Clyde and the Moray Firth.

175. Cletodes tenuipes, T. Scott.

1897. Cletodes tenuipes, T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
pe iv, pl. 1. figs. 19-27,

Hab.—Off Musselburgh, dredged in 3 to 4 fathoms, in
1891; rare. The species was described from specimens

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 339

taken in the Clyde in 1896. The Forth examples, which had
been put aside when collected, were not identified till later.

176. Cletodes lata, T. Scott.

1892, Cletodes lata, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii. p. 257,
pl. x. figs. 10-18.

Hab.—Dredged oft St Monans, off Musselburgh, and other
parts of the estuary; not common.

177. Cletodes similis, T. Scott.

1895, Cletodes similis, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 168, pl. ili. figs. 12-26; pl. iv. figs. 1-8.

Hab.—In the same gatherings with the last, as well as in
pools between tide-marks, but always sparingly distributed.
This species has a somewhat close resemblance to C. lata,
and was at first regarded as a variety of it, but afterwards it
was found to be quite distinct.

178. Cletodes longicaudata, Brady and Robertson.
1876. Cletodes longicaudata, B, and R., Brit. Assoc. Report for 1875,

p. 196.

M380. ons ty Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 92, pl.
lxxix. figs. 13-19.

H9O2 5, Af T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.

p. 465, pl. xxiil. figs. 26-33.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1889; dredged off the
east side of Inchkeith in June 1901; rare.

179. Cletodes neglecta, T. Scott.

1903. Cletodes neglecta, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 120, pl. iv. figs. 20-31.

Hab.—Dredged in Aberlady Bay in 1895; not common.
This species, which has been known to me for a considerable
time, is somewhat intermediate between C. longicaudata and
C’. limicola; the furcal joints are about half as long as those
of C. longicaudata, it thus differs from both the species
named. Though collected in 1895, this is the first time it
has been recorded for the Forth. The species was described
from Moray Firth specimens.

340 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

Genus (71) Itunella, Brady, 1894.
180. Ltunella tenuiremis (T. Scott).

1893. Cletodes tenuiremis, T. Scott, Thirteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 204, pl. iii. figs. 21-28.

1894. Ztunella subsalsa, G. S. Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.,
Durh., and Newcastle-upon-Tyne, vol. xiii. p. 6, pl. i.
(separate reprint). ‘

Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith in

February 1893; and subsequently, but very sparingly, in
several other places.

Genus (72) Fultonia, T. Scott, 1902.
181. Fultonia hirsuta, T. Scott.

1902. Fultonia hirsuta, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 466, pl. xxiii. figs. 5-12.

Hab.—Dredged very sparingly off St Monans, in 14 to 15
fathoms, on 22nd May 1901.

Genus (73) Enhydrosoma, Boeck, 1872.

182. Enhydrosoma curvatum (Brady and Robertson).

1876. Rhizothrix curvata, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Report for 1875,
p97.

1880. Enhydrosoma curvatum, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 98,
pl. Ixxxi. figs. 12-15; pl. lxxxii. figs. 11-19.

Hab—tLargo Bay and other parts of the estuary; mode-
rately frequent.

183. Enhydrosoma gracile, T. Scott.
1908. Enhydrosoma gracile, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 122, pl. ii. figs. 16-26; pl. iii. fig. 1.
Hab.—Musselburgh, pools on the shore near low-water ;
moderately rare. This is a smaller species than #. curvatwm.

Genus (74) Nannopus, G. 8. Brady, 1880.

184. Nannopus palustris, G. S. Brady.
1880. Nannopus palustris, Brady, 7. ¢., vol. ii. p. 101, pl. lxxvii.
figs. 18-20.
4s oh T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 466, pl. xxiii. figs. 13-25.

Hab.—Brackish-water pools at the mouth of the Cocklemill

1902.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 341

Burn at the east end of Largo Bay, also in shore-pools at

Musselburgh, and in an old quarry near Granton which is
open to the sea; not common.

Genus (75) Platychelipus, G. S. Brady, 1880.

185. Platychelipus littoralis, G. 8. Brady.

1880. Platychelipus littoralis, Brady, 7. ¢., vol. ii. p. 103, pl. lxxix.
figs. 20-23; pl. Ixxx. figs. 15-19.

1893. re r T. Scott, Hleventh F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 205.

Hab.—Sparingly in a gathering of dredged material col-
lected near Culross, and in an old quarry at Granton; dredged
in shallow water off Musselburgh and in Aberlady Bay;
scarce.

Genus (76) Cylindropsyllus, G. 8. Brady, 1880.

186. Cylindropsyllus levis, G. 8S. Brady.
1880. Cylindropsyllus levis, Brady, JU. c., vol. iii. p. 30, pl. Ixxxiv.
figs. 1-8.
BE 35> L-- seo, Tenth F. B. Rept.s pe piu:
p. 258, pl. xiii. figs. 1-18.
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; frequent. I have found
this species in other parts of the estuary, but much less
frequently than in the “ Fluke Hole” off St Monans.

1892.

187. Cylindropsyllus minor, T. Scott.

1892. Cylindropsyllus minor, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 260, pl. xi.
figs. 17-24.

1900. ‘ ,, idem, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 349, pl. xiv. figs. 23-32.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans along with C. levis, but
not so common.

Genus (77) Leptopontia, T. Scott, 1902.

188. Leptopontia curvicauda, T. Scott.

1902. Leptopontia curvicauda, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 463, pl. xxii. figs. 26-35.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; not very common.

342 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (78) Leptastacus, T. Scott, 1906.

189. Leptastacus macronyx, T. Scott.

1892. Tetragoniceps macronyx, 'T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 253, pl. x. figs. 19-28.

1906. Leptastacus macronyx, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvii. p. 461.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891, and again in May
1901; not very common.

Genus (79) Evansula, T. Scott, nov. nom.
(Syn. Hvansia, T. Scott, preoccupied for a genus of Spiders.')

190. Hvansula incerta, T. Scott.

1892. Tetragoniceps incertus, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 254, pl. xii. figs. 1-17.

1906. Evansia incerta, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvii. p. 461.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891, and again in May
1901; not common.

191. Hvansula pygmea, T. Scott.

1903. Tetragoniceps pygmeus, T. Scott, Twenty-first F. B. Rept.,
pt: iii. p. 117, pl. iv. figs. 11-19.

1906. Evansia pygmea, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvii. p. 461.

Hab.—Collected near Musselburgh in 1894. This differs
from the last by its smaller size, and in the structure of fifth
thoracic feet and caudal joints.

1In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History for May 1906 I instituted
a genus of the Copepoda under the name of Hvansia, in compliment to
William Evans, Edinburgh, a successful investigator in various departments
of Scottish natural history. I find, however, that the name EHvansia is pre-
occupied for a genus of spiders, described by the Rev. O. Pickard Cambridge
in Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist. and Antiquarian Field Club, vol. xxi. p. 37, and
I therefore adopt the modified form Hvansula for the Copepod genus
referred to.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 043

Genus (80) Tetragoniceps, G. S. Brady, 1880.

192. Letragoniceps (?) maleolata, G. S. Brady.

1880. Tetragoniceps maleolata, Brady, Monograph, vol. ii. p. 66,
pl. Ixxviii. figs. 1-11.

1892. ie Cy 3, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p-*252, pl. viii. figs. 11, 12.
1900. ns 3 idem, Eighteenth F. B. Rept.,

pt. i. p. 391, pl. xiv. figs. 9-17,

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1892, apparently not

very rare; and again on 22nd May 1901, several specimens

were obtained. This form differs from the Z. maleolata

described by Dr Brady in the structure of fifth pair of
thoracic feet, but is otherwise identical with it.

193. Tetragoniceps brevicauda, T. Scott.

1900. Tetragoniceps brevicauda, T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 392, pl. xiv. figs. 18-22.

Hab.—This species was obtained somewhat sparingly in
material dredged off St Monans in 1896, and again in 1901.
It has a general resemblance to 7’. maleolata, but the furcal
joints are distinctly shorter.

Genus (81) Phyllopodopsyllus, T. Scott, 1896.

194. Phyllopodopsyllus Bradyi, T. Scott.

1892. Tetragoniceps Bradyi, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 253, pl. lix. figs. 19-32.

1906. Phyllopodopsylius Bradyi, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (7), vol. xvii. p. 459.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891, and again in 1901;
apparently rare. This species and the next are easily dis-
tinguished by the large size and leaf-like form of the fifth
pair of thoracic feet of the female.

Genus (82) Pteropsyllus, T. Scott, 1906.

195. Péteropsyllus consimilis, T. Scott.

1894. Tetragoniceps consimilis, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 244, pl. vii. figs. 4-12.

1906. Pteropsyllus consimilis, T. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7),
vol. xvii. p. 459, pl. xi. figs. 7, 8.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rare. This species is

344 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

similar in its general appearance to 7. bradyi, but there are
a few structural differences, one of the most important being
the three-jointed inner branches of the first pair of thoracic
feet: in 7. Bradyi these branches are only two-jointed.

Genus (83) Leptopsyllus, T. Scott, 1894.

196. Leptopsyllus typicus, T. Scott.
1894. Leptopsyllus typicus, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p-. 254, pl. ix. figs. 2-11.

Hab.—West of Queensterry, washed from lumps of hardened
mud, which were composed for the most part of the agglutin-
ated tubes of a species of Sabvella, collected 25th January
1894 ; rare.

197. Leptopsyllus Robertsoni, T. and A. Scott.
1895. Leptopsyllus Robertsoni, T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat.
Hist. (January 1895), p. 30, pl. i. figs. 1-14.

Hab.—In pools between tide-marks at Musselburgh, 20th
August 1894; rare.

198. Leptopsyllus minor, T. and A. Scott.
1895. Leptopsyllus minor, T. and A. Scott, op. cit., p. 31, pl. ii.
figs. 15-22.
Hab.—In pools between tide-marks at Musselburgh, taken
at the same time as LZ. Robertsoni ; moderately rare.

199. Leptopsyllus intermedius, T. and A. Scott.
1895. Leptopsyllus intermedius, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xv. p. 51, pl. v. figs. 1-11.
Hab.—In pools between tide-marks at Musselburgh, in
company with ZL. minor, L. Robertsoni, and a few of the other
rare things mentioned elsewhere in this Catalogue. This
species appeared to be rather more frequent than the other
two.

Genus (84) Paramesochra, T. Scott, 1892.

200. Paramesochra dubia, T. Scott.
1892. Paramesochra dubia, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Report, pt. iii.
p. 252, pl. xii. figs. 18-32.

Hab.—Dredged off the west side of May Island in February

Land, Fresh-Water,‘and Marine Crustacea. 345

1892, and off St Monans, in 13 fathoms, on 22nd May 1901.
This curious form was also taken near Port Erin, Isle of Man,
by the late I. C. Thompson of Liverpool.

Division CYCLOPOIDA.
Family CYCLOPIDAZ.

Genus (85) Oithona, Baird, 1843.
201. Orthona similis, Claus.

1866. Otthona similis, Claus, Copepoden-Fauna von Nizza, p. 14.

Hab.—Generally distributed in the Firth of Forth, and
sometimes common. This is the form which, in my earlier

papers on “Scottish Marine Copepoda,” is recorded under
the name of Ozthona spinifrons, Boeck.

202. Oithona (?) setigera, Dana.

1849. Oithona setigera, Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped. [Amer. Jour.
Sci. (2), vol. viii. ].
Py a Giesb., Fauna u. Flora Golfes v. Neapel ;
Monogr. xix.—Pelag. Copep., p. 548,
pl. xxxiv. figs. 3, 14, 41 e¢ seq.

1892.

Hab Obtained in a bottom tow-net gathering collected

east of Inchkeith in March 1891, and again on 22nd April
1901.

Genus (86) Cyclopina, Claus.
203. Cyclopina gracilis, Claus.

1863. Cyclopina gracilis, Claus, Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 104,

pl. x. figs. 9-15.
1878. n », Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 93, pl. xxiv.
fiss: 1-95 vol. it. pl. xci. figs. 10; 11.
1900. - », Giesb., Mitth. iber Copep., Mitth.a. d. Zool.

Station z. Neapel, Bd. 14, p. 45.

Hab.—Generally, though somewhat sparingly, distributed
in the Firth of Forth. I have taken it as far west as

Charlestown, as well as near the outside limits of the
estuary.

346 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

204. Cyclopina littoralis (G. 8. Brady).
1872. Cyclops littoralis, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durham, vol. iv. p. 429, pl. xvii.
figs. 9-14.
1878. Cyclopina littoralis, idem, Monograph, vol. i. p. 92, pl. xv.
figs. 1-9.
Giesb., Mitth. tiber Copep., Mitth. a. d.
Zool. Station z. Neapel, Bd. 14, p. 48,
pl. iii. figs. 1-13.

1900. . 2

Hab.—Collected at Cramond Island in rock-pools; dredged
off Musselburgh and other parts of the estuary, especially in
the littoral and laminarian zones; not uncommon.

205. Cyclopina elegans, T. Scott.
1894. Cyclopina elegans, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ui.
p- 237, pl. v. figs. 9-19.
Giesb., Mitth. itiber Copep., Mitth. a. d.
Zool. Station z. Neapel, Bd. 14, p. 44,
pl. i. figs. 14-22.

1900. d e

Hab.—This species has been taken off St Monans, but not

common.

Genus (87) Pterinopsyllus, G. S. Brady, 1880.

(Syn. Lophophorus, Brady, 1878, a name preoccupied by
Temminck in 1815 for a genus of Birds.)

206. Pterinopsyllus insignis, G. S. Brady.

1878. Lophophorus insignis, G. S. Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 122,
pl. xiii. figs. 1-10; pl. xv. fig. 10.
1880. Pterinopsyllus insignis, idem, ibidem, vol. ill. p. 23.

Hab.—This species was on several occasions observed
moderately frequent in dredged material collected to the
west of Queensferry, but appeared to be rare near the sea-
ward limits of the estuary.

Genus (88) Cyclops, O. F. Miller, 1776.

The members of this genus are, with few exceptions,
fresh-water or brackish-water species. Those recorded here

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 347

may be conveniently arranged according to the number of
joints in the antennules.

(a) SPECIES WITH SEVENTEEN-JOINTED ANTENNULES.

207. Cyclops strenwus, Fischer.

1851. Cyclops strenwus, Fischer, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat. Moscou,
vol. xxiv. p. 419, taf. ix. figs, 12-21.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch, and most of the other lochs
within the district, where it occurs nearly all the year
round. Cyclops pulchellus and Cyclops abyssorwm are other
names by which the species is known.

208. Cyclops Leuckartz, Claus.
1857. Cyclops Leuckarti, Claus, Das gen. Cycl., Archiv. f. Naturg.,
Jahrg. xxili. Bd. 1, p. 35, taf. ii. figs.
13, 14.
1897. i T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p-. 322, pl. ix. figs. 23-25.
Hab.—WLoch Vennachar and Loch Voil, Perthshire;
frequent. (See also note on this species in Appendix, p. 380.)

209. Cyclops bicuspidatus, Claus.
1857. Cyclops bicuspidatus, Claus, op. cit., p. 209, taf. xi. figs.
6 and 7.
1892. i 5 Schmeil, Deutschl. freileb. Siissw.-Copep.
(Cyclopide), p. 75, taf. ii. figs. 1-3.
Hab—Loch Achray (Trossachs), Loch Leven, Duddingston
Loch, ponds on the Braid Hills, Edinburgh (April 1888), as
well as in other lochs and ponds throughout the district,

but usually not very common.

210. Cyclops vernalis, Fischer.

1853. Cyclops vernalis, Fischer, Bull. Soc. Imp. des Nat. Moscou,
vol. xxvi. p. 90, taf. ili. figs. 1-5.

1891. ,, elongatus, G. S. Brady, Revis. Brit. Cyclopide and
Calanide, p. 5, pl. i. figs. 1-5.

1892. ,, vernalis, Schmeil, Z. c., p. 88, taf. ii. figs. 4-7.

Hab.—The distribution of this species is somewhat similar

1 Cyclops Ewarti, Brady, was described in the Sixth Annual Report of the
Fishery Board for Scotlund, p. 232, pl. viii. figs. 1-6, from specimens obtained
above Queensferry. I am now inclined to consider this as representing a
scarcely mature stage of C. strenwus, Fischer.

VOL. XVI. 2H

348 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

to that of C. bicuspidatus. It has been obtained in several
localities near Edinburgh, 7.e., Upper Elf Loch, Braids (Scott
and Lindsay), and pond at Bonaly Golf Course (Dr and Miss
Sprague). Ben Ledi, at 2500 feet (W. Evans).

211. Cyclops bisetosus, Rehberg.

1880. Cyclops bisetosus, Rehberg, Beitrag. z. Kenntnis der freileb.
Siissw.-Copep., Abhand. d. Natur. Ver.

zu Bremen, vol. vii. p. 583, pl. iv.
1901-1902. 7 sf Dr and Miss Sprague, Entom. of Midlothian,
Trans. Edin. Field Natur., vol. iv. p. 255,

pl. xxxi. figs, 18-22.

Hab.—Loch Achray, Loch Leven, and Duddingston Loch.
Pond on House-o’-Hill Farm, Midlothian (Dr and Miss

Sprague).

212. Cyclops viridis (Jurine).
1820. Monoculus quadricornis var. viridis, Jurine, Hist. des Monocles,
p. 46, pl. iii. fig. 1.
1878. Cyclops gigas, G. 8. Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 105, pl. xx.
figs. 1-16.
Hab.—Loch Katrine, Loch Leven, Duddingston Loch, ete.
Burntisland Reservoir and Loch a Chroin (Evans). A
common and generally distributed species.

213. Cyclops signatus, Koch.

1820. Monoculus quadricornis fuscus, Jurine, l.c., p. 47, pl. ii. fig. 2.
1838. Cyclops signatus, Koch, Deutschlands Crustaceen, Myriapoden,
und Arachniden, Heft. 21, fig. 8.
Hab.—Loch Katrine, Loch Achray, Loch Lubnaig, Perth-
shire. Ravelston Cottage Quarry, May 1900 (Dr and Miss
Sprague). Side of river Teith, near Callander (W. Evans).

214. Cyclops annulicornis, Koch.

1820. Monoculus quadricornis albidus, Jurine, J. c., p. 44, pl. il.
figs. 10 and 11.

1838. Cyclops annulicornis, Koch, Deutschlands Crustaceen, Myria-
poden, und Arachniden, Heft. 21, pl. vi.

Hab.—This is a common and generally distributed species
throughout the entire area.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 349

(b) SPECIES WITH SIXTEEN-JOINTED ANTENNULES.

215. Cyclops languidus, G. O. Sars.

1863. Cyclops languidus, G. O. Sars, Forhandl. Vidensk.-Selsk. i
Christiania, p. 249.
1901-1902. _—,, ss Dr and Miss Sprague, J. c., p. 255, pl. xxxi.
figs. 1-7.

Hab.—This species, which was observed for the first time
in Scotland in Loch Doon, in Ayrshire,! was obtained in a
pond near Tynehead, Midlothian, on 30th March 1901 (Dr
and Miss Sprague).

(c) SPECIES WITH TWELVE-JOINTED ANTENNULES.

216. Cyclops serrulatus, Fischer.

1851. Cyclops serrulatus, Fischer, Bull. Soc. imp. des Natur.
Moscou, vol. xxiv. (2) p. 423, pl. x. figs: 22, 23, 26-31.

Hab.—tThe Cyclops, generally referred to as “ Cyclops ser-
rulatus, Fischer,” 1s common in lochs and ponds throughout
the district. A form with short furcal joints, which appears
to be the var. brachyurus of Cyclops varius, Lilljeborg, has
been observed in Duddingston Loch and other places.
Another form with the furcal joints elongated, and which
may be the var. speratus of the same species, has also been
observed, but they approximate so closely to the species
described by Fischer, that I prefer, for the present, to regard
them as varieties of that species.

217. Cyclops macrurus, G. O. Sars.

1863. Cyclops macrurus, G. O. Sars, J. ¢., p. 254.
1878. PA ms G. S. Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 111,
pl. xxiv. figs. 1-5.

Hab.—Loch Vennachar, Loch Katrine, Loch Leven, Black
Loch near Loch Glow (Kinross-shire), and Loch Lubnaig.

1 Cf. Seventeenth Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, pt. iii.
p. 187 (1899).

350 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

(qd) SPECIES WITH ELEVEN-JOINTED ANTENNULES.
218. Cyclops affinis, G. O. Sars.

1863. Cyclops affinis, G. O. Sars, J. c., p. 256.
LB7S." *§; » Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 112, pl. xv. figs.
11-14; pl. xxiv. figs. 10-15.

Hab.—Raith Lake, near Kirkcaldy, Fifeshire, 1890. Elf
Loch, and ponds in Penicuik grounds, 1900 (Dr and Miss
Sprague). Humbie Reservoir, near Winchburgh, June 1906
(W. Evans). ;

219. Cyclops diaphanus, Fischer.

1858. Cyclops diaphanus, Fischer, J. c., vol. xxvi. p. 93, pl. iii.

figs. 6-12.
1863. a nanus, G. O. Sars, Z. ¢., p. 42.
1899. on a T. Scott, Seventeenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.

pp. 141, 172, 187.
1901. » diaphanus, Lillj., Kongl. Sv. Vet.-Handlingar,
vol. xxxv. No. 4, p. 63, pl. iv. figs 18-15.
1901-1902. », nanus, Dr and Miss Sprague, Trans. Edin. Field
Naturalists, vol. iv. p. 256, pl. xxxia. figs. 7-12.

Hab.—This small species, first added to the British fauna
in 1899, was obtained at Auchencorth Moss, Midlothian, in
April 1901, by Dr and Miss Sprague.

(¢) SPECIES WITH TEN-JOINTED ANTENNULES.

220. Cyclops phaleratus, Koch.

1838. Cyclops phaleratus, Koch, Deutschl. Crustaceen, Heft 21,
pls ix

1878. 4 bd Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 116,
pl. xxiii. figs. 7-138.

Hab.—Duddingston Loch ; Lochgelly Loch and Raith Lake,
Fifeshire. Marl-pit, Davidson’s Mains, near Edinburgh,
June 1900 (Dr and Miss Sprague). This species also
occurs in some material from the marl-pit collected by
myself in May 1888. Teith at Callander (Evaus),.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. Bo"

(f) SpEciES witH Ercut-JoIntED ANTENNULES.
221. Cyclops fimbriatus, Fischer.

1853. Cyclops fimbriatus, Fischer, 1. c., p. 94, pl. iii. figs. 19-28
and 30.

1878. o crassicornis, Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 118,
pl. xxiii. figs. 1-6.

Hab.—Moderately common in ponds and lakes throughout
the district.

Genus (89) Halicyclops, Norman, 1903.

222. Halicyclops equoreus (Fischer).
1860. Cyclops equoreus, Fischer, Abhandl. Math. Classe der Konigl.

Bayer. Akad. der Wiss. Miinchen, vol. viii.

(3) p. 654, pl. xx. figs. 26-29.
1878. oe i Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 119, pl. xix.

figs. 8-10; pl. xxi. figs. 10-17.
Hlab,—Cramond Island, in pools above high-tide mark,
1888; and in brackish-water pools at Aberlady in May 1895.
Dr and Miss Sprague have also collected this species in a

rock-pool on Cramond Island in July 1901.

Genus (90) Euryte, Philippi, 1843.
223. Huryte longicauda, Philippi.

1843. Huryte longicauda, Philippi, Archiv. fur Naturh., Jahrg. 9,
p- 63, pl. iil. fig. 3, a-d.
1864. Zhorellia brunnea, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copepoder, p. 26.
1872. e Ps Brady, op: ¢7t.,. vol. i, pe 95, pl. xviz
figs. 1-10.

Hab.—Moderately frequent throughout the estuary.

Family LICHOMOLGIDA.

For further information concerning the Lichomolgide and
Hersiliidee, the reader is referred to Dr Canu’s work, Les
Copepodes du Boulonnais.

a02 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (91) Lichomolgus, Thorell, 1859.
224. Lichomolgus fucicolus, G. 8. Brady.

1880. Lichomolgus fucicolus, Brady, Monograph, vol. iii. p. 41,
ple lxxey. fos: delay
Hab.—F¥irth of Forth; moderately rare. It has usually
been obtained in shallow inshore water, amongst Laminaria,
ete.

225. Lichomolqus furcillatus, Thorell.

1859. Lichomolgus furciliatus, Thorell, Om Krustaceer i Ascidier,
p. 74, taf. 13, fig. 30.

43 Brady, ¢.\ c:, vol: qa peas:
pl. Ixxxvili. figs. 10-14.

1880. .

Hab.—Collected near May Island and in the vicinity of
Inchkeith, in the branchial cavity of large Ascidians; not
common.

226. Lichomolgus hirsutipes, T. Scott.

1893. Lichomolgus hirsutipes, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 206, pl. iv. figs. 1-12.

Hab—TYaken with the dredge a short distance north of
the Bass Rock, and off the North Craig; rather rare. On
one occasion I found a considerable number of specimens
adhering to the outside surface of the tubes of a large species
of Sabella brought up on the hooks when line-fishing in 1898,
in 15 to 20 fathoms, where the bottom consisted of mud.
The Copepods were white, and therefore easily noticed on the
mud-tubes made by the Annelids.!

2217. Lichomolgus agilis (Leydig).

1853. Doridicola agilis, Leydig, Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., Bd. 4,
p. 377, taf. 14.
1892. Lichomolgus agilis, Canu, Les Copep. du Boulonnais, p. 228,
pl. xxi. figs. 1-14.
1892. “ concinnus, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 261, pl. ii. figs. 25-33.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891; rare. Taken also

1 Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist. (October 1895), p. 288.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. Doe

in the neighbourhood of Granton in 1893, on the branchial
appendages of Doris (?) tuberculatus.'

Genus (92) Pseudanthessius, Claus, 1889.
228. Pseudanthessius gracilis, Claus.

1889. Pseudanthessius gracilis, Claus, Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien., t. viii.
p. 344, taf. 4, figs. 1-7.

1893. ws Fe T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag, Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xit. p. 241, pl. xii.
figs, 15-20.

Hab.—Dredged off Musselburgh in 1891; not common.

229. Pseudanthesstus liber (Brady and Robertson).

1876. Lichomolgus liber, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1875,
pa 19%:
1880. 3 », Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 44,
pl. Ixxxvi. fig. 197.
Hab.—Dredged very sparingly off the north end of Inch-
keith in 1894. Also dredged in the neighbourhood of Inch-
keith on 23rd May, and off North Craig on 4th July 1901.

230. Pseudanthessius Thorellt (Brady and Robertson).

1876. Lichomolgus Thorelli, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1875,
ps Loi.
Brady, JZ. c., vol. iii. p. 47, pl. lxxxviii.
figs. 1-9.
Hab.—Dredged very sparingly off St Monans in 1893-1894.
Also off the east side of Inchkeith on 23rd May 1901; rare.

1880. r

231. Pseudanthessius Sauvager, Canu.

1891. Pseudanthessius Sauvaget, Canu, Bull. Sci. France et Belgique,
vol. xxii. p. 481.
a + T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xii. p. 146.
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1894; rare. During
1895 the fishery steamer “Garland” was engaged in some
line-fishing experiments, when various things were brought
up on the hooks, and the common Sea-Urchin, Lchinus

~ 1 Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vol. 11. (March 1893) p. 212, pl. vii. figs.
12-15.

1894.

304 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

esculentus, among others. Some of these urchins I put into a
bottle containing strong methylated spirit; after washing
them in this spirit, an examination of the residue revealed a
considerable number of specimens of this rare Copepod, and
of little else.

Genus (93) Modiolicola, Aurivilius, 1883.
232. Modiolicola insignis, Aurivilius.

1883. Modiolicola insignis, Aur., Akad. Afhand]. Stockholm (1883),
pp. 10 and 39, taf. 2, figs. 1-10; taf. 4,
figs. 13-16.

1893. Bs be T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pt. 111.
p- 207, pl. iv. figs. 13-24.

Hab.—Frequent in the shells of living “ Horse Mussels,”
Mytilus modiolus. The species was obtained in most of the
large mussels examined.

Genus (94) Herrmannella, Canu, 1891.

233. Herrmannella rostrata, Canu.
1891. Herrmannella rostrata, Canu, Bull. Sci. France et Belgique,
t. xxiii. p. 480.
1892. “a wh idem, Les Copep. du _ Boulonnais,
p. 236, pl. xxiv. figs. 1-13.
1892. Lichomolgus agilis, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. x. p. 201, pl. xv. figs. 1-14.

'

Hab.—Frequent in the shells of living Cockles, Cardiwm
edule, found in the cockle-beds at Cramond.

234, Herrmannella maxima (I. C. Thompson).

1893. Lichomolgus maximus, I. C. T., Trans. L—pool Biol. Soc.,
vol. vii. p. 34, pl. xxxv.

Hab.—Frequent in the shells of the Clam, Pecten oper-
cularis, dredged on the clam-beds to the east of Inchkeith,
but this Copepod was first observed by I. C. Thompson in
the shell of living Pecten maximus, hence its name. This is
not a true Lichomolgus, and as it agrees very closely with
Herrmannella, I place it meanwhile under that genus.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. oOo

235. Herrmannella arenicola (G. 8. Brady).

1872. Boeckia arenicola, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and
Durham, vol. iv. p. 480.
1880. Lichomolgus arenicolus, idem, Monograph, vol. iii. p. 46,
pl. Ixxxvii. figs. 1-7.

1892. - a T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat.
Hist. (July 1892), p. 151, pl. vii.
figs. 1-10.

Hab.—Dredged off St Monans in 1891; rare.

Genus (95) Sabelliphilus, M. Sars, 1862.

236. Sabelliphilus Sars, Claparede.

1870. Sabelliphilus Sarsi, Clap., Ann. des Sci. Nat. (5), vol. xiii.
p: 6, pl. vir

1887. Lichomolgus sabelle, I. C. Thompson, Proc. L—pool Biol.
SOc; VOlAnH. p. 68, ply 1.

Hab.—Collected off St Monans, 7th July 1897, on the
plumes of Sabella sp. (2S. pavonina); rare. ;

Family CLAUSIIDA.

Genus (96) Hersiliodes, Canu, 1888.
237. Hersilrodes aberdonensis (T. and A. Scott).

1892. Lichomolgus aberdonensis, T. and A. Scott, Ann. Scot. Nat.

Hist. (July 1892), p. 149, pl. vi. figs. 1-12.
Hab.—Dredged off the east side of Inchkeith on 23rd May
1901. The specimens from which the species was described

in 1892 were obtained in a tow-net gathering collected in
Aberdeen Bay.

238. Hersiliodes littoralis ('T. Scott).

1892. Lichomolgus littoralis, T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. ili.
p. 260, pl. x. figs. 1-9.
Hab.—Collected in the neighbourhood of Culross in 1891.
This appears to be a rare species in the Forth estuary, and is
probably parasitic on some other invertebrate.

596 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Family ASTEROCHERIDA!
Genus (97) Asterocheres, Boeck, 1859.

239. Asterocheres Lilljeborgi, Boeck.

1859. Asterocheres Lilljeborgi, Boeck, Forhandl. Vid.-Selsk. Chr.
(1859), p76; ple ais fies. 11.
1880. Artotrogus Lilljeborgi, Brady, Monograph, vol. iii. p. 64.

Hab.—Firth of Forth; rare (cf. Giesbrecht, Asterocheride,
pp. 70 and 73).

240. Asterocheres echinicola (Norman).

1869. Ascomyzon echinicola, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1868,
p- 300.
1880. Cyclopicera lata, Brady, J. ¢., vol. iii. p. 56, pl. Ixxxix. fig.
12; pl. xe. figs. 11-14.
Be » J. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept., pieont
p- 210, pl. iii. figs. 41 and 42.

1893.

Hab.— Obtained, in 1889, by washing a number of Sponges
in methylated spirit; the sponges were dredged in Aberlady
Bay.

241. Asterocheres Boecki (G. S. Brady).

1880. Artotrogus Boeckii, Brady, J. ¢., vol. ili, p. 60, pl. xci. figs.
1-9.

Hab.—Obvtained at Granton Harbour in the water-passages
of Sponges (Chalina oculata) growing on the walls of the
pier; frequent.

1 In Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel, Monograph 25, the Astero-
cheride, by Dr W. Giesbrecht (1899), the Forth species belonging to this
family are for the most part described and figured by the author; and he
also refers to their Scottish habitats in his remarks on the distribution of the
various forms. ‘The reader should consult this fine work, which contains a
full synonymy and other information.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. BOW

Genus (98) Dermatomyzon, Claus, 1889.

242. Dermatomyzon nigripes (Brady and Robertson).
1876. Cyclopicera nigripes, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1875,

Da Lode ‘

1880. = ae Brady, 7. c., vol. iii. p. 54, pl. Ixxxix.
figs. 1-11.

1892. * os T. Scott, Tenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 267.

Hab.—Collected in the neighbourhood of May Island in
1892. Dredged at Station I. on 30th August 1894, and
subsequently captured at a few other places, but always very
sparingly.

Genus (99) Rhynchomyzon, Giesbrecht, 1895.

243. Khynchomyzon purpurocinctum (T. Scott).

1893 Cyclopicera purpurocincta, T. Scott, Eleventh F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 209, pl. iii. figs. 29-40.

Hlab.—Dredged on the “ Rath ground,” to the north of the
Bass Rock, on 20th November 1889, and off the east side of
Inchkeith on 23rd May 1901. This species, which appears
to be rare in the Forth estuary, has a wide distribution,
having been recorded not only from various parts of the
British seas, but also from the Gulf of Naples.

Genus (100) Collocheres, Canu, 1893.

244, Collocheres gracilicauda (G. 8S. Brady).
1880. Cyclopicera gracilicauda, Brady, /. c., vol. iii. p. 58, pl.
Ixxxiii. figs. 1-10.
Hab.—Dredged off St Monans; rare.

Genus (101) Scottomyzon, Giesbrecht, 1897.

245. Scottomyzon gibberum (T. and A. Scott).

1894. Dermatomyzon gibberum, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. (6), vol xii. p. 144,
pl. ix. figs. 10-14.

1894, 3 a T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 260, pl. x. figs. 26-34.

| Hab.—Dredged in the neighbourhood of the Bass Rock in

358 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

1893. In 1895 a number of specimens—adults and young—
were obtained by washing specimens of the common Starfish,
Asterias rubens, in a bottle containing methylated spirit, and
afterwards examining the residue. These specimens were of
a brick-red colour on the back, but nearly white beneath.
Their normal habitat is apparently on this kind of starfish.

Genus (102) Acontiophorus, Brady, 1880.

246. Acontiophorus scutatus (Brady and Robertson).

1873. Solenostoma scutatum, B. and R., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
vol, xiizp: 141,

1880. decontiophorus scutatus, Brady, UJ. ¢c., vol. ili. p. 69, pl. xe.
figs. 1-10.

Hab.—Collected near Inchkeith in 1888. Off Mussel-
burgh, dredged 30th May 1891, and subsequently collected
in various other parts of the estuary; moderately frequent.

247. Acontiophorus ornatus (Brady and Robertson).

1876. Ascomyzon ornatum, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1875,

p. 197;
1880. Acontiophorus armatus, Brady, J. ¢., vol. ili. p. 71, pl. Ixxxvii.

figs. 8-15.

Hab.—Dredged off North Craig on 4th July 1901; rare.

Genus (103) Scottocheres, Giesbrecht, 1897.

248. Scottocheres elongatus (T. and A. Scott).

1894. Acontiophorus elongatus, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xii. p. 145, pl. ix. figs. 15-20.

1898. Scottocheres elongatus, T. Scott, Sixteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 278, pl. xiii. figs. 10-21.

Hab.—Obtained in 1893 in material dredged in the
neighbourhood of the Bass Rock; frequent.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 359

Genus (104) Cribropontius, Giesbrecht, 1899.

249. Cribropontius Norman (Brady and Robertson).

1876. Dyspontius Normani, B. and R., Brit. Assoc. Rept. for 1875,
pelse,
1880. Artotrogus Normani, Brady, 7. c., vol. iii. p. 63, pl. xci.
figs. 12-15; pl. xcil. fig. 10.
1897. Bradypontius Normani, T. Scott, Fifteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ill. p. 154, pl. ii. figs. 1 and 2; pl. iii. figs. 1-11.
Hab.—Taken off the North Craig in material dredged
on 4th July 1901; rare. This large and sometimes highly-
coloured species appears to be rare in Firth of Forth.

Genus (105) Bradypontius, Giesbrecht, 1895.

250. Bradypontius magniceps (G. S. Brady).

1880. Artotrogus magniceps, Brady, 7. ¢., vol. iii. p. 61, pl. xciii.
figs. 1-9.

Hab.—Dredged west of Queensferry in 1888, and at the
north-west end of Inchkeith on 23rd May 1901. Several
fine specimens were obtained in material dredged off the
North Craig on 4th July 1901, when a few of the females
were found with ovisacs attached.

251. Bradypontius papilatus (T. Scott).

1888. Artotrogus papillatus, T. Scott, Sixth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 232, pl. viii. figs. 7-12.
1899. Bradypontius chelifer, Giesbrecht, Fauna u. Flora Golfes v.
Neapel, Monogr. 25 (Asterocheride), p. 88, pl. vi. figs.
15-25.
1899. Bradypontius papillatus, T. Scott, Seventeenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. il. p. 262, pl. xi. fig. 21; pl. xii. figs. 7-15
Hlab.— Dredged in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith in
1888; apparently very rare. The specimen from which the
description and drawings were prepared is the only one that
has yet been observed in the Forth estuary. This specimen
is, | think, certainly identical with the Bradypontius chelifer
described by Dr Giesbrecht in his fine work on the

Asterocheridze.

360 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.
Genus (106) Dyspontius, Thorell, 1859.
252. Dyspontius striatus, Thorell.

1859. Dyspontius striatus, Thorell, Om Krustaceer i Acidier, p. 81,
pl. xiv. fig. 22.

ms sd Brady, 2. ¢., vol. ili. p. 66, pl. xcii. figs.
1-12.

1880.

Hab.—Dredged at the north-west end of Inchkeith on
23rd May 1901. WD. striatus has not previously been noticed
within the limits of the Forth estuary, but it is a widely
distributed species in our seas, though not very plentiful.

253. Dyspontius curticaudatus, T. Scott.
1905. Dyspontius curticaudatus, T. Scott, Twenty-third F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 148, pl. xili. figs. 1-10.

Hab.—Dredged in the vicinity of Culross, a few miles
above Queensferry; rare.

Genus (107) Parartotrogus, T. and A Scott, 1893.
254. Parartotrogus Richardt, T. and A. Scott.

1893. Parartotrogus Richardi, 'T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist. "(6)>-volixi p. ZU} pil vii. tres? t-1e
Hab.—Dredged near Fidra in 1889, but not recorded till
1893. It has subsequently been dredged off St Monans, in

Largo Bay, and one or two other places, but nowhere very
common.

Family CORYCAIDAZ.

Genus (108) Coryceus, Dana, 1845.
255. Coryceeus anglicus, Lubbock.

1857. Coryceus anglicus, Lubb., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol. xx., pl. xi. figs. 16-19.

i - Brady, ¢.. ¢., vol. iii” p. 345° pl iaexae
figs. 16-19 et seq.

“A ré T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. ini.
p- 397, pl. xiii. figs. 1-14.

Hab.—Dredged in the “Fluke Hole” off St Monans;

also washed from trawl refuse collected off West Wemyss,

1880.

1900.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 361

October 1895. This species appears to be of rare occurrence
in the Forth estuary.

Family NICOTHOIDA.

Genus (109) Nicothoé, Audouin and Milne-Edwards, 1826.
256. Nicothoé astact, Aud..and M.-Edwards.

1826. Nicothoé astacit, Aud. and M.-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat., 1st
ser., vol. ix. p. 345, taf. 49, figs. 1-9.

Hab.—F¥ound adhering to the gills of a Lobster sent from
Dunbar. I am indebted to my colleague, Dr H. C. William-
son, for the specimens of the Nicothoé. The distribution of
the parasite appears to be co-extensive with that of its host.

Family ERGASILIDAZ.
Genus (110) Bomolochus, Nordmann, 1832.
257. Bomolochus solew, Claus.

1864. Bomolochus sole, Claus, Zeitschrift fiir Wissenschaft, Zool.,
yolkoxv. p37 4, pl. XXxxv.

1893. Ee 3 I: Seott; Eleventh F. b. Eept., pt. in.
p- 212, pl. v.
1902. Pe » idem,’ ‘Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt: ii.

p. 288, pl. xiii. figs. 13-18.
Hab.—Firth of Forth; found on the back of a Black Sole,
Solea vulgaris, and among dredged material, but in this case
the specimens must, in some way, have been detached from
the fish. Found in the nostrils of a Cod-fish by John Lindsay,
Edinburgh. This Bomolochus has been obtained in the nasal

fossze of several kinds of fishes, but it is most frequent in
those of the cod.

258. Bomolochus onosi, T. Scott.

1902. Bomolochus onost, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.

p. 289, pl. xiii. figs. 19-22,
Hab.—Firth of Forth, on the inside of the gill-covers of a
Five-bearded Rockling, Onos mustelus (Linn.), captured in the
estuary in May 1901. This Bomolochus has also been

362 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

obtained on a specimen of the same kind of fish captured off
Kinnaird Head in July 1901.

Genus (111) Thersitina, Norman, 1905.

(Syn. Thersites, Pagenstecher, 1861, preoccupied by Spence
Bate in 1857 for a genus of Amphipods. )

259. Thersitina gasteroster (Pagenstecher).
1861. Thersites gasterostei, Pagenst., Arch. f. Naturh., vol. xvii.

p. 118, pl. vi. figs. 1-9.
1899. Hrgasilus gasterostei, Bassett-Smith, Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond,

(April 1899), p. 444.
1900. Thersites gasterostei, T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.

p. 146, pl. v. figs 1-7.

Hab.—On the inside of the gill-covers of a Three-spined
Stickleback, Gasterosteus aculeatus, captured in the river
Forth, near Alloa, in February 1896. I have also taken this
minute Copepod on the same species of fish captured in a
small loch in Barra, Outer Hebrides; and in brackish-water
ditches at Aberdeen, as well as on a Fifteen-spined Stickle-
back, Gasterosteus spinachia, captured in Loch Etive, on the

west of Scotland.

Division NOTODELPHYOIDA.

Family NOTODELPHYDA.
Genus (112) Notodelphys, Allman, 1847.

260. Notodelphys Allmant, Thorell.
1860. Notodelphys Allmant, Thorell, Bidrag til Kanned. Krust. Art.
Sligtet Ascidia, p. 31, pl. 1., and pl. ii.
fig. 1.
1878. af at Brady, Monograph, vol. i. p. 126,
pl. xxv. figs. 1-10.
Hab.—In the branchial cavity of Ascidians found adhering
to the walls of Granton Harbour, and dredged in the neigh-

bourhood of Inchkeith and elsewhere; moderately frequent.

261. Notodelphys agilis, Thorell.

1860. Notodelphys agilis, Thorell, 2. c., p. 40, pl. iv.; pl. v. fig. 6.
1878. SA » Brady, Z.c., vol. i. p. 130, pl. xxvi.figs.1-10.

Hab.—In the branchial cavity of Ascidians found adhering
to the pier at Granton.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 363

Family DoROPYGID 4.
Genus (113) Doropygus, Thorell, 1859.

262. Doropygus Normani, G. S. Brady.
1878. Doropygus Normani, Brady, JU. ¢., vol. i. p. 136, pl. xxxil.
figs. 1-14.
Hab.—In the branchial cavity of Ascidians dredged off
Musselburgh, not uncommon, but apparently rare in other
parts of the estuary.

263. (?) Doropygus porcicauda, G. S. Brady.

1878. Doropygus porcicauda, Brady, J. c., vol. i. p. 138, pl. xxvii.
figs. 1-9; pl. xxxiii. figs. 14-16.

#888: (2) ;, sb T. Scott, Sixth F. B. Rept., pt. i.
p. 239.

Hab—-A specimen that appeared to belong to this species
was obtained among some material dredged near Inchkeith
in 1887, but as it is not now in my collection, I am unable
to verify the record.

Family ASCIDICOLIDA,.

Genus (114) Ascidicola, Thorell, 1859.

264. Ascidicola rosea, Thorell.
1859. Ascidicola rosea, Thorell, 7. c., p. 59, pl. ix.; pl. x. fig. 13.
1878. Ad 5, Brady, 7. ¢., vol. i. p. 145, pl. xxx. figs. 1-10.
Hab.—Obtained occasionally in the branchial chambers of
Ascidians dredged in the neighbourhood of Inchkeith, off
Musselburgh, and at a few other places in the estuary.

Genus (115) Aplostoma, Canu, 1886.

Syn. Enterocola, T. Scott, 1892 (not EHnterocola,
P. J. v. Beneden).

265. Aplostoma affinis, T. Scott, nov. nom.
1869. (2) Enterocola eruca, Norman, Last Report of Dredging among
the Shetland Isles (Brit. Assoc.* Rept.
for 1868), p. 300.
1892. Pe » tL. and A. Seott, Ann.,and Mag. Nat,
Hist. (6), vol. x. p. 2038, figs. 1-11.

Hab—A few specimens of this curious species were
VOL. XVI. 21

364 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

obtained within the intestines of Ascidians found frequently
adhering to the inside of the valves of dead mussels and
other shells, dredged in various parts of the estuary. These
specimens were mistakenly ascribed to Snterocola, van
Beneden, but they more nearly resemble Aplostoma brevicauda,
Canu. They differ, however, in some respects from that
species, as shown by the description and drawings. I have
therefore named the species as above.

Family LAMIPPEIDA.
Genus (116) Lamippe, Bruzelius, 1859.

266. Lamippe proteus, Claparede.

1867. Lamippe proteus, Claparede, Ann. des Sci. Nat., ser. 5, vol.
viii. p. 23, pl. v.

1895. Alcyonicola fusiformis, T. and A. Scott, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xvi. p. 357, pl. xvi. figs. 10-14; pl. xvii.
fig. 13.

1896. Lamippe(?) proteus, T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept., pt. 11.
p. 164.

Hab.—On Alcyonium digitatum, dredged in various parts
of the estuary; frequent. This curious species appears to
live in the cells of the polyps. If an Alcyoniwm be broken
into pieces, and the fragments washed in a bottle containing
methylated spirit, numbers of the Lamippe will generally be
found amongst the sediment.

267. Lamippe Forbesi, T. Scott.

1896. Lamippe sp., T. Scott, Fourteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 164, pl. iv. figs. 9-13.

1901. Lamippe Forbesi, T. Scott, Nineteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 256.

Hab.—This, which is a larger and apparently a much rarer
species than L. proteus, has been found along with it on
Aleyonium digitatum, dredged in the Firth of Forth. It has
been. observed on the same Alcyoniwm from other parts of
the Scottish coast, and my son has also obtained it in
Liverpool Bay.!

1 Cf. Tenth Ann. Rept. Liverpool Marine Biological Committee, p. 21
(1897).

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 365

Genus (117) Jeanella, T. Scott, /. B. Rept., 1904,
pt. 111. p. 258.
(Syn. Platypsyllus, T. Scott, 1902, a name preoccupied
by Dr Ritsema and Prof. Westwood in 1869.)

268. Jeanella minor, T. Scott.

1902. Platypsyllus minor, T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 455, pl. xxv. figs. 15, 16.

Hab.—This somewhat remarkable species was obtained in
a yvathering dredged in about 8 fathoms in the neighbour-
hood of the North Craig on 4th July 1901. Only a few

specimens—all females, and one or two carrying ovisacs—
were observed.

Division MONSTRILLOIDA.

Family MONSTRILLID42.
Genus (118) Monstrilla, Dana, 1848.
269. Monstrilla anglica, Lubbock.

1857. Monstrilla anglica, Lubbock, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (2),
vol. xx. p. 409, pl. x. figs. 7 and 8.

i T. Scott, Twenty-second F. B. Rept.,
pin Grep. 246, plo xin. figs 13% pl. xiv:
figs. 12-14.

1904. ig

Hab.—Captured to the west of May Island, with a tow-
net, on 26th July 1901, and also to the east of May Island
on 20th August 1903, but only females were observed in
both gatherings.

270. Monstrilla longicornis, I. C. Thompson.

1890. Monstrilla longicornis, I. C. Thompson, Trans. L—pool Biol.
Soc., vol. iv. p. 119, pl. iv. figs. 1, 2, and 4 (¢).

1892. a longiremis, Giesb., Pelag. Copep. des Golfes v.
Neapel, p. 589, pl. xlvi. figs. 10, 14, 22, 37,
and 41 (¢@).

1904. A longicornis, T. Scott, 7. c., p. 244, pl. xiii. figs. 1-7
(g and 9).

Hab.—This species was taken in the estuary very sparingly
in 1890, 1891, 1893, 1894, and 1901.

366 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

271. Monstrilla gracilicauda, Giesbrecht.

1892. Monstrilla gracilicauda, Giesb., J. c., p. 587, pl. xlvi. figs. 9,
16, 18 ef seq.

1904. e < T. Scott, Twenty-second F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 245, pl. xiii. figs. 8-10;

pl. xiv. fig. Tb.
Hab.—Taken with tow-net above Queensferry, 26th June
1890; and off Musselburgh, 29th September 1892. Also
captured east of May Island on 20th August 1903. All the

specimens were females.

272. Monstrilla dubia, T. Scott.

1904. Monstrilla dubia, T. Scott, Twenty-second F. B. Rept., pt. ili.
p. 247, pl. xiii. fig. 14; pl. xiv. figs. 16-18.

Hab.—This species was captured east of Inchkeith on 14th
August 1891, and is apparently rare. It resembles Monstrilla
Dane, Claparéde, but that author shows only three setz
instead of four on each furcal joint; there are also one or
two other differences.

Genus (119) Thaumaleus, Kroyer, 1849.

273. Thaumaleus rigidus (1. C. Thompson).

1888. Cymbasoma rigidum, I. C. Thompson, Jour. Linn. Soe. (Zool.),
vol. xx. p. 154, pl. xiii. figs. 1-4.
1892. Thaumaleus Claparédei, Giesb., op. cit., p. 381, pl. xlvi.
figs. 5, 15, 21, 26.

1904. re rigidus, T. Scott, Twenty-second F. B. Rept.,
pt. iii. p. 248, pl. xiii. figs. 15-17; pl. xiv.
fie, po!

Hab.—Captured off St Monans, by tow-net, on 6th
September 1890; apparently rare.

Division CALIGOIDA.
Family CALIGID 2.
Genus (120) Caligus, O. F. Miiller, 1785.

274. Caligus curtus, Miiller.
1785. Caligus curtus, Miller, Entomostraca, p. 130, pl. xxi. fig. 1.

1850. », aiaphanus, Baird, British Entomostraca, p. 269,
pl. xxsdi fies (i):
1850. », Miilleri, idem, 1. c., p. 271, pl. xxxii. figs. 4 and 5.

Hab.—Frequent on different kinds of fishes, especially

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 367

Gadoids. The male Caligus, which Dr Baird describes and
figures in his British Hntomostraca under the name of Caligus
diaphanus, Nordmann, is not Nordmann’s species, but is the
male of C. curtus, Miller.

275. Caligus rapax, M.-Ed wards.

1840. Caligus rapax, M.-Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. iii. p. 453,
pl. xxxviil. fig. 9.

Hab—Common on several kinds of fishes, especially
Gadoids, as well as on flat fishes, Skate, Dogfishes, and
others. From Short Sunfish, North Berwick, September 1905
(W. Evans). It is also frequently captured by tow-net in
the open sea.

276. Caligus minimus, Otto.
1828. Caligus minimus, Otto, Beschreib. neuer Crust., Nov. Act.
Acad. Ces. Leop., vol. xiv. p. 354,
je pone
1901. aE ef A. Scott, Trans. L—pool Biol. Soc., vol. xv.
j p- 349, pl. i. figs. 1-8.
Hab.—F¥ound inside the throat of a Bass, Labrax lupus,
Cuv. and Valenc., captured in the Forth, above Queensferry,

in February 1903.

277. Caligus diaphanus, Nordmann.
1832. Caligus diaphanus, Nordm., Mikrog. Beitriige, vol. ii. p. 26.
1894. », twsonyx, T. Scott, Twelfth F. B. Rept., pt. ii. p. 310
(not C. tsonyx, Stp. and Liitk.).
1900. ,, diaphanus, idem, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. in.
p. 149, pl. v. figs. 20-25.

Hab.—Taken in the gill-cavity of Grey Gurnards, T'rigla
gurnardus, captured in the estuary; not very rare.

Genus (121) Pseudocaligus, A. Scott, 1900.

278. Pseudocaligus brevipedis (Bassett-Smith).

1896. Caligus brevipedis, Bassett-Smith, Ann. Nat. Hist. (6),
vol. xvil. ps fl pls nn fe
1901. Pseudocaligus brevipedis, A. Scott, Trans. L—pool Biol. Soc.,
vol. xv. p. 350, pl. ii. figs. 1-6.
1902. ‘ T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 291.

Hab.—Found inside the throat of a Three- bearded Rockling,

368 Proceedings of the Ruyal Physical Socrety.
Onos tricirratus, captured at Dunbar in 1892. In this species

the fourth pair of feet are more rudimentary than in typical
Caligus.

Genus (122) Lepeophtheirus, Nordmann, 1832.

279. Lepeophtheirus pectoralis (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Lernea pectoralis, Miiller, Zool. Dan. Prodr., vol. i. p. 41,
pl. xxi. “fierye
1850. Lepeophtheirus pectoralis, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 275, pl. xxxii.
fig. 10.
1900. - . T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 150, pl. v. figs. 26-31.

Hab.—Frequent under the pectoral fins of Plaice, Flounders,
and Dabs.

280. Lepeophtherrus Thompson, Baird.

1850. Lepeophtheirus Thompsoni, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 278,
pl. xxxiil. fig. 2.

1900. - e T. Scott, 2 a, ps2
figs. 43-45.
1900. - obscurus, idem, l.c., p. 153, pl. vi. figs. 16-19.

Hab.—Frequent on the gills of Turbot, Bothus maximus,
captured off St Monans. The form I referred doubtfully to
L. obscurus, Baird, appears to be identical with LZ. Thompsoni;
it is sometimes common on the gills of the Brill, Bothus
rhombus. ; |

281. Lepeophtheirus pollachw, Bassett-Smith.

1896. Lepeophtheirus pollachit, Bassett-Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xviii. p. 12, pl. iv.

figs, 1.
1900. - > T. Seott, op. cit., p. 153,) pil va.
figs. 9-15.

Hab.—Firth of Forth, on the gills of Lythe, Gadus pol-
lachius, 8th February 1895; apparently not very rare.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 369

282. Lepeophtheirus salmonis (Kroyer).
1837. Caligus salmonis, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidssk., vol. i., pl. vi.
fig. 7 a-c; vol. ii. (1838) pp. 18, 18.
1847. », NStromi, Baird, Trans. Berw. Naturalists Club.
1850. Lepeophtheirus Stromi, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 274, pl. xxxii.
figs. 8 and 9.
1850. te obscurus, idem, ibidem, p. 277, pl. xxxii. fig. 11.

Hab.—On Salmon caught in the salmon nets in Largo Bay
and other parts of the estuary; frequent.

Genus (123) Trebius, Kroyer, 1838.

285. Trebvus caudatus, Kroyer.

1838. Trebius caudatus, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidsskr. (1838), R. i. B. ii.
p-. 30, pl. i. fig. 4.

1900. a Be T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 155, pl. vi. figs. 20-26.

Hab—Taken on the backs of grey (or blue) Skates, Raza
batis; moderately frequent.

Genus (124) Cecrops, Leach, 1816.

284. Cecrops Latreiller, Leach.
1816. Cecrops Latreillei, Leach, Encycl. Brit., Suppl. 1., pl. xx.
figs. 1-5.
TS50S 5, 4 Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 293, pl. xxxiv.
ieee
Hab.—Found on the gills of a Short Sunfish, captured in
the estuary in October 1890 (A. Scott). Cecrops appears to
be a common parasite on the gills of this species of Sunfish.

Genus (125) Orthagoriscola, Franz Poche, 1902.

(Syn. Lemargus, Kroyer, 1838, name preoccupied for a
genus of Fishes.)

285. Orthagoriscola muricata (Kroyer).
1850. Lemargus muricatus, Baird, Entomostraca, pe 2955 le soexty:
figs. 3 and 4.
1900. 5g i T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p. 158, pl. vi. figs. 39-42.
1902. Orthugoriscola muricata, Franz Poche, Zool. Anzeiger,
vol. xxvi. p. 15.

Hab.—On the same Sunfish with the Cecrops just recorded

370 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

not, however, attached to the gills, but burrowing in hollows
formed in the flesh of the fish, behind the anal fin (A. Scott).
Off a Short Sunfish captured at North Berwick, 28th Sept-
ember 1905 (W. Evans). This appears to be a rarer species
than the Cecrops.

Division LERN AOIDA.
Family LERN AIDA.

Genus (126) Lernea, Linné, 1767.

286, Lernea branchialis, Linné.

1767. Lernea branchialis, Linn., Systema Nature, ed. 12, vol. i.

pt. ii. p. 1092.
TESOL ee " Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 344, pl. xxxv.
fig. 12.

Hab.—Frequent on the gills of Whitings and some other
Gadoids.

Genus (127) Lerneenicus, Lesueur, 1824.
287. Lerneenicus spratta (Sowerby).

1806. Lerncea spratia, Sowerby, Brit. Miscell., vol. ii. p. 17, pl. Ixviii.
1900. Lernwenicus spratte, T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p- 161, pl. vii. figs. 7-10.

Hab.—On the eye of a Sprat, Clupea spratta, seen in one
of the Leith Docks (J. Scott, August 1890). This Copepod
is apparently seldom met with in the Firth of Forth, and
this is the only record of its occurrence in the estuary known
to me.

Genus (128) Hemobaphes, Steenstrup and Liitken, 1861.

288. Hamobaphes cyclopterinus (Fabricius).
1780. Lerncea cyclopterina, Fabr., Fauna Gronlandica, p. 337. »
1900. Hambbaphes cyclopterinus, T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. iu. p.162, pl. val. dig. 4.
Hab.—Found on the gills of a Pogge, Agonus cataphractus,
captured at Dunbar; and on a Butterfish, Pholis gunnellus,
taken near Fidra in 1901.

1 Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1906, p. 57.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 5 |

Family CHONDRACANTHID 4.
Genus (129) Oralien, Bassett-Smith, 1899.

289. Oralren asselinus (Linné).

1761. Lernea asselina, Linn., Fauna Suecica, 2101.
1850. Lernentoma assclina, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 329, pl. xxxv.

fig. 4.

Hab.—Found on the gills of the Grey Gurnard, Z'rigla
gurnardus; not uncommon. What appears to be the same
species is also found on the gills of Plaice and one or two

other fishes.

Genus (130) Chondracanthus, De la Roche, 1811.
290. Chondracanthus cornutas (O. F. Miller).

1776. Lernea cornuta, Miill., Zool. Dan. Prodr., vol. i., pl. xxxiii.
é fig. 6.
1850. Lernentoma cornuta, Baird, l. ¢c., p. 328, pl. xxxv. fig. 2.

Hab.—Found on the gills of Plaice, Pleuronectes platessa ;

not uncommon.

291. Chondracanthus clavatus, Bassett-Smith.
1896. Chondracanthus clavatus, Bassett-Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xviii. p. 18, pl. v. fig. 6.
Hab.—Found on the gills of Lemon Dabs, Plewronectes
microcephalus, especially large fishes.

292. Chondracanthus flure, Kroyer.

1864. Chondracanthus flure, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., R. iii. B. ii.
p. 323, pl. xiii. fig. 6.

1900. a », It. Scott, Highteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 166, pl. vil. figs. 32-34.

Hab.—Found on the gills of Long Rough Dabs, Drepanop-
setta platessoides, captured in the estuary in 1891, and at
Station III. in May 1901.

372 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

293. Chondracanthus sole, Kroyer.
1839. Chondracanthus solew, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. (1838-39),
p- 139, pl. ili. fig. 4.
Hab.—Found on the gills of the Black Sole, Solea vulgaris,
captured in the estuary.

294. Chondracanthus depressus, T. Scott.

1905. Chondracanthus depressus, T. Scott, Twenty-third F. B.
Rept., pt. iii. p. 114, pl. vi. figs. 7-18.
Hab.—F¥ound on the gills of Dabs, Pleuronectes limanda,
Linn., captured in the estuary; not very common.

295. Chondracanthus merlucci (Holten).

(2) 1802. Lernea merluccii, Holten, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Copen-
hagen, vol. v., pl. viii. fig. 2.
1837. Chondracanthus merluccii, Kréyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., vol. i.
p- 278, pl. ii. fig. 9a-d.

Hab.—¥ound in the gill-cavity of a Hake, Merluccius
vulgaris, landed at Newhaven in February 1885. This is a
moderately common parasite on the Hake; it may frequently
be found clinging to the roof and sides of the mouth, and
sometimes on the underside of the tongue, as well as inside
the gill-covers.

296. Chondracanthus lophi, Johnston.

1836. Chondracanthus lophii, Johnston, Lond. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
pel, fig. 16.

1850. Lernentoma lophii, Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 330, pl. xxxv.
fig. 3.

Hab.—Common in the gill-chambers of the Angler-tish,
Lophius piscatorius, captured in the estuary. ‘This is one of
the most common species of the Chondracanthi I have
observed in the Firth of Forth.

297. Chondracanthus zei, De la Roche.

1811. Chondracanthus zei, De la Roche, Nouv. Bull. de Soc. Philom.,
vol. ii. p. 270, pl. i. fig. 2.
1850. Lernentoma zei, Baird, Brit. Entom. p. 327, pl. xxxv. fig. 1.
Hab.—Found on the gills of a John Dory, Zeus faber,
captured in the estuary in 1891.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea.

373
Family LERN #OPODID&.
Genus (151) Charopinus, Kroyer, 1863,
298. Charopinus Dalmanni (Retzius).
1829. Lernea Dalmanni, Retz., Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Handl. for

1829; Frorieps Notizen, Bd. 29, N. 617, p. 6.
1900. Charopinus Dalmanni, T. Scott, op. cit., p. 169, pl. viii.
figs. 6-10.
Hab.—In the nasal fosse of a large Grey Skate, Raia
batis, captured near May Island in 1891. This curious

parasite is frequent in the nasal fossz of large skates, but
seldom in small specimens.

Genus (132) Brachiella, Cuvier, 1817.
299. Brachiella insidiosa, Heller.

1865. Brachiella insidiosa, Heller, Reise der Novara, p. 239, pl
MEXIV. dee

1896. 5 5 Bassett-Smith, Ann.

aud Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6), vol. xviii. p. 14, pl. vi.
fig. 2.
Hab.—Found on the gills of a Hake captured in the
estuary. This species is less common than the Chondra-
canthus merluccit, which is also found on the Hake.

300. Brachiella trigle, Claus.

1860. Brachiella trigle, Claus, Zur Morp. der Copepoden, pl. i
fig. 6.
is Bassett-Smith, Jour. M. B.
Plymouth, p. 163.

Hab.—F¥ound on Trigla lineata captured at Station VIII.
in September 1897.

1896.

ase.

Assoc.

Genus (133) Anchorella, Cuvier, 1817.
301. Anchorella emarginata, Kroyer.

1837. Anchorella emarginata, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr., R. i. B. i
p. 250, pl. i. fie. 7.
1900. se se T. Scott, Eighteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. i. p. 176, pl. viii. figs. 49-51.
Hab.—F¥ound on the gills of a Twaite Shad, Clupea jinta,
captured near Dunbar in February 1897.

This appears to be
a rare species.

374, Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

302. Anchorella rugosa, Kroyer.

1837. Anchorella rugosa, Kroyer, /. c., p. 294, pl. iil. fig. 6.
1850. ee vo Baird, Brit. Entom., p. 338, pl. xxxv.
fig. 8.

Hab.—¥ound on gills and gill-covers and inside the
throat of the Cat- or Wolf-fish, Anarrhichas lupus; not
uncommon.

303. Anchorella uncinata (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Lernea wncinata, Mill., Zool. Dan. Prodr., vol. i., pl. xxxiii.
fig. 2.
1850. Anchorella uncinata, Baird, l. ¢c., p. 337, pl. xxxv. fig. 9.
Hab.—¥ound on the gills and inside the throat of Cod-fish,
and probably on other Gadoids, not uncommon; but the
Anchorelle of these other Gadoids require further study, as
they may not all belong to the same species.

004. Anchorella brevicola, M.-Edwards.
1840. Anchorella brevicola, M.-Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. iii.
p. 418.
1901. 93 a T. Scott, Nineteenth F. B. Rept.,
pt. ili. p. 185, pl. viii. figs. 11-16.
Hab.—F¥ound on a Haddock. The parasite was attached
on the under side of the fish, and near the anal fin. Only

one specimen was observed.

I add here two other interesting parasitic Copepods, each
of which represents a different family, viz.:—

Family HERPYLLOBIIDZ.

Genus (134) Salenskya, Giard and Bonnier, 1893.

305, Salenskya tuberosa, Giard and Bonnier.

1893. Salenskya tuberosa, G. and B., Compt.-rend. de Acad. des
Sci. (25th Sept. 1893).

1895. 33 sf idem, Bull. Sci. de la France et de la
Belgique, vol. xxv. p. 472, pl. xiii.
1902. + - T. Scott, Twentieth F. B. Rept., pt. 111.

p. 474, pl. xxv. figs. 17-22.

Hab.—F¥ound in the marsupium of specimens of Ampeloisca

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 375

spinipes, Boeck ; several examples of this species of Amphipod
were infested with the parasite.

Family CHONIOSTOMATID&,
Genus (135) Aspidecia, Giard and Bonnier, 1889.

206. Aspidecia Normani, Giard and Bonnier.

1889. Aspidecia Normani, G. and B., Compt.-rend. de l’Acad. des
Sci., 29th April.

1897. “5 i H. J. Hansen, The Choniostomatide,
p- 187, pl. xii. figs. 3a, 30.

1898. a B. T. Scott, Sixteenth F. B. Rept., pt. iii.
p21:

Hab.—F¥ound adhering to a specimen both of Hrythrops
elegans (G. O. Sars) and Hrythrops erythrophthalmus (Goés),
captured in 1901 to the west of May Island; rare.

THE THYROSTRACA or CIRRIPEDIA.

Scarcely any addition has been made to the number of
Forth Crustacea belonging to this group since the publica-
tion of Leslie and Herdman’s work on the Invertebrate Fauna
of the Estuary.

THORACICA.
Family LEPADIDA.
Genus (1) Lepas, Linné, 1767.

1. Lepas anatifera, Linné.

1767. Lepas anatifera, Linn., Systema Nature, ed. xii., vol. i.
pt. it, p./ 1109.

tTfeh eo, ae 5 Darwin, Monogr. of the Cirripedia (The
Lepadide), p. 73, pl. i. fig. 1.

Hab.—Attached to floating timber (Edin. Mus., Leslie and
Herdman). Aberlady Bay, on piece of stranded timber,
September 1893 (Evans).

Yo
~I
Os

Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (2) Conchoderma, Olters, 1814.
2. Conchoderma aurita (Liuné).

1767. Lepas aurita, Linn., Systema Nature, ed. xii., vol. i. part ii.
p: 1110:
1851. Conchoderma aurita, Darwin, 7. c., p. 41, pl. iii. fig. 4.

flab.— Attached to floating timber (Edin. Mus., Leslie and
Herdman).
3. Conchoderma virgata (Spengler).

1790. Lepas virgata, Spengler, Skrift. Naturh. Selbsk., vol. i., pl. vi.
fig. 9.
1851. Conchoderma virgata, Darwin, /. ¢., p. 146, pl. iii. fig. 2;
pl. ix: dig34:
Hab.—Attached to floating timber (Edin. Mus., Leslie and
Herdman).

Family BALANIDA.
Genus (3) Balanus, Da Costa, 1778.

4. Balanus porcatus, Da Costa.

1778. Balanus porcatus, Da Costa, Hist. Nat. Test. Brit., p. 249.
1854. us Darwin, Monograph: Balanide, p. 256,
pl. vi. figs. 4a-de.
Hab.—Not uncommon attached to stones, etc. (Leslie and
Herdman).

5. Balanus crenatus, Bruguiere.

1789. Balanus crenatus, Bruguiere, Encycl. Method. (des vers).
1854. 93 . Darwin, J. ¢., p. 261, pl. vi. figs. 6a-6g.
Hab.—Shore at Portobello (Leslie and Herdman). East
side of Inchkeith.

6. Balanus balanoides (Linué).

1767. Lepas balanoides, Linn., Systema Nature, vol. i. part ii.
p- 1108.
1854. Balanus balanoides, Darwin, J. ¢., p. 267, pl. vii. figs. 2a-2d.
Hab—Common on rocks and stones between tide-marks,
and also in deep water.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 377

7. Balanus Hameri (Ascanius).

1767. Lepas Hameri, Ascan., Icones rerum Naturalium, Tab. 10.
1854. Balanus Hameri, Darwin, /. c., p. 277, pl. vii. figs. 5a-5e.

Hab.—Largo Bay, and off the west side of Inchkeith,
single specimens, and occasionally a cluster attached to
pieces of wood.!

Genus (4) Verruca, Schumacher, 1817.
8. Verruca Strémia (O. F. Miiller).

1776. Lepas Strémia, Mill., Zool. Dan. Prodr., No. 3025.
1854. Verruca Strimia, Darwin, J. c., p. 518, pl. xxi. figs. la-1/.

Hab.—Frequent on stones, dead shells, etc., brought up
in the dredge.

RHIZOCEPHALA.
Family SACCULINA.
Genus (5) Sacculina, Thompson.

9. Sacculina carcini, Thompson.

Hab.—Attached to the abdomen of Shore Crabs, Carcinus
moenas, at Joppa (J. Anderson *); not very rare.

10. Sacculina triangularis, J. Anderson.?

Hab.—Firth of Forth (J. Anderson), Dunbar, attached
to the abdomen of Cancer pagurus; rare (H. C. Williamson).

11. Sacculina sp.

Hab.—<Attached to the abdomen of Portwnus holsatus; this
Sacculine has been observed very sparingly in different parts
of the estuary.

1 Balanus tintinnabulum (Linn.), from Leith Dock, in Leslie and Herd-
man’s Zwvertebrate Fawna, is, as stated by these authors, ‘‘a foreign importa-
tion,” and is not included with the others here.

2 Cf. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc., vol. ii.

378 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Genus (6) Peltogaster, Rathke.
12. Peltogaster paguri, Rathke.

Hab.—On the abdomen of the common Hermit (or Soldier)
Crab, Hupagurus bernhardus (J. Anderson!) This Cirriped
does not appear to be rare in the Forth estuary.

13. Peltogaster carcini (Anderson *).
Hab.—Firth of Forth, at Joppa (J. Anderson).

APPENDIX.

The following are some alterations in names, and additions
to the species and localities, recorded in Part I. The total
number of species enumerated in this Catalogue is now 794.

Genus Eupagurus, Brandt, 1851 (p. 112).

The genus name Pagurus, Fabricius, 1793, has been
restored, and included under it are the four species recorded
in Part I. under Hupagurus. See Crustacea of Devon and
Cornwall, by Canon A. M. Norman and T. Scott, p. 8
(1906).

Leptognathia Lilljeborgia, Stebbing (p. 132).
This species has been removed to another genus, viz.,

Tanaissus, Norman and Scott. See Crustacea of Devon and
Cornwall, p. 34.

Genus Idothea, Fabricius (p. 135).

To the species recorded under Jdothea, add Idothea granu-
losa, Rathke, Beitrige zur Fauna Norwegens, p. 23. In March
1906 Mr William Evans obtained near Aberdour, Fife, two

1 Cf. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc., vol. ii.

Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea. 379

specimens of an /dothea that appear to me to belong to this
species.

After Porcellio pictus (p. 140), add

The genus Metoponorthus, Budde-Lund, 1879, and the species
M. pruinosus (Brandt). This Oniscoidan species has been
captured, (in April this year) at Slateford, near Edinburgh,
by Mr William Evans, and is recorded by him in the Annals
of Scottish Natural History for July 1906, p. 187.

Gammarus Dueben, Lillj. (p. 163).

‘To the localities for this species add: Brackish pools,
Luffness, near Aberlady, July 1906 (W. Evans).

Genus Jassa, Leach (p. 170).

The two species, Jassa falcata (Montagu) and Jassa
pusilla (G. O. Sars), have been removed to the new genus
Bruzeliella, Norman. See Crustacea of Devon and Cornwall,
Deo.

Corophium grossipes, Linné (p. 172).

This species, under the name of Cancer grossipes, was
described by Linné in 1767 in Systema Nature, vol. 1. part 2,
p- 1055; but as Pallas had already, in 1766, described under
the name of Oniscus volutator, what appears to be the same
form (ef. Miscellanea Zoologica, p. 102, pl. xiv. fig. 20), the
name of the species should be Corophiwm volutator (Pallas),
with C. grossipes as a Synonym.

Protella phasma, Montagu (p. 174).

Professor Mayer in his work on the “Caprellide of the
Bay of Naples,” Caprelliden des Golfes von Neapel, Nachtrag,
p. 19, refers this species to the new genus Pseudoprotella.

VOL. XVI. 2K

580 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Scapholeberis mucronata, O. F. Miller (p. 179).

To the localities given for this species add :—Side of river
Teith, at Callander, September 1906 (W. Evans).

Cyclops Leuckarti, Claus (Part II. p. 347).

While this part of the Catalogue was passing through the
press, Mr W. Evans sent me numerous specimens of a
Cyclops which he had recently captured at the Falls of Leny,
by holding a net so that some of the falling water would
pass through it. The identification of the specimens some-
what puzzled me at first, but on carefully dissecting one
or two of them, I found them to be the young of Cyclops
Leuckarti; they were in the penultimate or antipenultimate
stage; the segmentation of the body being slightly in-
complete, while the antennules were furnished with only
eleven articulations. Loch Voil, one of the two lochs from
which the species is recorded, is situated to the north of
Ben Ledi, and the river Balvaig carries its overflow water
to Loch Lubnaig; this, in turn, is the source of the river.
Leny. It is probable, therefore, that Cyclops Leuckarti occurs —
in this loch also, though I have not as yet found it there.
The loch and river were in flood when Mr Evans visited the
Falls, and the specimens were very likely carried from the
loch by the increased force of the current.

The normal habitat of Cyclops, as of most fresh-water
Entomostraca, is in the comparatively still waters of lochs,
ponds, and other similar places, and their presence in the
rapid currents of rivers is usually accidental. The occurrence
of this Cyclops in the Leny is, therefore, of interest from its
bearing on the question of distribution, and as showing
that the species is probably present in Loch Lubnaig
as well as in the other two lochs from which it has been
recorded.

Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea. 381

ADDITIONAL NoTE.—As the second part of this Catalogue
was ready to go to press, I received a copy of an important
work on the Amphipoda Gammaridea by the Rev. T. RB. Rh.
Stebbing, M.A., F.R.S., etc. This work, which has just been
published, forms the twenty-first of the series of Monographs
that are being issued under the general title Das Tverreich.
The Amphipoda are here divided into three legions, viz., the
Gammaridea, the Hyperiidea, and the Caprellidea, and it is
the first that forms the subject of Mr Stebbing’s volume.
The number of known species belonging to the Gammaridea
as given in it is 1333. Of these, 1076 are “ accepted species,”
while the remaining 257 are regarded as doubtful. Their
classification differs to some extent from that of the Monograph
by G. O. Sars. There are also a considerable number of
changes in the nomenclature, and I take the opportunity to
indicate the more important of these, so far as they concern
the species recorded in this Catalogue.

In the work referred to—Talitrus locusta (Pall.) becomes
T. saltator (Mont.), and Orchestia littorea (Mont.) O. gammarellus
(Pall.), while Hyale Nilssone (Rathke) takes the name of
H. Prevostii (M.-E.). The genus Callisoma, A. Costa, becomes
Scopelocheirus, Bate, and Orchomene humilis (A. Costa) becomes
O. Batei, O. Sars. Tryphosella, Bonnier, is replaced by Tryphosa,
Boeck, but Tryphosa nana (Kroy.) becomes Orchomenella nanus
(Kroéy.). Anonyx nugax (Phipps) becomes A. lagena, Kroy., and
the genus Z'metonyx, Stebb., replaces Hoplonyx, O. Sars. Phoxo-
cephalus Fultoni, T. Scott, becomes Paraphoxus Fultoni (T. 8.),
Harpinia neglecta, O. Sars, becomes H. antennaria, Meinart, and
Amphilochoides serratipes (Norm.) resumes the name of A. Boecka,
O. Sars. Metopa Bruzelii (Goes) becomes M. sinwata, O. Sars,
and IM. robusta is restored to its place in the same genus.
Synchelidium brevicarpum (B. & W.) becomes 8S. haplocheles
(Grube), and Halimedon parvimanus (B. & W.) Westwoodilla
cecula, Bate. The genus Paramphithoé, Bruz., becomes
Neopleustes, Stebb., and Paratylus, O. Sars, Vototropis, A. Costa;
N. uncinatus, O. Sars, is also made a synonym to WV. /falcatus
(Metzg.). Iphimedia minuta, O. Sars, becomes Panoplea minuta
(O. Sars). The genus Amathilla, Bate, is replaced by Gammarella,
Herbst, and Gammaropsis, Lillj., by Hurystheues, Bate, while
Gammaropsis nana, O. Sars, becomes E&. palmatus (Stebb. and
Rob.). Podoceropsis excavata (Bate) becomes P. nitida, Stimps.,
Jassa Herdmani (A. O. Walker) J. dentex (Czern.), and Jassa
pelagica, Leach, Parajassa pelagica (Leach). Lrichthonius abditus
(Templ.) becomes Z. brasiliensis (Dana), and Siphonoécetes Whiter
(Gosse) #. Colletti, Boeck.

382 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socrety.

The following two species are additions to my list, viz.,
Peltocoxa Marion, Catta, and Cressa minuta, Boeck, both being
recorded from the Forth. This raises the total to 796.

I need scarcely add that this important work, by one of
the foremost of living Carcinologists, is indispensable to those
engaged in the study of the Amphipoda.

Before closing I desire to take this opportunity to express
my indebtedness to Mr William Evans, F.R.S.E., President of
the Royal Physical Society, for the whole-hearted assistance
he has given me while this Catalogue was passing through
the press. I am also not forgetful of other friends who have
shown an interest in my efforts to make this contribution to
Scottish Natural History, unpretentious though it be, of some
use to students of the Crustacea of Scotland.

ERRATA IN First PART.

Page 99. Near bottom; for Homarus vulgarus read Homarus vulgaris,
and for Crangon vulgarus read Crangon vulyaris.

,, 103. Near top; for Paramphithoé monocupis real Paramphithoé
monocuspis.

,, 107. Near top; for ‘‘ Stalked-eyed Crustacea” read ‘‘Stalk-eyed
Crustacea.”’

,, 110. Near bottom; in the reference ‘‘ 1767, Cancer rostratus, Linn.,
Syst. Nat., ed. xii., vol. ii. p. 1014,” for vol. ii. p. 1014
read ‘‘vol. i. part li. p. 1045”; and in the subsequent
references to the twelfth edition of Systema Natwre, Linne,
for ‘‘ vol. ii.” read ‘‘ vol. i. part ii.”

,, 113. Near top; for Zurretella read Turritedlla.

,, 120. Near top; for Nyctiphanus read Nyctiphanes.

,, 122. Near bottom; in the reference ‘‘ Reise i Chr. oy,” etc., “‘oy”
should be ‘‘ og.”

», 125. In footnote; for ‘‘ Dr Welley” read ‘‘ Dr Willey.”

,, 187. In footnote; for Leptospidia read Leptaspidia.

., 144. Near bottom; Calisoma should be Cadlisoma in each of the
four lines where it occurs.

,, 165. Near top; the name Platessoides limandoides is a synonym of
Drepanopsetta platessoides. (See also p. 150.)

,, 165. Middle; for Chetrocrates read Chetrocratus in four places.

», 189. Near the middle; for ‘‘Sonntagshlatt.” read ‘‘Sonntagsblatt. ”

Part of the cost of publication of the foregoing Catalogue has
been defrayed by a Grant made to the Author by the Carnegie
Trust for the Universities of Scotland.

GENERA

Acantholeberis,
Acartia,
Acidostoma,
Acontiophorus,
Acroperus,
Aglaia,

Alona, .
Alonella,
Alonopsis,
Alteutha,
Amathilla,
Ameira,
Amenophia, .
Ampelisca, .
Amphiascus,

Amphilochoides,

Amphilochus,
Amphipoda,
Amphithoé, .
Anapagurus,
Anchorella, .
Anomalocera,
Anonyx,
Aora, .
Apherusa,
Aplostoma, .
Arcturella, .
Argilleecia, .
Argissa,
Argulus,
Armadillidium,
Ascidicola, .
Asellus,
Aspidiscus, .
Aspideecia, .
Astacilla,
Astacus,
Asterocheres,
Asterope,
Atelecyclus, .
Athelges,
Attheyella, .

Bairdia,
-Balanus,
Bathyporeia,

Index,

INDEX

AND PRINCIPAL LARGER

(Pages 108 to 190 are in Part I.)

PAGE
182
304
144
308
182
274
183
185
182
312
162
523
316
149
o21
151
150
142
169
115
313
303
146

Beatricella, .
Bodotria,
Bomolochus,
Bosmina,
Brachiella,
Brachyura, .
Bradya,
Bradyidius, .
Bradypontius,
Branchiura, .
Bruzeliella, .
Byblis, :
Bythocythere,
Bythotrephes,

Calanus,
Caligus,
Calliopius,
Callisoma,
Calocaris,
Camptocercus,
Campy laspis,
Cancer,
Candacia,
Candona,
Candonopsis,
Canthocamptus,
Canuella,
Caprella,
Carcinus,
Cecrops,
Centropages,
Cerapus,
Ceriodapbnia,
Charopinus, .
Cheirocratus,

Chondracanthus. .

Chydorus,
Cirripedia,
Cladocera,
Cletodes,
Collocheres, .
Conchoderma,
Copepoda,
Corophium, .
Coryceus,

DIVISIONS.

084 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.
PAGE
Corystes, 109 | Gastrosaccus,
Crangon, . 116 |; Gitana,
Cressa, 155, 382 | Gnathia, .
Cribropontius, 359 | Graptoleberis,
Cryptothir, . 142 | Guernea,
Cumella, 130
Cumopsis, . 126 Hemobaphes,
Cyclocypris, 268 Halicyclops,
Cyclopina, . 345 Halimedon, .
Cyclops, : 346, 380 Halithalestris,
Cylindropsyllus, . 3841 | Haploops,
Cylisticus, 140 | Harpacticus,
Cypria, 268 Harpinia,
Cypridopsis, 272 | Harrietella, .
Cyprinotus, . 271 Haustorius,
Cypris, 269 | Hemimysis,
Cyprois, . 274 | Herpetocypris,
Cythere, . 279 | Herrmannella,
Cytheridea, . . 284 | Hersiliodes,
Cytherideis, . 292 | Heteromysis,
Cytherois, 292 | Heteropsyllus,
Cytheropteron, 290 | Hippolyte,
Cytherura, 287 Hippomedon,
Holopedium,
Dactylopodella, 519 Hoplonyx,
Dactylopusia, 317 Hyale,
Danielssenia, 339 Hiyas,. .
Daphnia, 1/7 Hyperia,
Darwinula, 279 Hyperoche, .
Delavalia, 326
Dermatomyzon, 357 Idomene,
Dexamine, 161 Idomenella, .
Diaphanosoma, 176 | Idothea,
Diaptomus, . 300 | Ilyocryptus,
Diastylis, 128 Ilyocypris,
Doropygus, . 363 | Ilyodromus,
Drepanothrix, 181 Inachus,
Dulichia, 173 | Iphimedia, .
Dyspontius, 360 | Iphinoé,
Ischyrocerus,
Ebalia, 112 Isopoda,
Ectinosoma, 306 Itunella,
Enhydrosoma, 340
Epimeria, 158 | Jera,
Erichthonius, 171 Janira,
Erythrops, 122 | Jassa,
Eucythere, 285 Jeanella,
Eudorella, 127
Eudorellopsis, 7) 28 Krithe,
Eupagarus, . 112, 378
Eupelte, . 912 | Labidocera, .
Eurycercus, 182 | Lemargus (see Orthagor iscola).
Eurycope, 138 | Lamippe, : : }
Eurycypris, 270 | Lamprops,
Eurydice, 133 | Laophonte, .
Eurynome, 111 | Laophontodes,
Euryte, 351 Laphystius, .
Eurytemora, 301 Lathonura,
Euthemisto, 143 | Latona,
Evadne, 189 Leander,
Evansula, 342 | Ledigia,
Lembos,
Fultonia, 340 Lepas, é
Lepeophtheirus, .
Galathea, 114 Lepidepecreum,
Gammaropsis, 167 Leptastacus,
Gammarus, 162, 379 Leptocheirus,

134,

130,

170,

PAGE

122
152
138
185
162

370
351
156
314
150
310

148 -

336
147
124
271
304
355
122
325
118
145
177
146
144
111
142
142

319
319
378
181
278
272
111
158
126
169
379
340

136
136
379
065

285
303

364
127
333
336
159
181
176
119
185
166
375
368
147
342
167

om one

Leptodora,
Leptognathia,
Leptomysis,
Leptopontia,
Leptopsyllus,
Lernea,
Lerneenicus,
Leucon,
Leucothoé, .
Lichomolgus
Ligia, . :
Lilljeborgia,
Limnicythere,
Limnoria,
Lithodes,
Longipedia, .
Loxoconcha,

Macherina, .
Macromysis,
Macropodia,
Macropsis,
Macrothrix, .
Macrura,
Mera,
Maraenobiotus,
Megaluropus,
Megamphopus,
Melita, :
Melphidippella,
Mesochra,
Metopa,
Metopella,
Metoponorthus,
Metridia,
Microdeutopus,
Microprotopus,
Microsetella,
Microthalestris,
Misophria,
Modiolicola,
Monoculodes,
Monospilus,
Monstrilla,
Moraria,
Munida,
Munna,
Mysidopsis, .

Neesa,
Nannopus,
Nematosceli ,
Neobradya, .
Neomysis,
Nephrops,
Nicothoé,
Nika,
Nitocra,
Normanella,
Notodelphys,
Notodromas,
Nyctiphanes,

Oithona,
Oniscus,
Oralien,

Index.

305
354

188
365

115
137
123

134
340
MPA
306
125
116
361
17
331
337
362
274
120

345
139
371

Orchestia,
Orchomene, .
Orthagoriscola,
Ostracoda,

Pagurus,
Pandalina,
Pandalus,
Paracalanus,
Paracandona,
Paradoxostoma,
Paramesochra,
Paramphithoé,
Paramunna,
Parapontella,
Parartotrogus,
Paratanais,
Parathalestris,
Parathemisto,
Paratylus,
Pariambus,
Peltocoxa,
Peltogaster, .
Peratacantha,
Perioculodes,
Petalosarsia,
Philomedes, .
Philoscia,
Photis, .
Phoxocephalus,
Phryxus,
Phtisica,

Ph yllopodopsyllus,

Phyllothalestris,
Pinnotheres,
Pionocypris,
Platyarthrus,
Platychelipus,
Pleonexes,
Pleurogonium,
Pleuroxus,
Podoceropsis,
Podon, .
Polycope,
Polycopsis,
Polyphemus,
Pontocrates,
Pontocypris,
Pontopolites,
Porcellena,
Porcellidium,
Porcellio,
Portumnus, .
Portunus,
Potamocypris,
Protella,
Protomedeia,

Pseudanthessius, .

Pseudobradya,
Pseudocalanus,
Pseudocaligus,
Pseudocuma,
Pseudocyclopia,
Pseudocyclops,
Pseudocythere,
Pseudoprotella,

Pseudothalestris,

385

PAGE

143
145
369
267

378
119
119
298
277
293
344
157
137
303
360

314
143
160
174
382

186
156

295
140
168
148
141

386 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.
: be a y

PAGE
Pterinopsyllus, . : : . 346
Pteropsyllus, : : , . 343
Rhoda, 5 : ‘ ‘ . 120
Rhynchomyzon, .-. ‘ 2 Sod
Rhynchotalona, . : ‘ . 185
Rhynchothalestris, . ; . dbs
Robertsonia, : ; 4 » 3825
Sabelliphilus, 5 : ‘ . 355
Sacculina, . ; : : 2 ee
Salenskya, . : . : . 374
Seapholeberis, . 2 . 179, 380
Schistomvsis, : ; : i Hh2S
Schizopoda, . : ; : a) bg
Sclerochilus, : : r . 292
Scottocheres, ‘ ; : . 958
Scottomyzon, ; : 5 . 357
Sida, . : ‘ A : - iG
Simosa, ; : . : 5) 79
Siphonoécetes, . : : « 172
Siriella, : s : : » H2t
Socarnes, . : . ‘ . 144
Spheroma, . , : . 134
Spirontocaris, . J » 118
Stenhelia, . E ; : « 322
Stenothoe, . : ‘ aif EZ
Stephos, : ; : : 2) 299
Sthenometopa, . : ; . 154
Sympleustes, : a ; . 17
Sympoda, . : : : 125
Synchelidium, . - : « 156
Tachidius, . : : , s0(22e
Talitrus, . : ‘ : . 148

For some recent changes in nomenclature, see p. 381.

Tanais,
Tanaissus,
Tanaopsis,
Tegastes,
‘Temora,
Tetragoniceps,
Thalestris,
Thaumaleus,
Thersites,
Thersitina,
Thompsonula,
Thysanoessa,
Tigriopus,
Tisbe, .
Trebius,
Trichoniscus,
Triteta,
Tryphosa,
Tryphosella,
Tryphosites,
Typhlotanais,

Unciola,
Urothoé,

Vaunthompsonia,

Verruca,
Westwoodia,
Xestoleberis,

Zaus,
Zosime,

OCEEDINGS

Nn Saat ra ; ee vl ig
oe. OF THe 4. pute

i

PHYSICAL bore

le eee : ~ FOR THE eae

hoy

‘

PRO MOTION OF ZOOLOGY AND OTHER BRANCHE
NATURAL HISTORY. —

PnP

18 OF

“CONTENTS. © =

othe Ean or Forth. Area: ~ Supplementing: Notes.
BEN So Spent

Area. By.

PAGE

GH: OPARDANE & ERSKINE.
May 1907, aE A

*

PRICE OF THE “BROCK E DINGS

Vol. I, Part 1 (1854-56), out rint, ; ie ; 17/6
Do. Part 2 (1856-58), ow’ Mie 8)
Vol. IT, Part 1 (1858-61), owt of print, . O07 a,
Do. Part 2 (1861-62), cut of print, . 5 fp!
Vol. III. Part 1 (1862-63), owt of print, . pis. Fite
Do. Part 2 (1863-64), owt of print, . : x 5}, 20)
Do. Part 3 (1864-65), out of print, . i 2 om )
Do Part 4 (1865-66), out of print, : «Dee a
To the Fellows. To the Public.
Vol. LV. Part 1 (1874-75), out of print, . 3/6 5/
Do. Part 2 (1875-76), out of print, . 3/6 5/
Do. Part 3 (1876-78), out of print, . 5/ 7/6
Vol. V. Part 1 (1878-79), ; .~ B/G 5/
Do. Part 2 (1879-80), : «Tg 10/
Viol 2 Vale (1880-81), - 7/6 10/

Title and Index of this Vol. issued
with Part 1, Vol. VII.

Vol. VII. Part 1 (1881-82), : =) aay 5/

Do. Part 2 (1882-83), . 2/6 3/6
Vol. VIII. Part 1 (1883-84), owt of print, . 7/6 10/
Do. Part 2 (1884-85), : a Oa baie 10/
Vol. IX. Part 1 (1885-86), : foe) 12/6
Do. Part 2 (1886-87), ' 36 5/
Do. Part 3 (1887-88), ., 46 6)
Vol. X. Part 1 (1888-89), Be nyy 7/
Do. Part 2 (1889-90), OY 12/6
Vol. XI. Part 1 (1890-91), : ee) 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1891-92), : bay 3) 6/6
Vol. XII. Part 1 (1892-93), CC ane 6/6 t
Do. Part 2 (1893-94), ; . 12/6 15/
Vol. XIII. Part 1 (1894-95), 4 = BAG 6/
Do. Part 2 (1895-96), : 2 5/ 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1896-97), ee | 7/6
Vol. XIV. Part 1 (1897-98), aoe 5 6/6
Do. Part 2 (1898-99), ere 6/6
Do. Part 3 (1899-1900), ee 5/
Do, Part 4(1900-1901), Bea 5

Price of the ‘* Pr seine? continued on page 3 of Cover.

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 387

XXIV. The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area.
Supplementary Notes. By Witiiam Evans, F.R.S.E.

(Read 27th November 1905.)

In 1891 I submitted to the Royal Physical Society an
account of the Mammalian Fauna of this district,! which,
with some slight alterations and additions, was published
in book form in 1892. During the thirteen years that
have since elapsed, two species (the Whiskered Bat and
Risso’s Grampus) not included in my former list, and one
(the Harp Seal) then only doubtfully included, have been
recorded. Additional occurrences of a few of the rarer
residents and visitors, and further observations on some of
the common species, have also been noted. To bring these
records and notes together is the purpose of the present
communication. ;

The number of species of mammals now positively known
to have occurred within the Forth area in the course of
the last hundred years is fifty. There is still the possibility
of one or two additions—an evasive bat, or a wandering
seal or cetacean—but at best they can be but few. Among
the recently described races or sub-species of certain mice
and voles, the yellow-breasted form of the Long-tailed Field-
Mouse (Mus sylvaticus wintont) seems the only one at all
likely to be met with here.

Much attention has lately been given to the critical study,
and the distribution of British Mammals, with the result
that there has been a corresponding growth of literature.
On the general subject two books—Handbook of British
Mammals, by Lydekker (1895), and British Mammals, by
Sir Harry Johnston (1903)—have been published, and Mr J.
G. Millais’s monumental 3-vol. work on British Mammals
is in course of publication. In the case of the two first-
named, apparently not much effort was made to give the
Scottish distribution down to date: it is otherwise,
however, with the last-named work; and we may expect

1 Proceedings, Vol, XI. pp. 85-171.
VOL. XVI. 2 1

388 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

equal attention to distribution in the new edition of
Bell’s British Quadrupeds, on which Captain Barrett-
Hamilton is engaged. Interest in the study of Scottish
Mammals has risen high of late, with very gratifying
results.

Changes of nomenclature, like many other unpleasant
things, are unfortunately always with us. Some necessary
ones are adopted in this Supplement.*

Lonc-EARED Bat (Plecotus auritus (L.) ).

On 3rd February 1897 a Bat of this species was found
dead near some rocks on the south side of Dumglow, Cleish
Hills, Kinross-shire, and sent to me by a friend for identifi-
cation. The interest attaching to the record les in the
out-of-the-way and hilly nature of the locality.

[NATTERER’S Bat (Vespertilio natterert, Kuhl).]

Referring to what I wrote in 1891 (Mammalan Fauna,
p. 22) regarding the supposed. occurrence of this Bat in
Dalkeith Park, a roughly-preserved specimen has since been
discovered among some objects of natural history left by
the late Robert Gray. Unfortunately no label or other
clue to its origin is associated with it. Although there
is consequently no proof of its being one of the Dalkeith
Bats, I think it highly likely that it is (see my article in
Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1901, pp. 129-131).

I would again make an appeal for Bats from well-wooded
localities in this area, with a view to the removal of the
“ square brackets” from this species.

WHISKERED Bat (Vespertilro mystacinus, Leis).).

A welcome addition to my list was an example of this
Bat (received in the flesh trom Mr G. Pow) which was
knocked down by a fisher-boy on the links about a mile
east of Dunbar on 20th March 1893, as recorded in my
note sent at the time to the Annals of Scottish Natural

1 See papers by Oldfield Thomas in Zoologist, 1895 and 1898, and by
F. W. True, Proc. U.S. National Musewm, vol. xxi. (1898) pp. 617-635.

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 389

History (1893, p. 146). This is the East Lothian record
mentioned in vol. i. of Mr Millais’s book; and it is but
the second occurrence of the species in Scotland.

HEDGEHOG (Hrinaceus ewropeus (L.) ).

To the early records north of the Forth given in my first
paper, the following from the New Statistical Account
of the Parish of Alloa, 1846, should perhaps be added :—
“Not known in the parish when the Old Statistical Account
was written. It is now found in the woods” (vol. viil.,
Clackmannanshire, p. 9).

As evidence of the continued abundance of this animal
in the neighbourhood of Edinburgh, I may mention that
close on a hundred were killed on the estate of Mortonhall
during 1903. |

A few years ago Captain Barrett-Hamilton proposed to
separate the British Hedgehog from Continental ones,
under the sub-specific name of Hrinaceus europeus
occidentalis, taking as the type a specimen in the British
Museum, from Haddingtonshire. The character he relied
upon—a slight cranial difference—in separating British
from typical (Scandinavian) LZ. ewropeus, is, Dr Lonneberg
states, not constant, and is not borne out by the examination
of a series of Swedish specimens. WL. e@. occidentalis was
therefore apparently premature, as Captain Barrett-Hamilton
has himself admitted (see Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1900 and
1901). Our Hedgehogs are much infested by a species of
flea, Pulex erinacet, Bouché.'

LESSER SHREW (Sorex minutus (L.) ).

The Lesser Shrew is widely distributed in the Forth area,
and common, more especially, it seems to me, in the moor-
land districts. This conclusion is based on observations
extending over a period of fully fifteen years. Since the
publication of my book, I have met with examples, dead or
alive, on a good many occasions, among them being the

1 For records of this and other Pulicide from Forth Mammals and
Birds, see my notes in Ann, Scot, Nat, Hist., 1904 and 1906,

390 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

following, which I find entered in my note-book :—One found
dead among heather, on south side of Caerketton, Pentland
Hills, 23rd November 1892; one lying on path, Braid Burn,
Edinburgh, 1st April 1896; two watched for a considerable
time, chasing each other about a low-growing juniper bush
on Swanston Hill, Pentlands, 26th May 1898; one dead on
roadside, Greenbank, Morningside, 5th February 1899.
When digging out a bee’s nest on a bank at Bavelaw Moss,
Balerno, in August 1903, I came upon a Lesser Shrew hiding
in an adjoining hole.

WATER SHREW (Crossopus fodiens (Pall.) ).

On 24th April 1893, my son and I caught a Water Shrew
alive in a flooded quarry between Winchburgh and
Hopetoun. Though every care was taken of it, it died
after thirty-one days’ confinement. On 6th July 1894,
several were seen by me in Bilston Burn, near Seafield,
Roslin. In June 1899, the Braid Burn colony was met
with five or six hundred yards farther down than where I
used previously to see them: this year, however, they have
reappeared in the old haunt. Mr Maillais possesses a
specimen of the dark-bellied variety, from a ditch at Loch
Leven (Mammals of Great Britain and Ireland, vol. 1. p. 157).

The Water Shrew has been noted on the Carron, Stirling-
shire, by Mr Harvie-Brown.

Mo.LeE (Talpa europea, L.).

39

The excavation of many more “fortresses” has amply
confirmed my original observations and _ illustration
(Mammalian Fauna, etc., 1892, p. 32), showing that the
arrangement of the galleries and other tunnels are very far
from being symmetrical or uniform in plan. The subject has
also recently been investigated by Mr Lionel Adams (Memoirs
and Proceedings Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., xlvii., 1903),
whose excellent observations! and figures are quoted by
Sir H. Johnston and Mr Millais in their respective books.

1 Some further observations on the Mole by Mr Adams will be found in
the said Memoirs for 1906.

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 391

In January 1897, among an unusual number of large
“fortresses” in a mossy meadow near Innerleithen, I
examined one which was fully 8 feet in diameter and about
24 feet in height.

The Moles inhabiting the upland districts look to me on
the average rather larger than those in the low country. A
specimen with a white head, the rest of the body being of
the ordinary colour, was caught in October 1880 on Dysart
estate, and I have recently seen a cream-coloured one from
Luffness Links.

Dr O. C. Bradley having expressed a wish for Mole
embryos at all stages of development, I obtained for him,
from mole-catchers in this neighbourhood, some dozens
of female Moles during the spring and early summer
of 1904. The first embryos (very small) were got from
a Mole trapped on 7th April, a fortnight after the exam-
ination of specimens began, and in the course of the next
few days a good many more were secured. By the end
of the month both well-developed and small ones were
occurring. The last Moles examined were caught on 12th
May, and all yielded well-grown embryos. Four naked
young, about 24 inches long, and probably about a week old,
were found in a nest near the Pentlands on 24th May;
another nest containing young a third larger was got at
same time. Of the twenty-one pregnant females obtained,

1 contained 2 embryos.

) 2) 5) 39
EL » a ey
4 ? 5 »D]

This gives an average of 3°86, or nearly 4 per litter.
Adams, in his paper above referred to, gives the average as
“rather more than 34.” Cases of 6 and even 7 embryos have
been reported to me by mole-catchers, but I cannot vouch
for them myself. I am also told that pregnant Moles are
occasionally trapped about harvest time.

No animal is more infested by vermin than the Mole;
judged from our standpoint, it must lead a decidedly un-
comfortable life. Every newly caught Mole that I have
examined has harboured in its sleek coat some, usually many,

392 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

examples of the little flea, Zyphlopsylla gracilis, Taschb., and
I have seen baby Moles spotted all over with their bites; but
if you would fully understand what the Mole has to endure
in this way, dig up his snug grassy or mossy nest and shake
it over a sheet of white paper. Besides scores of the said
T. gracilis you will probably find several giant fleas,
Hystrichopsylla talpe, Curt., truly a formidable looking
Pulicid. Numbers of the Mites Gamasus terribilis and
Hemogamasus hirsutus will likewise be seen running to
and fro, and the more minute, and consequently less easily
detected Glycyphagus platygaster and G. cramer will most
likely also be there. Several kinds of beetles, too, have a
way of taking up their abode in Moles’ nests.

WILp Cat (Felis catus, L.).

In October 1892 the late Thomas Gordon, banker,
Edinburgh, informed me that his father, who lived at
Temple, shot a Wild Cat in Arniston Glen in 1830, and
that its stuffed skin remained in the family “till a few years
ago,” when it was destroyed. Like so many other so-called
Wild Cats, it possibly was only a domestic cat run wild, but
Mr Gordon would not hear of this suggestion. (See my note
in Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1897, p. 122.)

Fox (Canis vulpes, 1.).

On 8th November 1900 I saw a Fox cross the road close
to the tramway terminus, Morningside, Edinburgh, and
leisurely proceed westwards through the fields at Greenbank.
He evidently had come from the Braid Hills, and was
making his way to Craiglockhart.

OrrTER (Lutra lutra (L.) ).

Besides the Tyne and other rivers which they habitually
frequent, Otters turn up from time to time in unexpected
places. In 1867 a writer using the pseudonym “Umbra,” stated
that he once encountered a “sea-otter” in the cave at the
Bass Rock (Hotch Pot, 2nd ed., p. 190). In March: 1894
a large male Otter, weighing about 22 lbs., which I afterwards

The Mammals of the Hdinburgh or Forth Area. 393

examined, was shot beside a ditch in a plantation at Gosford,
East Lothian. In 1902 one frequented Harper-rig reservoir,
and it, or another, was seen at Cockburn, near Balerno, about
the same time. A young one, a month old, was captured
alive at Dunipace, Stirlingshire, on 1st April 1904 (Harvie-
Brown). While staying at Aberfoyle in April 1902, I found
a pair of Otters frequenting a deep lochan near the village,
and had several excellent opportunities of studying their
habits. About sunset they would appear in the water and
engage in wild play, rolling and splashing together for a
quarter of an hour on end. On one occasion, having reached
unobserved a spot at which they were accustomed to land, I
stood perfectly still, and waited. Presently one of them was
seen approaching rapidly, swimming on the surface and
beneath it alternately. A few seconds more and it shot on
to the margin of the pond within a couple of yards of my
feet, and commenced fuffing and spitting like an enraged cat.
Suddenly, in somersault fashion, it plunged into the water,
reappearing about a dozen yards off. Disappearing again,
it landed in front of me a second time, repeated the scolding,
and took another ‘‘header” backwards. Having gone
through this performance a third time, it went off to another
part of the lochan, and I lost sight of it in the growing
darkness. |

BADGER (MMeles meles (L.)).

The oldest local record of this animal I have met with is
contained in Sibbald’s History of Fife and Kinross, published
in 1710. It is as follows:—“In Benartie are foxes and
badgers, which the heritors hunt at certain times.” A
number of Fifeshire records will be found in Mr Harvie-
Brown’s paper on the Badger in the Zoologist for 1882.

Some years ago I saw in the Chambers Institute, Peebles,
two specimens, obtained on Portmore estate in 1859. As
regards the animal in East Lothian, I have little to add to
what I wrote in my first paper. In 1893 I was shown a
stuffed specimen, which had been killed at Deuchrie in the
Lammermoors about 1875, and I was assured they still
existed on that farm. At Presmennan, some ten years ago,

394 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

I saw one which was killed there about 1885, and was told
another had been obtained in 1891. They were also said to
be still about Elmscleugh at that time.

In May 1895 a Badger was dug out of an earth on the
south side of the Pentlands near Boghall, but there is little
doubt it was an animal which escaped a short time before
from confinement at Craiglockhart (see my note in Ann. Scot.
Nat. Hist., 1895, p. 249).

Offshoots from the colony introduced into Dalmeny Park
in 1889 have reached, and for a time, at least, established
themselves at Corstorphine Hill to the east and Hopetoun
woods to the west. I examined a specimen from the
former locality in August 1903, and three—all females, the
largest weighing only 174 lbs—from the latter in March
and April 1904. A pair from Dalmeny were turned down
on Rosebery estate in 1900 (B. Campbell). The native stock
among the hills at the head of the Forth valley still holds
out in afew places. Two captured in 1898 and 1901 respec-
tively, in the Balquhidder district, have come under my
notice. In April 1897, one was got near Dunipace, Stirling-
shire (Harvie-Brown).

Much has been written recently in reference to the period
of gestation in the case of the Badger, but uncertainty still
surrounds the question (cf the Zoologist for 1903 and 1904,
where some evidence for a period of eight months is put
forward!). About all we know is that the young are born
in spring; evidence of this has, on several occasions, come
under my own observation. An interesting little book on
the Badger, by Sir Alfred Pease, was published in 1898.
The author has much to say in the animal’s favour. It is
not, however, so near the vanishing point in Scotland as he
supposed.

PoLecAT (Mustela putorws, L.).

There is an old undated specimen, labelled Polmaise,
Stirlingshire, preserved in the Kelvingrove Museum, Glasgow.
In the New Statistical Account of the parish of St Ninian’s,

1 Millais thinks between five and six months more probable (Mammals
of Great Britain and Ireland, vol. ii., 1906).

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 395

Stirlingshire, 1841, we are told that “the foumart occasion-
ally makes its appearance in the poultry yard, and often
commits great ravages among domestic fowls.” It is also
mentioned in the same work among the animals found in the
parishes of Stirling and Gargunnock. Another old and
undated specimen, from Haystoun, near Peebles, may be
seen at the Chambers Institute in that town.

In May 1894, when staying at Callander, I was assured
that a Polecat had been seen the previous month running
into a cairn on a hill west of Ben Ledi, but I am not aware
of any having been killed there in recent years.

WEASEL (Mustela vulgaris, Erxl.").

In September 1905, a pure white Weasel was killed near
Dunbar, and later in the same year another was got near North
Berwick. A similar specimen, trapped in Fifeshire in the
winter of 1900-1901, was reported in The Field of 8th February
1902. The Dunbar one, which I saw, was a true albino. As
regards the size of the female Weasel, one sent to me from
Dunfermline in January 1905 was only 62 inches in Jength
(excluding tail), and weighed exactly 2 ounces. On 6th May
1905 a nest of well-grown young Weasels was found in a wall
near West Linton (R. 8. Anderson in /zt.). About midsummer
I have seen the young following their mother in quest of
prey—Dalkeith Park, June 1892; Fala Moor, 2 and four
young, July 1897.

StoaT (Mustela erminea, L.).

In this part of the country, the completeness of the change
to the white dress of winter does not seem to depend on the
severity of the season. During the open winter of 1903-
1904, for instance, I examined over a dozen white, or nearly
white, Stoats killed in this neighbourhood. Two from the
Pentlands in January were entirely white, as were also
several others from other localities during the same month.
By the end of February and opening days of March the
change to summer dress was beginning to set in.

~ 1 Perhaps, with Thomas, we should follow the Scandinavian naturalists
and use the specific name, nivalis, L., for the Weasel (cf. Zoologist, 1895).

396 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Socvety.

GREENLAND OR Harp SEAL (Phoca grenlandica, Fabr.).

It is gratifying to be able to remove the square brackets
from this species. During the winter of 1902-1903 a
distinct southern movement of this and other boreal seals
took place, some of the animals finding their way to the east
coast of Scotland. On 7th March 1903, a fine Harp Seal, a
male, 6 feet in length, was captured alive on a “slag” bank at
Grangemouth, in the upper estuary of the Forth, and sent to
the Zoological Gardens, Glasgow, where it died on 9th April.
It was presented to the Kelvingrove Museum, where its
stuffed skin may now be seen (see record by Mr J.
MacNaught Campbell, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1903, p. 243).

According to Mr Millais (Mammals of Gt. Brit. and Trel.,
vol. 1, 1904, p. 347) another (smaller and a female) was
secured a few days later close to the same place, and sent to
the Zoological Gardens, London; but there appears to have
been some doubt as to the species, for Mr Pocock informs
me it was variously identified at the Gardens as “ Common,”
“Grey,” and “Harp.”+ Allusion may be made to the fact
that a Harp Seal, now in the Perth Museum, was caught in
Invergowrie Bay, Firth of Tay, on 6th September 1895
(Proc. Perthsh. Soc. Nat. Sci., vol. ii. p. xciv.).

The figure is from a sketch of the Grangemouth specimen
mentioned above.

1 Since the above was written I have communicated with Mr Millais, who
tells me he twice saw this seal alive at the Zoological Gardens, and feels
nearly certain it was an immature Harp Seal.

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 397

SQUIRREL (Sciurus vulgaris, L.).

Bell and MacGillivray, in their respective “Histories” of
British Quadrupeds, state that the young of this species are
born “in June” or “about midsummer,’ and Lydekker and
Johnston simply repeat the statement, as has also been done
by J. L. Bonhote in the Zoologist for 1901. In point of
fact, however, the Squirrel is quite as early a breeder as any
of our other quadrupeds, and the usual time for the birth of
the young is in spring, from March to May, the majority
being produced in April. At. the time of writing my former
paper (1891) I held this opinion, and mentioned three
instances within my knowledge of young in April in the
south of Scotland. Messrs Blagg and Harting, in the Zoologist
for 1891 (p. 101), gave several instances of young having
been found in the nest in March and Aprilin England, and

in the same magazine for 1892 (p. 403) I repeated my ex-
perience. Since then I have obtained further evidence, all
going to prove that the usual time for production of the
young in Scotland, as in England, is that stated above,
namely, in spring, and not about midsummer, as given in the
works above mentioned! Litters as late as July or even
August, however, occasionally occur. The further records
referred to are as follows :— 7 )

In the Naturalist for June 1854, Mr J. J. Dalgleish
recorded finding a Squirrel’s nest with two young ones
in it on 20th March of that year, at West Grange, near
Alloa.

Mr H. Raeburn tells me that on or about 30th
March 1879 he found a nest containing young near
St Andrews.

On 6th April 1893, a “half-grown” Squirrel was caught
on the ground in Dalmeny Park by Mr C. Campbell.

1 Since this paper was written, Vol. II. of Millais’s Mammals of Great
Britain and Ireland has been issued. It contains his article on the Squirrel,
and gives as the ordinary date for birth of the young, 10th March to
20th April.

398 | Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

On 22nd May 1899, another young Squirrel was got in
Dalmeny Park. “The old one was carrying it in its mouth,
and dropped it on the sudden approach of a cyclist”
(C. Campbell zm Jat.).

On 11th May 1901, my son found a two-thirds grown one
on the ground in a plantation at Ravelrig, near Balerno. It
was apparently just out of the nest, and was scarcely able to
climb when placed on the stem of a tree, where it was photo-
eraphed.

On 23rd April 1903, a nest, which I inspected, in a hole in
a tree at Dreghorn, near Edinburgh, contained young. Little
as the nest was interfered with, the old Squirrel removed her
family to some other place of retreat.

Mr J. B. Dobbie told me recently that he saw a nest of
young Squirrels at Invertrossachs, in the month of May, a
few years ago.

On 14th April 1904, Mr J. Fairbairn found a nest in a
fir tree in a wood at Bavelaw, near Balerno, and having
ascertained, by inserting his finger, that there were young in
it, he kindly informed me of the fact. On 21st April I
climbed to this nest, and was pleased to find therein three
little Squirrels, apparently about ten days old, and still blind.
They seemed to be rather less than 34 inches in length,
exclusive of tail, which might be fully 24 inches, and showed
no tendency to curl upwards over the back. They were
covered on the upper surface with very short, silky hair of a
rich chestnut or rufous colour; skin on upper parts of legs
and about the eyes bluish; under-surface yellowish-white;
tail straight, and clothed with short, blackish hairs. When
touched in the nest, they snorted and tried to scratch the
hand, and squeaked when lifted out. Wishing to photograph
the youngsters, I went back to the nest next morning, only
to find, however, that Mrs Squirrel had removed them!
While I was at the nest the previous day, she gave me
a good scolding from a distance of not more than 4 or
5 feet.

On 4th May 1904, another nest was discovered in a spruce
tree at Dreghorn. It contained three young ones, naked and
blind, and not more than three or four days old. One of

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 399

them was taken for me, and is figured here. Its length was
75 mm., excluding the tail, which measured 40 mm.; colour,
dark bluish-grey. Two days later, when I went to see the
nest, the others had been removed as usual.

A female Squirrel shot at Polmaise, Stirlingshire, on
18th February 1905, was examined by Dr Bradley, to whom
I handed it, and found to contain very small embryos.

In August 1894 Mr Hugh Miller, as he informed me in
October following, saw a Squirrel carrying its young from
the nest in the woods at Loch Vennachar.

An excellent article on the seasonal changes of fur in the
common Squirrel, by Mr Oldfield Thomas, was published in

the Zoologist for November 1896. There are, according to
this account, two annual changes of fur so far as the body
and limbs are concerned, but the long hairs of the brush of
the tail are only changed once, namely, in the autumn. In
March 1904 I examined several Squirrels from this district,
and found them to agree very well with Thomas’s description
of Dorset specimens obtained in January and February. I
have several notes of having seen examples with cream-
coloured, i.e, very bleached, tails in August, and of others
with nearly black, 2.¢., freshly-clad, tails in October.

I have always been very reluctant to believe in the stories
of Squirrels killing and devouring birds, but I fear I must
admit that the charge, in so far as it relates to young birds

400 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

in the nest, is occasionally true. In the Proceedings of this
Society (Vol. IL. p. 361, under date 1862), Durham Weir
gave two instances of Squirrels devouring young birds—one
having been shot at Wallhouse, Linlithgowshire, with a
young bird in its claws; and a few years ago Mr C. Campbell
informed me that one had destroyed a brood of young Fly-
catchers in Dalmeny Park. In May 1899, near Comrie, I
disturbed a Squirrel on the ground, when it ascended a tree
in which a pair of Starlings were nesting. The fierce manner
in which the birds attacked it and drove it off the tree,
showed that they had a strong aversion to its presence in the
vicinity of their nest.

That Squirrels eat fungi is well known to many. I have
myself on a good many occasions watched them so engaged.
In Dalkeith Park last September, observing a Squirrel on
the ground in an open, grassy space where agarics were
plentiful, I walked towards it, when it made off and ascended
a tree, carrying one of these fungi in its mouth.

I have several times seen a Squirrel, when hotly pursued
in a wood where the trees were not high, come to the ground
and take refuge in a rabbit-hole; and a few years ago I
dug out and captured one which did so in a wood on the
Pentlands.

Clean and trim as it appears to be, the Squirrel,
like the Hedgehog and the Mole, is greatly infested
by a flea, the species in this instance being Ceratophyllus
sciurorum, Bouché, which is invariably present, and usually
in abundance, both in the nests and on the animals them-
selves.

Along with the statement in Sibbald’s Scotia Illustrata,
referred to in my former paper, regarding the presence of
the Squirrel in the south of Scotland in the seventeenth
century, should be read another a few pages farther on in
the same work, namely, in the Appendix to the Historia
Animalium in Scotid (p. 37), where he mentions, on the
authority of Dr Archibald, the occurrence of the animal in
the south and west of Scotland. (C/, in this connection,
Harvie-Brown’s “ History of the Squirrel in Great Britain,”
Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., VI. p. 40).

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 401

BANK VOLE (Lvotomys glareolus, Schreb.).

As the localities for this Vole given in my former paper
are mainly in the vicinity of Edinburgh, the following further
localities, in which I have since identified it in other parts of
the area, may here be mentioned :—Tynefield, near Dunbar,
common about the garden in August and September 1894
(a typical example of the Field Vole, Microtus agrestis, was
obtained there at same time); Dirleton station, a colony on
the railway embankment, January 1905; Pendreich, near
Bridge of Allan, several trapped, December 1893; Cuiross,
a few, April 1901—on the 26th one was observed climbing
along the slender branches of a wild rose, and nibbling the
young leaves. Traps set in the neighbourhood of Aberfoyle
in May 1896 yielded only A. agrestis! +

Buack Rat (Mus rattus, L.).

Mr J. G. Millais has quite recently described, in the
Zoologist (June 1905, p. 205), a new sub-species of this
animal, under the name of Mus rattus ater, or Black
Alexandrine Rat, and Mr. Eagle Clarke informs me that
the Black Rats obtained by him in 1890 from a Leith
steamer belong to this form and not to the “Old English”
Black Rat, which Miullais designates Mus rattus rattus.
Black Rats occurring in our seaports are likely to be
M. r. ater, but any obtained should be carefully identified.

MountTaIn Hare (Lepus timidus, L.=L. variabilis, Pall.).

Not long after the publication of my Mammalian Fauna
of this district, it came to my knowledge that there were
Blue Hares on the Lammermoor Hills, and on 12th September
1903 I had the pleasure of coming upon one at the head of
Faseny Water, about four miles south-east of Gifford, and
well within the county of Haddington. On the Moorfoots I
met with three, all practically still in the white dress of
winter, near the head of Moorfoot Water, on 30th March

1 In an interesting letter, dated April 1894, the late James Bennie told me
_ that in the arctic plant-bed of the ancient Corstorphine lake he had found a

jaw-bone, with the teeth in it, which Mr EK. T. Newton had identified as that
of a Lemming.

402 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

1904. One of them was very loath to quit some peat hags
in which lay patches of snow, and several times it allowed
me to approach within 5 or 6 yards, present my camera, and
expose a plate. On the range of hills between Loch Ard and
the Trossachs, I found this species common in April 1896,
as also on Stuc-a-Chroin in September this year.

Note.—An albino Common Hare (Lepus ewropeus, Pall.),
shot near Lauder in January 1862, was exhibited at a meeting
of this Society the following month (Proceedings, II. p. 363).
I may here also mention that in August 1904 I caught
a rabbit on the Isle of May—where at one time a well-
marked variety existed—in no way different from the ordinary
wild ones of the mainland.

Rep DrEr (Cervus elaphus, L.).

While staying at Aberfoyle in May 1896, I saw several
Red Deer on the Duchray Castle shootings. Monochyle
Glen, where I saw a herd of about forty in September 1902,
and the hills about Am Binnein, are now the home of a fair
number of Red Deer, the first settlers having come, it is
said, from the Black Mount. When Smeaton Lake, in East
Lothian, was being cleaned out between 1828 and 1830,
remains of both Red and Roe Deer were found in the moss
of the pond, as narrated by Sir Archibald Buchan-Hepburn
in his address to the Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club in
October 1902; and a few years ago, antlers and other
remains of Red Deer were found in the superficial deposits
of Hailes Quarry, near Edinburgh, as described by Dr Hepburn
and Mr Simpson at a meeting of the Edinburgh Geological
Society in March 1899.1 Mr G. Scott, Oxgangs, tells me
Red Deer remains were got many years ago where the
Craiglockhart skating-ponds now are.

Roz Deer (Capreolus caproea, Gray).
Roe Deer still inhabit the woods about Arniston and

1 Bones of the Reindeer (Rangifer tarandus) and a frontal bone with horn
cores of Bos primigenius, found under 6 feet of peat when a lake at Dundas
Castle, Linlithgowshire, was being enlarged, were exhibited by Dr R. H.
Traquair at a meeting of the Royal Society of Edinburgh on 2nd May 1904,

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area, 403

Penicuik, and in September 1903 I startled one in Saltoun
Wood, East Lothian. In June 1901, and again on 6th May
1905, I met with them in Blairadam woods, near Kinross—
on the latter occasion, no less than twelve were in view at
one time. In the course of the last few years I have seen
Roe in the woods at Duchray near Aberfoyle, at Balquhidder,
and at Callander. ‘“ Roe-deer,” says the writer of the New
Statistical Account of Gargunnock, 1841, “breed in great
numbers in the glen of Boquhan,” Stirlingshire. My
brother-in-law, the late David Deuchar, possessed the
antlers of a Roe which was shot on his father’s ground at
Morningside, Edinburgh, about 1844.

Common Rorqual (Balenoptera physalus (L.)
= 8. musculus, Auct.).

On 19th February 1903, a Common Rorqual or Razorback
—a female about 46 feet in length—got stranded on the
beach at Kirkcaldy, where it was attacked and killed by
some men armed with a _ hedgebill. I had several
opportunities of examining this animal, and an illustrated
description of it, which I prepared, was published in the
Annals Scot. Nat. Hist., 1904, pp. 71-74. It was sold by
- the Board of Trade for the small sum of £2. No example
of this whale had been identified in the Firth of Forth
since 1808.

Lesser Rorquat (Balenoptera acuto-rostrata, Lacép.).

The carcase of a Lesser Rorqual was washed ashore to
the east of Barnes-ness Lighthouse, near Dunbar, on 29th
September last (1905). It was a female, and measured
about 27 feet in length. I went to see it on 2nd October,
and found it in a very dilapidated condition; from its
appearance I should say it had been dead for several weeks,
if not months. The baleen was of a creamy white colour
throughout (specimen exhibited).

A list of occurrences of this species of whale in Scottish
waters prior to 1892 will be found in a paper by Sir William
VOL. XVI. 2M

404 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Turner, published in the Proceedings of the Royal Society
of Edinburgh, vol. xix. pp. 36-75. The Granton Quarry
specimen (Jan. 1888) is there very fully described.

BEAKED WHALE (Hyperoddon rostratus (Chemn.) ).

Examples of the Beaked Whale continue to be taken
in the estuary of the Forth from time to time. Since
the date of my first paper (1892) I have noted the
following :—

Male, stranded at Grangemouth, March 1894.

One, about 25 feet long, captured near Bo’ness, October
1895; examined by J. Simpson (Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1896,
Ds 2).

Young female, about 6 feet long, found dead on shore near
Cockburnspath, November 1895.

One, weighing 64 cwts, caught in salmon-net near
Stirling, 13th July 1897.

Two, 10 and 11 feet in length respectively, stranded near
Culross, 24th July 1898.

One, about 20 feet long, captured on the south side of
the Forth near Grangemouth, 14th August 1905.

SOWERBY’S WHALE (IMesoplodon bidens (Sowerby) ).

The second example of Sowerby’s Whale for the Firth of
Forth came ashore at Morrison’s Haven, Haddingtonshire,
in the latter part of April 1895, and its buried remains
were exhumed and examined in June following by the
late James Simpson—see his note in Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist.,
1895, p. 250. The specimen was a male, probably about
15 feet in length.

Risso’s GRAMPUS (Grampus griseus (G. Cuv.) ).

An example of this rare cetacean—10 feet in length,
and the first obtained in the Forth estuary—was captured
near Kincardine-on-Forth on 15th October 1904, and
sent to the Kelvingrove Museum, Glasgow, as reported
in the Glasgow Herald of 28th October. The newspaper

The Mammals of the Edinburgh or Forth Area. 405

report was kindly confirmed by Mr MacNaught Campbell
in a letter to me. I was at Kincardine a few days after
the capture of the animal, and was informed that it had
been observed passing up and down the channel with the
tide almost daily for over a fortnight. JI have since seen
the specimen ( @ ) in the taxidermist’s hands in Glasgow.

A skull and attached neck-vertebre of this species,
taken up in a trawl about 16 miles east of the Isle of May
in August 1897, were sent to the Edinburgh Museum, as
recorded by Dr Traquair in the Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist.,
1899, p. 197.

XXV. The Myriapods (Centipedes and Millipedes) of the
Forth Area. By Witutam Evans, F.R.S.E.

(Read 26th February 1906.)

The Centipedes and Millipedes, or, as they are collectively
called, the Myriapods, are still among the “neglected”
groups, so far as the British Islands are concerned. This
neglect was remarked upon by Newport long ago, and after
the lapse of more than sixty years it is strange to think
that a book on the British species has yet to be written.
No one, probably, has studied them more thoroughly than
Mr R. I. Pocock, and I have been hoping for some years
past to see a full account, or at least a synopsis, of the
known British species from his pen. Judged by the ordinary
standards, Myriapods are certainly not attractive creatures ;
yet to the zoologist few groups are of greater interest.
Popular prejudice, and the fact that they are not showy
objects for display in a cabinet are doubtless mainly respon-
sible for their neglect by collectors; but the want of an
English treatise for their identification must have deterred
not a few field-naturalists with more advanced ideas from
working at them. Consequently local lists of them are
exceedingly few and incomplete, and very little is known
from actual observation regarding their distribution in this
country.

The number of known British Centipedes and Millipedes

406 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

is, according to Mr Pocock, about 50, but all of them
have not yet been put on record in print. In his recent
list for Hampshire (14) only 17 are recorded. Mr F. G.
Sinclair, in a somewhat disappointing article on the
Myriapoda of Cambridgeshire (15), gives the names of
about 30 British species, but is able to record only 9 of
them from the county. Pocock, Carpenter, and Brélemann,
in their respective notes on collections made in Ireland
(9, 10, 11), record 26 species for that island.

For Scotland we owe a few early authoritative records to
Dr W. E. Leach, in whose papers, published ninety years
ago (2, 3, 4), 6 Myriapods (a Chilopod and 5 Diplopods)
- are recorded from near Edinburgh, namely (Geophilus
longicornis, Polydesmus complanatus, Craspedosoma rawlinsia
(named after its discoverer, Richard Rawlins, a zealous
young naturalist who died shortly afterwards), Julus niger,
J. pulchellus, and J. pusillus. These, however, are not the
earliest local records, for we find in a list of “ Insects” found
in the neighbourhood of Edinburgh, by C. Stewart, dated
1809 (1), the following names :—Scolopendra forficata, Julus
terrestris, J. sabulosus, and J. oniscoides.

In 1835 Dr G. Johnston published a list of 11 species
found in Berwickshire (5).

In 1882 Mr (now Sir) Thomas Gibson-Carmichael sub-
mitted a preliminary list of Scottish Myriapoda—17 in
all—to this Society (7). Six have Forth localities there
definitely assigned to them.

In 1900 and 1901 I reported, in the Annals of Scottish
Natural History (12), 11 species from the Forth Area, most
of them being additions to the Scottish list.

Lastly, the British Association Handbook on the Natural
History of the Clyde Area (13), published in 1901, contains
a list of 13 species by Mr D. A. Boyd.

The known Scottish species, so far as recorded, would
appear to number about 30.

In the present list, which is based on a fairly large
collection of specimens and notes made from time to time
during the last ten years in various parts of the Forth Area,
I am able to record 17 Centipedes (including Scolopendrella)

The Myriapods of the Forth Area. 407

and 16 Millipedes. This is exclusive of a few aliens such
as Paradesmus gracilis, that have established themselves
in green-houses, etc. That each group will be considerably
added to in the course of time may be confidently predicted.
Reference to Ellingsen’s Norwegian list! suggests several
that might be expected to occur here.

While it is still the common practice to speak of the
Centipedes and Millipedes as forming one class, the
Myriapoda, or Myriopoda as some prefer to write it, un-
answerable reasons have been given for their separation
into three classes, namely—Chilopoda, Symphyla, and
Diplopoda (ef. Pocock’s paper “On the Classification of the
Tracheate Arthropoda,” Zoologischer Anzeiger, xvi. (1893)
p. 271; and C. H. Bollman’s “The Myriapoda of North
America,” Bulletin U.S. National Museum, No. 46, 1893).
But many points in the classification and nomenclature
of the Myriapods are by no means settled, and I can only
hope that the arrangement and names here employed will
not differ materially from those adopted in the authoritative
work on the British species when it makes its appearance.

The identification of Chilopods and LDiplopods is, at
present, a matter of very considerable difficulty, and, but
for the assistance which Mr Pocock kindly gave me four
or five years ago, and for which my best thanks are due,
this list might never have been drawn up. Specimens of
nearly all the species recorded were determined by him.
Some exceptionally puzzling questions in synonymy exist,
and not having myself investigated them, I simply adopt
the names given me by Mr Pocock. To Sir Thomas Gibson-
Carmichael, Bart., I am indebted for the equivalents of some
of the names used by him in his 1882 list. In Latzel’s Die
Myriopoden der dsterreichisch-ungarischen Monarchie, 1880-
1884, most of the British species are described.

Myriapods may be found in every month of the year,
but spring is in my experience about the best time to seek
for them. When the sun has gained sufficient strength

1Edy. Ellingsen, ‘‘Bidrag til Kundskaben om de norske Myriopoder

Udbredelse” (Christiania Videnskabs-Selskobs Forhandlinger for 1891), and
‘© Mere om norske Myriopoder” (bid. for 1896 and 1903).

408 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

to impart warmth to the surface of the earth, they emerge
from their deeper winter retreats, and are then to be found
in plenty under stones, planks, bark, etc, where some
dampness exists, in almost any situation having a southern
exposure. They breed in spring and summer, and during
the summer and autumn months quite young ones are
frequent. The Centipedes, it may be mentioned, are
carnivorous, while the Millipedes are vegetable feeders.

Since this paper was read, Messrs H. W. Brélemann of
Pau (formerly of Paris) and Edv. Ellingsen of Krageré,
Norway, have each been so kind as to examine some specimens
for me, a favour I greatly appreciate. To have had a number
of my records authenticated by them adds greatly to the
value of the list.

Class CHILOPODA (Centipedes).
Family LITHOBIIDA.

Lithobius forficatus (Linn.).
Scolopendra forficata, Stewart’s 1809 list (1).

Abundant throughout the area under stones, boards, logs,
etc. Behind the turf at the foot of a wall, and under loose
bark on a rotten tree trunk, are favourite haunts. While
plentiful in the neighbourhood of houses and about gardens,
it is by no means confined to these, but is likewise quite
common in outlying woods and on the hills—indeed, alinost
anywhere. Recorded by Leach (2) under the name of
L. levilabrum, as “common in Scotland in rocky places.”
Extra-British range very extensive.

Local data.—The following localities—a few only of those from which
specimens have been identified during the last five or six years—will show
how widely this species is distributed. Has been found in every month of
the year, though most in evidence from March to October, and probably
breeds during the greater part of this period. Quite young ones have been
observed in autunin, and in spring, no doubt after hibernation :—Morning-
side; Mortonhall,!P.; Salisbury Crags; Polton ; fir-wood, near Kirknewton,
ad. 6 6, 2 9, common, 31st March,!E., etc.; Aberlady ; Boltonmoor Wood ;
Dalmeny ; Bo’ness; Dysart, !E.; Aberdour ; North Queensferry; Cleish Hills;
Culross; Abbey Craig, near Stirling; Ochils; Aberfoyle ; Callander; ete.

1 The mark ! after a record signifies that a specimen has been determined
by Brélemann, Ellingsen, or Pocock, as indicated.

Wire

The Myriapods of the Forth Area. 409

Lithobius variegatus, Leach.

This fine species, which is generally regarded as confined
to the British Islands and Jersey, appears to be almost
entirely of western distribution in Scotland (ef. Gibson-
Carmichael, 7, p. 240): it is common, for instance, about
Oban. In the Forth area it occurs sparingly in the oak
woods at the head of the valley. I have not yet detected it
farther east than Culross.

Local data.—Neighbourhood of Loch Katrine, rare (Gibson-Carmichael,
l.c.); and I believe I met with it in the woods bordering Loch Ard, in April
1902, though I cannot now lay my hands on the specimen. One under stone
in wood near Culross, 26th April 1901, ! P.

Lithobius melanops, Newp.
LIithobius glabratus, C. L. Koch.

This form is common, and widely distributed with us, and
has already been recorded by me (120). ‘A favourite habitat
is under bark on a dead tree; but it occurs with equal
frequency under stones. Recorded from south of England
(14), Ireland (9, 11), Norway, and other parts of Europe.

Local data.—Ravelrig, near Balerno, common under bark on dead fir,
April 1901,!P.; Hillend Wood, Pentlands, March 1902; Listonshiels, Sept.
1905; Roslin Woods, April 1906; Culross, April 1901, !P.; Blairadam, under
bark, May 1905; West Wemyss, ! E., and North Queensferry, common under
stones, April1905; Elie, Aug. 1904; North Berwick, Nov. 1905, several (some
young); Bo’ness, May 1901 (from R. Godfrey); near Bridge of Allan, April 1906.

Lithobius calcaratus, C. L. Koch.

Common under stones, turfs, etc., chiefly on moors and
hillsides. Recorded by me in 1901 (120). Colour usually a
dark blackish-brown. Pocock (14) records it from Hamp-
shire. Frequent in North Europe.

Local data. — Bavelaw Moss, two, May 1900 (determined by Pocock); woods
and moors near Kirknewton, one, Jan. 1902, common, April 1905; Blackford
Hill, one, March 1905; summit of Caerketton, Pentlands, common under
stones, March 1906,!B.,!E.; Tyninghame, one in Moss, May; East Grange,
Fife, April 1901; Aberfoyle, July 1900; hillsides, near Callander, April 1900,
VP ete:

Lithobius borealis, Mein. !

A Lithobius, unfortunately somewhat damaged, from Ben
Ledi is, Mr Ellingsen thinks, this species, which has already

410 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

been thought to occur on the Scottish hills (Carmichael, 7).
Recorded from Scandinavia, etc. :
Local data.—Ben Ledi, at about 2500 feet, 9, 4th Sept. 1906.

Lithobius crassipes, L. Koch.

Common and generally distributed, under stones, pieces of
wood, etc. A small species, with only twenty antennal
segments. Recorded in my 1901 note. Sinclair (15) records
it from Dartmoor and Cornwall. Common in North Europe.

Local data.—Mortonhall, March 1900 (determined by Pocock); Hillend
(Pentlands), Dec. 1900; Glencorse, Sept. 1901 ; summit of Caerketton, March
1902 and 1906,!B.; Ravelrig, April 1901; Kirknewton, abundant, March, ! E. ;
Abercorn Glen, May 1901; near Linlithgow, Aug. 1901; Craigiehall, April
1906; near Gifford, Oct. 1901 and April 1906, !E.; near Dysart, April ;
Aberdour and Culross, adults and half-grown ones, April 1901, !B.; Bridge
of Allan, Oct. 1901; Callander, Sept. 1906.

Henicops fulvicornis (Mein.).

I should not wonder if this tiny Lithobiid were not un-
common in the Highland portion of the area; but so far I
have detected it only on Ben Ledi. It is said to frequent
wet places. It may be known by its single pair of eyes, and
rather short, fulvous antennez. No previous record of its
occurrence in this country has come under my notice. It is
common in Norway—whence Mr Ellingsen has kindly sent
me a specimen for comparison with mine—Denmark, ete.

Local data.—Ben Ledi, South Perthshire, at an elevation of about 2000 feet,
?, 4th Sept. 1906,!E. [I have also four ? ? from Loch Awe collected by
Mr Godfrey July 1901.]

[Family SCUTIGERID.
Scutigera coleoptrata (L.).

Sir Thomas Gibson-Carmichael informs me that he got
a full-grown specimen of this foreign species at Kinleith
paper-mill, Currie, in 1905. He has also had it from wine-
cellars in Leith, where he thinks it was breeding; and he
has seen it at Granton. Its occurrence in paper-works near
Aberdeen, where it had been established for over 25 years, was
recorded by him in the Lné. Mo. Mag. for September 1883. ]

77 ee

The Myriapods of the Furth Area. 411

Family SCOLOPENDRIDZ.
Cryptops hortensis, Leach.

Fairly common in hot-houses; and no doubt also occurs
in hot-beds, under flower-pots, etc., in the adjoining gardens,
though I have not yet seen a specimen in the open. It is
said to be common in gardens in the south of England and
in Ireland. Ellingsen has found it in Norway. According
to Pocock (14), it is certainly indigenous in Great Britain.

Local data.—Under flower-pots in greenhouses, Laird’s Nurseries, Cor-
torphine, several, May 1905; also at Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, 1905.

Family GEOPHILIDA.

Geophilus longicornis, Leach.
‘Geophilus flavus (De Geer) ?, Auct.

This species, which is one of the most easily recognised in
the family, is common and widely distributed in our area, at
any rate in the lower districts. It appears in all the British
lists, and has an extensive range on the Continent. In
common with its allies, it lives in moist earth, under
stones, etc.

Local data.—Lothianburn, March 1900, ! P.; King’s Park, Edinburgh, com-
mon, April 1901, ete.,! E.; Ormiston, East Lothian, three, each coiled round a
small cluster of eggs, in holes in a bank occupied by a colony of bees (Andrena),
22nd June 1900,!P.; South Queensferry, March, Bo'ness, June, and Linlithgow,
Aug. 1901; Cleish Hills, Aug. 1900; Aberdour, Culross, and Kincardine-on-
Forth, April 1901; near Dysart, North Queensferry, and Bridge of Allan,
April 1905; Aberlady, April; Kinchie, E. Lothian, ad. ¢, May; Callander,
April 1900, ! P.

Geophilus proximus, ©. L. Koch.

I find this species, which has already been recorded by me
from the area (120), quite as common, and about as widely
distributed, as the preceding, from which it may be known
by its somewhat shorter head and antenne, uniformly shorter
hairs thereon ; and three-furrowed (or foveate) instead of one-
furrowed anterior ventral plates. The next species is per-
ceptibly more robust and chestnut in tint than either; and,
besides, has a characteristic tooth and notch on the opposing
edges of each anterior ventral plate. Sir T. G. Carmichael

VOL. XVI. : 2N

412 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

tells me the G. electricus of his Scottish list (7) was probably
this species. Of its range in England I find no indication,
but it is on the Irish list (Brélemann, 11). Apparently more
plentiful than G. longicornas in Norway (Ellingsen), and
frequent in Denmark (Meinert).

Local data.—Swanston (Lothianburn), several, March 1901, ! P.; Aberdour,
Fife, two, March 1900, and one, April 1901, !P.; foot of Salisbury Orags,
gé and 9, April 1901, !B., and others, 1906, !E.; Edinburgh Botanic
Garden, a few, and Dalkeith Park gardens, in earth, common (ad. and imm.),
March; Fairmilehead, a few from garden, April 1906, !B.; South Queens-
ferry, March, and near Bo’ness, August 1901; Culross district, common, April
1901; Kilconquhar, June 1905; Dunbar, March.

Geophilus carpophagus, Leach.
G. sodalis, Bergs. & Mein., and of Gibson-Carmichael’s list.
G. condylogaster, Latzel. j
Another generally distributed and common (perhaps our

commonest) Geophilid, seeming, however, to prefer unculti-
vated places, and being, according to my experience, more
abundant in moorland and Highland districts than in the
low country. A common European species, extending west
to Ireland, and St Kilda (Evans, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., 1906,
pAcm:

Local data.—Bonaly Hill (Pentlands), ad. ¢, June 1903, and Torduff, ad.
?, March 1906; Blackford Hill, Edinburgh, several scarcely mature, Jan. ;
Leadburn Moss, ad. @ and imm. 6, under cut peat, March 1905; near
Kirknewton, common—many full-grown—under well-embedded stones on
sunny bank at edge of a moorland wood, 31st March, !E.; Lammermuirs,
near Gifford, ad. g and 9, Sept. 1903; South Queensterry, March, Bo’ness, ad.
and half-grown, May (from R. Godfrey), and near Linlithgow, several, Aug.
1901; Craigiehall, April; coast of Fife near West Wemyss, adults common
under stones among herbage, April last, !E.; Tulliallan Woods, and near
Culross, common, April 1901, ! P.; Kelty Glen, Callander, and well up the hill-
sides, common, April 1900, ! P.; oak-woods by the side of Loch Ard, common
in rotten stumps, June; Pass of Leny, adults and young (8-10 mm. ), Sept.

Geophilus truncorum, Bergs. & Mein.

A small species (length about 15 mm.) of fairly common
and widespread occurrence. A favourite habitat is under
the bark of a decaying tree-stump; lives also under stones
and dead leaves. Already recorded by me (120). As to its
occurrence elsewhere in the British Isles, I have no informa-

The Myriapods of the Forth Area. 413

tion. Has been found in Norway, etc. -The anterior ventral
plates are very distinctly three-furrowed. Care must be
taken not to mistake young of the preceding for it.

Local data. —Clubbie-dean (Pentlands) and Ravelrig, under stones, April
1901, ! P.; Balerno, common in rotten fir-stump, April 1903, ! B.; Kirknewton,
!E., March, and Salisbury Crags, April; Boltonmoor, East Lothian, several
under bark, April; Dalmeny Park, April 1905; Bo’ness, June 1901;
St David’s, Fife, Sept. 1903: Blairadam, common under bark, May 1905;
Kincardine-on-Forth, April 1901; Abbey Craig, near Stirling, and Loch
Watston, near Doune, April 1905; West Wemyss, Fife, April 1906; Aber-
lady, April.

Schendyla nemorensis (C. L. Koch).

Has only been identified on a few occasions, but it is a
small and easily overlooked species. Was recorded by me in
1901 (126). I gather that it is known to Mr Pocock from
England, but I have not met with any record. It is common
in Norway (Ellingsen) and other parts of Europe (Latzel).

Local data.—Mortonhall, near Edinburgh, one, March 1900, ! P.; foot of
Salisbury Crags, 6 and ¢, under stone, April 1901, ! B.; near Gifford,
several, April 1906. :

Linotenia crassipes (C. L. Koch).

Scolioplanes crassipes (C. Koch), Latzel’s Die Myriopoden, ete.

In this country luminous Centipedes usually prove, I
believe, to be of this species, in which the emission of
luminescent matter, as the animal moves about on mild,
damp nights in autumn, is a well-known habit. According
to my experience, it is a rare species in this district. It is
the Geophilus or Scolioplanes acuminatus of some authors, but
not, I imagine, of Johnston’s Berwickshire list (5), his remarks,
“common under stones, especially on the sea-shore, and
abundant on the Cheviot Hills,” pointing rather to LZ. marv-
tuma and G. carpophagus; while in Gibson-Carmichael’s
Scottish list (7) the name probably covers both this species
and the next. Europe west to Ireland.

Local data.—Dalmeny Park, West Lothian, one, Oct. 1895 (Evans, 12a),
and another, 24th Jan. 1900, both captured by Mr C. Campbell; hour about
10 p.M.; weather mild and moist. The identification of the first specimen
(a @), which Mr Campbell was kind enough to give me, has been confirmed
by Mr Pocock. On each occasion Mr Campbell’s attention was attracted by

414 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

a bright, luminous speck, Jwith a trail of fainter ones, on the edge of a wood-
land path; and grasping a handful of grass and earth from the spot, he took
it home and found the Centipede in it. On Sept. 30, 1903, in Donibristle
Grounds, near St David’s, Fife, I found a specimen under a stone on a mossy
bank. In former years I have more than once seen its luminous trail in the
neighbourhood of Aberlady.

Linotenia maritima (Leach).

Interest in this species centres in its habitat. On the
shores of the Firth of Forth, from which it has already been
recorded by me (120), it is common under partly embedded

stones and rotting seaweed from high-water mark to a con-

siderable distance below it, but never, so far as I have seen,
beyond a point daily uncovered by the tide. Recorded from
coast of Ireland, south of England, France, Denmark, and
Norway.

Local data.—Shores of Firth of Forth at the following places:—Dalmeny,
a dozen under stone, buried in rotting seaweed, March 1901, ! P.; near Aber-
dour, abundant, adult and young, from high-water mark to twenty yards
below it, April 1901; again in same locality, Oct. 1903; near Culross, a few

under rotten seaweed, April 1901 and May 1906; west of Charlestown, March
1905; east of Dysart, a few, April 1906; east of Dunbar, a few, Nov.

Stigmatogaster subterraneus (Leach).

Himantarium subterraneun of Carmichael’s list (7).

Will probably be found to be locally not uncommon in
gardens, though as yet I have obtained it from but one
locality. It is our largest Geophilid—one of my specimens
was 8) mm. (about 34 ins.) long and 2 mm. broad (in
middle) when alive—and lives, as its specific name implies,
hidden away amongst earth. Johnston (5) recorded it as
“rather rare” in Berwickshire; Boyd (13) has taken it in
the “Clyde area”; and Carmichael regards it as common
through south of Scotland. England, Ireland, and North
Europe, but not in Ellingsen’s Norwegian list.

Local data.—Dalkeith Park gardens, Dalkeith, three adult 9 9 —75-85
mm.—5th March (identification confirmed by Carpenter). I have to thank

Mr J. Whytock for these and some other Geophilids obtained when ground in
the gardens was being turned over preparatory to spring sowing.

(Continued in next Vol. (XVILI.), p. 109.)

ea,

JOURNAL OF PROCEEDINGS.

SESSION CXXXIV.

First Meeting, 24th Gctober 1904.—WmM. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Professor D. J. Cunningham, M.D., F.R.S., D.C.L., LL.D., and Professor
T. Hudson Beare, B A., B.Sc., were elected Ordinary Fellows.

The following alterations in the Laws of the Society were sanctioned :—
Section VII.—1. The Cowncil. Delete the word ‘‘ third” in the second
line, and substitute the word ‘‘ second.”
In the third line, delete the wora ‘‘and” and substitute the
word ‘‘ or.”
Section VIII.—Private Business. Alter ‘‘« hair taken at half-past
seven o’clock”’ to ‘‘ Chair taken at 7.45 P.M.”
In the fifth line from the end of this Section, delete the words
‘‘any two of the Presidents,’ and substitute the words ‘‘the
President and one of the Vice-Presidents.”’

The following communications were submitted:

1. ‘‘ Exhibition of, and Remarks on, Specimens of the Orkney Vole (Microtus
orcadensis, Millais); a Scottish Mammal new to Science.” By Wm.
EAGLE CLARKE, Esq., F.L.S., F.R.S.E. |

2. ‘*Morphological Variations in Vipera berus. Size and Scaling.” By
GERALD LEIGHTON, Esq., M.D., F.R.S.E.

3. ‘On the Trapezium of the Horse’s Carpus.” By O. CHARNOCK BRADLEY,
Esq., M.B., F.R.S. E.

4, ‘* Exhibition, with Remarks, of Living Specimens of Limazx tenellus.”
By Wa. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

Second Meeting, 28th November 1904.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E. , President,
in the Chair,

The Annual Reports of the Council, Librarian, and Treasurer were
submitted.

The following Office-Bearers were elected for the current Session:
President—Wun. Evans, F.R.S.E.

Vice-Presidents—B. N. Pracu, LL.D., F.R.S.; R. H. Traquarr, M.D.,
LL.D., F.R.S.; W. Eacie Ciarxg, F.L.S., F.R.S.E.

VOL, XVI, 20

416 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

Secretary—O. CHARNOCK BRADLEY, M.B., F.R.S.E.
Assistant-Secretary—J. DUNSTAN, M.R.C.V.S., F.R.S.E.
Treasurer—W. A. MIDDLETON, C.A.

Librarian—T. N. Jonnston, M.B., C.M., F.R.S E,

Councillors—Professor GRAHAM KERR, M.A., F.R.S.E.; J. H. Asewortg,
D.Sc.; L. W. Hinxman, B.A., F.R.S.E.; C. B. Crampron, M.B.,
C.M.; G. R. Leicutron, M.D., F.R.S.E.; Professor J. C. EWArt,
M.D., F.R.S.; W. S. Brucs, F.R.S.G.S.; D. Warrrston, M.A., M.D.,
F.R.S.E.; F. H. A. Marswaut, B.A., D.Se., F.R.S.E.; Peroy H.
GRIMSHAW, F.E.S.; Matcoirm Lavriz, B A., D.Sc, F.R.S.E.; Sir
T. D. Gipson CARMICHAEL, Bart.

The following communications were submitted :

1. ‘‘ Scotia Collections.—Note on the Gonostyles of two Antarctic Siphono-
phora.” By Professor J. ARTHUR THomson, M.A., F.R.S.E,

i)

‘*Hermaphroditism ina Ram.” By D. Warerston, Esq., M.A., M.D.,
F.R.S.E. |

3. ‘‘Two unusual Variations in the Brain and Spinal Cord.” By D.
WATERSTON, Esq.

4, ‘‘Exhibition of Specimens of the Planarian Worm, Rhynchodemus
terrestris, etc., from the neighbourhood of Edinburgh.” By Wm.
Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

Third Meeting, 19th December 1904.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs Norman B. Kinnear, Robert N. Rudmose Brown, J. H. Harvey
Pirie, and Bertram Ingram were elected Ordinary Fellows.
The following communications were submitted:
1. **Scotia Collections.-—-On the Tentacles of an Antarctic Siphonophore.”
By JoHN RENNIE, Esq., D.Sc.
2. «The Black-backed Gulls of the Bass.”” By Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

3. ‘“*Some further Additions to the List of Spiders collected in the Edinburgh
District.” By Professor G. H. CARPENTER, B.Sc., and Wm. Evans,
Ksq., F.R.S.E.

4, ‘© Exhibition of Flat-Worms.” By J. H. AsHwortH, Esq., D.Sc.

5. ‘Exhibition of a Species of Coleoptera new to the British Isles.” By
R. S. BAGNALL, Esq.

Fourth Meeting, 23rd January 1905.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs W. E. Agar, James Murray, John Kerr, and H. B. Muff were
elected Ordinary Fellows.

Journal. 417

The following communications were submitted :

1. ‘*On the Regional Distribution of Plankton Organisms in Scottish Fresh-
Water Lochs.” By JAMEs Murray, Esq.

2. ‘*Scotia Collections. —On a Ten-legged Pycnogonid from the South
Orkneys.” By T. V. Hopeson, Esq.

3. ‘* Exhibition of—(a) Specimens of Oak and Lime injured by Gecinus viridis ;
(b) Tetranychus lintearius and its web on Ulex europeus.” By R.
STeEwART MacDovuGAL., Esq., D.Sc., F.R S.E,

4, ‘*Exhibition, with Remarks, of Short-toed Lark (Calendrella brachydactyla),
Lapland Bunting (Calearius lapponicus), and Chick of Fork-tailed
Petrel (Oceanodroma leucorrhoa), from the Flannan Islands.” By
Wo. HAGue CLARKE, Esq., F.L.S., F.R.S.E.

Fifth Meeting, 27th February 1905.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs Edward J. Bles, Robert N. Rudmose Brown, and H. Brantwood
Muff were formally admitted Fellows of the Society.

The following communications were submitted: .
1. ‘‘ Exhibition, with Remarks, of a remarkable Fossil Vertebrate from the

Triassic beds of Lossiemouth.” By Wm. Taytor, Esq.

2. ‘*The Embryology of Dipnoan and Crossopterygian Fishes in its Relation
with some of the General Problems of Vertebrate Morphology.” By
Professor J. GRAHAM KERR, M.A., F.R.S.E.

3. ‘*The Hatching Process in Anura.” By Epwarp J. Buss, Esq., B.A.

4. ‘‘ Exhibition of—(a) Section of Stem of Betula alba, showing Adult and
Larval Galleries of Scolytus Ratzeburgii, Jans; (b) Stem of Betula alba,
showing wounds made by Woodpecker in search of Scolytus Ratzeburgii,
Jans.” By R. Stewart MacDovuea.t, Esq., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E.

Sixth Meeting, 27th March 1905.—Wmn. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs R. C. MILLAR and R. Brown were appointed Auditors.

Messrs J. H. Harvey Pirie and James Murray were formally admitted
Fellows of the Society.
The following communications were submitted:
1. ‘*A Possible Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive Characters.” By Crcix B.
CRAMPTON, Esq., M.B., C.M.

2. “Scotia Collections. —Three Species of Antipatharians.” By Professor
J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., F.R.S,E,

418 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

3. ‘The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadide as an Index of Age.” By
J. STEWART THOMSON, KEsq., F.L.S.

4, ‘*A Catalogue of Land, Fresh- Water, and Marine Crustacea found in the
Basin of the River Forth and its Estuary. Part I.—Malacostraca,
Cladocera, and Branchiura.”” By THomas Scott, Esq., LL.D., F.L.S.

5. ‘*The Odonata (Dragon Flies) of the Forth Area.” By Wm. Evans,
Esq., F.R.S.E.

SESSION CXXXV.

First Meeting, 23rd October 1905.—Wmn. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.
Nigel Kennedy Worthington, Esq., was elected an Ordinary Fellow.

The retiring Vice-President (B. N. Peacu, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S.) delivered
an Address on ‘‘ The Higher Crustacea of the Scottish Carboniferous Rocks.”

Second Meeting, 27th November 1905.—Wo. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

The following Office-Bearers were elected for the current Session :
President—Wmn. Evans, F.F.A., F.R.S.E.

Vice-Presidents—R. H. Traquair, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S.; W. Eaciue CLARKE,
F.L.S., F.R.S.E.; Professor GRAHAM KERR, M.A., F.R.S.E.

Secretary—O. CHARNOCK BRADLEY, M.B., D.Sc., F.R.S.E.
Assistant-Secretary—J. H. ASHWORTH, D.Sc.
Treasurer—W. A. MIDDLETON, C.A.

Librarian—T. N. Jounstron, M.B., C.M., F.R.S.E.

Councillors—GERALD R. LeticutTon, M.D., F.R.S.E.; Professor J. C. Ewart
M.D., F.R.S.E.; W. S. Brucz, F.R.S.G.S.; D. Warerston, M.A.,
M.D., F.B.S.E.; F. H. A. Marsnwatt, B.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E.; Percy
H. GrimsHaw, F.E.S.; Matconm Lavuriz, B.A., D.Se, F.R.S.E.;
Sir T. D. Gipson CARMICHAEL, Bart.; Professor T. Hupson BEARE,
B.A., B.Se.; R. C. Mossman, F.R. Met.S., F.R.S E.; E. B. JAmMrEson,
M.B., Ch. B: BON. Pracs, LiiD;, FR.S:

The Annual Reports of the Council, Librarian, and Treasurer were
submitted.

Messrs Norman B. Kinnear, Nigel K. Worthington, and Arthur C.
Edmonds were formally admitted Fellows of the Society.

The following communications were submitted :
1, ‘‘ Bdelloid Rotifera from the Forth Area.” By JAMes Murray, Esq.

Journal. 419

2. ‘‘Mamumalia of the Edinburgh (Forth) District: Supplementary Notes.”
By Wo. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

3. ‘‘ Note on the Development of the Inter-phalangeal Sesamoid of Ungu-
lates.” By O. CHARNoCK BRADLEY, Esq., M.B., D.Sc.

4, ‘Exhibition of Specimens of the Parasitic Copepod, Lemargus muricatus,
Kroy., from a Short Sunfish captured at North Berwick on 28th
September last.” By Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

5. ‘* Exhibition, with Remarks, of a Specimen of Ctenopteryx fimbriatus.”
By J. H. AsHworru, Esq., D.Sc.

Third Meeting, 18th December 1905.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs Thos. J. Anderson, David W. Henderson, H. Maxwell Vickers,
and Robert D. R. Troup were elected Ordinary Fellows.

John Kerr, Esq., was formally admitted a Fellow of the Society.

The following communications were submitted:

1. ‘Exhibition, with Remarks, of a Number of Remarkable Neuropterous
Insects, chiefly from the Mediterranean Region.” By K. J. Morron,
Esq., F.E.S.

2. ‘‘On the History of Ptinus tectus (Boield), with special reference to its
introduction and rapid spread in Britain.” By Professor T. Hupson
BEARE.

3. ‘* Exhibition of Three Species of Coleoptera recently added to the British
List.” By R. S. BAGNALL, Esq.

4. ‘*A Rare Sponge from the ‘ Scotia’ Collections.” By Professor J. ARTHUR
THOMSON and J. D. FippEs, Esq.

5. ‘* Exhibition of Models illustrating the Development of the Mammalian
Hind-Brain.” By O. CHARNocK BRADLEY, Esq., M.B., D.Sc.

Fourth Meeting, 22nd January 1906.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair,

Messrs Robert D. R. Troup, David W. Henderson, and H. Maxwell
Vickers were formally admitted Fellows of the Society.

Wm. EAGLE CLARKE, Esq., F.L.S., F.R.S.E., delivered an Address on
“‘The Birds Collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.”

Fifth Meeting, 26th February 1906.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

James Wm. Bowhill, Esq., was elected an Ordinary Fellow.

The following communications were submitted:

1. ‘‘The Luminous Neotenic Female of Phengodes, with Exhibition of
Specimen.” By Epwarp J. Buss, Esq.

420 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

2. ‘‘Some Falkland Island Fossils, with Exhibition of Specimens.” By
E. T. Newron, Esq., F.R.S.

8. ‘*The Myriopoda (Centipedes and Millipedes) of the Forth Area.” By
Wy. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E.

4, ‘‘Exhibition of a Magic Square inscribed in Hebrew Characters.” By
J. H. AsHwortu, Esq., D.Sc.

Sixth Meeting, 26th March 1906.—Wm. Evans, Esq., F.R.S.E., President,
in the Chair.

Messrs James R. Marshall and Harry B. Bryden were elected Ordinary
Fellows.

Messrs R. C. MILLAR and R. Brown were appointed Auditors.

The following communications were submitted :

1. “Exhibition of Two Horses’ Skulls obtained from a Roman Camp near
Melrose.” By Professor J. CossAnR Ewart.

2. ‘*The Development of the Horse.” By Professor J. CossAn EWART.

3 ‘*Notes on the Geology and Petrology of Gough Island.” By Messrs
J. H. Harvey Prriz, B.Se., M.B., and R CampsBett, M.A., B.Sc.

4, ‘*Notes on Trypanosomes.” By Miss MuriEL RoBERTSON.

5. ‘A Catalogue of Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine Crustacea found in
the Basin of the River Forth and its Estuary.” Part II. By
THomas Scott, Esq., LL.D., F.L.S.

LIST OF SOCIETIES WHICH RECEIVE THE

SOCIETY’S “PROCEEDINGS.”

Those Institutions from which Publications are received in return are

BIRMINGHAM,.
Do,
CAMBRIDGE, .
Do. ,
CIRENCESTER,
DURHAM,
HALIFAX,
LEEDS,
LIVERPOOL,
Do.
Do.
LONDON,

Do. ‘
MANCHESTER,
Do.

Do.
NorwWIcH,
OXFORD,
TRURO,
WATFORD,

ABERDEEN, .

COCKBURNSPATH, .

- EDINBURGH, .
Do.
Do. -
Do.

indicated by an asterisk.

ENGLAND.

*Philosophical Society, King Edward’s Grammar School.
*Natural History Society, Sir Josiah Mason’s College.
*Philosophical Society.
University Library.
*Editor of the Agricultural Students’ Gazette.
University Library.
*Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society.
*The Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland.
*Biological Society, University College.
*Literary and Philosophical Society.
*Engineering Society, Royal Institution.
British Museum Library.
*British (Natural History) Museum, South Kensington.
*Royal Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, W.
Chemical Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, W.
*Geological Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, W.
*Linnean Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, W.
*Royal Microscopical Society, King’s College.
Museum of Economic Geology, Jermyn Street.
Editor of Nature, 29 Bedford Street, Covent Garden.
*Zoological Society, Hanover Square.
*Geologists’ Association, University College, W.C.
*Geological Society, 36 George Street.
*Literary and Philosophical Society, 36 George Street.
The Victoria University.
*Norfolk and Norwich Naturalists’ Society, The Museum.
The Bodleian Library.
*Royal Institution of Cornwall.
*Hertfordshire Natural History Society and Field Club.

SCOTLAND.

University Library.
*Berwickshire Naturalists’ Field Club, Old Cambus,
Advocates’ Library.
University Library.
*Royal Society.
Royal Medical Society.

— 492

EDINBURGH,
Do.
Do.
Do.
Do.
GLASGOW,
Do,
Do.
Do.
Do.
PERTH,

St ANDREWS, .

BELFAST,

DUBLIN,
Do.
Do.

AMSTERDAM,
LEYDEN,
UTRECHT,

BASLE,

BERN,

Do. -
GENEVA,

NEUFCHATEL,

ZURICH, .

BERLIN, .
Do.
Do.

BONN,

BREMEN,
BRESLAU,
BRUNSWICK,
DRESDEN,
Do.
ELBERFELD,
ERLANGEN,

Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

*Royal Scottish Society of Arts.
*Royal Scottish Geographical Society.
*Botanical Society.
*Highland and Agricultural Society.
*Geological Society.
*Philosophical Society.
*Natural History Society.
*Geological Society.
* Andersonian Society.
University Library.
*Perthshire Society of Natural History.
University Library.

IRELAND.

*Natural History and Philosophical Society.
*Royal Irish Academy.

*Royal Dublin Society.

*Royal Geological Society of Ireland.

HOLLAND.

*De Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen.
*Museum van Naturlijke Histoire.
Provinciaal Genootschap an Kunsten en Wetenschappen.

SWITZERLAND.

*Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

*Allgemeine Schweizerische Gesellschaft fiir die gesammten
Naturwissenschaften.

*Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

*Societé de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle.

*Sociétée des Sciences Naturelles.

*Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

GERMANY.

*Konigliche Akademie der Wissenschaften.
*Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft.
*Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde.
*Naturhistorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande
Westfalens, und des Reg.-Bezirks Osnabriick.

*Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft.
*Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir Vaterlandische Cultur.
*Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein.

Konigliche Sammlungen fiir Kunst und Wissenschaft.
*Der Verein fiir Erdkunde.
*Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein.

University Library.

FRANKFORT-ON-MAIN,*Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Do.

FREIBURG, i. B.,

GOTTINGEN,
HALLE, .
HAMBURG,

*Deutsche Malakozoologische Gesellschaft, Dr Kobelt,
Schwanheim.
“Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft.
*Konigliche Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
*Kaiserliche Akademie der Naturforscher.
Naturhistorisches Museum,

JENA,
LEIPZIG,
Do.
Do;
MUNICH,
STUTTGART,

WURZBURG, .

AGRAM,.

HERMANNSTADT,

PRAGUE,

TRIESTE,

VIENNA,
Do.

BoLoGna,
MILAN, .

1D 1c ora
MODENA,
NAPLES,

PADUA, .

ROME,
TURIN,

MADRID,
Do.

CoIMBRA,
LISBON,

BORDEAUX,
CAEN,

CHERBOURG, .

Paris,
Do.
Do. :
Do. -
Do.

BRUSSELS,

Do.
Do.

List of Societies, etc. 423

*Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft.
*KG6nigliche Saichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft.
Editor of the Zoologischer Anzeiger.
*Konigliche Baierische Akademie der Wissenschaften,
*Verein fiir Vaterlandische Cultur in Wiirttemberg.
*Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellschaft.

AUSTRIA.

*Societas Croatica Historico-naturalis.

*Siebenbiirgischer Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft.

*Konigliche-bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
Societa Adriatica di Scienze Naturali.

*K.k. zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft.

*K.k. Naturhistorisches Hof-Museum.

ITALY.

* Accademia delle Scienze dell’ Istituto.
*Reale Istituto Lombardo di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti.
*Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali.

Societa dei Naturalisti.

Editor of the Zoologischer Jahresbericht, Zoological Station.

*Societa Veneto-Trentina di Scienze Naturali residente in

Padova.
*Reale Accademia dei Lincei.
*Reale Accademia delle Scienze.

SPAIN.

*Real Academia de Ciencias exactas, fisicas e naturales.
*Sociedad espafiola de Historia natural.

PORTUGAL.

*Bibliotheque de l'Universite.
* Academia Real das Sciencias.

FRANCE.

La Société Linnéenne.
*Société Linnéenne de Normandie.
*Societé Nationale des Sciences Naturelles.
* Académie des Sciences de I’Institut. !
*Societé Géologique de France, Rue des grands Augustins, 7.
*Société Zoologique de France, Rue des grands Augustins, 7.
Société de Biologie.
Ecole des Mines.

BELGIUM.

ee Royale des Sciences, des Lettres, et des beaux
Arts.
*Societé Royale Malacologique de Belgique.
Societe Belge de Microscopie.

424 Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society.

SCANDINAVIA.
BERGEN, : . *The Museum.
CHRISTIANIA, . *Den Naturhistoriske Forening.
Do. : . Universitets Bibliothek.
COPENHAGEN, . *Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab.
Do. . . *Naturhistoriske Forening.
STOCKHOLM, . . *Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademie.
UPSALA, : . *Kongliga Vetenskaps-Societeten.
Do. : . *Observatoire Méetéorologique.
RUSSIA.
DoRpat, é . *Naturforscher Gesellschaft.
G0) ae ‘ . *Natural History Society.
Moscow, : . *Societe Impériale des Naturalistes.
St PETERSBURG, . *Académie Impériale des Sciences.
Do. . *Imperial Botanic Garden.
AMERICA.
UNITED STATES.
ALBANY, N, Y., . *New York State Library.
BALTIMORE, . . *Johns-Hopkins University Library.
Boston, : . *American Academy of Arts and Sciences.
Do. : . *Society of Natural History.
BROOKVILLE, IND., *Brookville Society of Natural History.
CALIFORNIA, . . University of California.
CAMBRIDGE, Mass, *Harvard University Library.
Do. *Museum of Comparative Zoology.
CHICAGO, : . *Academy of Sciences.
CINCINNATI, . . *Society of Natural History.
NEWHAVEN, Conn., “Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences,
Do. Yale College Library.
New YorK, . . *New York Academy of Sciences.
PHILADELPHIA, . *Academy of Natural Sciences.
Do. . *Wagner Free Institute.
San Francisco, . *California Academy of Sciences.
St Louis, ; . *Academy of Sciences.
WASHINGTON, . *Smithsonian Institute.
Do. e . *Philosophical Society.
Do. ; . *United States National Museum.
Do. ; . *United States Geological Survey.
Do. ‘ . *United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries,
WISCONSIN, . . *Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters.
MEXICO.
Niexacs { *Ministerio de Fomento de la Republica, Osservatorio
; Meteorologico.
ie ; : { *Sociedad Cientifica, ‘‘Antonio Alzate,” Osservatorio Mete-
orologico Central.
CANADA.
HAMILTON, . . *The Hamilton Association.

KINGSTON, . . *Queen’s University.

Inst of Societies, ete. 425

MANITOBA, . . *Historical and Scientific Society, Winnipeg.
MONTREAL, . . *The Natural History Society.
OTTAWA, , . *Canadian Geological Survey.
Do. ; . *Royal Society of Canada.
TORONTO, ‘ . *The Canadian Institute.

Nova Scoria.

HALIFAX, : . Nova Scotia Institute of Natural Science.

BRAZIL.
RIO DE JANEIRO, . Museu Nacional.

AFRICA.
CaPE Town, . . *South African Philosophical Society.

ASTA.
BATAVIA, ; { “Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch
Indie.

CALCUTTA, . . Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal.

TOKIO, JAPAN, . *Imperial University of Japan.

AUSTRALASIA.
ADELAIDE, . . *Royal Society of South Australia.
MELBOURNE, . . *Royal Society of Victoria.
SYDNEY, : . *Royal Society of New South Wales.
Do. : . *The Australian Museum.
ie. ; . *Linnean Society of New South Wales.

WELLINGTON, . *New Zealand Institute.

;

i vicina vk
Mh), . i vioistth Bret »
eS !

he bi ic?
Wik iss 4 Widpanka
i : , si Tip Peay a ”
ano fs Lita tt Worl keu® Wii He okt
‘ Seay

JieAatt

LIST OF FELLOWS
At 31st October 1906.

Those marked * are Life Members.

Date of

Election.

1905. Agar, W. E., B.A., 10 Caird Drive, Glasgow.

1905. Anderson, T. J., B.Se., College of Agriculture and Horticulture,
Holmes Chapel, Cheshire.

1901. Annandale, Nelson, B.A., D.Sc., The Museum, Calcutta.

1884. Armitage, J. A., B.A., 58 Waterloo Road South, Wolverhampton.

1902. *Ashworth, J. H., D.Sc. Natural History Department, University.

1904. Bailey, Edward B., B.A., H.M. Geological Survey, 28 Jermyn
Street, London.

1885. Barbour, A. H. F., M.A., B.Se., M.D., 4 Charlotte Square.

1904. Beare, Professor T. Eadsow BA.) B: Se., M.I.C.E., University.

1880. *Beddard, Frank E., M.A., F.R.S. Dosloneal Gindeng: Londen,

1897. Berry, Professor R. Jy A. M.D., The University, Melbourne.

1881. *Berry, W., Tayfield, Newport, Fife.

1898. Bisset, James, M.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., 9 Greenhill Park.

1902. Black, J. Wyclif, F.C.S., 20 Mardale Crescent.

1903. Bles, Edward J., B.Sc., Natural History Laboratory, University,
Glasgow.

1906. *Bowhill, Jas. Wm., B.A., Morelands, Grange Loan.

1892. Bowhill, Thomas, F.R.C.V.S., The Drostdy, Graham’s Town, Cape
Colony.

1893. *Bradley, O. Charnock, M.B., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Royal Veterinary
College—Secretary.

1876. Brown, J. A. Harvie-, F.Z.S., F.R.S.E., Dunipace House, Larbert,
N.B.

1891. Brown, Richard, C.A., 23 St Andrew Square.

1904. Brown, R. N. Rudmose, B.Sc., 52 Beaconsfield Place, Aberdeen.

1876. *Bruce, W. P., Kinleith Mill, Currie.

1894. Bruce, W. S., F.R.S.E., F.R.S.G.S., Scottish Oceanographical
Laboratory, Surgeons’ Hall.

1906. Bryden, H. B., 16 Frederick Street.

1885. Burt, Robert F.,M.B.,124Stroud Green Road, Finsbury Park, London,N,

1902. Cameron, John, M.D., D.Sc., M.R.C.S.Eng., Anatomy Department,
The Victoria University, Manchester.

1893. Campbell, Kenneth Findlater, C.E., Hon.M.Inst.C.E., M.S.I., Town
Hall, Huddersfield.

1892. Carlier, Professor Edmond W. Wace, B.Sc., M.D., University,

Birmingham.
1876. *Carmichael, Sir T. D. Gibson, Malleny, Balerno, Midlothian,

428 List of Fellows.

Date of
Election.

1858. Carruthers, W., F.R.S., 14 Vermont Road, Norwood, London, S.E.

1888. Clarke, Wm. Eagle, F.L.S., F.R.S.E., Royal Scottish Museum.

1895. *Clough, C. T., M.A., H.M. Geological Survey, 33 George Square.

1893. Coates, H., F.R.S.E., Pitcullen House, Perth.

1881. Cook, C., W.S., 11 Belgrave Crescent.

1887. *Corke, H. C., F.R.S., 178 High Street, Southampton.

1902. Cowan, Francis, C.A., Westerlea, Murrayfield.

1897. Craig, EK. H. Cunningham, B.A., F.G.8., Port of Spain, Trinidad. -

1900. “Crampton, Cecil B., M.B., C.M., H.M. Geological Survey, 33 George
Square.

1897. *Crawford, Francis C., 19 Royal Terrace.

1898. Crawford, John, M.B., C.M.

1874. Crawford, W. C., M.A., 1 Lockharton Gardens, Colinton Road.

1904. Cunningham, Professor D. J., M.D., D.Sc., D.C.L., LL.D., F.B.S.,
University.

1877. *Dalgleish, J. J., Brankston Grange, Bogside Station, Stirling.

1899. Davis, W. Richard, M.R.C.V.S., The Hermitage, Tonby Hill, Enfield.

1894. Day, T. Cuthbert, F.C.S., 36 Hillside Crescent.

1893. Donald, Charles W., M.D., F.R.C.S.E., 28 Portland Square, Carlisle.

1895. Douglas, William, 9 Castle Street.

1880. Drummond, W., S8.8.C., 4 Learmonth Terrace.

1864. *Duns, Professor, D.D., F.R.S.E., 14 Greenhill Place.

1902. Dunstan, John, M.R.C.V.S., F.R.S.E., Liskeard, Cornwall.

1888. Edington, Alexander, M.B., C.M., c/o Lennox Ld., Durban, Natal;
or 20 Kilmaurs Road.

1908. Edmunds, Arthur C., 10 Bright’s Crescent.

1889. Elsworth, R. C., M.D., F.R.C.S.Eng., St Helen’s Road, Swansea.

1880. *Evans, Wm., F.F.A., F.R.S.E., 38 Morningside Park.

1888. Ewart, Professor J. Cossar, M.D., F.R.S., University.

1901. Falconer, J. D., B.Se., Lokoja, N. Nigeria.

1902. Farquharson, David A., M.B.,C.M., Norwood, Canaan Lane.

1884. *Ferguson, James A. E., M.B., Eccles, East Bank, Demerara, British
Guiana.

1885. Ferguson, James Haig, M.D., F.R.C.P.E., 7 Coates Crescent.

1895. Flett, John Smith, M.B., D.Sc., Museum of Practical Geology,
Jermyn Street, London; or Inchmahone, Sutton, Surrey.

1880. Glover, J., S.S.C., 1 Hill Street.

1899. Godfrey, Robert, M.A., 46 Cumberland Street.

1877. Grieve, S., 21 Queen’s Crescent.

1886. Grieve, Symington, 11 Lauder Road.

1893. Grimshaw, Percy H., F.E.S., Royal Scottish Museum.

1893. *Guppy, H.B., M.B., F.R.S.E., E.M.A., Pearl Harbour, Sandwich
Islands.

1899. Hay, Wm. Peach, M.B., C.M., Lincoln Road, Peterborough.

1905. Henderson, D. W., M.A., 24 North Fort Street, Leith.

1883. Henderson, Professor, M.B., F.L.S.

1883. Hepburn, Professor David, M.D., University College, Cardiff.

1899. Heslop, Charles, Lothian Vale, Holyrood,

List of Fellows. 429

Date of

Election.

1884, Hinxman, Lionel W., B.A., F.R.S.E., H.M. Geological Survey,
33 George Square.

1878. Horne, J., F.G.S., LL.D., F.R.S., H.M. Geological Survey, 33 George
Square.

1883. Hoyle, W. E., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., The Victoria University,
Manchester.

1904. Ingram, B., L.R.C.P. & S.E., Australasian Club.

1903.
1895.

1898.

1894.

Jamieson, E. B., M.D., Anatomy Department, University.

*Johnston, Surgeon-Major Henry Halcro, D.Sc., M.D., F.L.S., Ophir
House, Kirkwall, Orkney.

Johnston, T. Nicol, M.B., C.M., Corstorphine House, Corstorphine—
Librarian.

Johnstone, Lieut. George, R.N.R., F.R.S.G.S., British India Steam
Navigation Co., 16 Strand Road, Calcutta.

1869. *Kennedy, Rev. J., M.A., B.D., 9 Hartington Place.

1892. Kerr, Professor J. Graham, M.A., F.R.S.E., University, Glasgow.
1905. Kerr, John, Sunnybrae, Corstorphine.

1878. Kidston, Robert, F.G.S., F.R.S.E., 12 Clarendon Place, Stirling.

1904.
1898.
1902.
1903.
1886.
1861.

Kinnear, Norman B., Mem. Brit. Orn. Union, 12 Grosvenor Crescent.
Lee, O. A. J., 58 Manor Place.

*Leigh, J. Hamilton, F.L.S., F.Z.S., Matchams Park, Ringwood, Hants,
Leighton, Gerald R., M.D., F.R.S.E., 51 East Trinity Road.

Lisle, George, C.A., F.F.A., 5 N. St David Street.

Logan, A., Register House.

1886. M‘Cracken, Professor, Crewe.

1882. *M‘Donald, L. M., Skaebost, Skye.

1896. *MacDougall, R. Stewart, M.A., D.Sc., 13 Archibald Place.
1900. M/‘Gillivray, W. L., Eoligary, Barra.

1893. Mackay, Alexander, Bank of Scotland, Thurso.

1904. Mackie, N. Alex., 13 Barnton Terrace.

1878.
1886.

1901.

1906.

Maclauchlan, J., Albert Institute, Dundee.

MacWatt, Major R. C., M.A., M.B., c/o Messrs Henry S. King and
Co., 9 Pall Mall, London.

Marshall, F. H. A., B.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., Physiological Labora-
tory, University.

Marshall, James R., Rachan, Broughton, Peeblesshire.

1903. Middleton, W. A., C.A., 5 N. St David Street— Treasurer.
1889. *Millar, Robert C., C.A., 30 York Place.
1898. Miller, Hugh, F.Z.S., Zoological Laboratory, 21 Hill Place.
1903. Morrison, J. Melrose, Church Hill, Duddingston.
1898. Morton, Alexander, B.A., B.Sc., 17 Lutton Place.
1898. Morton, Kenneth J., F.E.S., 13 Blackford Road.
- 1890. Mossman, R. C., F.R.Met.S., F.R.S.E., 10 Blacket Place.
1905. Muff, H. B., B.A., F.G.S., The Red House, Bexley Heath, Kent.
1895. Munro, Robert, M.A., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.S.A.(Scot.),

1874.
1905.

48 Manor Place.
Murray, D. R., M.B., C.M., 41 Albany Street, Leith.
Murray, James, Ardoch, Nerston, East Kilbride,

430 List of Fellows.

Date of
Election.

1877. Murray, Sir John,. K.C_B., Ph.D., GL:D., -F.5/8 Rise
Challenger Lodge, Wardie.

1889. Musgrove, Professor James, M.D., University, St Andrews.

1904. Nash, J. Kirke, L.D.S., 6 Inverleith Row.

1887. Norman, Rey. Canon, M.A., D.C.L., The Red House, Berkhamstead,
Herts.

1870. Peach, B. N., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S., 72 Grange Loan.

1891. Pentland, Young J., 5 Bruntsfield Terrace.

1904. Pirie, J. H. Harvey, B.Sc., M.B., Ch.B., 13 Alva Street.

1889. Purvis, G. Carrington, B.Sc., M.D., Bacteriological Institute,
Graham’s Town, Cape Colony.

1885. Raeburn, Harold, Raeburn’s Brewery, Duddingston.

1881. *Ramsay, Lieut.-Col. Wardlaw, Whitehill, Rosewell, Midlothian.

1904. Rattallack, Cyrus, F.R.C.S.E., c/o Union Bank of Australia, Collin
Street, Melbourne.

1861. *Robertson, T., c/o J. Nisbet & Co., 21 Berners Street, London, W.

1894. Roebuck, W. Denison, F.L.S., 259 Hyde Park Road, Leeds.

1900. Schifer, Professor E, A., F.R.S., University.

1889. Scott, Thomas, LL.D., F.L.S., 280 Victoria Road, Aberdeen.

1902. Simpson, Professor J. Y., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., 52 Queen Street.

1886. *Somerville, Professor Wm., M.A., B.Sc, F.R.S.E., F.L.S.,
121 Banbury Road, Oxford.

1880. Sprague, T. Bond, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E., 29 Buckingham Terrace.

1899. Stenhouse, Andrew G., 191 Newhaven Road, Leith.

1882. Stewart, R., 8.S.C., 137 George Street.

1900. *Tait, David, H.M. Geological Survey, 33 George Square.

1894. Taylor, William, Lhanbryde, Elgin.

1893. Terras, James A., B.Se., 40 Findhorn Place.

1887. Thomson, Professor J. Arthur, M.A., F.R.S.E., University, Aberdeen.

1876. *Thomson, John.

1885. Tomlinson, Henry T., M.B., C.M., Coton Road, Nuneaton.

1859. Traquair, R. H., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., The Bush, Colinton.

1905. Troup, R. D. R., 5 Roseneath Street.

1858. *Turner, Sit!’ Wm., K.C.B., M.B., D:Sc., D:¢.L., (LE Deaihanese
6 Eton Terrace.

1905. Vickers, H. Maxwell, 21 Marchmont Road.

1901. Waddell, James Alexander, of Leadloch, 12 Kew Terrace, Glasgow.

1882. Wallace, Professor R., University.

1898. Waterston, David, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.S.E., F.R.S.E., Anatomy
Department, University.

1894. Whitaker, J. Ryland, B.A., M.B., L.R.C.P.E., Anatomy Depart-
ment, Surgeons’ Hall.

1884. White, J. Martin, of Balruddery, Dundee; 1 Cumberland Place,
Regent’s Park, London.

1890. Williams, John Robert, M.B., C.M., Ardre, Penmaenmawr.

1895. *Wilson, Professor Gregg, Ph.D., D.Sc., Queen’s College, Belfast.

1883. *Woodhead, Professor G. Sims, M.D., F.R.S.E., University, Cambridge.

1905. Worthington, Nigel K., 5 Wester Coates Gardens.

1896. Yeoman, John B., M.B., C.M., Neston, Cheshire,

Date of

List of Fellows. 431

CORRESPONDING.

Election,

1875.

1858.
1870.
D871.
1852.
1874.
1874.
1885.
Tost,

1885.

1867.

1857,
1865.
1857.
1883.
1895.

1857.
1857.
1857.
1888,
1893.
1857.
1888.

Andrew, Rev. J., Newbury, Fifeshire.

Coughtrey, Professor Millen, D., University of Otago, New
Zealand, ‘

Duncan, Rev. J., Denholm.

Fraser, Rev. Samuel, Melbourne.

Grieve, A. F., Brisbane, Queensland.

Howden, J. C., M.D., Montrose.

Joass, Rev, J. M., LL.D., Golspie.

Jolly, William.

Lindstrom, Professor Gustav, Stockholm.

Macdonald, John, 8.S.C., 19 York Place, Edinburgh.

Mushet, David, Gloucester.

Nathorst, Professor A. G., Surveyor-General, Geological Survey of
Sweden, Stockholm.

Robb, Rev. Alexander, Old Calabar.

HONORARY.

Chevrolat, Auguste, Paris.

Colloredo-Mannsfeldt, Prince, Vienna.

Dohrn, C. A., Zoological Station, Naples.

Geikie, Sir Archibald (Ord. Fellow 1878), London, Olim Preeses.

Geikie, Professor James, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., University,
Edinburgh. A

Gerstaecker, A., Greifswald.

Javet, Charles, Paris.

Kraatz, G., Berlin.

Lankester, Professor E. Ray, F.R.S., British Museum, London.

Lapworth, Professor, F.R.S., Birmingham.

Obert, M., St Petersburg.

Vines, Sydney H., M.A., F.R.S., Christ’s College, Cambridge.

Fellows are requested to intimate change of Address to
Dr O. CHARNOCK BRADLEY, Secretary,
RoyaL VETERINARY COLLEGE, EDINBURGH.

VOL. XVI. 2P

0 egietinostiaange

ee re
a a 7 ‘

Rute ete £ sn 9 ‘Ti

wt end hy piiesycnU Cie tah ‘atigantert TL,

ASE f
Put ea ath bt hE pt ee
brielade ng fth es pits,
Seeniivele.. UME Ore

“SEs i Wy

, ’ 4 d ey
5 (ERLE TL ShS OAD Edy oli >?

trT sh a Te a tie P yu 9 ,ftas 7 | hie 4

4
x (i se ae
JietedR not ms rath Pee | ne 7
‘ v4 0

ye

Mii! 1 a
fee yer. Eauieaenl bi Perea raf) aa Teh
4 2 a Rae

ik

; fe

= tit t ORR
, 5
Am '
* 7 ‘ ’ ? )
° Av 4 7 a t 7 a
i .
i a dy * Lig Ret
abta't eo) lta
onitte
sit 4 : ’ u H ‘
ste ' syi4
witli fod
2 ' 3 be < OE ss A De ek
OY, cays iy Re WO Deis OLDS Mi he OF) PORN
wena: Cy Keel hi Lt OZ. eb Bike Rag? ER
AMO! Vor (UR eth eae ae
ts
t 3

TE

INDEX.

Adaptive Characters, A Possible
Mode of Inheritance of, 62.
Additions to the List of Spiders from
the Edinburgh District, 27.
Antarctic Siphonophora, The Gono-
styles ot two, 19.

Antarctic Siphonophore, Tentacles
of an,.25,

Antipatharians, Report on _ the
**Scotia’”’ Collection of, 76.

Bass, The Black-backs of, 42.

Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area,
215.

Black-backs of the Bass, 42.

Blood-inhabiting Protozoa, Notes on
Certain, 232.

BraDLEY, O. CHARNOCK, On the
Trapezium (0s multangulum
majus) of the Horse, 9.

CAMPBELL, R., Notes on the Petro-
logy of Gough Island, 263.

Carboniferous (Lower) Fishes of -

Eastern Fifeshire, 80.

Carboniferous Rocks (Scottish), The
Higher Crustacea of the, 230.

CARPENTER, G. H., and Evans, WM.,
Further Additions to the List
of Spiders from the Edinburgh
District, 27.

Catalogue of Land, Fresh-Water,
and Marine Crustacea found in
the Basin of the River Forth
and its Estuary—Part I., 97;
Part Il.; 267.

Characters, A Possible Mode of In-
heritance of Adaptive, 62.

Crampton, C. B., A Possible Mode
of Inheritance of Adaptive Char-
acters, 62.

Crustacea (Higher) of the Scottish
Carboniferous Rocks, 230.

VOL. XVI.

Crustacea (Land, Fresh-Water, and
Marine) found in the Basin of
the River Forth and its Estuary
—Part I, 97; Part II., 267.

Decalopoda australis, Kights, an old
Pycnogonid rediscovered, 35.
Distribution of the Pelagic Organisms

in Scottish Lakes, 51.
Dragon-flies (Odonata) of the Forth
Area, 87.

Edinburgh District, Further Addi-
tions to the List of Spiders
from the, 27.

Embryology of certain Lower Fishes,
and its bearing on Vertebrate
Morphology, 191.

Evans, Wm., Note on Limazx ten-
ellus (Miill.), with Exhibition
of Living Examples from the
‘* Forth” Area, 22.

Evans, Wm., The Black-backs of
the Bass, 42.

Evans, WmM., Mammalia of the
Edinburgh or Forth District:
Supplementary Notes, 387.

Evans, Wm., The Myriapods (Centi-
pedes and Mlillipedes) of the
Forth Area, 405.

Evans, WM., The Odonata (Dragon-
flies) of the Forth Area, 87.
Evans, W., and CARPENTER, G. H.,
Further Additions to the List
of Spiders from the Edinburgh

District, 27.

Falkland Islands, Notes on Fossils
from the, 248.

FippEs, J. D., and THomson, J.
ARTHUR, Note on a Rare Sponge
from the ‘‘Scotia” Collections,
231.

2Q

454

Fifeshire (Eastern), Notes on the
Lower Carboniferous Fishes of,
80.

Fishes, Embryology of Certain Lower,
91

Fishes of Eastern Fifeshire, Notes on
the Lower Carboniferous, 80.
Forth Area, Bdelloid Rotifera of the,

215.

Forth Area, Limax tenellus (Mill.)
from the, 22.

Forth Area, The Myriapods (Centi-
pedes ‘and Millipedes) of the,
405.

Forth Area, The Odonata (Dragon-
flies) of the, 87.

Forth or Edinburgh District, Mam-
malia of the, 387.

Forth (River and Estuary), Land,
Fresh-Water, and Marine Crus-
tacea found in the Basin of—
Part 4.,'97 3 Part 11.5/267-

Fossils from the Falkland Islands
brought home by the Scottish
National Antarctic Expedition
in 1904, 248.

Further Additions to the List of
Spiders from the Edinburgh
District, 27.

Gonostyles of two Antarctic Siphon-
ophora, 19.

Gough Island, A Note on the
Geology of, 258.

Gough Island, Notes on the Petro-
logy of, 263,

Higher Crustacea of the Scottish
Carboniferous Rocks, 230.

Hopeson, T. V., On Decalopoda
austr alis, Eights, An Old Pycno-
gonid rediscovered, 35.

Horse, On the Trapezium (os mult-
angulum majus) of, 9.

Inheritance of Adaptive Characters,
A Possible Mode of, 62.

Kerr, J. GRAHAM, Embryology of
Certain Lower Fishes, and its
bearing on Vertebrate Morpho-
logy, 191.

LEIGHTON, G., Morphological Varia-
tions in Vipera berus, 1.

Limax tenellus (Mill.) from the
‘* Forth” Area, 22,

Lower Carboniferous Fishesof Eastern
Fifeshire, 80.

Mammalia of the Edinburgh or Forth
District, 387.

Index.

| Mode of Inheritance of Adaptive

Characters, A Possible, 62.

Morphological Variations in Vipera
berus, 1.

Morphology (Vertebrate), Embryo-
logy of Certain Lower Fishes,
and its Bearing on, 191.

Murray, J., On the Distribution of
the Pelagic Organisms in Scottish
Lakes, 51.

Murray, J., The Bdelloid Rotifera
of the Forth Area, 215.

Myriapods (Centipedes and Milli-
pedes) of the Forth Area, 405.

Newton, E. T., Notes on Fossils
from the Falkland Islands
brought home by the Scottish
National Antarctic Expedition
in 1904, 248.

Note on Limaz tenellus (Mill.), with
Exhibition of Living Examples
from the ‘‘ Forth” Area, 22.

Odonata (Dragon-flies) of the Forth

Area, 87.
Organisms (Pelagic) in Scottish
Lakes, On the Distribution of,

51.

Prac, B. N., The Higher Crustacea
of the Scottish Carboniferous
Rocks, 230.

Pelagic Organisms in Scottish Lakes,
On the Distribution of, 51.

Petr aces et of Gough Island, Notes on
the, 26

PIRIE, J. 4 Harvey, A Note on
the Geology of Gough Island, 258.

Protozoa, Notes on certain Blood-
Inhabiting, 232.

Pyenogonid (Decalopoda australis,

Eights) rediscovered, An Old, 35.

RENNIE, J., On the Tentacles of an
Antarctic Siphonophore, 25.
ROBERTSON, MURIEL, Notes on cer-
tain Blood-Inhabiting Protozoa,
232.

Rotifera (Bdelloid) of the Forth Area,
Bilas

“‘Scotia”’ Collections.—Note on the
Gonostyles of two Antarctic
Siphonophora, 19.

‘‘Scotia” Collections.—On the Ten-
tacles of an Antarctic Siphono-

hore, 25.

“Scotia” Collections.—On Decalo-
poda australis, Kights, An Old
Pyecnogonid rediscovered, 35.

Index.

‘Scotia’ Collections.—Report on
the Antipatharians, 76.

‘*Scotia” Collections, Note on a
Rare Sponge from the, 231.

‘*Scotia”’ Collections.—Notes on
Fossils from the Falkland
Islands, 248.

“‘Scotia” Collections.—A Note on
the Geology of Gough Island, 258.

** Scotia” Collections —Notes on the
Petrology of Gough Island, 263.

Scott, THomas, A Catalogue of
Land, Fresh-Water, and Marine
Crustacea found in the Basin of
the River Forth and its Estuary
—Part I. Malacostraca, Clado-
cera, and Branchiura, 97;
Part II. Ostracoda, Copepoda,
and Cirripedia, 267.

Scottish Carboniferous Rocks, The
Higher Crustacea of the, 230.

Scottish Lakes, On the Distribution
of the Pelagic Organisms in, 51.

Siphonophora, Note on the Gono-
styles of two Antarctic, 19.

Siphonophore, Tentacles of an Ant-
arctic, 25. ;

Spiders from the Edinburgh District,
Further Additions to the List
of, 27.

435

Sponge (Rare) from the ‘‘Scotia”’
Collections, 231.

Tentacles of an Antarctic Siphono-
phore, 25.

Tuomson, J. ARTHUR, Note on the
Gonostyles of two Antarctic
Siphonophora, 19.

Tuomson, J. ARTHUR, Report on the
Antipathariaus of the ‘‘ Scotia”
Collections, 76.

THomson, J. ARTHUR, and FIDDEs,
J. D., Note on a Rare Sponge
from the ‘‘Scotia”’ Collections,
231.

Trapezium (os multangulum nvajus)
of the Horse, 9.

Traquair, R. H., Notes on the
Lower Carboniferous Fishes of
Eastern Fifeshire, 80.

Variations (Morphological) in Vipera
berus, 1.

Vertebrate Morphology, Embryology
of certain Lower Fishes, and its
Bearing on, 191.

Vipera berus, Morphological Varia-
tions in, 1.

M‘Farlane & Erskine, Printers, Edinburgh.

oo Fae af
ei btagt 3

eri Beany4
aM, re

ie , Srl ee
hi : d at Aes. ( + as Wire

A Hi

»&, ¥'S

Ad vetsveyes Rerer ys neh mh ty

ih ahi

i

é is fo) rye
i i "% } aa taut:
ree hae
oe ety Bg cs ie Pa a 1 cite sie Sota
4 se es “eS,
VCs tS Ae RU Gee Port ie iPad tive)
Pa} ae é ta iin
F . pay} Vl fee '
nt. TT i NT Ae. eg Aa ae E
° hd F ’
P Te tos ud maT)” P re vi
way beteien!d Matt
a) uf ‘ j ae
269 hal SU eo! Oc) ae We, 4 i
: ae: i
: are.
¥ < 4
ih by
f s ; ‘ nL vy
J
a ‘
aN he: AM Ts S072 CANE
i P
ay 4 i,
or + Led v .
: t PEER
r 7 s
4 Lvs | SE ‘ es :
yx :
‘ ‘
¥, Pes ‘ ites ¥ :
. 7
‘y ~ 7
baile .
- ¥ a
‘
z 3
.
|
ry
'
— i
‘
x
cy ik * Leet a Vannes

a

. asste! na ‘ ie
ae Wis

. = ee
grr eee eeRD IN

ing alent

; a ee Nii a}
‘euro (aero)

ryan it ¢
V4 tite: VP aw
a tah
‘Loe omen iE
THe

| bee: 1

f. 42 Alyey ty Bie
Battie? et) uF
Pe Theor) geectaaae :
pt ’ 2 als”
© Posh Rs i 4.

‘=

pe tes

Pr yy i ie
Yi

5

°
!

.

L 9° chen sae

PRICE OF THE “PROCEEDINGS.”
(Continued from page 2 of Cover.)

To the Fellows. To the Public.

Vol. XV. Part 1 (1901-1902), Le Sh 306 5/
Do. Part 2 (1902-1904), eM 5/

Vol AVI. No. 1 (Pages 1-24). : 1/ is}
Do. No. 2 (Pages 25-48), . : 1/6 zy
Do. No, 3 (Pages 49-96), . A 2/ 2/6
Do. No, 4 (Pages 97-190), . Be 26 3/6
Do No. 5 (Pages 191-230), . ; 2/ 2/6
Do. No 6 (Pages 231-266), . nae 2/6
Do. No. 7 (Pages 267-386), . : 3/ 4/
Do. No, 8 (Pages 387-435), . 2/ 2/6

Vol. XVII. No. 1 (Pages 1-64). In the Press.
Do. No. 2 (Pages 65-80), . : 1/6 2/

The following may also be had of the Librarian :

Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, Vol. VL., : ae
Do. do. Wolk VEE -Part. tf) ) Sebi

Forms of Application for Fellowship mau be had from the Secretary.
Entrance Fee, : : é : 10/6
Annual Subscription, : . 12/6

PLATE Lf.

Vol. XV. Ftoyal Physical Soctely, Edinburgh.

y
og inne ae /O p
f ike OF
wey
2p BD) yt Y y
ANA 4
ers
BND :
q Te
a ‘
if }

Gls

ih
iW
4
i}

LF

TO ILLUSTRATE PROF. THOMSON'S PAPER ON GONOSTYLES.

Sr

“yap auwoqpy Ser

OBESE Ata pba auanig hav RASA te
3

L out

yornquap ry fya170" qooshy 7 qwhoy | avid

eee ESRENS Cees sehr Sy se Cn@ al ORR era G)

sOIPY PIT] auujsay y areze ys W

ybunquapy tiga pooshy 7 qehoay TAX 2A

“YI aLV itd

iS rey omope ll
Vol. XVI. Royal Physical Soctety, Edinburgh,

Fig. 1.

MANDIBLE. ~x 6

PROBOSCIS FROM BIGHT SIDE == 4

OVIGEROUS LEG, DISTAL EXTREMITY. x 6

MtFarlane & Erskine, lith Edin®

SARI ae TIT

Sra pr

Plate

Royal Physical Society, Edinburgh .Vol. XVI.

P
Mintern Bros.imp. London.

J.Green in la

7

a

HH Traquair
reen .

G

Prats VI.
Vol. XVI. toyal Physical Society, Edinburgh .

L. Vennachar

Ge
— Aberfoyle

L. Mertecth Ele

a-Ferth

CLACKMANNAN

Y AY a7,
\ \ no G ern 4,
\ Oks, gtk Llackmn
fi) g. ad Part of PERTH

STIRLING
_ fi, *

Inver) githing ge
I

)
L. Cou/ter

3 ° I.

a? nsterry sick I, 0

eet ay “gin yak ave
Smt! EK Cre 8 “ney
eye’ 0 Or Ae

Uy

EDINBURG, M
os Wa

palern?* \\\ ?

i
EDINBURG YZ

Penicuix So
8Martield L.

DHADDINGTON

LINLITHGOW HADDINGTQ

q
Dalkeith
y

mui"

SCALE — 10 MILES TO AN INCH

° 5 10
= |_}.__-1. _ ae >

ae Line Showing Boundary

M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith, Edin®

SwxetcH-Map SHOWING THE LIMITS OF THE Basin oF THE River ForTH AND 1TS ESTUARY.

PLuaTteE VIL

Royal Physical Society, Edinburgh.

Vol. XVI.

MiFarlane &Erskne, Lith Edit

2 CALLIDINA MICROCEPHALA, nsp.

1. PHILODINA. BREVIPES ? variety.

Pirate Vill.
Royal Physical Soctety, Edinburgh.

TRYPANOSOMA BRUCEI.

PLATE IX
Vol. XV/ Royal Physical Socte lif, Ldinburgh.

Be Oe PS ee e D Pian ANTE TiS
HAEMOGREGARINE FROM PLEURONECTIDS

Meda te nas eon ane eee eee =

AA aka ws So = <s—ennemns

‘ybunquipy ‘hyevoog pooshyg pohory Tate 10
cS TCI las [eae

‘SGNVIST GNVINIVAY WOU Vda0dOIHOVUG

iy

Ai
tae ft

i i
ae

Wu

Date Due

Lan

wee

AS ap UNA TAN UNRT ee : Be HP AHL Ree “ . : bh AARP: MAIC SOR he ae ¢ “2 oF “yg ; . K 2

oud oy ee at oe
ee lt EMER EE ERA haha

piaasebe asad weather linn we n= oe

ae ips, » Sa oth a chit
ae RWS e shy wat